Syrian warplanes strike Lebanon border – reports

0

Published time: March 18, 2013 14:04

A Syrian army fighter jet (AFP Photo/Bulent Kilic)

Syrian planes have bombed a Lebanese border town in eastern Bekaa Valley, the first such attack during the country’s ongoing crisis, according to a Lebanese army source.

The warplanes entered 1 kilometer into Lebanese airspace and struck the town of Kerbet Younan in the Wadi al-Khayl region of Arsal, Al Jazeera reported, citing military sources.

Lebanese Broadcasting Corporation International (LBCI TV) has reported that a Syrian helicopter fired a missile strike in the Wadi al-Kheil area in Arsal’s barren mountains.

No injuries were reported.

The airstrike comes less than a week after Syria threatened to attack Lebanese territory if “terrorist gangs” continue to infiltrate the country. On Thursday, Syria submitted a letter of protest to Lebanese authorities, complaining of “violations of the neighboring country’s territory on the border.”

Big Brother Knows How You’re Feeling

0

RINF Alternative News

shore688

A company that develops crowd control weapons for the military and law enforcement personnel have now created an advanced ‘Minority Report’ style facial – and emotion – recognition system.

The Fraunhofer Institute which receives over 70% of its funding from government bodies, have developed technology that they are calling a Sophisticated High-speed Object Recognition Engine (SHORE).

The system can recognise faces with 91.5% accuracy, determine gender with 94.3% accuracy and estimate age with a mean absolute error of 6.85 years, all in realtime.

It can also recognise emotions and tell if a person is happy, surprised, angry or sad.

According to the Fraunhofer Institute:

The technology also offers short term memory for the recognition of faces that works fully anonymously: persons, who were out of the camera’s field of vision short term, can be recognized and recollected. The data collected can be summarized and assessed.

The software can also be used on mobile devices, and while it’s currently being introduced under the guise of advancing ‘marketing and advertising”, how long will it be before civilians come under suspicion for feeling the “wrong” way.

Could Labour Ditch Trident?

0

Labour are “open” to cheaper alternatives for the Trident nuclear deterrent but have stopped short of committing to ditch their long-standing commitment for a like-for-like replacement.

Earlier on Monday morning, the Financial Times reported senior Labour advisers and MPs had indicated the Labour leader, Ed Miliband, was backing the shift in position.

Labour sources later clarified their position. Speaking to DefenceManagement, a spokesperson said: “The idea that Labour is moving away from Trident is false.

labour trident

Trident has been the UK’s nuclear deterrent since 1994

“[Labour] will not compromise on having a credible nuclear deterrent.”


Kevan Jones MP

BBC News – Labour ‘open’ to cheaper Trident alternatives am leading review, no conclusions reached yet.

Tonly Blair committed the Labour Party to a like-for-like replacement back in 2006, a stance which has remained since.

LIKE HUFFPOST UK POLITICS ON FACEBOOK | FOLLOW US ON TWITTER

Labour’s position on the issue is especially pertinent as a final decision on the future of the deterrent is not due until 2016, a year after the next general election.

A Labour election victory would give them power of veto over any decisions made before then.


Jim Murphy

Re FT today. Labour will retain credible independent nuclear deterrent.Wl judge policy on capability and cost. Plus strong multilateralism.

Labour is far from united on the issue.

Des Browne, former Labour defence secretary said the deterrent places should be reconsidered “given the range of challenges before us and the limited resources at our disposal”.

Conversely, Labour Lord West said Trident is “too important to get wrong“.

Trident currently operates with four Vanguard-class submarines. A like-for-like replacement will cost around £25bilion and is the stated preference of the Conservatives.

Other options could involve scaling back the size of Trident to three or even just two submarines.

Critics of Trident argue it is not relavent to the geo-political realties currently faced by the UK.

Recent public opinion polls found that 63% would scrap Trident in order to help pay off the deficit and only 22% support a like-for-like replacement.

Cash-strapped Russian oligarch Berezovsky to auction off Warhol portrait

0

Published time: March 18, 2013 13:24

Image from www.wikipaintings.org

Russian billionaire Boris Berezovsky is trying to recoup losses incurred during his legal defeat against former partner Roman Abramovich: The exiled Russian oligarch is auctioning off an Andy Warhol portrait of Soviet leader Vladimir Lenin.

The 67-year-old tycoon is selling his limited-edition ‘Red Lenin’ print in hopes of paying off creditors and legal bills, the Times reported. The 1987 portrait by the Pop Art pioneer has been estimated by Christie’s to be worth between $45,000 and $75,000, and is reportedly in excellent condition. In 2012, works by Warhol topped auction sales, fetching a total of $380.3 million, beating long-time world record-holder Picasso.

In August, Berezovsky lost a $5.6-billion court battle against Abramovich in a highly publicized dispute over the ownership of the profitable oil company Sibneft. The case left his reputation in tatters, with the judge presiding over the case describing Berezovsky as an “unimpressive” and “inherently unreliable witness,” who was “deliberately dishonest” and viewed “truth as a transitory, flexible concept.”

He was further ordered to pay Abramovich’s $56 million in legal costs.

Earlier this year, Berezovsky’s legal and financial troubles continued to loom large after his ex-lover claimed her partner of 20 years owed her $8 million in compensation over the sale of their $40 million residence in Surrey.

Elena Gorbunova also secured an asset-freeze on two luxury properties Berezovsky was allegedly trying to sell in France which, she maintained, were promised to her. The freeze, which was initially reported to be for $200 million but later reduced by the judge, will remain in place until the matter is settled in court.

A Russian court sentenced Berezovsky in absentia for embezzling $2 billion from two major state companies, as well as for fraud and money-laundering.

Moscow has repeatedly requested his extradition; British authorities have not complied.

Gitmo press agent denies abuses amid ongoing hunger strike

0

Published time: March 18, 2013 13:17

U.S. Navy guards walk inside fencing of Camp VI, the maximum security detention facility for terrorism suspects at the U.S. Naval Base at Guantanamo Bay, Cuba (Reuters/Randall Mikkelsen)

Despite a long history of reported human rights abuses at Guantanamo prison, which both the UN and US President Barack Obama denounced as torture, the prison’s Director of Public Affairs Captain Robert Durand has denied any wrongdoing.

“We will continue to carry out our mission to provide a safe and humane environment,” he said.

Earlier this month, Joint Task Force Guantanamo (JTF-GTMO) denied the existence of an ongoing hunger strike at the facility. Durand called detainee allegations of mistreatment, “outright falsehoods and gross exaggerations,” implying that the protest was insignificant compared to one that took place in 2006. He also claimed that detainees had fabricated incidents of misconduct.

“If the definition of a hunger striker is entirely in their control and is a matter of their discretion, then I think that explains how they are able to say that there are no more than a handful of men on hunger strike,” Pardiss Kebriaei of the Center for Constitutional Rights (CCR) told RT.  

“While JTF-GTMO continues to deny the existence of a mass hunger strike at Guantánamo, attorneys report that the prisoners’ health is declining rapidly as the hunger strike enters its second month,” CCR said in a statement on Thursday.

Gitmo prisoners have reportedly been on a hunger strike over alleged mistreatment at the hands of prison guards. Some 130 people housed in Camp 6 of Guantanamo Bay are believed to be participating, and a reported two-dozen men have lost consciousness due to their low blood glucose levels from the hunger strike.

The prisoners are protesting against the sacrilegious disrespect displayed towards their religion by the confiscation of Korans, according to detainees and their lawyers. Although Durand has categorically denied “any claims of abuse, desecration or mishandling,” it is unclear how he defined those terms.

Mishandling does not necessarily mean covering the book’s pages in graffiti, burning it or otherwise mutilating it, but rather through a simple act such as touching it without being physically or spiritually clean. Many Muslim scholars assert that non-believers handling the text can also constitute an act of desecration.

“There have been no incidents of mishandling the Quran by guards or translators… JTF-GTMO guards are to avoid touching any detainee’s Quran at any time.”  However, he did not confirm or deny whether detainees religious’ texts were touched by the translators, who have been accused of mishandling them.

Approximately five men have been subjected to force-feeding — a procedure that can be considered a form of ‘cruel or unusual punishment,’ contrary to the Eighth Amendment of the US Constitution and tantamount to torture, according to a UN Human Rights Commission report in 2006. The same report demanded the immediate closure of the offshore prison, and to cease all such “practices amounting to torture.”

Force-feeding involves restraining a detainee by strapping them into a chair, inserting a tube down their throat and into the stomach, often through the nose; Durand confirmed that the five undergoing force-feeding have been subjected to the nostril-tube method.

Durand maintains that the “mission of Joint Task Force Guantanamo is the safe, legal, humane and transparent care and custody of detainees,” adding that JTF-GTMO “takes its duty to treat detainees very humanely and very seriously.”

Amnesty International has said that practices at the camp constitute “gross human rights abuses,” and illegal detention.

 A promise made, a promise broken

In January 2009, shortly after President Obama was inaugurated, he ordered the facility to be closed within a year, and banned certain interrogation methods after the US government admitted to torturing some of the detainees.  

However, in May of that year, the US Senate refused to allow the prison to be closed until the president provided more detail as to what would be done with the prisoners.

In mid-October 2009, Congress voted to allow some Guantanamo detainees to be moved to the United States for prosecution. But at the end of 2010, Congress approved a defense spending bill that forbade Guantanamo detainees from being tried in the US. And in January 2011, President Obama signed a Defense Authorization Bill that ruled out shutting down Guantanamo, and prevented the transfer of prisoners from the camp.

In March 2011, Obama signed an executive order resuming military trials for Guantanamo detainees — a move seen by many as a complete reversal of his previous policy. And in December 2011, the president refused to veto the national defense bill, paving the way for prisoners to be held indefinitely and without charge, and extending the ban on moving them from the prison.

Finally, in July of last year, the Pentagon announced its plans to lay a $40-million fiber-optic cable from Guantanamo Bay to the US mainland, signaling their apparent intent to keep the facility open for the foreseeable future.

In 2004, the US drafted a document attempting to justify the continued imprisonment of the Guantanamo detainees, saying that since the US was engaged in a “real” war against Al-Qaeda, the “law of war therefore applies and allows us to hold enemy combatants without trial or charges until the end of the conflict.”

The UN issued a statement this week that the US is violating international human rights law by holding detainees indefinitely without charges.

RT’s letter from Durand

Classification: UNCLASSIFIED
Caveats: FOUO

Veronica,

Sorry for the delay in response. The statement below is attributable to me, Captain Robert Durand, Director of Public Affairs, Joint Task Force Guantanamo.

The mission of Joint Task Force Guantanamo is the safe, legal, humane and transparent care and custody of detainees. We carry out this mission daily, and we take any allegation of misconduct very seriously.

The recent allegations by detainees that conditions at GTMO have deteriorated are patently false. The JTF takes its duty to treat detainees humanely very seriously and seeks to ensure we conduct ourselves in accordance with the highest standards, and we remain under continual scrutiny, oversight, and inspection.  

Recent detainee allegations about incidents in the camps include outright falsehoods and gross exaggerations. The claims of a mass hunger strike and an incident in which the Quran was mishandled are simply untrue. First, we take extraordinary care to respect the Quran and categorically deny any claims of abuse, desecration or mishandling. The number of detainees refusing all food has increased from six when the first allegation was made to 14 today; this is in comparison to 2006 when we had as many as more than 100 hunger strikers. It certainly is not a widespread phenomenon as alleged. Detainees have colluded among themselves to fabricate incidents and claim misconduct where there has been none. Detainees have acted out individually, recently splashing guards with various bodily fluids and excrement, but there have not been any large-scale incidents. These are coordinated acts specifically designed to attract media attention.

The medical staff continuously monitors and provides outstanding medical care to detainees in our custody. The health and well-being of detainees is their primary mission and they take this duty as seriously as they would a duty to treat our own service members or any patient in their care. The reports of hunger-strike related deteriorating health and detainees losing massive amounts of weight are simply untrue.

Regardless of these most recent allegations, we will continue to carry out our mission to provide a safe and humane environment for the detainees, and ensure the safety of our guard force.

Specifically, regarding the Quran, I can tell you that there have been no incidents of mishandling the Quran by guards or translators.

Per SOP (standard operating procedures), JTF-Guantanamo guards are to avoid touching any detainee’s Quran at any time. The Quran is treated with the utmost respect..

Each detainee has available a personal Quran. Detainees are also provided religious articles, such as prayer mats and beads that are used during the practice of their faith. Prayer times are posted in the camp, and silence is maintained by the guards and staff during prayer times. Understanding the detainees’ religious practices and cultural norms is an essential part of training for all who work with detainees.

Regarding searches, there has been no change to our cell or block search SOPs. We routinely conduct searches for contraband that could be used to harm guards, medical personnel, translators, instructors, attorneys or detainees. Contraband items found can include improvised weapons, communication devices, unauthorized food and medicine, and other items which detainees could utilize to harm themselves or others.

Our search procedures reflect our mission to treat detainees humanely. We respect both their religious and cultural norms with regard to the Quran, personal privacy and physical contact.

Detainees who follow camp rules have access to satellite television, personal DVD players, video games and more than 25,000 books, CDs, movies and TV shows. They also have many comfort items, including materials for crafts and extra food that detainees can store for snacks or treats in between meals.. Allowing these items provides incentives for the detainees to comply with well-established camp rules, but also provides them the opportunity to create and hide contraband.

Detainees who violate camp rules may have privileges suspended as a consequence. This may include moving from a communal block to a single cell, and loss of comfort items. Detainees know the rules, understand the consequences, and can regain their privileges by complying with camp rules. Detainees in single cell confinement have basic issue items for clothing, hygiene and religious observances.

Detainees are never held in solitary confinement. At no time is a detainee deprived of the basic elements of humane treatment: food, water, religious articles, hygiene items, medical treatment, or physical recreation opportunities.

As Nations Gather to Discuss Global Arms Treaty, NRA Goes into Wacko-Mode

0

The United Nations is hosting talks in New York today as more than 150 countries discuss a global arms treaty designed to lessen the illicit gun trade, especially as it intersects with international conflict zones.

The NRA’s Wayne LaPierre lashes out at gun control efforts during his CPAC speech last week. (Photo: Manuel Balce Ceneta/AP) The National Rifle Association, however, is using the opportunity to once again prove that their primary mission is not the altruistic promotion of individual gun rights, but rather to serve the interests of the powerful US gun industry.

In a statement put out ahead of the conference, UN Secretary General Ban Ki-Moon said, “It is our collective responsibility to put an end to the inadequate regulation of the global trade in conventional weapons – from small arms to tanks to combat aircraft.”

Reiterating his support for the Arms Trade Treaty (ATT), Ban said agreement on the pact would “alleviate the plight of the millions of people affected by conflicts and armed violence and enable the United Nations to better carry out its mandate to promote peace, development and human rights around the world.”

Describing the treaty and the nature of the negotiations, Reuters reports:

Diplomats say that if the treaty conference fails to reach the required consensus because the United States, Russia or another major arms producer opposes it, nations can still put the draft treaty to a vote in the U.N. General Assembly.

The other alternative is to amend the draft to make it acceptable to the U.S. and other delegations. But supporters of the treaty fear that could lead to a weak and meaningless pact.

“The U.S. traditionally has an allergy to treaties,” a European diplomat told Reuters. “It might be better to have a good treaty without the U.S. and hope they come around later.”

But as The Guardian’s Karen McVeigh points out:

For years, the NRA has painted the UN as a bogeyman figure, claiming in its literature and fundraising drives that there is an international conspiracy to “grab your guns”. Last July, when negotiations on the Arms Trade Treaty broke down — in part because of US resistance to global regulations on gun sales — the gun lobby group claimed victory for “killing the UN ATT”.

Supporters of the treaty accuse the NRA of deceiving the US public about the pact, which they say will have no impact on US domestic gun ownership as it applies only to exports.

Michelle Ringuette, chief of campaigns and programs at Amnesty International USA, said they had witnessed a resurgence in the NRA’s attempts to influence lawmakers and to use its opposition to the UN treaty as an opportunity for fundraising.

“We monitor what they send out to membership and put online” Ringuette told the Guardian. “It’s nothing like the efforts they put in back in June and July but we have seen them step up. They have done exactly what we expected them to do, to stir up anti-UN panic.”

______________________________

This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 License

Cyprus Revolts Following Troika Demand to Seize Individual Savings

0

The people of Cyprus were in continued uproar Monday following news over the weekend that the country’s ruling government and finance ministers signaled willingness to impose a tax on individual saving accounts in order to secure a $10 billion bailout package from Europe’s financial “Troika” – the European Commission, the European Central Bank and the International Monetary Fund.

Account-holders withdraw money from a cash machine in the Cyprus capital, Nicosia. (Photograph: Barbara Laborde/AFP/Getty Images) As the Cyprus Mail explains, “Under the terms of a deal brokered with euro zone finance ministers on Friday, Cypriot authorities were to impose a 6.7 per cent tax on bank deposits under 100,000 euros and 9.9. per cent on deposits exceeding 100,000 euros.”

The news caused panic over the weekend, with many scrambling to ATMs (the banks are closed until Tuesday) trying to withdraw as much of their savings as possible.

The deal, however, still needs approval of parliament and an emergency meeting of ministers was being held on Monday.

Resistance to the plan among leftist parties in the country was critical and fierce.

“Essentially parliament is called to legalise a decision to rob depositors blind, against every written and unwritten law,” said Yiannakis Omirou, speaker of parliament and head of socialist EDEK party. “We refuse to subscribe to this.”

As Al-Jazeera reports:

Faced with a growing public backlash, Cypriot finance ministry officials began discussions with lenders on Sunday to lessen the blow for smaller savers.

A source close to the consultations told the Reuters news agency that authorities were hoping to cut the tax band for smaller savers with less than 100,000 euros to three percent from 6.7 percent.

The rate for deposits above that would then be increased to 12.5 percent from 9.9 percent.

Described as a “take it or leave it” ultimatum given by the Troika to the Cypriot government, Guardian economy columnist Michael Burke said Europeans were looking “on in horror” at the potential raid on taxpayers’ bank account.

“It’s now become clear,” wrote Burke, “the threat to European savers and banks isn’t anti-austerity parties but the Troika.”

The Cyprus Mail reports the reaction from other parties on the left who oppose the plan:

AKEL leader Andros Kyprianou described Cyprus’ treatment by the troika as “vindictive and neo-colonial,” adding that his party would discuss proposing the island’s exit from the eurozone.

“They are attempting to impose their political options on Cyprus, leading out country and people to conditions that are similar to those in other countries of the European south,” Kyprianou said. […]

Demetris Syllouris, the chairman of EVROKO, said the government would not have his support on the matter.

“If they have killed us once it does not matter if they kill us a second time. This is my reaction,” he said.

The Green party suggested that the measures included in the decision did not ensure the salvation of the economy.

“On the contrary, the consequences on common people and workers are expected to be tough, adding to the trials this people is already going through,” the Greens said.

“Neither the unprecedented and catastrophic measures would be tolerated nor the humiliation of the Republic of Cyprus and its people,” the EDEK said in a statement.

And Reuters notes:

Approval in Cyprus’ fractious 56-member parliament is far from a given: no party has an absolute majority and three parties say outright they will not back the tax. A vote initially planned for Sunday was rescheduled to give more time to build a consensus.

Responding to the news on his blog, Paul Krugman writes:

OK, I didn’t see that one coming. With all the problems in Greece, Italy, Spain, and Portugal I wasn’t watching Cyprus. But that’s where the big euro news is this weekend; in return for a bailout, Cyprus is supposed to impose a large haircut – that is, loss – on all depositors in its banks.

You can sort of see why they’re doing this: Cyprus is a money haven, especially for the assets of Russian beeznessmen; this means that it has a hugely oversized banking sector (think Iceland) and that a haircut-free bailout would be seen as a bailout, not just of Cyprus, but of Russians of, let’s say, uncertain probity and moral character. (I think it’s interesting that Mohamed El-Erian manages to write about this thing, fairly reasonably, without so much as mentioning the Russian thing.)

The big problem, however, is that it’s not just large foreign deposits that are taking a haircut; the haircut on small domestic deposits is a bit smaller, but still substantial. It’s as if the Europeans are holding up a neon sign, written in Greek and Italian, saying “time to stage a run on your banks!”

Tomorrow and the days immediately following should be very interesting.

__________________________________

This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 License

WMD Lies – Mainstream Media Must Also Shoulder Responsibility

RINF Alternative News

tony-blair_1658942c

We’ve all been saying it for years, but now 10 years too late, the mainstream media has finally begun reporting the truth.

Even since before the hyped “shock and awe” beginning of the Iraq war, it was obvious to almost every critical-thinking person that a tidal wave of government lies and deceit was about to lead to the mass murder of hundreds of thousands of innocent people.

That reality, revealed in no small part by genuine investigative journalists, has been largely censored for the past decade.

But now the BBC’s Panorama programme will broadcast a report which finally reveals that three months before the war, MI6 and the CIA were informed by top sources that Iraq had no WMDs.

It seems ironic that only now, a full decade later, the very mainstream media that became a mouthpiece for both George W. Bush and Tony Blair, the same media that propelled – without question –  a torrent of government propaganda, are now questioning the despicable lies they once reported as fact.

However, the mainstream media also needs turn its focus inwards, on its own cowardly journalists and editors who restricted the flow of information, as they too are guilty of deceit on a near global scale.

But perhaps now with the safety of a Tory/Lib Dem government, who won’t threaten the BBC’s licence fee if the corporation paints the previous Labour government in a negative light, are free to report the truth – as long as that truth toes the party line.

According to the BBC:

“The lies of two Iraqi spies were central to the claim – at the heart of the UK and US decision to go to war in Iraq – that Saddam Hussein had weapons of mass destruction. But even before the fighting started, intelligence from highly-placed sources was available suggesting he did not.”

Surprisingly, the BBC has actually said:

“Much of the key intelligence used by Downing Street and the White House was based on fabrication, wishful thinking and lies.”

Iraq’s foreign minister Naji Sabri was in touch with Bill Murray, former head of the CIA’s station in Paris. The two men met in New York in September 2002.

Murray is cited as saying that Saddam Hussein:

“Had some chemical weapons left over from the early 90s, [and] had taken the stocks and given them to various tribes that were loyal to him. [He] had intentions to have weapons of mass destruction – chemical, biological and nuclear – but at that point in time he virtually had nothing.

“I thought we’d produced probably the best intelligence that anybody produced in the pre-war period, all of which came out – in the long run – to be accurate. The information was discarded and not used.”

Maybe the mainstream media’s willingness to report truth at this level could be argued as a case of ‘better late than never’, but the question must still be asked:

If Britain had a Labour government in power today, would it be so willing to report such damning information?

And if looking at the long years when the Labour government were in power, is anything to go by, then the answer is clearly a  solid ‘no’.

But more importantly, these latest revelations must renew calls for Bush and Blair to stand trial for war crimes.

Since 2003, the UK has spent £9.24bn, and the US has spent $802bn, killing at least 122,089 civilians in Iraq – according to official figures, but experts estimate the number of slaughtered individuals to be much higher.

The mainstream media must also shoulder some of the blame as they gave unquestioning support to these psychopathic war criminals, peddling their lies and disinformation into the homes – and minds – of millions, suppressing investigative journalists who dare report information that could alter the public perception of Operation “Freedom”.

Freedom of press under pressure: UK to launch media regulator

0

Published time: March 18, 2013 11:49

Britain's Conservative Party Prime Minister David Cameron (R) and with Liberal Democrat Party Deputy Prime Minister Nick Clegg react as they answer a question from the media during a joint press conference inside 10 Downing Street to mark the half-way point in the five-year term of the coalition government in London on January 7, 2013. (AFP Photo/Peter Nicholls)

A new press watchdog is reportedly set to be established in the UK, despite fears voiced by Conservative Party leader Prime Minister David Cameron that it could jeopardize freedom of the press in the country.

MPs have reportedly reached a last-minute compromise over new press regulations following a parliamentary vote. It has allegedly been agreed that the press watchdog will have the authority to levy six-figure fines of up to $1.5 million, as well as require newspapers to print apologies when necessary.

Negotiators initially disagreed on the terms of the proposed watchdog, which would protect individuals from malicious newspaper reporters. While all agreed that the press cannot be trusted to govern itself, many insisted — the Prime Minister among them — that if regulation of the press is necessary, it should be without political involvement.

Cameron argued that enshrining media restrictions could erode the concept of the free press: “The idea of a law, a great, big, all-singing, all-dancing media law … would have been bad for press freedom, bad for individual freedom,” the Conservative Party leader was quoted as saying.

Members of the Hacked Off Campaign stage a photocall to illustrate how many people have signed the petition for a free but accountable press in the United Kingdom out side of Parliament in London on December 3, 2012. (AFP Photo/Andrew Cowie)

He proposed to protect victims of unruly newspapers through a royal charter, an executive document that does not require a vote in Parliament.

Opposition Labour Party leader Ed Miliband urged lawmakers to “stand up for the victims” of press abuse by formalizing the new press regulations into law.

Harry Potter author J.K. Rowling, whose privacy has been repeatedly violated by the media, said she and other victims “have been hung out to dry” by the government.

Talks reportedly continued through the night on March 18, with Cameron allegedly failing to rally support for his regulatory scheme. It was reported he was forced to compromise and accept the opposition parties’ terms, some of which he had earlier described as “bad for press freedom,” in order to avoid an inevitable defeat in the House of Commons.

“After five-and-a-half hours of talks in Ed Miliband’s office which ended at 2:30am, we are confident we have the basis of an agreement around our royal charter entrenched in statute,” a senior Labour source told the Daily Mail.

The heated debate over media regulation in the UK was triggered by Lord Justice Leveson’s inquiry into press ethics, following revelations of the illegal practice of phone-hacking by tabloid journalists.

The scandal resulted in the closure of Rupert Murdoch’s ‘News of the World’ tabloid in 2011 and a wave of resignations after it emerged that journalists had regularly eavesdropped on voicemails and hacked into computers in search of dirt on celebrities.

The UK already has one government-approved regulatory authority, Ofcom, established in 2003 to protect against “scams and sharp practices.” The Office of Communications operates under the so-called ‘Communications Act 2003,’ a parliamentary act that defines the authority of this ‘super-regulator’ in protecting the public from what might be considered harmful or offensive material.

US vows to protect Seoul with nukes amid rising Korea tensions

0

Published time: March 18, 2013 11:43

US Deputy Secretary of Defense Ashton Carter (Alex Wong/Getty Images/AFP)

Every military resource the US has, including nuclear arms, will be available to its ally South Korea in the confrontation with its northern neighbor, US Deputy Defense Secretary Ashton Carter pledged in Seoul.

“We remain steadfast to our commitment to extended deterrence offered by the US nuclear umbrella,” Carter said after talks with South Korean Defense Minister Kim Kwan-Jin.

“We’ll ensure all of our resources will be available to our alliance,” he was quoted as saying by Yonhap news agency. Carter is visiting South Korea as part of a four-nation tour of American allies in Asia, which also includes Japan, the Philippines and Indonesia.

The veiled threat comes amid heightened tensions in the Korean Peninsula, which started with Pyongyang’s third nuclear test in February. North Korea detonated a nuclear device in defiance of the UN Security Council resolution banning it from developing nuclear weapons.

North Korea insisted that it needs nuclear deterrence to guard its sovereignty against the United States, South Korea and Japan. Pyongyang claimed that Washington plans to invade North Korea, possibly using its nuclear arsenal.

After the Asian country warned that it would deliver a preemptive nuclear strike before allowing such aggression, the US said it will boost its national anti-ballistic missile system by deploying additional interceptors in Alaska. Further plans include stationing new radar facilities in Japan to monitor North Korean launches.

Previous week, Pyongyang also said it is no longer bound by the armistice agreement that ended the Korean War in 1953, a diplomatic demarche the North has used for the sixth time since 1994. Seoul is notably absent from the document’s signatories, which also include the Chinese People’s Volunteer Army and the US-led United Nations Command.

With tensions remaining high, some politicians in South Korea said their country needs a nuclear arsenal as well. Washington opposes further nuclear proliferation in the region, saying it can protect its ally in the event of a new war.

Seoul has also recently struck a deal with the US allowing it to deploy longer-range missiles capable of reaching any part of North Korean territory. Previously, the South had been forbidden from using such weapons as part of its military partnership with the US.

UN Human Rights Council: America’s Imperial Tool

0

Stephen Lendman
RINF Alternative News

flags

In 1945, the UN was established:

“to save succeeding generations from the scourge of war;

reaffirm faith in fundamental human rights;

(support) equal rights of men and women….of nations large and small;

establish conditions under which justice….can be maintained;

promote social progress;

practice tolerance and live in peace; and

(promote) economic and social advancement of all peoples.”

It failed on all counts. It’s largely a US imperial tool. It’s been so from inception.

With few exceptions, the UN Human Rights Council (HRC) marches in lockstep with Washington. It does so shamelessly. Poland’s Remigiusz Henczel serves as president.

America’s waging hot war on Syria. It does so politically, economically and other ways against Iran.

UN Secretary-General Ban Ki-moon aides and abets Washington’s agenda. So does the Human Rights Council.

Former Maldivian Minister of Foreign Affairs, Ahmed Shaheed, serves as Special Rapporteur for Human Rights in Iran. He does so dishonorably. He takes State Department blood money.

Tehran’s High Council for Human Rights Secretary-General, Mohammad Javad Larijani, said:

“The money the special rapporteur has received from the US State Department has led to a situation that he cannot write about anything except their anti-Iran desires.”

He “has no right to take a stance against the country he is assigned to. (He) repeats (anti-Iranian) words of the US and Israel.”

Iran provided UN officials with damning evidence. Shaheed’s a serial violator. He issued four anti-Iranian reports.

Tehran categorically denies all charges. They’re based on unreliable information. They reflect Western propaganda. They belie reality.

On February 28, HRC published his “Report of the Special Rapporteur on the situation of human rights in the Islamic Republic of Iran.”

Baseless human rights violations were charged. They include “widespread and systemic” torture, as well as harassment, arrests and attacks on human rights defenders, lawyers and journalists.

According to Shaheed:

“The prevailing situation of human rights in Iran continues to warrant serious concern, and will require a wide range of solutions that are both respectful of cultural perspectives and mindful of the universality of fundamental human rights promulgated by the treaties to which Iran is a party.”

Shaheed tried having things both ways. On the one hand, he said Tehran made “noteworthy” women’s rights “advances.”

On the other, he claimed “recent policies prohibit women’s access to a number of fields of study, further restrict women’s freedom of movement, and current polices that continue to impede women’s ability to hold certain decision-making positions in Government remain problematic.”

He claims “unimpeachable evidence.” Pro-Western and internal dissident sources supplied it. It’s biased and unreliable.

It discusses free and fair elections, freedom of expression, association and assembly, human rights defenders, torture, executions, women’s rights, ethnic minorities, religious minorities, gay, lesbian, bisexual and transgender community, and socioeconomic rights.

UN High Commissioner for Human Rights Navi Pillay long ago fell from grace. Her mandate is suppressing truth. She ignores Western human rights abuses. America’s are the world’s worst.

She turns a blind eye on Israel. She ignores its worst crimes. She, Shaheed, and likeminded sources lack credibility. They’re imperial tools. They’re in lockstep with Washington. Their job is advancing its agenda.

On March 11, HRC headlined “Oral Update of the Independent International Commission of Inquiry on the Syrian Arab Republic.”

It followed previous duplicitous reports. They’re pre-scripted. They’re predictable. They’re one-sided. They lack credibility. They turn truth on its head.

They report what Washington wants to hear. They point fingers the wrong way. They blame Assad for Western crimes. They ignore credible eye-witness testimonies. They use spurious ones. They do so repeatedly.

They claim Syria’s war is “civil.” There’s nothing civil about it. imported proxies are used. They’re invaders. They’re heavily armed, funded, trained and directed. They’ve been so from inception.

Most Syrians deplore violence. They oppose internal and external groups committing it.

Syria is Washington’s war. Obama bears full responsibility. He’s guilty of crimes of war and against humanity.

He prioritizes war. He spurns peace. He’s an unindicted war criminal. In 2011, he destroyed Libya. He’s ravaging Syria now. HRC blames Assad for his crimes.

Its report includes baseless accusations. They charge Assad with forced displacements, razing neighborhoods, looting homes, torture, rapes, denying medical care, targeting doctors and other hospital personnel, persecuting anti-government opponents, and continuing hostilities across Syria.

“Government forces continue to focus their military operations on securing major towns and cities, intensifying shelling and airstrikes on anti-Government armed groups’ strongholds,” it says.

Omitted was saying it’s done defensively. Assad’s obligated to do so. Syria was invaded. Other leaders would respond the same way. Failure would be grossly irresponsible.

HRC claimed bombing, shelling, and missile attacks “caused widespread damage to residential neighborhoods.” It blamed Assad for deaths caused by insurgents.

They’re Western-recruited death squads. Their mandate is kill, kill, kill. They commit gruesome atrocities. Eye-witness survivors confirm it. HRC won’t cite them.

It didn’t explain. It glossed over insurgent crimes. They’re too grave to ignore. It did so anyway.

Targeting Assad is prioritized. He’s blamed for “extrajudicial killings, beatings, enforced disappearances, arbitrary arrests,” and other high crimes.

Uncorroborated reports claim his forces “steal from civilian houses while conducting ground searches.”

In mid-January, HRC said government forces removed dozens of women traveling to work or school.

Doing so, it said, “was to coerce (their) family members, some of whom were ostensibly fighting with anti-Government armed groups, to surrender.”

“Multiple accounts alleged that the detained women were sexually abused.”

“Other interviewees (alleged) torture in” Damascus detention centers.

No evidence whatever corroborates HRC claims. It largely whitewashes anti-government forces’ crimes. It did so in previous reports. They point fingers the wrong way. It’s done to please Washington.

Assad’s wrongfully blamed for death squad massacres and other atrocities. Spurious accusations include the following:

“The brutality of the civil war in Syria has been amplified by the perpetration of massacres.”

“According to ‘corroborated’ reports, Government forces executed between 52 and 90 prisoners, detained due to their affiliation to the opposition, in a makeshift prison in a former cultural center in Maarat Al Numan, Idlib, in October 2012.”

“The mass killing of detainees took place in the context of an assault by Free Syrian Army fighters on Maarat Al Numan.”

As they approached the checkpoint, “they heard heavy gunfire.”

“(T)hey discovered multiple bodies of detainees who had been shot at close range. Survivors of the murder (said) Government soldiers killed the detainees in anticipation of the attack by the FSA to prevent their release.”

Other accusations were similar. Assad’s accused of “indiscriminate use of all available fire power assets, including artillery, air force assets and most recently, surface-to-surface ballistic missiles against insurgent held areas.”

HRC points fingers the wrong way. It does so shamelessly and consistently. Its Syrian and Iranian reports lack credibility. They support Washington’s agenda. They lie for power.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago. He can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com.

Washington Post Anti-Bolivarian Propaganda

0

Stephen Lendman
RINF Alternative News

Venezuela's President Hugo Chavez salutes after arriving at a military parade in Maracay

Western media scoundrels waged war on Chavez. They did so throughout his tenure. Managed news misinformation substituted for truth and full disclosure.

Chavez is gone. Misreporting continues. Post editors march in lockstep with other media scoundrels. Doing so betrays their readers.

On March 16, they headlined “Free speech under fire in Latin America,” saying:

Chavez “may be dead, but the offensive he led against democratic institutions in Venezuela and across Latin America has not slackened.”

“In fact, it may be accelerating, especially with regard to independent media.”

Fact check

Venezuela’s the hemisphere’s most open society. America’s pales by comparison. Free expression is cherished. It’s constitutionally mandated.

Venezuela’s Law of Social Responsibility affirms it. It does so without censorship. It promotes responsible programming and journalism.

It respects civil and human rights. It advances cultural values. It encourages active citizen participation.

It tolerates dissent. It enforces acceptable media standards. Violators face fines. Promoting coups, war, public disorder, crime, or other socially disruptive acts risks temporary or longer-term license suspensions.

Venezuelan media giants challenge the law. They do so irresponsibly. Sometimes they go too far. Doing so is lawless. It compromises national security.

During Chavez’s tenure, Venezuelan media changed dramatically. In 1998, broadcasting included 331 commercial FM stations.

Eleven public access ones operated. So did 36 private television broadcasters and eight public ones.

Chavez encouraged free and open communication. Operations expanded. By April 2012, radio stations included 499 private ones, 83 public access operators, and 247 community ones.

Sixty-seven commercial television broadcasters operate freely. So do 13 public service and 38 community ones.

Five media giants dominate Venezuelan television. They assailed Chavez throughout his tenure. They materially aided and abetted the aborted two-day April 2002 coup. Globovision’s one of the worst. More on that below.

In 2000, National Assembly legislators reformed Venezuela’s Organic Telecommunications Law. It affirms communication access. It does so as a human right.

It established three types of media. They include private, state and community.

In 2004, lawmakers passed the Social Responsibility in Television and Radio Law (Ley Resorte). It prohibits inciting hatred, intolerance, racism, criminal activity, public disorder, discrediting elected officials, and disrepecting laws.

In 2010, it did so for Internet communications.

Venezuelan media operate freely. Chavez tolerated no less. Western media scoundrels claimed otherwise. They still do. They misreport saying so.

They spurn professional standards. They violate journalistic ethics. The Society of Professional Journalists’ Code of Ethics says:

“….public enlightenment is the forerunner of justice and the foundation of democracy.”

“The duty of the journalist is to further those ends by seeking truth and providing a fair and comprehensive account of events and issues.”

“Conscientious journalists from all media and specialties strive to serve the public with thoroughness and honesty.”

“Professional integrity is the cornerstone of a journalist’s credibility.”

The Radio-Television News Directors Association Code of Ethics and Professional Conduct stresses public trust, credibility, accuracy, truth, “reporting anything known to be false,” avoiding bias, fairness, integrity, independence, accountability, and “responsibility to the profession of electronic journalism.”

Media scoundrels fail on all counts. They serve wealth, power and privilege. They sacrifice principle and honor. Misinformation and lies substitute for truth. It’s standard practice.

Venezuelan private media operate the same way. As long as within the law, they’re unchallenged. Chavez wanted it no other way. It’s no different now. Not according to Post scoundrels.

“Last week,” they said, “the beleaguered owner of the last Venezuelan television station not subservient to the government announced that he was selling his shares to a businessman close to the ruling party.”

In 2010, Post editors alleged Chavez forced Guillermo Zuloaga into exile. He’s Globovision’s majority owner.

Fact check

He accepted a buyout offer. It’ll close after April 14 elections. He did so for financial reasons. He said Globovision’s “economically unviable because our revenues no longer cover our cash needs.”

He blamed Venezuela’s government for his business failures. He said so publicly. He lied.

He’s selling to buyers headed by Juan Domingo Cordero. He’s a leading Venezuelan entrepreneur. He’s an insurance magnate.

He’s vice president of the Caracas Stock Exchange. He was part of a commission created to integrate metropolitan area market activities.

He founded, directs and serves as president of the Venezuelan Institute of Capital Markets. He has extensive business interests. He’s unconnected to Venezuela’s government. Post editors lied saying so.

They claimed “(t)he silencing of Globovision will leave Venezuela with nine television networks, including five that are state owned and broadcast nearly incessant government propaganda that the four privately-owned channels won’t dare to challenge.”

Fact check

As explained above, Venezuela has 67 commercial television broadcasters. They operate freely. So do 13 public service and 38 community ones.

Private ones challenge government policies ad nauseam. Public and community ones expose their propaganda. They do so responsibly.

Post editors claim Globovision “was charged with ‘sowing panic’ for reporting on an earthquake, fined $2.2 million for its coverage of a bloody prison riot and, most recently, accused again of spreading panic for questioning whether the delay of Mr. Chavez’s presidential inauguration during his final illness violated the constitution – which it clearly did.”

Fact check

Delaying Chavez’s inauguration complied fully with Venezuelan law. Post editors lied claiming otherwise.

Zuloaga’s been living abroad since 2010. He left after Venezuelan courts ordered his arrest. His son, Guillermo Zuloaga Siso, was charged.

It pertains to conspiracy and generic usury. It relates to irregularities connected to their car dealership.

Conspiracy involves two or more people plotting criminal acts. Guilty parties face two to five years in prison. Generic usury refers to concealing facts for disproportionate advantage. It carries a one to three year sentence.

In 2009, both men got restraining orders. Zuloaga was prohibited from leaving the country. He refused to turn himself in. He secreted himself.

He broke the law. He said Chavez victimized him. He claimed it involved silencing free expression. Not so. It was unrelated to Globovision content.

He fled overseas. He did so to avoid prosecution. He remains there unprosecuted. He’s a fugitive. He admits he’s an “enemy of the government.

Globovision’s his propaganda vehicle. It turns truth on its head. In late 2011, it was fined $1.5 million. It paid eight months late. It did so after Venezuela’s Supreme Court forced compliance.

It violated Articles 27 and 29 of Venezuela’s Law of Social Responsibility in Radio and Television. Globovision’s a serial offender. So are other major television broadcasters.

In 2007, RCTV’s (Radio Caracas Television) operating license was suspended. It’s Venezuela’s oldest private broadcaster. A public TV station (TVES) replaced it.

It “promotes the participation and involvement of all Venezuelans in the task of communication (as an alternative to) the media concentration of the radio-electric spectrum that remains in the hands of a (dominant corporate) minority sector.”

RCTV’s cable and satellite operations were unaffected. Suspending one license was far less than deserved.

Along with other dominant corporate broadcasters, it committed sedition. It aided and abetted the April 2002 coup.

No one went to prison. Broadcasters still operate. RCTV got off easy. One operating license wasn’t renewed. It took effect on expiration. Harsher punishment was warranted.

Venezuelan media scoundrels exceed America’s worst. Globovision’s a loose cannon. It spurns public interest. It wages war on truth.

Chavez let it operate freely. He did so because press freedom matters. Post scoundrels claimed he compromised it. They lied saying so.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago. He can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com.

7 Things You Need to Know About the Shocking Cyprus Bailout Crisis That Has Everyone Freaked Out

0

Fears of bank runs, a Lehman-like collapse, and widespread panic are building.

Photo Credit: Shutterstock.com

March 17, 2013  |  

Like this article?

Join our email list:

Stay up to date with the latest headlines via email.

In a small island nation far, far away, the financial shit is hitting the fan. A new bailout package in the euro zone comes with terms that are causing a tsunami of anxiety across Europe and beyond. Here’s what’s happening and why it matters.

1. What the heck is going on?

Since 2008 , the Greek economy has gone from bad to worse. As Greece’s economy collapsed, the European and Greek banks that held the nation’s debts should have been told to eat their losses, write off the debts, and replace their managements. Instead, the European Union stepped in to engineer one bailout after another. The prices for the bailouts were high: austerity policies that didn’t work. The result everywhere is that national income has fallen steeply, while the countries fall further into debt.

Cypriot banks got into trouble from their exposure to neighboring Greece. Finance ministers from euro countries and representatives from the IMF and the European Central Bank came up with a radical plan for a bailout to Cyprus’ banks: In exchange for €10 billion ($13 billion) in rescue money, creditors would impose a one-time tax of 6.75 percent on all bank deposits under €100,000 ($131,000) and 9.9 percent over that amount, while Cyprus cut government spending and raised revenues. The decision to make depositors pay was a stunning departure from past EU-led bailouts.

On Saturday, freaked-out bank customers rushed to ATMs to withdraw as much of their cash as possible. The Cyprus government announced a bank holiday on Monday (a national holiday) and temporarily halted all electronic bank transfers. The bank holiday has now been extended until Tuesday.

The Cypriot Parliament was originally supposed to meet on Sunday to vote on the deal, but the vote has been postponed until Monday. Cypriot officials fear a full-on bank run once lenders reopen their doors.

2. Where would the money go?

Money obtained through the one-time tax would go to recapitalize Cyprus banks and service the country’s debt.

3. Who would get hit by this deal?

Bank owners, unsurprisingly, are not being asked to pay into the package. Bank depositors are. This number includes ordinary Cypriots, British pensioners, and others who have their money in the banks, including a large number of wealthy Russian and Middle Eastern depositors. The depositors have been promised bank shares in exchange for the money that gets grabbed. But, um, who wants shares in banks that are in the financial toilet? Exactly no one. There has also been chatter that depositors will be given some kind of interest in bonds from gas fields presumably controlled by Cyprus.

4. Who wants the bailout?

The European Central Bank, the IMF, and the EU are the ones pushing this deal. Cyprus Prime Minister Nicos Anastasiades says he doesn’t like the deal and claims to be trying to soften it so that depositors with small accounts don’t get hit so hard.  

5. Who opposes it?

Depositors hate the deal, obviously. Most of the population of Cyprus correctly believes they are being asked to pay for the sins of the banks. Well, “forced” is a better term, because no one’s really asking. According to the Wall Street Journal, one incensed resident of the town of Limassol parked a backhoe in front of a local bank to express the widespread sentiment about the deal.

6. What’s at stake?

Unfortunately, this is going to be ugly any way you slice it. On Monday, if Cyprus’ Parliament says no to the deal, there will be chaos because everybody will think the banks are belly up and there will be a bank run. That could be something like Lehman Brothers, meaning chain bankruptcies and panic throughout Europe.

S&P Futures Open At One-Week Lows; Gold Breaks Above $1605

0

Given FX markets are double-dipping now, it is little surprise that S&P 500 futures open down 16 points from the 1553.5 close on Friday – a one-week low. Treasury Futures just opened implying a 1.94% 10Y (-5bps) and 3.16% 30Y (-5bps). And despite the USD strength, spot gold just opened also up from $1591.95 to $1607. The arb against JPY carry is holding stocks for now… only another 8 hours until Europe opens… Over 38,000 contracts have traded in S&P 500 futures in the first 5 minutes ($2.9bn notional) – 30 times the average for a Sunday night… The initial dump was caught by a VWAP reverter but that is fading now…

Initial massive volume dump for a Sunday night, VWAP algos revert and now fading again…

Stocks open down to EURJPY, bounce a little on the catch up from carry…

Gold holding above $1605…

Treasuries…

Charts: Bloomberg

Your rating: None Average: 4.9 (7 votes)

Angela “It’s What’s Right” Merkel Parody Paraded In Greece

0

Following Angela Merkel’s address to her people this evening, explaining, “anyone having their money in Cypriot banks must contribute in the Cypriot bailout. That way those responsible will contribute in it, not only the taxpayers of other countries, and that’s what is right,” we thought it ironic that the people of Greece envisioned her in a slightly different light today during a parade in Patras. ‘Union’? No tension here at all…

(h/t @tottensniper)

or this from Cyprus

(h/t @frankmanktank)

Your rating: None Average: 5 (3 votes)

Europe Scrambling With Last Minute Revision To Cyprus Deposit Confiscation Plan

0

If initially Europe came out as utterly deranged in its Cyprus deposit-confiscation scheme, at least it was consistent. Now, it appears that Europe is desperate to appear not only completely incompetent but also unable to even make a simple decision and stick with it, following news from both the WSJ and the FT that the original confiscation thresholds of 6.75% and 9.9% for deposits below and over €100,000 is about to be revised.

From the FT: “a revised deal being discussed in Nicosia, with the blessing of the European Commission, would shift more of the burden on to deposits larger than €100,000, according to officials involved in the talks. Under a controversial deal struck with international bailout lenders in the early hours on Saturday, a 6.75 per cent levy would be imposed on all deposits under €100,000 while accounts over that threshold would be hit with a 9.9 per cent levy. The depositor levy was demanded by a German-led group of creditor countries to bring down the bailout’s price tag from €17bn…. Officials involved in last night’s talks said the changes in the levy’s rates were in flux, but they could see the higher rate increase to as much as 12.5 per cent while the smaller deposits could be about 3.5 per cent.”

Elsewhere, according to the WSJ, the deposit “tax” would be under 5% for deposits under €100K, under 10% for deposits between €100 and €500K, and over 13% for deposits greater than half a million.

While this idiotic last minute revision will only infuriate Russian oligarchs even more, it will achieve absolutely nothing to streamline the passage of the bill through Cyprus parliament where it appears to have hung without enough support: the damage has already been done, and it is a virtual guarantee that Cyprus banks will suffer a full blown bank run the second banks reopen, which may be Tuesday, Wednesday, or never, at the current pace. That line around the block at your local neighborhood Nicosia ATM: that is not, and will not, be for people seeking to make a deposit, that much we can guarantee, no matter what the final confiscation percentage is.

What is worse, however, is the painful demonstration of the absolutely and completely arbitrary decision-making process out of Europe. Sure: the ECB and the European Commission may decide to fully unwind the deposit confiscation scheme before all is said and done, but the genie is now out of the bottle, and it is very clear that in the European Disunion, a few unelected oligarchs will now determine until such time as the Eurozone finally implodes, just whose wealth and deposits are ripe for the taking. That not even Germany can make a decision and stick with it is just icing on the cake of the European Titanic.

In the meantime, what happens in Cyprus tonight, or tomorrow, and what the final confiscation schedule looks like, is merely bitter sweet victory for all those who have claimed that the European monetary experiment is finally coming to a long overdue end.

Finally, we can only hope that the next European (in whatever Monetary Union or Disunion format it is then) winter, is mild. Because Gazpromia may just decide to hike gas costs by 5%… or 6.75%…. or 9.9%…. or 99.9%…. Who knows? After all, Gazpromia Russia – which just happens to be Europe primary external source of crude and gas, has a green light to make up its own rules on the fly.

Your rating: None Average: 5 (2 votes)

Guest Post: Why Europe Is Still In Peril, In Two Charts

0

Submitted by John Aziz of Azizonomics blog,

A lot of analysts, including myself, have given the European situation a rest since last year. There were certainly some signs that the ECB and IMF had slowed (if not stopped) the deterioration by providing liquidity backstops to the addled banking system. But perhaps that was just the calm before the storm.

In truth, things were still probably just as perilous as ever up until yesterday when the ECB and IMF decided to start a banking panic by enforcing a haircut of up to 10% on bank depositors. That was literally the stupidest thing that anyone has done since the Euro crisis began, and while it may not lead to utter disaster, there is a significant chance that it will. Not only is it excruciatingly unjust (it’s theft!), it is also incredibly suicidal. Many, many Spaniards, Italians, Greeks and Portuguese will have looked at the Cyprus haircut in horror, and wondered “Am I next?” Some of those will withdraw their money from the bank and stuff it in a mattress or into tangible assets, furthering stressing the already-fragile and highly-leveraged European banking system.

The background to this is soaring European unemployment:

EuroUnemployment

The people running the European financial system and engineering the bailouts and austerity (ECB, EU, IMF, Germany) have ploughed on through with more and deeper austerity even as European countries (other, of course, than Germany) have run up to higher and higher unemployment levels. Spain and Greece are above 25%. Italy is above 10%, and Portugal above 15%. Hiking taxes and cutting spending is leading to more and more people in unemployment oblivion. That isn’t healthy. Let’s not forget what happened to Germany the last time when over 25% of its people found themselves unemployed:

Chart-German-Unemployment-and-Nazi-Links

If bank runs materialise across Europe next week, the unemployment situation is most likely to worsen even further. If that happens, expect more and more unemployed, underemployed and angry Europeans to start voting for increasingly radical political parties. This is suicidal. Europe needs to not only reverse the awful, stupid Cypriot haircut, but also to put fiscal consolidation on hold (it has, lest we forget, so far been counterproductive) and start worrying about unemployment levels.

Your rating: None Average: 4.7 (3 votes)

German Commerzbank Suggests Wealth Tax In Italy Next

0

While some argue that Cyprus was “one of the biggest money-washing machines for Russian criminals,” and others that Cyprus ex-Pat community and energy resources brough deposits (not to say their high deposit interest rates), it seems the European Union (IMF et al.) have decided that the route to crisis stabilization, just as we outlined here over a year ago and updated here, is through a wealth tax.

However, as Handelsblatt reports, the gross distortions of wealth distribution among both core and peripheral nations (evident in the chasm between ‘mean’ and ‘median’ net assets – or wealth) makes some nations more ‘capable’ of ‘giving’ and as Commerzbank’s chief economist notes, median wealth in Italy is EUR164,000 (as opposed to Austria’s median of around EUR76,000 and mean of around EUR265,000) meaning that in theory Italy has no debt crisis (with net assets at 173% of GDP) – significantly more than the Germans at 124% – “so it would make sense, in Italy a one-time property tax levy,” he suggested.

“A tax rate of 15% on financial assets would probably be enough to push the Italian government debt to below the critical level of 100% of gross domestic product.” So there you have it, the ‘new deal’ in Europe, as we warned, is ‘wealth taxes’ and testing the “capacity of Cypriots” appears to be the strawman on what the public will take before social unrest becomes intolerable.

Your rating: None Average: 5 (3 votes)

71% of Cypriots Say Parliament Should Reject Bailout

0

With President Anastasiades concluding his remarks, Cypriot public opinion, as it has changed over the first critical 24 hours after yesterday’s Eurogroup decision, are recorded in a survey conducted by the Insight Market Research (IMR) agency at the University of Nicosia. The survey shows that the first reaction of Cypriots can be characterized as anything but positive with 71% believing the the House should reject the deposit haircut imposition and a full 73% believe that President Anastasiadis and the Cypriot delegation “failed to secure a good deal.” 72% believe that depositors below EUR100,000 should not be affected at all but 62% believe Cyprus should stay in the Euro. Begging the question, when’s the next Cypriot election?

Chart: SigmaLive

Your rating: None

Early Season Wildfires Signal “Bad Omen” for Drought-Striken Colorado

0

Two wildfires that erupted in northern Colorado on Friday continue to blaze in the region, signaling an early start to the wildfire season in the drought-stricken western United States.

Colorado wildfire near Fort Collins. (Photo: Ed Andrieski/AP) Burning about 75 miles northwest of Denver, the fires have been stoked by strong, erratic winds and “unseasonably high temperatures and low humidity,” said Poudre Fire Authority Captain Patrick Love.

The larger of the two blazes, the Soldier Canyon Fire, scorched over 1,000 arces and prompted the evacuation of hundreds of residents. They were permitted back in their homes Saturday evening. 

A second, smaller fire reportedly broke out six miles north of Fort Collins, the Larimer County Office of Emergency Management said.

Reuters called the early-season fires a “bad omen” for the region, which has been plagued by “moderate to exceptional drought conditions,” according to the US Drought Monitor.

“Are you kidding me?” tweeted noted environmentalist Bill McKibben. “March!”

Last year proved to be one of Colorado’s worst ever wildfire seasons. According to the Colorado Division of Fire Prevention and Control, forest and brush fires scorched 384,803 acres in 2012, destroying 650 homes and killing six people.

_____________________

This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 License

Steubenville Teens Pronounced Guilty of Sexual Assault

0

A judge announced Sunday that two Steubenville, Ohio high school football players have been found guilty of sexual assault in a highly-publicized trial that drew questions of a community’s complicity in this criminal act.

Protesters, many wearing Guy Fawkes masks, rallied outside the Jefferson County Courthouse demanding a more thorough investigation into the alleged rape of a teenage girl by two members of the Steubenville High School football team. (Photo: Lake Fong/Post-Gazette) 17-year-old Trent Mays and 16-year-old Ma’lik Richmond were pronounced guilty of sexually assaulting a female while she was severely intoxicated and unconscious. Both defendants received delinquent verdicts, the guilty equivalent for juveniles, on all three charges against them.

The teens will serve their sentence at a juvenile detention facility until they turn 21.

The Associated Press reports that “evidence introduced at the trial included graphic text messages sent by numerous students after the night of the party, including by the accuser, containing provocative descriptions of sex acts and obscene language.”

Ahead of the case, they write, the community was “roiled” amid allegations that more students should have been charged for their complicity in the attack for allowing it to take place, particularly three other boys–two of them members of Steubenville High’s celebrated Big Red team–who “saw something happening that night and didn’t try to stop it but instead recorded it.”

In January, the New York Times reported that many members of the community, including the football coach, had been defensive of the charges and wary of assigning blame for the alleged rape because, Nation blogger Alison Killkenny writes, “the community assigns something like a God-like status to football players.”

The case gained national attention after video and photo footage from the night of the incident went viral including a video of another Steubenville teen who witnessed the attack joking and bragging about the incident, which was leaked by a ‘hacktivist’ group Anonymous who wanted to draw attention to the scandal and alleged ‘cover-up’ by local officials.

Ohio’s attorney general plans to announce later Sunday whether additional charges will be brought in the case, including against the three other boys, the Associated Press reports.

_____________________

This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 License

Record Radiation Found in Fukushima Fish

0

The port of the Fukushima No. 1 nuclear power plant where the highly radioactive fish was caught. (Photo: Asahi Shimbun)A fish with record levels of radioactive cesium was caught in the waters outside the Fukushima Daiichi Nuclear Power Station, officials announced Friday.

Tokyo Electric Power Co. (TEPCO) said they detected 740,000 becquerels per kilogram of radioactive cesium in a greenling fish caught the port adjacent to the nuclear site, Kyodo News reports. The amount is 7,400 times the state-set limit deemed safe for human consumption.

According to TEPCO, is the highest yet recorded in its sampling surveys of marine life since the March 2011 disaster.

_____________________

This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 License

US Government Seeks to Dictate Global Rules for Drone Warfare

0

As other countries race to build up drone warfare programs ending the ‘monopoly’ that the Obama administration has held over the highly controversial method of targeted killing, the US government is reportedly dictating how the international community will run their own covert and illegal drone operations.

(Photo: Kirsty Wigglesworth/AP) According to a new Reuters analysis, despite the veil of secrecy behind which President Obama has presided over drone strikes and his targeted ‘kill list,’ the Administration is now openly seeking to influence global guidelines on the matter. 

“We are constantly working to refine, clarify, and strengthen the process for considering terrorist targets for lethal action,” said Caitlin Hayden, a spokeswoman for the White House National Security Council. Adding, “we are establishing standards other nations may follow.”

At this point, a number of countries have admitted to having unarmed reconnaissance drones. China reportedly has an armed drone, and even considered conducting its first lethal drone strike in 2011, “but authorities decided they wanted the man alive so they could put him on trial,” reported state-run newspaper Global Times.

According to James Lewis, a senior fellow at the Center for Strategic and International Studies, one of the administration’s primary goals is to “regularize” the drone program, “making it more a part of accepted U.S. practice in the future.” Adding, “This is going to be part of warfare.” 

This report comes on the heels of a unanimous ruling Friday by a federal appeals court panel that determined that the CIA gave an inadequate response to a Freedom of Information request by the American Civil Liberties Union seeking records about drone strikes.

According to the court, the CIA’s ‘claims’ of concern over national security were rebuked by the Administration’s public acknowledgement of the program.

_____________________

This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 License

Parents of British man killed by US drone blame UK government

0

The parents of a British-born man killed by a US drone strike after being stripped of his UK citizenship have spoken out for the first time — to say they will never forgive the British Government for his death.

Gamal Sakr blames government for son’s death. (Photo: Susannah Ireland/ Independent) Mohamed Sakr was born and brought up in London before he was targeted and killed in February 2012 in Somalia.

Now his Egyptian-born parents Gamal and Eman Sakr, who have lived in Britain for 35 years, have accused ministers of betraying this country’s democratic values.

Speaking to the Bureau of Investigative Journalism from their London home, the couple said they believe their son was left vulnerable to the attack after the government stripped him of his British citizenship months before he was killed.

“This is the hardest time we have ever come across in our family life,’ Mr  Sakr said in tears. “I’ll never stop blaming the British government for what they did to my son. They broke my family’s back.”

The comments follow the revelations by the Bureau and published in the Independent that the Home Secretary Theresa May has ramped up the use of powers allowing her to strip UK citizenship from dual nationals without first proving wrongdoing in the courts.

The investigation revealed the Coalition government has stripped 16 people, including five born in Britain, of their UK passports. Two, including Sakr, were later killed by drone strikes and one was secretly rendered to the United States.

The law states that the government cannot make someone stateless when it removes their citizenship. But Egyptian-born Mr and Mrs Sakr say their son Mohamed never had anything other than a British passport, despite in principle having dual nationality.

In September 2010 the family received notification that the government intended to remove their son’s British citizenship, on the grounds that he was ‘involved in terrorism-related activity’.

It was the first known instance in modern times of a British-born person being stripped of his nationality. His family insist that the action meant Mohamed, who was in Somalia, was left effectively stateless and stranded.

His mother still can’t quite believe it happened. ‘I was shocked. It never crossed my mind that something here in Britain would happen like this, especially as Mohamed had no other passport, no other nationality. He was brought up here, all his life is here.’

Mohamed’s parents were so worried that their other sons might also lose their British citizenship that they renounced the entire family’s dual Egyptian nationalities, shortly after they were told that Mohamed had been deprived of his citizenship.

‘I did this for the protection of the family, because they grew up here, they were all born here. And I felt that for them it was my responsibility to protect them. It was the only way I could protect them against that stupid law,’ says Mr Sakr.

‘No member of my family ever had an Egyptian passport,’ says Mr Sakr. ‘For the kids it never crossed my mind that they would have anything other than their British passports. I know they are British, born British, they are British, and carried their British passports.’

Mr and Mrs Sakr have thrived in Britain, running a successful business. They moved here from Egypt 35 years ago thinking it was a good place to raise a family.

‘It was democratic, and compared to where I was before in Egypt that was a big gap,’ Mr Sakr explains. ’There was no dictator here, no bad laws like there were back home, so we decided to start a new life.’

Mohamed was born in London in 1985 and grew up as a normal, sporty child. ‘He was very popular amongst his friends, yet very quiet at the same time, very polite, he was just a normal child,’ recalls Eman.

As he got older his parents had worried about him getting into trouble.  ‘He loved going out, he loved to dress up, to wear the best clothes, he liked everything to be top range,’ recalls Mr Sakr.

‘I used to tell him, after midnight there’s no good news. So I’d say, “Make sure you are home before 12”. He said “OK, OK I’ll try, you know,”’ said his mother.

In his early twenties he calmed down and in 2007 set up an executive car valeting business. His parents thought their son would follow in his father’s entrepreneurial footsteps.

But in the summer of the same year Mohamed travelled to Saudi Arabia on what his parents say was a pilgrimage ‘with a couple of friends and their wives’, before heading to Egypt to join his family on holiday. From there, the Sakrs say, Mohamed and his younger brother also visited the family of a girlfriend in Dubai.

His actions were innocent, the family insists. But Mohamed was questioned for ‘at least three hours’ by immigration officials on his return to the UK. The questions focused on the countries he had visited and his reasons for going there.

‘He told them, “I didn’t plan to visit all these countries ­- it’s just how my summer has happened,”’ his mother recalls.

It’s thought that UK counter-terrorism officials were becoming concerned that a group of radicalised young men was emerging in the capital, influenced by British Islamists who had returned home after fighting in Somalia.

The Sakrs both say that their eldest son became the subject of repeated police ‘harassment’ in which he was stopped on numerous occasions by plain-clothes officers.

After one incident Mohamed told his mother ‘They’re watching me momma, everywhere I go they watch me.’ The family became convinced that their phones were being tapped.

Mohamed was spending a lot of time with a friend he had met when he was 12 — Bilal al­-Berjawi. The two had lived in adjacent flats.

The childhood friends would both lose their British citizenship weeks apart in 2010 — and would die weeks apart too, in covert US airstrikes.

Berjawi’s Lebanese parents had brought him to London as a baby, and like Sakr, Berjawi had drawn the attention of Britain’s counter-terrorism agencies.

The Sakr family insists they were not aware of any wrongdoing on Mohamed’s part, despite frequent trouble with the police.

In February 2009 Berjawi and Sakr visited Kenya for what they told their families was a ‘safari’.

Both were detained in Nairobi, where they were said to have been interrogated by British intelligence officials. The authorities suspected them of terrorism-related activities.

They were released and only deported back to the UK because both, at that time, still had their British citizenship.

While the two were still being detained in Kenya, police arrived at the London family home with a search warrant.

Cards left behind by officers identify them as members of SO15,­ the Met’s counter-terrorism squad. Mr Sakr says he was shocked to be told that the family might have to vacate their home for up to two weeks while officers searched. The indignant family found themselves put up in the nearby Hilton hotel.

Two days later the family was allowed home. And shortly afterwards Mohamed and Bilal were deported back to Britain.

Mr Sakr challenged his son: ‘I was asking questions, why has this happened and Mohamed said “Daddy, it’s finished, it will never happen again. It’s all done and dusted.” So I just put a cap on it and continued with a normal life.’

Mohamed’s mother insisted on accompanying him to a mosque so she could hear the sermons he was listening to.

‘I wanted to hear what they’re saying, I was always on top of this, always. I wanted to know why the police were after him, why?’ says Mrs Sakr. ‘So he used to take me to different mosques, and the sermons were normal, nothing unusual.’

In October 2009, with ever-growing trouble with the British authorities, Mohamed and Berjawi decided to slip out of the country. Neither told their families that they were leaving, or where they were going.

‘The police came asking “Where is Mohamed?” And I said “I don’t know.” That was the honest answer, I didn’t know where my son was,’ says Mr Sakr.

Months later Mohamed phoned his parents from Somalia. Both he and Berjawi were now living in a country gripped by civil war between radical Islamists and a rump UN-backed government.

While it’s been reported that both men were drawn to terrorist-linked groups, the Sakrs say the pair had innocent connections with the troubled east African nation. Berjawi had married a Somali woman in London, and Sakr at one time had also been engaged to marry a Somali girl.

Although both were killed by the US, most of the allegations against Sakr and Berjawi remain secret.

Some information has emerged, however. In November 2009, the pair were named along with a third British man in a Ugandan manhunt, accused of ‘sneaking into the country’ to plot terrorist activities. Later the men were linked to deadly bombings in that country’s capital.

The letter seen by the Bureau informing Mohamed’s family that he was losing his citizenship states he was ‘involved in terrorism-related activity’ and for having links with ‘Islamist extremists’, including his friend Bilal al-Berjawi.

The Sakrs remain defensive about these claims. ‘Have they done anything? Have they been caught in anything? Have they been caught in any action? Do they have any evidence against them that they have been involved in this or that? I haven’t seen. And they haven’t come up with it,’ says Mr Sakr.

‘It says they took his freedom away because he knew Bilal! Does it mean that because I know a bad person it means I’m bad, or know good people that I’m good? He’d known Bilal since he was 12 years old!,’ says Mohamed’s mother.

At first Mohamed wanted to fight the deprivation order, and his family hired lawyers in the UK. But they were told that in order to mount an effective appeal Mohamed would need to return to Britain.

Letter from the Home Office.

Letter from the Home Office.

His parents say he was too scared to come back.

‘He said, “Daddy, it is impossible for me,”’ says Mr Sakr. “He said, “If I go from here, they’ve already taken my passport from me, maybe they will catch me somewhere, and you will never hear from me again.” He knew something could happen to him.’

In February 2012, news agencies reported that a high-ranking Egyptian al Qaeda official had been killed in a US drone strike in Somalia.

It would be days before the family realised those reports actually referred to their son.

Mr Sakr says: ‘Their hands were washed. And that’s what they claimed when the news first came. They announced that Mohamed was Egyptian [cries]. That’s why they tried to show to the rest of the world, “He’s an Egyptian. He’s not British.”

‘Intelligence killed millions of Iraqis on the basis of wrong information. If we go and kill everyone based on intelligence information, then we are not living in the world of democracy and justice. We are living in the world of “Who has the power and who has the weapons to kill,”’ Mr Sakr rails.

‘If you’re not happy about a dictator or about rules or freedom of speech, and then you come to a country like Britain which we know for hundreds and hundreds of years has talked of democracy and freedom, and laws and justice. And suddenly you find there’s no justice, no freedom of speech, no democracy.’

© 2013 The Bureau of Investigative Journalism

CONFISCATION: Panicked Europeans Rush ATMs as Leaders Move To Seize Funds Directly From Bank Account Holders

0
Mac Slavo
March 16th, 2013
SHTFplan.com

Read by 54,189 people

Over the last few years political and financial leaders in Europe and the United States have implemented policies, regulations and bailouts costing global taxpayers trillions of dollars with the promise that these measures would lead to economic growth and recovery.

What happened in Europe today is yet further proof that nothing they’ve done has fixed the underlying fundamental issues surrounding the events that led to the crash of 2008.

For those who don’t believe the government is prepared to take extreme measures that may include the seizing of retirement accounts, cash savings or even gold, look no further than Cyprus, the latest recipient of bank bailouts.

As of right now, citizens of Cyprus are scrambling to withdraw funds from their bank accounts after the EU, with agreement from the Cypriot government, announced they will decimate funds held in personal bank accounts to the tune of up to 10% of existing deposits.

You read that right.

The European Union has made the determination that the people of Cyprus are now responsible for the hundreds of billions of dollars in bad bets made by their government and bank financiers, and they are moving to confiscate money directly from the bank accounts of every citizen in the country.

Restrictions have been imposed to stop people emptying their accounts or moving their money out the country after the Cypriot government announced that up to ten per cent of deposits will be seized and used to bailout the island’s crisis-hit banking system.

The deal with other eurozone finance ministers is the first time that ordinary citizens’ deposits have been directly raided in this way.

…

One furious expat said: ‘This is plain theft. I’d love to hear someone explain to me why it isn’t.’

…

Under the deal, all bank deposits over €100,000 will be hit with a levy of 9.9 per cent. Those with smaller savings will pay 6.75 per cent.

…

The move sparked panic and violent protests yesterday as crowds desperately tried to withdraw their money at cash machines. 

…

‘Why would you risk putting your money in Greek, Spanish or Portuguese banks after this?’

British expats were stunned by the news, with many left high and dry by the restrictions on accounts.

Cash machines had been working, but many ran out of notes because of the panic withdrawals.

…

But financial experts said the raid — designed to stop Cyprus crashing out of the euro, potentially destroying the currency — would send shock waves through the eurozone.

If savers in other troubled nations fear their accounts might be next, they could withdraw their money and spark a catastrophic run on the banks.

Source: Daily Mail

They’re calling it a “tax.”

As Market Ticker’s Karl Denninger notes, “Like hell that’s a tax.  That’s direct confiscation of the funds of people who did nothing wrong!”

It should now be obvious. There is no recovery. There never was.

No matter where you live, your government is likely preparing measures to deal with the coming financial and economic collapse. This means they are going to be coming for anything of value that they can get their hands on.

If you have the majority of your net worth allocated in bank accounts, money market funds, retirement plans, stock markets or the host of other ‘safe’ assets recommended by your financial adviser, then you are playing Russian roulette.

And in this version there’s a bullet in every chamber.

When they come, they will take everything they can.

Author: Mac Slavo
Views: Read by 54,189 people
Date: March 16th, 2013
Website: www.SHTFplan.com

Copyright Information: Copyright SHTFplan and Mac Slavo. This content may be freely reproduced in full or in part in digital form with full attribution to the author and a link to www.shtfplan.com. Please contact us for permission to reproduce this content in other media formats.

No Time to Panic: Strategic Survival Expert Joel Skousen Survives Plane Crash

0
Mac Slavo
March 16th, 2013
SHTFplan.com

Read by 11,174 people

Former Marine fighter pilot and well known strategic relocation survival expert Joel Skousen (WorldAffairsBrief.com) was flying home from Las Vegas this week when his experimental Glasair I aircraft experienced an unrecoverable problem with the plane’s fuel flow system. According to first responders on the scene the plane was, “completely totaled in the wreck, after flipping and partially detaching the wings.”

“It’s the first time I’ve done an accident, an engine-out landing to a field,” said Skousen.

…

“When I slowed down to put the landing gear down and went to put power back on, to reach speed, it wouldn’t come back up.”

…

“As a longtime pilot for many, many years, you read about a lot of accidents,” he said.

“You’re trained to go through these procedures of trying to get that engine restarted, throwing on the pumps, throwing the booster, checking the fuel. And so you really don’t have time to panic because you are going through procedures.”

Skousen was not seriously injured in the crash, receiving only a few cuts and bruises. He was not transported to a hospital.

…

“Emotionally, it’s really tough to go through an accident,” Skousen said.

“I’m very blessed. There’s no other way to describe coming out of that with only a couple of scratches.”

Source: KSL Utah

Images of Mr. Skousen’s mangled aircraft:

skousen-plane-2

skousen-plane-1

skousen-plane-3

As Joel Skousen himself notes, the accident could have been much worse than it was. Providence and a little bit of ‘luck’ played a significant role in his coming out of this nearly unscathed.

His efforts in the midst of the emergency, however, should not be downplayed. Having trained as a fighter pilot for years, Skousen is well versed in the procedures required to counter-act such a situation. He had a plan and followed procedures step-by-step, even in the midst of what must have been a very high intensity, high stress environment.

His training paid off. He didn’t panic. His focus during a far-from-equilibrium crisis no doubt played a role in his surviving the crash, because had he panicked he may have made mistakes that could have led to a completely different set of circumstances.

Plan. Prepare. Practice. It may save your life.

Editor’s Note: We’re thankful Mr. Skousen walked away with minor injuries. Thousands of people have benefited greatly from his willingness to share his wisdom and knowledge. We wish him the very best. When asked by reporters what he would do next, Skousen smilingly replied, “I got two more kits in the hanger, build another airplane and go at it again.” It’s a testament to his die-hard spirit. You can visit Joel Skousen’s web site at World Affairs Brief.

Author: Mac Slavo
Views: Read by 11,174 people
Date: March 16th, 2013
Website: www.SHTFplan.com

Copyright Information: Copyright SHTFplan and Mac Slavo. This content may be freely reproduced in full or in part in digital form with full attribution to the author and a link to www.shtfplan.com. Please contact us for permission to reproduce this content in other media formats.

Why Does Anyone Still Take Paul Ryan Seriously?

0

His failed V.P. bid may have made him a national figure, but his budget plan is hopelessly out of touch.

March 16, 2013  |  

Like this article?

Join our email list:

Stay up to date with the latest headlines via email.

Zipping across the land with a nice internet connection, so a good time to reflect a bit (looking down on clouds from above broadens the perspective a bit, I find).

So, I’m doing a radio interview last night, and moderately impressed with myself for being able to speak coherently about four different budgets: Ryan’s, Senate’s, POTUS (not out yet, but we can guess at the mix), and the CPC. Then I got asked a question which threw me a bit: why are Paul Ryan and his budget taken so seriously?

It wasn’t a snarky question. It’s just that I’d been discussing the absolute non-reality of his proposal–how the numbers don’t begin to add up, the unrealistic budget cuts, the plethora of magic asterisks in the absence of actual proposals (the most egregious of which is: I’ll cuts taxes by $6-7 trillion over the next decade and offset the revenue losses with…um…sorry, gotta run). And the interviewer was like, “OK…but if you’re right, why is his budget front page news such that he’s driving the debate?”

Here’s what I think is going on. First, institutional reasons. His party holds the majority and he’s the chair of the House Budget Committee. That in itself makes his budget newsworthy. Also, as a former VP candidate, he’s a national figure.

But that’s not the main reason.

I asked a wise, intently non-partisan friend who thought, and he admitted he was being generous, that one reason might be that Ryan’s introduced an important theme into the discussion: if you want really low taxes, you’ve got to give up Medicare as we know it.

But while that may be in there somewhere, it’s awfully muddled. It certainly wasn’t Ryan’s position in the election, where he and Mitt attacked the President for Medicare cuts. And his voucher program doesn’t start for ten years.

In other words, I think my friend is being too generous. I’ve argued that we actually need our politicians to articulate this point: if we want X, we’re going to have to pay for X. To my ears, Paul Ryan actually fits squarely in the problematic camp on this point, telling folks they can painlessly have it all. But in his version, it takes the form of trickle down: if we cut taxes on job creators, get rid of the safety net, and inject health care delivery with competition, then we can have it all for a fraction of what we’re paying now.

That’s very different that telling the electorate straight up that if we want what we say we want–social insurance, a strong safety net, productive public goods including education–we’re going to need to raise more revenues to pay for it.

So what is the answer?  I think it’s twofold.

First, his views, positions, and rhetoric mesh very neatly with those of influential people, and those people have helped convince the media that Ryan is saying important things. One group of those people are, of course, the fix-the-debt-shrink-the-government-fell-the-pain coalition. Neither the numbers (the actual fiscal record or trajectory) nor the economics support their views, but they’ve been extremely effective in driving the debate.

The other group–and yes, there’s tons of overlap–are those who benefit most from tax reductions on the wealthy, and remember, many of these folks are professional investors. When they invest in Congress, they expect a big bang for their big bucks.

All pretty depressing so far, I know. But the second part of the answer is hopeful, and comes from the hoary old adage that you really can’t fool all the people all the time.

Afghans Demand Withdrawal of US Special Forces

0

Several hundred demonstrators march to the Afghan parliament building to protest against the continued presence of U.S. commandos in Afghanistan’s troubled Wardak province. Saturday, March 16, 2013. (Photo: Anja Niedringhaus/AP)Hundreds of residents of Afghanistan’s eastern province of Wardak are marching on Kabul Saturday demanding US special operations forces pull out of their territory.

According to police reports, between 200 and 500 demonstrators have gathered outside of parliament, chanting “U.S. special operations forces out!” and calling for the release of nine local citizens “whom they believe are under the custody of US forces,” the chief of Kabul police’s Criminal Investigations Department said.

“We have gathered here to protest against the [U.S.] Special Forces in Maidan, Wardak, because they enter people’s houses and torture innocent people, they have also detained 10 people and it is not clear what will happen to them,” said one protester.

The nine villagers had reportedly “disappeared in an operation by this suspicious force” last October, as cited by a February statement issued by the presidential palace. Their whereabouts remain unknown.

The demonstration follows a week after Afghanistan President Hamid Karzai’s ordered the withdraw of the Special Forces from that province citing mounting allegations of torture and extrajudicial killing, by the US forces and the ‘irregular’ Afghan Groups working alongside them, Al Jazeera reports. 

They continue:  

“In a separate incident,” the statement read, “a student was taken away at night from his home, whose tortured body with throat cut was found two days later under a bridge.”

To improve accountability, Karzai has given all irregular Afghan forces established by the NATO coalition three months to fall under government control. The deadline was declared only days after US special forces were told to leave Maidan Wardak. 

Also Saturday, the Karzai-appointed Ulema Council, whose members represent the country’s Islamic clerics, issued a statement seconding the call for withdrawal and demanding the transfer of the American-controlled prison at Bagram to Afghan control, the New York Times reports.

“If the Americans once again do not honor their commitments and keep on disobeying, then this will be considered as an occupation, and they may expect to see a reaction to their action,” they said.

This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 License

America’s Dirty War in Iraq

0

Stephen Lendman
RINF Alternative News

Iraqi Freedom

America wages wars dirty. They’re all unprincipled and lawless. It’s official policy. Exceptions don’t exist. No-holds-barred barbarism is longstanding.

Rule of law principles don’t matter. They never did. Modern technologies make today’s wars worse than ever. All forms of brutality are commonplace.

On March 6, London’s Guardian discussed the Pentagon’s link to Iraqi torture centers. General David Petraeus was directly involved.

So was Col. James Steele. He’s a retired special forces expert. He’s a Central America “dirty wars” veteran.

His Iraq mandate included establishing detention/torture centers. Innocent victims were subjected to monstrous brutality. More on that below.

America’s entire chain of command is culpable. The buck goes all the way to the top. Bush administration officials bear main responsibility. Obama continues what he began.

They’re unaccountable so far. They authorized the worst of what went on. Iraq reflects what’s ongoing in all direct and proxy US war theaters.

Professor Stjepan Mestrovic’s a valued Progressive Radio News Hour guest. His book titled “The ‘Good Soldier’ On Trial: A Sociological Study of Misconduct by the US Military Pertaining to Operation Iron Triangle, Iraq” deserves careful reading.

It explains what everyone needs to know. He documented disturbing evidence of “US government mistreatment of its own soldier-prisoners as well as foreign ‘detainees.’ ”

Iron Triangle soldiers were unjustly convicted. Irresponsible officials hung them out to dry. They did so to protect higher-ups and themselves. Military justice is sorely lacking.

US soldiers followed orders. They had no other choice. Disobedience assures court-martials. Imprisonment follows.

In May 2006, Operation Iron Triangle targeted suspected Al Qaeda fighters.

US soldiers were accused of killing four Iraqis. They did so near Samarra. Col. Michael Steele gave direct orders. “Kill all military age males” on sight, he said.

He violated international, constitutional, US statute, and military laws. They’re clear and unequivocal.

US Army Field Manual 27-10 incorporates Nuremberg Principles. Paragraph 498 says any person, military or civilian, who commits a crime under international law bears full responsibility.

Paragraph 499 defines a war crime. Paragraph 509 denies the defense of superior orders as justification for committing crimes.

Paragraph 510 denies “act of state” justification to absolve them.

These and other provisions apply throughout the chain of command. Commanders and civilian bosses bear full responsibility.

Mestrovic documented hundreds of lawless incidents. Brigade commander Steele followed orders. His mandate was killing every military-aged Iraqi on sight.

Unconscionable war crimes were committed. He was never charged. Higher-ups weren’t implicated. Four low-ranking soldiers were for them.

They were tried, found guilty, or pleaded so as charged. They never had a chance. “Law enforcement agents lied and tricked their own soldiers,” said Mestrovic.

They weren’t read their Miranda rights. They were confined in 7 x 7 cells. They were kept there 23 hours a day. Doing so violates army standards.

Required autopsies weren’t performed. Nor were forensic tests. Sworn testimonies were shredded. Others weren’t passed up the chain of command.

Vital information was suppressed. Kangaroo proceedings assured convictions. Hanging judges presided. Treatment reflects Bradley Manning’s ordeal.

America commits mass murder, torture, and other unspeakable atrocities. It betrays its own at the same time. Justice is systematically denied. Media scoundrels suppress what’s most important. They do so consistently.

Most Americans know nothing about Operation Iron Triangle. They know little about unconscionable Iraqi war crimes. They persist in all US war theaters. They reflect longstanding policy.

Fire-bombings, so-called humanitarian ones, search and destroy missions, free-fire zones, execution squads, kill anything that moves orders, take no prisoners, torture, and other atrocities reflect official US policy.

Rules of engagement are shrouded in secrecy. Iron Triangle trials prohibited discussing written ones. Soldiers explained orders saying “kill every military-aged male” on sight. Missions prioritize doing it. It’s standard practice. It’s lawless. Low-ranking soldiers don’t dare disobey.

Col. Steele didn’t testify. No one forced him. His silence reflected complicity. Low-level soldiers were charged. Guilt by accusation followed. Culpable officials got off scot-free. It’s standard policy. War crimes ordered by higher-ups are suppressed.

Doing so violates Justice Robert Jackson’s opening Nuremberg remarks, saying:

“The common sense of mankind demands that law shall not stop with the punishment of petty crimes by little people. It must reach men who possess themselves of great power and make deliberate and concerted use of it to set in motion evils which leave no home in the world untouched.”

No commissioned officer faced war crimes charges in Iraq. None were charged in Afghanistan or in connection with Washington’s war on Libya and Syria. Occasional “little people” are prosecuted. Doing so absolves higher-ups.

The Guardian called Col. James Steele “America’s mystery man in Iraq.” Donald Rumsfeld chose him. At issue was organizing paramilitary operations against Sunni insurgents.

Retired Col. James Coffman worked with him. They got millions of dollars to establish detention/torture centers.

Coffman reported directly to Petraeus. He arrived in June 2004. He helped organize and train Iraqi security forces.

Steele served in Iraq from 2003 – 2005. In 2006 he returned. He reported directly to Rumsfeld. Allegations made against him were damning.

US and Iraqi witnesses provided evidence. He and US advisers were implicated. For the first time, human rights abuses were cited. Petraeus was linked through an adviser.

Coffman was his “eyes and ears out on the ground. They worked hand in hand.” They partnered in war crimes.

Iraqi General Muntadher al-Samari worked with them. “I never saw them apart in the 40 or 50 times I saw them inside the detention centers,” he said.

“They knew everything that was going on there – the torture, the most horrible kinds of torture.”

Detention centers had interrogation committees.

“Each one was made up of an intelligence officer and eight interrogators,” said al-Samari.

“This committee (used) all means of torture to make the detainee confess like using electricity or hanging him upside down, pulling out their nails, and beating them on sensitive parts.”

Petraeus, Steele and Coffman knew everything going on. Torture was systematic and brutal.

“I remember a 14-year-old who was tied to one of the library’s columns. And he was tied up, with his legs above his head. Tied up. His whole body was blue because of the impact of the cables with which he had been beaten.”

New York Times photographer Gilles Peress visited a commando center. He met Steele in Samarra. “We were in a room in the library interviewing Steele, and I’m looking around I see blood everywhere,” he said.

Reporter Peter Maass was there. While an alleged jihadi was being interrogated, he heard “terrible screams, somebody shouting: ‘Allah, Allah, Allah!’ But it wasn’t kind of religious ecstasy or something like that. These were screams of pain and terror.”

Steele refuses to be interviewed. Coffman denies involvement. A Petraeus spokesman said:

“During the course of his years in Iraq, (he) did learn of allegations of Iraqi forces torturing detainees. In each incident, he shared information immediately with the US military chain of command, the US ambassador in Baghdad….and the relevant Iraqi leaders.”

He was directly involved. He knew everything. So did Steele and Coffman. They committed war crimes. They remain unaccountable. So do higher-ups involved.

Rumsfeld personally decorated Steele. He did so for services performed in Iraq. His job was overseeing detention/torture centers.

He lives in Texas. He gives motivational speeches. He discusses counterinsurgency operations in conflict areas.

He avoided prison where he belongs. So did Coffman, Petraeus and others up the chain of command to the top.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago. He can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com.

Detroit Symbolizes America’s Decline

0

Stephen Lendman
RINF Alternative News

american-decline-flag

America’s economy is sick. It’s getting sicker. Coverup and denial conceal reality. Census data say record numbers of US counties are dying. It’s over one in three.

It reflects population shifts and Depression conditions. America’s decline gets little attention.

Since 1981, 42 US municipalities declared bankruptcy. Ten did so in the past four years. Expect more to follow. Hard times getting harder assures it.

Detroit once symbolized industrial America. Might Motown resembles a ghost town. It’s dying. It nears bankruptcy.

Fifty years ago it was America’s fifth largest city. It’s now 18th. In the last decade, half the population left. It’s America’s ghetto. Its neighborhoods are in disrepair. They’re decaying and dying.

Half or more working aged residents have no jobs. Those with them have low-pay part-time or temp ones. They don’t pay enough to live on.

Poverty is extreme. It’s increasing. Nearly two-thirds of Detroit’s children are impoverished. They’re out of sight and mind.

Dozens of schools were closed. More closures are planned. Teachers were fired. Kids aren’t educated. Nearly half the population is functionally illiterate.

Public services are eroding en route to eliminating them altogether. One-third of Detroit’s 140 square miles lies vacant or derelict. Heavily blighted areas are increasing.

Tens of thousands of homes remain vacant. The median home price is $9,000. Many are much cheaper.

Property crime is double the national average. Violent crime is triple. Many areas aren’t safe. Police are unapologetic. Go out at your own risk, they warn.

In the last decade, half the force was laid off. So were hundreds of firefighters.

More austerity cuts are planned. It’s official policy. On March 1, Governor Rick Synder declared a financial emergency. Appointing a financial czar followed. He named bankruptcy attorney Kevin Orr.

He works for Cleveland-based Jones Day. His past experience includes government service. In 1991, he was counsel for the FDIC’s Litigation Section.

From summer 1991 – mid-1995, he was assistant general counsel for the Resolution Trust Corporation’s Complex Litigation and Bankruptcy Section.

From mid-1995 – February 2000, he was in the US Justice Department’s Executive Office for United States Trustees. From February 2000 – January 2001, he served as Deputy Director.

At Jones Day, he’s involved in business restructuring and all aspects of bankruptcy. He played a lead role in Chrysler’s 2009 bankruptcy.

Plants were closed. Jobs were lost. Wages were slashed. So were benefits. Strikes were banned. Detroit’s heading for the same abyss.

Claiming no alternative is false. It’s a Big Lie. Making the city’s rich and corporations pay their fair share solves fiscal problems. It’s true across America.

Corrupt politicians complicit with corporate bosses want solutions imposed on the backs of ordinary people. They want them bearing the burden.

Orr’s now Detroit’s Emergency Financial Manager (EFM). His powers permit canceling union contracts, terminating pension obligations, cutting services, ending others, selling city assets at fire sale prices, and privatizing its operations.

Mayor David Bing implemented deep spending cuts earlier. He fired thousands of workers. He outsourced vital services. Profiteers took full advantage. Bing’s got much more in mind.

Orr’s in charge. His job is radically restructuring Detroit. Expect the worst ahead. He’ll do it on the backs of ordinary people. He’ll fire city workers, cut wages and benefits, erode vital services, and end others.

He’ll hand over Detroit to bankers and other profiteers. Public resources will be plundered. Doing so assures greater crisis conditions. Unemployment will grow. Poverty will increase. Ordinary people will be left high and dry.

Public anger followed Orr’s appointment. He’s Black. Opponents call him an “Uncle Tom.” On March 14, they protested outside Cadillac Place. It’s a landmark downtown office complex.

Rainbow Push Coalition’s Rev. David Bullock expressed outrage, saying:

“They’re going to try to convince me that I should give up my right to vote, and put the city of Detroit in the hands of the same man who said he wasn’t going to pass right-to-work.”

“(He’s) the same man who took away the earned income tax credit….the same man (who’s) taxing our pensions. Never, never!”

National Action Network’s Rev. Charles Williams II said:

“We’re not worried about no Kevin Orr. Uncle Toms ain’t nothing new. We’ve had Uncle Toms for a long time.”

Tom Barrow is president of Citizens for Detroit’s Future. He said Michigan’s emergency manager law imposes diktat powers. It was created to oppress. It passed in mid-December.

It’s similar to Public Act 4. In November, voters rejected it by statewide referendum. Governor Snyder and legislators ignored them. They have no say.

Draconian powers are authorized. They include appointing an EFM, undergoing bankruptcy, accepting state-imposed consent agreement terms, overruling locally elected officials, selling public assets, modifying or terminating contracts, ending pension obligations and more.

Orr has diktat powers. What he says goes. Detroit residents are on their own. They’re out of luck. It’s been that way for years. It’s worse now than ever.

Neoliberal priorities let vital needs go begging. Money power in private hands assures it.

Finance is a new form of warfare. Economies are strip-mined for profit. Communities are laid waste. Ordinary people are impoverished. They’re left out on their own.

Corrupt federal, state and local officials arrange things. They do so for greater power and self-enrichment.

John McMurtry is a Progressive Radio News Hour regular. His “Cancer Stage of Capitalism” explains. Its new edition expands on what he wrote earlier. He discusses a money sequencing life destroying system.

Economies and communities are plundered for profit. Financial bosses are more powerful than standing armies. They take full advantage.

Detroit is ground zero. It reflects what’s wrong with America. It exposes predatory capitalism’s failure. It represents the worst of what’s coming.

Ordinary people are out of luck. Greater pain and suffering will follow. Democracy’s nowhere in sight. Monied interests matter most.

Detroit’s a microcosm of America. It reflects what’s spreading nationwide. It exposes venal priorities. Let ’em eat cake is dogma. Force-fed austerity assures it.

America’s criminal class is bipartisan. It conspires with Wall Street crooks. It’s allied with other corporate favorites. Wealth, power and privilege alone matter.

Ordinary people are marginalized. They exploited. They’re entirely left out. Their lives are wrecked. They’re deprived of enough to live on. They’re heading for neoserfdom.

They’re on their own to fight back. Officials they elected are enemies. Preventing them from getting away with plundering America is top priority. Detroit’s a good place to start.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago. He can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

Alaska Politicians Stand in the Way of Protections

0

President Obama signed the Violence Against Women Act [last] week. Finally, something bipartisan passed! American women are better protected from coast to coast – but all the way up north? Left out in the cold.

First, you should know a few facts. Native American and Alaska Native women are 2.5 times more likely to be raped or sexually assaulted than other American women.

The vastness of Alaska works against victims here. We have about 140 villages with no state law enforcement. Gov. Sean Parnell believes he can get some help to them in the next 10 years. In the meantime, they are, depending on weather, days from having a state trooper available to protect them and enforce the law.

Fifty villages have tribal or village police. The remaining 90?

Zero. No law enforcement.

It’s nearly impossible to get a restraining order where there isn’t a judge and you have to take a long ride on a snowmachine, boat or airplane to get to court. Escaping a scene of violence can cost you hundreds of dollars, with nowhere to go for support.

According to the U.S. Department of Justice, at least 86 percent of the victimizers of American Indian and Alaska Native women are non-Native men.

These facts make the particulars of the passage of the Violence Against Women Re-authorization Act (VAWA) even more disturbing. The VAWA gave “domestic violence jurisdiction and civil protection order” powers to tribal courts. This seemed like progress for communities without conventional courts readily available to issue restraining orders, etc.

Our senior senator, Republican Lisa Murkowski, added a “Special Rule for the State of Alaska” to the VAWA. That rule effectively bars 40 percent of American tribes from being able to protect their women. Our senator excluded 229 Alaska communities from that part of the act.

The Association of Village Council Presidents and the Aleut community of St. Paul Island spoke out against the Alaska exclusion. The Alaska Inter-Tribal Council said it “objects to anti-Alaska Tribal Provisions in the Violence Against Women Act.”

The Tanana Chiefs Conference opposed it. The Native American Rights Fund led the charge against it.

The AFN wrote to the senator: “Although Alaska Natives comprise only 15.2 percent of the population of the State of Alaska, they comprise 47 percent of the victims of domestic violence and 61 percent of the victims of sexual assault.”

Murkowski ignored their requests.

Let’s review a little recent Alaska history. Murkowski barely won her last election. Her write-in campaign only succeeded with a lot of help from Alaska Native corporations and the Alaska Federation of Natives. Why would she give powers to Lower 48 tribes but deny them to Alaska Natives? Why would she block the ability of Alaska Natives to protect some of their most vulnerable?

Alaska’s attorney general, Michael Geraghty, has become the principal agent of our governor’s anti-Native rights point of view. He argued to eliminate the federal Voting Rights Act, which protects Alaska Native voters. He lobbied to exclude Alaska from the VAWA.

The state of Alaska seems not to miss an opportunity to stop tribes from asserting jurisdiction over issues like Native adoption, alcohol control, subsistence hunting and fishing, etc. At every turn the state acts to circumscribe, as tightly as possible, the sovereignty of First Alaskans.

The difference between Alaska Natives and Native Americans is all about land. The Lower 48 has reservations. In Alaska, tribes don’t have reservations, so they can’t base claims of jurisdiction on reservation boundaries.

The worry for Alaskans like Parnell is: If we give Natives power over themselves, where will they stop? What if they don’t like a certain resource development — they might be able to get in the way. How could we let tribes enforce laws against non-Native predators? Oh, it could be a slippery slope, so let’s prevent Native communities from enforcing state law, and then we’ll pretend Alaska doesn’t have the money to pay for troopers to do it instead.

What’s a few rapes — as long as they happen way out there?

Last year the Obama administration took exception to the exclusion of Alaska tribes from the VAWA. At the time, a Murkowski spokesman claimed it was a “draft error.” Weird that she made the same error again this year, ensuring that our Alaska Native sisters wouldn’t get the same protection as Lower 48 Native Americans.

The state of Alaska has no higher responsibility than to protect its citizens from harm. While the governor walks around with a “Choose Respect” bumper sticker on his forehead, and legislators throw baskets of cash at every goofy development project that comes along, they all agree we can’t afford police protection for rural Native women, and then they work to keep the tools of self-protection out of the hands of communities.

The federal government wanted to give Alaska tribes the same jurisdiction as those in the Lower 48. Unfortunately for them, Lisa Murkowski, Michael Geraghty and Sean Parnell were standing in the way.

Ted Cruz Was Too Busy Playing With His “Gun” in Sixth Grade to Pay Attention

0

Freshman Tea Party Senator Ted Cruz had the stupidity, and audacity, to lecture Senior California Senator Diane Feinstein about the Constitution and the Second Amendment.

Senator Feinstein, known for her efforts to curb gun violence in America, was on the San Francisco Board of Supervisors, the equivalent of a City Council, when San Francisco Mayor George Mascone and City Supervisor Harvey Milk were assassinated.

Feinstein found Moscone’s body lying in a pool of blood, and had to feel through his bullet-hole riddled body to check for a pulse.

Senator Feinstein was also the first to arrive in Milk’s office after his assassination, and again made efforts to revive him, even though he was already dead.

These tragic events informed Feinstein about America’s gun problem, and led her to propose an assault weapons ban in 1996.

That ban was adopted by the House, the Senate and signed into law by Bill Clinton.

Unfortunately, the original assault weapons ban expired after ten years, and George W. Bush and the Republicans chose not to renew it.

So, in the wake of the Newtown tragedy, Senator Feinstein introduced a new assault weapons ban, and yesterday, the Senate Judiciary Committee took the measure up for a panel vote.

That’s when rookie Senator Cruz decided to go off on a condescending, rambling, and poorly informed rant about the Constitution.

Senator Cruz asked Feinstein if she’d want to limit the First and Fourth Amendments in the same way that she was proposing to limit what he interpreted to be the meaning of the Second Amendment.

Feinstein responded by saying, in part, “I’m not a sixth grader. Senator, I’ve been on this committee for 20 years. I was a mayor for nine years. I walked in, I saw people shot. I’ve looked at bodies that have been shot with these weapons. I’ve seen the bullets that implode…Its fine you want to lecture me on the Constitution. I appreciate it. Just know I’ve been here for a long time. I’ve passed on a number of bills. I’ve studied the Constitution myself. I am reasonably well educated, and I thank you for the lecture…”

Senator Cruz may have failed to understand what Senator Feinstein meant by “I’m not a sixth grader,” so here’s the essence of it.

We all learned in sixth grade civics – which Ted Cruz apparently missed (or wasn’t paying attention to) – that our “rights” come with certain “responsibilities” or “limits.”

Our First Amendment right to free speech is limited, for example, by an injunction that we not yell “Fire” in a crowded theater.

Similarly, as a talk show host, there are certain words that I’m forbidden from saying on the air.

Cruz asked what books Feinstein would want banned.

Has he never heard of child pornography?

Similarly, our Fourth Amendment rights to privacy are circumscribed in a thousand ways.

If a police officer walks up to your car, or your front door, and smells pot smoke, do you still have a right to privacy?

Or, what if the same officer sees you covered in blood and holding a gun? Do you still have a right to privacy then?

Senator Cruz, himself, wants to limit the privacy rights of women, by infringing on their right to abortions, so he’s clearly in favor of limits on the Fourth Amendment.

The simple fact, which gun industry shill Ted Cruz wants to ignore, is that none of the rights protected to We the People in the Bill of Rights are absolute.

With regard to the Second Amendment, I highly doubt that Cruz himself would argue that people should be able to own rocket-propelled grenades or shoulder-fired surface-to-air missiles, although those are “arms” that can be used by individual people, and could be used by a well-regulated militia.

While we need legislation banning weapons of war from our city streets, it’s increasingly apparent we need another bit of legislation, and right away.

And that’s one that would mandate that every new member of Congress sit down with a sixth grade civics teacher and learn how the Constitution works, so future Senators won’t run the risk of making the embarrassing and stupid mistake that Ted Cruz did.

Ten Years Later: Counting the Costs of War in Iraq

0

The invasion and occupation of Iraq defined a generation; the world’s largest anti-war protest was followed by the 3rd longest war in US history. 10 years later, American troops have officially left Iraq, but the occupation and its effects continue. On this edition, we look back at the 2003 invasion of Iraq. For Iraqis, for the US military, and for the anti-war movement; how have things changed? And what, if anything, has the world learned?

Featuring:

Donald Rumsfeld, former US secretary of defense; Tom Cahill, human shield in Iraq; Yanar Mohammed, Organization for Women’s Freedom in Iraq president; Jeff Paterson, Courage to Resist co-founder; Catherine Lutz, Watson Institute’s Costs of War study co-director; Barack Obama, president of the United States; Bishop Desmond Tutu, Jean-Luc, Caroline Bridgeman Reese, Amanda Tattersol; Iraq war protestors; Lisa Hammid, Free Speech Radio News host; Miles Ashdown, FSRN reporter.

NAFTA at 20: The New Spin

0

Intel engineers test new microprocessors at Intel's research unit in Guadalajara, Mexico's second largest city on July 23, 2008. (Photo: Janet Jarman / The New York Times)Intel engineers test new microprocessors at Intel’s research unit in Guadalajara, Mexico’s second largest city on July 23, 2008. (Photo: Janet Jarman / The New York Times)Only a few years ago, analysts were warning that Mexico was at risk of becoming a “failed state.” These days, the Mexican government appears to be doing a much better PR job. 

Despite the devastating and ongoing drug war, the story now goes that Mexico is poised to become a “middle-class” society. As establishment apostle Thomas Friedman put it in the New York Times, Mexico is now one of “the more dominant economic powers in the 21st century.”

But this spin is based on superficial assumptions. The small signs of economic recovery in Mexico are grounded largely on the return of maquiladora factories from China, where wages have been increasing as Mexican wages have stagnated. Under-cutting China on labor costs is hardly something to celebrate. This trend is nothing but the return of the same “free-trade” model that has failed the Mexican people for 20 years. 

The North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA), which was ratified in 1993 and went into effect in 1994, was touted as the cure for Mexico’s economic “backwardness.” Promoters argued that the trilateral trade agreement would dig Mexico out of its economic rut and modernize it along the lines of its mighty neighbor, the United States.

The story went like this:

NAFTA was going to bring new U.S. technology and capital to complement Mexico’s surplus labor. This in turn would lead Mexico to industrialize and increase productivity, thereby making the country more competitive abroad. The spike in productivity and competiveness would automatically cause wages in Mexico to increase. The higher wages would expand economic opportunities in Mexico, slowing migration to the United States.

In the words of the former President Bill Clinton, NAFTA was going to “promote more growth, more equality and better preservation of the environment and a greater possibility of world peace.” Mexico’s president at the time, Carlos Salinas de Gortari, echoed Clinton’s sentiments during a commencement address at MIT: “NAFTA is a job-creating agreement,” he said. “It is an environment improvement agreement.” More importantly, Salinas boasted, “it is a wage-increasing agreement.” 

As the 20th anniversary of NAFTA approaches, however, the verdict is indisputable: NAFTA failed to spur meaningful and inclusive economic growth in Mexico, pull Mexicans out of unemployment and underemployment, or reduce poverty. By all accounts, it has done just the opposite.

The Verdict Is In 

Official statistics show that from 2006 to 2010, more than 12 million people joined the ranks of the impoverished in Mexico, causing the poverty level to jump to 51.3 percent of the population. According to the United Nations, in the past decade Mexico saw the slowest reduction in poverty in all of Latin America. 

Rampant poverty in Mexico is a product of IMF and World Bank-led neoliberal policies–such as anti-inflationary policies that have kept wages stagnant–of which “free-trade” pacts like NAFTA are part and parcel. Another factor is the systematic failure to create good jobs in the formal sectors of the economy. During Felipe Calderon’s presidency, the share of the Mexican labor force relying on informal work–such as selling chewing gum and other low-cost products on the street–grew to nearly 50 percent.

Even the wages in the manufacturing sector, which NAFTA cheerleaders argued would benefit the most from trade liberalization, have remained extremely low. According to the Bureau of Labor Statistics, Mexican manufacturing workers made an average hourly wage of only $4.53 in 2011, compared to $26.87 for their U.S. counterparts. Between 1997 and 2011, the U.S.-Mexico manufacturing wage gap narrowed only slightly, with Mexican wages rising from 13 to 17 percent of the level earned by American workers. In Brazil, by contrast, manufacturing wages are almost double Mexico’s, and in Argentina almost triple. 

Mexico’s stagnant wages are celebrated by free traders as an opportunity for U.S. businesses interested in outsourcing. According to one report by the McKinsey management consulting firm, “for a company motivated primarily by cost, Mexico holds the most attractive position among the Latin American countries we studied. … Mexico’s advantages start with low labor costs.” 

But even as the damning evidence against NAFTA continues to roll in, entrenched advocates of the trade agreement have been busy crafting new arguments. In his recent book, Mexico: A Middle Class Society, NAFTA negotiator Luis De la Calle and his co-author argue that the trade agreement has given rise to a growing Mexican middle class by providing consumers with higher quality, U.S- made goods. The authors proclaim that “NAFTA has dramatically reduced the costs of goods for Mexican families at the same time that the quality and variety of goods and services in the country grew.” 

Most of the economic indicators included in the book conveniently fail to account for the 2008-2009 financial crisis, which hit Mexico worse than almost any other Latin American country. The result has been skyrocketing inequality. As the Guardian reported last December, “ever more Mexican families have acquired the trappings of middle-class life such as cars, fridges, and washing machines, but about half of the population still lives in poverty.”

The indicators of consumption that suggest the rise of Mexico’s middle class also exclude the dramatic increase in food prices in recent years, which has condemned millions of Mexicans to hunger. Twenty-eight million Mexicans are facing “food poverty,” meaning they lack access to sufficient nutritious food. According to official statistics, more than 50,000 people died of malnutrition between 2006 and 2011. That’s almost as many as have died in Mexico’s drug war, which dramatically escalated under Calderon and has continued under President Enrique Peña Nieto. 

The food crisis has coincided with the “Walmartization” of the country. In 1994 there were only 14 Walmart retail stores in all of Mexico. Now there are more than 1,724 retail and wholesale stores. This is almost half the number of U.S. Walmarts, and far more than any other country outside the United States. The proliferation of Walmart and other U.S. big-box stores in Mexico since NAFTA came into effect has ushered in a new era of consumerism–in part through an aggressive expansion built on political bribes and the destruction of ancient Aztec ruins.  

The arguments developed prior to the signing of NAFTA focused primarily on the claim that the trade agreement would make Mexico a nation of producers and exporters. These initial promises failed to deliver. Throughout the NAFTA years, the bulk of Mexico’s manufacturing “exports” have come from transnational car and technology companies. Not surprisingly, Mexico’s intra-industry trade with the United Sates is the highest of any Latin American country. Yet the percentage of Mexican companies that are actually exporters is vanishingly small, and imports of food into Mexico have surged.

Same Snake Oil, Different Pitch 

Because their initial promises utterly failed to deliver, the NAFTA pushers are now hyping “consumer benefits” to justify new trade agreements, including the Trans-Pacific Partnership. One of the most extreme examples of this spin is an article in The Washington Post that celebrates a “growing middle class” in Mexico that is “buying more U.S. goods than ever, while turning Mexico into a more democratic, dynamic and prosperous American ally.” Devoid of all logic, it goes on to say that “Mexico’s growth as a manufacturing hub is boosted by low wages.” How can low wages make people more prosperous? 

The Post also boasts that in “Mexico’s Costco stores, staples such as tortilla chips and chipotle salsa are trucked in from factories in California and Texas that produce for both sides of the border.” Is this something to celebrate? The influx of traditional Mexican food staples, starting with maize, and goods from the United States has displaced and dislocated millions of Mexican small-scale farmers, producers, and small businesses. And not only that, Mexicans’ increasing consumption of processed foods and beverages from the United States has made the country the second-most obese in the world. 

In essence, NAFTA advocates have been reduced to saying: “so maybe NAFTA didn’t help Mexico reduce poverty or increase wages. But hey! At least it gave it Walmart, Costcos, and sweat shops.”

The bankruptcy of NAFTA’s promises is only compounded by the poverty of this consolation.

Inside Game: Creating PACs and Then Spending Their Money

0

Merchandise at a Tea Party Express rally in Cedar Rapids, Iowa, August, 2011.Merchandise at a Tea Party Express rally in Cedar Rapids, Iowa, August, 2011. (Photo: IowaPolitics.com)In August 2008, as the right wing of the Republican Party grew increasingly disenchanted with the party’s direction, the men from Russo, Marsh and Associates sensed opportunity: They created a political action committee, Our Country Deserves Better, and in time launched the Tea Party Express.

Russo, Marsh–an established California outfit of Republican consultants–was just getting started. The firm formed a second political committee, this one with a pro-military agenda. And eventually, seizing on the President’s unpopularity in certain circles, they opened a third, the Campaign to Defeat Barack Obama.

Throughout the 2012 election cycle, the committees were relentless. In email after email, they pleaded for small donations to run ads supporting candidates who would defeat President Obama’s “socialist” agenda. And it worked: They collected more than $14 million in donations — from all over the country, and from donors who gave as little as $10 to elect Ted Cruz as a Republican senator from Texas or to put Mitt Romney in the White House.

Yet an examination of the PACs’ expenditures shows they spent a small percentage of the money they raised on work directly aimed at getting candidates elected — paid ads, say, or contributions to other political committees. Mainly, they paid consultants. And the biggest chunk of that consultant money went to Russo, Marsh and Associates, and people connected to the firm.

Of the $9.3 million spent by Our Country Deserves Better, more than $3.8 million went to Russo, Marsh and Associates, employees or others connected to the firm. Of the $3.9 million spent by the Campaign to Defeat Barack Obama, $2.4 million went to the firm and its associates. The pro-military Move America Forward Freedom PAC spent almost $143,000. Of that, $92,000 went to the firm and people connected to it.

Some of that money went for travel, or for ads funneled through the consultants. But most was for consulting, fundraising fees and administrative help.

It’s rare for the people who form PACs to pay and treat themselves quite so generously. In addition to paying Russo, Marsh an assortment of fees, the PACs spent money so its principals could travel well: from almost $1,300 for meals at a fondue restaurant in Ohio on Oct. 18, to more than $50,000 for consultants and staff to occasionally stay at a golf resort on Lake Michigan last fall.

Meanwhile, the people who gave money had no idea that such amounts would go to consultants, not to the nuts and bolts efforts to get preferred candidates elected and their opponents defeated.

“How does Joe Average know this?” asked Linda Knox, 73, who with her husband gave $585 to the Campaign to Defeat Barack Obama, mainly in $10 and $15 increments, after learning of the PAC’s spending habits. “Of course I want the money to go to elect people who share my values, not to consultants.”

No one from Russo, Marsh and Associates returned calls asking for comment. The two largest PACs didn’t respond to emails and calls. Danny Gonzalez, a spokesman at the pro-military PAC, said: “I was not aware of what the particular numbers are.” He said he would prepare a more detailed response.

Shawn Callahan, who’s worked for Russo, Marsh and now does consulting for the PACs, said Our Country Deserves Better did much more than just contribute to campaigns “in a traditional sense.” He said the PAC focused on coordinating unpaid grassroots activists, and spent much of its money on political organizing. He said the Tea Party Express held more than 400 rallies over the past three years, adding that the group had been credited with making the difference in dozens of House races.

“What looks like overhead is not overhead, but the costs of performing the mission of rallying citizens to get involved in conservative politics,” he wrote in an email. At a later point, he added: “As a political activist and donor myself, I hope that donors are proud of all that we have accomplished together. I know I am.” 

While many watchdog organizations track how political committees raise money, few look at how the money is ultimately disbursed. PACs can spend their money as they want — on legal fees, on big meals, on trips to Dubai. But while PACs often devote some money to fundraising, most spend the bulk of contributions on efforts clearly aimed at electing specific candidates.

This last election, more than 3,000 PACs like the Russo, Marsh ones – independent committees supporting more than one candidate and not officially run by a lobbying group – spent almost half a billion dollars. Two-thirds of those committees spent most of their money directly supporting candidates.

PACs like these are allowed to donate money to a candidate or candidate committee – up to $5,000 per election. They can also donate up to $15,000 to a national political party committee and $5,000 to local parties or other political committees every year. But PACs also often spend money on what are known as independent expenditures, such as TV ads and phone calls supporting or opposing candidates. This spending can be unlimited, but it must be done independent of the candidates, meaning that the candidates often aren’t even aware it’s happening — especially with PACs that don’t spend much on ads.

Longtime conservative activist Sal Russo, who helped found the consulting firm that became Russo, Marsh and Associates in Sacramento, Calif., in 1976, has a long history with mainstream Republicans. He got his big break as an aide to Ronald Reagan, when he was California’s governor. Russo developed longtime ties with several conservative politicians, including Utah Sen. Orrin Hatch. He worked on the campaigns of former presidential candidate Jack Kemp and former New York Gov. George Pataki.

Questions about the role of Russo, Marsh and Associates with political committees are not entirely new. The New York Times and Talking Points Memo detailed how one of the committees, Our Country Deserves Better, had paid out a substantial amount of money to the Russo, Marsh firm in 2009 and 2010. Sal Russo told The New York Times his firm did nothing wrong.

One Republican consultant, who would not be identified, said that PACs that raise and spend money like Russo, Marsh in the end hurt the efforts and reputation of conservatives, while often failing to have any truly reliable influence on election night.

After the 2012 elections — and despite critical news stories in several publications — the PACs got back to work. The Campaign to Defeat Barack Obama changed its name to the Conservative Campaign Committee just after the election, and emails this week from the group have asked people to send money for ads supporting Larry Grooms, who is running in a Republican primary for a U.S. House seat in South Carolina.

“Any entity that raises money under the banner of a certain cause and then doesn’t spend money on that cause raises serious questions,” said Hogan Gidley, a consultant with Grooms’ campaign, adding that the campaign wasn’t affiliated with the Conservative Campaign Committee and that he wasn’t familiar with the inner workings of the group.

Of the donors who give to such committees, Gidley said, “They should hold the groups’ collective feet to the fire and make sure the money is going to its stated purpose.”

The Our Country Deserves Better PAC, which created the Tea Party Express, “the most aggressive and influential national Tea Party group in the political arena,” according to its website, spent some of the $9.3 million it ran through in this election cycle on bus tours and rallies.

But it spent only 10 percent of its money directly on elections — $259,500 in contributions to political committees and candidates, and $681,000 on independent expenditures, most of which were funneled through Russo, Marsh and Associates.

The PAC spent almost half its money on fundraising, often using the Russo, Marsh firm or affiliated consultants. That fundraising ratio – spending almost $1 to earn $2 – is very high in the world of political action committees.

And the PAC also let its consultants live rather large: $3,500 for “PAC Election Night Headquarters” at a casino-resort in Las Vegas, $3,200 for meals and a meeting at a Mediterranean restaurant in Boston in February 2011, more than $1,000 for parking at LaGuardia Airport in New York in May 2011.

Barely one-third of the $3.9 million spent by The Campaign to Defeat Barack Obama went to truly focused efforts at electing candidates, but its consultants traveled comfortably: More than $4,500 to stay at Caesars Palace in Las Vegas in June, more than $8,200 to stay at the Paris Las Vegas Hotel in July.

Individual consultants, including current or former Russo, Marsh employees, did very well.

Joe Wierzbicki, who works at Russo, Marsh and Associates, pulled in almost $528,000 from two of the PACs. Most of that came from the Our Country Deserves Better PAC, which describes Wierzbicki on its website as “PAC coordinator” but neglects to mention he is a senior account executive at the Russo, Marsh firm.

Ryan Gill, who has also worked for the pro-military PAC and a related charity, was paid almost $592,000 from the two PACs, mostly from the Campaign to Defeat Barack Obama, for strategic consulting, fundraising commissions, travel reimbursement and on-line ads supporting several candidates.

In July alone, the Campaign to Defeat Barack Obama paid Gill about $5,300 on July 2, $2,300 on July 3, $4,100 on July 6, and $12,000 on July 9, calling the payments “fundraising salary.” Then he was paid $5,000 for “PAC strategy consulting” on July 20. He was also paid $7,400 for online advertising to promote certain candidates. And he was reimbursed almost $12,300 for travel.

Until last year, Callahan, the former Russo, Marsh employee, was the executive director of the pro-military charity. Callahan then helped form a business called Frontline Strategies & Media.

Two of the PACs paid Frontline Strategies about $386,000, for fundraising commissions, consulting and website maintenance.

Callahan is also the founding chief executive officer of a company called DonationSafe, which the three PACs paid $450,000 for credit-card processing fees.

In responses to emailed questions, Callahan said he had to pay multiple employees for Frontline who “are dedicated full time to those accounts.” He said the PAC payments help cover his employees’ salaries, “along with all the other costs that come from running a business.”

The PACs linked with Russo, Marsh and Associates frequently attach themselves to popular causes or candidates or topics in the news. In past weeks, for example, they’ve sent emails praising Republican Sens. Rand Paul and Ted Cruz, while asking for donations.

This month, the Conservative Campaign Committee – formerly the Campaign to Defeat Barack Obama – has sent out emails, asking supporters to pony up $35,000 for a radio ad campaign backing Grooms in South Carolina. One email urged supporters to volunteer for Grooms and to give money to support him – not to Grooms’ actual campaign, but to the PAC. That email also linked to the proposed radio ad and to two TV ads that were actually put out by Grooms’ campaign–a nuance that would likely be lost on many supporters, who would probably think that the PAC was somehow involved in the TV ads.

“So many of you have told us how much you want to see real action taken to stop Barack Obama’s radical agenda,” said another email, sent March 6, with the subject line of “Time Sensitive: Your attention required.” “That’s why it’s so important for Larry Grooms to win this election–we need his voice and his vote in Congress to defeat Obama’s aggressive push for socialism.”

It won’t be clear until July how much the PAC raised. But it’s already reporting some of what it spent. The cost of sending out the two emails was $1,670, and it was paid to Russo, Marsh and Associates.

Swiss tourist brutally gang-raped in front of husband in central India

0

Published time: March 16, 2013 14:14

A woman stands in front of an illuminated house powered by solar energy at Meerwada village of Guna district in the central Indian state of Madhya Pradesh.(Reuters / Adnan Abidi)

A Swiss tourist’s Indian vacation took a horrific turn Friday night after she was brutally gang-raped by a group of eight people in the state of Madhya Pradesh. Around 15 people have been detained by police, the Times of India reported.

The gruesome incident occurred around 9:00pm local time on Friday, in a desolate jungle area of the Datia district. The victim’s husband told police that four people raped the woman in front of him, while the rest of the men restrained the couple.  

According to police official S.M. Afzal Datia, the suspects allegedly attacked the 39-year-old woman with canes and other weapons. They assaulted the victim’s husband and stole the couple’s cash, laptop, camera, flashlights, and mobile phones.

The woman was rushed to Gwalior district hospital, where doctors confirmed the rape and assault. She has since been discharged.

Police Director-General Nandan Kumar Dubey said the suspects have been identified. The matter has also been reported to the minister of external affairs and the embassy, he said.

But National Commission for Women (NCW) chair Mamata Sharma said the local government should be doing far more in the wake of the crime. “The government has remained stoic and are not taking appropriate steps in the right direction,” she said in a statement.  

The Swiss woman and her husband were touring the area by bicycle and camping overnight in the forest. They had been vacationing in India for the past three months.

This was the second recent case of a foreign tourist being raped in Madhya Pradesh. In February, a 23-year-old South Korean student reported that she was drugged and raped by the son of a local hotel owner.

The attack comes just three months after a 23-year-old student was gang-raped and beaten in a moving bus and thrown onto the street. She later died in a Singapore hospital. The case sparked outrage throughout the country, and cast a spotlight on the safety of women in India. 

Indian students of various organisations hold placards as they shout slogans during a demonstration in Hyderabad on January 3, 2013.(AFP Photo / Noah Seelam)

People stand next to a bus that was damaged by the demonstrators during a protest in New Delhi March 1, 2013.(Reuters / Stringer)

Earlier this month, 500 people gathered to protest the January rape of a 7-year-old girl in the Indian state of Goa. Several policemen and locals were injured, as officers used batons against stone-throwing demonstrators.

The crimes have prompted lawmakers to push through measures aimed at providing protection for women throughout the country.

On Saturday, India’s United Progressive Alliance government announced that such a law would be passed soon: “To stop crime against women, a law will soon be passed,” UPA chair Sonia Gandhi said in a statement.

Gandhi’s statement came two days after the Union Cabinet cleared a bill mandating stringent punishment for rape and other crimes. The bill sets a minimum jail term of 20 years for rape.

Government statistics indicate that a woman is raped every 20 minutes in India, although the country’s conviction rate for rape crimes is one of the lowest in the world.

Indian students of various organisations hold placards as they shout slogans during a demonstration in Hyderabad on January 3, 2013.(AFP Photo / Noah Seelam)

What Is Modern Monetary Theory, or “MMT”?

0

Hundred dollar bill macro(Photo: Tetsumo)Modern Monetary Theory is a way of doing economics that incorporates a clear understanding of the way our present-day monetary system actually works — it emphasizes the frequently misunderstood dynamics of our so-called “fiat-money” economy. Most people are unnerved by the thought that money isn’t “backed” by anything anymore — backed by gold, for example. They’re afraid that this makes money a less reliable store of value. And, of course, it is perfectly true that a poorly managed monetary system, or one which is experiencing something like an oil-price shock, can also experience inflation. But people today simply don’t realize how much bigger a problem the opposite condition can be. Under the gold standard, and largely because of the gold standard, the capitalist world endured eight different deflationary slumps severe enough to be called “depressions.” Since the gold standard was abolished, there have been none — and, as we shall see, this is anything but coincidental.

The great virtue of modern, fiat money is that it can be managed flexibly enough to prevent *both* deflation and also any truly damaging level of inflation — that is, a situation where prices are rising faster than wages, or where both are rising so fast they distort a country’s internal or external markets. Without going into the details prematurely, there are technical reasons why a little bit of inflation is useful and normal. It discourages people from hoarding money and encourages healthy levels of consumption and investment. It promotes growth — provided that a country’s fiscal and monetary authorities manage it properly.

The trick is for the government to spend enough to ensure full employment, but not so much, or in such a way, as to cause shortages or bottlenecks in the real economy. These shortages and bottlenecks are the actual cause of most episodes of excessive inflation. If the mere existence of fiat monetary systems caused runaway inflation, the low, stable rates of consumer-price inflation we have seen over the past thirty-plus years would be pretty difficult to explain.

The essential insight of Modern Monetary Theory (or “MMT”) is that sovereign, currency-issuing countries are only constrained by real limits. They are not constrained, and cannot be constrained, by purely financial limits because, as issuers of their respective fiat-currencies, they can never “run out of money.” This doesn’t mean that governments can spend without limit, or overspend without causing inflation, or that government should spend any sum unwisely. What it emphatically does mean is that no such sovereign government can be forced to tolerate mass unemployment because of the state of its finances — no matter what that state happens to be.

Virtually all economic commentary and punditry today, whether in America, Europe or most other places, is based on ideas about the monetary system which are not merely confused — they are starkly and comprehensively counter-factual. This has led to a public discourse about things like budget deficits and Treasury debt which has become, without exaggeration, utterly detached from reality. Time and time again, these pundits declaim that hyperinflation is imminent, that interest rates are on the verge of an uncontrollable upward spike, and that the jig will be up for sure just as soon as the next T-bond auction fails. But even though, time after time, it is the pundits’ prognostications which fail, no one seems to take any notice. This must change. A reality-based economics is needed to make these things make sense again, and Modern Monetary Theory is here to put everyone on notice that a quite different jig is the one that’s really up.

The gold standard was finally and completely abolished over the course of a two-year period which started in 1971, when Richard Nixon ended the convertibility of the dollar for gold and devalued U.S. currency for the first time since the end of World War II. In 1973, the U.S. stopped trying to peg the dollar to any currency or commodity, instead allowing its value to be set on a freely-floating international currency market. The monetary system we inaugurated then is the one we still have now.

It is not the same as the one which has been adopted by most of Europe — and this very prominent source of confusion about the role of money in the world today will receive close scrutiny at the proper point. But first, we need to carefully unpack the implications of taking both gold and any sort of “peg” out of the monetary equation in the first place. In 1971, gold-linked money became fiat-money — not for the first time, of course, but for the first time in a long time. And it wasn’t just any currency. It was, by far, the world’s most important currency, economically. It was also the world’s reserve currency — the good-as-gold and backed-by-gold currency which the entire non-communist world used to settle transactions between various countries’ central banks. And yet, what everyone, and especially every American was told at the time was that it really wouldn’t make much difference. 

The political emphasis, at the time, was entirely on the importance of making sure that no one panicked. The officials of the Nixon administration acted like cops who had just roped off a fresh crime scene: “Just move right along, folks,” they kept intoning. “Nuthin’ to see here. Nuthin’, to see.” All of the experts and pundits said essentially the same thing — this was just a necessary technical adjustment that was only about complicated international banking rules. It wouldn’t affect domestic-economy transactions at all, or matter to anyone’s individual economic life. And so it didn’t — at least, not right away or in any way that got linked back to the event in later years. The world moved on, and Nixon’s action was mainly just remembered as a typical, high-handed Nixonian move — one which at least carried along with it the virtue of having pissed off Charles De Gaulle.

But what had really happened was epoch-making and paradigm-shattering. It was also, for the rest of the 1970s, polymorphously destabilizing. Because no one had a plan for, or knew, what all of this was going to mean for the reserve currency status of the U.S. dollar. Certainly not Richard Nixon, who was by then embroiled in the early stages of the Watergate scandal. But no one else was in charge of this either. In the moment, other countries and their central banks followed Washington’s line. They wanted to forestall any kind of panic too. But, inevitably, as the real consequences of the new monetary regime kicked in, and as unforeseen and unintended knock-on effects began to be felt, this changed.

The world had a choice to make after the closing of the gold window, but even though it was a very important choice, with very high-stakes outcomes attached to it, there was no international mechanism for making it — it just had to emerge from the chaos. Either the U.S. dollar was going to  continue to be the world’s reserve currency or it wasn’t. If it wasn’t, the related but separate question of what to use instead would come to the fore. But, as things unfolded, no other choice could be imposed on the only economic powerhouse-nation, so all the other little nations eventually just had to work out ways to adjust to the new status quo.

Even after Euro-dollar chaos, oil market chaos, inflationary chaos, a ferocious multi-national property crash and a severe, double-dip American recession, the dollar continued to be the reserve currency. And it still wasn’t going to be either backed by gold or exchangeable at any fixed rate for anything else. But while the implications of this were enormous, almost no one understood them at the time, or ever, subsequently, figured them out. For the 1970s was the period during which Keynesianism was decertified as the reigning economic philosophy of the capitalist world — replaced by something which, at least initially, purported to have internalized and improved upon it. This too was a choice that wasn’t so much made as stumbled into. The chaotic, crisis-wracked world we now live in is the one which subsequent versions of this then-new economic perspective have helped to create.

Conventional, so-called “neo-classical” economics pays little or no attention to monetary dynamics, treating money as just a “veil” over the activity of utility-maximizing individual “agents”. And, as hard as this is for non-economists to believe, the models which these ‘mainstream’ economists make do not even try to account for money, banking or debt. This is one big reason why virtually all members of the economics profession failed to see the housing bubble and were then blind-sided by both the 2008 financial collapse and the grinding, on-going Eurozone crisis which has followed in its wake. And the current group-think among ‘mainstream’ economists is yet another case where failure is no obstacle to continued funding — or continued failure. The absence of any sort of professional, intellectual or academic accountability will be a theme here.

The public policy reversal that began with Margaret Thatcher and Ronald Reagan promised that the deregulation of capitalism would lead to greater shared prosperity for everyone. Today, even though the falsehood of this claim is brutally obvious, the same economic nostrums and stupidities that were used to justify it in the first place continue to be trotted out and paid homage to by a class of financial-media personalities who equate making a lot of money with understanding money. It does not seem to occur to them that financial criminals and practitioners of bank-fraud can get rich through sociopathy alone.

What needs to be said is this: Keynesian economics worked before, and the improved version — now generally called “post-Keynesian” — will work again, to deliver what the market-fundamentalism of the past three decades has patently and persistently failed to deliver *anywhere in the world*. Namely — a prosperity which is shared by everyone. The principal purpose of Modern Monetary Theory is to explain, in detail, why this this worked in the past and how it can be made to work again.

Here’s how: start with a 100% payroll tax cut for both workers and employers — one that will only expire (if it does at all) when we have achieved full employment. This will not de-fund Social Security. And yes, we’ll come back to this point and cover it in great detail in due course. But first, stop and think back on the effect which federal revenue-sharing had on the economy in 2009 and 2010. If you’re thinking there were fewer teachers, nurses, policemen and fire-fighters getting laid off, you are correct. If you’re thinking that more roads, dams, bridges and sewer systems were getting repaired, you’re right again. But if you think that adding 800 million dollars to the deficit over two years is a guaranteed way to generate hyper-inflation, double-digit interest rates and bond-auction failures, leading ultimately to a frenzied worldwide rush to dump dollar-denominated financial assets, well, now would be a good time to ask yourself why you believe this.

One more point — one more plank in this three-point program to restore fiscal and monetary sanity: let’s give everyone who wants to work and is able to work some *work to do*. A currency-issuing government can purchase anything that is for sale in its own currency, including the labor of every last unemployed person who is still looking for a job. So, a key policy recommendation of Modern Monetary Theory is the idea of a “Job Guarantee”. The federal government should take the initiative and organize a transitional-job program for people who just can’t find work in the private sector — as it currently exists in real-world America today. Because the smug one-liner that starts and ends with: “Government can’t create jobs — only the private sector can create jobs!” is about the un-funniest joke on the planet right now.

The government creates millions of jobs already. Isn’t soldiering a job? Isn’t flying the President around in Air Force One a job? What about all the doctors and nurses down at the V.A. hospital, and the day-care workers on military bases? They certainly all appear to be employed. When you go into a convenience store to buy some — uh — local-and-organic Brussels sprouts, say, how closely does the clerk examine the bills and coins you tender? Did any clerk or cashier ever squint or turn your five-dollar bill sideways and back and ask, “Hmm.. are you sure this money came from work that was performed in the private sector?” No. They didn’t. Because the money governments pay to public employees is exactly the same money everyone else gets paid in.

A guaranteed transition-job would need to be different from the familiar examples cited above in certain ways. It would be important to make sure that such a program always hired “from the bottom”, not from the top. That’s an important way of making sure that such programs don’t create real-resource bottlenecks by competing with the private sector for highly skilled or specialized labor. Hence, a transition-program job would more closely resemble an entry-level job at a defense plant. Such a job only exists because of Pentagon orders for fighter planes or helmets or dog food for the K-9 units. There is no sort of ambiguity about where the stuff is going or how it is being paid for. And when the people who mow the lawn or sweep the parking lot get paid, they know, without having to think about it, that their wages will spend exactly the same way down at the grocery store as everyone else’s.

Defence spending is actually quite a good analog to the idea of a transitional-job program — one that would provide work to any and every person who wanted it. The only time the American economy ever achieved an extended, years-long period with zero unemployment, low, well-controlled inflation rates and with no significant financial aftershock at the end was the World War II era — broadly defined to include the Lend-Lease buildup of 1940 and 1941. This solution to the problem of mass unemployment worked in the 1940s and it would work today. In the 1940s, of course,the jobs were almost all war-related. But, economically, this makes no difference.

The connection between war and economic prosperity has been noticed before. It led some 19th Century thinkers (and also Jimmy Carter) to wonder whether there could be a “moral equivalent of war”. Well, there can be — by way of the Job Guarantee. The biggest pre-condition has been met, because one result of most wars has been that they forced the combatant countries off the gold standard. Now, all countries have left it. What matters next is whether there are enough real resources available to produce goods and services that are equal in value to the government’s job-guarantee spending. If these resources are available — if they are not already being used to produce something else — then the increased demand that results from the payment of job-guarantee wages will not be inflationary, regardless of what they go to produce.  

Money is 100% fungible.  Whether the job-guarantee program makes fighter planes or wind turbines makes no economic difference — the workers employed by it will spend their wages on the same things other workers buy. What matters, economically, is whether there are sufficient real resources and labor available to produce these goods and services in line with the increased demand for them. If there are, no additional government intervention is necessary in order to mobilize them. The same private-profit motivation which induces a company to produce one widget can be relied upon to induce the production of another one.

Most popular misconceptions about job-guarantee work as inefficient “make-work” ignore these private-sector dynamics. It is simply assumed that if the publicly-funded workers don’t personally contribute to making shoes or soap, their wages will result in “more money chasing the same goods” — and that this will automatically cause inflation. This is an obvious fallacy which has been empirically falsified many, many times, but most people continue to treat it as an article of economic faith. So, one of MMT’s most pressing tasks today is to make the case that we can, indeed, end mass unemployment without undermining price stability.

There are many other economic problems and challenges in the world today. Modern Monetary Theory is not a panacea for them. Even if its insights and policy recommendations become widely known, and even if they are someday fully implemented, societies will still face challenges such as inequality, regulatory capture and predatory financial behavior, including the kind of predatory mortgage lending that led to the worldwide crash in 2008. In order to understand these additional economic problems and dangers, we need to look at economics in a larger context, and correctly situate Modern Monetary Theory within this wider frame.

Modern Monetary Theory is based on earlier work which also focused on the relationship between the state and its money — ideas which come under the generic designation of “Chartalism”. MMT also remains firmly within the Keynesian tradition of macroeconomnic theorizing, and recognizes an extensive interconnectedness with other economists whose work is categorized as “post-Keynesian”. Some of MMT’s other notable academic progenitors include Hyman Minsky, Abba Lerner and, more recently, the English economist Wynne Godley, whose emphasis on achieving consistency in the analysis of economic stocks and flows presaged the emphasis which MMT-orbit economists put on it today.

The label “Modern Monetary Theory” is not particularly apt. It became attached to its advocates through the informal agency of Internet comment-threading, not because anyone considered it either very useful or very descriptive. In other words, it “just stuck”. In fact, the identity of the first person to use the “MMT” label is lost to online history. So, to be clear, MMT is only modern in the broad sense in which virtually everything that got started in the Western world in the 19th Century is called “modern”. It is not exclusively monetary either — it has quite a bit to say about fiscal policy as well. And it was not, initially, theoretical — it started as a body of quite empirical observations about the dynamics of the monetary system and the many ways they are being misunderstood these days. For MMT has a dual pedigree which is itself quite remarkable.

On the one hand, it represents the patient, decades-long academic work of a cadre of perhaps eight or ten working economists (originally there were three or four, plus their students). But MMT was independently co-discovered by a single person. A person who had no specific training or academic background in economics at all — the American businessman and auto-racing enthusiast Warren Mosler. How he came to initially suspect and, ultimately, clearly understand that the spending of sovereign governments had become operationally independent of their taxing and borrowing is recounted in his 2010 book, “The Seven Deadly Innocent Frauds of Economic Policy.”  The 1996 publication of an earlier book of his, “Soft-Currency Economics,” launched MMT as a social, intellectual and online movement. And while the academic side of MMT was completely unknown to him at first, it was not long before the two camps discovered each other, and this has led to a very extensive collaboration in the years since.

Today, MMT is being discovered by a rapidly-growing worldwide Internet audience. And the public’s growing interest in MMT is evident in other ways as well. One of the movement’s leading spokespersons, Dr. Stephanie Kelton of the University of Missouri at Kansas City, has been a repeat guest on an MSNBC weekend show. She, and other MMT economists, are frequent guests on a number of popular, mostly-progressive radio programs as well — both in the U.S. and in English-speaking countries around the world. And Warren Mosler’s seminal 2010 book was recently published in Italian.

(For obvious reasons, the stressed and austerity-damaged countries of the Eurozone’s southern tier are places where people are becoming more open to fresh economic ideas. At a 3-day conference in Rimini, Italy in 2012, a panel of four MMT/post-Keynesian speakers lectured to a crowd of over 2,000 people in a packed sports arena. Many in the audience crossed multiple international borders to attend.)

MMT has been mentioned, though not yet accurately described, in several of Paul Krugman’s columns for the New York Times. And certain aspects of it have been noticed even more widely in the media — for MMT is the theoretical basis of the “trillion-dollar coin” approach to fiscal cliffs. (The idea was first proposed and debated on Warren Mosler’s website.) In short, MMT is getting harder and harder to ignore. And since it really does have answers to some of the world’s most urgent and otherwise perplexing questions, it seems likely that MMT will soon become quite impossible to ignore. What follows is written to try to hasten that day.

This will be an intentionally simplified, non-technical exposition of the principal tenets of Modern Monetary Theory. The no-algebra version, in other words. It is intended as a guide for non-economists and other lay people who may have heard the phrase or seen a video clip about MMT and who wish to learn more. It is not a substitute for more complete and, necessarily, much more technical treatments that are available elsewhere, including the MMT Primer here at NEP.

Confining myself to examples and cases so widely known that no one will wonder where they came from accounts for the absence of footnotes in this. And since I make no claim to have learned knowledge of anything, I will just say, up front, that everything I know was thought of first by someone else. But rather than interrupt the narrative or complicate the process by trying to establish who said any particular thing first, I hope it is sufficient for me to just thank the MMT community at large for any material that I have borrowed or re-purposed along the way.

I also depart, here, from MMT’s mostly-neutral stance on contested political and ideological questions. For while MMT principles apply equally, irrespective of things like the size of government or the conceptions and misconceptions of people running governments, it has a policy bias no one can really miss.  I choose to emphasize rather than de-emphasize this bias — and I will sometimes even put it front-and-center. I hope no one will mistake this for any sort of rebuke toward those who choose not to do this. We have simply reached a point where practical applications need to be put on an equal footing with their theoretical underpinnings.

For somewhere — maybe somewhere in Italy — and on a day which may not be all that far off now, Modern Monetary Theory is going to start changing the world.

Hundreds commemorate Waffen SS divisions in Latvia, anti-fascists outraged (PHOTOS)

0

Published time: March 16, 2013 13:36

Men holding flowers take part in the annual procession commemorating the Latvian Waffen-SS (Schutzstaffel) unit, also known as the Legionnaires, in Riga March 16, 2013.(Reuters / Ints Kalnins)

Veterans of the Latvian Waffen SS and their supporters marched in the Latvian capital Riga to honor their comrades killed fighting for Nazi Germany during World War II. Several arrests were made after the march walked into an anti-fascist demonstration.

The annual event has stirred controversy, not for the first time, sparking outrage both in Latvia and abroad as many consider it a glorification of Nazism.

Authorities in Riga had banned the parade in previous years due to security concerns. This year, the Riga City Council’s first Russian mayor, Nil Ushakov [Nils UÅ¡akovs], also banned public gatherings on March 16, what many consider Legionnaires’ Day, in order to prevent riots.

However, the council has allowed the demonstration this year, ruling that such gatherings pose no threat to public safety.

Riot police officers stand guard during the annual procession commemorating the Latvian Waffen-SS (Schutzstaffel) unit, also known as the Legionnaires, in Riga March 16, 2013.(Reuters / Ints Kalnins)

RT correspondent Aleksey Yaroshevsky, who is currently in Latvia, reported that Latvian SS veterans gathered at the freedom monument in Riga.

At the same time, a small group of mainly Russians protested behind barricades about 15 meters away. They blared war sirens and Soviet songs to disperse the crowd. Some chanted “Shame!” and “Nazism won’t pass!”

A large number of police units have been deployed to keep the two sides apart.

Three deputies of the Latvian Seim (parliament) — who are also members of a far-right Latvian political party — Raivis Dzintars, Imants Parādnieks and Jānis Dombrava, managed to break through the police cordon and damage one of the installations. They tore apart pictures of Nazi concentration camp victims.

At least four people were arrested at the Saturday procession.

Police officers arrest a man during the Latvian Legionnaire Remembrance Day, a force that was commanded by the German Nazi Waffen SS, as they commemorate a key 1944 battle on March 16, 2013.(AFP Photo / Ilmars Znotins)

From 1998 to 2000, March 16 has been an official remembrance day in the country to pay tribute to the Latvian Legion.

The Legion was created in 1943 on orders from Adolf Hitler. In March of the same year, the Legion was already battling the Soviet Red Army near the town of Pskov. In total, about 150,000 soldiers served in its ranks.

People hold Latvian national flags during the annual procession commemorating the Latvian Waffen-SS (Schutzstaffel) unit, also known as the Legionnaires, in Riga March 16, 2013.(Reuters / Ints Kalnins)

People hold Latvian and Estonian (R) national flags during the annual procession commemorating the Latvian Waffen-SS (Schutzstaffel) unit, also known as the Legionnaires, in Riga March 16, 2013.(Reuters / Ints Kalnins)

Drone strikes in Syria? CIA ‘boosting’ intelligence force to ‘size up’ Syrian extremists

0

Published time: March 16, 2013 11:47

A Syrian rebel crosses a street while trying to dodge sniper fire in the old city of Aleppo in northern Syria.(AFP Photo / Jm Lopez)

The CIA may be preparing for lethal drone strikes in Syria, as it is extending its intelligence-gathering on Islamic radicals in the country, US media has reported. At the same time, US officials are pressing for the supplying arms to rebels.

“The CIA has stepped up secret contingency planning to protect the United States and its allies as the turmoil expands in Syria, including collecting intelligence on Islamic extremists for the first time for possible lethal drone strikes,” according to current and former US officials, reported in the LA Times.

The agency’s counterterrorism center has recently transferred an unspecified number of targeting officers to the area. The center is notorious for its previous drone campaigns in Yemen and Pakistan.

Targeting officers are responsible for the compilation of large packages of information on specific zones. Those working on Syria are currently based at the organization’s headquarters in Langley, Virginia, as not many US operatives have been deployed to the area.

The increased focus on identifying threats in Syria carries the implication that the agency is preparing plans for counter-action — both violent and nonviolent — against potential militants, the Los Angeles Times reported.

“If we do this, why don’t we start droning people in Hezbollah?” a former CIA officer with experience in Iraq told the Los Angeles Times. “It opens the door for a lot of other things.”

In a trend apparently countering the CIA’s alleged security efforts, a US lawmaker is set to propose a bill on Monday in support of providing arms and training to Syrian opposition forces, as well as economic backing. Should the arms be delivered, they could easily fall into the hands of the same militants they seek to suppress.

Rep. Eliot Engel, the top Democrat on the House Foreign Affairs Committee, wrote a letter to his house colleagues seeking their support for a bill to provide arms and training to Syrian rebels, applying pressure to the Obama’s administration.

“US training and arming of carefully vetted Syrian opposition forces offer many potential benefits, but two stand out above all: Bringing the humanitarian disaster to an end as soon as possible and helping ensure that the US has a constructive relationship with a successor government in Damascus,” said the letter obtained by AP.

The idea is supported by officials from both parties — last month, Republican Sen. Marco Rubio suggested providing the Syrian opposition with ammunition, and Secretary of State John Kerry announced a package of ‘nonlethal assistance.’

European media reported that the US, UK and France are already training rebels in Jordan, while Paris and London are both attempting to bring forward an EU meeting to lift the arms embargo on Syria. Planned for May, the two countries are pressing for it to take place before the end of March.

If the union does not end the embargo, the two nations will still arm the Syrian rebels, France said.

However, this course of action could come with its own problems: “Weapons are in high demand by all rebel factions and there is little means to effectively prevent arms from gravitating toward hardcore Al-Qaeda fighters,” political analyst Nile Bowie told RT.

On Wednesday, Russian Foreign Minister Sergey Lavrov said that any arming of the opposition in Syria would be a violation of international law.

On Friday, Syria witnessed the second anniversary of the uprising from which the conflict sprouted, with many saying they feared for the country’s future.

Chavez laid to rest at Venezuelan military museum (PHOTOS, VIDEO)

0

Published time: March 16, 2013 10:55

Download video (114.92 MB)

Late Venezuelan leader Hugo Chavez’s was laid to rest in a military museum in the capital Caracas. Thousands of supporters came out for a final farewell as the coffin was taken from military academy to the museum, ending a 10-day mourning period.

The procession was accompanied by religious and political ceremonies, and acting President Nicolas Maduro made a speech telling Chavez “to go in peace.”

Chavez passed away last week after leading the country for 14 years.

Venezuela will not embalm the body of president Hugo Chavez, Information Minister Ernesto Villegas wrote on Twitter on Friday. 

 Handout picture released by the Venezuelan presidency showing members of the presidential Honour Guard surrounding the coffin with the remains of late Venezuelan President Hugo Chavez at a temporary resting place at the former "4 de Febrero" barracks -- a barracks-turned-museum that the former paratrooper had used as his headquarters during a failed 1992 coup attempt -- in Caracas, on March 15, 2013.(AFP Photo / Presidencia)

It was determined that Chavez’s body was not sufficiently prepared for embalming, and the time elapsed since his death may have hindered the process.

Russian medics said that “in order to do the procedure, the body would have to be transported to Russia and remain there for seven to eight months,” Villegas explained.

The deceased president’s final resting place remains unclear, as the government wants to amend the constitution and bury Chavez in the National Pantheon with other important Venezuelan leaders.

Chavez had said he wanted to be buried in his hometown of Barinas, in western Venezuela.

Handout picture released by the Venezuelan presidency showing a general view after the arrival of the coffin with the remains of late Venezuelan President Hugo Chavez to its temporary resting place at the former "4 de Febrero" barracks -- a barracks-turned-museum that the former paratrooper had used as his headquarters during a failed 1992 coup attempt -- in Caracas, on March 15, 2013.(AFP Photo / Presidencia)Handout picture released by the Venezuelan presidency showing members of the presidential Honour Guard carrying the coffin with the remains of late Venezuelan President Hugo Chavez as it arrives at a temporary resting place at the former "4 de Febrero" barracks -- a barracks-turned-museum that the former paratrooper had used as his headquarters during a failed 1992 coup attempt -- in Caracas, on March 15, 2013.(AFP Photo / Presidencia)

The hearse carrying the remains of late Venezuelan President Hugo Chavez heads to his resting place at the former "4 de Febrero" barracks -- a barracks-turned-museum that the former paratrooper had used as his headquarters during a failed 1992 coup attempt -- in Caracas, on March 15, 2013.(AFP Photo / Luis Camacho)

Pallbearers carry the coffin of Venezuela's late President Hugo Chavez to a hearse prior to a funeral parade in Caracas March 15, 2013.(Reuters / Miraflores Palace)

People react as the hearse carrying the body of Venezuela's late President Hugo Chavez drives past during his funeral parade in Caracas March 15, 2013.(Reuters / Tomas Bravo)

Canadian police arrest over 250 at anti-brutality rally

0

Published time: March 16, 2013 09:48

Demonstrators are kettled and arrested by police during the annual anti-police brutality march in Montreal, March 15, 2013.(Reuters / Christinne Muschi)

Police have rounded up more than 250 protesters participating in the annual march against police brutality in the francophone Canadian city of Montreal, Quebec. Friday’s march was declared illegal, as participants failed to disclose its itinerary.

“We sent a message right at the beginning,” said Cmdr. Ian Lafreniere of the Montreal police, citing municipal bylaw P-6 during a press conference after the march.“They didn’t share a route, they didn’t share their itinerary, they refused to give us a location where they were heading. That’s the reason we put a stop to that.”

Twelve others were arrested for criminal activity, including possession of incendiary materials, assault on a police officer, mischief and making threats. Another 150 were fined over US$600 for participating in an illegal assembly, CBC reported.

A demonstrator is arrested by police during the annual anti-police brutality march in Montreal, March 15, 2013.(Reuters / Christinne Muschi)

Police began making their first arrests before the march had even begun. After the march started, police stopped demonstrators and randomly searched their bags. Officers also used wedge formations to split the crowd into smaller groups.

“There’s as many police officers as there are protesters,” university student Dominique Cyr told CTV News. “In the beginning the police were very aggressive… It’s a criminal act that the police are doing on the people and they must pay for their crimes.”

At least six people were injured during the rally, two police officers and four demonstrators. None of the injuries were life-threatening. Police officers were transported to a hospital, one of whom had two broken teeth. 

A demonstrator is arrested by police during the annual anti-police brutality march in Montreal, March 15, 2013.(Reuters / Christinne Muschi)

The march against police brutality is an annual event that had been taking place for the past 17 years to mark the International Day against Police Brutality. Historically, the demonstrations have ended in violence and mass arrests.

The 2012 rally coincided with student protests and turned violent, with 226 arrests taking place. Montreal saw a surge in protests, violence and mass arrests last year as students demonstrated against the province’s tuition hikes. The demonstrations resulted in tougher regulations for assembly.

A demonstrator is arrested by police during the annual anti-police brutality march in Montreal, March 15, 2013.(Reuters / Christinne Muschi)

Back from space: ISS trio returns to Earth after 24hr delay

0

Published time: March 16, 2013 09:30

Download video (105.76 MB)

A Soyuz capsule has safely landed in northeast Kazakhstan, returning two Russian and one American astronauts back to Earth, after a missions on the International Space Station (ISS) that lasted nearly five months.

It took the capsule carrying expedition commander Kevin Ford and a pair of flight engineers, Oleg Novitsky and Evgeny Tarelkin, less than three-and-a-half hours to descend. It was the first trip to space for the Russian cosmonauts, and the second for their American colleague.

The trio came home after 142 days in space. Their return was initially scheduled for March 14, but was postponed due to bad weather conditions on the ground.

The crewmembers orbited the Earth 2,304 times during their stay aboard the station, traveling 98,169,984 kilometers, according to space.com.

Three other crewmembers remain aboard the space station: Canadian astronaut Chris Hadfield, Russian cosmonaut Roman Romanenko and NASA astronaut Tom Marshburn. Hadfield is now the commander, meaning a Canadian astronaut is in charge of the ISS for the first time in its history. In less than two weeks, cosmonauts Pavel Vinogradov and Aleksandr Misurkin and NASA astronaut Chris Cassidy are expected to arrive at the station.

The challenge for the next space mission crew, the 35th, is to reach the ISS in record time — six hours — way outstripping the current time of two days, thanks to a launch trajectory currently undergoing tests.

The launch is scheduled for March 28 at 2043 GMT from the Baikonur Cosmodrome in Kazakhstan.

Meanwhile, another adventurer packing up for her long-awaited space trip is Phantom of the Opera star Sarah Brightman. In December, the Space Adventures agency finally confirmed that the British soprano signed an agreement with the Russian Space Agency securing her a space trip in 2015.

Brightman is set to become the next space tourist to the ISS, following Cirque du Soleil founder Guy Laliberte, who traveled into space in 2009.

5 Corrupt Things About New Jersey Governor Chris Christie

0

Christie knows you can piss off some of the people some of the time, just as long as you don’t rock the billionaires’ boats.

New Jersey governor Chris Christie speaks at a press conference on superstorm Sandy cleanup efforts, in Hoboken, New Jersey, on November 4, 2012.
Photo Credit: Photo: AFP

March 15, 2013  |  

Like this article?

Join our email list:

Stay up to date with the latest headlines via email.

Since last October, Chris Christie has been embraced by President Obama, friended by Mark Zuckerberg, and praised by Bill Maher. In a political time of fracture he’s seemingly been the healer; in a time of discord, he’s been portrayed as leading the singers in Kumbaya — all five verses.

Nonsense. The only true bipartisanship the governor has managed has been the delicate balance between his glistening public persona and the ugly reality of his stewardship of an essential northeastern state. He is extraordinarily deft at it: he can annoy the rowdies who wouldn’t invite him to CPAC yet still get the Koch brothers to welcome him to their table and happily help him write his laws. Christie knows that conservatives come in two main types: the loud bullies who always back the wrong horse and always steer him straight to the glue factory, and the stealth guys in the suits who have all the money.

Embrace the president after Superstorm Sandy and you enrage the former. Bill O’Reilly tried to blame Mitt Romney’s loss on it. One of the interchangable umbrage merchants at the Washington Times called for Christie’s excommunication. The governor even caused Laura Ingraham to bray loudly about him becoming a Democrat. 

But the political genius of Chris Christie lies in his awareness that you can piss off some of the people some of the time, just so long as you don’t rock the billionaires’ boats. More over, sacrifice the correct group of the overheated — like the ones still clinging to a Romney victory only they and Romney believed still possible — and you suddenly look like you’re putting the public interest over political dogma, and you stand out like a beacon to milder liberals looking for somebody on the other side who just might possibly not be stark raving mad.

As Christie tries to hone this high-wire act on a national stage and shove the Marco Rubios and Jeb Bushes off the 2016 stage, it is instructive to realize that the act is not new — only the venue is. Stage dramatic budget cuts in front of the gullible local media and they’ll write encomiums about your courage that the hurried national media will devour amid their limited research. The national guys may find out about the $28 million Christie cut from healthcare for women and the elderly; they’ll never be told about the $260 million in his budget wasted on an Atlantic City casino that reported $35 million in losses in just its first three months of operation.

The national media sees the hug with Obama and the daring pushback against “Corzine Democrats.” It never sees the state teetering on the verge of 10% unemployment, nor the seemingly impossible reality of Christie advocating tax cuts that would drain more than a billion dollars from the money the state is taking in, while he still managed to increase his budget by a whopping 6.8% from 2011 to 2012.

And Christie bipartisanship — maintaining his own image despite vast piles of facts that contradict it at every turn — runs through not merely legislation but also ethics. This is New Jersey we’re talking about: the four governors elected before Christie were: 1) the guy who went back to private business and lost $1.6 billion in customer investments in about 18 months; 2) the guy who resigned with his wife at his side at a news conference during which he announced he was gay; 3) the woman who claimed black men competed with each other to see who could produce the most children out of wedlock, and then personally frisked one of them during a police ride-along; and 4) the anti-gun liberal who desperately tried to hold onto the governor’s mansion by promising to crack down on “welfare mothers.” 

The Whole Story Behind Whole Foods’ Big Announcement That’s Shaking up the Food World

0

While the grocery chain has good news, let’s take a look at what led up to the announcement, and where the plan falls short.

Photo Credit: wallyg via Flickr creative commons

March 15, 2013  |  

Like this article?

Join our email list:

Stay up to date with the latest headlines via email.

Whole Foods Market (WFM) is being praised in the media for announcing that it will become the first U.S. grocery chain to require that genetically engineered (GE) foods in its stores be labeled, by 2018. This is a victory for consumers and the GE labeling movement. And it’s a major setback for Monsanto, who for 20 years has worked hand-in-hand with the U.S. Food & Drug Administration to uphold the myth that GE foods and crops are “substantially equivalent” to non-GE foods, that they are perfectly safe, and shouldn’t require labels.

But let’s take a look at what led up to the announcement, and where the plan falls short.

It is consumer pressure that has finally forced WFM’s hand. Last year, consumers hammered WFM when the company dragged its heels on supporting California’s Proposition 37, a Nov. 7 citizens’ ballot initiative that would have required labels on all GE foods. The measure was narrowly defeated by a misleading $45-million ad campaign, paid for by the biotech and food giants. After calls and emails to WFM executives, and a fair amount of bad press, the company finally printed up some posters and leaflets, and offered a lukewarm endorsement. But it refused to contribute money to the Yes on 37 campaign.

Believing that the nation’s leading organic retailer should do more, consumers turned up the heat on WFM with the release of an undercover video showing store employees, either because they were misinformed or intentionally misleading, claiming that WFM stores sold no products containing genetically modified organisms (GMOs). The employees’ statements contradicted previous admissions by WFM executives, including CEO John Mackey, that thousands of their so-called “natural” products actually contain GMOs. (By law, only organic foods are required to be GMO-free).

Consumers also hammered many of WFM’s organic and natural brands —“Traitor” brands, as they’re called — like Coca-Cola’s Honest Tea, General Mills’ Muir Glen and Kellogg’s Kashi cereals, because their parent companies had contributed millions to defeat Prop 37. In January, perhaps having realized that their alliance with Monsanto had cost them not only millions in campaign contributions but was also costing them customer loyalty, Coca-Cola, Pepsi, ConAgra, Walmart and a number of other food giants broke ranks with Monsanto. They headed to Washington D.C., to lobby FDA intermediaries for a federal GMO labeling law.

Could that have been the moment when WFM executives saw the writing on the wall? Or did the company just finally decide to live up to its 1998 promise to remove GE ingredients from its private label brands?

Either way, Mr. Mackey, go ahead, take a bow. Don’t get us wrong, we’re glad you’re going to require GMO labeling. But 2018? You can do better. In November 2013, voters in Washington State will get their say on mandatory GMO labeling, when I-522, another citizens’ initiative, appears on the ballot. Expected to pass in a state with widespread support from politicians, farmers and consumers, I-522 will require mandatory labeling of GMOs by July 2015. There’s no reason WFM, which already labels in its stores in the U.K., can’t implement labeling by 2015, too. Consumers shouldn’t have to wait five more years.

And while you’re at it, it’s time to stop bilking consumers by selling billions of dollars’ worth of products under the meaningless label of “natural.” Especially when you know full well that many of those so-called “natural” products contain GMOs, not to mention pesticides, synthetic chemicals and additives. How about being the first to implement a labeling policy with real teeth? A policy that says no product in our store that contains GMOs can be labeled “natural?”

Palestinian killed by Israeli tear gas

0

A Palestinian man has died from complications related to exposure to tear gas fired by Israeli forces three weeks ago, local sources say.

The victim, identified as Muayad Ghazawneh, died in a hospital in the west Bank city of Ramallah on Friday after spending three weeks in an intensive care unit.

The 33-year-old Palestinian man was exposed to tear gas in al-Ram neighborhood of north al-Quds (Jerusalem) after Israeli troops fired tear gas to disperse a group of Palestinian protesters in the area.

According to Ma’an news agency, Ghazawneh was overcome by tear gas after Israeli soldiers fired a tear gas canister into his car. He was not involved in the protest.

Israeli troops frequently attack Palestinian protesters with tear gas and stun grenades. Scores of Palestinians, including children, have been killed due to tear gas inhalation.

In November 2012, a 20-month-old baby was killed after Israeli soldiers fired a tear gas into a house in Ramallah during clashes with Palestinian protesters.

HM/JR

Journalists slam EU bans on Press TV

0

Journalists have condemned the EU bans on Press TV officials saying the move damages the West’s credibility on the issue of freedom of speech, Press TV reports.

Many journalists say the West’s war against Iranian media has crossed a red line, after the European Union issued travel and banking sanctions against a Press TV journalist

Journalists also wonder how far the West is prepared to go in its campaign of censorship and intimidation.

“Journalists should be able to do their work and be able to travel around freely. An essential point in any building of the democratic institutions is to ensure that there is an open media space. We might not agree with the media all the time but they should be allowed to carry on with their works and to put restrictions on the journalists themselves is anti-democratic,” journalist James Overton told Press TV.

On Tuesday, the European Union blacklisted Press TV CEO Mohammad Sarafraz and Newsroom Director Hamid Reza Emadi for airing a 10-second report about Iranian-Canadian journalist Maziar Bahari, who worked for Newsweek magazine in Tehran in 2009 following post-election riots in Iran.

Emadi and Sarafraz are the latest victims in the ongoing international campaign to repress Iranian media. Both have been falsely accused without explanation or being given the chance to defend themselves.

“I think it is totally outrageous that we have the West, the European Union and various Western powers if you will, putting restrictions on media,” Overton added.

“It is not just about news, current affairs, government issues and defense matters, it is also about culture and history because people all over the world have a thirst or have a need to understand more about Iranian culture and history,” he pointed out.

While many Western media have stopped reporting the still near-daily demonstrations in countries like Spain and Greece and opposition to France’s obstruction of peace efforts in Syria, or ignored repression in countries such as Bahrain or Myanmar, Press TV has stayed true to its original mission of being the voice of the voiceless.

TNP/HGH/SS

Afghan forces foil attack on Kabul

0

Afghan security forces rush to the site of a battle in the capital, Kabul. (File photo)

Afghan security officials say they have defused a massive truck bomb in the capital city of Kabul, the biggest of its kind discovered in the war-torn country.

The National Directorate of Security (NDS) on Friday said it found nearly eight tons of explosives, wired and ready for detonation, hidden in cement bags in a truck.

“This truck bomb could have destroyed an area around 1.5 km (in radius). Now can you imagine that what kind of catastrophe this would be?” NDS spokesman Shafiqullah Tahiri told a news conference.

Five suspected bombers were killed and two others arrested during a pre-dawn raid by security forces on Wednesday.

The NDS said the attack was planned by the Haqqani network and the Taliban leadership.

Security forces also arrested four Taliban militants who had planned to attack Shindand military airport in the western Herat Province on Friday.

They also seized four missiles aimed at the airfield.

Violence in Afghanistan has been on the rise in recent years, despite the prolonged presence of foreign forces in the war-torn country since the US-led invasion of the country in 2001.

The rising number of civilian casualties has promoted President Hamid Karzai to order US special forces to leave the eastern province of Wardak.

Karzai’s last week remarks accusing the United States of colluding with the Taliban and the US denial of the comments marks the strain in Kabul-Washington relations.

MRS/JR

Pentagon spend $1b on unemployment

0

Nearly 120,000 people filed first-time claims for money in the military program in 2012.

The Pentagon has spent nearly USD 1 billion last year in unemployment benefits for former troops who voluntarily quit despite the country’s budget cuts.

The US Labor Department has spent USD 928 million in 2012 for the Unemployment Compensation for Ex-servicemembers (UCX) program, an initiative that allocates what could potentially amount to more than 90 weeks of unemployment checks for each voluntarily emancipated military member who has served several years in service.

Experts criticize the UCX for paying honorably discharged military personnel because the law stipulated that “workers who are unemployed through no fault of their own”, such as during layoffs, are eligible to receive benefits.

“A lot say, ‘Hey, I joined the Army or Marines so I could get out of working at McDonald’s,’” said Samuel Wright, a former lawyer in the Navy, while describing the difficulty that military personnel face in finding jobs.

Program requirements require former military personnel to follow the same state requirements as civilians when applying for benefits, while requiring them to actively search for employment.

Military members who have experienced combat have a particularly difficult time finding jobs while “re-acclimating” to society, said the Center for a New American Security, adding that unemployment benefits “could be funding the acclimation period for veterans – some veterans may be declining employment opportunities or choosing not to seek employment”.

Nearly 120,000 people filed first-time claims for money in the military program in 2012, compared with 71,000 in 2008 – with more than 515,000 receiving compensation since 2008.

The unemployment rate for 9/11 war veterans remains at 9.4 percent, compared with 7.7 percent for all Americans.

GMA/JR

HS2 High-Speed Rail Scheme’s ‘Unlawful’ Ruling

0

The Government insists its HS2 high-speed rail project has not hit the buffers after a High Court judge ruled the consultation process for compensating those affected was “unlawful”.

It was the only successful case among five in which Mr Justice Ouseley had been asked to send the multi-billion pound project back for reconsideration.

Despite the decision at London’s High Court, Transport Minister Simon Burns insisted the scheme would not be held up.

“This has been a convincing victory for the Government,” he said.

“It’s a green light to go ahead. It will not hold up us going ahead with the project, which is in the national interest.”

“This is a major landmark victory for HS2 and the future of Britain.

“HS2 is the most significant infrastructure investment the UK has seen in modern times and a project the country cannot afford to do without.

“The judgment ensures that nothing now stands in the way of taking our plans to Parliament.

“We will now move forward as planned with the crucial business of getting the scheme ready for construction in 2017 and delivering enormous benefits for the country.”

The decision on compensation was a victory for the High Speed 2 Action Alliance (HS2AA) , consisting of more than 70 affiliated action groups and residents’ associations.

Human rights lawyer Richard Stein, who helped represent HS2AA, said: “This was never a Nimby argument. Many thousands of people living along the route will not be able to sell their homes for some 15 years because their homes are blighted.

“They should not have to bear the burden for this national project.

“We hope now that proper arrangements are put in place by the Government for compensation for those who live by the proposed HS2 route to make it possible for them to move if and when they wish, in the same way that the rest of us can.”

The first phase of HS2 would see a high-speed railway line running through Tory heartlands from London to Birmingham.

Shadow transport secretary Maria Eagle said: “We’ve now had nearly three years of dither and delay over HS2 which must now come to an end.

“It is vital that the Government now gets on with introducing the necessary legislation to make this scheme a reality on the ground. When they do so, they will have cross-party support from Labour.”

Supporters point to the benefits of a reduction in journey times between the UK’s two biggest cities.

US child punished for making pastry gun

0

This 7-year-old second grader was suspended from a US school for chewing his pastry into a gun shape.

A 7-year-old US pupil has been suspended from his elementary school for nibbling his breakfast pastry into the shape of a gun while firearm sales and shootings continue across the country unabated.

Father of the second-grade student filed a formal appeal on Thursday with the superintendent of Anne Arundel County school district near the US capital on Thursday, asking that his child’s school records be wiped clean of the offense, The Washington Post reports Friday.

“The chewed pastry was not capable of harming anybody, even if thrown,” said the appeal, addressed to the superintendent, Kevin Maxwell and Park Elementary School Principal Sandy Blondell. “It could not fire any missile whatsoever.”

The case, which has attracted national attention, came just 11 weeks after the shooting carnage at Sandy Hook Elementary School in the US state of Connecticut, were 20 children and six staff members were killed by a lone gunman armed with an assault rifle.

Sensitivities over the massacre have been variously heightened concerning guns and security, “even imaginary ones,” the report says.

In recent weeks, according to the daily, children have been suspended from school “for pointing their fingers like guns and, in one case, for talking about shooting a Hello Kitty gun that blows bubbles.”

In some cases, it adds, the offenses were described in harsh terms, one as a “terroristic threat,” as school authorities have reportedly agreed, after appeals, to clear students’ permanent records.

In the Anne Arundel school case, the child was suspended March 1 for two days after chewing his breakfast pastry bar and yelling, “Look I made a gun,” according to the appeal. He aimed the pastry at students in a hallway and those at nearby desks, the appeal said.

“It was harmless,” his father said in his appeal. “It was a danish.”

The harsh treatment of school children for their playful activities, which widely reflect what they witness daily on television and news, comes as US adults are widely reported to continue purchasing guns in public gun shows and elsewhere across the country.

Meanwhile, federal officials have so far failed to agree on any national gun-control laws following the Connecticut school massacre.

MFB/MFB

Pope Francis can cope with the Catholic Church’s crises — pontiff’s sister

0

Published time: March 15, 2013 12:09

Argentina's Jorge Bergoglio, elected Pope Francis I waves from the window of St Peter's Basilica's balcony after being elected the 266th pope of the Roman Catholic Church on March 13, 2013 at the Vatican.(AFP Photo / Vincenzo Pinto)

Pope Francis has the power to cope with the crisis in the Catholic Church, and thinks the Church needs “revitalization,” the pope’s sister Maria Elena Bergoglio told RT.

However, the new pontiff can’t do it alone, and believers should support him with prayer as well as action, Bergoglio explained.

“He, as well as other Cardinals, was of the opinion that the Church needed ‘revitalization,’” she told RT, adding that many changes have been planned.

Asked whether Cardinal Jorge Mario Bergoglio had wanted to become pope, his sister said, “As far as I know, he didn’t.”

Her remarks came as the new pontiff met with the cardinals of the Catholic Church ahead of his inauguration on Tuesday — an event which is expected to draw thousands of believers to the Vatican.

The sister of Pope Francis, Maria Elena Bergoglio, poses in front of her house in Ituzaingo, some 35 km west of Buenos Aires.(AFP Photo / Juan Mabromata)

Pope Francis, formerly Cardinal Jorge Bergoglio, is the first Latin American to become pope in the Church’s 2,000-year history.

He is also believed to have been the runner-up in the 2005 vote in which Pope Benedict XVI was anointed.

Pope Francis is known for his work with the poor. In 2001, when he was made a cardinal, he told his followers not to waste their money on plane tickets to Rome to see him installed, urging them to give it to those in need.

The new pontiff also led a campaign, though it was deemed unsuccessful, against the Argentinian leadership’s efforts to legalize gay marriage and promote free contraception.

Obama vows Iran talks, rebuffing Israel

0

US President Barack Obama has reiterated his pledge to negotiate with Iran on concerns over its nuclear energy program, once again rejecting Israeli insistence on taking military action against the country.

“When I’m consulting with Bibi (Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu) as I have over the last several years on this issue, my message to him will be the same as before: If we can resolve it diplomatically that is a more lasting solution,” Obama said in a Thursday interview with the Israeli regime’s Channel 2 TV station just days before his first presidential visit to the occupied Palestinian land.

Obama, however, further invoked much publicized Israeli claims that a “nuclear Iran” would constitute a “red line” and that he will “keep all options on the table,” without elaborating, although the phrase has widely been interpreted as other measures, including military force.

Obama made no mention of the Israeli regime’s undeclared possession of an estimated 300 nuclear warheads and the threat it poses to the region and the world.

While the American president further claimed success of various unilateral US-led sanctions against the Islamic Republic in efforts to force the nation to give up its right to an IAEA-supervised nuclear energy program, he totally ignored Tel Aviv’s persistent refusal to allow any international inspection of its nuclear facilities and its denial to sign the nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty (NPT).

The remarks come as Iranian authorities have repeatedly rejected any notion that it is pursuing a non-civilian nuclear effort, insisting, however, that as a long-time signatory of the NPT and member of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), it will never give up its right to a civilian nuclear program.

Top Iranian officials have also made clear that any military bid by US or the Israeli regime against the country will prompt an immediate and severe response that will extend beyond the region and will include the destruction of the entity that occupies Palestine.

In the interview Obama also reiterated that he had no plans to release convicted and jailed Israeli spy Jonathan Pollard, whom the Tel Aviv regime has been rigorously pressuring to set free after 28 years in a US prison for spying for them.

Obama is set to arrive in the occupied Palestine on Wednesday for a three-day visit reportedly for the sole purpose of conveying American government’s unconditional commitment to the Israeli regime.

MFB/MFB

NATO’s ‘unwinnable’ Afghan campaign leaves Kabul unviable

0

Published time: March 15, 2013 10:13

US soldiers board a helicopter at a NATO camp in Kandahar.(AFP Photo / Ed Jones)

NATO troops in Afghanistan have unsuccessfully tried to impose a foreign ideology in a war unwinnable by military means, the UK military has said. The planned 2014 pullout is expected to leave Kabul unable to survive the Taliban onslaught.

The Afghan mission of the NATO-led International Security Assistance Force (ISAF), now in its 12th year, closely resembles the failed Soviet occupation of the country, a damning British internal report argued. The document was prepared in November last year by a British Ministry of Defense think tank and obtained by the Independent newspaper under the Freedom of Information Act.

“The highest-level parallel is that both campaigns were conceived with the aim of imposing an ideology foreign to the Afghan people: The Soviets hoped to establish a Communist state while NATO wished to build a democracy,” the document said. “Equally striking is that both abandoned their central aim once they realized that the war was unwinnable in military terms and that support of the population was essential.”

Both occupying forces found it difficult to deal with insurgencies they overwhelmed militarily, the report said: “The military parallels are equally striking; the 40th Army was unable decisively to defeat the mujahedin while facing no existential threat itself, a situation that precisely echoes the predicament of ISAF. Neither campaign established control over the country’s borders and the insurgents’ safe havens; both were unable to protect the rural population.”

Most NATO troops will pull out of the country next year, leaving behind a fragile and unpopular national government and a strong armed opposition, much like the Soviet Union, the report noted.

“Both interventions have been portrayed as foreign invasions attempting to support a corrupt and unpopular central government against a local insurgent movement which has popular support, strong religious motivation and safe havens abroad,” it said. “In addition, the country will again be left with a severely damaged and very weak economic base, heavily dependent upon external aid.”

A soldier from 1st Squadron (Airborne), 91st U.S Cavalry Regiment, 173d Airborne Brigade Combat Team, operating under the NATO sponsored International Security Assistance Force (ISAF), takes part in a defence drill at Combat Outpost McClain in Muhammed Agha, Logar Province.(AFP Photo / Munir uz Zaman)

In a grim warning, the document points to the Soviet defeat in Afghanistan as one of the reasons for its weakening and eventual collapse: “The international setting for both campaigns has significant similarities with world opinion judging both as failed interventions. Both faced a loss of confidence in their strategic world leadership and increasing domestic and financial pressure to abandon the enterprise.”

The assessment, which a Ministry of Defense spokesperson said was meant “to stimulate internal debate, not outline government positions,” mirrors another assessment prepared by the UK-based International Institute for Strategic Studies (IISS). In its annual Military Balance report released this week, the think tank forecast that the Afghan insurgency would not be eliminated by the end of 2014.

“The hope is that it can be reduced to such a level that it no longer poses an existential threat to the state and can be contained by Afghan forces,” the IISS said, predicting that in 2015 the country would be “a patchwork of insurgent activity.”

The transition talks between Kabul and the US-led ISAF are continuing amid bitter accusations and recriminations. Last Sunday, after two suicide bombers killed 19 people, Afghan President Hamid Karzai accused foreign troops of colluding with the Taliban to justify their presence in the region. 

The allegations provoked a rebuke from several US officials, including ISAF chief Joseph Dunford. The US general said in an advisory obtained by the New York Times that “Karzai’s remarks could be a catalyst for some to lash out against our forces.”

The day after the Afghan President’s comments proved to be the deadliest for NATO troops in the country in 2013. Two US soldiers were killed and 10 were wounded in a suspected insider attack by a man dressed in an Afghan army uniform, and five Americans were killed in a helicopter crash that was blamed on bad weather.

“We’re at a rough point in the relationship,” Dunford said in his advisory. “[Militants] are also watching and will look for a way to exploit the situation — they have already ramped up for the spring.”

In a move to mitigate the damage, Karzai’s office said Thursday the US and Afghanistan remain strategic partners, and that his statements “had been to correct rather than damage this relationship.”

President of Afghanistan Hamid Karzai.(AFP Photo / Anette Karlsen)

The harsh exchange came as Karzai has ramped up his nationalist rhetoric, pressuring for a swifter transition of authority in the country from foreign troops to the Afghan security forces. The president recently clashed with the US Military over repeated delays in the scheduled handover of Afghan detainees. He has also banned foreign troops from university campuses, and banned US Special Forces from two provinces over claims of harassment. Karzai also stopped Afghan forces from calling in US air strikes.

Samsung Galaxy S4 Launched In New York

0

Technology giant Samsung has unveiled its new Galaxy S4 smartphone, a handset which allows users to control the screen using their eyes.

The range of new features were revealed at the global launch in New York, including a dual camera function that can take two pictures at once and “smart pause”, which lets users pause a video by looking away from the screen.

“We have taken technology and innovation forward to help us get closer to what matters in life, to help us live a richer, simpler and more full life,” said JK Shin, president and head of IT and mobile communications at Samsung.

The highly-anticipated smartphone is predicted to pose a major threat to Apple and its dominance of the US market.

But investors have largely shrugged off the launch. Shares in Samsung were 2.3% lower in Seoul on Friday.

The device will be on sale in the UK from April 26, and will be available through 327 mobile operators in 155 countries, including Orange, EE and Vodafone.

Samsung is said to be expecting sales of its new handsets to be as high as 10 million per month, largely driven by its new features, which were demonstrated in a theatrical launch event at the Radio City music hall and Times Square.

A heavily emphasised feature was the Galaxy S4’s remote technology which allows users to control functions without touching the 5in (12.7cm) screen.

As well as “smart pause”, “smart scroll” lets users browse through emails without touching the screen, the S4 detecting the movements of the eyes and wrist.

Users can also change music tracks or accept a call with a wave of a hand.

Performers on the Radio City stage acted out role-plays to demonstrate other features.

A ‘doting father’ took photos of his tap-dancing son to show off the dual camera function, which means you can take photos or video using a 13 megapixel rear camera and a two megapixel front camera at the same time and blend the images together, even recording voice tags with them

The phone also has an in-built translator, which can translate voice or text, can measure temperature and humidity, allows users to activate commands via voice control when driving and even monitors your health.

The S4 also automatically creates “story albums” of photos and videos, which can be synchronised with devices at home, while a “group play” function lets people enjoy music, photos and games with people around them.

Marketed as “slimmer and stronger”, the S4 weighs 130g and is 7.9mm thick, while its AMOLED technology means the screen has a resolution of 441 pixels per inch.

But technology critics have been divided in their opinions, with some saying the phone was just an update that did not feel “revolutionary”.

Web magazine Engadget said it felt the new product “fell flat next to the competition” and that it had an “unabashed focus on features over designs”.

But Ernest Doku, telecoms expert at uSwitch, said the handset “more than” lived up to its hype.

“With brains as well as beauty, Samsung’s latest effort looks set to be the biggest handset of the year – and that’s in spite of an inevitable iPhone sequel.

“However, several manufacturers are trying to fan the flames of a revival, and a string of strong recent launches from BlackBerry, Sony, and HTC will give Samsung some stiff competition.”

Technology website The Verge said: “There’s a baffling collection of new software here.”

Paul Thompson, managing director of mobile advertising company BlisMedia, said the S4 “set” the benchmark on how a mobile device can be integrated into daily life.

He praised the eye-controlled features as “ground-breaking innovation that could change the face of how we use technology”, saying “there is certainly enough to set the Galaxy S4 apart from the iPhone 5 by some distance”.

 

It believes in the importance of an effortless user experience, making your life easy and hassle-free; and, it empowers your life, helping take care of your well-being.

Close

Previous image

Next image

Eric Joyce Arrested: MP Held After Bar Fight

0

The MP Eric Joyce has been arrested after an alleged fight in a bar at the House of Commons, Sky sources say.

The independent Member of Parliament for Falkirk was held after the incident at the Sports and Social Club bar.

A Metropolitan Police spokesman said: “Police were called shortly before 10.30pm this evening to reports of a disturbance at a bar within the House of Commons.

“Officers attended and a man aged in his 50s was arrested in connection with this incident.

“He remains in custody and inquiries continue.”

Joyce resigned from the Labour Party after butting Tory rivals Stuart Andrew and Ben Maney in a previous incident in a Commons bar last February.

The 52-year-old also punched Tory councillor Luke Mackenzie and Labour whip Phillip Wilson while going berserk and insulting officers.

After leaving Mr Andrew with a bloodied nose, Joyce told police: “He deserved it.”

Joyce, who accepted he was “hammered” on red wine during the brawl, launched into a frenzied attack after shouting that the Strangers’ Bar “was full of ******* Tories”.

The former soldier walked away from Westminster Magistrates Court with a fine and pub banning order after admitting four counts of common assault.

He was fined £3,000 and ordered to pay £1,400 to victims after he entered early guilty pleas.

Joyce was also given a 12-month community order – banning him from entering pubs and licensed premises for three months – and imposed with a curfew order from Friday to Sunday.

After the hearing, Joyce admitted he was lucky to avoid jail and said he was “deeply apologetic”.

School Places: Call For 250,000 Extra Spaces

0

More than 250,000 extra school places will be needed by next year to meet a continuing surge in demand, the spending watchdog has warned.

The rise in the number of children born in England between 2001 and 2011 was the largest 10-year increase since the 1950s.

This has led to an increase in demand for primary school places.

The Department for Education has increased the funding it provides to local authorities with a net increase of almost 81,500 primary school places in the last two years. More than £5bn has been invested into new school places since 2010.

However, there are still indications of a real shortage, the National Audit Office has found.

In May last year just over 20% of schools were full or over capacity despite the more than 80,000 extra places created between 2010 and 2012.

In the next two years 240,000 of the new places needed are in primary schools – 37% in London.

Julian Wood, Study Director at the National Audit Office said: “I think it’s important to say that of the 256,000 (places) there has been a year’s further work that hasn’t been reflected in these numbers.

“The level of funding has increased to something like that which was originally expected to be needed and local authorities are working hard to deliver these places.

“Nonetheless, we think there’s an awful lot more that needs to be done to help that money work as efficiently as it can if those 256,000 places are to be delivered.”

The report authors say it’s important the right amount of money gets to the areas that need it most to prevent part of a younger generation missing out on the first few crucial years of education.

Lindsey Barrett, manager of the Busy Bees nursery in Ealing, London, told Sky News: “Parents are worried that perhaps they are not going to get a school in their local area, or their first choice.

“Being a parent myself I am completely in empathy with those parents because it is a very big decision that is being made – it’s their child’s future education.

“Parents worry that if it is a school perhaps out of their area, or perhaps if any of the numbers increase in classrooms – that is looking at the education and the quality that they will be receiving.

“Sometimes parents might try and move out of the area, obviously do a lot of research into the local school they hope they are going to get there, that they are going to get one of their first choices, but it doesn’t always happen.

“As a parent you always want the best education you can get for your child.”

Soldiers More Likely To Commit Violent Crime

0

Young British servicemen – past and present – are three times more likely to commit violent crime than their civilian counterparts.

Using official criminal records, researchers have found that violent offending is particularly common among men under 30-years-old from the lower ranks of the Army.

Of nearly 3,000 men under 30 who have served in the armed forces, nearly 20.6% have a conviction for violence, according to the study published in The Lancet today.

That compares to 6.7% of the same age group in the civilian world.

The report also shows that men who have served in Iraq or Afghanistan are 53% more likely to commit a violent offence than their colleagues in non-combat roles.

“We are suggesting there is a problem that needs to be looked at, but just as with post-traumatic stress disorder this is not a common outcome in military populations.

“Overall, you must remember that of those who serve in combat, 94% of those who come back will not offend,” said report co-author Sir Simon Wessely from King’s College, London.

According to the figures, those with multiple experiences of combat have a 70% to 80% greater risk of committing acts of violence.

The report acknowledges that those who choose to become a soldier are likely to have a more aggressive disposition than the average person.

Pre-military history of violence, younger age, and lower rank appear to be the strongest risk factors for violent offending.

But alcohol misuse and post-traumatic stress disorder on return from deployment were also found to be strong predictors of violence.

Former Royal Engineer Lewis Mackay returned from Afghanistan in 2010 – he saw his commander lose both legs on the battlefield after stepping on an Improvised Explosive Device (IED).

He said: “When I came back I got very angry and felt very angry towards my wife.

“In my head she didn’t exist whatsoever. If she did something that I didn’t think was right I’d feel the urge to lash out and it got to the point where I had to physically sit on my hands to stop myself doing that.”

Mr Mackay has now received the help he needed but former SAS serviceman Bob Craft says it’s never easy to ask for help.

“The older you are, the better you deal with it. I asked for help and I found help.

“But younger lads who come out refuse to ask for help because it’s seen as a weakness, therefore they bottle it up and then they make mistakes,” he said.

The study is the biggest of its kind and is released just days before the 10th anniversary of the start of the Iraq War.

In a statement the Ministry of Defence said: “We are committed to supporting members of our Armed Forces and their families as they return to civilian life post deployment.

“That is why we funded this research and have comprehensive mental health support available before, during and after operations. We also ensure that all personnel go through a thorough period of decompression to help make this adjustment.

“Any violent offence is unacceptable and will not be tolerated by our Armed Forces. If a member of our Armed Forces or their family experiences violence there is a wide range of support and help available to them.”

‘Black Death’ Skeletons Found Under Crossrail

0

Archaeologists say 12 skeletons found beneath a building site in London could provide evidence of a Black Death burial ground.

The remains were found by teams working on Crossrail – a £15bn project to improve transport links in the capital, including at Farringdon where the bones were found.

Historical records indicate a hastily-built cemetery opened in the area in 1348 as the plague spread across the country.

Up to 50,000 people are thought to have been buried there in less than three years.

Jay Carver, lead Crossrail archaeologist, said: “This is a highly significant discovery and at the moment we are left with many questions that we hope to answer.

“We will be undertaking scientific tests on the skeletons over the coming months to establish their cause of death, whether they were plague victims from the 14th century or later London residents, how old they were and perhaps evidence of who they were.

“However at this early stage, the depth of burials, the pottery found with the skeletons and the way they have been set out, all point towards this being part of the 14th century emergency burial ground.”

The skeletons were found during excavations below a road in Charterhouse Square.

They were buried in two rows and laid out in a similar formation to skeletons discovered at a Black Death burial site in Smithfield in the 1980s.

Experts at the Museum of London Archaeology will now use DNA testing and carbon dating to determine both a cause of death and a burial date.

Charterhouse Square had previously been identified as a possible site for the lost burial ground, as it is one of few locations in Farringdon to remain undeveloped for the past 700 years.

John Stow, the 16th century historian, said more than 150,000 victims of the Black Death were buried in London, including 50,000 at a site in Farringdon known as ‘No Man’s Land’.

About 75 million people and up to 60% of the European population are said to have died in the four-year global pandemic.

Archaeologists working on Crossrail have already uncovered more than 300 skeletons near Liverpool Street station.

It is thought they were buried near the site of the Bedlam Hospital in the 16th, 17th and 18th centuries.

‘Misleading and deceptive’: Egypt’s Islamists slam UN women’s rights resolution

0

Published time: March 15, 2013 03:28

AFP Photo / Patrick Baz

Egypt’s ruling Muslim Brotherhood has condemned a UN draft declaration on women’s rights, claiming the document violates Islamic Law. The party outlined ten reasons why women in Muslim countries should not have the proposed rights.

The document, “End Violence Against Women,” is planned to be ratified on Friday by the UN Commission on the Status of Women and is now being negotiated as part of the 57th session.

The Muslim Brotherhood, in a statement on its official website, claims that the articles of the declaration “are destructive tools meant to undermine the family as an important institution.” The Islamists claim the document would “subvert the entire society and drag it to pre-Islamic ignorance.”

Among the clauses which the organization finds offensive are an article that would enable women to choose the gender of their partners; use of contraceptives by teenagers; and a clause that allocates equal rights for homosexuals and protection for sex workers.

Some other articles the Egyptian leadership finds challenging include granting “equal rights to adulterous wives and illegitimate sons resulting from adulterous relationships” and giving wives “full rights to file legal complaints against husbands accusing them of rape or sexual harassment.”

“The Muslim Brotherhood urges the leaders of Islamic countries and their UN representatives to reject and condemn this document,” the party said in the statement.

The issue of Muslim women marrying non-Muslim men has also been condemned in the outline.

Muslim Brotherhood spokesmen also found unacceptable a call for “cancelling the need for a husband’s consent in matters like travel, work, or use of contraception” and rejected the idea of abolishing “polygamy, dowry, men taking charge of family spending.”

AFP Photo / Mohammed Abed

The 57th session of the United Nations Commission on the Status of Women (CSW) is comprised of 45 countries united by a goal of stopping violence against women worldwide. However, the “End Violence Against Women” report has seen objections coming from Russia, the Vatican, Iran and Egypt.

“There’s this sort of unholy alliance … coming together to oppose language on sexual health, reproductive rights and LGBT (lesbian, gay, bisexual, transgender) rights,” a senior UN diplomat told Reuters on Wednesday. “It’s tough going, but progress is being made.”

Cairo, for instance, is seeking to recognize that sovereign countries have the right to ignore elements of the declaration which would conflict with their religious values.

Moscow, the Vatican and Tehran meanwhile voiced concerns over emergency contraception, abortion and treatment of sexually transmitted diseases. Gay rights and sexual and reproductive rights, they argue, should also be decided by each nation separately. 

The CSW is part of the UN Economic and Social Council. It was launched in 1946 with annual summits aimed at setting global gender equality policies.

Police behind nearly 900 deaths in Egyptian revolution – inquiry

0

Published time: March 15, 2013 01:20

Egyptian demonstrators clash with Egyptian police in central Cairo during a protest to demand the ouster of President Hosni Mubarak and calling for reforms on January 25, 2011. (AFP Photo / Mohammed Abed)

A high-level inquiry into the deaths of nearly 900 demonstrators during Egypt’s 2011 uprising concluded that the police were responsible for most of the killings and used rooftop snipers to shoot into crowds in Cairo’s Tahir Square.

A fact-finding commission into the 2011 popular uprising against Hosni Mubarak’s government initially concluded that 846 people were killed during the revolution.

Current Egyptian President Mohamed Morsi ordered a report on the fact-finding commission’s findings after he was elected. The report was then submitted to Morsi and to Egypt’s top prosecutor late last year.

The 16-member panel behind the report included human rights activists, lawyers, judges and a representative from the military prosecutor’s office.

It includes authoritative and in-depth accounts of the killings, and concludes that lethal force could only have been authorized by Mubarak’s security chief and with the former president’s full knowledge.

Extensive details are cited, including police logs documenting the issuance of weapons and ammunition along with the officers who received them.

“The use of firearms can only be authorized by the interior minister, who must in turn inform the political leadership (Mubarak). And if the police continue to use firearms for more than one day, then the political leadership must be informed,” an author of the report who wished to remain anonymous told the National Post, a Canadian newspaper.

An Egyptian woman holds the widespread picture of a woman who was stripped and beaten by military police during clashes last week as Egyptians gather for a protest in downtown Cairo. (AFP Photo / Khaled Desouki)

One of the report’s authors, lawyer and human rights activist Mohsen Bahnasy, said he was planning to submit parts of it to the prosecution in Mubarak’s trial, as well as to other courts trying policemen accused of killing protesters.

The report is sure to strike a nerve in Egypt, where only last week three demonstrators were killed and 65 more injured in a protest over the verdict in a case regarding a riot at the Port Said Stadium that saw more than 70 killed. 

That verdict came after a week of anti-police brutality demonstrations in Port Said and across Egypt that led police themselves to take to the streets in a rare protest.

Egyptian riot police detain a man during clashes on Omar Makram street, off Tahrir Square, on November 28, 2012 in Cairo. (AFP Photo / Mahmoud Khaled)

Britain And France Step Up Campaign To Arm Syrian Rebels

0

David Cameron and French president Francois Hollande tonight stepped up the campaign for the right to arm Syrian rebels after private talks in Brussels.

The Prime Minister and Mr Hollande got together at the latest EU summit to discuss their growing concern that an existing EU arms embargo against Syria is effectively preventing assistance to forces opposing the Assad regime’s campaign of bombing and bloodshed.

EU sanctions against the Syrian regime, including an arms embargo, have only just been extended until the end of May – meaning only a unanimous vote of EU foreign ministers can change the situation before then.

And tomorrow – the second anniversary of the Daraa uprising against the Assad regime – the UK and French leaders will make a joint plea to fellow leaders to reconsider the arms embargo or face the prospect of at least two EU nations taking unilateral action to assist the rebels.

That would realistically only happen after the end of May, when the current sanctions are up once more for review. But the hope in London and Paris is that other member states will by then agree to end the sanctions early.

EU foreign ministers meeting in Brussels next week will take up this issue after tomorrow’s summit discussions.

“There is a perversity about the EU arms embargo… it is backfiring” said one Downing Street official. “The embargo does not stop those aiding Assad, but it does stop those who want to help the opposition”.

But the official emphasised: “We are not considering going ahead (with arming the rebels) while the current arms embargo is in place. What we want is to start the discussion about changing the arms embargo.”

Mr Cameron has already hinted that “it’s not out of the question we might have to do things in our own way”.

And, arriving at the summit, Mr Hollande was forthright: “We are ready to support the rebels, so we are ready to go that far.”

“We cannot allow the massacre of a people by a regime which right now does not want a political transition.”

“France’s view is that arms are being delivered to Syria – but to the regime of Bashar al-Assad, in particular by the Russians.”

He said he was not looking for “total war”, but for ways of increasing pressure on the Assad regime.

Earlier French foreign minister Laurent Fabius said the UK and France were ready to arm rebels in Syria, even without full EU support.

And UK Government sources had insisted that “all options” remain on the table.

Earlier a Foreign Office spokesman said: “Our objective is clear – an end to the violence and a political transition to a more democratic Syria through a political solution.

“As it stands, the political track has little chance of gathering momentum unless the regime feels compelled to come to the negotiating table. They need to feel that the balance on the ground has shifted against them.

“The Foreign Secretary has been clear he hasn’t ruled out any options for the future.”

A Downing Street official insisted tonight: “This is not about intervention in Syria by Western forces getting involved. It is about looking at what more can be done to support the opposition.”

‘God particle’ confirmed: CERN says data ‘strongly indicates’ Higgs boson found

0

Published time: March 14, 2013 20:49

Real CMS proton-proton collision events in which 4 high energy electrons (green lines and red towers) are observed. The event shows characteristics expected from the decay of a Higgs boson but is also consistent with background Standard Model physics processes. (Image from cds.cern.ch)

It is now almost certain the subatomic particle that brings together everything in the universe has been found, CERN scientists announced on Thursday. Latest analysis of data from the Large Hadron Collider proves that the Higgs boson actually exists.

The search for the missing particle dubbed as ‘the holy grail of physics,’ which has been going on for almost half a century and has brought the $10 billion Large Hadron Collider (LHC) into existence, has finally resulted in some strong experimental evidence.

For the first time since the triumphant announcement of the new particle discovery in July 2012, the European Organization for Nuclear Research CERN has declared it is indeed the Higgs boson that they’ve found, as the analyzed LHC data “strongly indicates.”

“The preliminary results with the full 2012 data set are magnificent and to me it is clear that we are dealing with a Higgs boson, though we still have a long way to go to know what kind of Higgs boson it is,” said physicist Joe Incandela, the spokesperson for CERN’s Compact Muon Solenoid (CMS) team.

The silicon strip tracker of the Compact Muon Solenoid (CMS) nears completion. Shown here are three concentric cylinders, each comprised of many silicon strip detetectors (the bronze-coloured rectangular devices, similar to the CCDs used in digital cameras). These surround the region where the protons collide. (Image from cds.cern.ch)

The existence of the boson in question and its linked energy field was predicted by British physicist Peter Higgs as he was looking for answers of the open questions of particle physics. Without the Higgs boson, the Standard Model of particle physics fails to explain all the processes happening in the universe, its absence would also not be compatible with Einstein’s theory of general relativity — still a dominant way of explaining gravity.

The question which has eluded countless physicists for decades, and the missing link explaining how the universe works at the very basic level, is what gives mass to matter. In other words, what has brings all the flying particles together to form stars, planets and humans ever since the Big Bang.

Many scientists attribute this role to the elusive Higgs boson, although “exotic” theories exist, which go beyond the Standard Model.

Now, after petabytes of LHC data have been processed, CERN scientists are quite confident there is a Higgs boson — and that it most likely fits into the mainstream particle physics principles, as David Charlton of the LHC’s ATLAS team indicated during the Thursday CERN conference.

Although it might take years for the discovery to be fully confirmed and fleshed out, one cannot expect anything more sensational from the LHC team in the coming two years, as the 27-kilometer collider has been shut down for maintenance until the early 2015.

The Compact Muon Solenoid (CMS) instrumental in search for the Higgs bosone. (Image from ciemat.es)

Child Stealing By The State – The Bonnie Lewis Case

0

Brian Gerrish interviews Kevin Edwards who describes the Bonnie Lewis case, where Social Services kidnapped a 12 year old girl at gunpoint and using a false passport, while she was receiving medical treatment in the USA.

Iraq war cost US more than $2 trillion — study

0

Published time: March 14, 2013 20:00

US Army Soldiers scan the landing zone for possible hostile forces. (AFP Photo / Russell E. Cooley)

The US war in Iraq has cost $1.7 trillion with $490 billion more owed in benefits to combat veterans, a recent study revealed. The report found that total expenses in the unavailing conflict could balloon to $6 trillion over the next 40 years.

The study, conducted by the Costs of War Project by the Watson Institute for International Studies at Brown University, concluded that the accrued interest on the nearly $2.2 trillion in expenses would amount to some $4 trillion dollars during the coming decades, Reuters reports.

At the time of the 2003 invasion, the Bush administration estimated the war would cost between $50-60 billion.

Published in advance of the 10th anniversary of the March 19 US-led invasion of Iraq, the study also estimated the great human cost inflicted by the nearly decade long conflict.

At least 134,000 Iraqi civilians died as a result of the Iraq War, though the Watson Institute says the death toll could be up to four times higher. The report stated that with the inclusion of slain journalists, aid workers and insurgents, the base level death toll reached an estimated 176,000- 189,000.

A 2006 peer-reviewed Lancet study had found that 650,000 Iraqis — both combatants and civilians — had died up to that point. Other estimates had previously put total war deaths as high as 1 million.  

An estimated 36,000 American military personnel were also killed or injured during the war.

A view of crosses marking soldiers lost during the war in Iraq is seen at Arlington West on Santa Monica Beach, California, 25 November 2007. (AFP Photo / Gabriel Bouys)

The Watson Institute study further found that US gains from the invasion were negligible, while Iraq was still reeling from the war.  

“Despite the US military withdrawal,” the report says,

“Iraq’s health, infrastructure, and education systems remain war-devastated.” The war further galvanized radical Islamist militants in the region and set back women’s rights, while

“the $212 billion reconstruction effort was largely a failure with most of that money spent on security or lost to waste and fraud.” The study was an update of a 2011 report which estimated the costs of the US military engagements in Afghanistan, Pakistan and Iraq at $3.7 trillion. The latest report puts that cost at some $4 trillion dollars

In the run up to the war, the US and the UK claimed that Iraq possessed weapons of mass destruction which posed a threat to regional security.

The U.S.‑led Iraq Survey Group would later conclude that Iraq had ended its nuclear, chemical and biological weapons programs in 1991 and had no active programs at the time of the invasion.

What’s It Going to Take to Get Men to Stop Raping Women?

0

From the Steubenville teens to Sean Hannity to Adam in “Girls,” the conversation about consent is far from over

Activists boycott India’s Republic Day celebrations following the gang rape and murder of a student in New Delhi on January 26, 2013.

March 14, 2013  |  

Like this article?

Join our email list:

Stay up to date with the latest headlines via email.

“I wouldn’t say she was completely passed out but she wasn’t in any state to make a decision for herself.”  That’s what one of the witnesses in the Steubenville, Ohio, trial told police of the 16-year-old girl at the center of the case, according to ABC News. Perhaps that witness was one of the three football players who have not been charged but are expected to testify for the prosecution in the trial, which began Wednesday.

Since it still needs to be said, not being “in any state to make a decision for herself” meets the legal definition for rape across the U.S. So here’s a question for that guy: What did he do to try to stop it?

According to the prosecutor’s opening statement Wednesday, these witnesses saw one of the defendants, Trent Mays, try to force oral sex on the girl, but her mouth wouldn’t open. They saw the other defendant, Ma’Lik Richmond, digitally penetrate the girl while she was passed out on a couch. Though the girls’ friends apparently tried to prevent her from continuing on with the boys, so far there’s been no indication the witnesses intervened with the boys who no one has disputed were capable of decision-making. And preliminary research shows that the intervention of such bystanders could make the difference in preventing rape.

Last week, an inexcusable torrent of abuse was hurled at commentator Zerlina Maxwell after she appeared on Sean Hannity’s Fox News show and sensibly pointed out that arming women is not effective rape prevention tactics, for multiple reasons. (“If firearms are the answer, then the military would be the safest place for women,” she said.) It was her message of “tell men not to rape” that seemed to most inflame the trolls. Hannity found it self-evidently ridiculous: “You think you can tell a rapist to stop doing what he’s doing? He’s going to listen to an ad campaign to stop?” He also said, “Knowing there are evil people, I want women protected, and they’ve got to protect themselves.”

It was a clash of ideas of who commits crimes in the world. For Hannity and his ilk, rape is committed by “evil people,” an immutable fact that can’t be educated away, that isn’t about social norms. For feminists who are weary of victim-blaming – including blaming women for not just shooting their rapists in the moment – and who have for decades been pushing against the idea that rape is only committed by strangers lurking in the bushes, this is tantamount to giving up the fight. Or, as Jessica Valenti recently put it, you’re “saying that rape is natural for men. That this is just something men do. Well I’m sorry, but I think more highly of men than that.”

But the problem with saying “tell men not to rape” is that the majority of rapists probably won’t listen. That’s because the majority of them are repeat offenders who don’t care about consent. Research consistently shows that while any kind of man can be a rapist, not every man is one.

David Lisak, a leading forensic researcher who has done research on sex offenders in Boston and specializes in “undetected rapists,” has written that such men, whose behavior falls into what’s still commonly called “date rape,” are “accurately and appropriately labeled as predators. This picture conflicts sharply with the widely-held view that rapes committed on university campuses are typically the result of a basically ‘decent’ young man who, were it not for too much alcohol and too little communication, would never do such a thing. While some campus rapes do fit this more benign view, the evidence points to a far less benign reality,” of serial offenders. He continued, “Prevention efforts geared toward persuading men not to rape are very unlikely to be effective. Lessons can be drawn from many decades of experience in sex offender treatment, which have demonstrated that it is extremely difficult to change the behavior of a serial predator even when you incarcerate him and subject him to an intensive, multi-year program.” He has argued that bystander programs tailored to specific contexts – say, a military base – hold more promise in stopping those predators in their track, by encouraging others to recognize the signs.

An Exercise In Propaganda: “Living On the Streets of Modern Day America” *VIDEO*

0
Mac Slavo
March 14th, 2013
SHTFplan.com

Read by 18,459 people

The engineering of consent is the very essence of the democratic process, the freedom to persuade and suggest.
Edward Bernays, 1955

In his 1928 book Propaganda, Edward Bernays, the architect of modern day public relations and marketing, argues that manipulation of public opinion is necessary to overcome chaos and conflict in society. It’s a strategy that his been implemented for centuries, but most notably during the last hundred years. Stalin, Hitler, Mao and Hussein found propaganda to be an extremely effective mechanism of control over their populations, as have modern-day governments of the Western world where “freedom of the press” and government transparency are supposed to be a key tenet of an open society.

It’s often a soft-sell strategy, repeating a message hundreds, even thousands of times, so that the consciousness of an entire people can be shifted to accommodate the plans of those in positions of power.

Sometimes, however, the propaganda is so over the top that it leaves you wondering if it’s even real. The following video from notorious ‘Axis of Evil’ member North Korea leaves no doubt that propaganda is alive and well in our modern world.

According to the following documentary, reportedly disseminated to millions of North Koreans, conditions in the United States are so deplorable that Americans are being forced to eat wild birds and drink snow coffee just to survive.

This ridiculously blatant example of government manipulation is a must-see, not necessarily because of the irony of it being from North Korea, where Western journalists have reported that hundreds of thousands of people themselves are starving to death, but because it demonstrates how far leaders are willing to go to ensure their narrative is the only one that’s accepted by the masses, rendering all alternative opinions moot or conspiratorial.


(Watch at Youtube)

Before we start pointing the finger at North Korea’s propaganda machine, however, we must look at our own government, and the manipulations regularly proclaimed as truth to the American people.

One of the most infamous and well known lies perpetrated by our own government has led to a decade’s long war, taken the lives of thousands of Americans, hundreds of thousands of civilians and left our country trillions of dollars in debt.

Watch, as former Secretary of State Colin Powell provides justification for why we must take our country to war, a move he later acknowledged was “one of my most momentous failures, the one with the widest-ranging impact.”

As Colin Powell later realized, the propaganda was so widespread that not even he was aware of it, having been manipulated by his superiors just like the American people.

Lies and half-truths abound, even in a society where the information is purportedly free-flowing.

Make no mistake — if you see it on TV, and the same information is being repeated over and over, you are being fed a line of complete bull.

It’s all theater:

Pushing the envelope:

It should make every one of us question the legitimacy of what we’re being told.

Is our economy really on its way to recovering like our best and brightest say it is? Is the war in the middle east really coming to a close and will our soldiers really be coming home soon? Is the agenda to remove Americans’ access to semi-automatic rifles really because it will reduce gun violence?

Don’t believe any of it for a second. In today’s day and age we must be our own investigators if we want to know the real truth, because our government and their propaganda alphabet news agencies are doing everything they can to hide what’s really going on.

It is sometimes possible to change the attitudes of millions but impossible to change the attitude of one man.
Edward Bernays

Author: Mac Slavo
Views: Read by 18,459 people
Date: March 14th, 2013
Website: www.SHTFplan.com

Copyright Information: Copyright SHTFplan and Mac Slavo. This content may be freely reproduced in full or in part in digital form with full attribution to the author and a link to www.shtfplan.com. Please contact us for permission to reproduce this content in other media formats.

Demonstrators Met With Riot Police, Arrests at Vigil for Brooklyn Teen Shot by Police

0

Police officers arrest a demonstrator during a march after a vigil held for Kimani “Kiki” Gray in the East Flatbush neighborhood of Brooklyn, Wednesday, March 13, 2013, in New York. (AP Photo/John Minchillo)Demonstrators gathered for a third night in a row in the East Flatbush neighborhood of Brooklyn Wednesday night over the shooting of 16-year-old Kimani Gray by the NYPD over the weekend. Residents from the area who marked the evening with another protest and candlelight vigil were met once again by riot police–who arrested up to 50 protesters in the area including Gray’s sister.

Sophie Lewis at In These Times reports that the “whole of East Flatbush is becoming a so-called Frozen Zone: an unofficial NYPD tactic of totally excluding the media from an area.”

Lewis reports on the scene Wednesday night:

Scores of police squads have descended upon the growing vigils on Church Avenue. Last night, hundreds of protesters faced off with police, contesting efforts to net and mass-arrest them throughout the evening. Council member Charles Barron told Democracy Now: ‘This is the least that the community could do is to respond and resist.’

Late in the night, police arrested Kimani Gray’s sister and an estimated 46 others–mainly local young people, and some outside supporters–who remain detained at several precincts.

Local reports have said that a heavy police presence has remained in the area throughout the day.

Carol Gray, the mother of Kimani Gray, spoke out for the first time on Thursday afternoon from the office of City Councilman Charles Barron. She said that her son was slaughtered and she wants to know why.

“I’m asking for justice,” she said, telling reporters her unarmed son was killed in front of his best friend’s house after a birthday party.

Reports have differed greatly between police and local residents over how and why police shot up to 11 rounds at the young man, who was adjusting his waistband in what the police said was a “suspicious manner.” While police say Gray was armed, eyewitnesses have said he was “running for his life” when he was shot dead.

Lewis continues:

Kimani’s killing was the latest in an unrelenting stream of similar incidents across New York City and the United States. There have been 79 killings by law enforcement officers in the U.S. in 2013 alone. Present at last night’s demonstrations were Bronx community activists Constance Malcolm and Franclot Graham, the parents of Ramarley Graham, whom the police slayed in his grandmother’s bathroom at close range slightly over a year ago. […]

Activists are up against not just the police, but also the very logic that normalizes police violence and permits the public to rationalize Black deaths.

Evan Brown, 53, lights candles during a vigil held for Kimani “Kiki” Gray in the East Flatbush neighborhood of Brooklyn, Wednesday, March 13, 2013, in New York. (AP Photo/John Minchillo)______________________________

This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 License

Why Is the U.S. Funding International Drug Rehabs Known for Torture and Abuse?

0

Despite calls to close the centers, the U.S. government continues to fund them.

Photo Credit: (c) RDaniel/Shutterstock.com

March 14, 2013  |  

Like this article?

Join our email list:

Stay up to date with the latest headlines via email.

The United States is not just funding an abusive drug war at home; taxpayer funds are propping up violently oppressive “drug treatment” centers that act more like detainment camps abroad. At the U.S.-backed Somsanga Rehabilitation Center in Laos, detainees are subjected to shocking physical abuse, including beating to the point of unconsciousness for showing withdrawal symptoms or attempting to escape. Allegations of sexual assault are also rampant.

According to reports, younger residents are raped by older detainees whom the center gives power to enforce rules and regulations. One Somsanga detainee interviewed by Human Rights Watch said he saw “supervisors rape boys between the ages of 10 and 14.” Children are not exempt from indefinite detainment in these camps. UNICEF-sponsored investigations in Laos found 150 detainees under 18 in 2003, and more than 600 children in 2006.

Despite calls from human rights organizations, the United States has continued to pump money into the Somsanga Rehabilitation Center.

In March of last year, 12 United Nations agencies, including the UN Office on Drugs and Crime (UNODC), the World Health Organization, the UN Children’s Fund (UNICEF), and UNAIDS, issued a joint statement calling for the closure of drug-user detention centers where they identified grave human rights violations. Abused patients, perhaps better described as inmates, should be released “without delay,” the report urged. Nonetheless, a new report from UN’s special expert on torture, Juan Mendez, explains that many nations, including the US, continue to send hundreds of thousands of dollars to “rehabilitation” centers that act as hubs for indefinitely holding and systematically abusing marginalized people.  

 “These centers continue to operate often with direct or indirect support and assistance from international donors without any adequate human rights oversight,” the UN report says. Detainment in punitive drug-free centers still “exponentially” exceeds evidence-based treatment for drug dependence, Mendez said.

Mendez notes that “numerous calls by various international and regional organizations to close compulsory drug detention centers” — as well as several recommendations and resolutions from WHO, UNODC, and the Commission on Narcotic Drugs — “are routinely ignored.” 

This June, the U.S. agreed to donate an additional $400,000 to the Somsanga center. US officials heeded no warnings issued by at least three separate reports (2003 UNICEF report, 2004 WHO report, and 2011 Human Rights Watch report), each of which warned against the center’s deplorable conditions and inhumane treatment of detainees. The UN report says past US funds have been used to build dormitories “to expand the capacity of the government to detain drug users, street children, and ethnic minorities,” as well as fences surrounding the center.

“International donors claim that Somsanga is a legitimate drug treatment center,” Joe Amon, director of health and human rights at Human Rights Watch, said in a press release prompted by the UN report. “The reality is that people, including children and the homeless, are held in Somsanga against their will, behind barbed wire fences, and are beaten and brutalized.”   

Inside Somsanga

Human Rights Watch says that while only a minority of amphetamine-users (the most popular drug in Laos) actually become addicted, legislators pressure local officials to declare their villages “drug-free.” Eager to comply with public policy, village officials and locals request for detainment in Somsanga people who use drugs only occasionally and do not necessarily require rehabilitation. 

Located in Laos near the capital of Vientiane, Somsanga’s patients did not voluntarily commit to drug addiction rehabilitation, nor is there always evidence that they are drug addicts. Rather, Somsanga detainees are picked up by police or sent away by relatives bowing to pressure to cleanse their villages of drug users. The result is not more addicts in drug treatment, but the detainment of “beggars, homeless people, street children, and people with mental disabilities” without due cause. One detainee cited in the report says an arrest for being out too late landed him in Somsanga for nine months. 

‘An Historic Mistake’

0

Labour has accused David Cameron of “an historic mistake” after he called off talks on press reform.

Deputy Prime Minister Nick Clegg joined the criticism, saying he was “disappointed” and “surprised” at the Tory leader’s decision.

They were speaking after the Prime Minister called off cross party talks aimed at thrashing out a agreement over Lord Justice Leveson’s report, set up in the aftermath of the phone-hacking scandal.


UK Prime Minister

PM confirms legislation on Royal Charter will be tabled Monday to allow Parliament to decide on regulation of press

Even a senior Conservative, former Cabinet Minister Lord Fowler, joined in, saying Cameron’s vision of a Royal Charter to oversee a regulator was “always a bad idea”.

cameron

Cameron called a press conference to explain his decision

The Labour and Lib Dem leaders are bracing themselves for a newspaper backlash after holding out for statutory underpinning of the new system.

Most newspapers – and most of the Conservative Party as well as some Labour MPs – are ardently opposed to any law to regulate the press.

  • Four arrested in phone-hacking probe

Speaking after the talks broke down, Miliband accused Cameron of betraying a pledge he made to hacking victims that Leveson would be implemented unless it was “bonkers”.

He said: “David Cameron’s decision to walk away from the talks is an historic mistake.

“He has not just walked away from the talks, he has walked away from his own words.”

Clegg said he would work “flat-out” over the next few days to build consensus with MPs from other parties on a “proper solution” to the issue.

“I was disappointed, and indeed surprised, that David Cameron has decided to walk away from cross-party talks, especially
when they were making some real progress as late as yesterday evening.”

Cameron had been”wrong to abandon cross-party talks at this critical point”, he added.

Lord Fowler’s comments are a sign the Prime Minister could struggle to get his preferred method through the House of Lords even if they manage to clear the House of Commons.

They could well be defeated by MPs, with Labour and the Liberal Democrats both supporting the statutory underpinning of regulation proposed by Leveson.

The outcome is far from certain because many Tory MPs are in favour of the Leveson plan, while some Labour MPs are opposed to it.

Fowler, who is also a former Conservative Party chairman, said the charter was “always a bad idea because it puts power in the hands of the Government and it bypasses Parliament”.

He said: “Somehow we have got to come to some agreement on this. But agreement is a long way away at the moment.”

“I have yet to meet anyone who thinks the Royal Charter is the ideal way of dealing with this,” he added.

Campaigners were furious after Thursday’s talks broke down, with Hacked Off calling the failure to agree “a shameless betrayal of the victims of press abuse”.

Jacqui Hames, a former police officer who was put under surveillance by the News of the World, said: “I am incredibly disappointed to see that David Cameron wants to walk away and go back to where we were – back to the press and media moguls bullying and harassing the public.”

Actor and Hacked Off figurehead Hugh Grant claimed Cameron had been ordered by the editor of The Times to call off the talks – prompting critics to ask why the campaigner for press ethics was reporting a “rumour”.


Hugh Grant

Rumour in Westminster that editor of Times instructed Cameron to call off talks. And our PM did as he was told. Murdoch rules. Still.

Bob Satchwell, executive director of the Society of Editors, said: “It is important that the genuine need for reform is not allowed to continue to be overtaken by high politics.

“There are issues with principles and practicalities of legislation and editors have a right to be concerned about where politics and a ‘dab of statute’ might take us years down the line as attempts to hijack important legislation on other matters have shown.

Cameron said the proposals for an independent body, established by Royal Charter, to oversee the system of press self-regulation would provide “the toughest regulation of the press that this country has ever seen”.

Labour is expected to publish tomorrow its amendment for what was being described as a “Leveson-compliant” royal charter.

Related on HuffPost:

‘Justice is Broken’: Military Rape Epidemic Slammed at Senate Hearing

0

Survivors of military sexual assault testifying before the Senate armed services committee on Wednesday told the panel that the military criminal justice system is “broken” and that the “epidemic” of sexual violence is a direct result of a misogynistic culture and a system that allows assault to be “swept under the rug.” 

Anu Bhahwati, Brigette McCoy, Rebekah Havrilla, and Brian Lewis (L-R) testified before the Senate Armed Services Committee on Military Personnel on Wednesday, March 13. (Photo: Win Mcnamee/Getty Images) The victims spoke specifically about the fear and intimidation implicit in the “chain of command” system of prosecution in which military commanders–rather than an independent justice system–are responsible for overseeing justice, including the ability to throw out convictions and sentences.

Despite the approximately 19,000 incidents of violent sexual crime which occur each year, this was the first Senate hearing into sexual abuse in the armed forces in a decade. According to the Pentagon’s numbers, women in combat zones are more likely to be raped by a fellow soldier than killed by the enemy.

And sexual crimes against men are equally widespread. The Pentagon estimates that of the 19,300 sexual assaults in 2010, 8,600 of the victims were female and 10,700 male.

Rebekah Havrilla, a former army sergeant who was raped by another service member while in Afghanistan, told the Senate panel that after her attack what she experienced was a “broken” criminal justice system.

Reporting on her testimony, the Guardian writes that Havrilla described the military investigation into her case as being the “most humiliating thing that I have ever experienced,” noting that it was eventually closed after senior commanders decided not to pursue charges.

During her testimony, Havrilla spoke to the dominant military culture and the clear “lack of understanding” about rape and sexual abuse. “The hostility is not towards women,” she said. “The hostility is towards the feminine, towards the weak. It was not a gender issue. They are targeting what they see as less than.[…] In my mind it comes down to what was allowed by leaderships.”

Brian Lewis, the first male survivor of military sexual abuse to testify before Congress, added that the “conflict of interest” inherent in the current system of reporting and prosecution was prolonging this “epidemic” of sexual violence. “Service members must report rape to their commanders,” he explained. “However, if their commanders take action and prove that rape occurred, they also prove a failure of their own leadership.”

Of the nearly 4,000 reports of sexual assault last year, only 191 defendants were convicted at courts-martial. Many of those testifying referred to these numbers as a statement of suppression. The US Department of Defense estimate that 86.5% of violent sexual crimes go unreported.

“I witnessed reports of rape, sexual assault and sexual harassment swept under the rug by a handful of field grade officers,” said retired Marine Corps Captain Anu Bhagwati, who founded the Service Women’s Action Network. “Perpetrators were promoted, were transferred to other units without punishment, while victims were accused of lying or exaggerating their claims.”

The hearing comes amidst controversy over the reinstatement of Air Force Lt. Col. James Wilkerson, who was found guilty of aggravated sexual assault.

Senator Kirsten Gillibrand (D-NY), who chaired the panel, blasted the military’s “chain of command” handling of sexual assault. “If you think you are achieving ‘discipline and order’ with your current […] framework. I think you’re wrong.” 

_____________________

This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 License

10 Minutes Of Truth – David Icke Storms Mainstream Television

1

Mick Meaney
RINF Alternative News

Perhaps the most sensible words ever spoken on mainstream television, the world’s most controversial author, David Icke, attacks the illegal bombing of innocent civilians, the imbalance of wealth as we allow the mass death of people through needless starvation, and the systematic loss of homes and business through a corrupt financial institution.

News of the broadcast began trending on Twitter, as his comments made on national daytime television, stirred debate across the Internet.

Within the apparent safety of a pre-recorded interview, today the mainstream media took a bold step forward and aired an edited interview with the world’s most controversial author, David Icke.

Under a 10 minute time constraint, the ‘This Morning’ show on ITV attempted to sum-up two decades of David Icke’s research by focusing on the scientifically-supported theory that our universe is merely a hologram projection, while conveniently trying to ignore the vast amount of information he has uncovered which reveals how politicians, the media and financial institutions are interconnected on a global scale. But that didn’t stop him from getting in a few home-truths and guiding the topic of conversation towards the corruption of the establishment.

As the interview began, Icke described his ‘eureka moment’ twenty five years ago, when he walked away from a lucrative career in television to follow a new path of researching globalisation and the crimes of the establishment.

As Icke spoke, former children’s television presenter, Phillip Schofield, quickly interjected and brought up a pivotal appearance on the Terry Wogan show in 1991, a period of psychological transformation for Icke, that followed a press conference where he announced that he was a “Son of the Godhead” — a term that was taken out of context and misunderstood by the mainstream media.

Since then, Icke has rarely been interviewed in the mainstream media without the comments being mentioned — often as a weak attempt to discredit the researcher. The term actually means infinite awareness and can be applied to anyone who experiences a profound spiritual, emotional or psychological change where their life takes on new meaning and purpose.

During the ‘This Morning’ broadcast, Icke explained how the transformation he experienced allowed him to see the world in a completely different way, and that he had devoted the next twenty five years to connecting the dots, which has ultimately lead him to the conclusion that our perception of ‘reality’ is a result of how our five senses decode wave form information by turning it into electronic information and sending it to the brain.

He also explained that atoms have no solidity, arguing that our universe is a holographic projection, a cutting edge theory in quantum mechanics and one that is often supported by leading scientists. Of course, Icke has been saying this for decades while modern science has only just begun to take the theories of scientists like Nick Bostrom seriously.

When one of the shows presenters, Holly Willoughby, asked who created the hologram and why, Icke explained that is why his books contain so much information and why his speaking events can last for ten hours – because there are so many dots to connect.

He also stated that there is a force operating on the fringes of our perception that feeds off human energy. When Schofield likened it to the movie ‘the Matrix’ and asked if we are being controlled by a group of ‘super beings’, Icke responded with:

“No, not super beings, we are super beings, we are infinite awareness, that’s what we are, we are awareness and what this body does… I call it the biological computer, it focuses the attention of that awareness in this tiny band of frequency called visible light so we think this is all there is. “When people leave the body, suddenly, and this is a constant theme, that their awareness suddenly expands, suddenly past present and future all exist in the same now, because there is no time, that’s another illusion. And the reason that they suddenly have this expansion of awareness is that their point of attention has left the focus, the lens, the body, and can suddenly be set free.”

Schofield then posed the question that if our reality is controlled by the monarchy, elements of the banking sector and the media elite, then surely Icke is encouraging a global war or anarchy? He quickly responded with perhaps the most sensible words ever spoken on mainstream television:

“Do you think that bombing innocent civilians from the sky to protect them from violence is not anarchy? “Do you think that lending money that doesn’t exist, called credit, and if we don’t pay them back plus interest, they can take our real wealth, our homes and our land, and our businesses, do think that’s not anarchy? “People dying of hunger in a world of plenty, we have anarchy now.”

At this point, I actually found myself shouting at the television screen “you tell ’em David, you tell em”. The conversation quickly changed as Schofield challenged Icke as to why he charges people to access his research, a common argument put to full time geo-political researchers and activists.

The argument is a ridiculous one. In what other line of work is anyone expected to consistently produce high quality information, for free? Icke actually revealed that he has not taken a single penny from his landmark talk at the Wembley arena in 2012, and all profit has been put into organising the next one in October 2014.

However, just like everyone else, the man does need to feed himself. David Icke’s modest lifestyle is well known; he lives in a one bedroom flat on the Isle of Wight and devotes his life to uncovering the misdeeds of the establishment. Even after the interview, Schofield continued to misquote Icke on Twitter, as he received criticism for asking such a ludicrous question – why he charges for his work. Schofield Tweeted:

I think it’s a perfectly legitimate question from a man who called money ‘evil’.

In reality, David Icke did not call money ‘evil’, he called the misuse of money ‘evil’. Icke is completely self-financed as a result of the work he produces, a testament to quality of his research and a solid indication that people are tired of the mainstream media lies, the corrupt political and financial institutions and a growing number are now actively seeking alternatives.

Today’s broadcast will undoubtedly awaken more people to the crimes of the establishment and encourage them to investigate the facts for themselves.

Love him or hate him, the fact remains that David Icke’s research has exposed current and historical corruption on a scale that very few thought possible, and his predictions have consistently been accurate – not through some mystic connection or psychic ability, but through logic and years of painstaking research.

However, he is not alone in his quest for truth and knowledge. The UK has many researchers and activists who work tirelessly to uncover dark secrets and bring them into the light.

Ian R. Crane, Tony Gosling and Adrian Connock are just some of the many UK researchers who spend much of their lives digging up information that the establishment would prefer you not to know about.

The UK has also seen the rise of many campaign and activist groups, including Truth Juice, Reinvestigate 9/11 and NORML UK.

And the British alternative media continues to grow with organisations like Critical Mass Radio, The UK Column and WideShut.

At least in the UK, the future is looking positive for those who share, and embrace, information that we’re not supposed to know.

While David Icke is our loudest voice in the call for change, just below the surface there is a deep undercurrent, made up of thousands of people, all working towards change.

Get involved. Be the change.

McDonald’s Versus The Pub

0

MPs have accused McDonalds of undermining the “Great British pub” by buying up boozers and converting them into fast-food outlets.

The burger giant offers £20,000 for anyone who suggests a suitable site for a new restaurant, and lists pubs among desirable locations on its website.

mcdonalds

McDonald’s wants to open 30 new ‘drive-thru’ restaurants every year

Now an MP has tabled a motion condemning McDonalds for contributing to the drastic decline of pubs, with campaigners claiming 18 are closing every week.

Liberal Democrat Greg Mulholland, who chairs the All Party Parliamentary Save the Pub Group, is supported by MPs from the three main parties in his campaign.

greg mulholland

Mulholland chairs Parliament’s Save The Pub group

McDonalds told The Huffington Post UK former pubs could be “possible development opportunities.”

Planning consultations always take place, it said, adding that each new burger joint brings jobs to an area.

More than 1,700 people have joined a Facebook campaign to save an historic Hampshire pub from turning into a McDonalds.

There were also protests when a pub in Bromley was converted into a drive-through.

It is now listed as a case study on the McDonald’s website.

The Campaign for Real Ale said it had discussed the issue at a meeting on Wednesday night.

A Camra spokesman said pubs being converted into McDonald’s restaurants was “a worrying site and a massive blow to local communities.”

On its website, McDonald’s says it wants to open 30 new drive-through restaurants every year.

It lists pubs, as well as traditional high streets and shopping centres as possible locations.

Mulholland’s motion says: “That this House condemns McDonald’s for actively encouraging the use of public houses as sites for development through the development section on its official website which lists pub conversions amongst other desired sites and offers a £20,000 introductory fee to anyone able to locate a suitable site.”

It calls on Parliament to acknowledge the practice “will contribute to the decline of the Great British pub, a cherished British institution which is already being threatened by the predatory purchasing of pubs for development by supermarkets” and claims “companies like McDonald’s and others are intentionally targeting and converting viable, wanted pubs for non-pub use without the community having a say.”

However, his claim of a “loophole” to allow pubs to be converted into fast-food outlets without planning consent was disputed by McDonald’s, which said it has to follow full planning procedure.

A spokesman for the company said: “Like many businesses, we look to identify possible development opportunities in a number of locations, some of which include sites of former pubs.

“In order to convert a pub we require a change of use and therefore must apply for planning consent and we always conduct consultation before and during the planning application procedure.

“When we open new restaurants we bring investment to the local area and create around 65 full and part-time jobs.”

US Spy Agencies to Get Access to Trove of Citizens’ Private Financial Data

0

Multiple U.S. agencies will soon have access to a massive database of private financial data on citizens and individuals who do business in the U.S., giving national intelligence agencies the ability “to analyze more raw financial data than they have ever had before.”

The lobby of the CIA Headquarters Building in McLean, Virginia, August 14, 2008. Credit: Reuters/Larry Downing These revelations were reported by Reuters after the news outlet gained access to a Treasury Department document.

The private data, previously available only to the FBI, will now be widely accessible for a number of agencies including the Central Intelligence Agency and the National Security Agency, raising privacy concerns among critics.

The database in question–called the Financial Crimes Enforcement Network (FinCEN)– currently operates as a database for financial institutions who are required by law to file reports of “suspicious customer activity” to the FBI.

However, as Reuters reports, the database is flawed and commonly ‘over reports’ innocent citizens’ personal information:

The Treasury document outlines a proposal to link the FinCEN database with a computer network used by U.S. defense and law enforcement agencies to share classified information called the Joint Worldwide Intelligence Communications System.

The plan calls for the Office of the Director of National Intelligence – set up after 9/11 to foster greater collaboration among intelligence agencies – to work with Treasury. The Office of the Director of National Intelligence declined to comment.

More than 25,000 financial firms – including banks, securities dealers, casinos, and money and wire transfer agencies – routinely file “suspicious activity reports” to FinCEN. The requirements for filing are so strict that banks often over-report, so they cannot be accused of failing to disclose activity that later proves questionable. This over-reporting raises the possibility that the financial details of ordinary citizens could wind up in the hands of spy agencies.

Michael German, senior policy counsel for the American Civil Liberties Union, told Reuters there is alarming “wiggle room” within the new plan and significant concern about how the vast trove of information could be used (or misused).

Once spy agencies get such data, German said, “it’s in a black hole. Time and again, we have evidence, unfortunately well after the fact, that somebody’s civil rights have been violated, that the intelligence community simply ignores the rules.”

The Treasury planning document obtained by Reuters says that the planning for the database expansion is still in development, and it is not known when implementation might begin.

_______________________

This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 License

Gitmo Atrocities Continue

0

Stephen Lendman
RINF Alternative News

gitmo-detainee

America’s by far the world’s leading human rights abuser. It commits horrific crimes globally. No other nation matches its record. It’s longstanding. It’s unconscionable. It’s lawless.

It violates fundamental international, constitutional, and US statute laws. It does so with impunity. It’s official US policy.

Straightaway as president, Obama pledged to close Guantanamo. He lied. He’s a serial liar. It’s still open. The worst of Bush administration practices continue.

Appalling human rights abuses persist. Torture remains policy. It’s institutionalized throughout Washington’s gulag. Obama bears full responsibility.

The Center for Constitutional Rights (CCR) leads the legal struggle for justice at Guantanamo. It wants the facility shut. It defends lawlessly held detainees. It’s done so for over a decade. It sent the first habeas attorney there.

It helped win the historic Boumediene v. Bush Supreme Court case. It affirmed Guantanamo detainee habeas rights. It lets them petition for release from lawlessly imposed custody.

It’s done them no good. Obama enforces police state harshness. He does so at home and abroad. Justice Anthony Kennedy disagrees. He wrote the majority Boumediene opinion.

He said America maintains complete jurisdiction over Guantanamo regardless of its offshore location. He’s against political branches “govern(ing) without legal restraint.”

He expressed concern about usurping “power to switch the Constitution on or off at will.” Doing so “lead(s) to a regime in which they, not this Court, say ‘what the law is.’ ”

“Even when the United States acts outside its borders, its powers are not ‘absolute and unlimited’ but are subject ‘to such restrictions as are expressed in the Constitution.”

He called habeas “an indispensable mechanism for monitoring the separation of powers.”

“The test for determining (its) scope must not be subject to manipulation by those whose power it is designed to restrain.”

He and others agree. This bedrock right has no adequate substitute. Obama disregards it lawlessly. He’s contemptuous of fundamental human rights. He spurns rule of law principles. He lets torture and other abuses continue. More on that below.

CCR details Gitmo by the numbers. Everyone needs to know. Few detainees were charged. Most were innocent victims. So are those remaining.

Around 95% were sold for bounty. Washington wanted prisoners. Guilt or innocence didn’t matter. It doesn’t now. Rule of law principles are spurned. Torture remains official policy. Appalling human suffering continues.

Since Guantanamo opened, an estimated 779 victims were interned. Of those, 604 were transferred. Another 166 remain.

According to US records, at least 92% aren’t “Al-Qaeda fighters.” Over half those remaining were cleared for release. They’re still held.

Forty-six men are indefinitely detained uncharged. They committed no crimes. They can’t be prosecuted. Washington claims they’re too dangerous to release. Saying so is false on its face.

Twenty-two prisoners were under age 18 when abducted. Twelve or more fear torture, persecution or death awaits them at home. They need safe havens to rebuild their lives. They’re not easy to find.

Current detainees have been held on average 10 years or longer. Nearly all are innocent victims. Some will never be freed. Torture and other abuses brutalize them.

Nine men died in prison. Prison authorities ordered them murdered. False reports claimed suicide.

Bush and Obama officials remain unaccountable.

CCR demands Obama keep his promise. Guantanamo “unacceptably enter(s) its twelfth year of operation.”

Obama continues the worst of Bush administration policies. Indefinite detentions without charge or trial continue. Illegitimate military commissions are used. They assure guilt by accusation. Hanging judges preside.

It’s long “past time to shut down Guantanamo. (It’s) urgent. (It’s) ethically and legally necessary.”

America’s “war on terror” reflects consummate evil. It’s Washington’s way to wage war on humanity. It does so lawlessly. It continues without end.

Everyone’s unsafe. Rogue US officials trample on fundamental human rights. Obama and those around him enforce police state harshness. They shame the positions they hold. They practice what demands condemnation. It’s official policy. It persists.

Over 100 Guantanamo detainees resist their only way. They’re hunger striking for justice. They’re in their fifth week. A few elderly and ill still ingest food.

Over a dozen are being painfully force-fed. Doing so constitutes cruel and unusual punishment. It’s torture. It violates fundamental medical ethics.

Detainees are restrained in chairs. They’re called “padded cells on wheels.”

Tubes are forced painfully through their noses and throats. It’s done abrasively. It draws blood.

Liquid nutrients are pumped into their stomachs. Doing so causes excruciating pain. No sedatives or anesthesia are given. Men are kept strapped in for an hour or longer.

It’s done to prevent purging. The procedure’s repeated twice daily. Tubes are reused. They’re covered in blood and stomach bile.

Reportedly they’re passed from one inmate to another. Proper sanitation is non-existent. One detainee called the procedure “torture, torture, torture.”

Those refusing force-feeding are brutally beaten. Injuries occur. Hospitalization at times follows.

The World Medical Association says force-feeding violates fundamental medical ethics. When accompanied by “threats, coercion, force, and use of physical restraints, (it’s) considered inhuman and degrading treatment.”

It’s official Guantanamo policy. It persists throughout America’s gulag. It constitutes excruciating torture. It’s official US policy

On March 12, CCR discussed Guantanamo’s humanitarian crisis. A press release said its attorneys gave expert testimony. They did so before the Inter-American Commission on Human Rights (IACHR).

CCR requested the hearing. Other human rights groups were co-petitioners. They included the Center for Justice and International Law (CEJIL), Physicians for Human Rights (PHR), and Reprieve.

CCR attorney, Omar Farah, said the following:

“Today’s hearing at the IACHR came at a critical moment in Guantánamo’s troubled history.”

“Our clients report that most of the men at the prison are now in the fifth week of a mass hunger strike to peacefully protest worsening prison conditions, religious provocation, and the crushing reality that after 11 years in indefinite detention, there is no end in sight to their suffering.”

“In light of the humanitarian crisis unfolding at Guantanamo, it is indefensible that the US government failed to answer the Commission’s simple questions about how it plans to close the prison camp.”

Obama officials won’t because no plan exists. Guantanamo symbolizes imperial lawlessness. So do other US torture prisons. They exist at home and abroad. Media scoundrels explain nothing. Coverup if official policy.

CCR and others gave expert testimony. They discussed how Guantanamo causes psychological harm, deaths, indefinite detentions uncharged, lack of fair trials, and “illegitimate US policies” restricting the facility’s closure.

They reiterated demands, including:

closing Guantanamo immediately;

acknowledging ongoing torture and other human rights abuses; and

demanding “full access” to all detainees.

An earlier CCR report headlined “11 Years and Counting: Profiles of Men Detained at Guantanamo.” It explains America’s horrific treatment. Holding detainees uncharged was highlighted.

Injustice defines US policy. Individual profiles explain best. Horrific human rights abuses persist. Obama bears full responsibility. Justice remains denied.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago. He can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com.

Obama Killed Chavez

0

Stephen Lendman
RINF Alternative News

Venezuelan President Chavez wears army uniform on the third anniversary of his return to power ...

Most likely he was either poisoned or infected with cancer causing substances. Four cancer surgeries in 18 months raise suspicions.

Chavez knew he was marked for death. He said so numerous times. Oil Minister Rafael Ramirez believes Washington and Israel conspired to kill him.

He called it similar to how Israel murdered Yasser Arafat. Radioactive polonium poisoning killed him. Forensic evidence proved it.

On March 12, acting President Nicolas Marudo said a state commission will investigate his death. “(I)mportant scientists from different countries” will be involved.

Maduro believes forensic evidence will show Chavez was “injected by imperialist forces.”

He “was poisoned by dark forces in order to hit at the Venezuelan people and Latin America,” he stressed.

More information on his cancer will be explained later. It “didn’t correspond with any of the normal behaviors of the illness.”

“He received (lots) of death threats. Maybe they didn’t manage to it through a direct attempt” on his life.

“Everything seems to indicate that they managed to affect his health using the most advanced techniques.”

For decades, America experimented with cancer causing substances. Expert technologies exist. Assassination by bullet, bomb, slit throat, or plane crash reflects policy. Why not incurable diseases?

William Blum’s done some of the best research on America’s successful and failed political assassinations. On March 12, he headlined “I Personally Believe That Hugo Chavez Was Murdered By The United States.”

He thinks CIA operatives may have been involved. Post-WW II, they targeted over 50 foreign leaders for removal. Some died. Others lived.

Fidel Castro survived hundreds of assassination attempts. He knows better than anyone how Washington operates.

Chavez replaced him as its number one enemy. He spoke truth to power. He did so more forthrightly and eloquently than anyone.

He touched important nerves. He denounced US imperialism. He did so at home and abroad. He said what everyone needs to know. Washington menaces humanity. He said it loud and clear.

It’s “well known,” said Blum, “that during the Cold War, the CIA worked diligently to develop substances that could kill without leaving a trace.”

“I would like to see the Venezuelan government pursue every avenue of investigation in having an autopsy performed.”

Expert forensic pathologists will be involved. Maduro has that in mind. Chavez’s death wasn’t accidental. It reflects foul play. Hopefully clear evidence will prove it.

America had opportunity and motive. It does so globally. CIA rogues know how to kill. They’ve had decades of experience.

Investigative journalist Wayne Madsen said the Agency “pioneered” cancer-causing agent experiments. Focus was on infecting victims multiple ways. They include “injection, inhalation, (and) skin contact through contaminated clothing, especially underwear.”

Chavez’s aggressive cancer raises red flags. Possibly he was targeted through “contaminated food, drink, and even toothpaste.”

Extensive documentation of CIA use of cancer-causing agents exists. They’re used against figures Washington wants eliminated. At issue for Venezuela, says Madsen, is determining how Chavez was infected and by whom.

Bush administration officials pursued a secret biowarfare agenda. It rescinded and subverted the 1972 Biological Weapons Convention (BWC).

It renounced the 1989 US Biological Weapons Anti-Terrorism Act. It prohibits developing, producing, and stockpiling bacteriological/biological/toxic weapons. It worked covertly on developing illegal bioweapons.

At least since the 1940s, America pursued active biological weapons development. It’s been largely secret and unreported. Experiments have been conducted on human subjects.

Toxic chemical, biological and other substances are used. Germ warfare is official US policy. Bacteria’s been covertly released in US cities. Pneumonia and other diseases followed.

Bush spent billions on bioweapons development. Obama continues what he began. Multiple federal agencies are involved. CIA operates covertly. Its agenda includes “scientific assassinations.”

Chemical, biological and radiation experiments involve human subjects. Secrecy persists.

Francis Boyle’s “Biowarfare and Terrorism” discusses America’s lawless biological weapons development, production and buildup. It’s potential endangers humanity.

It’s part of America’s war on terror. It reflects an extremist agenda. It’s about unchallenged power. It includes biological, chemical, nuclear and other toxins. They kill selectively or en masse.

Obama prioritizes killing. He does it daily in multiple theaters. He targets independent leaders for removal. Smart money says he killed Chavez. Believe it! Hopefully forensic evidence will prove it.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago. He can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com.

Superheated American City Dealing with 110 Degrees for 33 Days — Phoenix Confronts Apocalyptic Climate Change

0

Horrific heat, droughts, windstorms, water shortages and forest fires will plague nation’s 13th largest city.

Photo Credit: Shutterstock.com

March 14, 2013  |  

Like this article?

Join our email list:

Stay up to date with the latest headlines via email.

To stay on top of important articles like these, sign up to receive the latest updates from  TomDispatch.com here.

If cities were stocks, you’d want to short Phoenix.

Of course, it’s an easy city to pick on. The nation’s 13th largest metropolitan area (nudging out Detroit) crams 4.3 million people into a low bowl in a hot desert, where horrific heat waves and windstorms visit it regularly. It snuggles next to the nation’s largest nuclear plant and, having exhausted local sources, it depends on an improbable infrastructure to suck water from the distant (and dwindling) Colorado River.

In Phoenix, you don’t ask: What could go wrong? You ask: What couldn’t?

And that’s the point, really. Phoenix’s multiple vulnerabilities, which are plenty daunting taken one by one, have the capacity to magnify one another, like compounding illnesses. In this regard, it’s a quintessentially modern city, a pyramid of complexities requiring large energy inputs to keep the whole apparatus humming. The urban disasters of our time — New Orleans hit by Katrina, New York City swamped by Sandy — may arise from single storms, but the damage they do is the result of a chain reaction of failures — grids going down, levees failing, back-up systems not backing up. As you might expect, academics have come up with a name for such breakdowns: infrastructure failure interdependencies. You wouldn’t want to use it in a poem, but it does catch an emerging theme of our time.

Phoenix’s pyramid of complexities looks shakier than most because it stands squarely in the crosshairs of climate change. The area, like much of the rest of the American Southwest, is already hot and dry; it’s getting ever hotter and drier, and is increasingly battered by powerful storms. Sandy and Katrina previewed how coastal cities can expect to fare as seas rise and storms strengthen. Phoenix pulls back the curtain on the future of inland empires. If you want a taste of the brutal new climate to come, the place to look is where that climate is already harsh, and growing more so — the aptly named Valley of the Sun.

In Phoenix, it’s the convergence of heat, drought, and violent winds, interacting and amplifying each other that you worry about. Generally speaking, in contemporary society, nothing that matters happens for just one reason, and in Phoenix there are all too many “reasons” primed to collaborate and produce big problems, with climate change foremost among them, juicing up the heat, the drought, and the wind to ever greater extremes, like so many sluggers on steroids. Notably, each of these nemeses, in its own way, has the potential to undermine the sine qua non of modern urban life, the electrical grid, which in Phoenix merits special attention.

If, in summer, the grid there fails on a large scale and for a significant period of time, the fallout will make the consequences of Superstorm Sandy look mild. Sure, people will hunt madly for power outlets to charge their cellphones and struggle to keep their milk fresh, but communications and food refrigeration will not top their list of priorities. Phoenix is an air-conditioned city. If the power goes out, people fry.

In the summer of 2003, a heat wave swept Europe and killed 70,000 people. The temperature in London touched 100 degrees Fahrenheit for the first time since records had been kept, and in portions of France the mercury climbed as high as 104°F. Those temperatures, however, are child’s play in Phoenix, where readings commonly exceed 100°F for more than 100 days a year. In 2011, the city set a new record for days over 110°F: there were 33 of them, more than a month of spectacularly superheated days ushering in a new era.

‘Chris Huhne Is A Friend’ Says Clegg..

0

Liberal Democrat leader, Nick Clegg has said that he still regards jailed former colleague Chris Huhne as a “friend”, but is not expecting to visit him in prison.

The deputy prime minister revealed that he last spoke to the former energy secretary, who stepped down as a Lib Dem MP after pleading guilty to perverting the course of justice, during the by-election campaign for his old seat of Eastleigh in Hampshire.

Huhne was sentenced to eight months in prison, alongside ex-wife Vicky Pryce, on Monday.

Speaking to LBC 97.3 radio, Clegg said today: “I do have mixed emotions and I feel very sad for his whole family. Whatever he’s done, he still remains someone I’ve known for many years and a friend.

“I’m not going to say that because he’s done something wrong and he’s serving his time that that’s not the case. That is the case.”

LIKE HUFFPOST UK POLITICS ON FACEBOOK | FOLLOW US ON TWITTER

He added: “I’m not going to airbrush out that Chris is someone I’ve known for many years, who is a friend, who is a close colleague, and I feel incredibly sad for his whole family, because his whole family has been engulfed by this.

“I don’t think Chris would expect me to visit him in prison but I will see Chris once he…,” Clegg said, trailing off at the end of the sentence.

“I haven’t written to him. We’ve been in touch. The last time we were in touch was around the time of the Eastleigh by-election, but of course I will keep in touch with Chris once he has served his sentence.

“You can be clear someone’s done something wrong and has to pay the consequences, but equally acknowledge that you can still keep in touch with them as a human being, as a friend.”

Leveson Talks Break Down, David Cameron To Force Commons Vote On Royal Charter

0

David Cameron is heading for almost certain defeat in the Commons on Monday after he blew up cross-party talks on implementing the Leveson proposals for press regulation.

Instead the prime minister has scheduled a showdown vote in which MPs will be asked to support his alternative plan for a Royal Charter.

However both the Lib Dem and Labour leadership support the statutory underpinning of regulation as proposed by Leveson and as such Cameron does not have an obvious parliamentary majority on the issue.

Hacked Off called the failure to agree “a shameless betrayal of the victims of press abuse”.

It is unclear whether Nick Clegg will tell his MPs to vote with Labour to defeat the Tory proposals, however it would be extremely awkward for the deputy prime minister to abandon his previous strong support for Leveson.

The outcome of the vote is made more uncertain as many Tory MPs are in favour of the Leveson plan, while some Labour MPs are opposed to it.

LIKE HUFFPOST UK POLITICS ON FACEBOOK | FOLLOW US ON TWITTER

In a hastily-arranged press conference in 10 Downing Street, Cameron announced that the cross-party talks had “concluded without agreement” after a conference call between himself, Clegg and Ed Miliband this morning.

He said that the proposals for an independent body, established by Royal Charter, to oversee the system of press self-regulation would provide “the toughest regulation of the press that this country has ever seen”.


John Prescott

So Cameron has unwittingly turned Monday’s Leveson vote into a confidence vote on his leadership. What could possibly go wrong?

Newspapers would refuse to sign up to a new system which is underpinned by statute, as recommended by Lord Justice Leveson and advocated by Labour, Lib Dems and the Hacked Off campaign group, he warned.

“The route I have set out is the fastest possible way to deliver the strong self-regulation body that Leveson proposed that can put in place million-pound fines, prominent apologises and get justice for victims in this country,” said the prime minister.

“The deal is there to be done, it is the fastest way to get proper justice for victims.”

And a senior Lib Dem source said that Cameron had made the decision to pull the plug on cross-party talks “unilaterally” and the Liberal Democrats were now considering their next step.

“We were very surprised and disappointed,” said the source. “We thought we were making real progress and inching towards a deal, but the Prime Minister has unilaterally decided to pull the plug on cross-party talks.

“We are still prepared to work with politicians of all parties, including the Conservatives, who want to work with others to implement Leveson.”

Asked whether Lib Dems would vote with Labour against the Royal Charter proposals on Monday, the source said: “We are going to have to talk about it and see what we do. Nothing has been agreed in government.”

A senior Labour source said: “The prime minister’s decision is very disappointing. We still hope for an agreement. We still believe there can be an agreement. We urge the Prime Minister to reflect on his actions.”

Index on Censorship chief executive Kirsty Hughes backed the PM’s move, and said he was right not to make a “shoddy compromise with Nick Clegg and Ed Miliband, which would have meant statutory underpinning of press regulation.

“A tough new independent regulator whether set up by Royal Charter, or preferably by a route with no political involvement at all, is a big step forward compared to the previous system of self-regulation.

“Cameron’s decision to go to a vote has clearly been forced by the threat of wrecking amendments being added into several bills, including one that is already threatening the passage of the Defamation Bill, which Leveson himself said should be kept separate from his work.”

Professor Brian Cathcart, Executive Director, Hacked Off said Cameron had “chosen to throw his lot in with powerful national newspaper groups, whose actions were condemned in the Leveson Report.

“He allowed the newspapers to rewrite Leveson so much that they would have been able to pick and choose which complaints their self regulator dealt with and would have given the self regulator little power to tell a paper to give an apology or a correction due prominence.

“Worse than that, the editors would have been able to write their own rules and handpick the people who ran the regulator.

“Cameron is trying to raise a smokescreen to hide his dirty dealings behind closed doors with powerful press barons who don’t want to have to be accountable when their newspapers —to use Lord Justice Leveson’s words — ‘wreak havoc in the lives of innocent people’”.

Related on HuffPost:

Britain And France ‘Ready To Arm Syrian Rebels’

0

France and Britain are ready to arm rebels in Syria, even without full support from the European Union, French foreign minister Laurent Fabius said today.

UK Government sources said that no decision has been taken to seek the lifting of the EU arms embargo on Syria, but stressed that “all options” remain on the table.

David Cameron hinted earlier this week that Britain could decide to ignore the arms ban and supply weapons to rebels fighting Bashar Assad’s regime, telling MPs that he hoped the EU would act together if it became necessary, but “it’s not out of the question we might have to do things in our own way”.

Cameron is today travelling to Brussels for a summit with other EU leaders, but Downing Street said Syria was not expected to feature on the agenda. It is understood that Britain wants to see what impact is achieved by the recent move to supply “non-lethal” assistance – including armoured cars, body armour and secure communications equipment – before any further decisions are taken.

Fabius today suggested that London and Paris could ask for a planned meeting in May, to decide whether to lift or extend the arms embargo, to be brought forward, possibly to the end of March.

Speaking to France Info radio, Fabius said that Britain and France are asking “the Europeans now to lift the embargo so that the resistance fighters have the possibility of defending themselves”.

LIKE HUFFPOST UK POLITICS ON FACEBOOK | FOLLOW US ON TWITTER

If unanimous EU support for lifting the measure is lacking, the French and British governments will decide to deliver weapons, Fabius said, adding that France “is a sovereign nation”.

“We must move quickly,” he said. “We along with the British will ask for the meeting to be moved up.”

Responding to Fabius’s remarks, a Foreign Office spokesman said: “Our objective is clear – an end to the violence and a political transition to a more democratic Syria through a political solution.

“As it stands, the political track has little chance of gathering momentum unless the regime feels compelled to come to the negotiating table. They need to feel that the balance on the ground has shifted against them.

Click here for the HuffPost “Change Your Mind” on the arguments for and against arming Syrian rebels

“That is why we welcome the EU arms embargo amendment agreed in February on Syria as it sends a strong message to the Assad regime that the political calculations of the international community, including the EU, have shifted and that we are not prepared to rule out any options to bring an end to the suffering of millions of innocent Syrians.

“The Foreign Secretary has been clear he hasn’t ruled out any options for the future.”

‘Erase Israel from the Internet’: Anonymous plots massive cyber-attack

0

Published time: March 14, 2013 08:08

image from #OpIsrael

Hacktivist group Anonymous, along with numerous other hackers, is planning a massive cyber-attack on Israel, threatening to “erase” the country from Internet. Israel is apparently taking the threats seriously, with defensive preparations underway.

“Hacktivists Starting Cyber Attack against Israel on 7th of April,” Anonymous wrote on Twitter, calling on hackers around the world to join up for a second ‘OpIsrael.’

Israeli government agencies are reportedly readying for the attack: “It’s something being organized online over the past few days. What distinguishes this plan when compared to previous attacks is that it really seems to be organized by Anonymous-affiliated groups from around the world in what looks like a joining of forces,” Ofir Ben Avi, director of online group Accessible Government told Haaretz.

The first ‘OpIsrael’ cyber-attacks were launched by the hacktivist group during Israeli’s ‘Pillar of Defense’ assault on Gaza in November 2012.

“We are Anonymous. We are legion. We will not forgive. We will not forget. Israel, it is too late to expect us,” their message to Israeli authorities read. 

Some 700 Israeli website suffered repeated cyber-attacks, including high-profile government systems such as the Foreign Ministry, and the Israeli President’s official website. The Israeli Finance Ministry reported an estimated 44 million unique attacks on government websites.

Following ‘OpIsrael,’ Anonymous posted the online personal data of 5,000 Israeli officials, including names, ID numbers and personal emails.

Anonymous was also involved in an attack in which the details of some 600,000 users of the popular Israeli email service Walla were exposed online.

Internal intelligence agencies hungry for deeper cooperation from Skype

0

Published time: March 14, 2013 04:15

AFP Photo / Mario Tama

While already giving intelligence services access to private data without a court order, some Russian experts say, Skype is still being pressured into registering as a telecom agency, allowing intelligence to operate around a series of legal loopholes.

Intelligence services have for years have been monitoring Skype communications, several participants in the Russian information security industry have told Russian newspaper Vedomosti. According to security experts, access to correspondence and Skype conversations within the Russian intelligence community does not always go through the court system — it is often obtained on a “simple request.”

After Microsoft acquired Skype in May 2011, it updated its software with a technology allowing “legitimate wiretapping,” Maksim Emm, CEO of Peak Systems, told the publication. Since then, any user account can be switched to a special mode in which the encryption keys that were previously generated on a user’s mobile device or computer would be generated on Skype’s server.

With access to the server, anyone can listen to the conversation or read the correspondence, including short messages sent to mobile phones. Microsoft provides the opportunity to use this technology to security services all around the world, including Russia, the expert explained.

Another expert elaborated that “for a couple of years” the intelligence agencies can not only listen, but also determine a user’s location. “That is why our employees, for example, are forbidden to talk on work-related manners on Skype,” Ilya Sachkov, CEO of Group-IB, told Vedomosti.

The Federal Security Service (FSB) asked Microsoft back in 2011 to provide Skype’s source code, claiming it was required to reduce the threat to Russia’s national security. Although the code would not allow authorities to obtain direct and easy access to private data, it could help to crack the encryption system.

The request was apparently turned down, leaving security services with the only fully legal ways of obtaining private information — through a direct court request to Microsoft.

RIA Novosti / Iliya Pitalev

Microsoft’s somewhat cooperative attitude towards releasing private data did not stop the FSB from filing numerous complaints to the company, pushing it to register under a different designation — as a telecommunications operator.

While Skype provides VoIP (Voice over IP) services, the company is not registered as an operator. Such a move would make accessing and collecting private data even easier for the authorities, because in accordance with Russian legislation, mobile operators and Internet service providers are required to collect personal data and store it for at least three years.

Meanwhile, the French telecom regulator ARCEP is also pushing Skype towards further collaboration with the special security services.

The body posted a notice on Tuesday saying that prosecutors had been notified that Skype should register with the authorities as telecom firm as it provides its users with the ability to make phone calls, and therefore is required to meet regulations including “implementing the means required to perform legally ordered interceptions.”

ARCEP added further that Skype’s failure to register as an “electronic communications operator,” after several requests by ARCEP, could be viewed as a criminal offense.

Skype’s position on the matter was outlined in a statement sent to Ars Technica, which said:

Copyright above freedom: Strasbourg rejects Pirate Bay founders’ case

0

Published time: March 14, 2013 03:53

Two of the co-founders of the file-sharing website, The Pirate Bay, Fredrik Neij (R) and Peter Sunde. (AFP Photo / Jonathan Nackstrand)

The European Court of Human Rights has rejected a request to hear the case of two Pirate Bay founders, saying the Swedish court’s ruling was necessary to protect intellectual property rights even though it interfered with freedom of expression.

“The Court held that sharing, or allowing others to share files of this kind on the Internet, even copyright-protected material and for profit-making purposes, was covered by the right to ‘receive and impart information’ under Article 10 (freedom of expression),” the decision reads.

After a hearing last month, the Court has denied their application, arguing that the Swedish courts had already made the correct verdict.

The Strasbourg court concluded that the Stockholm ruling interferes with the right to freedom of expression, but said it was a necessary measure to protect copyright. The decision reads: “The Court concluded that the interference with the right to freedom of expression of Mr Neij and Mr Sunde Kolmisoppi had been necessary in a democratic society and that their application had therefore to be rejected as manifestly ill-founded.”

Peter Sunde and Fredrik Neij, two of the co-founders of one of the world’s biggest torrent-sharing websites were charged with violation of the Copyright Act in 2008.

In April 2009, the two defendants were found to be guilty of “assisting in making copyright content available” by the judge. The businessman were sentenced to one year’s imprisonment and fined 3.3 million euros after Stockholm district court heard numerous Hollywood production studios claims of copyright infringement. A year later, their sentence was reduced but their fine increased.

In June 2012, Neij and Sunde appealed to the European Court of Human Rights arguing that their freedom of expression had been violated.

Space watch: Joint asteroid guard to be set up in Russia

0

Published time: March 13, 2013 23:57

This artist's concept illustrates an asteroid belt. (NASA/JPL-Caltech)

The days of asteroids blasting Russia are numbered. In less than a decade, the country is expected to have a functioning space threats defense that would be able track incoming menaces — and even prevent a large-scale disaster.

The megatons-strong explosion of a space bolide that hit the Russian Urals in mid-February also served as a bit of shake-up for the country’s authorities. Russia’s science, military and space industries are now uniting to create a first-of-its-kind national space threats defense program.

The project is expected to take shape by late 2013, but it will take at least five more years until practical results are achieved and an operable system is deployed.

According to Vladimir Popovkin, the head of Roskosmos, the national space agency, “an inter-agency task force consisting of experts from the Defense Ministry, Academy of Sciences and national space agency has been formed to create a unified system of space threats prevention.”

All three bodies have space threats management programs of their own, but now it’s been decided to combine their experience, efforts and budgets, Popovkin reported on Tuesday at a round-table conference on asteroid and comet threats in Russia’s Federation Council.

The near space optical surveillance program of the Academy of Sciences, the counter space threats plan being elaborated by Roskosmos and the technical capabilities of the Defense Ministry will soon become one for the common good.

“We need to unite them,” Popovkin explained, noting that “our country has enough financial means but they’re being spent on departmental special-purpose programs.”

A united control center to coordinate the activities and the management of resources for the program is to be created.

In addition, the Russian Academy of Science is devising a telescope network that will expand throughout the whole country.

High precision astronomical unit. (RIA Novosti / Anton Denisov)

Counter-asteroid space vehicles may soon become a reality, with Lavochkin Unmanned Space Vehicles Company and Makeev State Rocket Center having proposed projects. A group of such vehicles could be deployed in geostationary earth orbit.

However, Popovkin stressed that the first visible results of the program should be expected no earlier than 2018-2020.

Despite all the cutting-edge technologies currently in development, a nuclear warhead still seems to be the only real way to protect against threats from space, the conference revealed.

Once a dangerous space object is detected there will be a very limited time — about one year — to take measures to intercept it, said Oleg Shubin, the Deputy Director of the Department of Nuclear Munitions and Military Power Installations of Russia’s nuclear monopoly Rosatom.

“Interception of an asteroid with size bigger than one kilometer in diameter would imply engagement of a nuclear warhead considerably more powerful than the existing megaton class of nuclear devices. This is a scientific challenge that could be solved,” Shubin said.

“In the foreseeable future there is no other danger [except asteroids] that can potentially lead to, at least, the degradation of our civilization,” believes Shubin.

A 10-year federal program worth 58 billion rubles (over $1.9 billion) designed to track down and counteract space threats was presented by Lidia Rykhlova of the Institute of Astronomy (RAS) in February this year.

The head of Russia’s defense industry, Deputy Prime Minster Dmitry Rogozin, pointed out at the time that developing the program on a national level would be excessively expensive and would require international efforts.

Russian authorities became genuinely concerned about possible space threats after February 15, when a space bolide estimated to weigh around 7,000 tons and traveling at 40,000 km per hour blew up over Chelyabinsk, a provincial capital in the Urals Mountains. The shockwave of the 500-kiloton explosion scattered debris for dozens of kilometers and injured an estimated 1,500 people, including 299 children.

The trace of a flying object in the sky over Chelyabinsk (still from a dashboard camera). (RIA Novosti / nakanune.ru)

Japanese ‘Skull Reaper’ banned from city council duty over wrestling mask

0

Published time: March 13, 2013 23:17

Image from twitter user@skullaji

After refusing to take off his mask, the Japanese wrestler known in the ring as Skull Reaper A-ji has been ejected from a city council meeting. Oita residents elected him as councilor last month despite, or thanks to, his awesome outfit.

Campaigning on educational reform and improved social welfare facilities, the 44-year-old won only 2,828 votes, but that was enough for him to get a seat on the city council. He says people elected him as Skull Reaper and he wanted to do his part for the city as this persona.

But before his first council meeting, other councilors said it was inappropriate for a member of the assembly to conceal his identity by wearing a mask. They referred to a rule of the council stating that “hats, capes and the like” are not allowed in the chamber.

Skull Reaper A-ji refused the request, and instead pointed to the fact that he has done a lot of charitable work for the community in the last decade, including visiting institutions for people with physical disabilities.

“People find it easy to come up and talk to me because I have a mask on,” he told the Nishinippon Shimbun, a Japanese daily.

“My mask is my uniform, I even wear it to weddings, so I will not remove it,” he added.

Image from twitter user@skullaji

“If I take my mask off, I’m an entirely different person. I will not take it off,” he told the newspaper Nikkan Sports after he was told of the decision.

But all parties in the council agreed that Skull Reaper A-ji could use his ring name, as it was the name he used to be voted into office.

Other politicians in Japan who wear masks have been elected at local level, including a councilor with the nickname Super Delfin in Osaka and a former professional wrestler who was elected to represent the Iwate Prefecture in the north of Japan in 2003.

Image from twitter user@skullaji

Image from twitter user@skullaji

Russia’s Duma passes tough law on drunk-driving

0

Published time: March 13, 2013 20:56

A traffic police officer conducts an alcohol test of a driver. (RIA Novosti / Yuri Strelets)

The lower chamber Russia’s of parliament passed a bill in the first reading toughening penalties for drink-driving, establishing a four-times-higher fine for repeated offenses and raising the criminal sentence for fatal accidents.

The bill was introduced by the chairman State Duma Committee for Security and Anti-Corruption measures Irina Yarovaya from the United Russia party. The bill toughens responsibility for repeatedly committing offenses such as driving drunk with or without a driver’s license. According to the new bill, the fine will be raised to 200 thousand rubles (about $6,500) for repeated offenses. As an alternative to the fine, the deputies suggest compulsory community work up to 480 hours, forced work up to two years or detention up to six months.

According to the bill, a fine of 30 thousand roubles (about $920) will be set for driving in a state of alcohol intoxication. A fine of 10 thousand roubles (about $300) will be set for handing over the wheel to a person under the influence of alcohol.

In each of the cases, the driver will be deprived of his license for one and a half or two years. If these offenses are repeated, the fine will be raised to 50 thousand roubles (about $1,630).

If the drunk driver was caught without a license or he was deprived of his license before, he will be fined 30 thousand roubles or charged with 15 days of administrative arrest if he is unable to pay.

In addition, the criminal penalties will be toughened for killing a person while driving drunk, according to the bill. If the victim of the drunk driver dies, then the offender faces imprisonment for a period of two to seven years.

A police officer stands near the Range Rover which caused a traffic accident on Lermontovsky Prospekt, Moscow. The car hit two people on a pedestrian crossing and then caused a car accident involving five cars. (RIA Novosti / Sergey Pyatakov)

For the deaths of two or more people the charges are raised and the offender faces from four to nine years in jail. 

Compared to the current set of laws in the Criminal Code, the innovation of the bill is the establishment of the minimum time of imprisonment. The bill also excludes the possibility of penalizing the offender by means of community service in cases of fatal accidents. In addition to that in all fatal cases the driver’s license will be revoked for a period of 3 years.

According to Yarovaya, more than 80 percent of Russians think that drunken drivers pose the greatest threat to their life and health, says Interfax. She considers it wrong that currently some of the drivers who were the cause of lethal accidents received only two years’ probation, Interfax reports.

But there is much criticism of the bill since the current legislation says only people with 0 per mil of alcohol in their blood are considered ‘sober’. This means people with naturally occurring alcohol in their blood or those taking certain medicines would be considered intoxicated.

The alcohol level at which a person is considered to be legally impaired varies by country. For comparison Britain has the permitted level of 0.8 per mil permitted and USA the same number.

Criminal penalties for drunken driving can be toughened only if there is a criterion for determining the level of the driver’s intoxication, said First Deputy Chairman of the Duma Committee on Constitutional Legislation and State Vyacheslav Lysakov, RIA Novosti news agency reports.

Lysakov proposed an amendment according to which a man would be recognized as drunk if the level of alcohol is greater than 0.2 per mil in his blood, RIA Novosti reports. The amendment was submitted after the bill passed its first reading.

Ambulances on the site of a road accident on Minskaya street which clained seven lives, September 22, 2012. (RIA Novosti / Iliya Pitalev)

The State Duma has intensified its work on proposals to increase penalties for drunk driving after seven people were killed, including several disabled teens, when a driver ran his speeding car into a bus stop in the Russian capital in September last year. The 30-year-old driver was detained at the scene and later confessed he was in a state of “alcoholic intoxication” at the time of the crash. Several hours after his arrest, the driver was barely able to stand on his feet but still tried to break free.

There have been calls to toughen the legislation before. Ad banners were spotted on one of Moscow’s highways with a slogan reading “We are tired of warning you. Don’t f**g drink & drive”.

‘If you were a man, we’d kill you’: Captive journalist tells RT how she escaped Syrian rebels

0

Published time: March 13, 2013 20:06

Anhar Kochneva. (Image from facebook.com)

Download video (70.55 MB)

‘I couldn’t bear it any longer’, recalls Anhar Kochneva. The Ukrainian journalist who escaped Syrian rebels five months after she was kidnapped told RT about what she had to go through while in captivity and how she managed to run away.

Kochneva, a journalist and blogger who reported as a freelancer for Russian and Ukrainian news outlets, was captured at the beginning of October 2012 near the Syrian city of Homs.

The kidnappers – members of the Free Syrian Army — repeatedly threatened to kill her if the US $50 million ransom was not paid. The sum was later reduced to reportedly US$ 300,000. The rebels said they had planned to put Kochneva to death on December 16, but decided to “give her a second chance.”

Several world powers — including Russia, the US and France – as well as international human right organizations, urged the Syrian opposition to release the woman. 

She escaped on Monday after spending more than 150 days in captivity, which damaged her health. The journalists walked for 15 kilometers in the mountainous area before she was lucky to meet people who helped her to get to the region controlled by the Syrian army.

Kocheva says it was only “thanks to God” that she is free again. In an interview with RT Arabic the journalist shared details of her escape.

RT: How did you manage to escape from captivity? Who helped you do that?

Anhar Kochneva: No one, but Allah. Though, I know that many tried to help. The problem was that no one knew where I was — even the militants from the same group who were visiting that house did not know that I was kept there.

After I was kidnapped, my health seriously declined and there was a danger that I wouldn’t get cured and simply die. Or [the militants] would kill me, or the [Syrian] army would shoot me down accidentally when returning fire on the militants. It was really dangerous. I spent five months there.

RT: Could you tell in more detail about the escape? Was there security at the door?

AK: I only had to open the door and get outside. I started thinking about the best time to do that so that no one would see me because they could kill me. At night they would open fire every time they noticed any kind of movement and didn’t know what that was — a human or anything else. I had a million things to consider as it was a very dangerous action. If they had caught me, they would definitely beat me and toughen the conditions they kept me in. Angered, they could even kill me.

I opened the door which was locked from inside the house because the guards were there. I got to the street and went down the road. I kept walking and walking.

RT: So, the guards were sleeping at that time?

AK: Yes, yes. They were sleeping.

RT: They simply fell asleep and left the key in the door lock?

AK: Yes. They thought I wouldn’t do anything. Actually, there wasn’t even a key there — just a usual bolt.

So, they were sleeping and I walked out. I wanted to find someone on the road to tell them who I was and ask for help. Of course, there was a danger that they would give me away.

Thank God, I met people who helped me to get out of that district. I knew nothing about that area, I had no idea where were militants, where were [government troops], where were mines. I went across fields where mines could be.

RT: How were you captured? Did you recognize people who did that? How did they treat you all the time you were kept hostage?

AK: Sincerely, for first 50 days I had a very good opinion of them. And they didn’t think that I could go anywhere. For instance, a guy who kept watch over me used to support me most of the time. He would even give me his food and stay hungry himself.

But then they got tired of me staying there because they couldn’t leave and do something else. Sometimes they had to spend their own money on me as they were not given a budget to provide me with food, water or clothes. I was dressed in summer clothes, but when winter came I wanted warm clothes.

My presence there turned into burden for them and they felt angry with me, started abusing me, hitting without a reason and so on. They got harsher with me. They began to close the door. For instance, I needed to use the loo, but the door was closed and no one would open it for me. What did I have to do? I couldn’t bear that any longer.

To be honest, I know that they were saying “If you were a man, we would kill you.” And, naturally, they demanded a ransom for me. That’s why they treated me better than those who they simply wanted to slaughter.

Window into Big Bang: World’s largest ground-based telescope can see the birth of stars (PHOTOS)

0

Published time: March 13, 2013 19:18

Credit: ESO/B. Tafreshi (twanight.org)The antennas of the Atacama Large Millimeter/submillimeter Array (ALMA) shine under the southern sky. Image released Dec. 31, 2012

Detailed visions of star and planet formation, hidden from the eyes of modern optics, will be soon shown by the ground breaking ALMA radio telescope unveiled on Wednesday. Scientists say it will be a game changer in studying the origins of our universe.

ALMA stands for Atacama Large Millimeter/submillimeter Array, and it is the largest ground-based astronomy project. It’s the most expensive one too, with construction costs going up to $1.3 billion. ALMA’s been devised and built by the joint efforts of scientists from European, East Asian and North American countries for more than a decade.

It consists of 66 huge antennas and a supercomputer installed in a 10-mile (16 km) diameter area on a high-altitude plateau in Chile. A lower-ground operating support facility is connected to the complex by some 15 km of cables.

View of a Radio telescope antennas of the ALMA ( Atacama Large Millimeter/submillimeter Array) project, in the Chajnantor plateau, Atacama desert, some 1500 km north of Santiago, on March 12,2013 (AFP Photo / Martin Bernetti)

Upon completion, the cutting edge telescope will become the most powerful in the world, with resolution ten times higher than the Very Large Array (VLA) and five times finer than the Hubble Space Telescope.

Scientists compared the array’s working principle to how we perceive sound by two ears. Each of ALMA’s antennas, ranging from 7 to 12 meters in diameter, gathers radio waves from space, and their combined result is processed through the supercomputer.

Height is one of the key factors of ALMA’s incredible power, as water vapor absorbs radio waves nearer to sea level and obscures observations. This is the reason the $1.3 billion complex had to be mounted at an altitude of 5,000 meters amidst the arid Chilean desert, with construction workers having to use supplemental oxygen, and the science team having to operate in the 2,900 meters high support facility.

But for astronomers these are negligible costs when compared to the perspectives, which the ALMA project is said to be opening.

An image taken by ALMA during the early testing stage shows the Antennae Galaxies Collision. Credit: ALMA (ESO/NAOJ/NRAO). Visible light image: the NASA/ESA Hubble Space Telescope

“The scientific community wants to use ALMA in its research on star formation, the birth of planets and not just what is happening in our solar system, but also on how the system was created after the Big Bang,” ALMA director Thijs de Graaw said.

According to Big Bang theory, the origin of our universe occurred about 13.77 billion years ago.

“It is a revolution in the history of the universe in the realm of millimetric and sub-millimetric waves, which can look through clouds of dust and focus on the formation of stars themselves. Telescopes cannot see what is happening inside these clouds. With ALMA, we can. And that is like opening a new window,” he added.

“It will have a view of the universe that we can’t even imagine even now,” Wolfgang Wild, ESO’s European ALMA project manager also told SPACE.com.

This view shows a new picture of the dust ring around the bright star Fomalhaut obtained by ALMA. The underlying blue picture is an earlier view obtained by the Hubble. Credit: ALMA (ESO/NAOJ/NRAO). Visible light image: the NASA/ESA Hubble Space Telescope

Not only will ALMA bring about a new picture of the universe’s formation, it could also make a breakthrough in the study of alien worlds.

Astronomers would be able to detect the effects of young planets the size of Earth, SPACE.com quoted James Ulvestad, director of the US National Science Foundation’s astronomical sciences division.

“ALMA already has seen dust rings around stars that are very narrow, and by modeling… you can infer the dust ring has planets inside and outside the ring. Even though you can’t see the planet, you can see the effects of the planet. That would be the predominant way that ALMA will study extra-solar planets,” Ulvestad explained.

The majestic Milky Way descends over ALMA. Credit: ALMA (ESO/NAOJ/NRAO), C. Padilla

Credit: ALMA (ESO/NAOJ/NRAO), R. Durán (ALMA)

Correlator technician Juan Carlos Gatica with one of the most powerful supercomputers in the world, installed at an altitude of 5,000 meters in Chile's Andes Mountains. Credit: ALMA (ESO/NAOJ/NRAO), C. Padilla

The first European antenna for the Atacama Large Millimeter/submillimeter Array (ALMA) transported to the observatory’s Array Operations Site. Credit: ESO

China fingers Coca-Cola in ‘national security’ mapping probe

0

Published time: March 13, 2013 19:13

AFP Photo / Frederic J. Brown

US soft drink giant Coca-Cola has been accused by Chinese authorities of illegally mapping a remote south western province. The incident comes amidst an intensifying cyber-security row between Beijing and Washington.

Coca-Cola was accused of “illegally collecting classified information with handheld GPS equipment”, the Yunnan Geographical Information Bureau of Surveying and Mapping said.

Coca-Cola said its local bottling plants have used electronic mapping and related methods to run its operations in the country more efficiently.

“Over the last several years, some of our local bottling plants in China have adopted logistics solutions to improve our customer service levels and fuel efficiency,” a Coca-Cola spokesperson in China told AFP in a statement.

“These include e-map and location-based customer logistics systems that are commercially available in China through authorized local suppliers.”

The company said it had “cooperated fully” with Yunnan government inquiries and is “in full compliance” with current regulations.

No further details on the investigation were forthcoming, but a bureau official who gave his last name as Han told the Financial Times the investigation would wrap up soon.

“We will announce the results when it ends,” Han said. “It is a bit sensitive. I don’t know how it got published,” he added.

An expert with the China Academy of Space Technology told the Global Times on condition of anonymity that entering a restricted area with a handheld GPS device could be considered a threat to national security.

“Some regions could be sensitive because of their military importance,”
the expert said. “If an unauthorized person or organization accurately mapped the area and used the result for political purposes, it could jeopardize our nation.”

Yunnan authorities said the Coca-Cola incident was one of 21 cases of illegal surveying currently being investigated in the area. Other instances included the illegal sale of classified military maps online, aerial photography by unmanned aircraft, and illegally surveying military installations.

Li Mingde, the deputy director of the province’s bureau conducting the probe into Coke, told China National Radio it was important to punish cases of illegal mapping.

“Some people are profiting from collecting information, including providing it to some foreign intelligence agencies,” FT cites him as saying.

Mingde noted that when the United States bombed its embassy in Belgrade in 1999, the US blamed it on an inaccurate map.

 “Mapping information can be used by enemies. So it must be restricted,” he said.

The allegations leveled at Coke come amidst a developing dispute between China and the United States over cyber-attacks.

On Monday, President Obama’s national security adviser Tom Donilon urged China to stop hackers within its borders from engaging in industrial espionage and breaking into US computer systems.

“Increasingly, US businesses are speaking out about their serious concerns about sophisticated, targeted theft of confidential business information… through cyber-intrusions emanating from China at a very large scale,” Donilon said.

“Beijing should take serious steps to investigate and put a stop to these activities,” he continued.

In February, US lawmakers called for stricter action against China for cyber-spying and industrial espionage allegedly being directed by the Chinese military.

On Saturday China’s Foreign Minister Yang Jiechi China’s Foreign Minister Yang Jiechi characterized the hacking allegations as a politically motivated smear campaign.

“Anyone who tries to fabricate or piece together a sensational story to serve their political motive will not be able to blacken the name of others or whitewash themselves,” he said.

Jiechi said that as a primary target of hacking attacks, China supported international regulations under the auspices of the United Nations to help police the Internet.

Argentine Jorge Mario Bergoglio named Pope Francis

0

Published time: March 13, 2013 18:09

To the cheering of crowds white smoke has appeared above the Vatican chimney, signaling a new Pope has been chosen by cardinals.

DETAILS TO FOLLOW

‘EU ban shows Press TV success’

0

Director of Press TV Newsroom says the European Union (EU) travel ban on him and the English-language channel’s CEO, Mohammad Sarafraz, shows the channel has been successful in spreading truth to the world.

“There has been no other television outlet, no other television in the world that has come under such huge state-funded attack by the European governments and it shows the extent to which Press TV has been successful,” Hamid Reza Emadi said in an interview with Press TV on Wednesday.

Emadi noted that Press TV has been successful in reporting the ongoing events in the West to its global viewers, and “it shows that the Western countries, which are talking about democracy and human rights, they are not actually doing what they are preaching.”

“Press TV has been able to show the violence on the ground by police force against protesters, the austerity protests in Greece, Spain, [and] even in Britain,” he added.

The Press TV official said that the accusations leveled by the EU for imposing sanctions against him lack legal basis and have been adopted unilaterally without providing evidence.

“They did not bring even one single piece of evidence. They just accuse you of something and then they rule and they pass a judgment and that is against international law,” Emadi said.

On Tuesday, the European bloc blacklisted Press TV CEO Mohammad Sarafraz and Emadi for airing a 10-second report about Iranian-Canadian journalist Maziar Bahari, who worked for Newsweek in Tehran in 2009 following post-election riots in Iran.

This is while the European Council (EC) officials were totally uninformed about the ban.

Preben Aamann, deputy spokesperson of the President of the EC, in a telephone conversation on Tuesday said that he was not in any position to talk about the issue.

The sanctions on Sarafraz and Emadi are the latest in EU’s campaign against Iran’s English-language news channel.

PG/SS

Bahrain detains six for insulting king

0

Bahraini women hold portraits of female prisoners during an anti-regime rally in a western suburb of Manama. (File photo)

Bahrain’s public prosecutor says six people have been arrested for allegedly insulting the country’s ruler Hamad bin Isa Al Khalifa on Twitter.

The prosecutor’s office issued a statement on Wednesday and said the six had been detained over the past couple of days, without identifying them.

According to the statement, the detainees will be charged with misusing Twitter and defaming Bahrain’s king.

The latest detentions come two days after a court acquitted rights activist Yousef al-Muhafedha of spreading false news on Twitter.

Many rights activists in Bahrain are serving time, some even life terms, for expressing their anti-regime views on social media or in street protests.

The kingdom has come under strong criticism from international rights organizations over its ongoing crackdown on rights activists and demonstrations in the country.

On February 14, Amnesty International called on the Manama regime to release more than two dozen of Bahraini human rights activists held in jails across the Persian Gulf kingdom.

“It’s time that people detained simply for exercising their right to freedom of expression be released and for the harassment of other activists to desist,” the rights organization said.

Since mid-February 2011, thousands of pro-democracy protesters have staged numerous demonstrations on the streets of Bahrain, calling for the Al Khalifa royal family to relinquish power.

MKA/HGH/SL

‘EU blind obedience to US, detrimental’

0

An Iranian lawmaker says blind obedience of the European Union (EU) to the US sanctions policy against Iran will be detrimental to the European bloc in the long run.

“The European Union continues to insist on following the White House’s dictated policies despite the damages it has sustained as a result of [imposing] sanctions against independent countries,” Mehdi Davatgari said on Wednesday.

He also noted that imposing embargos against independent countries will only tarnish the reputation of the European Union without hindering the progress of those states.

The lawmaker emphasized that by imposing new embargos on Iran, the European Union is trying to put a lid on the heavy losses it has incurred as the result of enforcing sanctions against independent states.

“The European public opinion opposes Europe’s obedience to the unilateral policies of the United States. Therefore, the European Union is trying to appear self-righteous in order to evade criticism,” Davatgari pointed out.

The United States, Israel and some of their allies have repeatedly accused Iran of pursuing non-civilian objectives in its nuclear energy program. Over the false allegation, Washington and the EU have imposed several rounds of illegal unilateral sanctions against the Islamic Republic.

Iran refutes the allegation and argues that as a signatory to the Non-Proliferation Treaty and a member of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), it is entitled to develop nuclear technology for peaceful purposes.

In addition, the IAEA has conducted numerous inspections of Iran’s nuclear facilities but has never found any evidence showing that Iran’s civilian nuclear program has been diverted toward military objectives.

TNP/SS

4 killed in two shootings in New York

0

At least four people have died and two others wounded in two shootings in the US state of New York, with authorities searching for a single gunman, police say.

GMA/SS

Arming Syria militants breaks intl. law

0

Russian Foreign Minister Sergei Lavrov says arming foreign-backed militants fighting against the Syrian government is a breach of international law.

MKA/SS

Bomber targets Afghan Speaker’s family

0

Afghan security officers inspecting site of a bomb attack in Kabul on February 27, 2013.

The father and brother of the Afghan Parliament speaker in addition to a local police official have been killed in an attack in Afghanistan’s Kunduz Province.

The attack took place on Wednesday in the Imam Sahib district of Kunduz after a bomber detonated his explosive vest in a crowd watching the traditional Afghan sport known as buzkashi.

Reports say that several other people were injured in the attack. The provincial police chief Sayed Sarwar Hussaini also confirmed the attack.

No group has yet claimed responsibility for the attack, but officials put the blame on Taliban militants who have carried out similar assaults in the past.

The United States invaded Afghanistan in 2001 under the pretext of combating terrorism. The invasion removed the Taliban from power, but Afghanistan remains insecure despite the presence of tens of thousands of US-led forces there.

The US-led war, which has inflicted record-high civilian and military casualties, has become the longest military conflict in the American history.

MAM/HGH/SL

Piers Morgan To Hugh Grant: “Go Back To Your Dreadful Movies”

0

Piers Morgan has told Hugh Grant to quit his newspaper crusade in the wake of the Leveson inquiry and “go back to your dreadful movies”.

The CNN host and former Mirror editor aimed the tweet at the Love Actually star, who had been bemoaning the lack of progress in implementing the recommendations of Lord Justice Leveson’s report.


Piers Morgan

Memo to : nobody gives a rat’s a**e what you have to say about the British press any more. Go back to your dreadful movies.

Morgan also branded Grant and Alan Partridge star Steve Coogan, also at the forefront of the Hacked Off campaign, “guttersnipes”.


Piers Morgan

Great idea > RT Who’d pay money to see & in a Bridget Jones style punch up? Maybe ?

It came as David Cameron, Nick Clegg and Ed Miliband met to try to reach agreement over the best way forward for reforming the press.

Labour upped the pressure on the Tories by tabling amendments that would leave it the option of inserting tough statute-backed reform into the Crime and Courts Bill on Monday.

The move effectively sets a deadline for Mr Cameron to either make progress on the issue or face a Commons vote – which he could lose as Labour and the Lib Dems join forces with some Tory backbenchers.

Speaking on the BBC’s World At One, Grant said Cameron had “lamentably betrayed” a promise given to the relatives of Madeleine McCann and Milly Dowler, that he would implement Leveson unless it was “bonkers”.

Even the Tories’ preferred option of a Royal Charter instead of statute had been watered down, he claimed.


Piers Morgan

Re – it’s the notion that he & Coogan are more moral/ethical than the press that amuses most. Guttersnipes, the pair of them.

He said: “For the last three months, newspapers have applied so much pressure to the government that the Royal Charter has been watered down to something that’s pretty much meaningless.”

“This will keep happening and the Government’s legislative agenda will be completely screwed because no one will give up on this,” he said of the move to open the Crime and Courts Bill option.

He also told the Daily Politics show: “This is the will of the people and it is not right that a tiny rump of Conservatives who happen to be in the executive are doing the will of the press, who they desperately need to stay there because the rest of their policies have gone cock-eyed.”

EDL ‘Exploiting Concerns About Grooming Gangs To Fuel Islamophobia’

0

The English Defence League (EDL) is exploiting concerns surrounding sex-grooming gangs to fuel its anti-Islam agenda, a university report has said, warning that perceived ‘Islamisation’ could lead to terrorist attacks similar to the one by Anders Brevik in Norway.

The far-right group is using cases such as the nine Asian men jailed last year for grooming girls in Rochdale to build support, turning the issue into one of Islam versus the West, King’s College London found.

edl

An EDL protest in Bristol

The group is also building networks across Europe, with EDL leader Tommy Robinson considered a “rock star” by activists, according to the university’s International Centre for the Study of Radicalisation.

Tommy Robinson, who also goes by the name of Stephen Lennon, was jailed in January for 10 months after admitting using someone else’s passport to get in the the USA.

Alexander Meleagrou-Hitchens, one of the report’s authors, said: “There’s a danger that the UK will export this kind of vicious, far-right activism to the rest of the continent.”

The EDL and its partners have worsened community tensions and further promoted ideas that helped inspire Norwegian mass killer Anders Breivik, the report said.

tommy robinson

Tommy Robinson is currently in jail after illegally using someone else’s passport

It came as security minister James Brokenshire warned that far-right movements like the English Defence League have the potential to inspire individuals to break off and join more extreme groups.

Delivering a speech at a conference on far-right extremism, Mr Brokenshire hit out at groups such as the EDL for “inflaming tensions and spreading hate-filled prejudice within communities”.

He warned that the EDL and others have the potential to “stoke radicalisation” and could ultimately cross the line into an area that concerns counter-terrorism strategy.

“There are a growing number of examples which suggest extremist and terrorist groups can potentially destabilise each other – the presence of one causing a spiralling effect on the other – and offering an enemy against which to define themselves.

“There are also views that groups such as defence leagues can provide ‘gateway ideologies’ through which individuals may migrate to more extreme organisations.

He said while the far right threat is not as “widespread or systematic” as al Qaida-inspired terrorism, the movement appeals to people who share the same vulnerabilities.

“It feeds off the same sense of alienation and questions around identity. And it has the same ambition to reshape the world in an impossible way. The threat is real, and our response must be effective.”

Mr Brokenshire said in June 2011 the government broadened its counter-terrorism strategy – known as Contest – to cover all forms of terrorism, including the far right.

He said the government is currently funding 112 projects in areas where radicalisation is considered high risk.

Its intervention programme – known as Channel – aims to prevent vulnerable people from being drawn into terrorism. Around 10% of the individuals enrolled in the programme have been motivated by far-right extremism.

james brokenshire

security minister James Brokenshire

The Kings College report documented a phenonomen pushed by the EDL called ‘rape jihad.’

“This ‘rape jihad’, as it has become known, is a significant concern for the EDL,” said the report.

“Interest has risen since revelations in the British media about the existence of sex-grooming gangs made up of Muslim men of south-Asian origin.”

The EDL demonstrated in Rochdale in June last year to try to pressure police to refer specifically to gang members as “Muslim” so any alleged link between the religion and the crime could be inferred, the report said.

The far-right group is sharing these tactics with partners in Denmark, Norway, Sweden and other countries, the university department found.

It has had an extensive online presence for some time but it is now making efforts to move to the physical world, according to the report.

“Although the leading members and organisations rarely, if ever, directly call for violence in response to Islamisation, they are unable to control how their fellow travellers will decide to act upon the information they provide.

“The attacks in Norway were the first example of an individual inspired to pursue terrorism in direct response to perceived Islamisation, and they are unlikely to be the last.”

The report, A Neo-Nationalist Network: The English Defence League and Europe’s counter-jihad movement, will be launched at an all-day conference on Wednesday.

Connecting The Dots: Corporate Influence On Government

Mick Meaney
RINF Alternative News

gove2

This report is just the tip of the iceberg that demonstrates how relationships between big business and politicians influence government decision making. 

One of the UK’s largest companies, co-founded by a Tory donor, has won government approval that will give the company influence in every high school in Britain.

Education secretary Michael Gove approved a Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) scheme created by Carphone Warehouse, the world’s largest independent mobile communications retailer, to place the company’s tablet computers in all UK high schools.

Last year Gove had a secret meeting with Carphone chief executive, Andrew Harrison, to discuss a national roll out of the scheme in UK schools by the end of 2013. Gove had also provided the company with help from his own government officials, a freedom of information act request has revealed.

Speaking to RINF Alternative News, an outraged school teacher, who wishes to remain anonymous, said:

“Education in this country isn’t for the benefit of the children, it’s for the benefit of government and corporations.”

She appears to be right. The British government has always had a culture of “you scratch my back, I’ll scratch yours”, as this deal demonstrates.

Carphone Warehouse was founded by two men, David Ross and Charles Dunstone.

David Ross is a millionaire Tory donor with strong ties to the party. He has donated over £117,000 since 2001 and is a close personal friend of Prime Minister, David Cameron.

Senior Tories had seriously considered nominating Ross as their candidate for Tory Mayor of London, however, he was made an adviser to the Mayor of London after Boris Johnson was elected in 2008, but stood down in 2009 after failing to disclose that he had used £130-million of his Carphone Warehouse shares as security against personal loans. The scandal also resulted in his resignation from the company.

However, Ross soon returned to politics. In December 2012 he was appointed as an adviser to Boris Johnson, this time on the London Legacy Development Corporation board.

His influence in politics is not to be underestimated.

The other co-founder of Carphone Warehouse, Charles Dunstone, the son of a BP executive, also has some interesting ties.

As a member of the ‘Chipping Norton set’, a close group of powerful politicians and media elite who reside in and around the Oxfordshire town of Chipping Norton, he has some very high profile friends including; David Cameron, Rebekah Brooks,  former CEO of News International, and Elisabeth Murdoch, daughter of Rupert Murdoch.

Which is interesting considering Dunstone’s involvement with the media and finance.

He is the non-executive director of a number of companies including DMGT, one of the largest media companies in Europe which owns the Daily Mail, The Mail on Sunday and Metro. The company also owns a 20% stake in news broadcaster, ITN.

Dunstone is the non-executive director of HBOS , a wholly owned subsidiary of the Lloyds Banking Group.

And is also the non-executive director of IMD, a distributor of advertising and programming, which boasts ITV and BSkyB as clients.

While often referred to as a Labour supporter, in 2009 the Telegraph reported that Dunstone would be eagerly welcomed into government, if he desired a business-related job in the Cameron administration.

When we connect the dots like this, it appears that what we’ve got here is another case of a large corporation using its political connections which span to the very top of government, to profiteer and sway decisions in their favour.

The British government has always allowed corporations to call the shots, this is merely just one example of corporate influence in government, out of hundreds.  Indeed, this week a report revealed that one third of ministers, including David Cameron, have links to finance and energy companies.

It’s clear that decisions are made not based on what is good for the people, but for what is best for the corporations that politicians have a vested interest in.

This is the reality of our corrupt politician system; a case of who you know, not what you know.

PMQS: Miliband Mocks Cameron: ‘What Can He Organise In A Brewery?’

0

Ed Miliband unleashed his best ever gag at the start of prime minister’s questions on Wednesday, mocking David Cameron for reports he has been forced to abandon his plans to introduce a minimum price for alcoholic drinks.

“In the light of his u-turn on alcohol pricing can the prime minister tell us if there is anything he could organise in a brewery?” the Labour leader said to roars of laughter from his MPs.

It has been reported that opposition to the policy from his cabinet, including from former health secretary Andrew Lansley, education secretary Michael Gove and home secretary Theresa May – who is said to be positioning herself to challenge for the Tory leadership – Cameron has had to drop the plan.

Miliband joked: “He obviously could not tell us about his policy on alcohol minimum unit pricing, I think the reality is he has just been overruled by the home secretary on this one.”

The barb did not go down well with May, who, stood next to the Speaker’s chair rather than sat on the government front bench, responded with her now trademark ‘death stare’.

Generated image from gifs generated with the Imgflip Animated GIF Generator

Downing Street has refused to say whether plans for minimum pricing had been dropped, insisting the policy will be unveiled in “due course”.

LIKE HUFFPOST UK POLITICS ON FACEBOOK | FOLLOW US ON TWITTER

The prime minister’s official spokesperson said there was a “real problem with deep discounting and the impact of anti-social behaviour” that had to be tackled.

During PMQs Cameron was directly confronted in the Commons by Tory MP Sarah Wollaston – a former GP – who said abandoning minimum pricing would “critically undermine future efforts”.

He told her: “There is a problem with deeply discounted alcohol in supermarkets and other stores and I am absolutely determined that we will deal with this.

“We published proposals, we are looking at the consultation and the results to those proposals, but be in no doubt, we’ve got to deal with the problem of having 20p or 25p cans of lager available in supermarkets. It’s got to change.”

A confident Miliband, who enjoyed one of his best PMQs performances to date, said reported cabinet splits showed the government was “falling apart”.

“A week out from the Budget, they have got an economic policy that’s failing, a prime minister that makes it up as he goes along and all the time, it’s the country that is paying the price,” he said.

Loading Slideshow...

  • Theresa May

    Current position: Home Secretary Rides: “Beyond The Borders” Odds to win: 4/1 For: Politically, May is a shrewd and successful operator who has done a credible job as home secretary, a role that has tripped up many previous politicians. Against: A Tory minister recently described May as “100% charmless” and the only benefit that her appointment as leader would bring would be “net migration”.

  • Boris Johnson

    Current position: Mayor of London Rides: “Bumbling Oratory” Odds to win: 5/1 For: Boris is rarer thing than a <a href=”http://redirect.viglink.com?key=11fe087258b6fc0532a5ccfc924805c0&u=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.sugarbushdrafthorse.com%2Frevival.html”>Sugarbush Draft Horse,</a> he’s a “popular Tory”. An <a href=”http://redirect.viglink.com?key=11fe087258b6fc0532a5ccfc924805c0&u=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.huffingtonpost.co.uk%2F2012%2F10%2F07%2Fboris-johnson-preferred-to-david-cameron_n_1945895.html”>opinion poll last October</a> outed him as the people’s choice to replace Cameron. Unfortunately, it’s not up to the people… Against: Johnson has all but ruled out taking over from Cameron before 2015, wary that undermining him could scupper any leadership hopes. Just like what happened to Lord Heseltine in the wake of Margaret Thatcher stepping down…

  • Michael Gove

    Current position: Secretary of State for Education Rides: “Baccalaureate Backtrack” Odds to win: 9/1 For: Gove is highly regarded within the Tory party as charming, polite and capable. Against: He has taken a bruising both from the public and other Tories for some of his proposals as Secretary of State for Education.

  • Philip Hammond

    Current position: Defence Secretary Rides: “Stripped Down Defender” Odds to win: 10/1 For: Erm… Against: Recently received a “slapping down” from Danny Alexander for publicly complaining about defence cuts. Also, he’s possibly the most “beige” of all the prospective candidates.

  • Adam Afriyie

    Current position: MP for Windsor Rides: “Outside Upstart” Odds to win: 25/1 For: Afriyie is part of the new generation of Tories with fewer qualms about toppling their leader. One Tory minister said: “<a href=”http://redirect.viglink.com?key=11fe087258b6fc0532a5ccfc924805c0&u=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.telegraph.co.uk%2Fnews%2Fpolitics%2F9916975%2FTories-too-afraid-of-fresh-chaos-for-leadership-coup.html”>They don’t have the same memory or experience to hold them back</a>. “And if they start to think they’re going to lose their seats at the election, they could get a bit panicked.” Against: Was widely ridiculed earlier this year when the relative unknown was tipped for a leadership challenge. Also, no-one seems to have told him about his own challenge until he read about it in the papers and “<a href=”http://redirect.viglink.com?key=11fe087258b6fc0532a5ccfc924805c0&u=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.guardian.co.uk%2Fpolitics%2F2013%2Fjan%2F31%2Fadam-afriyie-pm-in-waiting”>nearly choked on my Cornflakes</a>”.

  • Liam Fox

    Current position: Rides: “Spend Wisely” Odds to win: 33/1 For: Dr Fox has become the unofficial spokesman for those Tories disaffected with the current leadership with a number of public statements criticising their direction on austerity. Against: Is it really a good move to appoint someone who was forced to resign from his job as defence minister for <a href=”http://redirect.viglink.com?key=11fe087258b6fc0532a5ccfc924805c0&u=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.huffingtonpost.co.uk%2F2011%2F10%2F09%2Fliam-fox-resigns_n_1002156.html”>allowing a close friend improper access to the highest level of government affairs?</a> Additionaly, <a href=”http://redirect.viglink.com?key=11fe087258b6fc0532a5ccfc924805c0&u=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.huffingtonpost.co.uk%2F2013%2F03%2F11%2Fliam-fox-tory-leadership_n_2851902.html”>Fox recently said</a>: “I think there is no chance of us having a leadership election in the Conservative Party before the election, I think that would be madness.”

Earlier on HuffPost:

Separated At Birth?

0

Were Bruce Buck, the Chelsea chairman, and Sir George Young, Chief Whip of the House of Commons, separated at birth?

This was noticed a while ago, but it remains one of the UK’s hidden lookalikes, since nobody seems to know who Sir George is, what with him quietly sitting close to David Cameron during PM’s Qs, not being sentenced for eight months in prison or accused of calling policemen “plebs”.

bruce buck sir george young

Dead ringers: Buck and Young

At Waterloo station, someone once spotted him and said, “That’s Sir George Young.” Nobody batted an eyelid (true story).

Yet Sir George and Buck bear an uncanny resemblance, as the above picture illustrates, and they’re both Blues too.

The duo follow Peter Crouch and his doppelgänger, Arsenal’s Nacho Monreal…

nacho monreal peter crouch

Give “Gareth Bale Kenny McEvoy” a Google too.

Penny Pritzker: Obama’s Likely Commerce Secretary Choice

0

Stephen Lendman
RINF Alternative News

pritzker_460x276

She’s one of America’s most powerful women. For sure she’s one of the richest. Forbes estimates she’s worth $1.85 billion.

She’s also heir to the Hyatt Hotels and Pritzker family fortune. It’s net worth exceeds $20 billion. Some think it’s much more.

No one knows for sure. It’s stashed in tax havens. Only little people pay what they owe. Billionaires use money to make more of it. They steal plenty along the way.

Balzac said behind every great fortune lies a great crime. Tax Justice Network estimates up to $32 trillion in hidden and stolen wealth stashed in tax havens. Maybe it’s much more. No one knows for sure.

Insiders say Pritzker’s Obama’s top Commerce Secretary choice. Honest observers want her held accountable. She has lots to answer for. More on that below.

Her official bio calls her a “civic and business leader.” She’s PSP Capital Partners founder, chairman and CEO. She also heads Pritzker Realty Group and Artemis Real Estate Partners. Previously she was involved in other family businesses.

In February 2011, Obama appointed her to the President’s Council on Jobs and Competitiveness (PCJC). General Electric CEO Jeff Immelt headed it.

He destroyed jobs at the same time. He offshored them to low wage countries. He pretended to advise Obama on creating them. He faked it. PCJC met four times. It was a sham. It accomplished nothing.

In January 2012, it was disbanded. It never should have been established in the first place. It was smoke and mirrors. It was typical Obama. It did nothing to create jobs.

Pritzker serves on Hyatt’s board. She’s a former Wm. Wrigley, Jr. Company, Marmon Group and LaSalle Bank board member. She chaired credit reporting firm TransUnion.

She’s a Council on Foreign Relations member. She belongs to other elitist groups. They’re international and influential. They’re comprised of likeminded figures. They’re up to no good.

In its August 2008 “Power of Penny Pritzker” article, Bloomberg called her the “billionaire head of Barack Obama’s fundraising machine (and) the person to call when you want to ‘get the job done,’ says Warren Buffett.”

In 2008, she was Obama’s campaign finance team national chairwoman. She raised millions. She shattered fundraising records.

She helped get Obama elected. She organized “the best financed campaign in US history,” said Bloomberg. In 2012, she was a top bundler.

She was up for Commerce Secretary before. She dropped out of the running. She focused on business priorities. She had internal disputes to resolve. Billions of dollars were involved. In 2011, eleven family members settled things.

She’s damaged goods. How that affects her now remains to be seen. She ran suburban Chicago-based Superior Bank. In 2001, it collapsed. It had $2.3 billion in assets.

It was a predatory lender. It was heavily into subprime fraud. Pritzker was one of its originators. Some called her the subprime queen. For others she was the doyenne of predatory lending.

She cost FDIC $700 million. Depositors lost $65 million. She bears full responsibility. With Ernst and Young and Merrill Lynch, she originated subprime fraud.

Superior Bank operated a nationwide origination system. It was founded in 1988. Pritzker family members bought Lyons Savings. It was bankrupt.

They paid $42.5 million. They got $645 million in tax credits in return. They put up $1 million to get it. They got more. Sweetheart deal terms included all federally insured bank deposits.

They took full advantage. They concentrated on subprime lending. In December 1992, they acquired Alliance Funding. It was a wholesale mortgage originator.

In November 2002, In These Times headlined “Breaking the Bank,” saying:

Superior had “a familiar ring. Using a variety of shell companies and complex financial gimmicks, (its) managers and owners exaggerated the profits and financial soundness of the bank.”

“While (it) actually lost money throughout most of the ’90s, publicly it appeared to be growing remarkably fast and making unusually large profits.”

“Under that cover, (it) paid its owners huge dividends and provided them favorable loans and other financial deals deemed illegal by federal investigators.”

It was a “mini-Enron.” When it collapsed, Pritzker and other family members profited hugely. Borrowers and depositors were scammed.

Superior’s auditor “doubled as a financial consultant.” He engaged in “dubious accounting practices.” He played fast and loose with numbers.

Pritzker ignored sound risk management principles. She ran a predatory lending operation.

She made money the old fashioned way. She stole it. She got away with grand theft. She settled for pennies on the dollar. No one went to jail.

Retired Ameritech manager Fran Sweet lost $100,000. She called the Pritzkers “crooks. “They don’t care anything about people who spent their whole lives trying to save” she said.

Many Superior depositors lost everything they had over the FDIC insured $100,000 limit.

Bloomberg reported controversy surrounding credit reporting firm TransUnion.

At the time, it controlled “the $3.3 billion market in equal shares with Atlanta-based Equifax and Dublin-based Experian Group Ltd.”

“After widespread consumer complaints about shoddy service in the credit checking industry, (Congress) passed legislation in 2003 that allowed people to get free copies of credit reports so they could check for mistakes and block information obtained from identity theft.”

The same year, Klamath Falls, OR-based Judy Thomas won a $5.3 million settlement. She claimed TransUnion took six years to correct a mistake in her credit report. On appeal, it was reduced to $1.3 million.

In 2008, Pritzker withdrew her name from Commerce Secretary consideration. Friends say she now wants the job.

Subprime fraud taints her. Obama may choose her anyway. He’s in bed with Wall Street crooks. Money power runs things. Pritzker at Commerce fits right in. She’ll be one of the crowd.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago. He can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com.

RINF Video: The Government’s Persecution of Activists

0

In a society where exposing vitals truths is an arrestable offense, where political dissent is no longer tolerated and whistle-blowers are labelled as a threat to national security, RINF Alternative News looks at the recent case of one activist who will now spend a year behind bars – without trial, for posting a hyperlink.

America’s Retirement Crisis

0

Stephen Lendman
RINF Alternative News

traders

Decades of class war leaves most Americans nearing retirement woefully unprepared.

Since the mid-1970s, real wages haven’t kept pace with inflation. Benefits steadily eroded. High-paying jobs disappeared. Improved technology forces wage earners to work harder for less.

So-called “free” markets work only for those who control them. A handful of winners benefit at the expense of most others. Conditions get progressively worse.

Wealth disparity extremes are unprecedented. Neoliberal harshness force-feeds austerity when stimulus is needed. Public needs go begging.

American inequality is institutionalized. Bipartisan complicity assures it. Class war rages. America’s social contract is targeted for destruction.

Both sides agree. They support giving bankers, war profiteers, other corporate favorites, and super-rich elites greater wealth at the expense of most others.

A May 2012 Employee Benefit Research Institute (EBRI) study highlighted America’s retirement crisis. American workers face trouble.

The percentage of those expecting to retire after age 65 increased to 37%. In 1991, only 11% expected to do so.

One-third of US workers expect to retire at age 70 or older. Growing numbers expect never being able to do so.

Over two-thirds expect to work at least part-time past age 65. At the same time, health and economic crisis conditions keep many of them from doing so.

Nearly one-third are woefully unprepared. Their savings are less than $1,000. Many others have nothing in reserve. Around 60% have less than $25,000.

Fewer than half of working Americans calculated how much they need in retirement. About two-thirds feel they’re behind schedule preparing for it.

Only 14% believe they’re adequately prepared. Only one-third have defined benefit plans.

Few understand retirement healthcare costs. Medicare is eroding as treatment expenses soar.

Protracted economic crisis conditions, high unemployment, growing poverty, and other concerns create enormous uncertainties. Most workers approaching retirement haven’t prepared. Covering expenses is harder than ever.

Economics Professor/retirement expert Teresa Ghilarducci says maintaining living standards in retirement requires 20 times annual income in savings.

Few Americans are prepared. Three-fourths nearing age 65 have less than $30,000 saved. “For the first time in US history,” she says, “every source of retirement income is under siege.”

Professor James Russell discussed it, saying:

“The great 30-year experiment in 401(k) and similar retirement financing schemes that depend on stock market investments has failed.”

Even before the” 2008 crash, clear signs showed “that very few workers would be able to accumulate enough wealth through these accounts to insure retirement financial security.”

Since the 19th century, every generation was better off than previous ones. No longer. Institutionalized inequality victimizes most Americans. It’s been that way since the mid-1970s.

Examples include eroded unionization, stagnant wages, lost benefits, Social Security and Medicare under siege, and high-risk defined contribution plans replacing secure defined benefit ones.

The 1978 Revenue Act changed things. Sections 401(k), 403(b), and 457 let retirement plan contributions be made with pretax dollars.

Employers bait and switch. They exploit workers advantageously. They replace defined benefit plans with defined contribution ones.

They often don’t work. They falsely claim worker investments provide secure retirement income. Evidence shows otherwise.

Lifetime obligations exceed what most people save. Financial services industry con artists skim huge profits off the top. They do so in large commissions. They add up over time.

Social Security, public pensions, and defined benefit plans work as intended. They support retirement security. Marketplace uncertainty is eliminated.

Money power runs America. It controls Obama and congressional majorities. It’s destroying the future of millions. A new Senate study explains more.

Most retirees face financial trouble. They’re worse off than their parents and grandparents. Protracted Main Street depression conditions destroyed 40% of personal wealth.

High unemployment compounds trouble. So do stagnant wages, eroding benefits, and savings paying virtually no interest.

Stock market gains go mainly to rich elites. Progressive economists express concerns. Americans are increasingly on their own sink or swim. Retirement security is fast disappearing.

America’s social contract is under siege. Class war rages. Social Security and Medicare are targeted for elimination. Wealth, power, privilege, and dominance alone matter.

Fiscal cliff doublespeak duplicity conceals what’s planned. Bipartisan double-dealing targets America’s middle class and millions most disadvantaged.

A new Senate report says America faces a huge retirement savings deficit. It’s about $6.6 trillion. It’s about $57,000 per household. It’s double or more what most households have in savings. It assures current crisis conditions worsening.

Based on Federal Reserve data, the Center for Retirement Research (CRR) estimates 53% of US workers aged 30 or older woefully unprepared for retirement.

In 2001, it was 38%. In 1989, it was 30%. Other studies confirm CRR’s findings.

Alicia Munnell serves as CRR director. “There is a mismatch between retirement needs rising and retirement benefits contracting,” she says.

Current conditions are polar opposite earlier ones. From Social Security’s 1935 enactment through the mid-1970s, things improved for most Americans.

No longer. Most people are increasingly on their own. They’re woefully unprepared. They earn and save too little. Trouble awaits them later on. Dire economic conditions exacerbates things.

Recent retirement policy changes contribute to growing inequality. Washington grants at least $80 billion annually in tax breaks to encourage 401(k)-type accounts.

Benefits go largely to upper-income households. The system is rigged for them. It’s done at the expense of most others.

Those earning $200,000 annually and contributing 15% of pay to retirement savings reap an additional $7,000.

Workers receiving $20,000 and contributing the same percentage get nothing. They don’t earn enough to qualify. Others earning $50,000 get about $2,100.

Workers in defined benefit plans face uncertainty. They’re underfunded and eroding. Benefits are frozen and disappearing.

Public pensions have similar problems. They’re being looted. They’re targeted for eventual elimination. They may be gone in another decade or sooner.

Most households today have few options. Government scoundrels target them. Austerity substitutes for help. Dire conditions are worsening.

One worker spoke for others. He’s aged 60. He thought he’d be comfortable in retirement. In 2002, he was laid off. “People talk about a lost decade,” he said. “That’s what I’ve been through,” he stressed.

He spent the last 10 years struggling. He was in and out of low pay/poor benefit/part-time contract jobs. He drained his savings to get by. Doing so excludes retiring when he planned.

Growing millions suffer similar hardships. Nothing is done to help them. Bipartisan harshness substitutes. America’s future looks grim.

Power politics replaced fairness. Corporate empowerment and privilege are institutionalized. Wealth is disproportionately shared. Ordinary people are exploited. Growing millions are left high and dry.

America is rife with corruption and gangsterism. The criminal class in Washington is bipartisan. Kleptocrats run things. They’re complicit with corporate crooks. Poverty, unemployment, hunger and homelessness are at near record levels.

Social justice are four-letter words. Police state harshness confronts resisters. Big monied interests alone matter. Obama’s committed to serve them. So are party bosses and most congressional members.

America’s unfit to live in. It’s unprincipled and morally reprehensible. It force-feeds hard times. The worst by far is yet to come.

America’s “going to crash big time,” says Paul Craig Roberts. Humanity hopes it’ll happen in time to matter.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago. He can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com.

Can You Guess Why This Politician Has Been Banned From Meetings?

0

A Japanese wrestler-turned-politician has been banned from council meetings for refusing to remove his trademark mask when attending meetings.

Councilman Skull Reaper A-Ji was elected in the southwestern prefecture of Oita last month on a platform of educational reform, reports the Japan Daily Press.

The 44-year-old was told by the rest of the council he could not wear the mask, declaring it inappropriate to conceal his identity.

japanese wrestler politician

Skull Reaper A-Ji campaigned in his signature mask

After refusing to take off the Mexican “lucha libre” style mask, he was prevented from entering a meeting on Monday.

Speaking to local Japanese press Skull Reaper A-Ji described the ruling as “frustrating”.

He added: “If I take my mask off, I’m an entirely different person. I will not take it off.”

In an interview with, Nishinippon Shimbun, he claimed the mask made it easier for his constituents to approach him.

Remarkably, Skull Reaper A-Ji is not the first masked Japanese politician.

Masanori Murakawa, otherwise known as “The Great Sasuke”, was elected councillor back in 2003.

Wearing a similar mask to Skull Reaper A-Ji, Murakawa faced much the same criticism.

He said: “I have absolutely no intention of taking it off, no matter how much opposition there is.”

‘Order! Order! The Member For Wandsworth North – Down To The Office’

0

Disgraced former Cabinet minister Chris Huhne was ridiculed on his first day in jail when a warder called him to breakfast shouting “Order! Order!”, it was reported today.

The prison officer, using the Tannoy system in Wandsworth jail, mimicked the Commons Speaker by adding: “The right honourable member for Wandsworth North – down to the office,” The Sun newspaper reported.

Other prisoners at the south-west London jail were said to have roared with laughter as Huhne went from his cell to pick up the meal.

The newspaper also reported that 58-year-old Huhne has been moved to a wing for vulnerable prisoners because other convicts humiliated and bullied him.

He is said to have asked to be moved to the special area after prisoners discovered he was a millionaire and badgered him for cash.

An unnamed woman, speaking to the newspaper outside the prison yesterday after a visit to see her boyfriend, said the other prisoners targeted Huhne as a “soft touch” within hours of his arrival.

“Someone found out he was a millionaire and as soon as he was on the wing there were loads of people after him. They kept on going up to him saying, ‘We know you’ve got money’,” she said.

LIKE HUFFPOST UK POLITICS ON FACEBOOK | FOLLOW US ON TWITTER

“They had to move him into the segregation block because inmates were bullying him.”

Huhne and his ex-wife Vicky Pryce were handed eight-month jail sentences at Southwark Crown Court in London on Monday for perverting the course of justice when Pryce took speeding points for Huhne in 2003.

Jailing the pair, Mr Justice Sweeney said Huhne had fallen from a “great height”, and Pryce from a “considerable height”.

Economist Pryce, 60, was convicted after a retrial last week, while Huhne pleaded guilty on the first day of his trial last month after denying the offence for nearly two years.

The former energy secretary, who once had ambitions for the Lib Dem leadership, was the first former Cabinet minister since Jonathan Aitken to be jailed.

The Sun reported that Pryce spent a “nervous” first day in Holloway prison in north London.

Postman Robert Brown told the newspaper a friend he had visited in the jail told him he had spotted Pryce, who is a mother-of-five.

“My friend said she was very scruffy and looked really nervous,” he told the newspaper.

Loading Slideshow...

  • Theresa May

    Current position: Home Secretary Rides: “Beyond The Borders” Odds to win: 4/1 For: Politically, May is a shrewd and successful operator who has done a credible job as home secretary, a role that has tripped up many previous politicians. Against: A Tory minister recently described May as “100% charmless” and the only benefit that her appointment as leader would bring would be “net migration”.

  • Boris Johnson

    Current position: Mayor of London Rides: “Bumbling Oratory” Odds to win: 5/1 For: Boris is rarer thing than a <a href=”http://redirect.viglink.com?key=11fe087258b6fc0532a5ccfc924805c0&u=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.sugarbushdrafthorse.com%2Frevival.html”>Sugarbush Draft Horse,</a> he’s a “popular Tory”. An <a href=”http://redirect.viglink.com?key=11fe087258b6fc0532a5ccfc924805c0&u=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.huffingtonpost.co.uk%2F2012%2F10%2F07%2Fboris-johnson-preferred-to-david-cameron_n_1945895.html”>opinion poll last October</a> outed him as the people’s choice to replace Cameron. Unfortunately, it’s not up to the people… Against: Johnson has all but ruled out taking over from Cameron before 2015, wary that undermining him could scupper any leadership hopes. Just like what happened to Lord Heseltine in the wake of Margaret Thatcher stepping down…

  • Michael Gove

    Current position: Secretary of State for Education Rides: “Baccalaureate Backtrack” Odds to win: 9/1 For: Gove is highly regarded within the Tory party as charming, polite and capable. Against: He has taken a bruising both from the public and other Tories for some of his proposals as Secretary of State for Education.

  • Philip Hammond

    Current position: Defence Secretary Rides: “Stripped Down Defender” Odds to win: 10/1 For: Erm… Against: Recently received a “slapping down” from Danny Alexander for publicly complaining about defence cuts. Also, he’s possibly the most “beige” of all the prospective candidates.

  • Adam Afriyie

    Current position: MP for Windsor Rides: “Outside Upstart” Odds to win: 25/1 For: Afriyie is part of the new generation of Tories with fewer qualms about toppling their leader. One Tory minister said: “<a href=”http://redirect.viglink.com?key=11fe087258b6fc0532a5ccfc924805c0&u=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.telegraph.co.uk%2Fnews%2Fpolitics%2F9916975%2FTories-too-afraid-of-fresh-chaos-for-leadership-coup.html”>They don’t have the same memory or experience to hold them back</a>. “And if they start to think they’re going to lose their seats at the election, they could get a bit panicked.” Against: Was widely ridiculed earlier this year when the relative unknown was tipped for a leadership challenge. Also, no-one seems to have told him about his own challenge until he read about it in the papers and “<a href=”http://redirect.viglink.com?key=11fe087258b6fc0532a5ccfc924805c0&u=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.guardian.co.uk%2Fpolitics%2F2013%2Fjan%2F31%2Fadam-afriyie-pm-in-waiting”>nearly choked on my Cornflakes</a>”.

  • Liam Fox

    Current position: Rides: “Spend Wisely” Odds to win: 33/1 For: Dr Fox has become the unofficial spokesman for those Tories disaffected with the current leadership with a number of public statements criticising their direction on austerity. Against: Is it really a good move to appoint someone who was forced to resign from his job as defence minister for <a href=”http://redirect.viglink.com?key=11fe087258b6fc0532a5ccfc924805c0&u=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.huffingtonpost.co.uk%2F2011%2F10%2F09%2Fliam-fox-resigns_n_1002156.html”>allowing a close friend improper access to the highest level of government affairs?</a> Additionaly, <a href=”http://redirect.viglink.com?key=11fe087258b6fc0532a5ccfc924805c0&u=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.huffingtonpost.co.uk%2F2013%2F03%2F11%2Fliam-fox-tory-leadership_n_2851902.html”>Fox recently said</a>: “I think there is no chance of us having a leadership election in the Conservative Party before the election, I think that would be madness.”

Related on HuffPost:

9 year old girl gets thrown off Moscow bus, spends hours in freezing cold

0

Published time: March 12, 2013 15:01

Jenya Melnikova (Photo from lizaalert.org)

A schoolgirl from a Moscow suburb had to spend seven hours in freezing —10 C (14 F) weather, after she was reportedly turfed off a bus because she didn’t have the fare. The driver is now facing criminal charges for leaving a child in danger.

Nine year-old Zhenya Melnikova left her music lessons at a Moscow art school at 4 pm on Monday. When 5 hours later she was still not home her parents reported her missing to the police.

Officers joined by volunteers searched for the girl until midnight when she was eventually found at a railway station.

The girl told police she got on a shuttle bus after school. For some reason, which is not yet clear, the girl didn’t have with her the 40 roubles (US$1.30) her mother usually gave her to pay the fare, nor a mobile phone. Despite Zhenya’s young age and the freezing cold outside, the driver allegedly ordered the child to get off.

She had to walk for 7 hours to reach a railway station where she was spotted by a security guard, who called the police.

Russia’s Investigative Committee promptly opened a criminal case against the driver.

Passenger getting on a shuttle van in one of the Moscow districts. (RIA Novosti/Alexander Utkin)

“We will by all means find the scoundrel and will hold him liable for leaving a child in danger according to article 125 of the Russian Criminal Code,” said the Committee’s Spokesman Vladimir Markin in his twitter @VladimirMarkin.

Life News reports the driver has been detained, and also cites an unknown source saying the driver put the child off the bus near a traffic police office, but the child might have been too shy to go there and ask for help.

The police is not yet commenting on the situation saying they are still checking the information.

It’s not the first case of its kind in Russia. In December 2012 in the Siberian city of Barnaul a disabled man spent twelve hours in -40 C (-40F). He lost his fingers and died three months later from a blood clot. A policeman who refused to help the man is now facing five years behind bars.

In October 2011 a schoolboy in Nizhny Novgorod was put off a bus because he didn’t have his bus pass with him. The boy died that same day on his way home after being hit by a train.

In January 2013, in Kirov another 9-year-old was taken off a bus. The boy did have money to pay the bus fare, but refused to pay for the heavy school bag he had with him. It was -25 C (-13 F) outside and the child fell seriously ill. The conductor who ordered the boy off the bus faced “beating” charges.

A week after that, an 11-year-old in Bratsk was forced off a bus after he was mistakenly accused of using a fake bus pass.

Screenshot from YouTube user victor3310

Screenshot from YouTube user victor3310

Unearthing ET: UK researchers claim they’ve found alien life in Sri Lankan meteorite

0

Published time: March 12, 2013 19:56

A fragment of the meteor believed to contain fossilised algae. Photo: University of Cardiff.

Cardiff University astrobiologists say “fossilized biological structures” in a Sri Lankan meteorite are extra-terrestrial in origin. Critics demand more credible tests, telling ET and panspermia fans it’s too early to celebrate.

The UK researchers say that tiny algae-like fossils found in meteorite fragments that landed in Sri Lanka last year can’t have originated on our planet, according to the study published in the Journal of Science. The fragments were found after sightings of a fireball in the Sri Lankan province of Polonnaruwa in December 2012, and were subsequently analyzed by local scientists.

The initial microscopic observations revealed so-called diatoms inside the meteorite fragments, which scientists found to be similar to an ancient and largely extinct type of marine algae.

Cardiff University was asked to proof-check and analyze the findings, which it did, concluding that the samples were “unequivocally meteorites” and that the analysis of the material structure showed algae-like fossils were native to it.

Researchers say, this could be a 'hystrichosphere,' a fossilized dinoflagellate cyst. (University of Cardiff)

Ruling out “recent terrestrial contamination” was critical for the research. It has typically destroyed all the previous hopes of proving the panspermia theory, which says life on Earth could have arrived in a meteorite.

To support the first-ever evidence of the extraterrestrial life found in a celestial body, the researchers used sophisticated methods such as X-ray diffraction, triple oxygen isotope analysis and scanning electron microscopy.

The results immediately received wide coverage in blogs and the mass media, and have been interpreted as a long-awaited proof of that “we’re not alone.”

But critics have doubted the credibility of such conclusions, saying that not all the necessary tests have been carried out, and thus there’s still possibility that the diatoms got inside the rock on Earth.

Astronomer and author Phil Plait, known for his revelatory articles on Bad Astronomy blog, even went as far as to suggest the rock in question might not be a meteorite at all, and cited experts supporting his point.

“They don’t establish the samples they examined were actually meteorites. They don’t establish they were from the claimed meteor event over Sri Lanka in December 2012. And perhaps most telling, they don’t eliminate the possibility of contamination; that is, diatoms got into the samples because those rocks were sitting on the Earth where diatoms are everywhere,” Plait summed up in his blog post.

What made critics wonder is the fact the researchers did not consult any independent experts in meteorites or diatoms to confirm their suggestions and tests results.

An electron microscope view of a collection of 'fossils' found in what is believed to be a fragment from a meteor that exploded over Sri Lanka. Picture: University of Cardiff.

The placement of the publication has raised further suspicions, as the Journal of Cosmology is not held in high esteem in scientific circles, and has been accused of publishing “pseudoscience” articles.

Others said, even though it looks like serious research, and there’s an abundance of technical details in the study, such “extraordinary claims” still need confirmation from research groups around the globe before they could be taken seriously.

The supposedly fossilised structure found in a meteor. Picture: University of Cardiff.

Hungary adopts draconian changes to constitution, ignores EU & US warnings

0

Published time: March 12, 2013 19:45

Hungarians attend a demonstration after parliament voted for government-backed constitutional amendments, in Budapest March 11, 2013 Young demonstrators block the entrance of the parliament building as Hungary's ruling party FIDESZ is set to push through changes to the constitution in Budapest March 11, 2013. (Reuters/Bernadett Szabo)

Jail for vagrancy, a ban on electoral campaign ads in private media, and violations of student rights — all that may soon become a reality in the center of Europe as Hungary passes a set of controversial amendments.

On Monday, the Hungarian parliament overwhelmingly passed a 15-page amendment to its one-year-old Constitution — despite mass protests at home and fierce criticism from other EU members, the US and human rights groups.

The bill gives more powers to the government and limits the influence of the country’s constitutional court, banning it from reviewing changes to the Hungarian Fundamental Law other than for procedural mistakes.

Jail for homeless people

Under the document, constitutional judges will also be robbed of the right to refer to rulings made before January 1, 2012 — when the new constitution came into force. This means that many regulations that had previously been called unconstitutional will now be considered constitutional.

That, for instance, includes a law that gives a possibility for local authorities to fine or jail homeless people for living in public areas. Meanwhile, according to the UN, an estimated 30,000 to 35,000 people, including numerous women, children, older persons and persons with disabilities, are thought to be homeless in Hungary. In November, the constitutional court struck down the legislation saying it violated human dignity.

Among other amendments is the prohibition of political advertising on commercial channels during election campaigns, and, also the right by the head of the state judicial authority to transfer trials from one court to another. Besides that, students who get state grants will be obliged to work in Hungary for a number of years after their graduation. Those who want to work abroad will have to pay the money back.

The amendments — put forward by the ruling conservative Fidesz party — provide a definition of a family that is founded on marriage between a man and a woman or a relations ship between parents and dependent children. Earlier in December, the constitutional court slammed the legal provisions as ‘excessively restrictive.’ 

Young demonstrators block the entrance of the parliament building as Hungary's ruling party FIDESZ is set to push through changes to the constitution in Budapest March 11, 2013. (Reuters/Bernadett Szabo)

Hungary ‘defies EU democratic values’ 

“The new provisions continue to discriminate against unmarried and same-sex families,” Human Rights Watch stated on its website on Tuesday. The organization called on the EU to “take resolute action” in response to the latest constitutional changes adopted in the Hungarian parliament

The Hungarian opposition claims that the ruling party along with its leader Prime Minister Viktor Orbán is trying to limit the top court’s powers in revenge, after it rejected several initiatives proposed by Fidesz.

Meanwhile, the European Union — whose opinion had been ignored by Hungarian lawmakers — voiced deep concerns over the set of amendments that could “undermine democratic principles” and violate the rule of law.

German Chancellor Angela Merkel criticized Budapest and underlined that “the concerns expressed by European partners and friends of Hungary, about restrictions on the powers of the constitutional court among other things, should be taken seriously,” a spokesman said, as cited by AFP.

European Commission spokesperson, Olivier Bailly said the amendments will be checked as soon as possible to make sure they “are in line with EU laws and EU values.”

“If necessary we will use our legal instruments to make sure that these laws are changed,” he added, reported Associated Press.

Victoria Nuland, US State Department spokesperson also slammed the document which, she said, “could threaten the principles of institutional independence and the checks and balances that are the hallmark of democratic governance.”

European experts note that if the package of amendments is signed by President Janos Ader, it will bring to naught over 20 years of the development of the Hungarian judicial system after the fall of the Communism.

Vienna Philharmonic Orchestra admits links with Nazis

0

Published time: March 12, 2013 18:57

The Vienna Philharmonic Orchestra (AFP Photo / Dieter Nagl)

The world famous Vienna Philharmonic Orchestra has admitted that many of its musicians were Nazi party members in the 1930s and 40s and drove out Jewish members who were sent to death camps.

The Vienna Philharmonic is best known for its New Year’s Concert, a Strauss Waltz extravaganza, which is broadcast to 50 million people in 80 countries. Its image is closely associated with the 18th century Vienna of Hayden, Beethoven and Mozart and is one of the Austrian capitals biggest tourist attractions.

What has only just been revealed is its shadier  Nazi-associated past.

Thus, the famous New Year concert originated in 1939 to be used by the Nazis as a propaganda instrument, while of the orchestra’s 123 members in 1942, 60 belonged to the Nazi party and two were members of the SS. 

The orchestra has also published online a report on who received its rings of honor and medals, which traditionally had been given to artists but during Nazi rule were given to high ranking officials and military leaders.

The list included Baldur von Schirach, the Nazi governor of Vienna, who was awarded the ring in 1942. Schirach ordered the deportation of tens of thousands of Jews to concentration camps and was sentenced to 20 years in jail during the Nuremburg trials after the war.

In one of the articles posted on the orchestra’s website on Sunday it was revealed by the historian Oliver Rathkolb that a replacement ring was given to Schirach after he was released from prison in 1967.

Clemens Hellsberg, the Philharmonic’s current chairman, told Reuters that the orchestra has not yet made a decision on whether to revoke awards handed out during the Nazi period.

Details of 13 musicians who were driven out of the orchestra for their Jewish origin or relations, five of whom died in concentration camps, were also published on the website for the first time.

The conductor, Joseph Kripps, whose father was Jewish, was forced to leave the orchestra and work in a food factory but was welcomed back in 1945 at the end of the war.

Bernadette Mayrhofer, an independent historian from the University of Vienna, believes that the ostracism of Jewish musicians had begun even before the 1938 Anschluss with Germany, under a harsh period of authoritarian rule in Austria known as Austrofascism.

“It was known whether someone had Jewish roots or a Jewish wife,” she told Reuters.

The unfortunate history of the orchestra, has only surfaced gradually, as until the recent findings were published online, the secrets of the Philharmonic’s archives have only been seen selectively by a handful of commissioned historians.

The Vienna Philharmonic has said it is not obliged to give public access to its archives, since it is a private organization. 

A history of the Vienna Philharmonic, ‘Democracy of Kings’, published in 1992 by the now chairman Hellsberg, did not mention many of the uncomfortable facts now coming to light on the website.

The Vienna Philharmonic Orchestra (AFP Photo / Dieter Nagl)

Hellsberg, talking at the preview of a documentary by Austrian state broadcaster ORF, about the orchestra’s Nazi era history, said that the orchestra had been quietly working through its history for decades and now needed to give a proper account of itself. 

Harald Walser, an Austrian Greens member of parliament, one of the Philharmonic’s most vocal critics, said he welcomed the orchestra’s move but wanted it to go further.

“It’s a step in the right direction. But we’re still a long way from having adequate access to the archives,” he said.

Fitz Truempi, one of the historians commissioned by the orchestra to write the articles on its website, said it took him three years to get access to the archives to research an earlier book, Politicized Orchestra, a study of the Vienna and Berlin Philharmonics under National Socialism, published in 2011.

Truempi thinks the orchestra has come to a decision that it’s long held policy of withholding information about its past is no longer protecting but harming its image.

“For a long time, they tried to maintain strict control over their brand but, in the end, the political pressure became such that it was the best solution to open up,” he concludes.

However, in December last year Walser accused the orchestra, of destroying important documents from the World War Two period.

The Philharmonic has also been criticized for being too homogenous. An influential classical music writer, Norman Lebrecht, penned an opinion piece for Bloomberg in January that the orchestra had only six female members and no Asians even through a third of the students from Vienna’s University of Music are Asian.

The World Is Going Digital — Are We Doomed?

0

Two new books, about the effects and implications of the Internet, suggest a scary digital dystopia awaits us.

Photo Credit: Shutterstock.com/tr3gin

March 12, 2013  |  

Like this article?

Join our email list:

Stay up to date with the latest headlines via email.

Call me irresponsible — oh hell, call me a cyber-utopian, throw in celebrant — but it’s undeniably true that I regard the admittedly messy, chaotic, confusing and upsetting digital information revolution as, on balance, a good thing, particularly when it comes to issues of democracy and power. After all, as noted in a recent book on the subject, one result of that revolution has been that “new methods of creating content and new channels to distribute it have become available to everyone and between everyone.” As networked technologies proliferate, they rapidly transform “our political, commercial and communications environments” — including “the very nature of our democracy itself.”

Sounds good, don’t you think? But two new books about the effects and implications of that ongoing and all-encompassing revolution — especially with regard to the role of journalistic institutions — suggest such optimism is increasingly obsolete. Instead, the authors believe, a scary digital dystopia awaits us.

The End of Big by Internet pioneer Nicco Mele, is about the nature of power in the digital age, and has as its thesis that the radical connectivity of the new information revolution — “our breathtaking ability to send vast amounts of data instantly, constantly and globally”— is upsetting traditional big institutions and empowering upstarts. It is “toxic to conventional power structures” such as Big Media, Big Business, Big Government, Big Education, etc, and ipso facto, “the end of big is at hand.”

One might think this power shift presents us with what Mele describes as “unprecedented opportunities to reshape our future for the better.” But unfortunately, he says, we may rather be “doomed to a future inconsistent with the hard-won democratic values on which our modern society is based… a chaotic, uncontrollable, and potentially even catastrophic future.”

Although he concedes that many traditional institutions are flawed and corrupt, and says “they deserve to die,” Mele is more concerned about what he calls the “destructive consequences” of radical connectivity, which puts “unprecedented power in the hands of every individual.” At first glance this may seem to be “potentially a good thing,” but Mele warns, “radical connectivity is altering the exercise of power faster than we can understand it.” The consequences are “disruptive, confusing, even dangerous.”

Why? “Without realizing it, citizens and elected leaders have abdicated control over our political and economic destinies to a small band of nerds like myself,” explains Mele. This “ revenge of the nerds” scenario worries him because he fears that technology is outstripping the ability of our institutions to keep pace with it.

The End of Big makes big claims — sometimes too big. In trying to support an overarching premise, Mele sometimes overreaches; describing what is at stake as “nothing less than the continued progress of the human race” or claiming that the “end of big in business represents one of the greatest hopes for saving our civilization” detracts from his otherwise cogent analysis. Another problem with his “end of big” metaphor is the problem of how to account for the “bigger than big” new tech giants like Amazon, Facebook, Google, and Apple — which briefly became the world’s largest company last year when it passed Exxon in market capitalization until the oil giant regained its premier status a few months ago.

But the biggest flaw in The End of Big may be simply that Mele takes on too much. He offers too many examples from too many sectors, such as Big Media, Big Politics, Big Brands, Big Government, etc. — many of which have already been considered elsewhere. Mele may have profited instead by biting off far less and chewing more just on technology, education, government and politics, areas where he has ample top-flight, real-world experience and is most insightful. If his book’s focus had been narrower — dare I say smaller? – he could have drilled deeper as well.

Venezuela to probe Chavez cancer death conspiracy

0

Published time: March 12, 2013 17:44

Venezuelan Vice-President Nicolas Maduro placing a sword that belonged to South American liberator Simon Bolivar on the coffin of late Venezuelan President Hugo Chavez in Caracas, on March 8, 2013 (AFP Photo)

Venezuela is to formally investigate suspicions late President Hugo Chavez’s was afflicted with cancer after being poisoned by foreign enemies, the government said.

Acting President Nicolas Maduro vowed to set up an inquiry into the allegation, which was first leveled by Chavez after being diagnosed with cancer in 2011. Foreign scientists will also be invited to join a government commission to investigate the claim.  

“We will seek the truth,” Reuters cites Maduro as telling regional TV network Telesur late on Monday. “We have the intuition that our commander, Chavez, was poisoned by dark forces that wanted him out of the way.”

Maduro said it was too early to determine the exact root of the cancer which was discovered in Chavez’s pelvic region in June 2011, but charged that the United States had laboratories which were experienced in manufacturing diseases.

“He had a cancer that broke all norms,” the agency cites Maduro as saying. “Everything seems to indicate that they affected his health using the most advanced techniques … He had that intuition from the beginning.”

Chavez reportedly underwent four surgeries in Cuba, before dying of respiratory failure after the cancer metastasized in in his lungs.

Maduro compared the conspiracy surrounding Chavez’s death to allegations that Israeli agents poisoned Palestinian leader Yasser Arafat to death in 2004.

In December 2011, Chavez speculated that the United States could be infecting the regions leaders with cancer after Argentine President Cristina Fernandez de Kirchner was diagnosed with thyroid cancer.

“I don’t want to make any reckless accusations,” Chavez said before asking: “Would it be strange if [the United States] had developed a technology to induce cancer, and for no one to know it?”

Maduro repeated the accusation last week on the eve of Chavez’s death.

“Behind all of [the plots] are the enemies of the fatherland,” he said on state television before announcing the expulsion of two US Air Force officials for spying on the military and plotting to destabilize the country.

Venezuela’s opposition has lambasted the claim as another Chavez-style conspiracy theory intended to distract people from real issues gripping the country in the run up to the snap presidential election called for April 14.

As Tuesday marked the last day of official mourning for Chavez, ceremonies are likely to continue, fueling claims by the opposition that the government is exploiting Chavez’s death to hold onto power.

While launching his candidacy on Monday, Maduro began his speech with a recording of Chavez singing the national anthem, sending many of his supporters into tears.

The pro-business state governor Henrique Capriles, who is running for the opposition’s Democratic Unity coalition, was quick to remind both his supporters and detractors that the charismatic socialist reformer Chavez was not his opponent.

“[Maduro] is not Chávez and you all know it,” The Christian Science Monitor quotes him as saying while announcing his candidacy on Sunday. “President Chávez is no longer here.”

Maduro, a former bus driver and Chavez’s handpicked successor, has attempted to deflect criticism that he lacks the former president’s rhetorical flair by painting himself as a working class hero.

“I’m a man of the street. … I’m not Chávez,” he said Sunday. “I’m interim president, commander of the armed forces and presidential candidate because this is what Chávez decided and I’m following his orders.”  

Polls taken before Chavez’s death gave Maduro a 10 point lead over Capriles, who lost to Chavez in last October’s presidential poll.

New York Times v. Hugo Chavez

0

Stephen Lendman
RINF Alternative News

new-york-times-building

The Paper of Record’s history is longstanding and unprincipled. It supports corporate and imperial interests. It deplores populist ones. It features managed news misinformation. It betrays its readers doing so.

When America goes to war or plans one, it marches in lockstep. It’s comfortable with neoliberal harshness. It abhors progressive politics. It supports wrong over right.

It suppresses “All the News That’s Fit to Print.” It ignores America’s march to tyranny. It endorses policies demanding condemnation. It’s typical Times.

It vilified Chavez throughout his tenure. It did so unfairly. It shamed itself doing so. It matters what it says. It’s America’s leading voice. It prioritizes propaganda. It has global clout. It lies for power.

After Chavez’s December 1998 election, Times Latin American correspondent, Larry Roher, called him a “populist demagogue, an authoritarian….caudillo (strongman).” He lied saying so.

Later commentaries denounced his using petrodollars responsibly. They criticized his unifying foreign relations. They claimed he aimed to buy influence.

They condemned his raising royalties and taxes on foreign investors. They omitted explaining why. It was to make them pay their fair share. They no longer got a free lunch.

Pre-Chavez, things went their way. Whatever they wanted they got. They took full advantage. They stole Venezuela’s wealth. They harmed ordinary people doing so. Chavez said no more. He did what’s right. He was vilified for doing it.

On April 13, 2002, The Times editorial headlined “Hugo Chavez Departs,” saying:

“With yesterday’s resignation of President Hugo Chavez, Venezuelan democracy is no longer threatened by a would-be dictator.”

“Mr. Chavez, a ruinous demagogue, stepped down after the military intervened and handed power to a respected business leader, Pedro Carmona.”

Fact check

Chavez established democracy. He institutionalized it. He did so by national referendum. He let Venezuelans decide. He abolished despotism.

Carmona headed Fedecameras. It’s Venezuela’s Federation of Chambers of Commerce. It includes 12 trade groups: banking, agriculture, commerce, construction, energy, manufacturing, media, mining, ranching, insurance, transportation and tourism.

Washington plotted with Venezuelan oligarchs. Ousting Chavez was top priority. Bush officials hand-picked Carmona. They did so at the expense of ordinary Venezuelans.

Straightaway he proved his bona fides. He suspended democratically elected National Assembly legislators. He abolished Bolivarian constitutional reforms.

He did so by diktat. He replaced democracy with despotism. New York Times editors approved.

He didn’t last long. People power intervened. So did Venezuela’s military. They reinstated Chavez in two days. He remained president until Washington killed him.

He was marked for death. Chavez knew it. He said so numerous times. He was infected with cancer-causing substances. They were too toxic to cure.

Four operations in 18 months didn’t help. Washington wanted him dead. He’s gone. Chavismo lives.

Times editors lied. They said removing Chavez “was a purely Venezuelan affair.”

Bush officials plotted to oust him. They decided he had to go. They conspired with Venezuelan oligarchs. They failed but never quit trying. Obama did so throughout his tenure. He bears full responsibility for his death.

Times editors claimed Chavez promised change “he never delivered.”

“He courted Fidel Castro. (He) battled the media. (He) alienated virtually every constituency from middle-class professionals, academics and business leaders to union members and the Roman Catholic Church.”

Venezuelans loved him. He challenged dark forces responsibly. He did so internally and abroad. Times editors vilified him for doing so. They never let up throughout his presidency. They never gave him credit for what he did.

They softened slightly in death. They vilify him at the same time. It’s typical Times.

On March 6, its editorial headlined “Hugo Chavez,” saying:

He “dominated Venezuelan politics for 14 years with his charismatic personality, populist policies and authoritarian methods before his death this week.”

“His redistributionist policies brought better living conditions to millions of poor Venezuelans.”

“But his legacy is stained by the undermining of democratic institutions and the embrace of malevolent foreign leaders like Bashar al-Assad of Syria and Mahmoud Ahmadinejad of Iran.”

Chavez advocated unity and solidarity. He treated world leaders respectfully. He bashed imperial ones like Bush. He did so responsibly.

Times editors support returning Venezuela to its ugly past. They want Big Oil able to plunder its resources freely.

On the one hand, they said Chavez “devot(ed) a substantial share of the country’s oil income to building public housing, creating health clinics and making affordable food available to the poorest citizens.”

On the other, it claimed billions were “squandered through inept and careless management. And the financial ability to sustain Mr. Chavez’s social programs has been seriously eroded.”

Venezuela is prosperous economically. FY 2013 spending is budgeted to increase by one-third. It’s mainly for social and productive investment. Estimated GDP growth is 6%. In 2012, it was 5.6%. It’s opposite America’s faltering economy.

National Assembly legislator Fernando Soto Rojas called this year’s budget “essentially humanist because it attacks poverty, critical poverty, and because it guarantees continuity to the policy of social investment.”

Responsible officials prioritize it. America’s destroying its social contract. Obama demands it. So do complicit Democrats and Republicans. Times editors don’t explain.

They claimed Chavez “weakened judicial independence, intimidated political opponents and human rights defenders….”

He replaced right wing judges with equitable ones. He criticized political opponents fairly. He replicated Harry Truman. In 1948, he said:

“I don’t give them Hell. I just tell the truth about them and they think it’s Hell.”

“Give ’em Hell, Harry!” became his supporters’ signature slogan. Chavez did it his way. Venezuelans loved it.

Times editors claimed he taunted America. He acted responsibly. He spoke truth to power. Few did it as eloquently. Few dared try.

Times editors now admit what needing saying at the time. They misstated facts doing so.

They said Bush officials “badly damaged Washington’s reputation throughout Latin America when it unwisely blessed a failed 2002 military coup attempt against Mr. Chavez.”

Washington’s dirty hands handled everything. Bush officials called the shots. It’s longstanding US practice.

Toppling foreign leaders by coups or assassinations is official US policy. Post-WW II, dozens of successful and failed ones occurred. Washington’s hands are bloodstained. Times editors didn’t explain.

America should support “democratic and civilian transition in a post-Chavez Venezuela,” they say. They ignore 14 years of the hemisphere’s best under Chavez. It’s typical Times.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago. He can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com.

Turkey Targets Press Freedom

0

Stephen Lendman
RINF Alternative News

turkey-press

No country imprisons more journalists than Turkey. Ragip Zarakolu understands well. He’s a prominent human rights activist/publisher. He’s a former Nobel Peace Prize nominee. He’s been maliciously targeted for years.

In 1998, he won the International Publishers Association (IPA) International Freedom to Publish Award. He couldn’t attend the Frankfurt ceremony. Authorities confiscated his passport.

In 2003, he received the NOVIB/PEN Free Expression Award. In 2008, IPA gave him a second Freedom to Publish Award.

In March 2012, he was imprisoned. He was targeted after receiving the Assyrian Culture Centre’s Assyrian Cultural Award. It honored his human and minority rights advocacy.

He’s been wrongly charged with state crimes more than 70 times. He faces 15 years in prison if convicted of current terrorist-related ones. His trial begins in April.

He’s one of thousands of journalists, lawyers, activists, and others accused of belonging to or aiding and abetting the Kurdistan-based Union of Communities. Turkey conflates it with the outlawed Kurdistan Workers Party (PKK).

Zarakolu calls charges against him “state terrorism.” Turkey is part totalitarian, he says. Authorities target journalists and intellectuals urging “Kurdish question” solutions.

An atmosphere of fear prevails. Widespread arrests follow. No one’s safe.

The Committee to Protect Journalists (CPJ) calls itself “an independent nonprofit organization that promotes press freedom worldwide.”

It reported on “Turkey’s Press Freedom Crisis: The Dark Days of Jailing Journalists and Criminalizing Dissent.”

“(A)uthorities are waging one of the world’s biggest anti-press campaigns in recent history,” it said.

“Dozens of writers and editors are in prison, nearly all on terrorism or other anti-state charges. The evidence against them? Their journalism.”

Turkey’s press freedom “reached a crisis point.” Prime Minister Recep Tayyip Erdogan imprisons journalists “on a mass scale.”

He denigrates free expression. As of August 1, 2012, CPJ identified 76 Turkish journalists imprisoned. They’re held for what they write and say.

Charges are entirely spurious. They include “committing a crime on behalf of a prohibited organization, aiding and abetting (it) knowingly and willingly, making propaganda for (it), and (supporting) its objectives.”

Other penal code provisions prohibit journalists from “breaching the confidentiality of an investigation (or) influencing a fair trial.”

They criminalize independent, in-depth coverage of police and court-related activities. They impose censorship. They’re used with “disturbing frequency.”

At yearend 2011, up to 5,000 criminal cases against journalists were pending.

Pro-Kurdish news is called terrorism. About 70% of jailed August 2012 victims were Kurdish journalists. They’re charged with aiding and abetted the PKK.

About 30% of them were charged with participating in anti-government plots or belonging to outlawed political groups.

Several were linked to an alleged Ergenekon conspiracy. Authorities call it a military coup plot to overthrow Turkey’s government.

Officials say news coverage creates societal chaos. Doing so is conducive to coup plotters, they claim. They say whatever they want to say to bring charges. Spurious ones follow.

Two prominent journalists were targeted – Ahmet Sik and Nedim Sener. They were imprisoned for over a year. They were released pending completion of their trials.

At issue was Sik’s new book. It’s a work in progress. Authorities alleged it aided and abetted Ergenekon coup plotters.

Sener said he was targeted for his own book. It discusses government’s failure to solve editor Hrant Dink’s 2007 murder.

Authorities conflate favorable PKK coverage with terrorism. News-gathering activities and reporting risk imprisonment. Doing so violates Article 10 of the European Convention on Human Rights.

“Everyone has the right to freedom of expression,” it states.

“This right shall include freedom to hold opinions and to receive and impart information and ideas without interference by public authority and regardless of frontiers.”

This article shall not prevent States from requiring the licensing of broadcasting, television or cinema enterprises.”

In suppressing press freedom, authorities banned words they don’t want used. Calling PKK members “guerrillas” is prohibited. Saying so “legitimize(s) terrorists and terrorism,” they claim.

Turkey is more police state than democracy. All countries have national security concerns. Suppressing press freedom is no way to confront them.

Equating dissent with terrorism is tyrannical. Incremental reforms change nothing. Turkey’s penal code is repressive. Dissenting on Kurdish policy is called “terrorist propaganda.”

Journalists have trouble reporting on court cases. Article 288 compromises them. It lets authorities charge them with “attempting to influence a fair trial.”

Article 285 invites charges of violating confidentiality. Article 301 criminalizes “insulting Turkishness.” Applying repressive provisions is entirely subjective.

Supportive media propaganda gives authorities a big edge. Turkey blurs the line between inciting violence and freely expressing ideas and opinions.

Ergodan and his government “must exert the political will to abandon the systemic suppression of critical views and dismantle the country’s vast system of media repression,” said CPJ.

On February 5, the Central Asia-Caucasus Institute Silk Road Studies Program headlined “A House Divided Against Itself: The Deteriorating State of Media Freedom in Turkey.”

More “pernicious” and “corrosive” than imprisoning journalists, it said, is “widespread self-censorship and the climate of fear.” It extends across Turkish society.

Its press never was free. Censorship varied over time. Authorities never lacked complicit journalists. They willingly support official policy.

They report “untruths.” They operate like Western media. They regurgitate officials lies. They support powerful interests. Television is worst of all. Viewers expect news and information. What’s broadcast falls woefully short.

Turkish newspapers have more columnists than reporters. With few exceptions, journalistic standards are low. “Little attempt is made to substantiate news reports.”

Managed news misinformation substitutes for truth and full disclosure. More “sound than sense” follows. Thoughtful reasoning is sorely lacking.

What passes for investigative journalism “consist(s) of a compendium of reports and rumors selected to support the author’s preconceptions.”

Corroboration is lacking. Journalists rarely defend press freedom. A well-known saying goes: “The Turkish translation of freedom of speech (says) the less you talk the longer you’ll be out of prison.”

Methods used to suppress dissent are similar to ones used earlier. After Erdogan’s Justice and Development Party (AKP) took power, he usurped media control.

Authorities seized the Sabah-ATV group. At the time, it was Turkey’s second largest media organization. It was sold to Calik Holding. It’s owned by a close Erdogan associate.

Calik had trouble financing the deal. Two state-owned banks provided funds to do so.

In September 2008, Dogan Holding (DH) was Turkey’s largest media organization. It reported embezzlement details. Doing so implicated Erdogan associates. They worked for the Deniz Feneri Islamic charity.

DH paid dearly. It was fined over $2.5 billion. It was levied for alleged tax evasion. It responded by toning down AKP criticism. It fired outspoken journalists. Its tax fine slipped quietly under the radar. It effectively disappeared.

AKP authorities relentlessly pressure owners. Go along or lose operating licenses and business permits. Corporations are urged to advertise with government-friendly media.

These type issues aren’t new. Previous governments bought favorable media coverage. Print and broadcast sources got lucrative state contracts and/or “soft” loans from state-owned banks.

What’s different today is AKP’s power. It’s unprecedented. It takes full advantage. It applies enormous political and economic pressure. It exceeds what previous governments could do.

Turkey’s repressive climate is unequaled. It’s most striking on television and pro-AKP broadsheets. They suppress opposing views.

They collude with security forces and police. They’re the main force driving government-sponsored smear campaigns. They intimidate. They silence dissent.

They compromise rule of law principles and due process. They support wrong over right.

They call fabricated evidence real. They facilitate arrests and prosecutions. They let Erdogan govern like a tinpot despot.

Had they stood tall together and defended press freedom, he never would have been able to do it.

On February 6, Harvard University’s Harvardgazette headlined “In Turkey, problems for press,” saying:

In July 2011, Turkey’s Hurriyet Daily News foreign news editor/columnist Ferai Tinc quit. She did so saying “Reporting is not happening now. Everybody’s afraid. There are only official statements, only” state-friendly journalists.

Press freedom in Turkey is Soviet-era “Pravda-like.” Dozens of journalists are imprisoned for saying what authorities want suppressed.

Since Erdogan’s AKP took power, Turkey’s media landscape consolidated to a half-dozen pro-government conglomerates. Others face pressure and censorship to be supportive.

Ankara’s Anti-Terrorist Act targets investigative journalists. It implicates them in alleged anti-government coup plots. None exist so Erdogan invents them.

It’s common practice to suppress dissent and enlist public support. Press freedom is democracy’s “pillar,” said Tinc. Problems can’t be solved without it. Justice is sorely lacking. Fabricated lies substitute for hard truths.

Academics and artists are targeted. Some quit and leave. Others voluntarily self-censor. Otherwise they risk imprisonment. Police states operate that way. Erdogan mandates it in Turkey. He shames himself in the process.

Conflating critics with terrorists doesn’t wash. Erdogen’s in denial. The European Court of Human Rights says so. Guilty again, it said, for suspending the publication and distribution of newspapers critical of government policies.

In its 2013 World Report, Human Rights Watch highlighted serious Turkish human rights abuses. They include compromising press freedom, assembly, association, violence against women, and excessive security services force.

Anti-terror laws overstep. They violate basic freedoms. HRW’s senior Turkey researcher, Emma Sinclair, says:

“If the government is serious about its latest moves to address the Kurdish issue in Turkey, freeing the thousands of detained peaceful Kurdish political activists, journalists, human rights defenders, trade unionists, and students would be a good first step….Turkey needs to make human rights a priority in its approach to all of its citizens.”

It falls woefully and abusively short. Dark forces target state enemies. Erdogan’s more despot than democrat.

He’s averse to governing responsibly. He prioritizes unchallenged power. Opposition isn’t tolerated. Imprisonment is a hair’s breath away. Nothing in sight suggests change.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago. He can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com.

Obama Wants Lynne Stewart Dead

0

Stephen Lendman
RINF Alternative News

Lynne’s 73. She’s gravely ill.

Obama killed Chavez. He wants Lynne dead. Unjustifiable longterm imprisonment assures it.

She’s a breast cancer survivor. It reemerged. It’s spreading.

She’s dying. Vital life-saving treatment is delayed or denied. Expert private care can save her. She needs it now.

This alert supplements a circulating petition. It repeats information in it.

It’s urgent!

Sign it!

Circulate it!

Tell others!

Tell them to do the same!

Save Lynne!

Demand justice!

Free her!

Save her life!

Release her now!

Do it today!

Vital surgery was delayed 18 months. It was done to kill her.

Lynne’s operating physician called her condition “the worst he had seen.”

Breast cancer reached Stage Four. Cancer Treatment Centers of America says multiple body parts are affected. Areas may include bones, brain, lungs, liver, and/or elsewhere.

Lynne’s disease affects her lymph nodes, shoulder, bones and lungs.

It’s treatable. Women diagnosed with Stage Four can live many years. Key is getting effective treatment on time. Immediate care is essential.

Lynne’s daughter practices medicine. She said:

“Under the best of circumstances, Lynne would be in a battle of the most serious consequences with dangerous odds.”

“With cancer and cancer treatment, the complications can be as debilitating and as dangerous as the cancer itself.”

Federal Medical Center, Carswell, TX provides deplorable care. Treatment involves shackling. Ten pounds bind Lynne’s wrists and ankles. Chains connect them.

Weeks pass to see providers. Results take weeks longer. Hospital conditions are shocking. They include shackling wrists and ankles painfully to beds. It’s standard practice. It’s brutal. It’s medieval.

It’s cruel and unusual punishment. It violates constitutional rights. It’s unprincipled and unconscionable.

Patients like Lynne aren’t flight risks. They deserve better.

America’s 1984 Sentencing Act grants prisoner rights. They include reduced sentences “for extraordinary and compelling reasons.”

None rise to the level of life threatening illness. Lynne deserves compassionate release. Delay assures death.

DON’T LET OBAMA GET AWAY WITH IT!!

FREE LYNNE NOW!!

She worked tirelessly for justice. She’s a role model for what’s right. She deserves compassion in her time of need. She deserves that and more.

5 officers acquitted in Bahrain torture death case, 2 found guilty in separate murder

0

Published time: March 12, 2013 16:04

Shiite Bahraini protestors clash with security forces following a protest to mark the second anniversary of an uprising in the Sunni-ruled kingdom of Bahrain, on February 14, 2013 in the village of Sanabis, West of the capital Manama (AFP Photo)

Two Bahraini police officers were sentenced to 10 years in prison after being convicted of torturing a Shiite protester to death. Three others were acquitted for “failing to report the crime,” a judicial source said.

The two policemen were convicted of “torturing to death Ali al-Saqr,” who was arrested during the February 2011 uprising, the source told AFP.

Saqr died on April 9, 2011, from “hypovolemic shock resulting from several traumas,” according to a report by the Bahrain Independent Commission of Investigation (BICI), an international panel that investigated the events that unfolded during March and April of that year.

All five officers were found not guilty for the murder of another protester, Zakeriya Asheeri, who also died in 2011 while in detention.

“For the 4th time in 3 months a police officer [is] acquitted for killing a civilian. #bahrain culture of impunity,” Said Yousif Almuhafda, the head of the monitoring section at the Bahrain Center for Human Rights, wrote on Twitter on Tuesday.

Several other officers are currently being investigated or standing trial on allegations of torture after hundreds of demonstrators were detained following a crackdown on the protest movement in mid-March 2011.

In late January, a court sentenced a police officer to seven years in prison for torturing a protester to death.

Complicity in torture expands beyond rank-and-file police officers, as Bahraini Princess Nora Bint Ebrahim Khalifa also appeared in court over torture allegations in January. Princess Nora, who serves in Bahrain’s Drugs Control Unit, allegedly collaborated with another officer in the torture of three activists who had been taken into custody.

Two of the Bahraini King’s sons — Nasser Bin Hammad Khalifa and Khalid Bin Hammad Khalifa — as well as one other member of the royal family, Khalifa Bin Ahmed Khalifa, were also accused of directly taking part in torturing activists in the country, a 55-page report titled ‘Citizens in the Grip of Torture’ charged.

Authorities in the kingdom have said they are implementing the recommendations of an independent commission of inquiry appointed by the king, which confirmed the use of excessive force by security forces during the uprising.

Bahrain — home to the US Navy’s Fifth Fleet — is ruled by a Sunni monarchy, while over 75 percent of the population is Shia.

On February 14, 2011, thousands of protesters took to the streets of the capital Manama, demanding democratic reforms and the resignation of Prime Minister Khalifa bin Salman Khalifa, the longest-serving prime minister in the world.

Since the start of the uprising, opposition activists say at least 88 protesters have been killed, including nine children.

Anti-Gay Cardinal Lives Above Europe’s Biggest Gay Sauna

0

The papal conclave is not the only news out of Italy involving men closely gathered in a room.

March 12, 2013  |  

Like this article?

Join our email list:

Stay up to date with the latest headlines via email.

Today, Catholic Cardinals will assemble at the Sistine Chapel to elect the next Pope. But that’s not the only news out of Italy involving men closely gathered in a room. It turns out the Holy See purchased 20 shares of an apartment building housing Europe’s largest gay sauna.

The mega-spa Europa Multiclub boasts of king Turkish baths, Finnish saunas, waterfalls, whirlpools and many other amenities. It’s website describes a “comfortable world … created by males and for males only.” So, the College of Cardinals has at least one thing in common with its gay buildingmate. 

Senior Cardinal Ivan Dias lives in a 12-room apartment one floor above the club, known for hosting “bear nights,” in which “a hairy, overweight pastor of souls, is free to the music of his clergyman, remaining in a thong, because he wants to expose body and soul,” the Independent says. Dias probably won’t be in attendance, given his public attacks against the LGBT community. The Indian cardinal believes gays and lesbians can be cured of their “unnatural tendencies” through the “sacrament of penance.”

The Vatican reportedly paid €20 million ($26,020,000) for its share of the Rome apartment block in 2008. The Independent reports the Church avoided paying taxes on the properties, listing them as part of the Holy City, thanks to the previous Berlusconi administration.

At time of publication, the Vatican has yet to comment on the gay sauna next door to 18 church-owned properties.

Steven Hsieh is an editorial assistant at AlterNet and writer based in Brooklyn. Follow him on Twitter @stevenjhsieh.

Conclave Begins: Meet The Papal Candidates

0

Today is the day all Robert Langdon fans have been feverishly waiting for: the 115 voting cardinals of the Catholic church begin today their secret conclave to choose the successor to Pope Benedict XVI.

As Bloomberg puts it succinctly, “he who enters the conclave a pope exits as a cardinal” and it is notoriously tricky to try to handicap the papal vote. In processional next steps, the Cardinals will gather in the Sistine Chapel, hailing from as far as the Philippines, and may hold a single vote today with as many as four ballots on succeeding days. Politically, this conclave has been presented as a “struggle between cardinals looking to overhaul the Vatican bureaucracy known as the Curia, and those trying to maintain its influence, according to Vatican analysts. Electing a non-European, while a novelty, would not necessarily presage a change of course for the millennia-old institution shaken by the abdication of German-born Benedict. Pope Benedict XVI was chosen on the second day of the last conclave in 2005, while John Paul II was selected on the third day of the 1978 conclave.” Realistically, it will be a free for all for the scandal-riven church, and it is very much an open question who the next pope will be.

So while we await the puffs of white smoke, courtesy of Bloomberg here are brief biographies of some of the men who may be in the running, based on betting websites and consulting Vatican watchers.

Francis Arinze (Nigeria)
 

Francis Arinze (Nigeria):

Born: Nov. 1, 1932.

Arinze would be the first black pope and the first African pope for more than 1,500 years — the last was Gelasius I, who reigned at the end of the fifth century and was from North Africa of Berber origin. A social and theological conservative, Arinze’s views on celibacy, women priests, homosexuality and contraception are considered close to those of Benedict XVI.

Christoph Schonborn (Austria)

Christoph Schonborn (Austria):

Born: Jan 22, 1945.

The cardinal has guided Vienna through church scandals including allegations of priests using pornography and engaging in pedophilia. Considered a brilliant conservative theologian, he speaks French, English, Italian, Spanish and Latin, and has traveled widely on behalf of the Vatican, including trips to Moscow and Istanbul. He studied under Cardinal Josef Ratzinger, who became Benedict XVI, after becoming a priest at the age of 25. He is in favor of dialog between Catholicism and Islam, and was the highest-ranked church official to visit Iran after the 1980-88 Iran-Iraq war.

Peter Turkson (Ghana)

Peter Turkson (Ghana):

Born: Oct. 11, 1948

Turkson, who studied theology in New York, is younger than Arinze and was called “one of Africa’s most energetic church leaders” by The Tablet, an influential British Catholic magazine, and in 2009 said that “if God would wish to see a black man also as pope, thanks be to God.” He has engaged with contemporary issues, including the global economic crisis by calling for more oversight of financial institutions and he has denounced the “idolatry of the market.”

Marc Ouellet (Canada)

Marc Ouellet (Canada):

Born: June 8, 1944

The cardinal from Quebec is an accomplished theologian whose writings were admired by Benedict, whose concerns about the modernization of the church he shared. “It would seem that, in the name of secularism, the Bible must be relativized, to be dissolved in a religious pluralism and disappear as a normative cultural reference,” Ouellet said in 2011 in his powerful role as prefect of the Congregation for Bishops. Ouellet became a priest in 1968 in the very church that his father built in La Motte, Quebec. He later taught at a seminary in Bogota, Colombia and served as prefect of the Congregation for Bishops and president of the Pontifical Commission for Latin America, making him well known among Spanish-speaking clergy.

Leonardo Sandri (Argentina)

Leonardo Sandri (Argentina):

Born: Nov. 18, 1943

The man who announced the death of John Paul II to the world in 2005, is a native of Buenos Aires who was born to a family of Italian immigrants. He rose to the heights of the church hierarchy to occupy the third most-important position in the Vatican between 2000 and 2007 as de facto chief of staff to the secretary of state. He now has a lower profile as head of the Congregation for the Oriental Churches. He has served in Madagascar, Venezuela, Mexico and the U.S. and as the Vatican’s representative to the Organization of American States.

Angelo Scola (Italian)

Angelo Scola (Italy):

Born: Nov. 7, 1941

The Archbishop of Milan is the front-runner among the Italians, who until the 1970s had a virtual lock on the papacy. With Benedict he shared philosophical and theologian interests and his writings on a range of topics from bio-ethics to sexuality have been published in different languages.

Odilo Scherer (Brazil)

Odilo Scherer (Brazil):

Born: Sept. 21, 1949

A Brazilian of German descent, Scherer is Archbishop of Sao Paolo and as such oversees 6 million Catholics in the country’s biggest archdiocese. In the birthplace of liberation theology, he struck a moderate tone by seeing worth in focusing on social injustice and poverty while reserving criticism for the movement’s “Marxism.”

Your rating: None

“We The People”

0

Submitted by Mark J. Grant, author of Out of the Box,

“We the People”
 
Glorious words in many ways. They begin the preamble to the United States Constitution as America threw off the chains of tyranny and became a country. How much has been gained, how must lost, since those times when the citizens were dedicated to a common cause. The road has been long, no end in sight, and I rejoice in the continuation if sometimes not in a moment’s chosen path.
 
However it must be said that Americans are not the only “We the People” country on the planet. This declaration is to be found in democracies everywhere and should be cherished and praised as citizens of each nation get to make the choices appended to self-determination. The desires of the governed must always rule those who are governing and when the leadership fails in that recognition they should be replaced. When political leaders do not listen to the voice of their citizens they will be voted out if not tossed out. The United States, cast in stone some two hundred and thirty seven years since its founding, was not always such a safe bet. We have erred and lurched and struggled with our principles but still here, still beating the drum, still on our own two feet.
 
Recently one of the German politicians referenced two of the Italian largest vote getters as “clowns.” I reject the comment and I admonish Peer Steinbrueck for his inadequacy. What higher moral ground does he claim that supersedes the voice of the Italian people and I say, “None sir, and that you should be ashamed of yourself.”
 
I point all of this out this morning because there is change afoot on the Continent and to not take note of it may well be an expensive mistake. Business of late, business as usual, may not be the business of tomorrow as the citizens of various countries, not in open revolt or not in the streets, are beginning to wave a different banner and it is decidedly nationalistic and a potential new definition of just whom “We the People” are; in fact.
 
Recently, in poll after poll, the citizens of Germany, Britain and other countries in Europe are gathering around their own flags and seemingly rejecting the imposed commonality. I do not ignore the will of the people and when the politicians of various nations ignore their will then they may be replaced, not by rifles in the streets, but by peaceful votes in elections. The incessant pressures of either paying for the lifestyles of people in other nations or the demands of austerity for accepting foreign capital are driving sharp wedges in the grand scheme of Union in Europe.
 
I would not underestimate what is happening in Italy. It is a rejection, in my opinion, of not just corrupt practices in their own country but of having others govern them. It is a squared stance, I believe, staring directly at Brussels and Berlin telling them to mind their own business and to stop telling the Italians how to run their own country. I am not without sympathy for this position I assure you.
 
We have had the Arab Spring and perhaps the Italian Spring will be the wildcard of this year. When people discuss the imposed austerity measures and leave the discussion there they have not gone far enough in their thinking. I would say that the Italians, the Greeks, the Portuguese, the Spaniards do not wish to be German and may be getting tired of being told what to do by them while the British and the Dutch and others are having their patience worn thin by the demands out of Brussels and Berlin for their money. Even in Germany, as demonstrated by a recent poll, the people are getting tired of supporting other nations financially so as to exercise control. The grass grows thin upon the Continent.
 
The pledge of Mr. Draghi, always conditional upon the support of the European Union, may get diminished further if the nations of that Union do not give him support. Since all of the yields of European sovereign debt rely upon this promise then much could be lost if the promise cannot be kept. Southern Europe and Northern Europe may not be separated by an ocean but they are fathoms apart in tradition and mindset. Rome, whatever her inherent difficulties, has the capacity of leadership and just because there is a power vacuum for the moment in the Vatican and in their Parliament does not mean that they will not both be filled and perhaps with surprising results. The politicians of Europe may be ignoring Italy and the world’s investors are certainly ignoring Italy for the moment but the people of various nations, in my estimation, are not.
 
“We the People” may be in for a definitional change. The spark of the Italian elections may be the kindling for a much larger fire. I would not ignore the burning smell that is wafting through the air and I would not ignore the consequences of it.

Your rating: None Average: 2.3 (3 votes)

Shanghai Gold Exchange Sees Volumes Jump 24% In Year

0

From GoldCore

Shanghai Gold Exchange Sees Volumes Jump 24% In Year

Today’s AM fix was USD 1,582.50, EUR 1,216.37and GBP 1,065.30 per ounce.
Yesterday’s AM fix was USD 1,577.50, EUR 1,213.28 and GBP 1,058.37 per ounce.

Silver is trading at $29.18/oz, &euro;22.53/oz and £19.71/oz. Platinum is trading at $1,605.25/oz, palladium at $773.00/oz and rhodium at $1,200/oz.

Gold rose $3.00 or 0.19% and closed yesterday at $1,581.10/oz. Silver rose to $29.09 and finished +0.1%.


Cross Currency Table — (Bloomberg)

Gold gained for the third straight session, the longest rally this year, on the realisation that the European crisis may worsen. Fitch Ratings cut Italy’s credit rating by one level on Friday. Fitch downgrading Italy is likely providing support as is robust demand in Asia, particularly China.

Average daily trading combined volumes on the three main gold contracts on the Shanghai Gold Exchange in the first two months of the year jumped 24% on the year, according to Reuter’s calculations.


Shanghai Share Index, 5 Year — (Bloomberg)

“The strong physical demand in China is the main reason behind gold’s resilience,” a Beijing-based trader told Reuters. Physical demand prospects out of China remain positive in the weeks ahead, UBS AG said  according to Bloomberg.

China is very vulnerable to a property crash and its own economic crisis. The Chinese stock market has performed very poorly in recent years and Chinese people realise the importance of gold as a store of value.


Gold In Chinese Yuan, 5 Year — (Bloomberg)

The market continues to digest the better than expected U.S. jobs data with the risks still emanating from Italy and the Euro zone. Contagion in the Eurozone and indeed currency crises remain real risks — risks which are being completely ignored … for now.

Sentiment is as bad as we have seen it in recent years which suggests to us that while gold may go lower in the short term – we are close to a bottom.

The global debt crisis is far from over and when it erupts anew, gold’s appeal as an important diversification and safe haven will be appreciated once again.

NEWS

Gold futures log highest close of month — Market Watch

Gold sticks in range as growth hopes weigh, Asia buying supports – Reuters

Gold Little Changed as ETP Holdings Extend Drop Amid Recovery – Bloomberg

Gold Gains for Third Day as Europe Concern Boosts Haven Appeal – Bloomberg

COMMENTARY

Don’t Be Sucked In — Euro Zone Will Break Up – Reuters

Staring Armageddon In The Face But Hiding It With Official Lies —Paul Craig Roberts — Paul Craig Roberts

Presenting The Currence Crises, Devaluations And Regime Changes Since The Collapse Of The Gold Standard — Zero Hedge

Your rating: None

Wall Street Banks: Too Big to Fail, Too Big To Jail

0

stealing_money_safe_lg_nwm

In testimony before the Senate Judiciary Committee last week, US Attorney General Eric Holder made an extraordinary admission.

Responding to questioning from Republican Senator Chuck Grassley, who noted that there had been no major prosecutions of financial institutions or executives by the Obama administration, Holder said: “I am concerned that the size of some of these institutions becomes so large that it does become difficult for us to prosecute them, when we are hit with indications that if we do prosecute–if we do bring a criminal charge–it will have a negative impact on the national economy, perhaps even the world economy…”

In other words, major banks are so economically important that, according to Holder, it is impossible to prosecute them for criminal activity. They are above the law.

This exchange occurred during a discussion of the Justice Department’s settlement last month with British-based HSBC, the world’s third-largest bank. HSBC had been charged with laundering billions of dollars for Mexican and Colombian drug cartels. In exchange for avoiding charges, HSBC agreed to pay $1.9 billion, or roughly two months’ profits. Top US officials explicitly vetoed any criminal charges, even on lesser counts than money laundering.

HSBC is only the latest bank to have received a free pass. Earlier this year, ten financial firms agreed to pay $3.3 billion in cash to settle charges of mortgage fraud: amid the housing market collapse, they had employees fraudulently sign off on thousands of mortgage foreclosures a month.

Last year, the government ended an investigation into Goldman Sachs without charges over its promotion of mortgage-backed securities at the height of the speculative bubble–even as Goldman Sachs bet against the assets itself.

In 2010, the Obama administration reached a settlement with Wachovia Bank on similar charges as those brought against HSBC: laundering billions of dollars of drug money, in this case for the Sinaloa Cartel. The fine was $160 million, less than 2 percent of the previous year’s profits.

Many similar arrangements could be cited. In each case, a check is signed–if there is any punishment at all–and business goes on as usual. Whatever money the financial institutions lose is more than balanced by their take of the $85 billion funneled into the markets every month by the US Federal Reserve.

In justifying the administration’s refusal to prosecute, Holder cites the banks’ immense power over economic life. That these institutions exercise dictatorial control over the economy and engage in unchecked criminal behavior is not an argument for refusing to prosecute them, however. Rather, it is an argument for expropriating them, taking them out of the hands of the criminals that run them, and placing them under the democratic control of the working class.

In its dealings with these institutions, however, the government acts as a direct representative of the financial aristocracy. First Bush and then Obama justified the bank bailouts after the 2008 crash by citing the need to “save the economy.” Since then, millions of jobs have disappeared. To pay for such bank bailouts, governments around the world are implementing brutal austerity measures, wiping out public education, health care, retirement and other social programs.

A stench of corruption hangs over the whole process. There is hardly a single Obama administration official in a position important to the banks that does not have previous ties to Wall Street. These include:

Jacob Lew was confirmed this month by the Senate as Obama’s new treasury secretary. Lew, Obama’s former chief of staff, is also the former chief operating officer of Citigroup’s Alternative Investment Unit, which bet against the housing market as it collapsed.

Mary Jo White is Obama’s pick to head the Securities and Exchange Commission. White, who will likely be confirmed easily after hearings scheduled for today, is a former attorney at the corporate law firm Debevoise & Pimpleton, where she defended Wall Street banks and executives, often against investigations by the SEC itself.

Then there is the extraordinary case of David S. Cohen and Stuart Levey. As members of corporate law firm Miller Cassidy in the 1990s, they defended banks and other corporations from white-collar criminal charges, including money laundering. They passed in and out of the Treasury Department and private practice.

In 2004, Levey joined the Bush administration as undersecretary for terrorism and financial intelligence, responsible for overseeing narcotics trafficking and money laundering. He left in March 2011 to become HSBC’s chief legal officer. His deputy at the treasury department, and his successor, was none other than David S. Cohen. The two ex-colleagues would have both been heavily involved in forging the recent deal to settle HSBC’s money-laundering charges.

No banks or executives are prosecuted, because the individuals who would do the prosecuting and the individuals who would be prosecuted are, more or less, the same people.

Holder made his statements on the banks at the same hearing in which he laid out the Obama administration’s position that it has the authority to assassinate citizens within the United States without judicial review.

The coming together of these two statements is not simply coincidental. There is a class logic at work. With the active assistance of the state, the financial aristocracy is engaged in a looting operation, and criminality has become an integral part of the mode of wealth accumulation.

Anticipating social opposition, this same aristocracy is engaged in a conspiracy against democratic rights. While the banks and executives cannot be touched, anyone opposing these policies will face repressive police-state methods.

The political and economic system is rotten to the core. The only rational and appropriate response to such a state of affairs is to overturn this system, capitalism, and institute a new form of social organization based on the principle of social need–that is, socialism.

The active involvement of the state and all its institutions and parties in the criminal operation makes clear that the interests of the working class cannot be advanced except through a mass social and political movement, which aims to replace the government of the banks with a government of, by and for the working class.

Tensions Rise on Korean Peninsula: “The Armistice Agreement has been Nullified”

0

koreanorthmap

Amid threats from both sides, North Korea yesterday cut the phone “hotline” between the two Koreas and abrogated the 1953 armistice that ended the Korean War. The move came as American and South Korean troops began joint military exercises and Washington announced new sanctions against Pyongyang.

The escalation of tensions on the Korean peninsula follows last week’s UN Security Council resolution imposing further punitive measures on North Korea over its third nuclear test on February 12. As well as previous UN sanctions, the North Korean regime has also been subject to a US-led economic and diplomatic blockade since the end of the Korean War.

An editorial in North Korea’s state-run Rodong Sinmun yesterday declared that “the armistice agreement has been nullified” and warned “no one can expect what will happen next.” The 1953 armistice stopped the fighting but did not formally end the war. Pyongyang has pressed for decades for a formal peace treaty with the US, only to be repeatedly rejected.

North Korea has previously declared the armistice void, most recently in 2009 in response to a previous round of sanctions that the US pushed through the UN. Tensions flared in 2010 following the sinking of the South Korean corvette, the Cheonan, for which North Korea denied responsibility. Amid provocative US-South Korean naval exercises, the two Koreas engaged in artillery exchanges in which several South Korean soldiers and civilians on Yeonpyeong Island were killed.

On Sunday, North Korean leader Kim Jong-un visited an artillery unit that took part in the 2010 shelling, urging it to “deal deadly counterblows to the enemy if a single shell is fired on the waters.”

Exercise Key Resolve, involving 10,000 South Korean troops and more than 3,000 American military personnel, began yesterday and will continue until March 21. During the war games, the Pentagon has supplemented the 28,500 US troops stationed in South Korea with additional personnel, as well as extra warships and warplanes.

No military incidents or clashes involving the two Koreas have been reported to date. Moreover, several dozen South Korean managers continued their daily trip yesterday to the Kaesong industrial zone inside North Korea, where they supervise some 50,000 workers making goods for South Korean businesses.

Both sides, however, have engaged in bellicose rhetoric. Last week, as the UN Security Council prepared to impose further sanctions, Pyongyang warned that it would “exercise the right to a pre-emptive nuclear attack” to defend the country and claimed to have the ability to carry out a precision attack on Washington.

South Korea’s defence ministry warned last Friday that the North’s government would “evaporate from the face of the Earth” if it ever used a nuclear weapon. Newly-elected South Korean President Park Geun-hye told her first cabinet meeting yesterday: “We must deal strongly with a North Korean provocation.”

Kim Byung-kwan, Park’s appointee as defence minister, declared during his confirmation hearing that South Korea would respond to a North Korean artillery attack by destroying the regime. Kim, who was former deputy commander of the joint US-South Korean forces, is known to carry a photo of the president’s father–former South Korean military dictator Park Chung-hee–who ruled from 1961 to 1979.

The most chilling threat came from Washington. Obama’s National Security Adviser Tom Donilon yesterday warned: “There should be no doubt: we will draw upon the full range of our capacities to protect against, and to respond to, the threat posed to us and to our allies by North Korea.” The “full range” obviously includes the huge American nuclear arsenal. Donolon added that Washington would hold Pyongyang “full accountable” for any transfer of nuclear weapons or materials to other countries.

The US Treasury announced more penalties against North Korea yesterday, targeting the country’s main foreign exchange bank–the Foreign Trade Bank–and a senior official, Paek Se-bong, who is allegedly connected to North Korea’s missile program. The US State Department also designated another three individuals for sanctions.

The Obama administration is directly responsible for the rising tensions in North East Asia. Its “pivot to Asia” aimed at undermining China has encouraged governments throughout the region, including South Korea, to take a more aggressive stance. By putting the pressure on China’s ally North Korea, the US is also compounding the problems facing Beijing.

China has continued to economically prop up North Korea to prevent a political implosion and the possibility of a pro-US regime on its northern border. At the same time, Beijing has voted for UN sanctions and sought to rein in North Korea, fearing that Pyongyang’s nuclear tests could provide South Korea and Japan with a pretext for developing their own nuclear weapons.

South Korean lawmaker Chung Mong-joon, from Park’s right-wing Saenuri party, has already suggested that the country should build a “nuclear deterrence”. He told a meeting of the party’s National Assembly members last month that the current situation was like trying to defend oneself with a pebble against a gangster with a machine gun. The JoongAng Ilbo described North Korea’s nuclear test as an existential threat and argued that South Korea should develop its own nuclear weapons, rather than rely on the US.

Such comments only add to the pressure in Beijing, where a debate has opened up in ruling circles over China’s alliance with North Korea. While there has been no shift in China’s official stance, senior officials and academics have advocated a tougher line against Pyongyang, including ending the security treaty between the two countries.

At the same time, Beijing is well aware that the US is encouraging North Korea to adopt a more pro-Western orientation. US National Security Adviser Donilon yesterday referred to the transformation of US relations with Burma, saying it had resulted in billions of dollars in Western aid, investment and debt forgiveness. It was a not-so-subtle hint that Pyongyang could make the transition from pariah to “democracy” if it toed Washington’s line.

The US has, however, flatly refused to make any concessions to North Korea unless it dismantles its missile and nuclear programs. Pyongyang agreed to do so in the past–under the 1994 Agreed Framework and the 2005 agreement reached at six-party talks–only to be confronted with broken promises and new demands from Washington.

The aggressive US stance ensures that the Korean peninsula remains extremely tense, heightening the danger of conflict in one of Asia’s critical flashpoints.

American “Smoke and Mirrors”: The Politics of Imagined Opinion

0

Republicrat1-300x260

Where do you locate yourself on the political spectrum? Are you liberal or conservative? On “the left”, “the right”, or perhaps you’re a bit of both (“moderate”). It is no secret that American mass culture often blunts the capacity for civic engagement and political awareness. Yet those who pursue an identity in acceptable political dialogue are less aware of how the parameters of American politics have been carefully crafted to elicit vicarious and seemingly meaningful participation for the politically inclined.

This is at least partially because political elites have for close to a century carefully crafted and presided over a political universe of smoke and mirrors for their subjects; one where citizens think and act as if they have political choices and agency, thereby perpetuating the myth of democratic participation and enfranchisement. Thinking along these lines is apparent in the almost century-old writings of the well-known American political commentator Walter Lippmann.

Lippmann’s many observations on media and public opinion are significant not just because he was a distinctly influential and gifted commentator, but also because of his many close working relationships and affinities with the most powerful financial and political elites of his day. In fact, historian Carroll Quigley recognizes Lippmann as “the authentic spokesman in American journalism for the [Anglo-American] Establishments on both sides of the Atlantic in international affairs.”

As World War One concluded, Lippmann played a central role in recruiting intellectual talent for “the Inquiry,” a group of several dozen analysts set up by the Wilson administration and powerful Wall Street bankers and oil barons to ostensibly establish plans for a peace settlement, what eventually crystallized as Wilson’s Fourteen Points and a transnational system of governance called the League of Nations most Americans rejected. In reality, the Inquiry was a philosophical and functional precursor to the Central Intelligence Agency, gathering, analyzing, and producing recommendations on how the bankers and oil men should proceed with maintenance of their overseas assets in a vastly rearranged geopolitical environment.

In the years following the Inquiry’s dissolution Lippmann wrote his most well-known work, Public Opinion, where he lamented the US public’s rejection of an international government and expounded on how the thinking and behavior of modern individuals are largely determined through prejudice, or “stereotypes”, thus rendering citizens unfit for meaningful participation in public affairs. “For the most part we do not first see, and then define,” he famously wrote, “we define first and then see.” And, acknowledging the growing power and political implications of electronic mass media, Lippmann marveled at how “on the screen the whole process of observing, describing, reporting, and then imagining, has been accomplished for you.”

Along these lines Lippmann envisioned how political persuasions may be ready-made to develop a seeming relationship with political iconography and sloganeering where positions, sensibilities, and identification with an imagined community all take place through televisual displacement and atomization. With the media’s major control over representation and imagination comes the power to exclude undesirable political objects and ideas, thereby rendering them for all practical purposes out-of-mind.

The stereotypical dynamic and ideal endures in the binary oppositions governing much of what passes for American political discourse today: liberal/conservative, Democratic/Republican, Red/Blue, pro-choice/pro-life, Tea Party/Occupy, and so on. Far removed from the union hall, tavern, or country club where political opinions derived from lived interaction and experience, defining subjective opinion through imagined political adversaries with malevolent ulterior motives is now typically carried out in mass mediated form that provides one with their own sense of purpose and moral rectitude. It is also a perfectly suitable technique for a mechanized and streamlined journalism that has little time or resources for fathoming and assessing the nuanced complexity and broader possibilities inherent in all genuine political thinking. As political theorist Sheldon Wolin remarks, “The responsibility of the responsible media include maintaining an ideological ‘balance’ that treats the “Left” and the “Right” as polar opposites as well as moral and political equivalents.” Manufactured political opinion also become deeply ingrained in the public mind through shared cultural figures and artifacts.

In one of the most well-known situation comedies in American television history, All in the Family, Archie Bunker was an archetype that forever unified bigotry and pettiness with conservatism in the popular mind. Archie’s childish persona acted synergistically alongside the enlightened and educated liberalism of Michael Stivic. The Bunker/Stivic binary, echoed to the present in the jousting punditry of cable news, remains a template for locating ones imagined place on the political spectrum.

Stereotypes and imagined positions are the exact opposite of what perceptive minds capable of discerning controversies and problems would expect and desire from political exchange. Above the din of clashing ideologies the very same forces Walter Lippmann moved with and spoke for remain, apart from and unimaginable in the prisonhouse of political opinion they helped design and construct.

References

Gonzales, Servando. 2010. Psychological Warfare and the New World Order: The Secret War Against the American People. Spook Books.

Lippmann, Walter. 1997 (1922). Public Opinion, New York: Free Press.

Quigley, Carroll. 1975 (1966). Tragedy and Hope: A History of the World in Our Time, Angriff Press.

Steel, Ronald. 1980 (1970). Walter Lippmann and the American Century, New York: Atlantic Monthly Press and Little, Brown, and Company.

Wolin, Sheldon. 2008. Democracy Inc.: Managed Democracy and the Specter of Inverted Totalitarianism, Princeton University Press.

150,000 Greek Public Sector Job Cuts Pending As Greece Launches Another Grexit “Plan B” Movement

0

The eye of the hurricane over Southeast Europe may soon be shifting, exposing Greece to the same 150 mph gale turmoil everyone has grown to love and expect over the past three years as soon as this month, when a new proposal by Greece is due on how to cut a massive 150,000 public sector jobs: a move which will result in an immediate surge in public unrest, and an exponential jump in strike activity. As Bloomberg reports, “Greece is locked in talks with international creditors in Athens about shrinking the government workforce by enough to keep bailout payments flowing. Identifying redundant positions and putting in place a system that will lead to mandatory exits for about 150,000 civil servants by 2015 is a so-called milestone that will determine whether the country gets a 2.8 billion-euro ($3.6 billion) aid installment due this month. More than a week of talks on that has so far failed to clinch an agreement.”

“Public sector job cuts are a major part of the program and they are one of the most politically difficult parts to achieve,” said Holger Schmieding, chief economist at Berenberg Bank in London. “And for the Greek government, which has two left-of-center parties, it is extremely difficult to really implement those job cuts. I’m afraid this will likely stay a point of contention, review after review after review.”

As a result Europe can continue keeping its eyes closed and continue handing over billions in unconditional aid to Greece, however, with Germans increasingly unhappy with the arrangement where their country is the only designated driver at the European alcoholic relapse free for all, this may be untenable. Therefore, it is likely that Greece will have to come through with at least some major muscle cutting proposals. These in turn will certainly inflame the country, and force it to rethink its pro-European majority stance, especially now that as Kathimerini reports, the country has not one but two counter-Eurozone political powers:

Former SYRIZA leader Alekos Alavanos has announced plans to launch a movement that will campaign for Greece to leave the euro.

“All countries have a Plan B for Greece, only Greece does not have a Plan B should it have to leave the euro,” Alavanos told Skai television on Tuesday.

He said the movement would aim to stand in the European Parliament elections in 2014 and would favor a return to the drachma.

“If Greece were to exit the European Union we would be much better off than we are today and would never have had to reach this point,” he said, adding “that no country has ever managed to exit a crisis with a ‘hard’ currency. The euro is a hard and expensive currency.”

He said that his movement will also favor the nationalization of banks and for Greece to repudiate its debt.

“It is madness to have the same currency as Germany when Germany, unlike us, has a stable economy,” Alavanos said.

Alavanos is, of course, right. However, with the empirical evidence of what 2 years of Greece on the brink of European departure has shown, is that the last thing Europe will agree to is a return to a Greece that is one foot in, one foot out of the Euro, as this will immediately put the OMT in play: an OMT, which as we have repeatedly discussed in the past, is wonderful in Draghi talking points to clueless reporters, but an epic failure if and when it should actually be put into use.

And Greece, where it all started back in 2010, may be just the catalyst that brings Europe, where nothing at all has been fixed in the past three years when one ignores the central bank-manipulated markets, full circle.

Your rating: None Average: 5 (1 vote)

US Threatens Pakistan with Sanctions over Gas Pipeline Deal with Iran

0

pak

Iranian President Mahmoud Ahmadinejad and his Pakistani counterpart Asif Ali Zardari on Monday officially inaugurated the final construction phase of the Iran-Pakistan gas pipeline project despite US pressure to dissuade Pakistan away from the project.

The US State Department has threatened Islamabad with sanctions if the country goes through with a joint multi-billion-dollar gas pipeline project with Iran.

“We have serious concerns, if this project actually goes forward, that the Iran Sanctions Act would be triggered,” State Department spokeswoman Victoria Nuland said on Monday.“We’ve been straight up with the Pakistanis about these concerns,” Nuland added.

This file photo shows technicians welding the Iranian end of the Iran-Pakistan (IP) gas pipeline to its Pakistani section during the inauguration ceremony of the final construction phase of the project, Monday, March 11, 2013.

This file photo shows technicians welding the Iranian end of the Iran-Pakistan (IP) gas pipeline to its Pakistani section during the inauguration ceremony of the final construction phase of the project, Monday, March 11, 2013.

The 1996 Iran Sanctions Act allows the US government to ban imports from any non-American company that invests more than USD 20 million a year in the Iranian oil and natural gas sector.Nuland said the US was “supporting large-scale energy projects in Pakistan that will add some 900 megawatts to the power grid by the end of 2013.”

The threats came on the same day as the inauguration of the final construction phase of the multi-billion-dollar Iran-Pakistan (IP) gas pipeline, intended to carry natural gas from Iran to its eastern neighbor.

Iran’s President Mahmoud Ahmadinejad and his Pakistani counterpart Asif Ali Zardari attended the ceremony on the Iran-Pakistan border on Monday.

The pipeline is designed to help Pakistan overcome its growing energy needs at a time when the country of 180 million is grappling with serious energy shortages.

Meanwhile, Iranian Deputy Oil Minister Javad Owji said on Monday that Pakistan has raised its demand for natural gas imports from Iran to 30 million cubic meters (mcm) per day from a previous 21.5 mcm.

Owji added that Iran has hitherto spent USD 2 billion to build the section of the pipeline that lies on the Iranian side of the border and that the Pakistani section would need USD 3 billion.

On March 2, Zardari said that Islamabad would not stop the pipeline project at any cost.

The Pakistani president stressed that his government would continue to pursue the construction of the gas pipeline despite threats and pressure from the US.

Paul Ryan’s Regressiveness Redux

0

Ryan’s austerity budget is more of the same from the Ayn Rand enthusiast, but so long as the Democrats keep playing the game, why change course? (Photo: AP Photo)Republicans lost the election but they still shape what’s debated in Washington – the federal budget deficit and so-called “fiscal responsibility.”

The White House’s and the Democrat’s continuing failure to reshape that debate has lead directly and logically to Paul Ryan’s budget plan this week, which is a more regressive version of the same plan American voters resoundingly rejected last November.

Sadly, the President is playing into the GOP’s hands with a new round of negotiations over a “grand bargain.”

Despite February’s encouraging job numbers, the major challenge is still jobs, wages, growth, and widening inequality – not deficit reduction and fiscal responsibility.

We’d need numbers like February’s every month for the next four years to get anywhere close to the level of unemployment we had before the Great Recession. But we won’t get there because of the austerity policies the nation has embarked on, and the continuing erosion of the middle class.

Austerity economics – of which Ryan’s upcoming budget is the most extreme version – is a cruel hoax. Cruel because it hurts most those who are already hurting; a hoax because it doesn’t work.

The entire framework is based on the false analogy that the federal budget is akin to a family’s budget.

Families do have to balance their budgets. But that’s precisely why the federal government has to be the spender of last resort when consumer spending falls short of boosting the economy toward full employment.

And as long as income and wealth continue to concentrate at the very top, the broad middle class and those aspiring to join it won’t have the purchasing power to boost the economy.

So why even try for a “grand bargain” that won’t deal with these fundamentals but only further legitimize the GOP mythology and further mislead the public about what’s really at stake?

This work is licensed under a Creative Commons License

Iraq and the Betrayal of a People — Impunity Forever?

0

Iraq’s recent history includes two far reaching events, on the 2 August 1990 Iraq’s invasion into Kuwait and on 19 March 2003 the US/UK invasion into Iraq. Whether political leaders will draw lessons from these events will be, at best, questionable. Iraqis continue to be wronged. Danger to life and turmoil remain a cruel part of Iraq’s reality in early 2013. The collective suffering of a nation is visibly all pervasive. It can not be hidden.

The Iraqi puzzle of life confirms an endless number of tragedies

Ethnic tension and sectarianism have become a major element in Iraqi politics since the US/UK invasion of 2003, a polarization of inter-group relations Iraqis had not known before. This explains much of the existing hideous crime including murder, kidnapping, property destruction and, most noteworthy, the deteriorating relationships between Baghdad and the three northern Kurdish governorates.

Since the years of war, sanctions and occupation, Iraq’s once state-of-the-art medical system has all but collapsed. Malnutrition and diseases, almost forgotten in Iraq, such as respiratory infections; measles; typhoid fever and tuberculosis have re-emerged on a large scale. The planned destruction of water and sanitation facilities, especially in the 1991 war, and recurrent drug shortages, throughout the period of sanctions and after the 2003 invasion, promoted significantly ill-being, morbidity and mortality in the country (WHO).

Depleted uranium, the armour-piercing radio-active munition, and white phosphorus used by the US military in 1991 and 2003 have created serious health and environmental dangers in Iraq. In early 2000 the US Government sought to prevent WHO from surveying areas in southern Iraq where DU had been used. It also rejected any causality with increases in lung cancer, leukaemia and congenital birth defects. Fortunately national and international efforts have not deterred the collection of more evidence to show the relevance of these war contaminants.

A 2009 Iraq Government mental health survey concluded that mass displacement, a climate of fear, torture, death and violence have contributed to the high ratio of mental illness in the country. It reflects what an old man in Mosul observed:
“First they destroyed our economy and now they are trying to kill our minds.”

Iraq is said to have the third largest oil reserves in the world. Its current oil exports nevertheless remain below the average export of 2.2 million barrels/day Iraq was able to market during the years of sanctions. Sabotage against pipelines, corruption, inability to rehabilitate oil installations in the post-invasion era and Iraqi resistance to handover oil exploration to foreign interests (PSAs) are among the causes.

An immensely oil-rich country but 22.9% out of the est. 33 million Iraqis have been living in poverty and many more have to survive under near-poverty living conditions. The GNI per capita/annum (2011) amounted to a mere $2.640 (World Bank). Transparency International classified Iraq’s public sector corruption among the highest in the world — ranking 169 out of 176 countries (2012).

Rahim Hassan al-Uqailee, as head of the Iraqi Commission of Integrity wrote in an open letter to the Iraqi parliament’s anti-graft committee (2011): “The fight over stealing the money of state and its property is the unspoken part of the struggle for power in Iraq today.”

Despite the despicable gap between the rich and the poor, the Iraqi authorities signed a deal (2011) with the US Government for the purchase of 18 F-16 fighter jets at a cost of $ 3 billion! At that time almost a quarter of the Iraqi population lived in poverty and the unemployment rate exceeded 28% (UN).

There is a saying in the Middle East: “Egyptians write, Lebanese print and Iraqis read”. Prior to Iraq’s invasion into Kuwait in August 1990, Iraq had among the highest literacy rates in the Middle East. Sanctions changed that.

A World Bank/Government of Iraq survey (2007) showed that “almost 23 percent of Iraqis were illiterate”, 5 million school age children were not in school and gender disparity in education had become severe. There have been other serious developments in the education sector since 2003: a sectarian element has found its way into the school system affecting mostly Sunni and Shiite students and, most disturbingly, a 2011 Ghent University/Brussels Tribunal publication states: “Iraq’s intellectual and technical class has been subject to a systematic campaign of intimidation, abduction, extortion, random killings and targeted assassinations”. Conditions in Iraq were “reminiscent of ‘educide’ or genocide of the educated segments of Iraqi society”.

Other serious and life-threatening dangers have confronted Iraqis in recent years

“…Since the US-led invasion in 2003, Iraq has become a transit point in the flow of hashish and heroin from Iran and Afghanistan”, according to the UN. The Iraqi Ministry of Health confirms that local “addiction rates are climbing steadily” while before drug use was not an Iraqi problem.

During the 13 years of sanctions and beyond, it was difficult to obtain building materials for the construction of additional housing. This resulted in a steep rise in overcrowded accommodation which in turn promoted domestic violence, often involving women as victims. A UN report estimates that “one in five women in Iraq suffer from domestic abuse”.
Wars and violence have fundamentally changed the demographic and social profile of Iraq.

Iraq’s Ministry of Labor and Social Affairs indicates (2011) there are an estimated 4.5 million Iraqi children who have lost their parents — a horrific 14% of Iraq’s population are orphans! 70% of these children became orphans since the 2003 invasion. Around 600,000 of these are living in the streets and a few in the 18 orphanages that exist in the country, we are told.

In the Iraq tradition, it must be remembered, there was no need for orphanages. The extended family took care of those who had lost their parents. Dictatorship, wars, sanctions and crime have changed this. There are an estimated one million female-headed households in Iraq. Most of these women are widows, victims of armed conflict and sectarian violence (ICRC/2010).

Apart from extreme physical, mental, economic and social damages, Iraqis have also faced a grim reality of punitive financial limitations during the years of sanctions. From 1990 until 1996, the year when the Oil-for-Food Programme (OFFP) became operative, all of Iraq’s foreign accounts were frozen and oil was not allowed to be sold internationally. The Iraqi people were almost entirely dependent on meager help from abroad — a far cry from a dignified survival.

The OFFP (1996-2003), allegedly a “humanitarian” exemption but fully financed (!) with sanctions-limited Iraqi oil money, was little more than an underfunded supply programme. Out of a total oil income of $64 billion about $ 19 billion were transferred to the UN Compensation Commission (UNCC) in Geneva. At that time Iraq’s child mortality of 130/1000 was among the highest in the world. This transfer to the UNCC was to compensate individuals, companies and governments, especially the Government of Kuwait, for claims resulting from Iraq’s invasion into Kuwait. Had there been any moral leadership in the UN Security Council, much of this compensation could have been postponed. It would have prevented many deaths among Iraqi children!

During 6 ½ years, only $ 43 billion were available to meet the needs of 23 million Iraqis — a pittance! Out of this amount only $28 billion (1) were actually utilized for this purpose. Micro-management and extreme bureaucratization of the OFFP by the UN Security Council and also the deliberate blocking by the US & UK of much needed supplies for the people of Iraq were main causes.

The UN humanitarian programme was not meant to work!

The end result: the per capita value/ day of humanitarian goods actually benefitting Iraqis amounted to 51 US cents — a shameful reality for which the US & UK Governments were largely responsible.

As of October 2012 Iraq has paid $ 38.7 billion in compensation to the three parties identified above. The rightful demand by Iraqis to-day that time has come to obtain in turn their reparations from abroad for war devastation, air, water and soil pollution, destruction of farmland, physical infrastructure, water, sanitation and electricity facilities to date has been ignored by the international community.

This constitutes an intolerable and unacceptable double standard.

In March 2003, at the end of the Government of Saddam Hussein, Iraq’s total debt burden was identified as between $ 50 to $ 80 billion. The 19 Paris Club members, mostly European, identify an Iraq debt to them of $38.9 billion. Iraq’s other creditors are primarily Arab (GCCC) countries.

Detractors of the evidence of willful destruction of Iraq’s heritage, its culture, the artifact pilferage; the gross violation of national and international law; planted dis- and mis-information; crime; brutality; disregard for fundamental human concerns and ethical standards, will either reject these accusations as preposterous, ideological and stupid or remain mute. Pitiful as this is they have no more to offer! In the name of democracy they insist that the infamous “bigger picture”, their bigger picture, justified the means.

They do not understand what democracy and humanness really entails. It is not about potato chips and coke but about human security and the opportunity to shape one’s life in freedom from want and freedom from fear.

Iraq, a major owner of global oil and gas, should have no problem in giving its people such a life. Instead Iraq has become a failing state vying with other disadvantaged countries such as Afghanistan, Somalia and, of course, the State of Palestine, for the crown of misery.

The overall impact of these elements on life in Iraq constitute an indescribable human drama. Perpetrators, however, will not be allowed to lean back for ever and assume that their crimes will simply disappear into the far horizon of nowhere.

Accountability will prevail

The efforts of the Kuala Lumpur War Crimes Commission (KLWCC) founded in 2005 by Tun Dr. Mahathir, Prime Minister of Malaysia from 1981-2003 are a step in that direction. The Commission has worked for many years to produce an impressive body of evidence from legal documents and victims testimonies. This material, carefully reviewed by the Kuala Lumpur War Crimes Tribunal, allowed the Court to pronounce in November 2011 and in May 2012 that culpability exists at the highest levels of government in the United States and in the United Kingdom for war crimes and the crimes of torture. This can not possibly come as a surprise for George W. Bush and Anthony Blair!

The Tribunal’s verdict: the two leaders and their senior advisors had committed serious crimes against peace “in that they planned, prepared and invaded the sovereign state of Iraq in violation of international law and committed crimes of torture and war crimes, ignoring the Geneva Conventions and the UN torture law.” (2)

What one has seen can not be unseen! How much can a people take?

2013 must become the year during which these perpetrators will see an end to their impunity. Especially those who were instrumental in creating decades of Iraqi suffering. Due process must be for everyone, Iraqi and non-Iraqi; facing justice, however, is not just for those who lost!

The international public, as the ‘power from below’, will intensify its efforts during this tenth year after an illegal invasion into Iraq, to reassure the Iraqi people that they are not alone in their search for redress.

Hans-C. von Sponeck, Former UN Assistant Secretary General and UN Humanitarian Coordinator for Iraq and aMember of the Kuala Lumpur War Crimes Commission

Notes

(1) During the years of US occupation of Iraq, the monthly cost of maintaining troops in Iraq amounted to an est. US $ 12 billion. In other words, what Iraqis had from the OFFP for survival during the entire 6 ½ years corresponded to less than 3 months of the cost of maintaining US troops in Iraq!

(2) Kuala Lumpur War Crimes Tribunal — Case 1 and Case 2: Judgements of 22 November 2011 and 11 May 2012 (ISBN 978-937-10817-1-6 and ISBN 978-967-10817-2-3)

John Brennan’s Heavy Baggage

0

John Brennan brings heavy baggage to his new job as CIA Director — legal as well as moral — arguably making it risky for him to travel to more than 150 countries that are party to the United Nations Convention Against Torture.New CIA Director John Brennan addresses officials at the Agency’s headquarters in Langley, Virginia. (Photo credit: CIA)

It must be hard for Brennan to recognize that he cannot land in Europe, for example, without fear of being arrested and arraigned for kidnapping (also known as “extraordinary rendition”) and torture (now antiseptically called “EIT” for “enhanced interrogation techniques,” which, by the way, is a direct translation of verschaerfte Vernehmungright out of the Gestapo handbook).

For a freshly confirmed CIA Director it is de rigueur to pay an early call on European counterparts. I remember preparing a briefing book for that purpose just before a new CIA Director named George H. W. Bush took off for the UK, Germany and France in the early spring of 1976. Unfortunately for Brennan, there may be complications to enjoying April in Paris — like a possible knock on the door from a French prosecutor and the gendarmes.

Given Brennan’s role as a senior CIA official during President George W. Bush’s “dark side” days of waterboarding detainees, renditioning suspects to Mideast torture centers and making up intelligence to invade Iraq, Brennan’s advisers are sure to remind him that he may be in as much jeopardy of being arrested as former Defense Secretary Donald Rumsfeld.

After leaving the Pentagon in late 2006, Rumsfeld had his own close call with Lady Justice. In October 2007, Rumsfeld was in an auditorium in Paris preparing to deliver a lecture when he learned that the Paris Prosecutor was mulling over what to do after being served a formal complaint against Rumsfeld for ordering and authorizing torture.

The charges against Rumsfeld were brought under the 1984 UN Convention Against Torture (CAT), ratified by both the United States and France. The complaint was brought in France under the concept of universal jurisdiction.

The criminal complaint stated that because the authorities in the United States and Iraq had failed to launch any independent investigation into the responsibility of Rumsfeld and other high-level U.S. officials for torture — despite a documented paper trail and government memos implicating them in direct as well as command responsibility for torture — it was the legal obligation of states such as France to take up the case. The complaint also noted that the U.S. had refused to join the International Criminal Court, which might have had more routine jurisdiction.

In an attempt to avoid a major diplomatic headache, U.S. embassy officers advised: “Run, Rummy, Run,” before the Paris authorities decided what to do. Rumsfeld went out a side door, slipped into the embassy, and then got out of Dodge tout suite.

Rumsfeld’s skedaddle from Paris thus spared him the possible humiliation that befell Gen. Augusto Pinochet, who had been head of Chile’s military dictatorship from 1973 to 1990. While on a trip to the United Kingdom in 1998, Pinochet was arrested on a Spanish judicial warrant and was held under house arrest until 2000. The Spanish judge cited the same principle of universal jurisdiction. Pinochet was freed only after the intervention of high-powered friends, including former President George H.W. Bush and former Secretary of State Henry Kissinger.

That was only the first of several times when European judges applied that principle, declaring themselves competent to judge crimes committed by former heads of state, despite local amnesty laws. If former heads of state are vulnerable, it seemed to follow that former defense secretaries and other senior subordinates must be as well.

If the Rumsfeld precedent were not enough to make Brennan think twice about travel to Europe, he has surely been told of the criminal complaints lodged in Switzerland (also a CAT signatory) against George W. Bush in early 2011. When the former president learned of it, he decided not to take any chances and abruptly nixed longstanding plans to address a Jewish charity dinner in Geneva on Feb. 12, 2011.

The Goods on Brennan

Brennan’s checkered past has been an open secret. On Dec. 5, 2005, after finishing a stint as acting director of the National Counterterrorism Center, Brennan told Margaret Warner of the NewsHour that “rendition” (also known as kidnapping) is “an absolutely vital tool … producing intelligence that has saved lives.” (In his Feb. 7, 2013, testimony to the Senate Intelligence Committee on his nomination to be CIA Director, Brennan backed off the “saved lives” claim, since the committee had just completed its own comprehensive study disproving it.)

On the NewsHour, Brennan described rendition as “the practice or the process of rendering somebody from one place to another place. It is moving them, and the U.S. Government will frequently facilitate that movement from one country to another.”

Brennan’s co-panelist, another former CIA operations officer, objected to turning prisoners over to foreign intelligence services, insisting that, “It would be far better if the United States retained control of that terror suspect and did the interrogation itself.”

This drew a sharp rejoinder from Brennan: “Quite frankly I think it’s rather arrogant to think that we are the best in every case in terms of eliciting information from terror suspects.” Right. In the decades since World War II, many “friendly” intelligence services have acquired a lot more experience with verschaerfte Vernehmungthan the CIA, though it often served as the tutor.

(The term verschaerfte Vernehmung was not only coined by the Nazis, but the techniques were indistinguishable from those used during the presidency of George W. Bush, according to a 2007 article in the Atlantic. The major difference, so far, is that after WWII the torturers were punished as war crimes, with the penalty often death by hanging.)

NewsHour’s Warner asked Brennan if the U.S. employs rendition “because we want another country to do the dirty work?” Brennan replied: “It’s rather arrogant to think that we’re the only country that respects human rights.”

A comprehensive study just published by the Open Society Justice Initiative reveals that, under President George W. Bush, Brennan and his counter-terrorist team suborned the officials of 54 other countries to cooperate in the rendition program, providing help of various kinds, including transiting their land, airports or airspace, or accepting secret prisons in their countries.

It is no secret that the purpose of “rendition” is to move detainees secretly to countries with experience/expertise in “enhanced interrogation techniques” or to the infamous CIA “black sites” abroad where waterboarding and other abuses took place. Such activities violate the Convention Against Torture and, often, national laws.

Some Accountability

What is new is that some governments in both “old” and “new” Europe — a distinction that Donald Rumsfeld would make derisively against France and other parts of “old” Europe — are now showing a common commitment to justice by prosecuting former heads of their own intelligence services.

Italy’s former chief of military intelligence, Nicolo Pollari, just got ten years in prison for helping the CIA abduct Egyptian cleric Osama Hassan Mustafa Nasr (aka Abu Omar) from the streets of Milan in early 2003 and send him to Egypt for more “enhanced” interrogation.

More than two dozen Americans have been tried and convicted in absentia for this case of truly extraordinary rendition, in which they exhibited notoriously adolescent tradecraft. If any of them travel to Europe, they risk arrest. John Brennan should remember that highly embarrassing flap quite well, since it came on the eve of his appointment to head a newly created Terrorist Threat Integration Center.

And in “new” Europe, in January 2013, Zbigniew Siemiatkowski, former head of Poland’s secret service and former minister of internal affairs, was indicted for his role in cooperating with the CIA renditioners and torturers. Siemiatkowski facilitated CIA renditions and the establishment of a CIA “black prison” in Poland, where the U.S. arranged interrogation and torture of terrorist suspects snatched from their home countries.

It is no overstatement that for the first time since World War II, many foreign intelligence chiefs are likely to have very mixed reactions to being seen, even in Washington, with a freshly minted CIA Director with the heavy baggage that Brennan carries.

So where might these intelligence counterparts get together without too many risks. What about the Bahamas? It has signed CAT but has not yet ratified it. So, with adequate security forces deployed, there may be a measure of safety there. For the time being at least, Bahamas could offer one of the few feasible ways that Brennan would be able to schmooze with key foreign counterparts — perhaps by offering as a bonus a timeshare week there. A short flight for travelers from Washington, DC, Bahamas would have another cost-saving advantage in saving on jet fuel.

Things to Do at Home, Like Iran

Besides worries about arrest, Brennan has other compelling reasons to stay at home for a while. Iran’s nuclear program remains on the front burner as it has since early 2008 when the Director of National Intelligence revealed the National Intelligence Estimate completed in November 2007 concluding, unanimously and “with high confidence,” that Iran had stopped working on nuclear weaponization in 2003 and had not resumed that work — a judgment revalidated every year since by the DNI.

That assessment has not prevented neocons and their favorite media personalities from trying to make Iran’s nuclear program seem more menacing. On “Meet the Press” on Feb. 3, for example, Defense Secretary Leon Panetta was the subject of attempted mousetrapping by NBC’s Chuck Todd, who clearly was hoping Panetta could be maneuvered into contradicting the NIE.

It was awkward for Panetta, but — to his credit — rather than apologize when Todd pointed his finger accusing him of believing “the Iranians were not pursuing nuclear weapons,” Panetta held firm under the goading. Finally, after conferring with co-panelist Joint Chiefs of Staff Chairman, Gen. Martin Dempsey, Panetta said, with some exasperation: “I — no, I can’t tell you because — I can’t tell you they’re in fact pursuing a weapon because that’s not what intelligence says we — we — we’re — they’re doing right now. …” (emphasis added)

John Brennan, when appearing before his Senate Intelligence Committee confirmation hearing on Feb. 7, chose to deviate from the 2007 NIE by including the following in his prepared written testimony: “And regimes in Tehran and Pyongyang remain bent on pursuing nuclear weapons and intercontinental ballistic missile delivery systems.” (emphasis added)

Never mind Brennan’s disingenuousness in conflating Iran with North Korea. The question is how could he diverge so markedly both from what Panetta said just four days before, as well as from the unanimous assessment of the entire U.S. intelligence community that Iran stopped working on a nuclear weapon in 2003 and has not resumed that work. In no way does that continuing assessment support his claim that Tehran remains “bent on pursuing nuclear weapons” and ICBMs to deliver them.

There are, of course, reasonable grounds to suspect that Iran might be seeking a capability that eventually would allow it to rapidly break out of Nonproliferation Treaty (NPT) constraints on building a nuclear weapon. That, of course, is why U.S. intelligence is riveted on monitoring related activity in Iran, as are the UN inspectors in Iran.

But “bent on pursuing” ICBMs? Really? Iran has not flight-tested a ballistic missile with ranges in excess of its 2200-kilometer-range Sajjil MRBM. Nor has it launched a space rocket that might conceivably be a suitable model for an ICBM. Has Brennan found someone — perhaps an analyst left over from the notorious 2002 NIE on WMD in Iraq — to tell him the Iranians are testing ICBMs in their hardened underground sites?

I doubt that Director of National Intelligence James Clapper, who observed at close hand the concocting of fraudulent “intelligence” on Iraq, will cave in to the likes of Brennan “fixing” the intelligence on Iran. However, there is no word yet this year on when the DNI will present the annual worldwide threat briefing — traditionally given in sworn testimony to Congress in January or February.

So the battle is joined. Assuming Congress, in its wisdom, does not altogether cancel the worldwide threat briefing this year, and assuming I’m right about Clapper, Brennan has his work cut out for him in squaring that circle about how “bent” Iran seems to be on “pursuing nuclear weapons.”

A version of this article also appeared on Consortium News.

The Threat of the Imperial Presidency

0

President Obama prepares to board Air Force 1. (AP Photo)Civil libertarians, human rights advocates and peace advocates should insist on a renewed congressional assertion of its power under the Constitution, Article 1, Section 8, to take part in declaring war. Among the many reasons for this reassertion is that social movements typically have greater influence over elected congressional representatives than over the more remote and secretive executive branch.

Historically, American presidents have “encroached on Congress’s war making responsibilities, leaving the legislative branch increasingly irrelevent,” according to an analysis by Bennett Ramberg, a former State Department analyst in the first Bush administration.

Recent hearings by the Senate Intelligence Committee on CIA director John Brennan’s authority and the House Judiciary Committee into drones are at least momentary signs that Congress may be ready to reclaim some of its powers. Statements by President Obama literally asking Congress to write “new legal architecture” to “rein in” his presidency and those of his successors, are clear indications that the growth of an Imperial Presidency may be limited. The bipartisan vote of nearly 300 House members against the administration’s launching of the six-month 2011 Libyan war is the most concrete example of legislative unease.

As Congress considers its options, it is crucial that the public be included in a rightful role. The public sends its sons and daughters to risk their lives in war, pays the taxes that fund those wars and accepts the burden of debt, the paring back of social programs and restrictions on civil liberties in the name of war. The public has a right to know, obtained through public debate and public elections, the rationale, the costs and the predicted outcomes of any military venture. James Madison, cited by Ramberg, gave the reason centuries ago: “Those who are to conduct a war cannot in the nature of things be proper or safe judges, whether a war ought to be commenced, continued or concluded.”

Section 4(b) of the War Powers Resolution mandates that “the President shall provide such other information as the Congress may request in the fulfillment of its constitutional responsibilities with respect to committing the Nation to war and to the use of United States Armed Forces abroad.” Yet only insistent congressional pressure has forced the Obama administration to disclose some of its internal legal memoranda concerning drones, apparently in exchange for senate approval of Brennan’s nomination. It continues to resist the spirit of Section 4(b).

Hopefully, the Congressional Progressive Caucus (CPC) will take up the reform of war-making powers as a major priority. Already, one of the CPC’s co-chairs, Representative Keith Ellison, has expressed the need to reform and reverse the administration’s secret drone war. In the Senate, strong leadership on transparency has come from Senator Ron Wyden. Libertarian Republican senator Rand Paul is demanding to know whether the White House will unleash drone strikes on American citizens. Longtime activist groups like Code Pink suddenly are finding themselves in the center of a national conversation.

Three senators who voted for Brennan’s confirmation–Wyden, Mark Udall and Susan Collins–also issued a call on March 5 “to bring the American people into this debate and for Congress to consider ways to ensure that the president’s sweeping authorities are subject to appropriate limitations, oversight and safeguards.”

By most accounts, this fuss over the Imperial Rresidency wasn’t supposed to be happening. The drone wars were supposed to be cheap for the taxpayer, erase American military casualties and hammer the terrorists into peace negotiations. The assassination of Osama bin Ladin was supposed to be the turning point. But even with the wars being low-intensity and low-visibility, the “secrets” have remained in the public eye, especially the drone war.

From a peace movement perspective, pressure from anywhere for any steps that will complicate and eventually choke off the unfettered use of drones will be an improvement over the status quo.

From a peace movement perspective, pressure from anywhere for any steps that will complicate and eventually choke off the unfettered use of drones will be an improvement over the status quo. For some, like Ramberg, a reform of the 1973 War Powers Act is overdue. That resolution, which passed during an uproar against the Nixon presidency, actually conceded war-making power to the president for a two-month period before requiring congressional authorization. The original 1973 Senate version of the war-powers bill, before it was watered down, required congressional authorization except in the case of armed attack on the US or the necessity of immediate citizen evacuation. No president has ever signed the war powers legislation, on the grounds that it encroaches on the executive branch, although most presidents have voluntarily abided by its requirements.

Ramberg lists the US military actions undertaken after the War Powers Resolution “with minimal or no congressional consultation,” as: Mayaguez (1975), Iran hostage rescue action (1980), El Salvador (1981), Lebanon (1982), Grenada (1983), Libya (1986), Panama (1989), Iraq (May 1991, 1993), Somalia (1993) Bosnia (1993-95), Haiti (1993, 2004) and Kosovo (1999), leaving out Sudan (1998) and the dubious authorizations for Iraq and Afghanistan.

The immediate issue ripe for attention is the drone policy, conducted especially in Pakistan by the CIA in utter secrecy, but also spreading through Afghanistan, Yemen, Somalia, and Mali.

Drone attacks clearly are acts of war as defined by the War Powers Resolution, although the WPR was written mainly to contain the deployment of American ground forces. The drone war rests more squarely on the 2001 Authorization for Use of Military Force (AUMF), the underlying legal rationale for the “global war on terrorism.”

The challenge of reform, as opposed to emergency tinkering, will require prolonged efforts to amend and clarify both the WPR and AUMF. Allowing any president a sixty-day period before seeking congressional authorization, as the WPR does, makes no sense in drone warfare. Instead, the president should be required to seek congressional permission if he wishes to target a clearly definable “enemy,” and be required to issue public guidelines, including necessary disclosure, governing the use of force he contemplates. That means:

First, Congress should establish a special inspector general, like the SIGUR created for Iraq and Afghanistan, to define, monitor and determine civilian casualties (“collateral damage”) from drone strikes. Currently that information is collected by the CIA, which has a conflict of interest, not to mention a curtain of secrecy.

Second, Congress will need to draft guidelines sharply narrowing–or even banning–the use of “signature strikes,” which permit drone attacks against targets profiled according to identity, such as young males of military age (which could be civilians, participants in a wedding or funeral, etc.).

The open window for “reining in” the president’s executive powers could close at any time.

Third, Congress or the courts will have to restore the open-ended concept of “imminent threat” to its traditional meaning, as an immediate operational threat aimed at American citizens, US territory or facilities. Under the elastic formulation employed by Brennan and others, the simple fact of ill-defined jihadists holding meetings anywhere on the planet is an “imminent threat” justifying military action. And according to the CIA interpretation, the threat is a “continuous” one, carrying over from war to war. But if every “potential” threat is defined as “imminent,” and all the threats are continuous, the CIA, Special Forces and American military will be spread thin indeed from the jungles of the Philippines to the ghettos of Britain.

The 2001 AUMF was written to justify the unofficial military doctrine of the “long war,” developed by counterinsurgency advisers to General David Petraeus and the State Department, like David Kilcullen, who project a conflict of fifty- to eighty-years’ duration against ill-defined Muslim fundamentalists. The designated targets of the AUMF are “Al Qaeda” and “associated” terrorist groups. That overly broad definition authorizes a global war in the shadows against forces whose actual links to Al Qaeda are difficult to discern and who may or may not be threats against the United States. If targeted by the United States, however, the likelihood of their becoming threats will only increase.

A recent example in a long list of these targets is Mokhtar Belmokhtar, the 40-year-old Algerian who may or may not have been killed last week in Chad. Belmokhtar allegedly carried out the January attack on an Algerian gas plant in which thirty-seven foreign hostages died. He did so in retaliation against France’s military intervention in its former colony of Mali, and against Algeria’s siding with Western counterterrorism policies. Otherwise, Belmokhtar was nicknamed the “Marlboro Man” because of his decades-long involvement in smuggling cigarettes. Ten years ago he led one faction of Al Qaeda in the Islamic Maghreb, before breaking away to form his own force in the Sahel.

The question is whether the 2001 AUMF was written to cover a regional warlord like the “Marlboro Man” whose history is “smuggling, kidnapping and fighting for decades in the Sahel,” or whether it is being used as a blanket authorization for official kill lists and CIA drone assassins everywhere.

Finally, Congress should commission an independent body to evaluate whether the war on terrorism, including the drone attacks, has made Americans “safer.” The rise of the drones–as well as cyber-warfare–has a lulling effect on public opinion since American group operations are ending and casualties are down. But the 9/11 attacks took place unexpectedly as a result of burning grievances in the Muslim world. The official metrics of safety (e.g., how many jihadist “leaders” have been killed, whether insurgent attacks are up or down) ignore the incendiary hatred and desire for revenge building in Muslim communities suffering from remote drone attacks. A few empirical studies have shown a direct correlation between the rise of suicide bombers and US/Western occupation of Muslim lands, but the mass illusion of safety from terrorism tends to persist. A national conversation, including the forgotten ways in which we are made less safe by the war on terrorism, is sorely needed.

In perspective, the effort to prevent the restoration of an Imperial Presidency is long and politically difficult, something like reversing the mass incarceration policies and police buildups that followed the neoconservatives’ “war on gangs” campaign of the early 1990s, which the Clinton administration adopted. Many liberals in general, and Democrats in particular, cringe at being labeled “soft on crime” (or “soft on terrorism”). Some on the left, on the other hand, seem to think that the threat of terrorism is manufactured. However, if another attack should occur against the United States, the danger that a second Patriot Act will pass is real. Current US policies inadvertently provoke that possibility, with the drone strikes the equivalent of attacking a hornet’s nest. Therefore, the open window for “reining in” the president’s executive powers could close at any time. Hearings to reform of the 2001 AUMF and the 1973 WPR could not be more urgent.

© 2013 The Nation

Google ‘faces’ Russia’s probe over private email spying

0

Published time: March 12, 2013 11:35

Reuters/Truth Leem

Russian antimonopoly officials have launched an inquiry into Google for allegedly violating correspondence privacy in their advertising, Russian media reported. Google denied the charges, claiming that e-mails are reviewed by a computer, not a human.

Google’s webmail service Gmail will be investigated by Russia’s Federal Antimonopoly Service (FAS) for alleged unfair business practices and violating laws concerning the privacy of email correspondences, Izvestia daily revealed on Tuesday. The investigation was launched after multiple appeals by Russian citizens who were targeted by contextual advertising generated by Google’s web service engine, FAS representatives said.

Google’s mind-reader

Contextually targeted advertising is nothing new — initially, this technology used keywords that users had entered into the search engine. Google’s search engine advertising (SEA) now reads users’ emails automatically to fish out valuable information on what exactly the person is currently preoccupied with, or searching for.

Google’s office in Moscow did not deny that Gmail analyses its users’ emails: “It is the advertisement that enables us to provide services for free. We constantly work to make the ads safe, relevant and unobtrusive,” Google spokesperson Alla Zabrovskaya said. “Surely, there is nobody reading your mails or your account to pick up ads for you. It is automatic assessment algorithm similar to spam filtration that chooses ads.”

Gmail violates Russian law?

Google’s ‘mind-reading’ capabilities could violate Russian laws concerning the secrecy of private correspondence. Article 138 of Russia’s Criminal Code promises fines or corrective labor for “violation of secrecy of correspondence, telephone conversations, postal, telegraph, or other messages of citizens.” The use of “special technical means for secret collection of information” implies a maximum $10,000 fine, or up to four month behind bars.

In this case, a license agreement between Gmail and its clients cannot serve as an excuse for such practices, as long as the emails are a part of a Russian citizen’s private life, explained Sergey Kopylov, head of the legal department at Russia’s Internet Technical Center.

According to the Russian Civil Code, a license agreement is kind of contract; as long as a contract does not obey existing legislation, it must be considered void without any legal consequences, Kopylov told Izvestia.

Google vs Microsoft

Russia is hardly the first to suspect that Google is spying on those who use its services. In 2010, many users expressed frustration at how Google placed ads around their personal communications in Gmail. Since then, the company has further mastered this advertising technique.

Google’s rivals couldn’t miss the opportunity to turn the controversial innovation against the Internet giant. In November 2012, Microsoft accused Google Shopping of delivering search results based not on relevance, but according to the amount the web stores pay to promote their goods. As an alternative, Microsoft proposed its own Bing Shopping search engine, a partner of eBay-owned Shopping.com.

On February 6, 2013, Microsoft launched an aggressive anti-Google marketing campaign with the website Scroogled.com, which lashes out at Google’s questionable business practices. “Think Google respects your privacy? Think again,” Scroogled.com says, pointing out that “Google goes through every Gmail that’s sent or received, looking for keywords so they can target Gmail users with paid ads.”

Microsoft’s campaign is part of its efforts to promote its own Outlook email service, which Microsoft maintains does not violate users’ privacy. Microsoft has also asked users to sign a petition to stop Google from going through personal emails to sell ads. The company’s counter-campaign came after the web giant announced its Gmail service reached 425 million active monthly users in June 2012, surpassing Hotmail to become the world’s largest email service.

Screenshot from www.scroogled.com

‘Using Gmail is your own choice’

Russia’s leading web companies that own mail services prefer to keep a safe distance from anything that could be construed as inspecting personal emails.

Russian internet giant Yandex believes that such privacy intrusion only irritates clients. And Mail.ru Group President Aleksey Katkov told Izvestia that his company does not use information from personal correspondences “for a number of reasons… We believe that kind of targeting [clients] is less effective than our own technologies,” Katkov said.

Russian MP Ilya Kostunov, an IT security expert, does not doubt that Google has violated correspondence secrecy laws: “Well, Internet companies do collect information about the users — but they do not read personal e-mails. I’m going to address to FAS so that they clear out if this is deceptive trade practice infringing the interests of Russian internet companies.”

Kostunov told Izvestia he is preparing legislation requiring civil servants to use only government webmail services for official correspondence, instead of using privately owned addresses registered at Gmail, Yandex or Mail.ru.

“I’d like to see inviolability of correspondence guaranteed by the state instead of Google,” he told Izvestia.

Kaspersky Lab Co-Founder and Director General of InfoWatch Natalya Kasperskaya also does not doubt that Google has broken the law, but explained that using Gmail is voluntary: “[Google’s Gmail] is free for anybody. Don’t like it — don’t use it. But if you do use it — be ready to be targeted with context ads. Your personal data is going to be combined with data from other Google services and analyzed. [Google Maps] will suggest your whereabouts. The photos of you and your relatives will be found at Picasa [Google’s photo hosting]. Your friends and acquaintances will be tracked via Google+ [social network], your preferences can be tracked by your web inquiries. The number of your credit card will be known when you pay on Android market. The more Google services you use — the less privacy you have left.”

Frontrunning: March 12

0
  • Cardinals head to conclave to elect pope for troubled Church (Reuters)
  • Hyperinflation ‘Unthinkable’ Even With Bold Easing: Abe (Nikkei)
  • Ryan Plan Revives ’12 Election Issues (WSJ)
  • Republicans to unveil $4.6tn of cuts (FT) – Obama set to dismiss Ryan plan to balance budget within decade
  • Italy 1-yr debt costs highest since Dec after downgrade (Reuters)
  • CIA Ramps Up Role in Iraq (WSJ)
  • Hollande Hostility Fuels Charm Offensive to Show He’s No Sarkozy (BBG)
  • SEC testing customized punishments (Reuters)
  • Judge Cans Soda Ban (WSJ)
  • Hungary Lawmakers Rebuff EU, U.S. (WSJ)
  • Even Berlusconi Can’t Slow Bulls Boosting Euro View (BBG) – luckily the consensus is never wrong
  • Funding for Lending ‘put on steroids’ (FT)
  • Investigators Narrow Focus in Dreamliner Probe (WSJ)
  • With new group, Obama team seeks answer to Karl Rove (Reuters)
  • Boston Booms as Workers Say No to Suburbs (BBG)

Overnight Media Digest

WSJ

* Illinois settled Securities and Exchange Commission civil-fraud charges that the state misled municipal-bond investors by failing to adequately disclose the risks of its underfunded pension system.

* Lawmakers grilling Mary Jo White, President Barack Obama’s nominee for chairman of the Securities and Exchange Commission, on Tuesday will have to weigh two seemingly contradictory versions of the attorney.

* U.S. aviation safety investigators examining Boeing Co’s 787 Dreamliner increasingly are focusing on manufacturing or design problems with the batteries as possible causes of overheating rather than on other parts of the jet’s electrical system, the head of the National Transportation Safety Board said on Monday.

* Starr International Co, run by the former chief executive of American International Group Inc, won the right to pursue as a class action its case against the U.S. government, alleging that elements of AIG’s financial-crisis bailout package were unconstitutional.

* A crisis of confidence in the nuclear-power industry has trickled down to Namibia, where uranium accounts for 12 percent of exports. But uranium prices are down 70 percent over the past six years.

* General Motors Co is in the process of changing advertising agencies of its Cadillac brand. Advertising and marketing work to support Cadillac, valued at about $250 million, will be moved to longtime Michigan advertising agency Campbell Ewald, according to three people briefed on the matter.

* The monopoly powers of Mexico’s telephone giant, América Móvil SAB de CV and leading broadcaster Grupo Televisa SAB, are coming under fire with a broad set of new laws that aim to open up the telecommunications and television businesses to competition.

* Many small U.S. banks are feeling a financial pinch from the government’s efforts to punish executives and directors of banks that collapsed during the height of the financial crisis.

* KKR & Co LP is considering teaming with other private equity firms to pursue biotech firm Life Technologies Corp, according to people familiar with the matter, in the latest sign that buyout shops are still willing to form “clubs” if they covet a large target.

* VeriFone Systems Inc Chief Executive Douglas Bergeron is stepping down after a dozen years at the helm of the card-payment systems maker. The company said it will hire an executive-search firm to find a successor, with Chairman Richard McGinn serving as CEO on an interim basis.

FT

Dell Inc has agreed to give Carl Icahn a closer look at its books less than a week after the activist investor joined a growing chorus of opposition to founder Michael Dell’s plan to take the world’s No. 3 personal computer maker private.

Private equity firms are looking to buy the UK property business of Germany’s second-biggest lender, Commerzbank AG, in a potential 5 billion pound ($7.45 billion) deal.

UK lender LLoyds Banking Group plans to sell 20 percent of its stake in wealth manager St James’s Place

Alibaba Group has chosen Jonathan Lu, its Chief Data Officer who has more than a decade of experience in executive roles, to lead China’s largest e-commerce company as it prepares to launch an initial public offering.

Italy’s central bank has told some of the country’s biggest banks to increase their bad loan provisions by an estimated 21 billion euros ($27.33 billion) amid deepening of a nearly two-year old recession.

Billionaire hedge fund manager John Paulson is exploring moving to Puerto Rico from New York to lower his tax bill.

Richard Joseph, a former futures trader, was convicted of six counts of insider trading, leaking information from the print room at JPMorgan Cazenove. Joseph placed spread bets with CMC Markets ahead of a series of deals in 2007 and 2008.

Mexico is looking to overhaul its telecom industry by introducing sweeping proposals that will increase competition and limit the control of telecoms tycoon Carlos Slim and broadcasting giant Televisa.

NYT

* For the second time in history, federal regulators have accused an American state of securities fraud, finding that Illinois misled investors about the condition of its public pension system from 2005 to 2009.

* A state court judge invalidated New York City’s new restrictions on sweetened beverages on Monday, a day before they were set to take effect, saying the rules were “arbitrary and capricious.”

* Britain, unlike other economic powers, is responding to the financial crisis by creating two new agencies, one to oversee institutions and another to watch for market abuses.

* In advance of a summit meeting of European Union leaders on Thursday in Brussels, the president of the European Commission, José Manuel Barroso, called on the bloc’s 17 members to stay the course on austerity.

* Intrade, the online betting site, announced late on Sunday that it had halted trading and frozen customer accounts after the discovery of potential financial irregularities.

* Oppenheimer & Co will pay nearly $3 million to settle accusations by federal and state regulators that it misled investors about the performance of one of its private equity funds, in a case that signals stepped-up scrutiny of the buyout industry and how it values its holdings.

* Dell Inc has agreed to open its books to the activist investor Carl Icahn, signaling a possible truce on one front in the battle over the computer maker’s proposed $24.4 billion buyout.

* In prepared testimony for her nomination hearing, Mary Jo White placed a premium on unearthing financial fraud, as she works to deflect concerns from lawmakers who question her ability to regulate banks she recently defended.

* British authorities have opened an investigation into Hewlett-Packard Co’s claims that it was duped when it bought the business software maker Autonomy, according to regulatory documents filed on Monday.

Canada

THE GLOBE AND MAIL

* Ottawa and the Northwest Territories have reached a deal to hand the territory province-like power over its land, a move aimed at empowering local leaders to unlock more of their resource riches.

* Less than a third of the almost 300,000 members and supporters who signed up to choose the Liberal party’s next leader have so far registered to vote, prompting front-runner Justin Trudeau’s camp to complain about a host of technical glitches and request a one-week extension on registration.

* The federal government is facing questions over the legitimacy of its centerpiece for aboriginal education reform. Manitoba chiefs rejected the Harper government’s vision for aboriginal education on Monday, claiming Ottawa is trying to “bypass” first nations chiefs and shirk its treaty responsibilities.

Reports in the business section:

* Chrysler Canada is jumping back into leasing for the first time since 2008, raising the competitive stakes another notch in an auto market already awash with financing and leasing incentives.

* AT&T Inc will begin selling BlackBerry’s new BlackBerry Z10 smartphone next week, marking the smartphone’s debut in a crucial U.S. market that has largely shunned the company’s devices in recent years.

* Molson Coors Brewing Co’s Canadian arm sold far less Miller Genuine Draft beer in the country over the past three years than the targets called for under its agreement with Miller Brewing Co. That under-performance – spelled out in court filings – is at the crux of a dispute that has erupted between the two companies, as Miller tries to cancel its Canadian licensing agreement with Molson.

NATIONAL POST

* The federal government, which has come under fire over tougher employment insurance (EI) rules, is sweetening benefits for parents. It says it will allow individuals receiving parental benefits through EI to qualify for sickness benefits as well, starting March 24.

* The latest annual report on federal ad spending shows Ottawa shelled out C$78.5 million ($76.5 million) in 2011-12 telling Canadians about everything from the switch to digital TV and the War of 1812, to elder abuse and anti-drug messaging. The Harper government spent C$21 million on major advertising campaigns under its Economic Action Plan brand.

* Despite activist claims that the city’s homeless are dying due to a lack of shelter space, there is no shelter bed shortage in Toronto, according to an internal report prepared for city council.

FINANCIAL POST

* After years of growth, economists say the real estate boom is over and predict Canadian housing prices to flatline over the next decade. A TD Economics study, Long-Run Rate of Return for Canadian Home Prices, predicts a “string of lackluster performances” over the next few years.

* Alamos Gold Inc is going on the offensive in the takeover battle for Aurizon Mines Ltd, asking a securities regulator to reject both a break fee and poison pill that it believes are highly irregular.

* Travel tour operator Transat AT Inc said it has managed to wrest concessions from its flight attendants as the company continues its campaign to be more cost competitive. The bulk of the expected C$9 million in annual savings will come from Transat lowering the amount of flight attendants on its Airbus A330s to 10 from 11, and the move will also support a potential shift to a fleet of Boeing Co’s 737s.

China

SECURITIES TIMES

— Huatai Securities said on Tuesday its board of directors had sanctioned the issuance of no more than 10 billion yuan of corporate bonds on the Shanghai Stock Exchange to supplement operating funds.

— The Shanghai securities regulator said five foreign banks, including Standard Chartered, have applied for licences to distribute mutual fund products in China.

CHINA SECURITIES JOURNAL

— The Shanghai stock exchange is looking to invest more in regional stock exchanges to support smaller firms in China, its director general said on Monday.

CHINA DAILY

— China’s first special envoy for Asian affairs will have a focus on Myanmar, the Foreign Ministry said on Monday. There has been tension between China and its southern neighbour over conflict in Myanmar, close to the Chinese border.

— Roughly one in ten of the 5,000 proposals submitted to China’s top political advisory body since March 3 are related to environmental issues, said Lu Fuhe, a top national political advisor.

SHANGHAI DAILY

— French firm Carrefour, the world’s number two retailer, has implemented a system to allow shoppers to trace the origin of fruit and vegetables in their Chinese stores in Shanghai, a reflection of the recent pressure in China over food safety.

CHINA BUSINESS NEWS

— The number of dead pigs found in the Huangpu River, one of Shanghai’s key water sources, is now estimated to have increased to 2,800.

Fly On The Wall 7:00 AM Market Snapshot

ANALYST RESEARCH

Upgrades

Axiall (AXLL) upgraded to Buy from Neutral at Citigroup
Dick’s Sporting (DKS) upgraded to Outperform from Market Perform at BMO Capital
Dick’s Sporting (DKS) upgraded to Conviction Buy from Buy at Goldman
Intercontinental Hotels (IHG) upgraded to Neutral from Sell at UBS
Mosaic (MOS) upgraded to Outperform from Market Perform at BMO Capital
Sherwin-Williams (SHW) upgraded to Neutral from Underperform at Credit Suisse
Vantiv (VNTV) upgraded to Outperform from Market Perform at Raymond James
Vitamin Shoppe (VSI) upgraded to Buy from Neutral at Goldman

Downgrades

CVS Caremark (CVS) downgraded to Neutral from Buy at Goldman
EverBank Financial (EVER) downgraded to Neutral from Buy at Sterne Agee
RadioShack (RSH) downgraded to Sell from Neutral at Goldman
Red Hat (RHT) downgraded to Neutral from Buy at Citigroup

Initiations

Fifth & Pacific (FNP) initiated with a Buy at Brean Capital
Rush Enterprises (RUSHA) initiated with a Market Perform at BMO Capital
TJX (TJX) initiated with an Overweight at Barclays
Wabash (WNC) initiated with an Outperform at BMO Capital
WABCO (WBC) initiated with an Outperform at BMO Capital
Xoom (XOOM) initiated with an Outperform at RW Baird
Xoom (XOOM) initiated with an Overweight at Barclays

HOT STOCKS

SEC charged Illinois for misleading pension disclosures
Treasury Department sold $489.9M of GM (GM) common stock in February
HP (HPQ) disclosed U.K Serious Fraud Office opened investigation related to Autonomy
KKR (KKR) has considered teaming to bid for Life Technologies (LIFE), and Thermo Fisher (TMO) and Danaher (DHR) also weigh bids for Life, valued at $12.5B with debt, DJ reports
Diamond Foods (DMND) sees second half sales down more than first half
Rio Tinto (RIO) slowed Guinea iron ore investment, to cut staff, Reuters reports
Said Guinea iron ore project not frozen, to work with government on funding, Bloomberg reports
Hill International (HIL) sees FY13 consulting fee revenue $500M-$520M
Cadence Design (CDNS) acquired Tensilica for $380M in cash
Pall Corp (PLL) signed 30 year agreement to supply Embraer (ERJ) with KC-390 manifolds
MRC Global (MRC), NAWAH entered into alliance to open distribution facility in Iraq
Lakeland Industries (LAKE) reported $11.5M goodwill impairment charge in Brazil

EARNINGS

Companies that beat consensus earnings expectations last night and today include:
Costco (COST), BioScrip (BIOS), Stewart Enterprises (STEI), XenoPort (XNPT), Heckmann (HEK)

Companies that missed consensus earnings expectations include:
Stage Stores (SSI), FuelCell (FCEL), Chiquita Brands (CQB), Hill International (HIL), Casey’s General Stores (CASY), Urban Outfitters (URBN)

Companies that matched consensus earnings expectations include:
Douglas Dynamics (PLOW), Flow International (FLOW), Manitex (MNTX)

NEWSPAPERS/WEBSITES

  • Multinationals (GE, HPQ, CAT, HON) have been increasing their footprint in Asia for years as they have moved from selling into the region to also investing here. But the transformation is gaining critical mass as Western companies’ market-share leads in Asia over cash-flush local competitors narrow, forcing Western firms to invest more, tailor their products and transfer top executives to Asia, the Wall Street Journal reports
  • Rising fuel prices have GM (GM) and Chrysler Group (FIATY) taking another look at selling smaller pickup trucks–vehicles that the Detroit Three automakers (F) abandoned in the U.S. amid weak demand. Both see the vehicles helping them to hit higher fuel-economy targets and to regain market share from Toyota (TM), the current top-selling small hauler., the Wall Street Journal reports
  • Two groups of AIG (AIG) shareholders won class-action status from a federal judge on in a $25B lawsuit by former CEO Maurice “Hank” Greenberg over alleged losses caused by the U.S. government’s bailout of the insurer, Reuters reports
  • As the jobs market showing signs of healing, economists think they know what’s next for monetary policy: the Fed will at some point reduce its monthly bond purchases, and soon after, end them altogether. But perhaps they shouldn’t be so sure, Reuters reports
  • Shares of companies that own and operate their truck fleets (WERN, KNX, SWFT, HTLD) are outperforming those that act as brokers for trucking services, driven by stronger U.S. freight activity, Bloomberg reports
  • The Treasury Department, exiting its ownership stake in GM (GM), accelerated its sell- down of the automaker in February, saying it received $489.9M in proceeds from the sale of common shares, Bloomberg reports

SYNDICATE

Emeritus (ESC) announces 7.97M share secondary offering by holders
Government Properties (GOV) 9.95M share Spot Secondary priced at $25.20
HeartWare (HTWR) announces public offering of 1.5M shares of common stock
Lexington Realty (LXP) files to sell 15M shares of common stock
Salesforce.com (CRM) announces proposed $1B offering of convertible senior notes
Sapiens (SPNS) files to sell $40M of common stock, 6M shares for holders
Sun Communities (SUI) announces 4.5M share common stock offering
U.S. Silica (SLCA) announces 8.5M share secondary offering by stockholder
Yandex (YNDX) announces 24.25M Class A ordinary shares offering by holders

Your rating: None Average: 5 (1 vote)

Why Saving the Planet Means Saving the Economy, Too

0

Washington is obsessed with the deficit, and fixated on austerity. Boehner, McConnell and a chorus of know-nothing fear-mongers raise the issues of debt and deficits as if they were an imminent and substantial danger. Obama is sabotaging the social safety net in order to get a “grand bargain” so we can shrink the deficit. The press can talk about nothing else. As a nation, we’re being held hostage to a series of “hold-our-breath-until-we-turn-blue” ultimatums, all because of the deficit.What children can understand, but many politicians refuse to acknowledge…

Let’s be clear: the deficit is not our biggest problem right now. Climate change is. It isn’t even our biggest economic problem. A stagnating economy is. And–as the majority of economists have pointed out, and as the European experience clearly shows–austerity will only make our economy worse.

Yes, in a decade or so, if we do nothing, medical and retirement obligations will cause deficits to increase. But right now, the deficit is shrinking, and it is projected to keep shrinking until then.

Putting the long-term deficit ahead of the short-term economic stagnation we are experiencing is like putting money into a retirement account you won’t need for twenty years instead of fixing a massive hole in the roof of your house that’s letting in the rain. In short, it’s stupid.

Basically there are two ways to tackle the deficit. Grow our way out of it; or shrink our way out of it. In Greece, Spain, Italy, Portugal and Ireland we’re seeing the fruits of the “shrink your way out” strategy. Massive unemployment, decreased services, an overall smaller economy and at least for the short term, little or no effect on deficits due to reduced revenues.

On the other hand, here in the US, even with the modest economic gains we’ve experienced since Bush’s Great Recession, we are growing our way out of it.

Given this evidence, it is one of the great mysteries of the universe that Washington is obsessed with austerity. Well, actually, it isn’t. Republicans have been singing lead soprano in a bad musical written by self-interested fat cats and plutocrats like Pete Peterson, and Democrats and the press have been their willing castrato chorus for going on 30 years now. The real objective of the whole show? Killing off the remains of the New Deal and Great Society programs they love to hate.

But let’s get back to the real problems we face: a stagnating economy, and a climate in crisis. What if we could solve both with the same set of policies?

Well, we can.

To mitigate the worse effects of climate change we need massive investments in new energy and transportation infrastructure, a complete overhaul of our agriculture system, and dramatic improvements in the efficiency of our existing and new building stock. This level of investment would, in turn, kick start an economic boom, just as the transition to fossil fuels did more than a century ago.

Here’s why.

First, mature industries like oil development and coal mining have done what every smart industry does — they’ve cut labor wherever they can, because labor is one of the most expensive aspects of production. That’s the main reason the number of jobs per ton of coal produced, for example, has plummeted over time. In fact, a variety of studies prove that clean energy investments produce more jobs per dollar spent and megawatt produced than investments in fossil fuels do. So investing in fossil fuel infrastructure is, on net, a job killer when viewed across the entire economy.

What’s this got to do with the deficit? To understand this, you have to understand why the economy tanked. Popular versions of this story attribute it to the collapse in housing prices and the cascading effect this had on consumers and securities. And while that’s true, fundamentally the real-estate collapse was only a symptom.

The real problem was that for most of America, wages had been stagnant for 30 years. As a result, consumers were bankrolling their lifestyle with debt and using the transitory and self-reinforcing equity bubble in real estate as an ATM. So, the root problems were flat wages and an over-leveraged market, both caused by deregulation.

And why were wages flat? Laissez faire policies favoring corporate interests over people’s interests. Things like anti-union laws, frozen minimum wages, tax subventions that encouraged the export of jobs to low-wage countries … the list is long and the tale of greed it tells, sad.

Trickle down was the ultimate dirty trick. An economy grows because consumers demand products. But with over 40% of our national wealth owned by only 1% of the population, and 80% of the people owning just 7% of the wealth, there weren’t enough consumers to fuel our economy. That was a key cause of our economic collapse in 2008; it’s the reason our economy is stagnating now; and it’s the reason austerity and trickle down won’t work. It’s the reason Obama’s acceptance of deficits as our most pressing problem and his search for a “Grand Bargain” is stupid economics, morally bankrupt and bad politics to boot.

But what if the demand for jobs — fueled by a complete overhaul of our economy to make it less carbon intensive and less destructive to the climate — increased dramatically? Well, then workers would have more leverage; wages would go up; demand for goods, products and services would go up; the economy would boom; tax revenues would go up; and the deficit would go down.

Oh, and by the way, we might just save civilization, as we know it.

Corporate-Approved State Bills Kick Low-Wage Workers While They’re Down

0

President Obama called for a modest raise in the federal minimum wage to $9 in his State of the Union Address, and several Democratic legislators have upped his bid with a proposed increase to $10.10.Prevailing wage laws, which protect local construction sector workers from private sector undercutting, are the kind of legislation that ALEC-affiliated state legislation would dismantle. (Photo: Rubber Dragon / Flickr / Creative Commons)

But an insidious effort to lower the wage floor is already underway much closer to the ground–in the state legislatures where right-wing lobbyists have been greasing the skids for years for an onslaught of anti-worker policies.

An extensive analysis recently published by labor advocacy organization the National Employment Law Project tracks more than 100 bills introduced in 31 states since January 2011 that “aim to repeal or weaken core wage standards at the state or local level.” Each bears the fingerprint of notorious super-lobbying organization the American Legislative Exchange Council (ALEC), which acts as a forum for “private sector leaders” to advise public officials. Most of the anti-worker bills were proposed by lawmakers directly linked to ALEC and include language that echoes that of “model legislation” developed by ALEC. Among the proposals are measures to undercut minimum wages for teenage workers, restrict overtime pay and repeal or ban local laws to improve working conditions.

ALEC has been called out by activists for pushing legislation that advances a classic right-wing agenda, from school privatization to rolling back healthcare reform. But the “wage suppression” tactics are a particularly callous attempt by ALEC-affiliated legislators to feed corporate profits by starving workers.

The wage-suppression laws are the latest strike in a war of attrition waged by ALEC and “private sector leaders” (as the organization calls them) against labor and workplace rights, aimed at forcing low-wage workers into even deeper economic insecurity.

While efforts to pass pro-worker policies in Washington have met with resistance, ALEC-sponsored bills seek to outlaw protections for workers at the state and local level, such as living wage ordinances and paid leave mandates. In several states, including Arizona, Connecticut, Maryland and Michigan, lawmakers have introduced ALEC-associated legislation to preempt prevailing wage laws, which ensure workers receive relatively fair wages in government-contracted work, including the public infrastructure projects that fuel local construction sectors.

NELP points out that only a minority of these bills have actually been enacted, but the sheer volume of anti-worker legislative proposals is nonetheless alarming at a time when the labor movement, which has traditionally struggled to beat back pro-corporate legislation, is weaker than ever. 

The ALEC-inspired bills to weaken state minimum wage laws strike directly at state’s efforts to lift workers above the absurdly low federal minimum of $7.25 an hour. Some states have set base wages significantly higher than the federal minimum–like Vermont’s minimum hourly wage of $8.60, adjusted automatically to keep pace with the cost of living.

Losing the state minimum wage could leave some workers completely unprotected, because they are excluded from the federal Fair Labor Standards Act (FLSA). Home health aides, for example, have long been exempted from federal minimum-wage rules, despite strong grassroots campaigns to include them, but are covered by minimum wage law in some states, including New York and Massachussetts. Their incredibly low wages–typically less than $10 an hour across the industry–could be bumped down further if state wage floors are ripped from under them.
Overtime pay is another labor issue on which states have filled gaps in federal law. While the FLSA guarantees time-and-a-half overtime pay for many sectors, some low-wage workers, including certain federally-exempted domestic service jobs, are entitled to that wage boost only under state law. Legislators in some states–including the “right to work” battlegrounds of Ohio and Michigan, where unions are under siege–have tried to allow certain employers to get around overtime by instead paying workers “comp time,” or time off equal to one regular hour of work, even if they work more than 40 hours a week. One ALEC-affiliated bill proposed in 2011 in Nevada explicitly sought to exclude home care workers from overtime laws.

Noting that conservatives will hold majority control of most state houses this year, NELP analyst Jack Temple says, “Since legislation to raise the federal minimum wage usually depends on momentum from the states, bills like these that weaken or repeal wage standards at the state level serve to undercut the momentum needed to pass national legislation in Congress.”

The measures to prevent local officials from raising the bar for workers betrays ALEC’s underlying agenda. Though the organization purports to champion the “rights” of local authorities to act independently of “big government,” NELP reports, it’s really more about emancipating big business from regulation:

Despite ALEC’s putative support for limited government and local sovereignty, living wage preemption proposals would establish state-wide mandates that severely restrict the freedom that city governments have to set standards for businesses that receive public support.

According to Temple, with so many wage-suppression bills clogging state legislatures, even if many do not pass:

The significance of these bills for advocates at the state level concerns the sheer amount of energy and time that must be spent fighting back bills like these, which drains the time and resources that could otherwise be dedicated to improving wage standards rather than just protecting the laws already on the books.

A bill creeping through the Florida legislature seems poised to undercut emerging efforts to improve workers’ lives. HB 655 would ban towns and cities from taking local initiatives to raise wages and give workers paid leave time, thus blocking key policies that could improve the lives of workers surviving on the state’s threadbare minimum wage of $7.79 (about a third of what a single parent of two would need to earn a decent living). On the heels of a recent campaign, led by local labor groups, to establish paid sick days in Miami-Dade County, the bill would effectively block local officials from granting workers the basic protection of not having to lose wages for calling in sick.

Florida is just one battleground in a nationwide movement to improve protections and wage standards for the working poor, as labor advocates push for raises in state and federal minimum wages in tandem with the White House’s proposal. But NELP’s report reveals how groups like ALEC have already gotten a head start in our state legislatures. 

Without strong unions or even an adequate social safety net, minimum wage laws are the last line of defense between low-wage workers and abject poverty. So it makes sense that ALEC is now driving to pull the floor from under them; they might as well kick them when they’re down.

China’s “Hogwash” Getting Worse As Floating Dead Pigs Rise To 3300, Pig Virus Found

0

When we first reported on China’s “hogwash” yesterday, the number of floating pigs in Shanghai’s water supplying Huangpu River was a “modest” 1200. It has since tripled to 3300. From SCMP: “The agriculture and environmental protection departments in Shanghai’s Songjiang district have pulled more than 3,300 dead pigs out of the Huangpu River, which flows through the municipality, in the past week.” What is worse is that at least one pig-related virus has been found in a water sample: “Porcine circovirus, a common hog disease that is not known to be infectious to humans, was found in a sample taken from the water, Shanghai’s animal disease control department was quoted as saying by eastday.com a major Shanghai news portal.” The good news is that tests by the Shanghai Animal Disease Prevention and Control Centre on five sets of internal organs taken from the dead pigs has ruled out five other diseases including foot-and-mouth, hog cholera and blue-ear. Of course, this is China, whose disclosure record is second only to Japan, where as a reminder the government said the radiation level was under control days after the Fukushima explosion, even as the reality was far grimmer.

More from SCMP:

The website quoted local water and environmental authorities as saying tests of water samples collected from six sites on the river showed that the poor water quality on the Songjiang district section of the Huangpu, a source of drinking water for Shanghai, was similar to the same period last year.

However, it said tap water from water suppliers in Songjiang and several neighbouring districts was in line with national standards.

According to the dead pigs’ ear labels, most of them floated down the river from Jiaxing, Zhejiang. Some were also from Pinghu in Zhejiang or from neighbouring Jiangsu province, xinmin.cn quoted a staff member at the Songjiang District Agricultural Commission as saying.

China News Service quoted an official from Zhejiang’s provincial agricultural department as saying that most of the dead pigs were young and they had died at least a month ago. He said that instead of dying from illness, most had died due to cold weather, even though average temperatures in Jiaxing in winter are above zero degrees Celsius.

The district government has asked for help from the municipal government for centralised treatmeant of the carcasses because there were too many for it to handle, the website said.

The Jiaxing Daily, the Communist Party’s newspaper in Jiaxing, said the casual disposal of dead pigs was common in the Zhejiang city.

A report in the newspaper on Monday of last week said it had received many complaints from readers about dead pigs.

Expect to read some more about this dead pig onslaught, before the local media quietly but forecfully is told to end all coverage of this latest food-related scandal.

Your rating: None

Austerity and the Death of Logic

0

Context: As yet there are no context links for this item.

Transcript

JESSICA DESVARIEUX, PRODUCER, TRNN: Welcome to The Real News Network. I’m Jessica Desvarieux in Baltimore. And now it’s time for our weekly Bill Black report.

Bill Black is an associate professor of economics and law at the University of Missouri—Kansas City. He’s a white-collar criminologist and former financial regulator. He is the author of The Best Way to Rob a Bank Is to Own One. And he’s a regular contributor to The Real News. Welcome, Bill.BILL BLACK, ASSOC. PROF. ECONOMICS AND LAW, UMKC: Thank you.DESVARIEUX: So, Bill, what do you have for us this week?BLACK: I have report from the absolute silly season. So this is the complete death of logic and sense by pretty much everybody involved who are the serious people in Washington, D.C., who seem determined to screw up our economy royally. So here, to review the bidding, this is what we’ve got. We have the Republicans, and the Republicans hate everything European. Everything European is as�you know, it’s a laugh line, it’s a derisive line and such, except austerity. So they take the one policy that everybody can see has produced a disaster in Europe, thrown the Eurozone back into recession, and is potentially even going to tear the European Union apart, is going to cause government after government to fall, and they say, that’s the policy we need in the United States, we need to emulate Europe, and with no discussion that maybe that’s insane. So that’s the Republican version of insanity. Then we have the White House version of insanity. And the White House version of insanity is: austerity bad–would cause the United States to go back into recession, and therefore sequester terrible–not only forces us back into recession, but causes us to cut all kinds of great programs. So what do we see out of the White House? We have the Conyers bill. And Representative Conyers has this very intelligent bill. It is the most wonderful thing in Washington, D.C. It is literally one sentence. And the bill says: the sequester is repealed. Right? And they will not–the administration will not support this. And this is what I’ve been talking about. This really is smoking out the true intentions of the White House. And what you’re seeing time after time, now expressly, is that the president wants to cut the safety net, wants to cut Social Security, wants to cut Medicare, wants to cut public programs. Indeed, he wants to cut public programs in comparison to raising taxes at a ratio of two to one–in other words, $2 of spending cuts for every increase of $1 in taxes. But all of that’s insane. We don’t want to cut spending. We don’t want to net increase taxes now. That’s how you throw millions of people out of work. Meanwhile, we get almost complete silence about the real crisis in America, which is an employment crisis, where we have well over 10�million people who want to work full time, who are able to work full time, but we don’t provide them with any work.DESVARIEUX: Bill, so how is this playing out in mainstream media? Specifically, MSNBC, some people call it, you know, the right hand of the White House. How are they playing this whole sequestration?BLACK: Well, pretty clearly in the nighttime ones it is just exceptionally pro this administration, whether or not it makes any sense. So MSNBC is simultaneously saying all these things. One, it’s saying: sequestration disastrous, austerity disastrous. And support the president; he wants a balanced package. What is that a balanced package of? It’s a balanced package of austerity. It’s a balanced package of austerity plus cuts to the safety net, which, you know, 15�minutes ago, in media terms, MSNBC was railing against, I think quite appropriately and such. So it is the silly season everywhere you look. And Dean Baker has a spectacular column that people should read that basically says this is because the president simply will not tell the truth to the American people. The truth to the American people is, if anything, the deficit is too small. We’ve been doing one measure of austerity after another since mid 2011. And you can see what’s happened to the recovery in jobs. It has strangled the recovery. It’s time to stop shooting ourself in the foot and above. But right now that’s not where we’re headed. So, you know, I will channel my mother’s side of the family, the Irish side, and, you know, wish everyone an early St.�Patrick’s Day. It is, again, the most important holiday of the year.DESVARIEUX: And thank you for joining us on The Real News Network.

End

DISCLAIMER: Please note that transcripts for The Real News Network are typed from a recording of the program. TRNN cannot guarantee their complete accuracy.


Comments

Our automatic spam filter blocks comments with multiple links and multiple users using the same IP address. Please make thoughtful comments with minimal links using only one user name. If you think your comment has been mistakenly removed please email us at contact@therealnews.com

Please enable JavaScript to view the comments powered by Disqus.

Harper’s Venezuela Insult Shows Right Ideology Trumping Canadian Interest

0

Context: As yet there are no context links for this item.

Bio

Yves Engler is a Canadian commentator and author. His most recent book is The Ugly Canadian – Stephen Harper’s Foreign Policy, and previously he published The Black Book of Canadian Foreign Policy and Canada in Haiti: Waging War on The Poor Majority

Comments

Our automatic spam filter blocks comments with multiple links and multiple users using the same IP address. Please make thoughtful comments with minimal links using only one user name. If you think your comment has been mistakenly removed please email us at contact@therealnews.com

Please enable JavaScript to view the comments powered by Disqus.

Rally Against Deportations in Phoenix

0

Context: As yet there are no context links for this item.

Bio

Oscar León is an experienced international press correspondent and documentary filmmaker based in Arizona. His work has reached continental TV broadcast in many occasions on Telesur, ECTV, Ecuavisa, Radio Canada, Canal Uno and even Fox Sports Latin America and El Garaje TV; he has been a TRNN correspondent since 2010. Oscar has reported from as many as 9 countries and more than 12 cities in US; his coverage includes TV reports, special reports and TV specials, not only covering social movements, politics and economics but environmental issues, culture and sports as well. This includes the series “Reportero del Sur”, “Occupy USA – El Otoño Americano”, “Habia una vez en Arizona”, “Motor X” all TV mini series broadcasted to all Americas and “Once upon a time in Arizona” finalist in Radio Canada’s “Migration” 2010 contest.

Comments

Our automatic spam filter blocks comments with multiple links and multiple users using the same IP address. Please make thoughtful comments with minimal links using only one user name. If you think your comment has been mistakenly removed please email us at contact@therealnews.com

Please enable JavaScript to view the comments powered by Disqus.

If Corporations Don’t Pay Taxes, Why Should You?

0

Go offshore young man and avoid paying taxes. Plunder at will in those foreign lands, and if you get in trouble, Uncle Sam will come rushing to your assistance, diplomatically, financially and militarily, even if you have managed to avoid paying for those government services. Just pretend you’re a multinational corporation.

That’s the honest instruction for business success provided by 60 of the largest U.S. corporations that, according to a Wall Street Journal analysis, “parked a total of $166 billion offshore last year” shielding more than 40 percent of their profits from U.S. taxes. They all do it, including Microsoft, GE and pharmaceutical giant Abbott Laboratories. Many, like GE, are so good at it that they have avoided taxes altogether in some recent years. 

But they all still expect Uncle Sam to come to their aid with military firepower in case the natives abroad get restless and nationalize their company’s assets. We still have a blockade against Cuba because Fidel Castro more than a half century ago dared seize an American-owned telephone company. During that same period, we have consistently intervened to maintain the lock of U.S. corporations on the world’s resources, continuing to the present task of making Iraq and Libya safe for our oil companies. 

America’s multinational corporations still need the Navy to protect shipping lanes and the Commerce Department to safeguard U.S. copyrights. They also expect the Federal Reserve and Treasury Department to intervene to provide bailouts and cheap money when the corporate financial swindlers get into trouble, like GE, which almost went aground when its GE Capital financial wing got caught in the great banking meltdown. 

They want a huge U.S. government to finance scientific breakthroughs, educate the future workforce, sustain the infrastructure and provide for law and order on the home front, but they just don’t feel they should have to pay for a system of governance, even though it primarily serves their corporate interests. The U.S. government exists primarily to make the world safe for multinational corporations, but those firms feel no obligation to pay for that protection in return.

Think of that perfectly legal and widespread racket when you go to pay your taxes in the next weeks, and consider that you have to make up the gap left by the big boys’ antics. Also, when you contemplate the painful cuts coming because of the sequester that undoubtedly will further destabilize the economy, remember that, as the Wall Street Journal estimated, the tax savings of just 19 of those companies would more than cover the $85 billion in spending reductions triggered by the congressional budget impasse.

The most skilled at this con game are the health care and technology companies, which, as a Senate investigation last year revealed, have become quite expert at shifting marketing rights and patents offshore to low-tax countries. Microsoft boosted its foreign holdings by $16 billion last year, and by the end of the company’s fiscal year on June 30, 2012, had $60.8 billion stashed internationally. Through creative accounting, Microsoft was able to claim that only 7 percent of its pretax profit last year was domestically generated.

Oracle increased its foreign holdings by one-third, including new subsidiaries in low-tax Ireland, and thereby was able to add a cool $272 million to the company’s bottom line by avoiding U.S. taxes. Abbott estimates that it saved $1.6 billion in U.S. taxes through its operations in more than a dozen countries. By moving $8.1 billion of its profits overseas, Abbott was able to claim a pretax loss on its U.S. operations. Johnson & Johnson, another health industry giant, has almost all of its cash–$14.8 billion out of $14.9 billion–abroad, yet still claims to be a U.S. company. 

One of the longtime leaders in offshore tax avoidance has been that once-American-as-apple-pie company GE, which in a more innocent time hired Ronald Reagan to advertise its wares. Now GE has nearly two-thirds of its jobs abroad, avoided U.S. taxes in the previous two years and has $108 billion stashed overseas.

Two years ago, President Obama appointed GE CEO Jeffrey Immelt to chair his Jobs Council, despite the fact that Immelt had cut his company’s U.S. workforce by a fifth. GE’s expertise is no longer in appliance manufacturing, a division Immelt has tried to shed, but rather in financial manipulation. 

GE Capital was a leader in the financial scams that still haunt the U.S. economy, and Immelt has been most effective in lobbying Washington politicians to rig the tax laws to benefit his and other multinational corporations. He has created some jobs, but unfortunately, they are abroad, along with his company’s untaxed profits. 

For all these multinational corporations, the love of profit trumps loyalty to country.

© 2013 TruthDig.com

US threatens Pakistan with sanctions over Iran gas pipeline

0

Published time: March 12, 2013 10:11

Irani workers weld the pipeline during a groundbreaking ceremony to mark the inauguration of the Iran-Pakistan gas pipeline, in the city of Chahbahar in southeastern Iran March 11, 2013. (Reuters/Jason Lee)

The US has threatened Islamabad with sanctions over Pakistan’s partnership with Iran to construct a section of a gas pipeline. Washington said that the much-delayed $7.5-billion project violates sanctions on Iran, a claim denied by Pakistan.

Iran and Pakistan expect the completed pipeline will deliver 21.5 million cubic meters (760,000 million cubic feet) of gas per day to Pakistan from its giant offshore South Pars field in the Persian Gulf by December 2014.

Iranian contractors will construct the pipeline, which crosses Pakistani territory. Tehran has agreed to lend Islamabad $500 million, one-third of the estimated $1.5 billion cost of the 750-kilometer pipeline, according to Fars news agency.

After Iranian President Mahmoud Ahmadinejad and his Pakistani counterpart Asif Ali Zardari launched the project on Monday on the Iran-Pakistan Border, the US threatened to respond with sanctions if the project “actually goes forward.”

“We have serious concerns if this project actually goes forward that the Iran Sanctions Act would be triggered,” State Department spokesperson Victoria Nuland said, commenting on the so-called ‘peace pipeline.’

Iran has completed 900 kilometers of the pipeline’s segment on its side of the border with Pakistan. Monday’s ceremony marked the beginning of work on the Pakistani segment, which will start at the Iranian town of Chahbahar near the border.

“We’ve heard this pipeline announced about 10 or 15 times before in the past. So we have to see what actually happens,” Nuland said.

Iran's President Mahmoud Ahmadinejad (L) shakes hands with his Pakistani counterpart Asif Ali Zardari during a groundbreaking ceremony to mark the inauguration of the Iran-Pakistan gas pipeline, in the city of Chahbahar in southeastern Iran March 11, 2013. (Reuters/Mian Khursheed)

Conceived in 1990s, the project initially involved Iran, Pakistan and India. However, India pulled out of the project in 2009, citing cost and security issues. The United States has persistently opposed Pakistani and Indian involvement in the project, insisting it would violate sanctions against Iran over its controversial nuclear activity.

Nuland reiterated that the US is working to increase Pakistan’s energy supplies through other means: “This pipeline project, if it actually goes forward — we’ve seen that promise many times — would take Pakistan in the wrong direction right at a time that we’re trying to work with Pakistan on better, more reliable ways to meet its energy needs.”

The US is “supporting large-scale energy projects in Pakistan that will add some 900 megawatts to the power grid by the end of 2013,” she added.

Pakistan sees the pipeline as a way of easing severe energy shortages, which have sparked demonstrations and battered a weak government. At the same time, Islamabad needs the financial aid it receives from the US.  

In response to Washington’s threats of sanctions, President Ahmadinejad accused “foreign elements” of using Iran’s nuclear program as a pretext to thwart Iran-Pakistan relations, saying they have no grounds to oppose the pipeline project since it deals with natural gas.  

“With natural gas you cannot make atomic bombs. That’s why they should have no excuse to oppose this pipeline,” Reuters reported, quoting a translation of a televised statement by Ahmadinejad. “I want to tell those individuals that the gas pipeline has no connection whatsoever with the nuclear case.”

Irani workers stand near as a security helicopter lands near the pipeline during a groundbreaking ceremony to mark the inauguration of the Iran-Pakistan gas pipeline, in the city of Chahbahar in southeastern Iran March 11, 2013. (Reuters/Mian Khursheed)

The Iran-Pakistan pipeline could undermine US hegemony in the Middle East and South Asia, Eric Draitser, an independent geopolitical analyst and founder of StopImperialism.com wrote for RT: “The pipeline brings the two countries closer together and, in so doing, helps to solidify a relationship united by a common mistrust of the US.”

Anthony Skinner, director of British-based Maplecroft risks consultancy, echoed the idea that Pakistan wants to show its place on the international stage by daring to make decisions that “defy the US.”

“The Pakistani government wants to show it is willing to take foreign policy decisions that defy the US,” Skinner said, according to Reuters. “The pipeline not only caters to Pakistan’s energy needs, but also lodges brownie points with the many critics of the US amongst the electorate.”

Draitser also believes that the “peace pipeline” will be a success, especially if China decides to become involved: “In this very plausible scenario, China would finally get the ‘holy grail’ it has sought for years: land-based access to energy imports from the Middle East. For China, an energy-starved economy that continues to grow, this would greatly enhance their regional position.”

“It would also transform the balance of power in Asia, as the era of US domination of energy resources in the Middle East would be over,” he added. “So, were the project to be extended to China, the pipeline would become the focus of a new power paradigm, making it one of the most important economic development projects in the world.”

Over 100 Guantanamo inmates ‘on hunger strike,’ possibly in grave condition

0

Published time: March 12, 2013 08:43

Image by US military: two members of the military walking out of the 'Camp Six' detention facility of the Joint Detention Group at the US Naval Station in Guantanamo Bay, Cuba (AFP Photo/Jim Watson)

Lawyers for Guantanamo Bay inmates have claimed “all but a few men” are on a hunger strike over their Qurans being taken away. The condition of the strikers “appears to be rapidly deteriorating and reaching a potentially critical level,” they said.

Most of 130 people housed in Camp 6 of Guantanamo Bay may be involved in the strike.

“My client and other men have reported that most of the detainees in Camp 6 are on strike, except for a small few who are elderly or sick,” Pardiss Kebriaei, a New York lawyer representing Yemeni detainee Ghaleb Al-Bihanim, told AFP. Men have reported coughed up blood, lost consciousness and were forced to move to other wings of the facility for observation.

The first reports of the widespread hunger strike in Guantanamo emerged in early March.

The protest was allegedly sparked by interference with the inmates’ personal belongings.

“Since approximately February 6, 2013, camp authorities have been confiscating detainees’ personal items, including blankets, sheets, towels, mats, razors, toothbrushes, books, family photos, religious CDs, and letters, including legal mail; and restricting their exercise, seemingly without provocation or cause,” the Center for Constitutional Rights (CCR) said in a March letter to the US Military.

They added that men’s Qurans were confiscated in a “desecrating” manner, and that prayer time was not respected. Most, if not all, of the Guantanamo detainees come from the Middle East, and are devout Muslims.

This image reviewed by the US military shot through a one way mirror shows a detainee in Cell Block B of the "Camp Six" detention facility of the Joint Detention Group at the US Naval Station in Guantanamo Bay, Cuba, January 19, 2012. (AFP Photo/Jim Watson)

Prison officials have acknowledged that the hunger strike is taking place. However, they deny that it is a large-scale event: Nine detainees are refusing food, five of whom are being fed through tubes inserted into their stomachs, according to Robert Durand, director of public affairs for the Joint Task Force Guantanamo.

Durand also said that the claims of desecration of the Quran were unfounded.

“To be clear: there have been no incidents of desecration of the Quran by guards or translators, and nothing unusual happened during a routine search for contraband,” he told AFP.

Guantanamo Bay is a US Military prison facility opened on the wake of 9/11, as part of the George W. Bush administration’s ‘War on Terror.’ The prison currently holds 166 people, many of whom have spent over a decade there without official charges brought against them. Washington has alleged the inmates are terrorists who plotted or acted against the American people. Guantanamo Bay became a source of heated public debate after it was revealed that US forces had tortured detainees.

Barack Obama promised to close the facility at the beginning of his first term as president, but the facility remains open.

Mehdi’s Morning Memo: Mansion Mischief

0

The ten thing you need to know on Tuesday 12 March 2013…

1) MANSION MISCHIEF

“Playing parliamentary silly buggers” is how one Lib Dem MP described the Labour motion on the mansion tax to us, as Nick Clegg and David Cameron agreed a government amendment that both coalition parties could sign up to. The deal, which makes it clear the Lib Dems support a new levy on homes over £2m while the Tories do not, saves the PM and DPM the awkwardness of a coalition split over the issue.

Labour had mischievously tabled today’s debate in an attempt to either divide the coalition, or force Lib Dem MPs to vote against their own policy. Both of which would be a good laugh for Ed Miliband and Ed Balls. Expect Opposition MPs to have a lot of fun at the Lib Dems expense during this afternoon’s Commons debate. Or rather, more so than usual.

Today’s Memo is edited by Ned Simons as Mehdi Hasan is in Rome helping to choose the new Pope.

2) THE (OTHER SORT OF) BIG HOUSE

Chris Huhne meanwhile is swapping his mansion for the other sort of big house today, after being sentenced to eight months in jail. “Well, I certainly lied and lied again,” the former energy secretary told Channel 4 News. “I think my political career is very clearly over but I think that I have other things to offer, doing other things, and I will.”

It’s not all bad for Huhne, his former colleague on the Lib Dem benches, Lembit Opik, has offered to visit him in prison — perhaps seeking a captive audience for his stand-up routine. Surely Huhne has suffered enough?

3) WHO ARE THE 0.2%?

A total of 1,513 votes were cast in the Falklands referendum, with 98.8% of the islanders declaring themselves in favour of remaining British. Just three votes, or 0.2% of the ballot, voted against. There will no doubt be a witch-hunt to find out who the hell those three people were.

William Hague welcomed the utterly unsurprising vote, saying: “We have always been clear that we believe in the rights of the Falklands people to determine their own futures and to decide on the path they wish to take. It is only right that, in the twenty-first century, these rights are respected.

“All countries should accept the results of this referendum and support the Falkland Islanders as they continue to develop their home and their economy. I wish them every success in doing so.”

This morning David Cameron said Argentina should “should take careful note of this result”. No word on which way all the penguins voted.

4) THE RYAN PLAN

WASHINGTON – Under the splash headline ‘Austerity Now’ (that pun is so 2010 guys, we’ve used it at least five times, keep up) our American colleagues report that former Republican vice-presidential candidate and chairman of the House Budget Committee Chairman, Paul Ryan, said on Monday he can balance the US federal budget in 10 years without raising taxes any further by achieving $4.6 trillion in additional government spending cuts.

5) CAMERON ‘QUIZZED’

David Cameron will be at the liaison committee at 4pm this afternoon for 90 (it will seem longer) minutes. The format of the sessions, where the chairman of the different Commons select committees each get to question the prime minister means they are about as forensic as yesterday’s PM Direct event where Cameron had to resort to asking himself questions as none were forthcoming from the audience.

Pity the poor aides and journalists who get stuck in camera shot behind the prime minister and have to avoid nodding off live on Sky News (for as long as the broadcasters can bare to cover it that is).

6) POLL ‘BOOSTS’ TORY RIGHT

A Guardian/ICM poll has found that public “overwhelmingly believes a hard line on Europe, immigration and traditional families would make the party more appealing”.

According to the paper by a majority of 67%-25%, voters say, “the Conservatives would be more appealing if they took a tougher line with Europe”. Some 75%-21% believe the same about the party taking a “a tougher line on immigration. And voters judge by 69%-24% that the Tories’ appeal could be boosted by keeping “themselves on the side of traditional families” — in what will be read as a rejection of gay marriage.

The findings will be seized upon by Tory MPs who believe the key to electoral success in 2015 is to abandon Cameron’s modernising agenda and move to the right to take-on Ukip.

7) TAXI!

The Evening Standard reports that Lutfur Rahman, the mayor of Tower Hamlets in East London, has charged a series of mysteriously expensive taxi journeys to the public. One trip is said to have cost £71 despite the cab only travelling a distance of 400 metres. Another cost £121 when the same journey taken on the capital’s Docklands Light Railway would have cost just £2.10.

8) IRISH ASK UK TO STAY

Irish premier Enda Kenny has become the latest European leader to urge Britain to remain within the European Union. The Taoiseach, in London for a series of engagements including talks with Cameron, insisted Britain has much to gain from its membership.

“We see the British relationship with the EU as being a two-way relationship – Britain benefits from its membership of the EU, and the EU is better off with Britain as a leading member making a valued contribution,” Kenny said.

9) NEW POPE TIME

From the BBC: “Cardinals gathered in Rome to elect a new pope will begin voting later on Tuesday, with no clear frontrunner in sight. The 115 cardinal-electors will attend a special Mass in the morning before processing into the Sistine Chapel to begin their deliberations in the afternoon. They will vote four times daily until two-thirds can agree on a candidate.”

10) DRONE WARS

WASHINGTON – A new medal that would honor drone pilots and cyber warriors and outrank battlefield combat medals such as the Purple Heart and Bronze Star is facing backlash from veterans organizations and members of Congress, with a bipartisan group of 22 senators pressing the Pentagon to change the designation. As HuffPost reports, the backlash to the medal centers around the fact that it will take precedence over traditional several combat awards, which require that the recipient risk his or her life in order to receive them.

140 CHARACTERS OR LESS

@Queen_UK Queen of the Falklands. By popular consent. #YourQueenLovesYou #DontCryForOneArgentina

@Mike_Fabricant At the request of a Minister in charge of the legislation last night, I have changed my photo back to the pony.

900 WORDS OR MORE

Steve Richards in The Independent: “Labour and the Tories both think they’ll lose 2015 and they can’t both be right.”

Benedict Brogan in the Daily Telegraph:”If Cameron wants his troops to rally, he must act like a general.”

Mehdi Hasan in The Huffington Post UK: “Get Rid Of Dave? How Exactly Would That Help the Tories?”

Got something you want to share? Please send any stories/tips/quotes/pix/plugs/gossip to Mehdi Hasan (mehdi.hasan@huffingtonpost.com) or Ned Simons (ned.simons@huffingtonpost.com). You can also follow us on Twitter: @mehdirhasan, @nedsimons and @huffpostukpol

Facebook knows your secrets: ‘Likes’ reveal users’ personality

0

Published time: March 12, 2013 07:07

Stephen Lam/Getty Images/AFP

Facebook’s ‘like’ button can reveal more than you realize, a new study has showed. By liking posts and links, you may be revealing personal secrets, like your sexuality or religious and political views. The findings have raised privacy concerns.

A study by the National Academy of Sciences examined 58,000 Facebook users in the US, who volunteered their likes, demographic profiles and psychometric test results. Researchers managed to draw “surprisingly accurate” findings about a given user’s race, IQ, sexuality, substance use, personality and political views by analyzing the topics and items they ‘liked,’ even if they set strong privacy settings for their page.  

The study’s authors developed an algorithm that uses Facebook ‘likes’ to create personality profiles, potentially revealing a user’s personality. Anyone with training in data analysis could be able to derive such information, even if users had not explicitly shared it, they explained.

As a result, researchers were able to predict whether men were homosexual with 88 percent accuracy by their ‘like’ clicks on sites related to gay marriage or same-sex relations. Preferences of music and TV shows, for example, were also more revealing than users may have imagined: Men who liked the musical TV show ‘Glee’ were more likely to be gay, the study showed.

In 82 percent of cases, Christians and Muslims were correctly identified among the volunteer profiles. And the study was not only predictive of sexuality or religion, but also a user’s IQ.

Those with higher IQs tended to more frequently like ‘The Colbert Report’ TV show, for example, or films like ‘The Godfather’ and ‘To Kill a Mockingbird.’ Those with lower IQs liked Harley Davidsons and Bret Michaels of the rock band Poison.

Similarly accurate predictions were also made about users’ political views, and could even predict potential voting patterns during elections, mapped to users’ relationship status, their number of Facebook friends and a half-dozen other personality traits.

“The important point is that, on one hand, it is good that people’s behavior is predictable because it means Facebook can suggest very good stories on your news feed,” South China Morning Post quoted Michal Kosinsky, one of the academics behind the study as saying.

While the study could be seen as a new step towards creating more personalized content, it also highlighted the potential threats to privacy posed by Facebook. “What is shocking is that you can use the same data to predict your political views or your sexual orientation. This is something most people don’t realize you can do,” Kosinsky warned.

Similar profiles could be created using other digital data, including Web searches, emails and mobile phone activity, according to a co-author of the study: ``Your likes may be saying more about you than you realize,” David Sitwell, a Cambridge University researcher said, according to AFP. “But you don’t realize that years later all those likes are building up against you.”

Facebook declined to comment on the study.

Falkland Islanders Vote To Stay British

0

The people of the Falkland Islands have voted overwhelmingly to remain a British overseas territory, with 99.8% declaring themselves in favour during a two-day referendum in the capital Port Stanley.

A total of 1,517 valid votes were cast, a turnout of 92% of the islanders eligible to vote.

In a clear message of defiance to the Argentine government, 1,513 voted to remain under British rule, with just three – 0.2% – voting against the referendum question “Do you wish the Falkland Islands to retain their current political status as an Overseas Territory of the United Kingdom?”

David Cameron used the vote to call on Argentina to respect the wishes of the people of the Falkland Islands, saying it should take “careful note” of the referendum result and that Britain would always be there to defend the Falkland Islanders.

Foreign Secretary William Hague welcomed the outcome, saying it “demonstrates more clearly than ever” the islanders wish to remain as an overseas territory.

  • David Cameron: We will always defend the Falklands

But in Argentina Senator Daniel Filmus, who is close to President Cristina Fernández de Kirchner, described the vote as a “publicity stunt”.

“We must denounce this trickery that pretends to represent the popular participation of an implanted population,” he said, according to The Guardian.

“This publicity stunt has no validity for international law.”

The poll, which was ratified as “free and fair” by international observers, came against a backdrop of heightened Argentine pressure for negotiations with London over the sovereignty of the islands they know as Las Malvinas.

Argentina maintained that the vote was illegal and “pointless”, and that islanders – an “implanted people” – have no voice in a dispute that must be settled bilaterally.

But the near-unanimous result of the referendum clearly reinforced the islanders deep feelings that they are British and want to remain a self-governing overseas territory.

Nigel Haywood, governor of the Falkland Islands, said the referendum was a “massive demonstration of the way the Falkland Islanders feel and of the way they see their future”.

He said: “Obviously it is a major principle of the United Nations that a people have their right to self-determination, and you don’t get a much clearer expression of the people’s self-determination than such a large turn out and such a large yes vote.”

LIKE HUFFPOST UK POLITICS ON FACEBOOK | FOLLOW US ON TWITTER

Following the vote Mr Hague said: “I welcome today’s result, which demonstrates more clearly than ever the Falkland Islanders’ wish to remain an Overseas Territory of the United Kingdom.

“We have always been clear that we believe in the rights of the Falklands people to determine their own futures and to decide on the path they wish to take. It is only right that, in the 21st century, these rights are respected.

“All countries should accept the results of this referendum and support the Falkland Islanders as they continue to develop their home and their economy. I wish them every success in doing so.”

The islands’ 2,563 residents did all they could in the lead up to the referendum to show their sympathies, waving Union Jack flags and dressing up in red-white-and-blue.

Dick Sawle, a member of the Legislative Assembly – the Falkland Islands government – who was at the count in Port Stanley, called the result “absolutely fantastic”.

The vote will “send out the strongest possible message to the rest of the world about our right to self-determination, a right which was fought for in 1982 and which we’ve honoured tonight,” he told the BBC.

“What it means is that the people here have expressed their will, their wishes, it means they have expressed their opinion on what they want for the political status of the Falkland Islands.

“And that of course means that our right to self-determination has been enshrined for the future, it means that at any time in the future we can exercise that right to change the status quo if we wish to do so.

“But people here have very, very clearly said they wish to remain as a British Overseas Territory with those rights.

“The British government is 100% behind us and it will be our job now as a government to get that message out to the rest of the world and every country that will listen to us.”

Argentina considers the “Islas Malvinas” to be part of its national territory, taken from them by the British more than 180 years ago, and President Cristina Fernandez de Kirchner took the issue to the United Nations (UN) on the 30th anniversary of the Falklands War last year.

Mr Sawle said the Falklands government would take the referendum result to the UN this summer, and said the vote had paved the way to strengthen the government of the Falkland Islands.

He said: “We will see more authority being devolved to the Falkland Islands government… make no mistake about it, this government is set to become even stronger than before, and with this massive vote of the people behind us this gives us this very clear mandate that we need for the future.”

Speaking after the vote, islander Lynda Buckland called it “absolutely brilliant”.

“It sends a message out to the rest of the world that we are British and we want to remain that way. My family has been here since 1842 and that is longer than most Argentines have been in Argentina.

“What this is all about is getting the rest of the world to realise what our neighbours are doing to us.”

Journalist Celina Andreassi, from the Argentina Independent in Buenos Aires, said the strength of the Yes vote had been “quite predictable”.

“The majority of people here agree with the official position, that the issue is not about self-determination and it is not about whether the islanders consider themselves British or not, because obviously everyone knows that they do and that they are British.

“The issue for most people here is that whether the territory is Argentine or British, not the people themselves.

“I really don’t think this referendum is going to make much of a difference… both sides are going to remain really strong in their position and we are probably going to continue where we are for a long, long time.”

Falklands vote to remain part of Britain

0

Published time: March 12, 2013 04:10

Falkland islanders react after hearing the results of the referendum in Stanley March 11, 2013 (Reuters / Marcos Brindicci)

Falklanders have voted to remain a British Overseas Territory, following months of political tensions between Britain and Argentina over the fate of the islands. Three decades ago the two nations fought a short war over the disputed territory.

Islanders voted almost unanimously to remain under the sovereignty of the United Kingdom, with 98.8-per cent of votes in favor. The ballot was decided during a two-day referendum with just three people, or 0.2 per cent, voting against.

The ballot asked one yes or no question: “Do you wish the Falkland Islands to retain their current political status as an Overseas Territory of the United Kingdom?”

The referendum saw 92-per cent turnout from the 1,672 British citizens eligible to vote in the territory of about 2,900 people. International election observers monitored the vote despite Buenos Aires’ request for South American countries to boycott it.

A Falkland Islander gestures as he casts his vote at the Town Hall polling station in Stanley, March 10, 2013 (Reuters / Marcos Brindicci)

Following the vote, Foreign Secretary William Hague called on all nations to respect the result: “We have always been clear that we believe in the rights of the Falklands people to determine their own futures and to decide on the path they wish to take. It is only right that, in the 21st century, these rights are respected,” he was quoted as saying by the Telegraph.

Argentina, which calls the islands Las Malvinas, considers them to be part of its territory. The reinstatement of its sovereignty over them is enshrined in its constitution.

The Latin American country believes that Argentina inherited the territory from the Spaniards in 1767 before Britain took them over in 1833.

An attempt to reclaim sovereignty led London and Buenos Aires in to a short war in 1982. In two months of fighting, 255 British and about 650 Argentine were killed before Argentina surrendered.

Falkland islanders react after hearing the results of the referendum at the vote counting station in the Town Hall in Stanley, March 11, 2013 (Reuters / Marcos Brindicci)

In 2010, a British company began oil exploration near the archipelago, leading to an exacerbation of the conflict.

Political analyst Adrian Salbuchi argues that the Falklands are a hot spot for British interests, just like the Middle East.

“Britain is trying to legitimize its presence there because one of the key factors is oil. There are huge oil reserves in the ocean, but they are actually a part of the continental shelf, which even geologically and geographically belongs to Argentina. So they need to have all the legal trimmings in place as much as possible.”

In early 2013, Argentine President Cristina Fernandez de Kirchner sent a letter to British Prime Minister David Cameron calling for negotiations that would lead to the return of the archipelago to Buenos Aires.

Cameron replied that the population of the islands supports the UK’s sovereignty, which was proven by the two-day vote.

New Study Finds the Wealthy Are Different

0

On average, high earners have a very different idea of what makes a just society.

Photo Credit: Shutterstock.com

March 11, 2013  |  

Like this article?

Join our email list:

Stay up to date with the latest headlines via email.

“The very rich,” wrote F. Scott Fitzgerald, “are different from you and me.”

It turns out he was right. According to a new study by the think-tank Demos ( PDF), the affluent tend to hold a different vision of a just society than the public at large, and it is that vision which tops the political agenda in Washington and in state houses across the country.

The report, authored by David Callahan and J. Mijin Cha, found that “wealthy interests are keenly focused on concerns not shared by the rest of the American public, like keeping taxes low on capital gains, and often oppose policies that would foster upward mobility among low-income citizens, such as raising the minimum wage.”

The policy preferences of the wealthy (average income over $1 million annually) vary widely from those of the general public… [A recent] survey found that the general public is more open than the wealthy to a variety of policies designed to reduce inequality and strengthen economic opportunity, including: raising the minimum wage, increasing the Earned Income Tax Credit, providing generous unemployment benefits, and directly creating jobs. For example, only 40 percent of the wealthy think the minimum wage should be high enough to prevent full-time workers from being in poverty while 78 percent of the general public holds this view. Affluent voters are also less supportive of labor unions and less likely to support laws that make it easier for workers to join unions–even as research shows that unions are crucial to enabling people to work their way into the middle class. 

One especially significant difference between the opinions of the wealthy and the population as a whole centers on deficit reduction. According to a study cited by Demos, “87 percent of affluent households believed budget deficits were a ‘very important’ problem, the highest percentage of all listed perceived problems.” Jobs and education, which rank at or near the top of most Americans’ list of priorities, were “a distant second to budget deficits among the concerns of wealthy Americans.”

According to an exit poll conducted after the 2012 election, 59 percent of the public rated the economy as the country’s number one problem, while only 15 percent cited the federal budget deficit. But as the Demos report notes, “the affluent [not only] participate more in civic life; they also have greater influence over public policy.”

Peter G. Peterson epitomizes that finding. The Wall Street mogul and Nixon administration cabinet member has reportedly dedicated a billion dollars of his fortune to promoting the idea that “entitlements” are going to impoverish our grandchildren.

Meanwhile, Callahan and Cha note that the affluent, “are significantly less inclined than other groups of Americans to support an active role for government in addressing mass unemployment.”

These are good examples of what the authors describe as “ the interplay between declining upward mobility and growing political inequality.” Perhaps the most troubling finding in the Demos report is that the wealthy are, on average, less likely to support policies that allow people to pull themselves up the economic ladder. “Even when the affluent do support policies for upward mobility,” write Callahan and Cha, “they often do not prioritize these policies over other goals, such as lower taxes.”

A case in point is higher education. While affluent Americans and business leaders broadly support access to higher education, along with the general public, spending in this area has been cut in some states where governors have prioritized cutting taxes–with strong support from wealthy voters and corporate interests.

While most Americans believe that they live in a highly meritocratic society where one’s fortunes are limited only by one’s innate talents and work ethic, several studies released in recent years suggest that Americans enjoy significantly less upward mobility than do the citizens of a number of other industrialized nations. German workers have 1.5 times the upward movement of Americans, Canada’s economy is nearly 2.5 times as mobile, and Denmark is three times as mobile. Norway, Finland, Sweden, and France are all more upwardly mobile societies than the United States. Of the countries included in the studies, the United States ranked near the bottom; only in the United Kingdom was it tougher to shake off a low social status one had been born with.

UK Prince urged to raise rights issues

0

Amnesty International has called on heir to the British throne Prince Charles to tell the “truth” about Saudi Arabia’s human rights record during his three-day visit to the Arab country this week.

The rights organization urged the Prince of Wales to raise human rights issues with the Saudi King Abdullah bin Abdul Aziz while there, The Daily Mirror reported on Monday.

Prince Charles and his wife Camilla, Duchess of Cornwall, will visit Saudi Arabia as part of a nine-day tour of the Middle East that began on March 11, with stops in Jordan, Qatar and Oman.

“We’re not going to try to fill Prince Charles’ luggage with Amnesty reports. But if he or Camilla were to voice their royal displeasure at reports that a young Saudi jewel thief is facing crucifixion in a matter of days, that surely is their prerogative,” said Kate Allen, the UK Director of Amnesty.

Amnesty’s concerns about human rights in Saudi Arabia include, death penalty, freedom of speech and protests, torture, unfair trials and women’s rights.

Saudi Arabia, which is accused of brutal crackdown on peaceful anti-regime protests, is considered as Britain’s largest trading partner in the Middle East, with bilateral trade worth more than £15 billion every year.

Since February 2011, protesters have held demonstrations on an almost regular basis in Saudi Arabia, mainly in the Qatif region and the town of Awamiyah in Eastern Province, primarily calling for the release of all political prisoners, freedom of expression and assembly, and an end to widespread discrimination.

However, the demonstrations have turned into protests against the repressive Al Saud regime, especially since November 2011, when Saudi security forces killed five protesters and injured many others in the province.

According to Human Rights Watch, the Saudi regime “routinely represses expression critical of the government.”

SSM/MOS/HE

Pound continues to fall against dollar

0

British pound continues to fall against the dollar.

British pound has continued to fall against the dollar, raising fears that the country could slide into a triple-dip recession.

Sterling once again slid against dollar to $1.4868 on Monday, its lowest level since the early days of the coalition in 2010, and during the 2008-2009 recession.

Earlier in February, the currency plunged to a two-year low against dollar to $1.5073, after credit ratings agency Moody’s downgraded the British government’s bond rating from the top AAA to AA1 due to the country’s rising debt and slowing growth.

“The overriding concern is that the government is giving little indication that it will take its foot off austerity which is hurting economic growth,” said Market analyst Nawaz Ali from Western Union.

Earlier last week, British Business Secretary Vince Cable urged Chancellor George Osborne to change his economic course by borrowing more in order to stimulate growth in the economy.

Cable also announced that the Chancellor’s deep cuts to capital spending have had adverse “economic consequences”.

Osborne and British Prime Minister David Cameron, however, have so far rejected calls for a change in fiscal policy, saying that increasing government expenditure or cutting taxes would not help Britain’s struggling economy.

MOS/SSM/HE

Votes Being Counted After Falklands Vote

0

Counting will begin on Monday in a referendum over whether the Falkland Islands should remain British.

Islanders started voting on Sunday in the poll that is being staged in response to increasing demands from Argentina, which calls the territory Las Malvinas, for sovereignty negotiations.

falkland islands vote

The result of the referendum is expected on Tuesday

The tiny community is expected overwhelmingly to vote in favour of retaining its status as an Overseas Territory of the United Kingdom and the results are due to be announced in the early hours of Tuesday.

Outside observers have been monitoring the referendum in order to prove it is free and fair but the result is unlikely to appease Argentine president Cristina Fernandez de Kirchner, who is desperate to use the issue to improve her ailing domestic popularity.

In January, she wrote an open letter to David Cameron, urging the prime minister to abide by a 1960 UN resolution calling on members to “end colonialism in all its forms and manifestations”.

Falkland Islands UK Representative Sukey Cameron suggested on Sunday the territory could become independent in the future.

“That may well happen in 50, 70, 100 years’ time but now we are very happy with our relationship as it stands with the UK,” she told Sky News.

She added: “There are some people on the island who may vote ‘no’ but voting ‘no’ isn’t necessarily voting yes to Argentina.”

MPs will debate the result of the referendum in the Commons on Tuesday night.

Foreign Office minister Hugo Swire will respond to the short debate, which has been called by Tory Guy Opperman.

Korean armistice still valid, cannot be scrapped ‘unilaterally’ — UN

0

Published time: March 11, 2013 22:02

North Korean leader Kim Jong Un (C) using a pair of binocular to look south as he inspects Jangjae Islet Defence Detachment near South Korea's Taeyonphyong Island in South Hwanghae province on March 7, 2013 (AFP Photo / KCNA via KNS)

The armistice ending the Korean War in 1953 is still valid, the United Nations has stressed, despite North Korea’s decision to scrap the agreement that has ensured stability in the peninsula for six decades.

“Let me just stress here that the armistice agreement is still valid and still in force,” UN spokesman Martin Nesirky said Monday. “The terms of the armistice agreement do not allow either side, unilaterally, to free themselves from it.”

Earlier North Korean state media announced that the decades-old ceasefire was “completely invalid,” and that the country had cut its communications hotline with the south, an action later confirmed by South Korea’s Unification Ministry.

UN leader Ban Ki-moon believes that the 60-year-old armistice remains a “critical” document, said Nesirky.

Ban is calling on Pyongyang “to continue to respect the terms of the armistice agreement as it was approved by the General Assembly,” the spokesman added.

The decision by the North to scrap the accord comes in retaliation to the joint South Korean-United States military drills that kicked off on Monday.  

The start of the two-week “Key Resolve” maneuvers follows a week of rising tensions in the peninsula, with North Korean threats of a nuclear showdown following UN sanctions adopted after its third atomic test in February.

Open War Crimes: US and British-Backed Weapons Airlift From Croatia to Terrorists in Syria

0

It’s well known by now that the NATO and Gulf States’ initial plans to overturn the sovereign state of Syria has been running behind schedule since their operation was launched two years ago. They had hoped for the sort of slam dunk which they enjoyed in overturning the country of Libya in late 2011.

This same formula could not be applied again however, so Plan B, a ground war using proxies has meant a longer drawn out conflict, with western backed terrorist groups sustaining heavy losses in their fight to topple the Assad government on behalf of NATO and its Gulf allies.

The main obstacle with Plan B is that the very idea of directly arming terrorists in Syria is not one which can be sold openly in either the US or Britain. Plan C is to draw in the UN by creating a ‘chemical weapons’ crisis in Syria, but thanks to a prominent online leak of documents relating to UK DOD contractor Britam, the British have been caught brokering a deal transferring ex-Gaddafi stocks from Libya to Syria to be blamed on Assad, paid for by Qatar. The WMD threat still remains a hard sell for western voters…

From the NATO Allied corner, something drastic needed to be done.

Whilst politicians in the West, namely those in Washington DC, London and parts of Europe, have been publicly denying that they were helping to organise running arms into Syria and issuing very public pleads for ‘humanitarian aid’ for those they identify as the Syrian Opposition, activity back stage has been furious. The debate in government and the media has been mere window dressing for the real operation being quietly carried out.

NATO Gun-running via Croatia

It can now be revealed that NATO allied nations were busy using proxy states to drive their war in Syria — putting together one of the biggest international black operation transfers of military supplies in recent history. So it’s official: large caches of hardware from the West have been transferred to the Syrian jihadist mercenary collective known as the ‘Free Syrian Army’ , ‘Syrian Rebels’, or ‘Syrian Opposition’ — depending on who you ask, a brash move which may be vehemently opposed by other UN Security Council members — namely Russia and China.

Multiple media sources reveal the details of this massive airlift comprised of 75 airplanes, and an estimated 3,000 tons of military weaponry on board has left Croatia and has already been delivered… to Syria.

It is also confirmed from these reports that Saudi Arabia has financed a large portion of this purchase secretly transported to al Qaeda and other FSA fighters — who are working with the support of the CIA, MI6 and others, along with other financial and material support of Qatar and Saudi, to further destabilise and overthrow the Assad government in Syria.

Croatia’s daily newspaper Jutarnji List reported:

From the start of November last year, till February this year, 75 planes flew out from Zagreb Airport with over 3,000 tons of weapons and ammunition bound for Syrian rebels…

The newspaper, quoting diplomatic sources, says that besides Croatian weapons the planes were full with weapons from other European countries including the UK. The weapons were organised by the United States of America.

Sources say that the first few flights to leave Croatia bound for Syria with weapons were operated by Turkish Cargo, which is owned by Turkish Airlines. After those flights, Jordanian International Air Cargo took over the flights. The deal to provide arms to the rebels was made between American officials and the Croatian Ambassador to the US.

In addition to this huge gun-running operation, Croatia also appears to be guilty of either having advanced knowledge, or possibly coordinating with Syrian terrorists as evidenced by their recently withdraw all of troops from the UN observer mission in Golan Heights, indicating that the recent kidnapping by Free Syrian Army Terrorists of at least 20 UNIFIL peacekeepers in the Golan Heights was known in advance by Croatia.

The kidnapping incident may have been designed to test the UN, but also to pull Syria’s southern neighbor, Israel, even closer to the conflict, a development which would almost surely prompt the UN to declare this as trigger to a regional crisis, followed by an authorised military intervention. Pulling Israel in would also risk involving Hezbollah from Lebanon, who are already engaging in assisting Assad in training a new specialist paramilitary force in Syria to deal with urban warfare.

If it was known by Croatia, then one can only conclude that this was also known by US and British operatives as well. Both the US and Britain will naturally claim deniability as their legal out in this case, by deniability through the use of proxies makes no innocent parties when the prospect of a multi-regional war beckons as a result of the west’s financial, logistical, political, and now material involvement in the overthrow of a sovereign state and internationally recognised government.

Much worse, however, is that by employing proxies like Jordan, Croatia, Turkey,and others, the NATO allies have guaranteed long-term retribution down the road, should Syria prevail in this fight. For Syria, it is now known which countries collaborated with the West to dismantle their country. This fact alone will ensure conflict in the region for a generation.

US officials are on record as admitting to helping arrange the weapons airlift, as cited in this Feb 25, 2012 article in the New York Times:

“An official in Washington said the possibility of the transfers from the Balkans was broached last summer, when a senior Croatian official visited Washington and suggested to American officials that Croatia had many weapons available should anyone be interested in moving them to Syria’s rebels.”

Terrorist receive recoilless guns from the former Yugoslavia

Revelations are not limited to the Croatian news report, as we see the US and Europe’s mainstream media wall of silence has begun to crack, including here a recent report from London’s Daily Telegraph sent across Syria’s borders with Jordan and NATO-member Turkey. The article entitled, “US and Europe in ‘major airlift of arms to Syrian rebels through Zagreb’“ goes on to give further details of direct European involvement in illegal weapons running:

The United States has coordinated a massive airlift of arms to Syrian rebels from Croatia with the help of Britain and other European states, despite the continuing European Union arms embargo, it was claimed yesterday…

Decisions by William Hague, the Foreign Secretary, to provide non-lethal assistance and training, announced in the past week, were preceded by much greater though less direct Western involvement in the rebel cause, according to a Croat newspaper.

The shipments were allegedly paid for by Saudi Arabia at the bidding of the United States, with assistance on supplying the weapons organised through Turkey and Jordan, Syria’s neighbours.

…as from Croatia, weapons came “from several other European countries including Britain”, without specifying if they were British-supplied or British-procured arms.

British military advisers however are known to be operating in countries bordering Syria alongside French and Americans, offering training to rebel leaders and former Syrian army officers…

… The weapons, including rocket launchers, recoil-less guns and the M79 anti-tank weapon, have been seen in rebel hands in numerous videos, and were first spotted by an arms expert Eliot Higgins, who blogs under the name Brown Moses. He traced them moving from Dera’a in the south, near the Jordanian border, to Aleppo and Idlib provinces in the north.

Hague: Denies Britain’s involvement in gun-running

It is also no big secret that Britain has deployed a significant contingent of troops and support personnel to Jordan at least as far back as Autumn 2012 as part of its ongoing ‘joint military exercises’ with the Jordan military, but this latest revelation puts into clearer perspective the overwhelming likelihood that high level British military operation have actually been involved in the transfer of arms from Jordan into the hands of the international terrorist confab of mostly foreign fighter running under the west’s media banner of “Syrian Rebels”.

Consequences for Croatia, and Britain

What Britain may be guilty of here, is cynically — and illegally, trying to side-stepping the EU embargo on arms into Syria by using the fledgling EU state of Croatia as their delivery mechanism, because Croatia does not officially join the EU until July 1, and has not implemented any binding EU legislation. This flagrant violation of both EU and international law should mean that Croatia’s entrance into the EU could be appealed by other members states willing to raise an objection, with what are now clear grounds to mount a legal challenge against Croatia.

Regardless of any EU outcomes however, Croatia at least —  is guilty of international war crimes.

International and EU Sanctions Against the US, Britain, Turkey, Qatar and Saudi Arabia

As expected, Britain’s Foreign Office denies all of the claims connecting it to the Croatian gun-running program, but if Britain is involved — even indirectly, through a proxy like Croatia, or if British military personnel are aiding and abetting these known terrorist fighters in Syria through the transfer of weaponry, then Britain can also be brought into the international legal framework to answer for what it has done behind the public’s back.

The international war crimes which are now in the public view could test the legal framework of the EU, the UN and the ICC in the Hague. The legal door is now open for charges against state actors including US, Britain, Qatar and Saudi Arabia — for the crimes of illegally arming a force of foreign fighters and known terrorists in Syria — designed to destroy the country from within. Many UN resolutions, including the recent Resolution 1973 applied in Libya by the UN, have been implemented on much more spurious and shaky grounds than the overwhelming evidence available regarding Syria.

Consequences for NATO and the UN

Despite any denials in Brussels, NATO are involved through their member states Turkey and Croatia, as well as US, UK, and France from behind. Any involvement should question these country’s NATO status, or at least it begs the question what is NATO for, or even the UN, if their member states are conspiring together to subvert international law?

Moreover, Israel’s unwarranted airstrike against a Syrian Military Research facility last month was also ignored by the UN, but this is not surprising as Israel has long been allowed to operate outside of international law and norms.

If the international community does not act in this instance, then it opens the door to more brazen criminality sans borders, which could spawn similar illegal operations against Iran, opening the door to a Third World War.

US uniformed Personnel Training Rebels in Jordan

Der Spiegel also reports this week that, despite denials by Washington DC, Americans are definitely training Syrian rebels in neighboring Jordan. The reports goes on:

It is not clear if the Americans are members of the US armed forces or are part of a private contracting firm, but the trainers wear uniforms, the paper reported.

It added that the training, which also involves Jordanian intelligence officers, had been going on “for some time,” and that the rebels were being taught how to use anti-tank weaponry.

France sends ‘aid’ for Syria to Jordan

France played an integral part in the destruction of Libya in 2011, and they might also have an interest in their former colonial possessions in Syria, but it’s not clear as yet if France’s commitment to overthrowing the Assad government is on par with the US and Britain’s efforts. Back in August 2012, France had also been sending large shipments designated for Syria via Jordan, claiming that these shipment contained ‘aid and medical supplies’ — intended for Syrian refugees. Real Syrian News reported:

An Antonov 124 cargo aircraft landed at the Marka military airport in Amman on Saturday. The cargo is said to include a field hospital and medical supplies for the refugees in the Zaatari camp near the Syrian border. An A310 airliner carrying 85 French military staff and medical equipment arrived in Jordan on Thursday.

After the Croatian airlift, it’s now not a stretch to suspect that other countries could be involved in similar operations under the cover of supplying ‘humanitarian aid’.

Consequences for Jordan

The overwhelming body of evidence proves that Jordan is playing the key role as proxy and facilitator for the West’s wishes and desires to destroy the country of Syria. The consequences for Jordan, should the West’s efforts fail, is that Jordan has now exposed itself as a provocateur and enemy of both Syria, and Lebanon, and indeed Iran also. It is not know how much Jordan has been paid for its services, or what promises have been made to its royal family in exchange for facilitating the Syrian upheaval, but it cannot compensate Jordan for playing the crucial role in possibly fomenting a regional or multi-theatre global war.

Syria Crisis Planned by the US and NATO Allies Before the ‘Arab Spring’

Despite previous denials and avoiding the issue by states persons like Hillary Clinton and William Hague, it is certain that ‘al Qaeda’ terrorists are operating in Syria and receive various kinds of support from the West and their Gulf allies, and that these are many of the same terrorist who are responsible for violence and killing in Iraq. The New York Times confirmed this fact recently:

Iraqi officials said the extremists operating in Syria are in many cases the very same militants striking across their country. “We are 100 percent sure from security coordination with Syrian authorities that the wanted names that we have are the same wanted names that the Syrian authorities have, especially within the last three months,” Izzat al-Shahbandar – a close aide to the Iraqi prime minister, Nuri Kamal al-Maliki – said in an interview on Tuesday. “Al Qaeda that is operating in Iraq is the same as that which is operating in Syria,” he said.

Bangkok based analyst, Tony Cartalucci, from Land Destroyer blog, adds another important piece of evidence in this mix, pointing out the fact that the US and its NATO operatives have been engineering the crisis in Syria well before the official ‘uprising’ began in 2011:

Pulitizer Prize-winning journalist Seymour Hersh, in his 2007 New Yorker report titled, “The Redirection: Is the Administration’s new policy benefiting our enemies in the war on terrorism?“stated explicitly that: “To undermine Iran, which is predominantly Shiite, the Bush Administration has decided, in effect, to reconfigure its priorities in the Middle East. In Lebanon, the Administration has cooperated with Saudi Arabia’s government, which is Sunni, in clandestine operations that are intended to weaken Hezbollah, the Shiite organization that is backed by Iran. The U.S. has also taken part in clandestine operations aimed at Iran and its ally Syria. A by-product of these activities has been the bolstering of Sunni extremist groups that espouse a militant vision of Islam and are hostile to America and sympathetic to Al Qaeda.

Cartalucci provides further background to support the west’s own knowledge and involvement is the current crisis:

Is there any doubt that the US has executed this plot in earnest, arming and funding sectarian extremists “sympathetic to Al Qaeda” on both Syria’s northern and southern border? Where else, if not from the West and its regional allies, Israel, Saudi Arabia and Qatar, could extremists be getting their weapons, cash, and logistical support from?

And of course, Syria’s borders with Jordan and Turkey have been long-ago identified by the US Army’s own West Point Combating Terrorism Center (CTC) as hotbeds of sectarian extremist/Al Qaeda activity — hotbeds that the West is purposefully funneling thousands of tons of weaponry through, while disingenuously claiming it is attempting to prevent such weapons from falling into the hands of extremists.

The CTC’s 2007 report, “Al-Qa’ida’s Foreign Fighters in Iraq,” identified Syria’s southeastern region near Dayr Al-Zawr on the Iraqi-Syrian border, the northwestern region of Idlib near the Turkish-Syrian border, and Dar’a in the south near the Jordanian-Syrian border, as having produced the majority of fighters found crossing over into Iraq throughout the duration of the Iraq War.


Image: (Left) West Point’s Combating Terrorism Center’s 2007 report, “Al-Qa’ida’s Foreign Fighters in Iraq” indicated which areas in Syria Al Qaeda fighters filtering into Iraq came from during the US invasion/occupation. The overwhelming majority of them came from Dayr Al-Zawr in Syria’s southeast, Idlib in the north near the Turkish-Syrian border, and Dar’a in the south near the Jordanian-Syrian border. (Right) A map indicating the epicenters of violence in Syria indicate that the exact same hotbeds for Al Qaeda in 2007, now serve as the epicenters of so-called “pro-democracy fighters.” These areas are now admittedly the epicenters of fighting, and more importantly, despite being historical hotbeds of Al Qaeda activity, precisely where the West is flooding with cash, weapons, and military “advisers.”

Just like in Libya where the West literally handed an entire nation to sectarian extremists, we are watching a verbatim repeat in Syria — where we are told Al Qaeda terrorists are “pro-democracy” “freedom fighters” that deserve US cash, weapons, and support, when it couldn’t be any clearer they aren’t.  

Not only has the US and UK lied to the world about their policy toward Syria and their current level of support for increasingly overt terrorists committing an array of atrocities — their latest act including the taking of over 20 UN peacekeepers hostage in the Golan Heights – but have revealed once again the manufactured facade that is the “War on Terror…”

Terrorist Groups Currently Active in Syria

Known terrorist groups are operating in Syria and are receiving the full backing of NATO Allies and Gulf states Qatar and Saudi Arabia. They include — but are not limited to, Saudi Intelligence-backed Jabhat al-Nusra or ‘al Nursa Front’, the Libyan Islamic Fighting Group,  Abdullah Azzam Brigades and Al Baraa ibn Malik Martyrdom Brigade, the jihadist group Ahrar al-Sham, the PKK (in northeast Syria), Kata’ib Mohadzherin from the Russian Caucus region – to name only a few.

Earlier reports of rogue Russian and Chechen terrorists filtering into Syria appear to be preceded by Salafists killing Sufi leaders in the Russian Federation. The Pakistan Christian Post reports:

Recently in Dagestan the Sufi spiritual leader Said Efendi Chirkeisky was killed by a suicide bomber along with a few followers. This happened in late August and the closeness to the recent attack against Sufi leaders in Tatarstan is a clear reminder that Salafism is a potent force within parts of the Russian Federation. Therefore, not surprisingly the Russian Federation is extremely alarmed by major Western powers once more working in collusion with the FSA, al-Qaeda and a whole array of Salafi terrorist organizations.

It’s worth noting also that like Libya’s new militant governor of Tripoli, Abdel Hakim Belhadj, terrorist group Kata’ib Mohadzherin’s leader Airat Vakhitov was also imprisoned at Guantanamo Bay, Cuba, in 2002 after being captured by U.S. forces in Afghanistan. Both were released and filtered back into fighting regions to organise al Qaeda-type Islamist groups — both active in countries which the US and NATO have been actively vying for regime change, in Libya and Syria respectively. You can draw your own conclusions here about what Guantanamo is in reality.

The same New York Times article (above) also mentions terrorists’ theocratic designs of establishing some caliphate in the region:

One Qaeda operative, a 56-year-old known as Abu Thuha who lives in the Hawija district near Kirkuk in Iraq, spoke to an Iraqi reporter for The New York Times on Tuesday. “We have experience now fighting the Americans, and more experience now with the Syrian revolution,” he said. “Our big hope is to form a Syrian-Iraqi Islamic state for all Muslims…”

It’s important to understand that such claims by any shadowy ‘al Qaeda’ figures must also be balance with the reality that these militants have been historically, and are still today, directed and funded at the highest levels of both US and Saudi intelligence, and others. When you see terror spokesman like Ayman al-Zawahri, the alleged leader of Al Qaeda, praise the Syrian fighters by referring to them as “the lions of the Levant,” in messages released exclusively via a known CIA media dissemination outlets like SITE, or INTEL CENTER, then readers should be suspicious of why it’s been released and what political effect it is designed to have.

Now that some of the scope of NATO Allies operation in Syria has been exposed to the public, perhaps political representatives, media journalist, and editors will be able to report more accurately on the Syrian crisis, and demand a withdrawl of NATO, Arab League and others country’s support for the growing and highly dangerous paramilitary and other al Qaeda-linked terrorist groups who are currently working to take power by destabilising the country of Syria.

It’s all happening out in the open now.

Lib Dems Avoid Red Faces Over Mansion Tax

0

The Liberal Democrats have averted a potential Commons embarrassment and announced they will not vote with Labour in favour of a mansion tax.

Business Secretary Vince Cable – who earlier held open the prospect of a revolt – said a solution had been found to sidestep the opposition’s “cynical games”.

lib dems

There had been speculation that Vince Cable would vote with the Opposition over the Mansion Tax

The coalition parties will instead vote for an amendment on Tuesday which recognises the deep differences between them on the proposals for a levy on £2 million-plus properties.

“This amendment allows Liberal Democrats in Parliament to back our long-held policy of the mansion tax. We created it and will continue to champion it,” Cable said.

“The amendment also makes it clear that although we are in coalition with the Conservatives, we have different views on the desirability of a mansion tax.

LIKE HUFFPOST UK POLITICS ON FACEBOOK | FOLLOW US ON TWITTER

“The Liberal Democrats will not however support a Labour motion designed exclusively to play cynical party political games.”

Labour leader Ed Miliband recently adopted the mansion tax – a long-cherished Lib Dem policy – and challenged deputy prime minister Nick Clegg‘s party to break ranks.

Faced with a damaging Commons split, the coalition parties instead devised a compromise amendment that will allow them to remain together in the voting lobbies.

Vince Cable ‘Expected To Support Government’ On Mansion Tax, Says Downing Street

It specifically sets out that “the part of the coalition led by the deputy prime minister” advocates a mansion tax while “the party of the coalition led by the prime minister does not”.

Shadow Treasury minister Chris Leslie said: “It would be astonishing if the Liberal Democrats failed to back a straightforward motion supporting their long-held policy of a mansion tax on properties over £2 million.

“The Liberal Democrats have a simple choice: either they back the policy they set out in their manifesto and which Nick Clegg made the centerpiece of the Eastleigh by-election campaign or they don’t.

“No amount of wriggling or contortion can get them out of that simple choice.

“After supporting a Tory tax cut for millionaires, a failing economic plan, a VAT rise and a trebling of tuition fees, this is yet another example of why we should judge the Lib Dems on what they do, not what they say.”

Labour says it would use the proceeds of a mansion tax to fund the reintroduction of a 10p lower income tax rate.

But its motion did not make that link, to make it easier for the Lib Dems – who prefer the raising of thresholds to help low earners – to back it.

Cable had on several occasions declined to rule out voting with Labour if its motion fully reflected the policy he devised and has personally championed.

The Tories are firmly opposed.

“Parties should be judged on what they deliver on fairer taxes, rather than what they say about them,” Cable said.

“In government, Labour rubbished the Liberal Democrat policy of a mansion tax. In opposition, they have simply copied it exactly in an attempt to fill in their blank piece of paper where original policies should be.”

Kenny Urges Britain To Stay In The EU

0

Irish premier Enda Kenny has urged Britain to remain within the European Union.

The Taoiseach, in London for a series of engagements including talks with prime minister David Cameron, insisted Britain has much to gain from its membership.

enda kenny

Enda Kenny (right) watched by the Lord Mayor of London Alderman Roger Gifford, addresses a business event held at Mansion House

“We see the British relationship with the EU as being a two-way relationship – Britain benefits from its membership of the EU, and the EU is better off with Britain as a leading member making a valued contribution,” Mr Kenny said.

Ireland is more than half way through its six-month EU presidency term.

Its time at the helm also marks the 40th anniversary of both Ireland and Britain joining the EU.

Mr Kenny said while the country’s future is closely tied with Europe, its connection with Britain – its “nearest neighbours” – was stronger than ever.

Speaking during a whistle-stop trip to London, the Taoiseach insisted both nations were like-minded on numerous European issues such as the single market and trade.

He made the comments at a business event at the city’s Mansion House, where he also vowed that Ireland would act impartially during negotiations on the controversial financial transactions tax.

He said the state would use its position as EU president to facilitate the discussions, but would strike a careful balance in respecting both sides of the debate.

Ireland and Britain have both opted out of the tax, which is expected to generate up to €35 million (£30.5m) a year from the financial industry.

France and Germany are among 11 states that have signed up to the tax, which will see levies imposed on trades in shares and bonds.

Later, during a lunch at the British-Irish Chamber of Commerce at Savoy Place, Mr Kenny said Ireland looks to the British market as a place where its business could contribute to the state’s national recovery.

“For our part, Britain is our biggest market for key sectors such as food and beverages, and of course for tourism,” the Taoiseach said.

“Another way of looking at the scale and importance of the British market is that a tiny loss of exports to Britain – between a half and one per cent – would immediately wipe out the hard-won increase in our exports to the developing Brics (Brazil, Russia, India, China and South Africa) markets.”

Mr Kenny was also attending the London School of Economics and meeting David Cameron in Downing Street, where they were to review progress on a joint statement they signed last year aimed at developing British-Irish relations.

The pair were also planning to discuss current unrest in Northern Ireland following protests over the flying of the Union flag.

In an address to the London School of Economics later, Mr Kenny said Ireland and Britain had travelled a long distance together within the EU.

“The UK is an enormously important partner for us in Europe,” the Taoiseach said.

“We greatly value the contribution you make, and we look forward to it continuing long into the future. It is good for Europe, good for Ireland and, not least, good for the UK.”

Following the talks at Number 10, Mr Cameron said the two governments were determined to go “further and faster” in deepening relations.

“We are not letting our foot off the pedals; we want to go further and faster with this relationship and we have tasked our teams to identify more we can do to strengthen collaboration in specific sectors to boost growth,” he said.

Both leaders said they had instructed top civil servants to work up policy.

After the meeting, the pair went to the House of Commons for what the prime minister called “a small St Patrick’s Day celebration”.

The Taoiseach joked that he had handed over “the key” to beating Wales at rugby – ahead of the Six Nations decider with England in Cardiff.

Ireland are the only team to have beaten Wales in this year’s tournament so far.

“I’ll make sure I pass it on,” Mr Cameron quipped back.

10 Best Ways to Manage Your Anxiety

0

There are effective alternatives to medication.

March 11, 2013  |  

Like this article?

Join our email list:

Stay up to date with the latest headlines via email.

“I don’t think I want to live if I have to go on feeling like this.” I hear this remark all too often from anxiety sufferers. They say it matter-of-factly or dramatically, but they all feel the same way: if anxiety symptoms are going to rule their lives, then their lives don’t seem worth living.

What is it about anxiety that’s so horrific that otherwise high-functioning people are frantic to escape it?  The sensations of doom or dread or panic felt by sufferers are truly overwhelming–the very same sensations, in fact, that a person would feel if the worst really were happening. Too often, these, literally, dread-full, sickening sensations drive clients to the instant relief of medication, which is readily available and considered by many insurance companies to be the first line of treatment. And what good doctor would suggest skipping the meds when a suffering patient can get symptomatic relief quickly?

But what clients don’t know when they start taking meds is the unacknowledged cost of relying solely on pills: they’ll never learn some basic methods that can control or eliminate their symptoms without meds. They never develop the tools for managing the anxiety that, in all likelihood, will turn up again whenever they feel undue stress or go through significant life changes. What they should be told is that the right psychotherapy, which teaches them to control their own anxiety, will offer relief from anxiety in a matter of weeks–about the same amount of time it takes for an SSRI to become effective.

Of course, therapists know that eliminating symptomatology isn’t the same as eliminating etiology. Underlying psychological causes or triggers for anxiety, such as those stemming from trauma, aren’t the target of management techniques; they require longer-term psychotherapy. However, anxiety-management techniques can offer relief, and offer it very speedily.

The unpleasant symptoms most likely to be helped by medication are the very ones that the 10 best-ever anxiety-management techniques are intended to correct. They fall into three typical clusters:

– the physical arousal that constitutes the terror of panic;

– the “wired” feelings of tension that correlate with being “stressed out” and can include pit-of-the-stomach doom;

– the mental anguish of rumination–a brain that won’t stop thinking distressing thoughts.

A therapist armed with methods for addressing these clusters can offer her anxious client the promise of relief for a lifetime, if she knows which of these “10 best” techniques work for which symptoms, and how to use them.

Cluster One: Distressing Physical Arousal

Panic is the physical arousal that sends many clients running for Xanax. Sympathetic arousal causes the heart-thumping, pulse-racing, dizzy, tingly, shortness-of-breath physical symptoms that can come from out of the blue, and are intolerable when not understood. Even high levels of acute anxiety that aren’t as intense as outright panic attacks can constitute very painful states of arousal. Physical symptoms of anxiety include constant heightened physical tension in the jaw, neck, and back, as well as an emotional-somatic feeling of doom or dread in the pit of the stomach. The feeling of doom will always set off a mental search for what might be causing it.

Bad as these symptoms are, there are methods that, when followed regularly as lifelong habits, offer tremendous relief.

Method 1: Manage the Body.

Telling anxiety-prone clients to take care of their bodies by eating right, avoiding alcohol, nicotine, sugar, and caffeine, and exercising is a strikingly ordinary “prescription,” but not doing these things can undermine the effectiveness of other antianxiety techniques. During the summer before Ellie went off to college, for example, she’d almost eliminated her anxiety by practicing deep, calm breathing and learning to stop her catastrophic thinking. She’d even been able to stop taking the antianxiety medication she’d used for years. But two months after starting college, her panic attacks came roaring back with a vengeance.  She came back to see me, but quickly let me know that she was going to call her psychiatrist for another Xanax prescription. I suggested that, before she made the call, she spend a couple of weeks keeping a “panic profile”–a journal recording when and under what circumstances she suffered from panic attacks.

Archbishop Seeks To Defuse Welfare Row

0

The new Archbishop of Canterbury has backed away from a row with ministers over welfare changes – and admitted he used to claim benefits himself.

Justin Welby hailed Tory Work and Pensions Secretary Iain Duncan Smith for attempting a “brave” reform of “a system that most people admit is shot full of holes, wrong incentives, and incredible complexity”.

It comes after the Archbishop endorsed a letter at the weekend, signed by 43 bishops, that claimed capping benefit rises at 1% will have a “deeply disproportionate” effect on children.

Writing on his blog, he said: “Like many parish priests’ families, we got benefits, and it was incredibly complicated. For lots of people in the parishes where I worked, taking some extra hours of work could actually lower income; that is exactly the kind of thing that the move to universal credit aims to change.”

In an interview with the Sunday Telegraph he had said that “children and families will pay the price” if plans to change the system go ahead in their current form, leading Mr Duncan Smith to respond by saying the current system trapped millions in dependency.

The leader of the world’s Anglican Communion described Duncan Smith as a “a leading and principled expert on welfare”.

“The work and pensions secretary is also attempting this series of reforms at a time when, through no fault of his own, government finances are more squeezed than at any time in peace since the 1930s,” he wrote.

“And reforms cost money. So he also has to manage a considerable task.

“Having met him, I am absolutely convinced he is trying to do something that he knows more about than most – and with the best possible motives.

“But, with a number of other Bishops (and we tend to live in, or have lived in, or have clergy living in, the most affected parts of our country), I feel that the particular way the burden is being shared is wrong.”

Welby said he was not making a great, grand political gesture, but a “reasoned questioning of something that a lot of people are concerned about”, adding: “Perhaps a little less heat and a little more clarity would help.”

SEE ALSO:

Iain Duncan Smith Hits Back At Archbishop of Canterbury’s Comments

The archbishop, who will be formally enthroned at Canterbury Cathedral on 21 March, went on London radio station LBC on Monday evening, but the station said he declined to discuss welfare while on the drivetime show with Ian Dale.

Lambeth Palace was not immediately available for comment.

The archbishop, an Old Etonian former banker who sits on the Parliamentary Commission on Banking Standards, described the EU’s plan for a cap on bonuses as a “blunt instrument” that could lead to basic salaries – which are already very high – rising to make up the difference.

“I think there is a fundamental question though which I’ve been asking on the Banking Commission, together with loads of other people including people you wouldn’t describe as exactly left wing like Nigel Lawson and people like that, just questions about the overall level of pay in the banking world compared to the level of pay in other sectors of life,” he said.

“And there seems to be a big gap that we should be rather cautious about.”

US Tries to Control Outcome of Syrian War

0

Transcript

PAUL JAY, SENIOR EDITOR, TRNN: Welcome to The Real News Network. I’m Paul Jay in Baltimore.

Secretary of State John Kerry has been very active on his Syria file.

~~~

JOHN KERRY, U.S. SECRETARY OF STATE: So today, on behalf of President Obama, who has been very clear about the stakes in Syria, I am proud to announce that the United States of America will be providing an additional $60 million immediately in nonlethal assistance to support the coalition in its operational needs day to day as it continues to organize and work for the political transition that we all want to see.

~~~

JAY: Now joining us to talk about U.S. policy towards Syria is Omar Dahi. He’s an assistant professor of economics at Hampshire College in Amherst, Massachusetts. He’s also an editor at The Middle East Report. And he’s from Syria originally.

Thanks very much for joining us.

OMAR DAHI, ASSISTANT PROF. ECONOMICS, HAMPSHIRE COLLEGE: Thanks for having me.

JAY: So the United States announced that they were going to increase their level of indirect–or I should say direct but nonlethal support, whatever that actually means.

In an earlier interview, we talked about the sort of quandary of the American position. They’ve always been, it seems, a little bit betwixt and between. They would like to see Assad go. They would like to see a pro-Israeli government come to power in Syria. But now they’re not so sure who actually will come to power in Syria and whether it might not be more opposed to Israel than the current Assad government. And so we were saying that perhaps what the outside powers want right now is just ongoing civil war, ’cause they would like a weak Syria, perhaps not a new leadership. Does this announcement by the United States change your assessment about that in any way?

DAHI: Well, in a way it’s part of increasing U.S. attempts to assert itself in the Syrian crisis. Initially, I think over the first year, since the start of the uprising in March 2011, the U.S. stepped back and let its regional allies take the lead, meaning Turkey and the Gulf countries, Saudi Arabia and Qatar.

I think what we’ve seen since the summer, the past summer, of June 2012, especially with the signing of the Geneva Accords, is some sort of understanding with Russia. The Geneva Accords were with U.S. and Russian agreement. They were a six-point plan. And they basically did not specify Assad’s fate. They said there would be a transitional period. But they didn’t say anything about Assad himself. So the U.S. has no problem as long as the crisis is contained, as we mentioned last time.

But I think they’re trying to be more assertive, they’re trying to find a way to control the opposition more than they were able to in the past. If they are able to find a way to control the opposition, which so far they have not been able to–and it doesn’t look likely, given the fragmentation of the opposition inside Syria–but if they’re able to assert themselves more and control the pace of events, they may be trying to do so at this point. It’s hard to know what the latest announcement means, but I think it’s part of an attempt of the U.S. to take over directing the Syrian crisis from its allies.

JAY: And the meetings that took place recently, in Rome, I think, what came out of all of that?

DAHI: Well, basically nothing major came out of them, other than the fact that the Syrian opposition council that recently formed, thinking that as soon as they form, they will get massive aid from the U.S. and its allies as soon as the coalition was formed–but that aid did not materialize. So the Rome meeting was a desperate attempt by the Syrian opposition to ask for aid. And in particular, what the Syrian opposition is viewing, at least up until the last two days, was a stalemate in the fighting and a drying up of the resources of the rebels inside Syria.

Now, the slight change that happened over the last two days was that the rebels were able to take over Ar-Raqqah province, which is north-central Syria along the Euphrates. This is the first province in Syria that is now completely dominated by the rebels. Nevertheless, we’ve seen a stalemate in the fighting, a drying up of the resources of the rebels. And the Rome meetings were a desperate plea for help by the national opposition council.

JAY: How are the rebels able to control a whole province? The Syrian army has not fractured that much, has it? I know there’s been, you know, a fair number of desertions, but my understanding was the Syrian army was still mostly holding together, as well as its high command. How do the rebels able to do such a thing?

DAHI: So far they haven’t been able to do it very successfully. And the evidence is that after two years of fierce fighting, this is the first province that they’ve been able to take over completely.

Nevertheless, there seems to be an evolving military strategy by the regime, which is to withdraw into certain geographic locations, starting in Damascus in the south, moving up to Homs and central Syria, and up to the northwest, towards the coast, of clearing those zones and making them areas of solid control for the regime.

I think the regime seems to have, at this moment, at least, given up on controlling large parts of the Syrian territory, because they have been subjected to constant guerrilla attacks. What they resorted to doing is withdrawing from these areas and bombing them from the sky. Even the last couple of weeks, there were many reports of Scud missiles being launched from Damascus into Aleppo causing massive damage.

So the Syrian army is mostly intact. At least since over the past year, there haven’t been major defections, particularly no defections in the top. But they have evolved their military strategy on seizing certain areas and letting go of others.

JAY: It suggests–I mean, from what I know of guerrilla warfare, this suggests that there has to be a fair amount of popular support for these guerrillas, in spite–you know, Assad wants to make this look like there’s just a few marginal fighters out there, and most of them are foreigners and all this. But I don’t see how guerrillas take over a whole province unless they have fairly extensive popular support.

DAHI: Yes, in many areas they have extensive popular support. In other areas they did not have the support. For example, in Aleppo you did not find that kind of support from the residents of Aleppo, who did not want to be dragged into a fight they knew would be very destructive. I mean, many of the areas have really–even though they initially supported the rebels, they have gone to resent them because of the fact that every time the Free Syrian Army or the rebels enter an area, they know there will be massive retaliation by the regime and that area will be destroyed. And the regime has been doing that on purpose to make the costs of basically joining the rebels or sustaining the rebels prohibitive.

Nevertheless, in the vast majority of the rural areas of Syria, the rebels have tremendous amount of support. It’s not at all the way the Syrian regime tries to paint the picture, of course, of scattered armed groups. There was no way that they’d be able to basically sustain this level of fighting, wasn’t, there, a popular support and really, unfortunately in many ways, an unlimited supply of young people willing to fight against the regime, many of whom initially may not have been opposed to the regime but as a result of the massive repression turned against it.

JAY: And to what extent are the young people joining involved in sort of you could say the Islamic or militant Islamic sections of the fighters? Or is it kind of spread out throughout the various types of units, guerrilla units that are fighting?

DAHI: Well, it spread out. Initially there was the formation of the Free Syrian Army, which was mostly defected soldiers from the army, former soldiers, and other people who took up arms to initially defend themselves and then launch guerrilla attacks against the regime. But what we’ve seen since February and March 2012 is the rise of the Salafi jihadi groups, many of whom came from outside Syria. Some of them were in Iraq. Some of them had originally traveled from Syria to Iraq to fight the U.S. invasion, and in many ways Jabhat al-Nusra itself is viewed by many inside Syria to have been–basically with the aid of the Syrian intelligence themselves in 2003 and 2004–traveled to Iraq to fight the U.S. occupation.

Nevertheless, what we’ve seen over the past year is that Salafi jihadi groups are the most disciplined and the most skilled fighters. They have long experience. They are effective. Of course, they’re very brutal and they’re very ruthless, and many of them really don’t care about civilian casualties at all. But given the lack of ability of the Free Syrian Army to make progress against the regime, we’ve seen an increase of the popularity of these Salafi jihadi groups, so much so that really the borders between them and the other Free Syrian Army are very porous.

Many groups claim to be Salafi and jihadi just to attract funding, because that’s what brings funding from the Gulf. Many groups, many youth who are really alienated from the ability of the Free Syrian Army to make headway now find this determination and effectiveness of these Salafi groups appealing. Of course, this is increasing the radicalization and the sectarianization of the conflict itself, but it’s part of this evolving dynamic of the uprising.

JAY: And in terms of the funding coming come from the Gulf, we touched on this in a previous interview. But how much difference is there now between the strategy of Qatar and Saudi Arabia, especially when it comes to funding jihadist and Salafi groups?

DAHI: I think there is a split that has increased over time, with Qatar trying to be very selective in who it’s funding, although that was not the case, perhaps, originally so, but, with U.S. agreement, trying to be more selective, and Saudi Arabia, or at least sources within Saudi Arabia (it’s not very clear), being the main source of funding to the various jihadi groups and perhaps Jabhat al-Nusra itself.

There’s also many sources of funding that are going to different groups that are really uncoordinated. For example, there are individual sheikhs or princes trying to make a name for themselves inside Syria by funding their own Salafi jihadi groups. There was a recent article in The London Review of Books by the Guardian correspondent that talked about how to form your own jihadi group, and it’s basically you can, you know, gather some funding, pick a few fighters from previous–Free Syrian Army or other groups, and there you go.

So in many ways it’s fertile ground for the formation of these groups. And the funding coming from the Gulf has exacerbated the presence of these radicals.

JAY: Now, the Saudi government kind of plays this game, don’t they not, like, the–you know, sort of officially the Saudi government isn’t doing this. On the other hand, the Saudi intelligence, I would think, knows just about everything going on in Saudi Arabia, and if they wanted to stop any particular Saudi prince from supporting this or some other activity–and there’s lots of, you know, evidence about individual Saudi princes even being connected to the 9/11 events here–they could have stopped them. But isn’t that part of their strategy, to kind of have a public face here and a private face doing all kinds of things?

DAHI: Absolutely. And I think it’s been very clear that from the very start Saudi Arabia has supported overthrowing the regime in Syria at any costs. They see this, quite frankly, as a proxy war with Iran. They want to weaken Iran. They want to weaken Hezbollah. And the recent increasing hostility between some Free Syrian Army groups and Hezbollah–in fact, some possible attacks on Hezbollah troops that the Free Syrian claimed are inside Syria–may be a further push to show that really this funding is being directed mostly at destroying the regime at any cost, really with no regard to what’s happening inside Syria itself. It’s a proxy war.

JAY: Yeah. And, in fact, if groups came to power in Syria that were more antagonistic to Israel, I don’t think Saudi Arabia minds, not from the point of view that the Saudis are really antagonistic to Israel, ’cause I think they have all kinds of backdoor dealings going on with Israel. But it gives them another card to play: oh, we’ll control these guys that are in Syria now; you’re going to need us even more. It gives the Saudis even a more prominent role in this situation.

DAHI: Here’s where you see–exactly. Here’s where you see the divergence between U.S.-Israeli interests on the one hand and Saudi Arabia on the other hand. Saudi Arabia doesn’t have to pay the costs of these groups coming to power. Of course, they’re, as you said, implicit allies with Israel, given their alliances with the U.S. and all sorts of backdoor deals between the two. But, yes, it’s another way of extending Saudi Wahhabi influence, as they have tried elsewhere.

JAY: And, of course, who pays the price for all this is the Syrian people, who are in the midst of one of the greatest humanitarian disasters of recent decades.

Thanks very much for joining us, Omar.

DAHI: Thanks for having me.

JAY: And thank you for joining us on The Real News Network.

End

DISCLAIMER: Please note that transcripts for The Real News Network are typed from a recording of the program. TRNN cannot guarantee their complete accuracy.

Is Alcohol the New Short Skirt?

0

Attitudes about women’s alcohol consumption haven’t changed much. Women who drink are still perceived as being “promiscuous,” “easy,” or more sexually available.

Photo Credit: Shutterstock.com

March 11, 2013  |  

Like this article?

Join our email list:

Stay up to date with the latest headlines via email.

Well they’re packed pretty tight in here tonight
I’m looking for a dolly who’ll see me right
I may use a little muscle to get what I need
I may sink a little drink and shout out “She’s with me!”

–– Elton John, “Saturday Night’s Alright for Fighting“

Alcohol is a game-changer when it comes to rape. If a woman was drinking when she was raped, she will be doubted and told it was her fault. Like Hester Prynne, she’ll be shamed and blamed. Society will force her to wear the Scarlet Letter A, for alcohol.

Friends, family, and if she goes to court, lawyers and judges, will scrutinize her behavior. She will be bombarded with questions. How much did you drink? Were you drunk? Were you binge drinking? Why were you drunk and alone with him? These questions are asked to establish that the woman set herself up to be raped because she consumed alcohol. And you can never trust an intoxicated woman because she really doesn’t remember what happened. It is classic blame-the-victim.

Drink and get raped, and you are chucked into the “alcohol-rape closet.” I was: After a long night of drinking at a bar, I got in a car with a man who later pulled out a knife and said he would use it if I didn’t do what he told me to. For years I blamed myself for getting raped because I was drunk. I believed that if I hadn’t been drinking, I never would have been raped. 

I’m not alone. Alcohol is involved in a staggering number of sex crimes. In a national study of college students, 75% of males and 55% of females involved in date rape had been drinking or using other drugs prior to the sexual assault. 

According to a study done by the National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism: “At least one-half of all violent crimes involve alcohol consumption by the perpetrator, the victim, or both. Researchers have consistently found that men who have been drinking alcohol commit approximately one-half of all sexual assaults. Depending on the sample studied and the measures used, the estimates for alcohol use among perpetrators have ranged from 34 to 74 percent. Similarly, approximately one-half of all sexual assault victims report that they were drinking alcohol at the time of the assault, with estimates ranging from 30 to 79 percent.”

The leading rape myth used to be about what a woman was wearing. The twisted logic goes like this: Women who wear provocative clothing are sluts who are “asking for it.” But the feminist movement has seriously chipped away at this rape myth.

Thousands of women in Muslim countries who wear the burqa, hijab, and dress modestly are raped and sexually assaulted. In India according to the National Crime Registry, a woman is raped every 20 minutes. Egypt’s Interior Ministry reports that 20,000 women and girls are raped every year. Engy Ghozlan of the Egyptian Center for Women’s Rights anti-harassment campaign said, “If the Ministry of the Interior gets 20,000 then you should multiply it by 10.” The United Nations Population Fund in Afghanistan reports that about 25 percent of Afghan women face sexual violence. (Note that alcohol is prohibited in most Muslim countries.)

Serving in the military escalates the risk of being raped. It’s been described as a “target rich environment” for sex crimes. In 2011, there were over 22,800 sexual assaults and it’s estimated that 20 percent of all active-duty female soldiers have been sexually assaulted. Military sexual trauma is not taken seriously by the Pentagon or military courts. A class-action lawsuit brought against the military by sexual assault survivors was dismissed by a court that ruled “rape is an occupational hazard of the military.” 

Why Chavez Chose Social Safety Net Over Skyscrapers

0

Since news broke last week of the death of Venezuelan president Hugo Chavez, reactions to that leader’s passing have been pouring in. While many argue that Chavez did incredible things for Venezuela and its people, there are those, especially here in the US, who don’t have such a rosy view of the former leader.

That’s where Associated Press business reporter Pamela Sampson comes in.

In a piece from last Tuesday, speaking about the legacy of Chavez, Sampson wrote that, “Chavez invested Venezuela’s oil wealth into social programs including state-run food markets, cash benefits for poor families, free health clinics and education programs. But those gains were meager compared with the spectacular construction projects that oil riches spurred in glittering Middle Eastern cities, including the world’s tallest building in Dubai and plans for branches of the Louvre and Guggenheim museums in Abu Dhabi.”

You heard that right.

Sampson appears to be arguing that providing healthcare, education and employment opportunities for millions of people is far less important than flaunting your wealth for the entire world to see. Lifting an entire nation out of crippling poverty is nothing compared to building a big glitzy building or opening up a new museum.

Now, if these were the feelings of just one journalist, we could move on. But the problem is that these sentiments are echoed throughout our country. Oil corporations have become so powerful and influential in our society that the idea of nationalizing our oil and using the money from it — the way the Venezuelans, the Saudis, and the Norwegians (among others) do — to help the American people is, according to conventional wisdom, crazy and absurd.

This is the reason why, up until Chavez’s death, the U.S and Venezuela had frosty relations at best. Chavez’s decision to use his nation’s vast sums of oil wealth to help his people, instead of adding to the bottom-lines of corporations, irked many U.S. politicians and government officials.

But what’s really going on here? Why do so many Americans believe that corporate luxury is more important than “life, liberty, and the pursuit of happiness”?

In a society, achieving safety and security is step one.

For hundreds of thousands of years, humans achieved safety and security by giving it to others, and getting it in return. And similarly, the more safety and security you gave to people, the higher status you achieved. Archeologists call societies like this “Potlatch societies,” as status is gained by giving away as much as you can at giant feasting parties called Potlatches.

This is only a slight variation on the model that Hugo Chavez used in Venezuela,
and it’s why his people loved him so much. By using his nation’s oil wealth to give Venezuelans access to education, healthcare, improved housing and better living conditions, Chavez gave safety and security to millions of people, and was rewarded with high levels of admiration and respect.

Unfortunately, our modern society has become infected with a sort of cultural mental illness. The late professor of Native American studies at UC Davis, Jack Forbes, told me his people called it wetiko, a Native American word meaning “cannibal” or “thief.”

In western society, we get safety and security from making money, and then using that to buy goods and services. The more goods and services you produced, the more you were paid, and the more you were paid, the more you were able to purchase to help achieve safety and security.

This is the model that America has today. And, in its extremely mentally ill form, it’s why some billionaires say things like “I only have $30 billion. Once I have $40 billion, I’ll be happy.” And it’s why Americans might think that shiny skyscrapers are more important than the social welfare of an entire nation.

But let’s look at the numbers behind these two approaches to safety and security.

Before Hugo Chavez was president, according to the British newspaper The Guardian, unemployment in Venezuela was at 15%. As of 2009, it was at 7.6 %.

Before Hugo Chavez was president, extreme poverty was at 23.4%. As of 2011, it was at 8.5%

Meanwhile, here in the United States, millions of Americans are consistently unemployed each year. And, in the last 15 years, extreme poverty in the United States
has doubled. The number of U.S. households living on less than $2 per person a day, which is known as the “extreme poverty” line, more than doubled between 1996 and 2011, from 636,000 to 1.46 million

And, according to the latest Census Bureau data, a staggering 50 percent of Americans are either low-income or living below the poverty line.

The numbers here paint a pretty clear picture: The Chavez approach to governance, and his Robin Hood-esque mentality worked for Venezuela.

During 14 years in office, Chavez managed to drastically improve the lives of Venezuelans, while rebuilding an entire nation. He knew that the best way to achieve safety and security was not by constructing lavish buildings, but through maintaining a strong social safety net and ensuring that Venezuelans had the resources they needed to survive.

America should take a page out of the Chavez playbook.

Every Americans should have a comfortable baseline from which to survive and prosper. That means protecting this nation’s social safety net, and strengthening programs like Social Security and Medicare. It also means raising the minimum wage, and making it a living wage, so that Americans can provide for themselves, and for their families.

A country is only as strong as its people. It’s time that America was strong again.

Britain seeking to disengage Iranians

0

British govt. conspiring to disengage Iranian nation from govt.

The UK authorities are seeking to depict that the Iranian system’s nuclear policy is irrational and that if the system changes its nuclear policy the economic problems will be resolved.

The desperate attempt was uncovered during a briefing British Foreign Office Political Director Simon Gass and the country’s representative to the talks between Iran and Group 5+1, has recently had with anti-revolutionary media outlets in London.

Gass held an exclusive briefing session with four anti-Iranian websites and media outlets, including Jaras, Roozonline, Radio Farda, and Mihan on Sunday, and briefed their representatives about the real intentions behind UK talks with Iran.

The unconventional meeting of Gass with anti-Iranian media has sparked various significant analyses in Tehran, first of which is that the foreign-based anti-revolutionary media outlets enjoy deep-rooted relations with the UK government.

The meeting comes as many credible media outlets in the west could hardly reach the G5+1 negotiators, and Gass’s explanatory briefing with anti-revolutionary media is indicative of deep-rooted relations between them and the UK government.

Britain as part of the so-called Group 5+1 countries, including the United States, Britain, France, Russia and China plus Germany, has a pre-planned, comprehensive program to address the Iranian nation in a desperate attempt to disengage them from the government over the country nuclear energy program.

Gass used a language in the briefing which was aimed at depicting the Iranian system’s nuclear policy as irrational and that if the system changes its nuclear policy the economic problems will be resolved.

Rich presence of Alan Eyre, U.S. Persian-speaking Secretary of State Spokesman in Almaty talks, and Gass’s briefing with anti-Iranian media outlets in London after the talks expose the conspiracy that the West is seeking to play a game with the Iranian nation’s public opinion rather than engaging in real diplomacy with the Islamic Republic. And this is the best evidence to uncover West’s true intentions behind a new phase of diplomacy with Iran.

Ultimately, this shows that the UK and G5+1 are relying on foreign-based anti-Iranian groups to reach out to the Iranian nation, and they do not want to recognize that those groups lack any capability to have an impact on Iran’s internal variables.

MOL/HE

‘Turkish gun sales boom in US’

0

Every year, more than 30,000 people are shot and killed in the US.

A large number of Americans have rushed to purchase the Turkish-made firearms as gun control restrictions loom in the country.

The Turkish defense and aerospace industry has amplified its sales of guns and industrial goods sold to the United States for the months of January and February this year, a 5.6 percent mark-up since the same period last year, reported Hurriyet Daily News.

“Turkey could easily achieve its USD 25 billion arms trade target by 2023, with five or six Turkish companies ranking among the top 100 arms companies,” said Aral Alis, chairman of the Union of Defense and Aerospace Industry Exporters, earlier this week.

America has become the top market for Turkish firearms, motivated by potential gun control measures initiated by US President Barack Obama.

Following the Newtown shooting spree, Obama appointed Biden to lead an effort to find proposals “to reduce the epidemic of gun violence.”

On December 14, 2012, a 20-year-old man, identified as Adam Lanza, killed twenty children and six adults before pointing the gun at himself at Sandy Hook Elementary School in Newtown, Connecticut.

There have been several deadly shootings across the United States over the past few months, putting the issue of lax gun control laws back in the spotlight.

Every year, more than 30,000 people are shot and killed in the US.

The US averages 87 gun deaths each day as a function of gun violence, with an average of 183 injured, according to the University of Chicago Crime Lab and the Centers for Disease Control.

The year 2012 has been a record-setting year for gun sales in the US.

About 4.5 million firearms are sold annually in the United States at a cost of 2 to 3 billion dollars.

GMA/JR

On the News With Thom Hartmann: 200,000 Taiwanese Publicly Protested Nuclear Power on Saturday, and More

0

In today’s On the News segment: Legislation that would penalize employers for lockouts in labor disputes introduced in Minnesota, and more.

Thom Hartmann here — on the news…

You need to know this. Republicans hate tax increases… unless they’re part of Paul Ryan’s budget plan. Six hundred billion dollars in new revenue, fought for by President Obama and opposed by Congressional Republicans, is just one of the many surprises in Paul Ryan’s new GOP budget. According to Republican Representative Jason Chaffetz, new revenue generated from ending the Bush tax cuts for the very wealthy is included in the GOP plan because Republicans lost on the tax issue. Despite their doomsday predictions that Obama’s tax plan would crush so-called job-creators and harm the economy, Republicans are now happy to make them part of the Paul Ryan budget. In prior years, when Democrats projected $600 billion in savings from decreased war spending, Paul Ryan dismissed the idea as “phantom savings” – yet now he has those very same projections as part of his own budget proposal. Despite incorporating multiple Obama policies in their budget, don’t think Republicans are giving up on their austerity measures just yet. In typical GOP fashion, Ryan’s budget calls for huge cuts to vital social service programs, like food stamps, job training, Medicare, and Medicaid. And just in case those cuts wouldn’t be painful enough, Ryan’s entire budget hinges on the repeal of Obamacare. Without defunding healthcare for millions of Americans, his numbers don’t add up. Considering the fact that Obama has repeatedly said he would veto any attempt to repeal the Affordable Care Act, and Democrats in the Senate would block any such legislation, we can only conclude that Paul Ryan knows his budget is doomed to fail. It’s clear that Republicans have no intention of working with the President to negotiate an honest, realistic budget plan. Ryan’s budget is a farce, aimed at scoring political points with the tea party base, rather than helping the American people .

In screwed news… The U.S. Government has notified 60,000 border security workers that they will soon face furloughs because of Republican austerity measures. Customs and Border Protection must cut $754 million from it’s budget by September 30th, meaning international travelers can expect longer lines at airports, huge delays at ports, and fewer border patrol officers at international checkpoints. The agency aims to reduce spending through furloughs, a hiring freeze, reductions in overtime hours, and reduced levels of training. Homeland Security Secretary Janet Napolitano expects customs wait times to increase by 150-200%, and she said, “I don’t mean to scare, I mean to inform. If you’re traveling, get to the airport earlier than you otherwise would. There’s only so much we can do with personnel.” Despite GOP claims that they favor strong boarder security, tax break security for millionaires and billionaires appears to mean even more to them. Republican obstinacy on the sequester is putting our national security in jeopardy, just to be sure their rich buddies never have to pay their fair share.

In the best of the rest of the news…

In Minnesota, employers may have to think twice about using worker lockouts during labor disputes. Lockouts have long been a common employer tactic in Minnesota, but state Representative Joe Atkins has introduced legislation to protect workers, and charge employers a penalty for keeping employees from their jobs. The Employer Lockout Accountability Act has bipartisan support in the Minnesota state legislature, and grew out of the American Crystal Sugar lockout, which has been ongoing since August of 2011. The Minnesota AFL-CIO has expressed support for the legislation, saying that the impact of lockouts stretches well beyond those who are kept from work. The AFL-CIO secretary-treasurer, Steve Hunter, said, “there’s a community effect beyond just the workers themselves, and we thank that, by ensuring some economic security for those workers, we can help mitigate those community effects as well.” With our right to organize being attacked in so many states throughout our nation, it’s nice to see Rep. Atkins working to protect unionized workers in Minnesota.

On Saturday, 200,000 people took to the streets of Taiwan to protest nuclear power. Just two days before the two year anniversary of the meltdown of Japan’s Fukushima nuclear power plant, protesters demanded their government stop allocating funding for a fourth nuclear power plant in New Taipei City. More than 6.5 million people live in close proximity to the plant, which is scheduled to be completed later this year — after 14 years of construction and about $10 billion of taxpayer money. One organizer in the protest said, “we have to take to the streets for the good of the next generation.” After disasters like Chernobyl and Fukushima, it’s easy to understand how dangerous nuclear energy is. Let’s join with the 200,000 protesters in Taiwan, and take a stand for the good of the next generation of Americans too. No nukes!

Despite the flurry of people rushing out to buy assault weapons, and reports of empty shelves at gun stores, fewer Americans are purchasing guns. According to new data from the General Social Survey, people who already own guns are simply buying more. While 50% of households owned guns in the 1970’s, only 34% reported guns in the home by 2012. Addressing the record sales levels at gun stores, Daniel Webster, the director of the Johns Hopkins Center for Gun Policy and Research, said, “I suspect the increase in gun sales has been limited mostly to current gun owners.” If the NRA and it’s fellow gun-nuts hadn’t blocked commonsense regulations like a national gun registry, we could verify this data. Let’s keep pushing Congress to enact some real gun reforms, before the gun-nuts have a chance to hoard any more fire power.

And finally… On Saturday, bikers in San Francisco bared it all for the environment. Protestors of all shapes and sizes came out in the buff to take part in the World Naked Bike Ride, which is an international demonstration against our dependence on fossil fuels. Riders were warned that a new law prohibited public nudity, but risked citations to bring attention to this important cause. Although this type of protest may not be for everyone, we applaud those brave enough to bare all for green energy. And we hope they remembered the sun block.

And that’s the way it is today — Monday, March 11, 2013. I’m Thom Hartmann — on the news.

The Grand Bargain We Don’t Need

0

President Obama has been meeting with small groups of Republican senators and representatives in an effort to reduce the damage of the so-called sequester — the $85 billion in automatic budget cuts that took effect March 1. But these meetings, if successful, are likely to lead to greater economic and political damage, in the form of a “grand bargain” to cut Social Security and Medicare in exchange for some reductions in tax preferences.

This is a bad idea for several reasons.

First, in these deals, it’s usually Democrats who get taken to the cleaners. Republican leaders insist that their rank and file members will never vote for progressive tax increases, so the tax part of the bargain tends to focus on closing minor loopholes while Republicans demand major spending cuts in return.

Secondly, the sequester is a grave problem not just because the cuts are automatic, but because they are a down payment on a decade of budget cuts that both President Obama and the Republicans have embraced. If we trade the $85 billion of automatic cuts in the sequester for $85 billion of some other cuts, the impact on the economy is just as depressive.

President Obama’s own proposals support $4 trillion of deficit cuts over a decade, only slightly less than what Republicans demand. The deal that he made over New Years weekend to spare the economy the “fiscal cliff” cut taxes by over $3 billion. Some of this extended the Bush tax cuts for 99 percent of taxpayers, but a lot if it was in the continuation of tax loopholes for the well-off. Massive spending cuts are already baked into the cake for the next decade.

Third, Social Security and Medicare outlays are not what ails the economy, and the two programs tend to be wrongly lumped together in discussions of “entitlement reform.” A characteristic recent piece in the Washington Post by liberal deficit hawks Isabel Sawhill and Harry Holzer substantially blames progressives for the current fiscal stalemate:

The reluctance of our fellow progressives to consider sensible reforms to entitlement programs is puzzling. Progressives must begin to acknowledge a hard fact: Our very expensive retirement programs already crowd out public spending on virtually all other priorities — including programs for the poor and those that strengthen the nation’s future

Sawhill and Holzer go on to argue that since Republicans will resist higher taxes, Social Security and Medicare are the main place to look for budget savings.

This line of argument is misleading on several grounds. It isn’t Social Security and Medicare that are killing other social programs, but Republican refusal to support them.

The ratio of public debt to GDP is roughly stable for the next decade. If we begin making cuts now, whether in Social Security and Medicare, or in other outlays, we will slow the recovery. That will only worsen the debt ratio over the long term, and at a depressed level of economic output.

Republicans do resist higher taxes, but at times Democrats have prevailed in raising taxes on the rich — with the full support of the voters. President Clinton managed it in 1993, and even President Obama, though he settled for too skimpy a bargain, got Republicans to vote for a $630 billion tax hike on the top one percent last January. Faced with a choice of cuts in Social Security and Medicare or tax increases on the wealthy, polls show that most voters opt for the taxes.

Social Security and Medicare face entirely different fiscal challenges. As even a budget-balancer like former OMB chief Peter Orszag has acknowledged, the current Social Security program will face cost increases of only about one percentage point of GDP over the next 75 years, largely because of the aging of the population.

We can bring the program into balance by lifting the lid on incomes subject to payroll taxes. Since Social Security is financed by taxes on wages, the program would be nicely in surplus of wages began rising with productivity again, as they did in the 30 years after World War II.

Medicare faces larger deficits, but mainly because it co-exists with a heavily commercialized larger health system. A remarkable piece in Time magazine, by Steven Brill, “Why Medical Bills Are Killing Us,” explains how hospitals and doctors charge astronomical fees that have no connection to their actual costs. A single-payer system — Medicare for all — could drastically reduce the rate of medical inflation.

When someone like Dr. Sidney Wolfe of Public Citizen, or Sen. Bernie Sanders, or former New England Journal of Medicine Marcia Angell, calls for single payer insurance as the solution to our health mess, they are starry-eyed socialists. When Time magazine stumbles on this reality, it’s news.

But whacking Medicare, either to pay for the sins of the rest of the health-industrial complex or to compensate for the Republican refusal to tax the rich, it is utterly perverse.

This supposed grand bargain, long promoted by centrist deficit hawks and their Wall Street allies, is bad economics, bad social policy, and bad politics for Democrats. So far, only the refusal on the part of Republicans to entertain more than the most token of tax increases on the rich as part of a bargain has saved Obama from himself.

© 2013 Demos

US expels two Venezuelan envoys

0

US President Barack Obama. (File photo)

The United States has expelled two Venezuelan diplomats in retaliation for Caracas’ removal of two US military attaches last week.

US officials made the announcement on Monday as experts forecasted little chance of a sudden improvement in relations with Venezuela given its upcoming election.

US President Barack Obama’s administration expelled diplomats Orlando Jose Montanez Olivares and Victor Camacaro Mata on Saturday in a tit-for-tat move against Venezuela’s expulsion of David Delmonaco and a second US official.

Montanez served as an official at the embassy in Washington, with Camacaro having served in Venezuela’s consulate in New York.

Venezuelan Vice President Nicolas Maduro expelled the two US officials last week for meeting with Venezuelan military officials and plotting to destabilize the oil-rich South American country.

He accused David Delmonaco, an Air Force attaché for the US Embassy in Caracas, of seeking military assistance for a plot against the government, adding that Delmonaco had been spying on Venezuela’s military outfits.

Meanwhile, Venezuelan Foreign Minister Elias Jaua said a second US Embassy official had been declared “persona non grata” and that he had 24 hours to leave the country.

This comes as the South American nation prepares for an April election to choose a successor for late Venezuelan President Hugo Chavez.

Chavez died at a military hospital in Caracas on March 5 at the age of 58 after a two-year battle with cancer.

The Venezuelan vice president said “We have no doubt that commander [Hugo] Chavez was attacked with this illness,” and someday there will be “scientific proof” that Chavez had been infected by “imperialist” enemies.

Venezuela and the US have withdrawn their ambassadors posted in each other’s capitals in 2010. Chavez rejected the US nominee at the time, accusing him of making disrespectful remarks about the government. Washington later revoked the visa of Venezuela’s ambassador to the US.

Chavez founded the movement of Bolivarian Revolution to establish popular democracy and economic independence and equitably distribute wealth in Latin America. He was one of the key players in the progressive movement that has swept across Latin America over the past few years.

GMA/JR

Price for Denial, Inaction on Climate Is Higher Than Toll of Reducing Consumption

0

For Tad Patzek, Peak Oil – not climate change – poses the greatest risk to human health and survival on Earth.

The chair of the Department of Petroleum and Geosystems Engineering at the University of Texas and co-author with Joseph Tainter of Drilling Down: The Gulf Oil Debacle

and Our Energy Dilemma, Patzek does not deny climate change or the notion that the human use of CO2 has helped caused it. It’s just that climate change has already been set in motion, and it will take 80,000 to 100,000 years to reverse it. This is, the Polish-born Patzek says, “for us, an infinite time.”

In the grand scheme of things then, the more immediate threat to human health, economies and quality of life is when our transportation systems’ need for oil outpaces our civilization’s ability to refine it.

“People need to realize that this is a finite resource, and using it in the crazy, irresponsible ways we use it today is in fact suicidal – suicidal within one generation,” Patzek says.

Communicating complex scientific realities and telling people bad news is difficult in a world where people are increasingly distracted by the requirements of daily life and the offerings of an enormous amusement industry. But we either choose to change our consumption now or soon we will have no choice.

“Take your picks,” Patzek says.

We Must Make the Whole Planet a ‘Nuclear Free Zone’

0

With the second anniversary of the Fukushima Daiichi nuclear disaster this week, with North Korea having just threatened a “pre-emptive nuclear attack” against the United States and a U.S. senator saying this would result in “suicide” for North Korea, with Iran suspected of moving to build nuclear weapons, with the continuing spread of nuclear technology globally, the future looks precarious as to humankind and the atom.

Can humanity at this rate make it through the 21st Century?

We were only able to get through the 20th Century without a major nuclear weapons exchange­ without atomic doomsday ­by the skin of our teeth.

With more nations having the ability to construct nuclear weapons­ and any country with a nuclear power facility has the materiel and trained personnel to make nuclear weapons­ the likelihood of this luck running out is high.

The only realistic way to secure a future for the world without nuclear war is for the entire planet to become a nuclear-free zone­. No nuclear weapons, no nuclear power.

Radical? Yes, but consider the even more radical alternative: a world where many nations will be able to construct nuclear weaponry because they possess nuclear power technology. The only real way to end the threat of nuclear weapons spreading throughout the world is to abolish nuclear weaponry and eliminate nuclear power. Consider the alternative: trying to keep using carrots and sticks, juggling on the road to inevitable nuclear catastrophe.

There are major regions of the Earth–the entireties of Africa and South America, the South Pacific and others–that are Nuclear-Weapon-Free Zones because of regional treaties recognized by the United Nations. In 1975, the UN General Assembly passed a resolution defining a Nuclear-Weapon Free Zone as an area with the “total absence of nuclear weapons” and establishing “an international system of verification and control…to guarantee compliance with the obligations deriving from [this] statute.”  

But if we are truly to have a world free of the horrific threat of nuclear weapons, the goal needs to be more than zones without them. A world free of the other side of the nuclear coin­nuclear power ­is also necessary.

Any nuclear power facility can serve as a nuclear bomb factory.

That’s how India got the atomic bomb in 1974. Canada supplied a reactor for “peaceful purposes” and the U.S. Atomic Energy Commission trained Indian engineers. And lo and behold, India had nuclear weapons.

Some will say putting the atomic genie back into the bottle is impossible. However, anything people have done other people can undo­, especially if the reason is good. And the prospect of massive loss of life from nuclear destruction is the best of reasons.

There’s a precedent in the outlawing of poison gas after World War I when its terrible impacts were tragically demonstrated. Chlorine gas, mustard gas, phosphene gas killed thousands on both sides of the conflict. 

The Geneva Protocol of 1925 and the Chemicals Weapons Convention of 1933 outlawed chemical warfare and to a large degree the prohibition has held.

As for the connection between purportedly “peaceful” atomic energy and nuclear weapons, physicist Amory Lovins and attorney Hunter Lovins spell it out well in their book Energy/War: Breaking the Nuclear Link.  “All nuclear fission technologies both use and produce fissionable materials that are or can be concentrated. Unavoidably latent in those technologies, therefore, is a potential for nuclear violence and coercion which may be exploited by governments, factions,” they write.

“Little strategic material is needed to make a weapon of mass destruction. A Nagasaki-yield bomb can be made from a few kilograms of plutonium, a piece the size of a tennis ball,” they note. A large nuclear power plant “annually produces hundreds of kilograms of plutonium; a large fast breeder reactor would contain thousands of kilograms; a large reprocessing plant may separate tens of thousands.”

Civilian nuclear power technology, they emphasize, provides the way to make nuclear weapons, furnishing the materiel and personnel. Nuclear weapons non-proliferation, they say, requires “civil denuclearization.”

As to claims of the energy generated by nuclear power plans being necessary, that’s not true. Safe, clean, renewable energy­led by solar and wind energy technologies­is available to provide all the power the world needs.

Among entities focusing on this is the organization Go 100% which on its website says: “Across the globe­in regions, cities, communities, businesses, and individual lives­people are proving that 100% renewable energy is not a fantasy for someday, but a reality today….The conventional fossil and nuclear energy system has led to multiple convergent existential crises, including climate change, air and water pollution, destruction of the oceans, the threat of mass extinction, water and food shortages, poverty, nuclear radiation problems, nuclear weapons proliferation, fuel depletion, and geopolitical problems.” Go 100% provides details on the abundant research determining that the world can fully power itself with safe, clean, renewable energy, and what’s happening in nations­, particularly Germany­, now moving toward that goal.

The dangers of nuclear power, ­in addition to permitting the development of nuclear weapons by any nation that has it­, are immense.

As he retired from the Navy in 1982, Admiral Hyman Rickover, considered the “father” of the U.S. nuclear navy who was also in charge of building the first U.S. commercial nuclear power plant, in Shippingport, Pennsylvania, told a Congressional committee that inherent in nuclear power is radioactivity which made life impossible on Earth. Until a few billion years ago, Rickover told the panel, “it was impossible to have any life on Earth; that is, there was so much radiation on Earth you couldn’t have any life­, fish or anything.” Then, gradually, “the amount of radiation on this planet and probably in the entire system reduced and made it possible for some form of life to begin.”

“Now,” he went on, by utilizing nuclear power, “we are creating something which nature tried to destroy to make life possible…Every time you produce radiation,” a “horrible force” is unleashed, “in some cases for billions of years, and I think there the human race is going to wreck itself.”

Having seen the light after decades of being deeply involved in nuclear technology, Rickover said: “I’m talking about humanity, ­the most important thing we could do is to start in having an international meeting where we first outlaw nuclear weapons to start off with, then we outlaw nuclear reactors, too.”

As for nuclear weapons, he said: “The lesson of history is when a war starts, every nation will ultimately use whatever weapon has been available. That is the lesson learned time and again. Therefore, we must expect, if another war­, a serious war ­breaks out, we will use nuclear energy in some form” and “we will probably destroy ourselves.”

Planet Earth must be a nuclear-free zone­ without nuclear weapons, without nuclear power ­if the human race and other life forms are to survive.

An Addition to the Climate Movement-Civil Disobedience Toolkit

0

Protesters engage in civil disobedience at the White House to demonstrate against the Keystone XL pipeline.Protesters engage in civil disobedience at the White House to demonstrate against the Keystone XL pipeline. (Photo: Cool Revolution)

On February 13, 48 of the nation’s environmental and civil rights leaders got arrested in front of the White House to draw attention to climate change and the proposed Keystone XL Pipeline. Many dubbed the action “civil disobedience.” Four days later some 40,000 people followed with peaceful protest. Peaceful protest, a tactic utilized by the civil rights movement, has been introduced into the climate movement. A similar parallel, however, cannot be drawn between the action of the 48 leaders and the form of civil disobedience performed by the civil rights movement.

Civil disobedience is the conscious refusal to obey an unjust law. Rosa Parks performed this form of civil disobedience when she refused to give up her seat. She broke the unjust law that she wanted to change. The 48 leaders who want to change the laws that privilege

oil and gas corporations to extract, transport and sell North American fossil fuel were arrested for blocking a throughway in front of the White House.

The climate movement’s use of the stricter form of civil disobedience, when the unjust law is the one being broken, is still emerging. Rosa Parks was able to civilly disobey by simply refusing to stand. The body of law that privileges the fossil fuel industry is harder to break, but it can be, with precision.

Should an American community elevate its community right to democratically protect its health, safety and welfare above the legal privileges that permit corporate oil and gas extraction and transportation, the community would confront the body of law that the climate movement is trying to change. Such action would introduce novel rights into America’s legal structure, just as the civil rights movement did, and expose the fact that under current law exercising these rights is illegal.

This type of civil disobedience has been described as “collective, nonviolent, civil disobedience through local lawmaking” by Kai Huschke of the Community Environmental Legal Defense Fund, an organizer working to implement the concept in Spokane, Washington. The creation of these laws entails entire cities’ or communities’ defiance of the structure of law that privileges the fossil fuel industry. This might sound far-fetched, but it is not. Over 150 communities in eight states have already passed such a law.

Take Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, for example. On November 16, 2010, the city passed an ordinance that asserts Pittsburgh citizens’ right to water, the inalienable and fundamental rights of natural ecosystems to exist and flourish within the city, and the city’s right to self-government. To protect these rights the ordinance removes legal powers from gas extraction corporations within the city. Just as was Rosa Parks’ refusal to stand, the ordinance is an illegal assertion of rights.

This “collective, nonviolent, civil disobedience” breaks the body of law that privileges corporations to extract, transport, and sell North American fossil fuel. Could this be a flavor of civil disobedience that the climate movement adds to its toolbox?

Pittsburgh is merely trying to protect its drinking water from the hydraulic fracturing (fracking) industry. In doing so it is exposing the unjust law that permits corporate fossil fuel extraction, which as Rosa Parks knows is the first step in changing said law.

“Like All Sleight-of-Hand Games It Cannot Continue Forever”

0
Mac Slavo
March 11th, 2013
SHTFplan.com

Read by 1,388 people

Spring is in the air, stock markets are driving higher than ever before, and happy days are here again.

Or are they?

The facts are that last night Japanese machinery orders fell 13% in January, despite the Japanese government pledging to “beat deflation” with new monetary operations (read: printing money) that has driven the Yen weaker by some 20% in the last couple of months.  That move started in December and as such should have been reflected in January’s order figures — if anyone believed it in Japanese business.

They clearly don’t.

Then there’s China.  They have a major property bubble problem, which is what always comes when you start printing cheap “money” (really credit) and allowing it to go into the real estate market.  In China’s case it’s built to the point of literal cities with nobody living in them.  That will eventually burst, and when it does you’ve got trouble.  China has the “luxury” of having an effective command economy since they’re a communist nation, but even that won’t change the laws of mathematics.

Finally we have Europe.  It’s a basket case.  Europe has failed to deal with its banks, it has failed to deal with its budget deficits and it is still trying to find a way to “pull forward demand” to fill fiscal holes.  It’s not working because it can’t – the leverage was never taken out.  Not there and not here.

We’re “printing” $85 billion a month and yet can only muster a 0.1% GDP print?  Let’s assume we manage to “rebound” and get a 2% GDP number.  We’re diluting purchasing power by ~8% annually! Where is that going?  Right into the middle class and below’s pocketbook; like a thief in the night it comes and steals their buying power and that ultimately has to reflect in what they purchase – and thus what people sell.

There are those who argue that the housing market has “turned.”  Really?  Look at Las Vegas, where there are tens of thousands of homes sitting with people in them who haven’t made a mortgage payment in three years!

… The key question: Is this a stable environment or is it another bubble that will bust when cap rates fall?  And if the latter, and you erroneously bet on a “housing recovery”, are you going to get reamed twice in a decade?

…

In short what we have here is a market that is levitating upward not due to an improving macro environment but rather due to Fed monetary games.  This can and has worked for a while, but like all sleight-of-hand games it cannot continue forever, and won’t.  The structural imbalances that have been built over the last four years set the table for a snapback move worse than 2008.

This morning CNBS is playing a card that we “should” put forward fiscal policy mirroring The Fed’s views.  These clowns actually believe that the laws of mathematics have been repealed?

Give me a break.  The guy who decides he doesn’t need more than 2 hours of sleep a night and starts shoving coke up his nose to achieve that outcome may indeed produce more work with less sleep and appear to be more productive.

For a while.

But eventually he has a heart attack, and the question becomes this: What are you going to do when you collapse due to the abuse you have heaped on your body and now are able to produce nothing?

Our economy is experiencing chest pains and rapidly-escalating amounts of coke are going up the nose on a daily basis.

Source: Karl Denninger’s Market Ticker

Fundamentally, nothing has changed since 2007. The only thing keeping the stock market rising and the economy seemingly stable is the literal Trillions of dollars of funny-money being slammed into the system on a regular basis. They did it in the U.S., in Europe and in China.

As Karl Denninger points out, this is akin to a cocaine addict continuously snorting to maintain their high. It always ends badly for the addict, as it will for us.

There is a strong chance that we see a stock market crash, or at the very least a massive correction, in coming weeks or months.

But, there is also the possibility that it keeps going higher, an effect of the Fed’s monetary easing and cheap money being given to banks who then leverage that money in stocks and other financial instruments. In this scenario, as we’ve seen since 2008, prices for essential goods continue to rise. What won’t rise is wages commensurate with the price inflation, which means that things like food, gas, and electricity become so expensive that disposable income shrinks to near zero (or goes negative) for the majority of Americans.

There is no way out.

All roads lead to a detonation of the financial, monetary and economic systems as we have come to know them.


(Watch at Youtube)

When the economies of the world’s ‘super regions’ finally collapse, and hundreds of millions of people are left destitute and with no hope of recovery, the end result may very well be nuclear engagements across the globe.

Author: Mac Slavo
Views: Read by 1,388 people
Date: March 11th, 2013
Website: www.SHTFplan.com

Copyright Information: Copyright SHTFplan and Mac Slavo. This content may be freely reproduced in full or in part in digital form with full attribution to the author and a link to www.shtfplan.com. Please contact us for permission to reproduce this content in other media formats.

Welcome to Ayn Rand Planet: Why the Rich Prosper from the Stock Market While We Get Screwed

0

On Planet Rand, the stock-market boom is a wonderful thing precisely because it rests upon the recent rise in corporate profits.

March 11, 2013  |  

Like this article?

Join our email list:

Stay up to date with the latest headlines via email.

This morning I received an email blast form Amazon. It was pushing The Fountainhead and Atlas Shrugged, the old and new testament of the Ayn Rand nation, which includes much of the Tea Party and its Republican allies.

How appropriate to be promoting Ayn Rand books just as the stock market and corporate profits both reached record highs. How appropriate to think of the infamous John Galt withdrawing from society in comfort while the rest of us face high unemployment, oppressive student loans, increasing healthcare costs, upside-down mortgages, and declining real incomes. But, according to Rand’s philosophy, this is as it should be — the wealthy getting all the rewards while the rest of us get nothing.

None of this is accidental. Our two-tiered economic recovery is the direct result of policies, or the lack thereof, that flow directly from Randian principles. If we don’t do something soon, we’ll all be living on Planet Rand.

Who Owns the Stock Market?

Before exploring this Randian policy coup, let’s be clear on who owns how much stock in America, and therefore who is benefiting most from the record rise in the equity markets.

As of 2010, the top 1 percent of households owned 35 percent of all the stocks in America while the bottom 80 percent of us owned only 8 percent. These percentages include both direct ownership of stock shares and indirect ownership through mutual funds, trusts, and IRAs, Keogh plans, 401(k) plans, and other retirement accounts. (See ” Wealth, Income and Power” by G William Domhoff.) So the current market boom is extremely profitable for the well-to-do, especially the super-rich, which is precisely what an Ayn Rand true-believer would cherish. Why is that?

On Planet Rand, each individual pursues his or her own rational self-interest. That is the definition of morality. It excludes altruism, which is posited as a negative, guilt-driven trait that should be avoided at all costs. Yes, this sounds selfish, but that’s a good thing on Planet Rand, because acting in your own rational self-interest leads to improvement, success, fulfillment and happiness. That’s how you can become a “maker” instead of a spineless moocher. (When I hear all this talk about the “makers,” the Yiddish word macher always comes to mind — a word used to describe an ambitious, puffed-up schemer. )

So on Planet Rand, the stock-market boom is a wonderful thing precisely because it rests upon the recent rise in corporate profits. (The New York Times reports that corporate profits as a share of national income are at their highest levels since 1950.) Aren’t those corporations run by the smart, successful CEOs who are society’s “makers”? Aren’t those CEOs applying Randian reason in pursuit of their self-interest? Surely, this is why these makers deserve everything they can get.

Why Are We Being Left Behind?

It’s easy to see why the Randians would adore the super-rich. After all they’re not alone in their idolization of the wealthy. It’s seems like most of Congress adores the super-rich as well. But why do the Randians refer to everyone else as moochers? Why be so hard on the rest of us?

This becomes clearer when we look at two kinds of answers to the question of why most of us have been left out of the current economic recovery. The first set of answers comes from a straightforward analysis about how our economy works, and doesn’t work:

  • High unemployment depresses wages of low- and middle-income wage-earners

  • Increases in the use of advanced technologies allow corporations to produce more with less labor, thereby keeping unemployment high

Congressman Tim Griffin Accused of “Voter Caging,” Fronts XL Pipeline for Koch Brothers

0

Transcript

PAUL JAY, SENIOR EDITOR, TRNN: Welcome to The Real News Network. I’m Paul Jay in Baltimore. And welcome to this edition of The Palast Report with Greg Palast, who’s an investigative journalist. And he joins us now from New York City.

Greg works for the BBC. He writes for The Nation and Rolling Stone. He’s the author of the bestselling book Billionaires & Ballot Bandits.

Thanks for joining us again.

GREG PALAST, BBC INVESTIGATIVE REPORTER: Glad to be with you again.

JAY: So you’ve been continuing your work on the pipeline bringing tar sands oil down to Texas.

PALAST: Yes, I’ve been slithering through that gooey tube and pulled out another little porker that was stuck in the pipe named–this one is a guy named Tim Griffin, Congressman Tim Griffin. And he is one of the most important congressmen in America that you’ve never heard of–and you’re not supposed to.

JAY: Why?

PALAST: Timmy Griffin used to work for a guy named Karl Rove, known as “Bush’s brain”. And one of the things that the brain decided to do was that since Bush couldn’t get elected by the voters, he has to be elected by voter manipulation. If you remember, of course, I reported, as we mentioned again last week, that Bush won Florida by having his brother, the governor, remove thousands of black voters from the voter rolls there. And that gave him the 500 votes he needed to seize the White House.

In 2004, the game continued with a new, sophisticated twist called caging. But what does this have to do with the pipeline and some guy named Griffin? The answer is: caging is a system, is a very sophisticated system for swiping tens of thousands of votes. What you do is you send letters to voters that you know are not living at their voting address. And when the letters come back undeliverable ’cause you said do not forward, you challenge the voters as a fraudulent voter.

Thousands of these letters went to African-American and Hispanic voters at the naval air station in Florida, Jacksonville, Florida. Now, those letters came back. Those voters’ ballots, when they sent in their absentee ballots, were challenged as fraudulent voters, our men in uniform. Go to Iraq, lose your vote, mission accomplished.

JAY: These letters were returned because these soldiers were overseas and had left their base.

PALAST: Yeah. Basically, you know, we talked to the wife of one serviceman, Randall Prausa. He was stationed overseas. He’s a legal voter. And his vote was challenged as–that he was a fraudulent voter ’cause he wasn’t living at his home address. It’s the naval air base. If you are a soldier under fire under your Humvee, you’re allowed to vote, believe it or not, Mr. Rove, Mr. Bush, Mr. Griffin.

JAY: Yeah, get us back to Griffin.

PALAST: He sent out the caging list from his computer. And I was able to get these little nasty hit lists of voters that they didn’t like because Griffin is not the sharpest knife in the drawer and he sent the emails not to GeorgeBush.com and the honchos there doing the evil deeds to these soldier voters; he sent them to GeorgeBush.org, which happened to be a site owned by a friend of mine. And they came into my office, our investigative–the Palast Investigative Fund, and our investigations team went to work and pretty soon discovered that these voters are being challenged and chosen because of their race.

I then took it to a civil rights attorney named Robert F. Kennedy Jr., the dean of the law school at Pace University, and he said, quote, “Griffin should be in jail, and so should Rove.” That’s a quote from the son of the attorney general who wrote the law that would put them in jail, the Voting Rights Act of ’65.

Now, how do we get to the XL Pipeline? Well, this gentleman, Mr.&nbps;Griffin, was appointed–given that he just committed several felony crimes, of course he was appointed a federal prosecutor by George Bush at the request of his boss, Rove. What the Bush administration was great at was taking their top felons and making them the prosecutors, which is like making the mafia–turning over the police department to them.

So when we exposed Griffin’s–what Kennedy called criminal activity–I’m not a criminal lawyer; he is–what he called criminal activity, when we exposed that, Griffin immediately had to resign his post. Well, you’d think that’s the end of Griffin. In fact, I have a little film of Griffin in tears. He says, that British reporter–I’m known as a British reporter ’cause I report for BBC–that British reporter did this to me! Oh! I’m done with public life! It was so sad to see Timmy go.

But he didn’t go. He waited a couple of years, and then he suddenly pops up running for Congress from Arkansas. Now, how does a guy with this record end up running for Congress? There’s only one way to do it: on a big old pipeline of money, $167,000 from two guys named Koch, the Koch brothers Charles and David. They paid–they came up with $167,000 for an unknown, tainted candidate and washed him right into Congress.

~~~

TIM GRIFFIN, U.S. CONGRESSMAN (R-AR): I rise in support of the Keystone XL Pipeline, as well as the underlying bill. The plot here is for jobs, American jobs. It’s a no-brainer. Like most Arkansans, I support this pro-jobs project that will strengthen our national security by making us less dependent on Middle Eastern oil. Arkansas families and businesses are hurting due to high gas prices, and the Keystone Pipeline will bring an additional 1 million barrels of oil per day into the United States.

~~~

PALAST: They wanted their pipeline extended. And Tim Griffin is put on the Ways and Means Committee, even though he’s barely a freshman–very powerful post–because of the Koch-Rove connection, where they will have a very important and key role in approving or disapproving the Keystone XL Pipeline. So Griffin became the sponsor of the bill to jam through this filth tube for the Koch brothers.

They want that, by the way–if you remember my prior commentaries, the Koch brothers need the XL pipeline because it ends at their refinery in Texas and they need that oil for their refinery. It’s going to save them $33 a barrel, make them $2 billion a year. So $167,000–.

JAY: One of the points you made about Griffin is that he actually doesn’t have any direct interest in the pipeline. The pipeline doesn’t run through his state. They don’t have a refinery.

PALAST: Well, he has a lot to do with it, which is he has Koch money and they need the pipe. But he’s Little Rock, Arkansas. Unless they put some weird little new kink in the pipe, it don’t go [incompr.] it doesn’t go through Little Rock. Little Rock has nothing to do with getting the oil. It doesn’t sell the oil to the pipeline. It has nothing to do with the pipeline. His district has nothing to do with that pipeline except the money from his biggest funders. And that’s how Washington gets greased.

So the filthiest thing about the XL pipeline is not just the tar sands, which will raise the entire planet’s temperature by a full degree all by itself, that tar that will be burnt; but the greasiest, most polluting part of the pipeline is the pollution in the political system in Washington.

JAY: Thanks for joining us, Greg.

PALAST: You’re welcome.

JAY: And thank you for joining us on The Real News Network.

End

DISCLAIMER: Please note that transcripts for The Real News Network are typed from a recording of the program. TRNN cannot guarantee their complete accuracy.

Tilling the Soil with Pesticides

0

The ministry of agriculture had organised a conference on Doubling Food Production from February 1-3. The “eminent speakers” invited were not members of International Assessment of Agricultural Science and Technology for Development (IAASTD) or top Indian scientists. Rather they were spin masters of biotechnology industry who claimed to have founded the anti-GMO movement and openly promoted it. The old paradigm of food and agriculture is clearly broken.

On April 15, 2008, the IAASTD report findings, carried out by 400 scientists over six years, were released. The report has noted that business as usual is no longer an option. Neither the Green Revolution nor the genetically modified organisms (GMOs) can guarantee food security. We need a new paradigm of working with the laws of nature and ecological sustainability. Why is our agriculture minister Sharad Pawar defending a dead paradigm and promoting PR men of biotech giants? When the fact is that the emerging scientific paradigm of ecological agriculture has shown that we can double food production while protecting the planet, human health and farmers’ livelihoods.

The old paradigm of agriculture has its roots in war. An industry that had grown by making explosives and chemicals for the war remodelled itself as the agro-chemical industry when these wars ended. Factories that manufactured explosives started making synthetic fertilisers and gradually the use of war chemicals as pesticides and herbicides began. The 1984 Bhopal gas tragedy is a stark reminder that pesticides kill. Pesticides in agriculture continue to kill farmers. One of Navdanya’s reports, “Poisons in our Food” released in 2012, shows that a link between epidemics like cancer and the use of pesticides in agriculture exist. A daily “cancer train” leaves Punjab, the land of the Green Revolution in India, with cancer victims. In the last five years, 33,000 people have died of cancer in Punjab.

The chemical push changed the paradigm of agriculture. Instead of working with ecological processes and taking the wellbeing and health of the entire agro-ecosystem with its diverse species into account, agriculture was reduced to an external input system adapted to chemicals. Instead of small farms producing diversity, agriculture became focused on large chemical monoculture farms producing monocultures for a handful of commodities. Correspondingly, the human diet shifted from 8,500 plant species to about eight globally traded commodities, which were nutritionally empty but loaded with toxics.

The scientific paradigm was also transformed. Instead of adopting a holistic approach, agriculture became compartmentalised into fragmented disciplines based on a reductionist and mechanistic paradigm.

Just as the gross domestic product fails to measure the real economy, the health of nature and society, similarly the category of “yield” fails to measure real costs and real output of farming systems.

On October 25, 2010, the Food and Agriculture Organisation of the United Nations released its second report on The State of the World’s Plant Genetic Resources for Food and Agriculture. It observed that the so called high-yielding varieties (HYVs) of the Green Revolution should, in fact, be called high response varieties as they are bred for responding to chemicals and are not “high yielding”. The narrow measure of “yield” propelled agriculture into deepening monocultures thereby displacing diversity and eroding natural and social capital.

According to the FAO report, industrial monoculture agriculture has pushed more than 75 per cent agro-biodiversity to extinction. Seventy-five per cent bees have been killed because of toxic pesticides. Scientist Einstein had once cautioned, “when the last bee disappears, humans will disappear”. Seventy-five per cent of the water on the planet is polluted owing to intensive irrigation of chemical-intensive industrial agriculture. The nitrates in water from industrial farms are creating “dead zones” in the oceans. Chemical industrial farming has led to 75 per cent land and soil degradation.

Forty per cent of all greenhouse gas emissions, which are responsible for climate change, come from the use of fossil fuels and chemical-intensive industrial globalised system of agriculture. While this ecological destruction of the natural capital is justified in terms of “feeding the people”, the problem of hunger has grown. One billion people are permanently hungry. Another two billion suffer from food-related ailments like malnutrition. And this hunger and malnutrition is designed into a food system driven by profits rather than health and sustainability.

When the focus is on the production of commodities for trade instead of food for nourishment, it leads to hunger and malnutrition. Only 10 per cent of corn and soya grown is used as food. The rest is used as animal feed and biofuel. Commodities do not feed people, food does. A high cost external input system is artificially kept afloat with $400 billion as subsidies. That is more than a $1 billion a day. The “cheap” commodities have a very high cost financially, ecologically and socially. Industrial, chemical agriculture displaces productive rural families. It is like creating a debt. Debt and mortgages are the main reason for the disappearance of the family farm. In extreme cases, as in the cotton belt of India, debt created by purchase of high cost seed and chemical inputs, has pushed more than 127,000 farmers to suicide in a little over a decade. Getting out of this suicide economy has become crucial for the wellbeing of farmers and all life on earth.

A scientifically and ecologically robust paradigm of agriculture is emerging in the form of agro-ecology and organic farming that rejuvenates the natural capital (soil, biodiversity and water) on which sustainable food security depends. Chemical agriculture treats soil as inert and an empty container for chemical fertilisers. The new paradigm recognises the soil as living where billions of soil organisms create soil fertility. Chemical agriculture destroys biodiversity.

Ecological agriculture conserves and rejuvenates biodiversity. Chemical agriculture depletes and pollutes water. Organic farming conserves water by increasing the water-holding capacity of soils through recycling organic matter.

Biodiversity and soils rich in organic matter are the best strategy for climate resilience and climate adaptation. While lowering the ecological footprint, organic agriculture increases output when measured through diversity and multifunctional benefits instead of the reductionist category of “yield”.

Another research by Navdanya released in 2011, “Health per Acre”, on biodiverse organic systems has shown that ecological systems produce higher biodiverse outputs and higher incomes for rural families. Our report shows that when measured in terms of nutrition per acre, ecological systems produce more food. We can double food production ecologically. Ecological systems of agriculture are based on care, compassion and cooperation. They enhance ecological resilience, diversity, sustainable livelihoods and health.

The new paradigm of agriculture creates living economies and living cultures that increase the well-being of all.

© 2013 The Asian Age

The NYT and Obama Officials Collaborate to Prosecute Awlaki After He’s Executed

0

The New York Times and the Obama administration have created a disturbing collaborative pattern that asserted itself again on Sunday with the paper’s long article purporting to describe the events leading up to the execution by the CIA of US citizen Anwar Awlaki. Time and again, the Obama administration shrouds what it does with complete secrecy, and then uses that secrecy to avoid judicial review of its actions and/or compelled statutory disclosure under the Freedom of Information Act. “Oh, we’re so sorry”, says the Obama DOJ, “but we cannot have courts deciding if what we did is legal, nor ordering us to disclose information under FOIA, because these programs are so very secret that any disclosure would seriously jeopardize national security”.The New York Times published a long article on Sunday purporting to explain the government’s justifications for killing US citizen Anwar Awlaki. (Photograph: Justin Lane/EPA)

But then, senior Obama officials run to the New York Times by the dozens, demand (and receive) anonymity, and then spout all sorts of claims about these very same programs that are designed to justify what the US government has done and to glorify President Obama. The New York Times helpfully shields these officials – who are not blowing any whistles, but acting as government spokespeople – from being identified, and then mindlessly regurgitates their assertions as fact. It’s standard government stenography, administration press releases masquerading as in-depth news articles.

Sunday’s lengthy NYT article on the Awlaki killing by Mark Mazzetti, Charlie Savage and Scott Shane is a classic case of this arrangement. It purports to provide “an account of what led to the Awlaki strike” that is “based on interviews with three dozen current and former legal and counterterrorism officials and outside experts”. But what it really does is simply summarize the unverified justifications of the very officials involved in the killing, most of whom are permitted to justify themselves while hiding behind anonymity. It devotes itself with particular fervor to defending the actions of former Obama OLC lawyers David Barron and Marty Lederman, who concocted the theories to authorize due-process-free assassinations of American citizens (those same Democratic lawyers were, needless to say, among the most vocal critics of the Bush administration’s War on Terror policies that denied due process and relied on rampant secrecy).

There are many points to make about all of this. To begin with, will the Obama administration – which has persecuted whistleblowers with an unprecedented fervor and frequency – launch a criminal investigation to determine the identity of the “three dozen current and former legal and counterterrorism officials” who spoke to the NYT about the classified Awlaki hit, or, as usual, are such punishments reserved for those who embarrass rather than glorify the president?

Moreover, why can Obama officials run to the NYT after the fact and make all sorts of claims about the mountain of evidence providing Awlaki’s guilt, but not have done the same thing in a court of law prior to killing him? As the NYT notes, when the ACLU sued on behalf of Awlaki’s father seeking to enjoin Obama from killing his son, the Obama DOJ invoked the “state secrets” privilege, insisting that the evidence against Awlaki was so secret that national security would be jeopardized if disclosed to the court: the very same alleged evidence that Obama officials are now spilling to the NYT. They also deliberately refused to indict him, which would have at least required showing some evidence to a court to justify the accusations against him and would have enabled him to turn himself in and defend himself if inclined to do so.

All of this highlights why it’s so odious to prosecute and convict people in a newspaper after you execute them, rather than in a court of law before you end their life. As but one example, the statements about Awlaki from attempted underwear bomber Umar Abdulmutallab on which the NYT heavily relies to assert Awlaki’s guilt would have been subjected to intense cross-examination to see if they were simply the results of Abdulmutallab giving the government what they wanted – namely, statements that incriminated someone they wanted to kill – in exchange for favors as part of his plea agreement. It’s so basic, though the NYT seems not to have heard, that statements made by accused criminals in exchange for favors as part of a plea bargain are among the most unreliable.

But that kind of critical scrutiny only happens in courtrooms, with due process. By contrast, asserted government evidence is simply mindlessly assumed to be true when it’s fed to journalists after the fact without anyone to contradict it or any process available to disprove it. As the ACLU and the Center for Constitutional Rights jointly said yesterday about this NYT story:

“This is the latest in a series of one-sided, selective disclosures that prevent meaningful public debate and legal or even political accountability for the government’s killing program, including its use against citizens.

“Government officials have made serious allegations against Anwar al-Aulaqi, but allegations are not evidence, and the whole point of the Constitution’s due process clause is that a court must distinguish between the two. If the government has evidence that Al-Aulaqi posed an imminent threat at the time it killed him, it should present that evidence to a court.”

Indeed, while the NYT asserts as though it’s incontrovertible that he was “a senior operative in Al Qaeda’s branch in Yemen“, Yemen experts such as Gregory Johnsen have long said the opposite: “We suspect a great deal about Anwar al-Awlaki, but we know very little, precious little when it comes to his operational role” and “Mendelsohn [said]: ‘(Awlaki) played an important role in a string of attacks in the West’. We just don’t know this, we suspect it but don’t know it.”

Beyond that, the DOJ officials whose conduct is defended by this story have long been important sources to the very NYT reporters writing this article (not just during the Obama years but also the Bush years), so it’s a typical case of journalists using anonymity to serve the agendas of their government sources. And it’s yet another case where journalistic anonymity is granted not to protect whistleblowers from recriminations by the powerful, but to protect government officials from accountability so they can justify government conduct. And, finally, Marcy Wheeler details several extremely dubious claims that were passed off as fact by this NYT article: here and here.

But I want to focus on one key point. What prompted my opposition from the start to the attempted killing of Awlaki was that it was very clear he was being targeted because of his anti-American sermons that were resonating among English-speaking Muslim youth (sermons which, whatever you think of them, are protected by the First Amendment), and not because he was a Terrorist operative. In other words, the US government was trying to murder one of its own citizens as punishment for his political and religious views that were critical of the government’s policies, and not because of any actual crimes or warfare.

The NYT addresses this concern directly with a long, convoluted explanation that the Obama administration refrained from targeting Awlaki when they thought he was only a “dangerous propagandist”, and decided to kill him only once they obtained proof that he was an actual Terrorist operative. The NYT says that this proof was obtained in “late January 2010” when Abdulmutallab cooperated with authorities and claimed Awlaki participated in his plot. In order to validate this explanation, the NYT claims that a December, 2009 drone strike in Yemen that was widely reported at the time to have targeted Awlaki – and which media outlets falsely reported killed him – was actually targeting others, and that Awlaki would merely have been oh-so-coincidental (and perfectly legal) “collateral damage”. Here is the NYT’s effort to insist that the Obama administration targeted Awlaki for death only once it obtained evidence in late January, 2010 that he was more than a mere propagandist:

“[Awlaki’s] eloquent, English-language exhortations to jihad turned up repeatedly on the computers of young plotters of violence arrested in Britain, Canada and the United States.

“By 2008, said Philip Mudd, then a top F.B.I. counterterrorism official, Mr. Awlaki ‘was cropping up as a radicalizer – not in just a few investigations, but in what seemed to be every investigation.’

“In November 2009, when Maj. Nidal Malik Hasan, an Army psychiatrist, was charged with opening fire at Fort Hood in Texas and killing 13 people, Mr. Awlaki finally found the global fame he had long appeared to court. Investigators quickly discovered that the major had exchanged e-mails with Mr. Awlaki, though the cleric’s replies had been cautious and noncommittal. But four days after the shootings, the cleric removed any doubt about where he stood.

“‘Nidal Hassan is a hero’, he wrote on his widely read blog. ‘He is a man of conscience who could not bear living the contradiction of being a Muslim and serving in an army that is fighting against his own people.’

“As chilling as the message was, it was still speech protected by the First Amendment. American intelligence agencies intensified their focus on Mr. Awlaki, intercepting communications that showed the cleric’s growing clout in Al Qaeda in the Arabian Peninsula, a Yemen-based affiliate of Osama bin Laden’s terrorist network.

“On Dec. 24, 2009, in the second American strike in Yemen in eight days, missiles hit a meeting of leaders of the affiliate group. News accounts said one target was Mr. Awlaki, who was falsely reported to have been killed.

“In fact, other top officials of the group were the strike’s specific targets, and Mr. Awlaki’s death would have been collateral damage – legally defensible as a death incidental to the military aim. As dangerous as Mr. Awlaki seemed, he was proved to be only an inciter; counterterrorism analysts did not yet have incontrovertible evidence that he was, in their language, “operational.”

“That would soon change. The next day, a 23-year-old Nigerian named Umar Farouk Abdulmutallab tried and failed to blow up an airliner as it approached Detroit. The would-be underwear bomber told FBI agents that after he went to Yemen and tracked down Mr. Awlaki, his online hero, the cleric had discussed ‘martyrdom and jihad’ with him, approved him for a suicide mission, helped him prepare a martyrdom video and directed him to detonate his bomb over United States territory, according to court documents.

“In his initial 50-minute interrogation on Dec. 25, 2009, before he stopped speaking for a month, Mr. Abdulmutallab said he had been sent by a terrorist named Abu Tarek, although intelligence agencies quickly found indications that Mr. Awlaki was probably involved. When Mr. Abdulmutallab resumed cooperating with interrogators in late January, an official said, he admitted that ‘Abu Tarek’ was Mr. Awlaki. With the Nigerian’s statements, American officials had witness confirmation that Mr. Awlaki was clearly a direct plotter, no longer just a dangerous propagandist.

“‘He had been on the radar all along, but it was Abdulmutallab’s testimony that really sealed it in my mind that this guy was dangerous and that we needed to go after him,’ said Dennis C. Blair, then director of national intelligence.”

So that tortured justification for what the Obama administration did, laundered through the NYT, is clear in its claims: (1) we were legally and constitutionally barred from trying to kill Awlaki when we thought he was just a propagandist; (2) the December, 2009 strike wasn’t really targeting him, despite what media outlets reported at the time, because we did not yet have evidence that he was a Terrorist plotter; and (3) we acquired that evidence only in late January, 2010, and only then did we start to target Awlaki for execution. Obviously, those claims are necessary to defend themselves from what would clearly be criminal behavior: trying to kill a US citizen because of the government’s dislike for his political and religious speech.

But the first journalist to report on the existence of Obama’s kill list and the inclusion of US citizens was the Washington Post’s Dana Priest. On January 26, 2010, this is what she wrote:

“As part of the operations [in Yemen], Obama approved a Dec. 24 strike against a compound where a US citizen, Anwar al-Aulaqi, was thought to be meeting with other regional al-Qaeda leaders. Although he was not the focus of the strike and was not killed, he has since been added to a shortlist of US citizens specifically targeted for killing or capture by the JSOC, military officials said . . .

“The Obama administration has adopted the same stance. If a US citizen joins al-Qaeda, ‘it doesn’t really change anything from the standpoint of whether we can target them’, a senior administration official said. ‘They are then part of the enemy.’

“Both the CIA and the JSOC maintain lists of individuals, called ‘High Value Targets’ and ‘High Value Individuals’, whom they seek to kill or capture. The JSOC list includes three Americans, including Aulaqi, whose name was added late last year. As of several months ago, the CIA list included three US citizens, and an intelligence official said that Aulaqi’s name has now been added.”

According to Priest’s reporting back then, the Obama administration was trying to execute Awlaki as early as late 2009 – exactly when the Obama officials who spoke to the NYT admit that they had no evidence that he was anything other than a “propagandist” and this his targeted killing would therefore be unconstitutional and illegal. (That’s also a reminder that not only Awlaki, but at least two other still-unknown Americans, have been placed on Obama’s kill list). Priest then added that the cause of Awlaki’s being placed on the kill list were his “academic” discussions with Nidal Hasan: exactly what the NYT’s Obama-official-sources now say are protected free speech that could not be used to legally justify his killing:

“Intelligence officials say the New Mexico-born imam also has been linked to the Army psychiatrist who is accused of killing 12 soldiers and a civilian at Fort Hood, Tex., although his communications with Maj. Nidal M. Hasan were largely academic in nature. Authorities say that Aulaqi is the most important native, English-speaking al-Qaeda figure and that he was in contact with the Nigerian accused of attempting to bomb a US airlner on Christmas Day.”

Whatever else is true, there is a serious potential contradiction between the self-justifying claims of the NYT’s sources (we waited until late January, 2010 when we acquired evidence of Awlaki’s involvement in plots before trying to kill him) and Priest’s reporting (the Obama administration began trying to kill Awlaki in 2009, before it had evidence that he had done anything beyond “inspiring” plots with his sermons). The reason this matters so much regardless of your views of Awlaki is obvious, and is certainly on the mind of the NYT’s government sources: it would be purely tyrannical, not to mention unconstitutional and criminal (murder), for the US government to try to kill one of its own citizens in order to stop his critical speech.

It’s possible that there is a distinction in this reporting between being targeted for killing by JSOC versus the CIA, although the NYT’s government sources are clear that any government targeted killing of Awlaki without proof of involvement in terrorist plots – based solely on his sermons – would be legally dubious, at best (indeed, on Democracy Now this morning, the NYT’s Scott Shane said: “they had in fact decided they could not target Samir Khan, because he was a propagandist, and not an actual plotter, but he was killed anyway”; when I asked Savage about this, he told me this morning via email that “the exact date that Awlaki went on ‘the list’ is one of several issues that we dug into at length, and while we were able to mosaic together some answers to some previously outstanding questions this one remains murky”). It’s also possible that Priest’s reporting was wrong and efforts to kill Awlaki only began in 2010 once the government acquired what it claims is evidence of his involvement in Terrorist plots. It’s also possible that the NYT’s sources are simply wrong, or worse, when claiming that abundant evidence exists to prove Awlaki’s involvement in such plots.

But all of this only underscores why governments of civilized nations don’t first execute people without charges or due process and seek after the fact the convict them in a one-sided, non-adversarial process of newspaper leaks; these are exactly the kinds of questions that are resolved by adversarial judicial procedures, precisely the procedures the Obama administration made sure could never take place. It also underscores why responsible media outlets should do more than print these unverified government accusations as truth, especially about a matter as consequential as the government’s assassination of its own citizens. That the Obama administration and the New York Times did neither of those things in this case is quite revealing about the function they perform.

The Global Austerity Resistance Continues

0

Protesters march against government austerity measures in Madrid, March 10, 2013. (Reuters/Sergio Perez)Tens of thousands of protesters flooded the streets of Spain and Greece this week in response to ongoing budget cuts and high unemployment. In Spain, unemployment has passed the five million mark for the first time since records began–attracting widespread criticism over the conservative government’s austerity plans. Similarly, Greece, which has served as a laboratory for austerity enthusiasts, has suffered mass poverty, unemployment and suicide since severe budget cuts were implemented by the government.

“Poverty, unemployment, suicides. Enough is enough,” was the slogan chanted on Syntagma square by some 1,500 Greek demonstrators non-affiliated with political parties who were mobilized through social media. The demonstration ended when police shot tear gas at protesters–a police tactic also used during the anti-austerity demonstrations in Athens when the debt cries began in late 2009.

Earlier this month, three people in central Greece killed themselves on the same day, and analysts said there is a correlation between the rising rates and three years of pay cuts, tax hikes and slashed pensions that have pushed many people into poverty. According to the Greek Reporter:

There has been a sharp rise in the number of suicides in Greece since the beginning of the crisis in 2009, with official sources putting the figure at over 3,100 from the start of 2009 to August 2012, though experts say that deaths by suicide are often not documented as such because of the social stigma attached to them.

On Saturday, Greek Prime Minister Antonis Samaras promised that there would be “no more austerity measures” as international creditors prolonged an audit of crisis reforms.

“There will be no more austerity measures,” Samaras said in a televised speech to his conservative party’s political committee. 

“And as soon as growth sets in, relief measures will slowly begin,” Samaras said. 

But he noted that Greece’s ailing economy was “out of intensive care, not out of the hospital.”

However, it seems unlikely Samaras will have the last word on budget cuts, and auditors have made it clear they expect to see an increase in privatization plans. Under the bailout conditions adopted last year, Greece needs to cut public sector workers by 25,000 in 2013 and a total of 150,000 by the end of 2015.

In Spain, the Madrid protest ended when police fired tear gas at protesters and arrested 45 individuals, including nine minors. Reportedly, 40 individuals were injured during the protest, and police claim they found four firebombs in a backpack abandoned on a street, in addition to 22 firecrackers, five flares and a stick from two minors near Madrid’s main railway station.

The AP reports rallies were organized in Madrid and 60 other cities by 150 organizations including trade unions representing the construction, car and television industries as well as police and health services. Police estimated some 20,000 people marched in Barcelona, but authorities did not have figures for a large rally held in Madrid.

Protesters marched to the Spanish parliament in opposition to tax hikes, spending cuts, high unemployment and alleged corruption. At the tail end of the demonstrations, young protesters threw bar chairs into a road and burned garbage containers.

At the beginning of the month, many thousands of demonstrators held marches in more than 20 cities in Portugal to protest against austerity measures. Tens of thousands filled a Lisbon boulevard during the protests and headed to the finance ministry carrying placards that read, “Screw the troika, we want our lives back.” The troika is a slang term for the three organizations which have the most power over debt-ridden countries’ financial futures: the European Commission, the International Monetary Fund, and the European Central Bank.

Protesters can be heard in the video below singing a song linked to a 1974 popular uprising known as the Carnation Revolution–named because no shots were fired when the population started descending the streets to celebrate the end of Marcello Caetano’s reign; instead protesters placed carnation flowers into the muzzles of rifles and on the uniforms of the army.

Portugal is expected to suffer a third straight year of recession in 2013, and the overall jobless rate has grown to a record 17.6 percent–of which young people are a particularly devastated demographic with unemployment close to 40 percent.

© 2013 The Nation

Hope from Fukushima

0

As we mark the second memorial of the March 11, 2011 triple disaster, we see tragedy, but also hope in Japan.

While people mourn for the mothers, fathers, siblings, grandparents and children that were lost in the earthquake and tsunami, many of those that fled the natural disaster have been able to return home and rebuild their lives and communities as best they can.

The tragedy continues, however, for those still suffering from the impacts of radioactive contamination from the Fukushima nuclear accident. Many areas remain uninhabitable, leaving 160,000 evacuees stuck in limbo, unable to go home, but also unable to rebuild their lives as they lack proper compensation and support.

Families and communities are breaking up, financial ruin is common, as is divorce and mental breakdowns. Recent estimates suggest cancer rates are likely to increase in Fukushima, which weighs heavily on people’s minds, and suicides are increasing in the area. It is untrue to say nobody has lost their lives as a result of the nuclear accident.

This ongoing tragedy for the victims of the nuclear disaster is the fault of a system that is supposed to provide fair compensation when there is a nuclear disaster, but doesn’t. This system essentially protects the nuclear industry, not people.Greenpeace activists join tens of thousands of people marching on the Japanese parliament on March 10, 2013 in remembrance of the 2011 triple disaster in Fukushima , and to demand the Japanese government to abandon its dangerous nuclear program. (Photo: Courtesy of Greenpeace)

That the nuclear industry is protected before people is a sad and totally unjust reality for most of the world.

The cost of the Fukushima disaster is estimated at US$250 billion, but costs so far have already crushed owner TEPCO so badly it had to be nationalised. TEPCO is one of the largest energy utilities in the world, yet it had to be protected from its responsibilities. Taxpayers are now picking up the tab.

Worse still is that the system offers even greater protection to companies like General Electric, Hitachi and Toshiba. They built the Fukushima plant based on a flawed reactor design. Yet the regulations allow them to walk away and pay nothing to help victims. They also do not show much moral responsibility to help.

The big gap between the costs of a nuclear disaster and what the nuclear industry pays should make everyone angry.
This reality, like other painful truths about nuclear power, has hit home with many Japanese people. They are standing up in protest.

Last year I wrote about hope and the emerging “Hydrangea revolution”. Hundreds of thousands of protestors flooded the streets of Tokyo around the Prime Minister’s residence and the parliament. These protests continue, and the support for a total nuclear phase-out in Japan is growing.

People are angry, first at the previous government’s decision to restart a nuclear power plant after all were switched off following the Fukushima meltdowns, and now they are angry at the new government’s plans to restart more reactors, and to resume building them.
This mobilisation has already had some success, as only two of Japan’s reactors are currently online. The rest remain offline, and it will not be long until the lone two reactors working at the Ohi plant are once again shut down for maintenance, leaving Japan nuclear-free once more. We want an end to our disastrous experiment with nuclear power. We showed that we can live without it last summer, and we will do so again.

The hope coming out of Fukushima is that the people continue to speak out, loudly and clearly, about this man-made disaster, to speak out against nuclear power.

Over the last week they have again been joined by people in Argentina, Belgium, Canada, Chile, Colombia, France, Germany, Hong Kong, South Africa, South Korea, Sweden, Switzerland, Austria, Denmark, Finland, India, Jordan, Luxembourg, Slovenia, Spain, Turkey, and the USA calling for nuclear companies to be made responsible for the damage they can, and do, cause.

We cannot stop natural disasters, but we can prevent man-made ones.

We cannot give the people of Fukushima back what they have lost, but we can stand together and ensure they get compensated, that they are remembered, and that no one has to suffer through a nuclear meltdown ever again.

We hope that the Japanese government will listen to the voices of its people, stop talking about nuclear, and push renewables much harder.

You can help — sign here and demand that nuclear companies, like General Electric, Hitachi and Toshiba, are responsible for nuclear disasters.

© 2013 Greenpeace

Cops Shoot and Kill 16-Year-Old Kid in New York

0

Eyewitness says Gray was “running for his life” when he was shot dead.

March 11, 2013  |  

Like this article?

Join our email list:

Stay up to date with the latest headlines via email.

On Saturday night, two undercover police officers shot and killed 16-year-old Kimani Gray. According to the police account, the officers approached Gray when he “ adjusted his waistband in what the police describe as a suspicious manner.” When the police asked him to “show his hands,” they claim Gray turned around and pointed a gun at the officers, who fired 11 rounds. The weapon police say belonged to Gray was not fired.

Although there is no confirmed evidence of wrongdoing by the officers, whose names have not be released, several witnesses cast doubts on the official version of the incident:

1. Eyewitness says Gray was “running for his life” when he was shot dead. “‘He was running for his life, telling the cops, ‘Stop,’ said witness Camille Johnson. ‘They really are, seriously, walking around, shooting little kids.’” [Pix11, 3/10/13]

2. Eyewitness says Gray was adjusting his belt, not shooting his gun, when the shooting began. “Mr. Gray’s sister, Mahnefah Gray, 19, said that a witness to the shooting told her that her brother had been fixing his belt when he was shot.” [New York Times, 3/10/13]

3. Eyewitness says, after he was shot, Gray said “please don’t let me die.” One of the officers responded “Stay down or, we’ll shoot you again.” [New York Times, 3/10/13]

4. Friends says “Kimani had just returned from a baby shower, and was shot only minutes after he was dropped off on East 52nd Street.” [NY1, 3/10/13]

5. Gray’s sister and others say he did not own a gun. “Mr. Gray’s sister, Mahnefah Gray, 19, said that a witness to the shooting told her that her brother had been fixing his belt when he was shot. She, among others who knew Mr. Gray, said they had never known him to have a gun.” Gray’s cousin, Malik Vernon, also “insisted he didn’t own a gun.” [New York Times, 3/10/13; New York Post, 3/11/13]

NY1 does quote an anonymous source saying Gray was “ holding the gun for a friend.” The police were quick to note that Gray had “ four prior arrests.”

Harvard Caught Snooping Through Employee Emails

0

Following a cheating scandal, administrators broke into deans’ email accounts.

Photo Credit: Flikr / Harvard

March 11, 2013  |  

Like this article?

Join our email list:

Stay up to date with the latest headlines via email.

Harvard University is embroiled in another scandal following revelations of a student cheating ring that made national headlines last August. But this time around, it’s Harvard administrators taking heat for searching the university email accounts of 16 resident deans without permission last fall, according to a report from the Boston Globe.

Anonymous officials told the Globe that administrators looked through deans’ emails six months ago to find a media leak of confidential messages related to last year’s cheating scandal. They succeeded, and the dean in question reportedly did not face punishment.

The scandal raises questions about whether resident deans, who are not professors, but teach nonetheless, should be afforded the same privacy protections offered to Harvard faculty. Even though they weren’t the victims of spying, Harvard professors still expressed feelings of betrayal, disgust and a new distrust of university administrators.

“This is disgraceful,” wrote history lecturer Timothy McCarthy in a Facebook post, “Even more so than the original cheating scandal, because it involves adults who should know better – really smart, powerful adults, with complete job security.”

Harvard Computer Science professor and former Harvard College dean Harry Lewis questioned the logic of not simply asking resident deans before snooping through their email accounts, asking in a blog post, ““Why not tell people you are reading their email? Would it not be the honorable thing to do? What is to be gained by not doing that?” Dr. Lewis continued, saying he will refrain from using his university email for personal purposes, in light of the spying scandal:

“I used to favor Harvard email over gmail because I thought it protected me better. I figured, if someone issues a subpoena for my email, I would rather have Harvard’s lawyers think about whether to comply than to know for certain that Google would comply. My assumption about the relative risks has now flipped.”

Former Harvard teaching fellow Richard Bradley, who has written extensively about Harvard affairs, says administrators blatantly violated university policy and that someone, specifically naming Arts and Sciences Dean Michael Smith, should get the boot.

“This is, I think, one of the lowest points in Harvard’s recent history–maybe Harvard’s history, period,” wrote Bradley, “It’s an invasion of privacy, a betrayal of trust, and a violation of the academic values for which the university should be advocating.”

h/t The Harvard Crimson

Steven Hsieh is an editorial assistant at AlterNet and writer based in Brooklyn. Follow him on Twitter @stevenjhsieh.

Congressman Tim Griffin Accused of “Voter Caging”, Fronts XL Pipeline for Koch Brothers

0
RealNewsNetwork.com, Real News Network, Real News, Real News For Real People, IWT are trademarks and service marks of IWT.TV inc. “The Real News” is the flagship show of IWT and Real News Network.

All original content on this site is copyright of The Real News Network. Click here for more

Problems with this site? Please let us know

Linux VPS Hosting by Star Dot Hosting

The Power of Finance and a New, New Deal

0

Context: As yet there are no context links for this item.

Transcript

PAUL JAY, SENIOR EDITOR, TRNN: Welcome to The Real News Network. I’m Paul Jay in Baltimore. We’re continuing our discussion about the 80th anniversary of the election of FDR.

Now joining us again, first of all, from London is John Weeks. He’s a professor emeritus at the University of London School of Oriental and African Studies. And in Vermont, Jennifer Taubs, an associate law professor at the Vermont Law School.Thanks for joining us.JENNIFER TAUB, ASSOC. PROF., VERMONT LAW SCHOOL: Glad to be here.JAY: So, Jennifer, is a New Deal possible? A lot of people have been talking about the need for a new New Deal. Some people call it a new green deal. But given the state of America–economy, politics–I guess mostly I’m talking about the tremendous power of finance now as compared to Rooseveltian times–it wasn’t that they weren’t powerful then, but it seems to me the power they have now is in a whole different league–is such a thing possible?TAUB: I think it is, Paul. What we’re seeing now is a convergence of folks on the progressive left and the right with an interest in breaking up the banks. It’s not every day where you have people like Simon Johnson speaking at an AFL-CIO event talking about a George Will column that he agrees with. And so there you have Richard Fisher from the Dallas Fed, Tom Hoenig, who’s now at the FDIC board, and many others in academia and in policy and, you know, asking for, recognizing that these banks are too big, that they have an implicit guarantee, and that they’re interfering with democracy.JAY: But you can’t even pass the flimsiest regulation against these banks right now. I mean, they tried to pass position limits, weak, weak version, watered-down version of position limits at the Commodity Futures Trading Commission. They couldn’t get it. They passed some regulatory legislation, and it’s all left for regulation. By the time the lobbyists are finished with the regulation, there’s next to nothing left. I’m talking about the real political power of finance. How are you going to break them up?TAUB: That’s why you have to do it structurally. And there are many of us who watched how Dodd—Frank kind of rolled out with so much authority delegated to the agencies for rule-making. What we know now, which people suspected, is, you know, that when these rules get litigated in the D.C. circuit, the D.C. circuit is going to object, strike them down. And that basically makes regulators more shy about using the authority they have. And so what really needs to happen: I think that–exactly what you’re talking about, that regulation, in terms of saying that we’re not going to have hard structural changes, regulation is too subject to the whims of who may be in power at an agency, and also who may be in the courts. So there needs to really be true change, which means basically changing the size of these institutions back down to the size they were in the 1990s–not something truly radical, but it would make a huge difference.JAY: John, what do you make of the same question? I guess what I’m saying is that there needs to be something entirely new now.JOHN WEEKS, PROF. EMERITUS, SCHOOL OF ORIENTAL AND AFRICAN STUDIES: I think that like you I’m skeptical to the point of despair, but I take a slightly different form for my skepticism. I think that the–as Jennifer was saying, there are a lot of recognition that there’s something desperately in the wrong with the banks, and there are a lot of people who want something done about it, and be prepared to vote for people who want something done about it. I mean, after all, we have to remember, despite all the money that went in to support Romney, Obama–people voted for him. And they didn’t vote for him because finance bought them. Finance had bought Obama. Now, what worries me is that I think the reactionaries have a plan. The plan is to limit democracy, limit voting rights, try to create a situation so there is no danger. See, we’re worried that nothing can be done. They’re worried that something can be done, and their answer to their worry is to try to restrict voting rights (and we see a lot of that going on), have a Supreme Court which will strike down any progressive legislation, and a whole other range of antidemocratic measures in order to ensure that reactionaries continue to be elected even though they represent a minority of the vote. We have a House of Representatives now which has a majority of reactionaries even though a majority of Americans voted for Democrats, not for Republicans in the House of Representatives.JAY: People voted for Democrats, and they voted for kind of the promise, ’cause in the election campaign you hear rhetoric that sounds New Deal-ish. But do you actually see when in office that the Obama administration has anything in common, really, with the New Deal?WEEKS: No. But what I think is that bit by bit, as people’s anger rises, it also rises against Obama and the Democratic Party–or at least let’s [incompr.] The sad reality is that progressive change will come through the Democratic Party, because the U.S. electoral system makes it almost impossible to create a third party. And is it possible? Well, I think we should not rule it out completely.JAY: Jennifer, do you see any Rooseveltian New Deal-ishness in the Obama administration? It seems on the regulatory side, if anything–you know, to some extent, not that they’ve been good, but if anything, the Senate’s been a little ahead of Obama on this. On many issues, the administration seems far less willing to regulate, and he certainly surrounds himself with Wall Street people.TAUB: I’m glad you mentioned the Senate, because I see FDR in four senators: Elizabeth Warren, our new senator from Massachusetts; Bernie Sanders of Vermont; Sherrod Brown of Ohio; and Jeff Merkley of Oregon. Those are the folks who are the progressives. And there–I’m sorry if I’m missing others, but these are the ones who are sticking with what they think is right, notwithstanding the tremendous pressure coming at them from the financial services sector.JAY: So in other words you’re saying yes? ‘Cause when I look at the Obama administration, they don’t seem very interested in regulation that’s actually effective.TAUB: Yeah. I mean, I don’t see Obama as the next FDR, no.JAY: So–go ahead, John.WEEKS: I don’t either, but I think that he’s a bit better than Clinton. Now, that doesn’t mean [incompr.] but it does suggest that progressives have had some impact. And, of course, there’s a horrendous depression that we’re in. That’s had some impact too, such that we now have some Democratic politicians–Jennifer mentioned them–one from her own–the most outstanding one, of course, is Bernie Sanders from her own Vermont. I used to live in Vermont. I knew Bernie. I think, you know, the world would be much–the U.S. would be much worse off without him, but he’s only one senator. But a few senators make a difference. And now there’s several of these progressive women who have been elected. So I think that we’re seeing the possibility of a Democrat being nominated for presidency who is not completely owned by financial interests.JAY: Where do you see that?WEEKS: Well, I see it with these senators that are–these progressive senators that have been elected. I mean, they can run in primaries. I don’t know which one will. Obviously, Bernie Sanders can’t. He’s not a Democrat. But we’ve now–ten years ago I found it hard to imagine who a progressive candidate would be, you know, who could stand–who would be the–well, I could mention some names nobody would have ever heard of who would be the Fred Harris or the George McGovern of this generation. I couldn’t come up with a list of names. Now there are a few names that could possibly do that.JAY: I guess what I’m getting at is that there’s something at the structural level that finance has become so dominant now and such an enormous proportion of the GDP (and I can’t remember the number; what is it, like, more than 40�percent of profit in the American economy was in finance; correct me if I’m wrong, but I think it was some very, very high number like that), that structurally finance is in a position now that the old way of thinking of how things might change, it simply has to be given up on, that there–you know, like, for example, if there’s going to be demands made, it’s about public banking, it’s about things that change the paradigm, because the way things are structured now, you cannot do it through the current system.WEEKS: Well, I also like Jennifer’s views on that, ’cause I think that that’s quite pessimistic. I think we look back–.JAY: I’m not pessimistic about that happening. I’m very pessimistic about it happening through the current paradigm. I’m not pessimistic that people could fight for something else.WEEKS: Let me just say–let me just go back to 1920s just for a moment. Election of 1928, who did the Democrats nominate? They nominated Al Smith, a reactionary Democrat from New York who would later denounce Roosevelt. Both parties were parties of business in 1928. Comes 1932, Roosevelt is nominated; you have a different paradigm. There were tremendously powerful businessmen–they happened to be industrialists, they happened to own railroads and factories and things such as that. The fact that we have the economy run by a handful of people is nothing new. John D.�Rockefeller, who controlled–basically, his stocks were something like 20�percent of the stocks on the U.S. stock market, or he’s buying and selling. I mean, we should not think that the concentration of power we see now is anything new.JAY: Go ahead, Jennifer.TAUB: Yeah. I mean, I think my optimism springs from a great deal of pessimism or despair, and I think about that as the next generation. As you probably know, student loan debt is about $1�trillion. Unemployment and underemployment for folks getting right out of college or out of high school is tremendously high. And so these forces will converge. And, you know, the next generation is more progressive and has an expectation of a society that nurtures each person to achieve what they–their best and not where a few syphon away all the profits. I mean, if you talk to people in their, you know, 20s and 30s, that is–you know, the vast majority have those views, but they also have that much debt. And to some degree, one might think that the debt would–if employment were higher, then the debt would only encourage people to, you know, take jobs and go along to get along. But I think at this point when you look at the Occupy movement, for example, which continues, there is a growing sense that radical transformation is necessary. And so I think that that is what makes me more optimistic.JAY: Okay. Well, we’re going to continue this discussion. This is obviously something we can go on about. If you’d like to get in on it, you can write us–contact (at) therealnews (dot) com. Or you can Twitter me. My Twitter is @PaulJay_TRNN. And we’ll put that up on the screen, I think. It’s @PaulJay_TRNN. And give us your thoughts on this, your questions, and we’ll bring these guests and other guests back, and this will be a ongoing discussion about what’s next.Thank you both for joining us.TAUB: Thank you, Paul.JAY: And thank you for joining us on The Real News Network.

End

DISCLAIMER: Please note that transcripts for The Real News Network are typed from a recording of the program. TRNN cannot guarantee their complete accuracy.


Comments

Our automatic spam filter blocks comments with multiple links and multiple users using the same IP address. Please make thoughtful comments with minimal links using only one user name. If you think your comment has been mistakenly removed please email us at contact@therealnews.com

Please enable JavaScript to view the comments powered by Disqus.

32% Of Ministers Linked To Corrupt ‘Finance-Energy Complex’

Mick Meaney
RINF Alternative News

David-Cameron

New research by anti-poverty campaign group, the World Development Movement (WDM), has revealed that 32% of ministers in the UK government, including top cabinet ministers, are linked to UK finance and energy companies fuelling climate change.

The WDM has has condemned what it calls the ‘finance-energy complex’ at the heart of government, which links big finance, oil and coal companies like Shell or Tullow Oil, to UK ministers at the very top of the government including; David Cameron, William Hague, George Osborne, Michael Gove, Oliver Letwin and Vince Cable.

The WDM discovered that:

The nexus is not limited to members of the government.
High level executives of big private sector financial
institutions are routinely appointed to serve on important
government committees. Some of these also serve on the
boards of energy companies or are involved in financing or
lobbying for them. The House of Lords is also home to scores
of individuals with links to either big finance or big energy.
An investigation has recently revealed that a sixth of Lords
have remunerated links to the financial sector.

Journalists and other investigators have uncovered the
scale of lobbying and revolving doors that exist between
the world of banks, hedge funds and stockbrokers and the
corridors of power.

And that:

Big finance and big energy are intricately linked. Between
2010 and 2012, the UK’s five biggest banks underwrote
£95.5 billion in corporate bonds for fossil fuel companies
and another £74.5 billion in new share issues.

All five have people on their boards of directors with links to the fossil fuel industry. In turn the top four oil and gas and the top four coal mining companies all have board members with backgrounds in finance.

According to the research, the value of fossil fuel shares on the London Stock Exchange is £900 billion — higher than the GDP of the whole of sub-Saharan Africa.

Top five UK banks’ underwrote £170 billion in bonds and share issues for fossil fuel companies 2010-12 — more than 11 times the amount the UK contributed in climate finance for developing countries.

Among the revelations, the report also reveals that foreign secretary William Hague, who used to work for Shell, helped Tullow Oil to get out of paying a £175 million tax bill in Uganda. Mr Hague actually made a personal phone call to the Ugandan president on Tullow Oil’s behalf.

They also discovered that David Cameron received a £10,000 donation from Jonathan Green, from the hedge fund GLG Partners, a frequent investor in fossil fuels and the major investor in oil startup Lothian, and also has dealt in shares of numerous fossil fuel companies including; Victoria Oil & Gas, RusPetro, Max Petroleum and Churchill Mining.

The report goes on to say:

Mark Foster Brown worked as a trader at hedge fund Altima
Partners and donated £10,000 to Cameron’s leadership
bid.

Like GLG, Altima deals in fossil fuel shares, including Cadogan Petroleum and Lonrho plc,29 which is a multi-sector company involved in building port terminals in Africa “to support the oil and gas industry”.

Other prominent finance sector donors to Cameron’s leadership campaign include James Lyle (formerly of Tiger Investments and Millgate Capital), Michael Spencer (derivatives trader at Dresdener Bank, formerly Natwest and Standard Chartered) and Robert Fleming (founder of the Robert Fleming merchant bank).

It also revealed a brief history of the British governments affair with finance and energy companies:

Many past ministers left government to fall straight into jobs in big finance or big oil. Here are some examples of former government ministers who have gone on to lucrative careers in finance or energy:

Tony Blair (former prime minister): JP Morgan, Zurich, UI Energy Corporation and others.

Peter Mandelson (various senior posts): Lazard investment bank.

Mark Malloch Brown (former energy and development minister): consultant to Vitol and oil exploration company Southwest energy.

Shriti Vadera (former DfID minister): BHP Billiton.

Michael Foster (former DfID minister): Society of British Gas Industries.

Hamas Offers Amnesty to Palestinian Collaborators Spying for Israel

0

Context: As yet there are no context links for this item.

Bio

Yousef Alhelou, is a Palestinian freelance journalist and documentary filmmaker based in Gaza-Palestine. His work has been featured in a variety of media outlets including BBC, GRN, CBC radio Canada, TV New Zealand, UN observer, Press TV, Etejah TV, Maan news network, Electronic Intifada among many others. Yousef is a UN fellow and took part in many speaking tours in Europe about his work experience working in a war-zoon. Yousef covered the infighting between Fatah and Hamas as well as the two Israeli wars on Gaza, siege-breaking boats and many other major events since 2006. Yousef runs Gaza TV News page on facebook that has over 46,000 followers.

Transcript

Following the Egyptian brokered ceasefire agreement between Israel and Hamas ruled Gaza that ended eight days of war last November; both sides are engaged in what is known as the “War of Brains”.

Tranquility prevails in the costal tiny strip, perhaps this is a good time for Hamas run interior ministry, which has announced a new amnesty campaign and rehabilitation programs to collaborators in Gaza spying for Israel, to turn themselves in and take advantage of the amnesty offer.PTC: Since it took control of Gaza in 2007, one of the priorities of Hamas-run government especially for internal security, is to work hard to combat the phenomenon of collaborationThe Real News talked to the Spokesperson of the interior ministry in Gaza who said that the phenomenon of collaboration is small but many have been arrested and others have turned themselves in. Adding that these collaborators pose a real danger to the unity of the people and their resistance against Israel, which has sealed off the narrow coastal enclave by land, sea and air.(Interview: Islam Shahwan, Spokesperson of the Interior ministry in Gaza)Transcript: (The enemy is trying constantly to recruit new collaborates in order to penetrate our internal front but our inelegance security officers are working around the clock to counter the Zionist espionage measures. We are conducting awareness campaigns to protect our society and internal front. We still offer amnesty to those who turn themselves in and we keep their identities confidential. 2013 will be the year to end the phenomenon of collaborators )Rights observers say it is difficult to know if the amnesty and rehabilitation programmes violate international humanitarian law, since it is unclear whether the participants are being detained against their will. They say there is reason for concern, however. The Hamas-run military courts that hand down death sentences for collaborators, for instance, are widely accused of denying defendants access to legal representation.(Interview: Sameer Zaqout, Al-Mezan Center for Human Rights)Transcript: (The phenomenon of collaborates in the occupied Palestinian territories especially in Gaza is a real problem, especially in light of the absence of applying human rights and justice, because most of the alleged collaborates who have been arrested so far by the Hamas run-interior security do not enjoy their basic rights, therefore human rights groups are always concerned about the safty and rights of these people who are subjected to inhumane interrogation. In many cases many spies were caught red- handed possessing high-tech equipment but the vast majority were convicted without solid evidences. Most of them are referred to a judiciary system that was formed in a way that is against the Palestinian basic law, giving that this judiciary systems was formed by a government that is affiliated to one political party, the lawyer, the judge, the police and interrogators are all from the same political party. Therefore many human rights groups boycotted this new judiciary system that was formed in Gaza in the past few years after Hamas came to power)(Interview: Islam Shahwan, Spokesperson of the Interior ministry in Gaza)Transcript: (Collaborators are treated according to the Palestinian law, they are referred to military courts, they have access to lawyers and they can appeal. Sometimes death sentence verdicts reconsidered and sentenced to some years in prison)Some experts say that recruiting new Palestinian collaborators does not mean that Israel suffers from the lack of information, as reconnaissance drones and high-tech equipments are used to gather information, in addition to spies who are covert and still active, but Israel always seeks to gather and updates information. (Interview: Fathey Sabbah, Palestinian Communication and Development Center)Transcript: (It’s true that there were achievements by the government in Gaza to fight this phenomenon but since the communication between the spy and the Israeli intelligence is conducted individually, this means that there are many collaborates still covert and unknown. I think the phenomenon of collaborators is an old one that existed long time ago in the occupied Palestinian territories including Gaza, and it is a very dangerous phenomenon. The government in Gaza says the phenomenon has declined shapely due to its campaigns to crackdown on collaborators, but I doubt it has decreased. I think the techniques and high technology used by the Israeli intelligence to communicate with the collaborators make it very difficult to uncover these spies)Despite Israel’s unilateral disengagement from Gaza in late 2005, it still maintains its full control over Gaza’s air space, territorial waters and border crossings except the Rafah crossing, it practices a policy of blackmailing against some travelers including patients passing via the Eriz crossing that links Gaza with the rest of the occupied territories, by asking them to collaborate and give information about the activities of Palestinian resistance groups or individuals. (Interview: Sameer Zaqout, Al-Mezan Center for Human Rights)Transcript: (Israel exploited and still exploits its control over Gaza’s border crossings to recruit more collaborates by blackmailing Gazan patients seeking medical care at hospitals inside Israel or the West Bank. We have documented many cases by collecting testimonies from patients who were refused exit by the Israeli army after they refused to collaborate with the Israeli inelegance service. This treatment is against the international law, and the international community is complicit for not intervening to stop this way of humiliation and human rights violations )(Interview: Islam Shahwan, Spokesperson of the Interior ministry in Gaza)Transcript: (The Zionist enemy suffered a serious blow during the 2009 and 2012 wars on Gaza as he was not able to gather information due to the difficulty to communicate with the collaborators on the ground. The enemy did not spare any effort to recruit new collaborators including women, using new different and even old methods. for instance through blackmailing patients at the Eriz crossing or by communicating with some people via e-mail or mobile phones and pretending to be calling from international NGO’s abroad offering to help, the enemy even targets some local journalists and some media companies by pretending to be an international media outlet and then asks them to do some reports on specific topics in exchange for big amount of money)During the 8-day war, six Palestinians who were suspected of spying to Israel were kidnapped from their prison and killed by masked gunmen who then chained the bodies of the alleged collaborators to motorcycles and dragged them throughout the main streets of Gaza City. Following the incident, Mousa Abu Marzouq, Hamas’s deputy leader condemned what he described the unlawful killing, adding that punishing collaborators and especially those involved in the killing of leaders Palestinian resistance groups must only be carried out in accordance with the law and through the legal procedures.(Interview: Islam Shahwan, Spokesperson of the Interior ministry in Gaza)Transcript: (we have said clearly to all international and local human rights organizations that we are against the inhumane way of how those people killed, it was uncivilized way and it was a grave violation. Our ministry conducted an official investigation and we found out the perpetrators and we applied punitive measures against them)The Real News talked to the father and wife of one of the collaborators who was executed. The family says that they have not been updated about the results of the investigation(Interview: Wife of Executed Collaborator)Transcript: (My husband spent 3 years in prison; the way how he was killed and dragged was inhumane, how would his three daughters and two sons feel when they grow up and see the footage)(Interview: Abu Rebhi Badawi, Father of executed collaborator)Transcript: (My son was accused of being a collaborator, he was sentenced to death by a military court and we appealed against that decision, we were shocked when we saw the footage of our son along five others executed and dragged in the streets by motorcyclists, we are still waiting to hear the results of the committee that was formed to investigate who killed him in that way and who gave the order ?)These families have bitter feelings as they don’t want to be associated with the stigma of having a family member seen or accused as a being a collaborator.Although Palestinian law permits capital punishment for those convicted of collaborating with Israel, death sentences must be ratified by the president of the Palestinian Authority, but that authority is not recognized by Hamas in light of the prolonged split.PTC: As the anti-espionage campaign aims to cleanse Israel’s alleged spies through turning themselves in, or face arrest and a possible death sentence handed down in a military court, “The war of brains” between Hamas and Israel is continuing despite the tranquility on the ground.YousefFor TRNN, Gaza


Comments

Our automatic spam filter blocks comments with multiple links and multiple users using the same IP address. Please make thoughtful comments with minimal links using only one user name. If you think your comment has been mistakenly removed please email us at contact@therealnews.com

Please enable JavaScript to view the comments powered by Disqus.

Mid-April Venezuelan Presidential Elections Scheduled

1

Stephen Lendman
RINF Alternative News

Venezuela’s National Electoral Council (CNE) President Tibisay Lucena announced Sunday, April 14. Acting President Nicolas Maduro carries Chavez’s torch.

He’ll do it responsibly. Millions of Venezuelans depend on him. He won’t them down. It won’t be easy. He faces enormous obstacles. So did Chavez.

He’ll be PSUV’s (United Socialist Party of Venezuela) candidate. He’ll face opposition Rountable of Democratic Unity (MUD) leader Henrique Capriles Radonski.

Last October, Chavez defeated him overwhelmingly. He represents what most Venezuelans deplore. It includes returning to oligarch dark days, money power, neoliberal harshness, and subservience to imperial Washington. Expect Maduro to win decisively.

On March 10, Capriles was less than candid. He said he’s “analyzing (Tibisay’s declaration) and will tell the country about my decision in the coming hours.” Who if not him?

He’ll run. He’ll challenge Maduro. He’ll lose. He has little chance of winning. In October, he lost decisively. Chavismo triumphed.

In mid-December, it did again. It did so impressively. It won 20 of 23 states. It kept every one previously held. It won four from opposition candidates.

Millions of Venezuelans spoke. They left no doubt where they stand. Their mindset hasn’t changed. They’ve come too far to turn back. Chavismo’s institutionalized. It’s part of Venezuela’s culture. It’s not going away.

Tachira Governor Jose Vielma Mora spoke for others, saying:

Chavez “liberated us from transnational companies and stood up to imperialist countries. We will be with Chavez forever.”

Candidate registrations take place shortly. A brief window exists between now and April 14. Little organizing time exists. Maduro’s hugely advantaged. People power supports him.

International observers will monitor proceedings. They’ve done so before. Venezuelan elections are scrupulously open, free and fair. They’re a model for other countries. They’re the world’s best.

They shame America’s sham process. Duopoly power controls things. People have no say. Venezuelans have real democracy. Americans have none now and never did.

Greg Wilpert knows Venezuelan well. He lived there for eight years. He’s an activist/sociologist/journalist/Venezuela Analysis co-founder. He taught briefly at the Central University of Venezuela.

His book titled “Changing Venezuela by Taking Power: The History and Policies of the Chavez Government” discusses the Chavez era.

He instituted social democracy. He challenged generations of oligarch rule. He faced enormous obstacles. Dark forces don’t yield easily. They haven’t gone away. They menace equity and justice. They await their moment to regain power.

Wilpert understands. Revolutionary change can be “undone by the specters of the past,” he says. Internal opposition and imperial Washington challenged Chavez from inception. They haven’t quit trying. They won’t.

It’s the oil, stupid. Venezuela has the world’s largest reserves. America wants total control. Big Oil want ‘exploitation’ rights. Like Wall Street, they make money the old fashioned way. They steal it.

Wilpert chronicled Venezuela under Chavez. He began saying “one would hardly have expected a small, relatively wealthy, and inconspicuous country in Latin America to boldly announce it will create 21st century socialism.”

“Why and how was this possible in Venezuela? What does it mean? What are its prospects for success?”

Chavez’s election changed Latin America. It ended what James Petras calls “the golden age of pillage.”

Latin America no longer is America’s back yard. It never should have been in the first place. Washington took full advantage. Millions deplore it for that reason. They won’t tolerate going back.

Western transnational companies pillaged the hemisphere for profit. They don’t stop trying. Doing so meets stiff resistance. Chavez inspired challengers. His legacy reflects success. Much more needs to be done.

Neoliberalism hasn’t gone away. From 1980 through 1999, policies included privatized state enterprises. Many were sold for a fraction of their real worth. Mass layoffs followed.

So did deregulation, social spending cuts, wage freezes or cuts, unrestricted market access for Western companies, corporate-friendly tax cuts, extra burdens on working households, trade unionism attacked and marginalized, as well repression targeting non-believers.

Strip-mining material wealth from nations was policy. Per capita income growth was 11%. From 1960 – 1979, it was 80%.

Resistance movements arose. Harsh repression followed. Venezuela was the “prime example of the failures of neoliberalism, resistance and repression.”

“By the early 21st century, no clear answers had emerged….” Voters demanded something better.

Of the centrist/left of center leaders elected, “only one,” Hugo Chavez, declared “an explicitly anti-capitalist and pro-socialist agenda.”

Initially he was as “moderate as (other) Latin American leftists.” He faced more vehement opposition. It radicalized him to do more.

At the same time, he was business-friendly. Before 2008 crisis conditions erupted, bankers had a party, they said. They profited hugely. They wanted more.

So do all corporate predators. They want it all. During the “golden age of pillage,” they got it. No longer.

Chavez’s socialism for the 21st century “does not mean that his policies are socialist.” They’re equitable short of state socialism.

Chavez spurned it. He favored a Venezuelan model. He wanted it advanced, refined and improved.

Wilpert discussed recent Venezuelan history. It made Bolivarianism possible.

Since the 1920s, Venezuela depended on increasing oil revenues. They “fueled the development of a strong and economically interventionist state.”

In the early 1980s, prices fell. A 20 year decline began. Poverty and inequality followed. It was Latin America’s most extreme.

The old order weakened. Chavez emerged. He came at the right time. He promised revolutionary change. He delivered.

Oligarchs challenged him. They went all-out to remove him. In April 2002, they nearly succeeded. People power and Venezuela’s military foiled them.

Chavez’s legitimacy increased. A December 2002 -February 2003 strike and oil management lockout failed. So did the 2004 recall election. Chavez won by a landslide.

In early 2005, he “publicly declared his conversion to a new form of socialism.” He called it a 21st century version. He favored a Venezuela model. He wanted it institutionalized. He had much more to do.

Wilpert discusses his political, economic, social and foreign policies. He does so in detail. They’re innovative. They transcend “capitalism as usual.”

They’re “often contradicted or undermined by contravening policy tendencies.”

Chavez established grass roots democracy. His communal councils reflect it. At the same time, he “increased the importance and strength of the presidency.”

At the same time, he laid “the groundwork for institutions” able to advance 21st century socialism.

Doing so reflects a major achievement. Social justice is policy. It’s unique in Latin America. No Western society has it the same way.

In America and most other developed countries, it’s disappearing altogether. Chavez championed equity and justice. He accepted nothing less.

Opportunities, obstacles and prospects remain. Wilpert discussed them. Three stand out:

(1) “the persistence of a patronage culture;

(2) the nascent personality cult around Chavez; (and his)

(3) own autocratic instincts, which undermine the creation of a participatory society.”

If Maduro’s able to resolve them free from outside pressure and interference, Venezuela may “be the greatest hope for establishing freedom, equality, and social justice in over a generation.”

He may achieve what’s never been done before in modern times. Hopefully he’s up to the challenge. Millions depend on him. He knows. He won’t let them down. Much depends on him succeeding.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago. He can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com.

Thomas Perez: Obama’s Labor Secretary Choice

0

Stephen Lendman
RINF Alternative News

Thomas Perez, Assistant Attorney General

Throughout his tenure, Obama waged war on labor. Perez won’t change things. He’ll replace Hilda Solis. She resigned in January. She accomplished little in four years.

She’s the daughter of immigrant union members. She failed to deliver as promised. She pledged to make a difference and didn’t. Expect little change from Perez. More on him below.

Organized labor in America’s in disarray. In January, union membership reached a near-century low. Only 11.3% of US workers are organized.

Private sector unionization’s down to 6.6%. It’s the lowest percentage in over 100 years. It’s headed perhaps for extinction.

Union bosses bear much responsibility. They side more with management than rank and file members. They conspire against their own.

They abandoned their most effective weapon. They rarely strike. They block collective struggle. They betray promises made.

They’re self-serving. They prioritize their own welfare. They place it above rank and file interests. They’re complicit in supporting the divine right of capital. They’ve been that way for decades.

The UAW reflects organized labor’s decline. At about 380,000, its membership barely exceeds one-third its total eight years ago.

In the 1950s, about 35% of workers were organized. In 1979, it was around 24%. At the end of the Reagan era, it was 16.8%. In 2007, it was 12%. In 2011, it was 11.8%. It continues declining annually.

Obama, other Democrats, Republicans and union bosses conspire. They do so unconscionably. They want workers to live or die by market-based rules. They’re rigged against them. They haven’t got a chance. They’re on their own sink or swim.

A race to the bottom heads them toward serfdom. In November 2003, the Employee Free Choice Act (EFCA) offered hope. It went nowhere during Bush’s tenure.

Obama followed suit. He spurned it. In July 2009, he and Senate Democrats agreed to block EFCA’s “card check” provision. They removed it from pending legislation.

It would have required employers to recognize the right to organize once most workers signed union cards freely and openly. Hope for passage died. So did worker rights.

Real unemployment’s at 23%. Economist John Williams called February’s jobs gain and reported unemployment rate “not meaningful.” Numbers are distorted to belie reality.

Economic conditions are deplorable. They’ve been that way for years. Around 25 million working age Americans can’t find jobs.

Millions more involuntarily take low-pay/poor benefit part-time or temp ones. Obama’s a jobs destroyer, not creator.

He’s waging war on America’s social contract. He wants it eliminated altogether. He spurns worker rights. Don’t expect Perez to change things. His resume belies what he’ll do.

He won’t be worker friendly. It’s not his job. He’ll continue same old, same old. He’s mandated to do it. He has no other choice. He’ll perform as asked or be replaced.

He’s an attorney. From 1989 – 2001, he served in the Bush I and Clinton Justice Department. He was a prosecutor in its Civil Rights Division.

He was Janet Reno’s Deputy Assistant Attorney General for Civil Rights. From 1995 – 1998, he was Senator Edward Kennedy’s special counsel. He was his main civil rights/criminal justice/constitutional issues advisor.

Through the remainder of Clinton’s administration, he was Director of the Office for Civil Rights at the United States Department of Health and Human Services.

In 2009, Obama chose him as Assistant Attorney General for the Civil Rights Division. He began serving in October. Prior to his appointment, he was Secretary of Maryland’s Department of Labor, Licensing and Regulation.

From 2002 – 2006, he also served on the Montgomery County Council. He was the first Latino to do so.

From 2001 – 2007, he taught law at the University of Maryland. He’s currently a part-time George Washington School of Public Health faculty member.

Senator Charles Grassley (R. IA) criticizes his nomination. So do other lawmakers. At issue is racial discrimination. Perez was involved in getting St. Paul, MN to drop a Supreme Court appeal.

Fair lending advocates said doing so harmed a central enforcement tenet in housing discrimination cases.

The Justice Department declined to join two whistleblower lawsuits. They were filed against St. Paul. It was done in exchange for dropping the appeal.

Justice Department officials claimed Perez’s involvement was appropriate. On March 7, Grassley said:

“If Mr. Perez is nominated, he should face a lot of tough questions about this quid pro quo deal he appears to have put together.”

“I shudder to think how whistleblowers will be treated in the Labor Department if this quid pro quo with St. Paul is any indication of Mr. Perez’s approach to this important area of law.”

Supporters call him a dedicated civil rights enforcer. He has little labor experience. His civil rights advocacy won’t matter. Politics trumps principle.

Perez’s nomination comes at a time offshoring manufacturing, technology and other jobs continues. Workers lucky enough to have jobs face pay and benefit cuts.

Foreign workers given H-1b/L-1 visas fill many remaining openings. They do so at lower pay. US employees face sacking after training them. A race to the bottom assures more of the same.

Obama’s exploiting immigrants. Millions of family members of legal US residents await permanent residency status.

Proposed legislation imposes tough standards. Undocumented immigrants will be forced to the back of the line. US citizens trying to bring unmarried Mexican children to America requires waiting 17 years or longer. Might as well wait a lifetime.

Sweeping Immigration and Customs Enforcement (ICE) discriminatory harshness continues. Obama treats undocumented immigrants like criminals. He deported record numbers. He incarcerates thousands more.

Obama spurns them. He’s contemptuous of worker rights. Don’t expect Peres to make a difference. He won’t dare challenge his boss. He won’t be around very long if he tries.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago. He can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com.

Civilian Torture And Human Rights Abuse Rife In Iraq

RINF Alternative News

iraq-torture-prison

A new report released today has found that 10 years after the US-led invasion, Iraq remains “enmeshed in a grim cycle of human rights abuses, including attacks on civilians, torture of detainees and unfair trials.”

The news follows on from a damning investigation which last week revealed the Pentagon sent high ranking officials to manage secret detention and torture units in Iraq.

Today, the Amnesty International report, Iraq: A Decade of Abuses, highlights a decade of abuse by Iraqi security forces and foreign troops who show callous disregard for civilian life, their failure to uphold human rights, respect the rule of law and exposes the torture and ill-treatment of detainees.

Torture methods include beatings, suffocation, electric shocks; including to the genitals; and deprivation of food, water and sleep.

The report says:

“Thousands of Iraqis are detained without trial or are serving prison sentences imposed after unfair trials, torture remains rife and continues to be committed with impunity, and the new Iraq is one of the world’s leading executioners.”

Detainees are being tortured as a means of forcing them to ‘confess’ to crimes or to incriminate others.

“In December 2011, Iraqi TV stations broadcast testimonies of at least three detained former bodyguards of the office of Vice President Tareq al-Hasemi in which they accuse him of ordering them to murder government and security officials.”

447 prisoners have been executed since 2003.

Last year the government hanged 129 prisoners and currently holds 37,000, of whom 21,000 have been sentenced, making the country one of the world’s leading executioners.

“Ten years after the end of Saddam Hussein’s repressive rule, many Iraqis today enjoy greater freedoms than they did under his Ba’athist regime, but the fundamental human rights gains that should have been achieved during the past decade have signally failed to materialize,” said Hassiba Hadj Sahraoui, Middle East and North Africa Deputy Director at Amnesty International.

“Neither the Iraqi government nor the former occupying powers have adhered to the standards required of them under international law and the people of Iraq are still paying a heavy price for their failure.

“Death sentences and executions are being used on a horrendous scale,” said Hadj Sahraoui, “It is particularly abhorrent that many prisoners have been sentenced to death after unfair trials and on the basis of confessions they say they were forced to make under torture.

“It is high time that the Iraqi authorities end this appalling cycle of abuse and declare a moratorium on executions as a first step towards abolishing the death penalty for all crimes.

“Iraq remains caught in a cycle of torture and impunity that should long ago have been broken. It is high time that the Iraqi authorities take the concrete steps needed to entrench a culture of human rights protection, and do so without further prevarication or delay.”

At the time of publication, there has been no reaction from the Iraqi government.

Bahrainis hold fresh anti-regime demos

0

Bahraini protestors run for cover from tear gas fired by Bahraini riot police during an anti-regime demonstration in the village of Daih, west of Manama, March 8, 2013. (File photo)

Bahrainis have staged fresh anti-regime demonstrations despite the ongoing heavy-handed crackdown on peaceful pro-democracy protesters in the Persian Gulf country, Press TV reports.

On Sunday, people poured out into the streets in the village of Sitra, southeast of Manama, and chanted slogans against the ruling Al Khalifa royal family.

Protesters also staged another anti-regime rally in Nuwaidrat village, west of Manama.

Bahraini forces fired teargas canisters and stun grenades to disperse the protesters. Activists say several protesters sustained injuries as a result.

The Bahraini revolution began in mid-February 2011, when the people, inspired by the popular revolutions that toppled the dictators of Tunisia and Egypt, started holding massive demonstrations.

The Bahraini government promptly launched a brutal crackdown on the peaceful protests and called in Saudi-led Arab forces from neighboring states.

Dozens of people have been killed in the crackdown, and the security forces have arrested hundreds, including doctors and nurses accused of treating injured revolutionaries.

A report published by the Bahrain Independent Commission of Inquiry in November 2011 found that the Al Khalifa regime had used excessive force in the crackdown and accused Manama of torturing political activists, politicians, and protesters.

The protesters say they will continue holding anti-regime demonstrations until their demand for the establishment of a democratically elected government is met.

MP/HSN/HJL

Iran holds Nowruz Welcoming Festival

0

Iran has held Nowruz Welcoming Celebration during a ceremony in the capital city of Tehran to mark upcoming spring and Iranian New Year.

Iranian President Mahmoud Ahmadinejad and the First Vice President Mohammad-Reza Rahimi along with a number of officials attended the national celebration held at Tehran’s Summit Conference Hall.

The ceremony also hosted some foreign ambassadors to Tehran as well as a number of Iranian artists.

Several exhibitions, displaying Iranian handicrafts and cultural heritage, were also mounted on the sidelines of the event.

Some traditional and regional Iranian music ensembles also performed their programs at the festival.

In Iran and many other countries people welcome spring with the ancient Nowruz (new day) celebrations which coincide with the astronomical Vernal Equinox Day or the first day of spring.

Nowruz (new day) is the first day of ‘Farvardin’, the first month on the Persian calendar which falls on March 21.

The International Day of Nowruz was registered on the UNESCO List of the Intangible Cultural Heritage of Humanity on February 23, 2010, and the festivities are now celebrated in many countries as far as the US and Canada.

FGP/FGP

‘Iran seeks ties with independent states’

0

Iran’s President Mahmoud Ahmadinejad meets Benin’s Foreign Minister Nassirou Bako-Arifari in the Iranian capital city, Tehran, March 10, 2013.

Iran’s President Mahmoud Ahmadinejad has reaffirmed the Islamic Republic’s determination to expand its relations with all the independent states across the globe.

“The Islamic Republic of Iran will steadfastly pursue the expansion of its ties with independent countries, including Benin, and considers that to be to the benefit of the two nations as well as all sovereign states,” said Ahmadinejad during a Sunday meeting with Benin’s Foreign Minister Nassirou Bako-Arifari in the Iranian capital city, Tehran.

The Iranian chief executive also described the relations between Tehran and Porto-Novo as “brotherly and expanding.”

Bako-Arifari, for his part, expressed satisfaction with the pace of the implementation of mutual agreements between Iran and Benin and noted that the January visit by Iran’s Foreign Minister Ali Akbar Salehi to the West African country remarkably facilitated the process.

Benin’s foreign Minister, whose country currently holds the rotating presidency of the African Union, also hailed the positive atmosphere of Iran’s comprehensive negotiations with the P5+1 group (permanent members of the UN Security Council plus Germany) in the Kazakh city of Almaty on February 26 and 27.

Bako-Arifari expressed optimism that Iran’s nuclear energy rights would be fully recognized.

During the meeting, the two sides also extended their condolences over the death of late Venezuelan President Hugo Chavez last Tuesday.

ASH/HMV/HJL

‘Syria militants behead, shoot civilians’

0

Recently-released footage shows a group of foreign-sponsored militants in Syria killing civilians, execution-style.

The footage shows members of the terrorist Free Syrian Army beading a captured Syrian man.

In another scene gunfire is heard blasting for some seconds as a militant shoots a man in the head. The victim’s hands are tied behind him, and he is face-down on the ground.

In recent months, many videos have emerged of militant groups committing crimes against humanity in Syria.

Despite widespread international condemnation, the terrorist Free Syrian Army continues to kill captives and kidnap civilians.

Last November, a video showed the militants beating around 10 Syrian soldiers before forcing them to lie on the ground and executing them with automatic rifles near the northwestern town of Saraqeb.

Syria has been experiencing unrest for almost two years.

The Syrian government says that the turmoil, which has killed many people, including large numbers of army and security personnel, is being orchestrated from outside the country.

MP/HSN

Venezuela’s Maduro raps opp. leader

0

Venezuela’s acting President Nicolas Maduro has slammed the country’s opposition for trying to generate violence with ‘disgusting accusations.’

“You wretched loser! You have shown your true face – that of a fascist,” Maduro said on Sunday, referring to Henrique Capriles, who announced that he had accepted his nomination for the leadership of the main opposition coalition for the April 14 election.

Capriles had said that Maduro was taking advantage of the death of Venezuelan leader Hugo Chavez to stage a political campaign.

The acting Venezuelan president also stated that Capriles “is looking for the people of Venezuela to… go on the path of violence.” Maduro urged Venezuelans to “not fall into provocations.”

A recent poll by Hinterlaces showed that Maduro was leading with 14 points over Capriles, who was defeated by Chavez in the previous election, held in October 2012.

On Sunday, mourners paid tribute to Hugo Chavez during a religious service held at the military academy in Caracas, where Chavez’s casket has been placed.

The casket will be moved on March 15 to a museum where a tomb is being constructed to enshrine the embalmed corpse of the Venezuelan leader.

Chavez died at a military hospital in Caracas on March 5 at the age of 58 after a two-year battle with cancer.

He founded the movement of Bolivarian Revolution to establish popular democracy and economic independence and bring about the equal distribution of wealth in Latin America. Chavez was one of the key players in the progressive movement that has swept across Latin America over the past few years.

CAH/HSN/HJL

5 Ways Privatization Is Poisoning America

0

We all live better lives when the common good is not for sale.

March 10, 2013  |  

Like this article?

Join our email list:

Stay up to date with the latest headlines via email.

It gets more maddening every day. Essential human needs are being packaged into products to be bought and sold. The right to food and water, education, health care, public spaces, and unrestricted speech shouldn’t be based on who can pay the most, or on who can generate profits with the slickest marketing pitch.

The free-market capitalism that drives our economy is a doctrine of individuals pursuing profit. Nothing else matters. An executive for Roche, a healthcare company, said “We are not in the business to save lives, but to make money.”

With privatization of the common good we risk losing both our heritage and our humanness.

1. The Taking of Public Land

Attempts to privatize federal land were made by the Reagan administration in the 1980s and the Republican-controlled Congress in the 1990s. In 2006, President Bush proposed auctioning off 300,000 acres of national forest in 41 states.

The assault on our common areas continues with even greater ferocity today, as the euphemistic Path to Prosperity has proposed to sell millions of acres of “unneeded federal land,” and libertarian groups like the Cato Institute demand that our property be “allocated to the highest-value use.” Mitt Romney admitted that he didn’t know “what the purpose is” of public lands.

Examples of the takeaway are shocking. Peabody Coal is strip-mining public lands in Wyoming and Montana and making a 10,000% profit on the meager amounts they pay for the privilege. Sealaska is snatching up timberland in Alaska. The Central Rockies Land Exchange would allow Bill Koch to pick up choice Colorado properties from the Bureau of Land Management, while neighboring Utah Governor Gary Herbert sees land privatization as a way to reduce the deficit. Representative Cliff Stearns recommended that we “sell off some of our national parks.” One gold mining company even invoked an 1872 law to grab mineral-rich Nevada land for which it stands to make a million-percent profit.

The National Resources Defense Council just reported that oil and gas companies hold drilling and fracking rights on U.S. land equivalent to the size of California and Florida combined. Much of this land is “split estate,” which means the company can drill under an American citizen’s property without consent. Unrestrained by government regulations, TransCanada was able to use eminent domain in Texas to lay its pipeline on private property and then have the owner arrested for trespassing on her own land, and Chesapeake Energy Corporation overturned a 93-year-old law to frack a Texas residence without paying a penny to the homeowners. Most recently, the oil frenzy in North Dakota has cheated Native Americans out of a billion dollars worth of revenue from drilling leases.

Away from the mountains and the plains, back in the cities of Chicago and Indianapolis and L.A. and San Diego, our streets and parking spaces have been surrendered to corporations until the time of our great-grandchildren, with some of the highest profit margins in the corporate world.

2. Water for Sale

The corporate invasion of the water market is well underway. In May 2000 Fortune Magazine called water “one of the world’s great business opportunities..[It] promises to be to the 21st century what oil was to the 20th.” Citigroup is on board, viewing water as a prime investment, and perhaps the “single most important physical-commodity based asset class.”

The vital human resource of water is being privatized and marketed all over the country. In Pennsylvania and California, the American Water Company took over towns and raised rates by 70% or more. In Atlanta, United Water Services demanded more money from the city while prompting federal complaints about water quality. Shell owns groundwater rights in Colorado, oil tycoon T. Boone Pickens is buying up the water in drought-stricken Texas, and water in Alaska is being pumped into tankers and sold in the Middle East.

A 2009 analysis of water and sewer utilities by Food and Water Watch found that private companies charge up to 80 percent more for water and 100 percent more for sewer services. Various privatization abusesor failures occurred in California, Georgia, Illinois, Indiana, New Jersey, and Rhode Island.

Of course, water monopolization is a global concern, and a life-threatening issue in undeveloped countries, where 884 million people are without safe drinking water and more than 2.6 billion people lack the means for basic sanitation. Whether in the U.S. or in the world’s poorest nation, the folly of privatizing water is made clear by the profit-seeking motives of business:

(1) Water corporations are primarily accountable to their stockholders, not to the people they serve.
(2) They will avoid serving low-income communities where bill collection might be an issue.
(3) Because of the risk to profits, there is less incentive to maintain infrastructure.

3. Owning Human Life

Monsanto and their agro-chemical partners call themselves the “life industry.”

In 1980 a General Electric geneticist engineered an oil-eating bacterium, effective against oil spills, and in the first case of its kind the Supreme Court ruled that “a live, human-made micro-organism is patentable subject matter.” Fifteen years later a World Trade Organization decision allowed plants, genes, and microorganisms to be owned as intellectual property.

The results, not surprisingly, have been disastrous. One-fifth of the human genome is privately owned through patents. Strains of influenza and hepatitis have been claimed by corporate and university labs, and because of this researchers can’t use the patented life forms to perform cancer research. Thus the cost of life-preserving tests often depends on the whim (and the market analysis) of the organization claiming ownership of the biological entity.

The results have also been otherworldly. In 1996 the U.S. National Institutes of Health attempted to patent the blood cells of the primitive Hagahai tribesman of New Guinea. U.S. companies AgriDyne and W.R. Grace tried to gain ownership of the neem plant, used for centuries in India for the making of medicines and natural pesticides. Other examples of ‘biopiracy’: The University of Cincinnati holds a patent on Brazil’s guarana seed; the University of Mississippi holds a patent on the Asian spice turmeric.

Most tragically, tens of thousands of Indian farmers, charged for seeds that they used to develop on their own, and forced to repurchase them every year, have been driven to suicide after experiencing crop failures and ruinous debt.

Monsanto is at the forefront of GMO seeds and litigation against vulnerable farmers. To date the company has won over half of its patent infringement lawsuits. The Supreme Court is currently weighing the arguments in  Bowman vs. Monsanto, which asks if a company can have a claim on a farmer whose crops were derived from a seed already paid for. More significantly, the question is whether a company can claim the rights to a form of life that has been nurtured by communities of farmers for centuries.

4. Owning the Air

In polluted Beijing, wealthy entrepreneur Chen Guangbiao is selling “fresh air” in a soft drink can for about 80 cents.

While Americans are not yet dependent on (real or imagined) breathing supplements, we have relinquished public access to the air in another important way: the 1996 Telecommunications Act led the way to a giveaway of the transmission airwaves to the broadcast media. Through an effective lobbying campaign the communications industry gained all the benefits of a lucrative public space without even a licensing fee. Objected former Senate Majority Leader Bob Dole, “The airwaves are a natural resource. They do not belong to the broadcasters, phone companies or any other industry. They belong to the American people.”

Closely related is our right to freedom of expression on the Internet, which has been repeatedly threatened, despite the presence of existing copyright laws, by aggressive proposals like the Stop Online Piracy Act (SOPA) and the Protect IP Act (PIPA). Privacy is at risk with the Cyber Intelligence Sharing and Protection Act (CISPA), passed in the House despite objections by Ron Paul and others who recognize the “Big Brother” implications of government monitoring of Google and Facebook accounts. The Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act has facilitated the monitoring of foreign communications in the name of anti-terrorism.

A 2011 UNESCO report offered this worrisome insight: “..the control of information on the Internet and Web is certainly feasible, and technological advances do not therefore guarantee greater freedom of speech.”

5. Children as Products

Leading capitalists like Bill Gates and Jeb Bush and Michael Bloomberg and Arne Duncan and Michelle Rhee, who together have a few months teaching experience, have decided that the business model can pump out improved assembly line versions of our children.

Charter schools simply don’t work as well as the profitseekers would have us believe. The recently updated CREDO study at Stanford concluded again that “CMOs (Charter Management Organizations) on average are not dramatically better than non-CMO schools in terms of their contributions to student learning.” Approximately the same percentages of charters and non-charters are showing improvement (or lack of improvement) in reading and math. In addition, poorly performing charters tend not to improve over time.

Nevertheless, charters remain appealing to poorly informed parents. The schools like to represent themselves as equal opportunity educational options, but the facts state the opposite, as many of them have strict application standards that ensure access to the most qualified students. Funding for such schools drains money out of the public system.

Children are viewed as products in another way — on the school-to-prison pipeline. Many school districts employ “school resource officers” to patrol their hallways, and to ticket or arrest kids who disrupt the academic routine, no matter the age of the offender or the nature of the “offense”:

— A twelve-year-old was arrested for wearing too much perfume.
— A five-year-old was handcuffed for committing “battery” on a police officer.
— A six-year-old was called a “terrorist threat” for talking about shooting bubbles at a classmate.

Along with these bizarre instances is the frightening precedent set by a private prison, Corrections Corporation of America, which despite having no law enforcement authority was allowed to participate in a drug sweep at a high school in Arizona.

An Antidote?

A successful society doesn’t derive from a few Ayn-Rand-type individuals. It’s the other way around, as philosopher John Dewey reasoned in the 1930s. It’s easy to forget that our country’s greatest success was due to a collaborative effort in the years during and after World War 2, when advances in manufacturing and technology made us the strongest economy the world had ever seen. It was a shared success. The common good was not for sale.

Shocking New Evidence Reveals Depths of ‘Treason’ and ‘Treachery’ of Watergate and Iran-Contra

0

New evidence continues to accumulate showing how Official Washington got key elements of two major presidential scandals of the Nixon and Reagan administrations wrong.

March 10, 2013  |  

Like this article?

Join our email list:

Stay up to date with the latest headlines via email.

A favorite saying of Official Washington is that “the cover-up is worse than the crime.” But that presupposes you accurately understand what the crime was. And, in the case of the two major U.S. government scandals of the last third of the Twentieth Century — Watergate and Iran-Contra — that doesn’t seem to be the case.

Indeed, newly disclosed documents have put old evidence into a sharply different light and suggest that history has substantially miswritten the two scandals by failing to understand that they actually were sequels to earlier scandals that were far worse. Watergate and Iran-Contra were, in part at least, extensions of the original crimes, which involved dirty dealings to secure the immense power of the presidency.

Shortly after Nixon took office in 1969, FBI Director J. Edgar Hoover informed him of the existence of the file containing national security wiretaps documenting how Nixon’s emissaries had gone behind President Lyndon Johnson’s back to convince the South Vietnamese government to boycott the Paris Peace Talks, which were close to ending the Vietnam War in fall 1968.In the case of Watergate — the foiled Republican break-in at the Democratic National Committee in June 1972 and Richard Nixon’s botched cover-up leading to his resignation in August 1974 — the evidence is now clear that Nixon created the Watergate burglars out of his panic that the Democrats might possess a file on his sabotage of Vietnam peace talks in 1968.

The disruption of Johnson’s peace talks then enabled Nixon to hang on for a narrow victory over Democrat Hubert Humphrey. However, as the new President was taking steps in 1969 to extend the war another four-plus years, he sensed the threat from the wiretap file and ordered two of his top aides, chief of staff H.R. “Bob” Haldeman and National Security Advisor Henry Kissinger, to locate it. But they couldn’t find the file.

We now know that was because President Johnson, who privately had called Nixon’s Vietnam actions “treason,” had ordered the file removed from the White House by his national security aide Walt Rostow.

Rostow labeled the file “The ‘X’ Envelope” and kept it in his possession, although having left government, he had no legal right to possess the highly classified documents, many of which were stamped “Top Secret.” Johnson had instructed Rostow to retain the papers as long as he, Johnson, was alive and then afterwards to decide what to do with them.

Nixon, however, had no idea that Johnson and Rostow had taken the missing file or, indeed, who might possess it. Normally, national security documents are passed from the outgoing President to the incoming President to maintain continuity in government.

But Haldeman and Kissinger had come up empty in their search. They were only able to recreate the file’s contents, which included incriminating conversations between Nixon’s emissaries and South Vietnamese officials regarding Nixon’s promise to get them a better deal if they helped him torpedo Johnson’s peace talks.

So, the missing file remained a troubling mystery inside Nixon’s White House, but Nixon still lived up to his pre-election agreement with South Vietnamese President Nguyen van Thieu to extend U.S. military participation in the war with the goal of getting the South Vietnamese a better outcome than they would have received from Johnson in 1968.

Nixon not only continued the Vietnam War, which had already claimed more than 30,000 American lives and an estimated one million Vietnamese, but he expanded it, with intensified bombing campaigns and a U.S. incursion into Cambodia. At home, the war was bitterly dividing the nation with a massive anti-war movement and an angry backlash from war supporters.

Elizabeth Warren Confronts the Atrocity of Drug Money Laundering by Big Banks

0

Americans have been waiting for a politician like Warren for nearly a century.

March 10, 2013  |  

Like this article?

Join our email list:

Stay up to date with the latest headlines via email.

Heavens to Betsy. Sen. Elizabeth Warren leapt from the gate of her first term pummeling Ben Bernanke on too-big-to-fail financial institutions. Then she demanded to know why American banks were never brought to trial. Finally, last Thursday, looking for all the world like a school principal called to sort out teenage hooligans, she queried regulators as to why HSBC bankers who launder money for drug lords and terrorists should go free. Quoth the senator:

“If you’re caught with an ounce of cocaine, the chances are good you’re going to jail. If it happens repeatedly, you may go to jail for the rest of your life. But evidently, if you launder nearly a billion dollars for drug cartels and violate our international sanctions, your company pays a fine and you go home and sleep in your own bed at night.”

Game on! Naturally, the left is swooning. Elizabeth Warren says what we all wish we could say to the besuited jerks who defend a crooked industry. Except, instead of snatching them by the lapels and screaming obscenities as we might do, Warren sits calmly and repeats her inimitably direct questions like a blond Terminator. The big banks and their lackeys can’t stand her, and it looks as if the feeling is mutual.

Americans love her because we have serious unfinished business with the banking industry. We remember how the White House chose to protect the bankers from the pitchforks in the wake of the financial crisis. We’ve gritted our teeth as bankers have charted a course to record-breaking profits as the rest of us slogged through a shitty economy.

Now it feels like the day we hoped for. The one the banking industry feared as it tried to thwart Warren’s victory in 2013. There’s a new sheriff in town, a real champion for the 99 percent who will not accept a two-tiered justice system and who dares look the criminal and the complicit in the eye. That Warren’s showdown in the Senate Banking Committee corral came just a day after Attorney General Eric Holder fessed up to the fact that some banks are so big and powerful they are really above the law felt like balm on a freshly salted wound.

Economist Robert Johnson, executive director of the Institute for New Economic Thinking, who served as chief economist to the Senate Banking Committee under the leadership of William Proxmire, praised Warren’s resolve in an email to me: “Elizabeth Warren has chosen to do something novel as a US senator: represent the people. In our money-drenched political system that is akin to defying gravity. God bless Elizabeth Warren.”

Warren is certainly making welcome noises in these early days of her tenure. She is breaking a taboo in speaking up so forcefully this early in the game, as newbie senators are generally expected to keep their heads down. Cynics cannot deny the fact that it actually matters tremendously that someone knowledgeable is at the table. If regulators know they’ll be cross-examined by a person who knows what they’re up to, they may think twice about what they’re (not) doing. They can’t completely ignore congressional pressure, particularly as Warren is a majority member of the Senate. On HSBC, unfortunately, the case is probably closed. But banks certainly hate the negative light Warren shined on them with her latest confrontation. And that’s welcome news. This is not small potatoes.

However, Warren will need to follow up her tough talk with serious legislative proposals that she could build support for as she takes the lead on banking issues. As Yves Smith has pointed out on Naked Capitalism, the real test of her tough-mindedness “will come through the letters, speeches, and positions she takes on banking matters outside the formal Committee sessions.”

Humanitarian Catastrophe in Syria

0

Context: As yet there are no context links for this item.

Bio

Omar S. Dahi is an assistant professor of economics. He received his B.A. in economics from California State University at Long Beach, and his M.A. and Ph.D. in economics from the University of Notre Dame, Indiana. His research and teaching interests are in the areas of economic development and international trade, with a special focus on South-South economic cooperation, and on the political economy of the Middle East and North Africa.

Comments

Our automatic spam filter blocks comments with multiple links and multiple users using the same IP address. Please make thoughtful comments with minimal links using only one user name. If you think your comment has been mistakenly removed please email us at contact@therealnews.com

Please enable JavaScript to view the comments powered by Disqus.

Who Benefits from Austerity?

0
RealNewsNetwork.com, Real News Network, Real News, Real News For Real People, IWT are trademarks and service marks of IWT.TV inc. “The Real News” is the flagship show of IWT and Real News Network.

All original content on this site is copyright of The Real News Network. Click here for more

Problems with this site? Please let us know

Linux VPS Hosting by Star Dot Hosting

Undoing the New Deal

0

Context: As yet there are no context links for this item.

Bio

Jennifer S. Taub is an Associate Professor of Law at the Vermont Law School where she teaches contracts, corporations and securities regulation. Before joining VLS, she taught at the Isenberg School of Management, University of Massachusetts, Amherst. She researches and writes in the area of corporate governance, shareholders’ rights, bankruptcy, and financial market regulation. Previously, Professor Taub was an Associate General Counsel for Fidelity Investments.

John Weeks is Professor Emeritus and Senior Researcher at the Centre for Development Policy and Research, and Research on Money and Finance Group at the School of Oriental & African Studies at the University of London.

Holder’s Letter Does not Rule Out Targeting US Citizens Outside of Country (Non-citizens Can Be Killed Anywhere)

0

Context: As yet there are no context links for this item.

Bio

Michael Ratner is President Emeritus of the Center for Constitutional Rights (CCR) in New York and Chair of the European Center for Constitutional and Human Rights in Berlin. He is currently a legal adviser to Wikileaks and Julian Assange. He and CCR brought the first case challenging the Guantanamo detentions and continue in their efforts to close Guantanamo. He taught at Yale Law School, and Columbia Law School, and was President of the National Lawyers Guild. His current books include “Hell No: Your Right to Dissent in the Twenty-First Century America,” and “ Who Killed Che? How the CIA Got Away With Murder.” NOTE: Mr. Ratner speaks on his own behalf and not for any organization with which he is affiliated.

Transcript

JESSICA DESVARIEUX, PRODUCER, TRNN: Welcome to The Real News Network. I’m Jessica Desvarieux in Baltimore.

On Thursday, the Senate confirmed now CIA director John Brennan. That was after a day of filibustering from Senator Rand Paul. And here to discuss all this is Michael Ratner.Michael is the president emeritus of the Center for Constitutional Rights in New York and the chair of the European Center for Constitutional and Human Rights in Berlin. He’s also a board member for The Real News Network.Thank you for joining us, Michael.MICHAEL RATNER, PRESIDENT EMERITUS, CENTER FOR CONSTITUTIONAL RIGHTS: Good to be with you, Jessica.DESVARIEUX: So, Michael, tell us, what was this filibuster all about?RATNER: No, well, we can go to the filibuster, but first I think the big news for the day is that Brennan was confirmed by a vote of 63 to 34, getting almost every Democratic vote but two, not getting Bernie Sanders’ vote. And you first have to say it’s just a complete outrage. And if it illustrates anything, it’s that the two parties are essentially on the same page when it comes to national security issues, drones, Guantanamo, etc. Yeah, the Republicans, a bunch of them voted, you know, against Brennan, but in the end this was a foregone conclusion. And what’s shocking about it, of course, is that Brennan couldn’t–not have been CIA director when Obama took office four years ago. Four years ago he was considered to have his hand too deeply in the so-called enhanced interrogation techniques–torture–and he couldn’t get the job. Then he took over the drone policy. And now that he’s running the drone policy, apparently that’s just hunky dory with everybody. Let him shoot drones all over the world and kill people. And now he gets to be confirmed as CIA. But it wasn’t without some scrappiness about it, and I think that’s what you’re referring to, which was the Rand Paul filibuster. Now, Rand Paul did something that I would have liked to see some liberal Democrats do, which is to filibuster and say, give us more information about what you’re doing, give us some guarantees. Now, what Rand Paul asked for was really very narrow, and I think way too narrow. He wanted to guarantee that U.S. citizens residing in the United States, doing everything in the United States, would not be killed by drones while they’re in the United States, but would be subjected essentially to the criminal law and arrested, etc. Eric Holder wrote a letter a few days ago to Senator Paul saying in what circumstances he would use arrests and when he could possibly use military force. It left open a big question. It did leave open the question of let’s say there’s an alleged terrorist in the United States who’s an American citizen. He’s not a current combatant. He’s somebody they believe [incompr.] alleged terrorist, much like the people they kill overseas, even American citizens overseas, like Anwar al-Aulaqi, who they killed in Yemen, someone like that in the United States. Could that person be killed by a drone? Or would they have to be arrested and taken to prison and tried, etc.? Holder gave a line in his letter that one could read ambiguously. I mean, it was pretty clear he said, we don’t plan to use this, but it seemed to be a question of policy and that they could change their minds. And I think that was going to be a problem. So Rand Paul went on the floor on Tuesday and Wednesday–I guess Wednesday, almost all day, 13 hours, basically filibustered about this issue, what are the circumstances they can kill an American living in America if that person is an alleged terrorist. And finally, today, probably a few hours ago, this letter, which your viewers can get online, is a terse letter from the attorney general that says, dear Senator Paul, it has come to my attention that you have now asked an additional question ([incompr.] it was hardly an additional question), but, quote, does the president have the authority to use a weaponized drone to kill an American not engaged in combat on American soil. Eric Holder answers: the answer to that question is no. And that’s interesting. So Paul actually did achieve something, because up until that letter, it would have been the case that an American president felt that he had the authority and Obama felt that he had the authority, and he may–Obama would have felt he had the authority, and he would have never know when he would have exercised it. This Rand Paul filibuster did get the president to say, if there’s an alleged–really what he’s saying, if there’s an alleged terrorist on U.S. soil who’s a U.S. citizen, we’re not going to kill him with a drone. It doesn’t necessarily say what else they’re going to do, but it certainly does seem that they’re not going to kill him with a drone. So that is an important admission. It is what got the votes for Brennan to get through in the end. But it’s also much too narrow for me, as both a human rights lawyer, as someone who believes in the morality of our foreign policy and use of force, because it leaves open what the U.S. is actually doing today, which is with targeted assassinations, one means of which being drones. The U.S. is killing alleged terrorists or people they suspect might be terrorists with drones all over the world as if–as if Bush’s global war on terror is continuing, and not just in Afghanistan, not in the edges around Pakistan, but in Somalia, in Yemen, could be in the United Kingdom, could be anywhere in the world. And that’s really important, because what this administration, Obama administration has said: we can kill both U.S. citizens and foreigners outside the United States–foreigners they probably think they can murder inside the United States–but outside the United States we can kill American citizens, even if we don’t think they’re imminently about to attack the United States.And the case we have at the Center for Constitutional Rights is representing the grandfather and the father–the grandfather of Anwar al-Aulaqi, who was killed in Yemen by drone, and al-Aulaqi’s son, Abdulrahman al-Aulaqi, who was killed two weeks later by a drone. And we’re suing on behalf of his grandfather living in Yemen. They never had any idea that these two people–obviously, the 16-year-old, they had no idea that he was anything. That was either a wrong target or–I don’t know what it was. With Anwar al-Aulaqi, they said, well, he’s, you know, making propaganda, he’s doing this, he’s doing that; they said he’s alleged to be involved in terror. But there was not the idea that he was pushing a finger on a button, that the guy had to be stopped imminently, that he had a specific threat, a concrete threat. And yet they took out this American citizen and his son, an American citizen.So what is not answered by Eric Holder in this letter to Rand Paul, and it did not seem to be a major concern of Rand Paul’s or anybody else, is the killing of American alleged terrorists outside the United States, and certainly the killing of foreigners outside the United States. As of this time, it’s something like 4,000 people have been killed by drones. Probably a quarter of those, maybe 800,000 are civilians. And there’s actually–it’s completely, in my view, illegal. What we’ve seen here, and I think it’s important for viewers to understand, there’s two paradigms of law. There’s one, what you can do in a war when people are actively combatants, when they’re soldiers, when they’re involved in a war directly. That’s Afghanistan. When you take it outside of a war zone, then you have to use the paradigm of criminal law. You say, that person has to be arrested and extradicted. Or if they’re about to push a button, yes, there’s a very narrow circumstance. But it’s under the criminal law that you can actually try and get rid of it in some way or another. It’s very rare. That’s the criminal law paradigm.But what Obama has done is take the war paradigm, just like Bush did, and using the, quote, authority of a law passed in 2001, after 9/11, the authorization to use military force to expand like Bush did the global war on terror everywhere in the world.So do I feel safer as an American that Obama says he’s not going to drone me sitting in my apartment in New York City? I may. I don’t think I was about to be droned. But to the extent that means anything, sure. But should you feel safer if you’re an American overseas or if you’re a foreigner overseas or if you’re living in Yemen or Somalia or Afghanistan or Pakistan or a dozen other countries in the world where we use drones or half a dozen? You should not feel any safer by what’s happened. In fact, you should feel less safe, because the very person who’s been directing the drones all over this world is now the head of the CIA, and he will continue to be in charge of death, killing, drones.DESVARIEUX: Well, we’ll certainly continue to follow this story. And we’ll have another weekly update with Michael Ratner next week.Thank you for joining us, Michael.RATNER: Thank you for being with me, Jessica.DESVARIEUX: Thank you for joining us on The Real News Network.

End

DISCLAIMER: Please note that transcripts for The Real News Network are typed from a recording of the program. TRNN cannot guarantee their complete accuracy.


Comments

Our automatic spam filter blocks comments with multiple links and multiple users using the same IP address. Please make thoughtful comments with minimal links using only one user name. If you think your comment has been mistakenly removed please email us at contact@therealnews.com

Please enable JavaScript to view the comments powered by Disqus.

Chechnya builds ‘2nd-largest mosque’ in Israel after Al-Aqsa

0

Published time: March 09, 2013 13:31

Abu Ghosh (Image from wikipedia.org)

Russia’s Chechen Republic is funding the construction of a mosque which it claims will be the second-largest in Israel after the famous Al-Aqsa. It will be located just 10 km from Jerusalem and hold several thousands of worshippers at a time.

The location of the mosque is the Abu Ghosh village, which is partially populated by ethnic Chechens.

Construction is already underway. The mosque is being built on a street named after ex-Chechen President Akhmad Kadyrov, who was assassinated in 2004. The mosque will also be named after the deceased president, the father of the republic’s present leader, Ramzan Kadyrov.

“This will be the second-largest mosque in Israel, after the holy Al-Aqsa. Two of the towers have already been built,” Russian MP Adam Delimkhanov said after visiting the Israeli village.

Al-Aqsa, the third-holiest site in Islam, is located in the Old City of Jerusalem and the largest mosque in Israel. It sits on the Temple Mount, which is also the holiest site in Judaism.

The idea for the construction of the new mosque is to strengthen the relationship between Israel and Russia, stated Ramzan Kadyrov as he promised to visit Israel to attend the opening ceremony.

The decision to finance the construction was made after the local residents failed to collect enough money to build the mosque, the Chechen government website says. The exact cost of the project remains unknown.

The mosque will be decorated in the Chechen tradition and language/culture courses will be organized for local ethnic Chechen population.

“These people emigrated to the Middle East five centuries ago. They want to preserve their national identity and cultural identity. This is worthy of deep respect. It is important to introduce them to our traditions,” said Kadyrov.

Bolivians Grieve Death of Chavez

0

Context: As yet there are no context links for this item.

Transcript

Voiceover: The government of the Plurinational State of Bolivia has declared 7 days of national mourning following the death of former Venezuelan President Hugo Chavez. Bolivia and Venezuela have maintained strong ties since Bolivia’s leftwing leader Evo Morales first assumed the presidency in 2006. A vigil was established in the national Congress in La Paz, the seat of Bolivia’s government. Leonidas Zurita Vargas is the Secretary of International Relations for MAS, the Movement for Socialism, Bolivia’s governing political party.

Leonidas Zurita Vargas, Secretary of International Relations, MAS: Today we cry but tomorrow we will work and we will fight, this is the best message and tribute that we can give to our Comandante Chavez, because he worked and fought against the empire, against the colonial, and against capitalism, and today in the way that Latin America has brought about the integration of nations, defending the rights of the people, today more than ever this is the best way to unite ourselves in order to continue contributing and to continue working. Voiceover: Questions have arisen over the potential impacts of Chavez’s passing on Bolivian-Venezuelan relations. Former MAS deputy and Majority Leader Gustavo Torrico says Bolivia’s relationship with Venezuela is about more than just Chavez and Evo, and doesn’t anticipate any major changes.Gustavo Torrico Landa, Ex-Majority Party Leader, MAS: I don’t think we are going to undergo any changes because it’s not about provisional or transitory agreements between individual people, it’s about agreements and the construction of political processes among peoples, of general ideas, that are constructed by social movements, of the recuperation of natural wealth, the idea of producing for one’s own consumption, of recuperating our national resources from the hands of transnationals, it’s not the individual it’s the political act that Hugo constructed and that has continued in time with Correa with Evo with Dima Rousseff, with a number of people in the world.Voiceover: As members of the regional bloc ALBA, the Bolivarian Alliance for the Peoples of our America, Venezuela and Bolivia have engaged in a number of both economic and cultural exchanges. A group of Bolivian students who studied at universities in Venezuela and other ALBA-member countries as part of a program of international cooperation organized an event honoring Chavez at the Simon Bolivar monument in the center of La Paz. Political Scientist Doroteo Vargas studied in Venezuela as part of the agreement and attended the event.Doroteo Varags, Political Scientist: Today we are sad, we are in mourning, because our Comandante has passed away, but the ideas, the ideals, the conviction and the political vision that he left behind have remained planted in the world not only in Bolivia and not only in Venezuela but in the whole world, there are activists who are going to take on the responsibility, myself included, to follow the footsteps of Comandante Chavez. VO: President Evo Morales traveled to Caracas, Venezuela along with 100 other representatives of Bolivia to attend Hugo Chavez’s funeral.


Comments

Our automatic spam filter blocks comments with multiple links and multiple users using the same IP address. Please make thoughtful comments with minimal links using only one user name. If you think your comment has been mistakenly removed please email us at contact@therealnews.com

Please enable JavaScript to view the comments powered by Disqus.

World Leaders Pay Their Final Respects at Chavez’s Funeral

0

Context: As yet there are no context links for this item.

Bio

Oscar León is an experienced international press correspondent and documentary filmmaker based in Arizona. His work has reached continental TV broadcast in many occasions on Telesur, ECTV, Ecuavisa, Radio Canada, Canal Uno and even Fox Sports Latin America and El Garaje TV; he has been a TRNN correspondent since 2010. Oscar has reported from as many as 9 countries and more than 12 cities in US; his coverage includes TV reports, special reports and TV specials, not only covering social movements, politics and economics but environmental issues, culture and sports as well. This includes the series “Reportero del Sur”, “Occupy USA – El Otoño Americano”, “Habia una vez en Arizona”, “Motor X” all TV mini series broadcasted to all Americas and “Once upon a time in Arizona” finalist in Radio Canada’s “Migration” 2010 contest.

Comments

Our automatic spam filter blocks comments with multiple links and multiple users using the same IP address. Please make thoughtful comments with minimal links using only one user name. If you think your comment has been mistakenly removed please email us at contact@therealnews.com

Please enable JavaScript to view the comments powered by Disqus.

Egypt declares state of emergency in Sinai over possible jihadist attack

0

Published time: March 09, 2013 11:57

Egypt has declared a state of emergency in Sinai due to intelligence about a possible jihadist attack against police, the country’s state news agency reports.

DETAILS TO FOLLOW

Asteroid ‘size of city block’ to skim past Earth on Saturday

0

Published time: March 09, 2013 11:35

AFP Photo / NASA

The 460-foot-long Asteroid 2013 ET is set to whizz past Earth on Saturday – the latest in our planet’s galactic ‘pinball contest’. Earlier in the day, the 2013 EC20 passed even closer, and both within a month of the Chelyabinsk meteor’s Earth strike.

The enormous piece of space debris is expected to pass just 2.5 lunar distances from planet Earth — the moon is approximately 384,400 km (238,000 miles) from us, meaning the asteroid’s flyby will be at a distance of about 950,000km (600,000 miles).

Some astronomers have compared its size to that of a city block, others a football pitch. Its dimensions were widely given as 460 feet (140m) long and 210 feet (64m) wide. A professional American football field is 360 feet by 160 feet, which would make this asteroid 100 feet longer than a football field, and 50 feet wider, should it live up to calculations.

Asteroid 2013 ET was first detected on March 3 by the Catalina Sky Survey based at the University of Arizona, and now approaches the planet less than a week after it first hit astronomers’ radars.

It will not be quite bright enough to view through standard personal binoculars or small ‘backyard’ telescopes, but will be visible using larger, professional devices in observatories, one of which will broadcast its passage online.

Although it was due to be shown via live webcast by the Virtual Telescope Project in Ceccano, Italy, at 19:00 GMT, strong rain and clouds have prevented it from broadcasting the event. Now the online Slooh Space Telescope, based in the Canary Islands, has taken the reins, and will give a live webcast from their observatory at 20:15 GMT.

“We only have a short viewing window of an hour or so…but we wanted to give the general public a front row seat to witness this new asteroid in real time as it passes by Earth,” said Slooh president Patrick Paolucci, as cited by Space.com.

It will be the second in one day, and the third this week. Earlier on Saturday, at 5:57am Moscow time (09:57 GMT), a smaller asteroid passed even closer to Earth. The 2013 EC20, between 9 and 40 feet (3 and 10m), came within 169,000 km (some 106,000 miles) — even closer than the moon.

The second last asteroid on Monday’s, named 2013 EC, flew within 230,000 miles of the planet. Its range fell just inside the moon’s orbit. It was also smaller, at 33 feet (10m) wide.  Earthlings have been especially excited about space bodies lately, after the planet was hit by a huge meteorite last month.The meteorite that smashed into the Russian city of Chelyabinsk on February 15 was the largest object to enter the Earth’s atmosphere in nearly a century. On the same day it struck, another 164 feet (50m) wide space rock, named 2012 DA14, brushed the planet, closer than any other in known history.

Previous footage from the Virtual Telescope Project (TVTP) in Ceccano, Italy, of Monday's smaller asteroid. TVTP was due to broadcast the flyby on Saturday, but was forced to cancel on account of bad weather conditions. The Canary-Islands based Slooh Space Telescope will now broadcast the event at 20:15 GMT

“The recent flurry of asteroidal close calls and near misses, including the double-whammy of DA14 and the Siberian meteor on February 15, is starting to make our region of space seem like a video game or pinball contest,” said American astronomer and writer Bob Berman.

Tories Ran ‘Rotten’ Eastleigh Campaign, Says Tory MP

0

A Tory minister has warned the party must not swing to the right after last week’s by-election drubbing amid claims most Conservative members believe David Cameron will lose in 2015.

Nick Boles indicated the party failed to offer voters any hope in Eastleigh and repeated the same mistakes it has been making for more than a decade

The comments come as The Times reported that it had seen details of a canvass of Tory supporters that showed just 7% believed the Prime Minister will win an overall majority at the next general election while three quarters expect Labour to be in power.

Boles told the newspaper last week’s Hampshire by-election, which saw the Tories pushed into third place behind Ukip, had been a “truly rotten campaign”.

nick boles

Boles told The Times that the party must avoid a swing to the right

The planning minister said: “Where was the hope? It was as if modernisation had never happened.

“We screwed it up. We didn’t even screw up in a new way. We screwed it up in an old way that we have been doing for a decade.

“It’s so frustrating.”

But Boles, an ally of the Prime Minister’s, warned plotters they needed “their head seeing to” if they believed it was wise to attempt to oust Mr Cameron.

Cable Calls For Investment, Not Cuts, At Lib Dem Conference

0

Vince Cable renewed his call for billions of pounds more infrastructure investment funded by higher borrowing, saying the Government had to “really get moving”, at the Lib Dem Party Conference in Brighton.

The Business Secretary admitted there were dangers in pushing up the Government’s debt in an effort to kickstart the economy but he insisted the “balance of risks” seemed to be changing and ministers had to be “open minded”.

He also warned that Liberal Democrats would block any effort to cut crucial spending in areas such as science and skills, and said Tory efforts to reduce immigration were harming the economy.

The intervention came at a fringe event at the party’s spring conference in Brighton. Kicking off the gathering on Friday, Nick Clegg denied the Lib Dems were in crisis in the wake of sexual harassment allegations and the conviction of ex-Cabinet minister Chris Huhne.

However, the Deputy Prime Minster conceded the party had “let people down” and needed to take a “long, hard look in the mirror”.

Both David Cameron and Clegg dismissed the prospect of increasing borrowing to fund more capital investment earlier this week after Cable floated the prospect in a pre-Budget essay in the New Statesman.

nick clegg

Nick Clegg at the Spring Conference in Brighton

However, Cable made light of the reaction last night, saying he noted the markets had not “collapsed” as a result.

“The point I was trying to make is that we need to be open minded and recognise that the balance of these risks may well be changing,” he said.

Cable said the decision by the former Labour government to cut capital investment had been a major policy error.

He pointed out that a £15 billion increase in capital spending would restore it to peak levels – although he stressed the figure was “illustrative”.

He added: “That’s a useful figure, but I am not specifically recommending that.”

Cable said he was on the “same page” as the Prime Minister, “but we have different emphasises and we use different language”.

While Cameron used phrases like “trees don’t produce money”, he preferred to say there was “no such thing as a free lunch”.

“There are risks in any policy option we care to take,” he said.

“But nonetheless the conclusion I have drawn is that we have to look at how we can really get moving with investment in infrastructure and housing.”

vince cable

Cable insisted increased capital spending would boost the economy

Cable has been listed with Tories Eric Pickles, Theresa May and Philip Hammond among ministers who are resisting further spending cuts but he insisted he did not “need lectures” about the importance of managing public finances.

But he criticised some on the Tory right for waging “jihad” on state spending and warned it would be “utterly counterproductive” to cut science and skills budgets any further. “Lib Dems in government will not allow that to happen,” he added.

The Cabinet minister also attacked the Tory drive to reduce net annual immigration to tens of thousands, complaining that the Lib Dems were having to “live with” it.

“It is politically ineffective and it is causing a great deal of economic damage,” he added, indicating that Mr Clegg would be making a speech on the issue.

Cable insisted more of the money needed to fill the deficit should be raised from taxes, rather than spending cuts.

He said the current ratio of spending cuts to tax rises was 80-20 or 85-15, and urged the introduction of measures such as the mansion tax, as well as a crackdown on long-term “non dom” residents.

“I think our view as a party must be that there has got to be a better balance between spending cuts and taxation,” he said.

Party president Tim Farron will formally open the conference on Saturday morning, before a speech by former leader Lord Ashdown. Clegg is due to do a question and answer session with activists later.

READ MORE:

Football federation HQ stormed and torched after Port Said death verdict (PHOTOS)

0

Published time: March 09, 2013 08:22

An Egyptian court has confirmed the death sentences for 21 football fans involved in the fatal riots in Port Said in 2012. It also sentenced five other suspects to life in jail and six others to 15-year terms.

Among those receiving the relatively milder punishment is the city’s security chief Esam Samak.

The court also acquitted 25 other defendants in the case, which triggered mass riots in Port Said.

DETAILS TO FOLLOW.

N. Korea rejects UN sanctions as war ghosts are conjured

0

Published time: March 09, 2013 08:22

North Korean leader Kim Jong-un (AFP Photo / Kins)

Amid the growing tension in the Korean Peninsula, Pyongyang has formally rejected the new round of UN sanctions aimed at undermining its missile and nuclear programs. The sanctions, while trumpeted as a serious blow to North Korea, may prove futile.

The resolution passed by the UN Security Council on Friday is the fifth of its kind since 2006, when the Democratic People’s Republic of Korea (DPRK) conducted its first nuclear test. Adopted in response to the third detonation of a nuclear device by North Korea, it aims to tighten financial restrictions and cargo inspections against Pyongyang.

Responding to the move, the North said in a statement by a Foreign Ministry spokesman: “The DPRK, as it did in the past, vehemently denounces and totally rejects the ‘resolution on sanctions’ against the DPRK, a product of the US hostile policy toward it.”

“The world will clearly see what permanent position the DPRK will reinforce as a nuclear weapons state and satellite launcher as a result of the US attitude of prodding the UNSC into cooking up the ‘resolution’,” Pyongyang said.

The adoption of the new round of sanctions and particularly enlisting the support of China, North Korea’s sole ally, was hailed as a big step forward by some diplomats. UN Ambassador to the United Nations Susan Rice, who led the drafting of the document and negotiated with Beijing on the matter, said that “these sanctions will bite and bite hard.”

The sanctions are not unlike those imposed by the US and its allies against Iran in early 2012, which some Western officials say were successful. They crippled Tehran’s oil exports and hurt its economy, which suffered from rampaging inflation. But there is some doubt that the restrictions would be effective with North Korea, which has a much more closed economy stemming from its state ideology of self-reliance.

In addition, China’s support of the sanctions on the top level may become mitigated on the level of implementation. For example, while the resolution makes inspections of cargo going to North Korea mandatory, it is up to the inspecting country to judge whether it is related to missile or nuclear development and is subject for detention.

“Really, the sanctions themselves aren’t going to make a huge difference in this conflict, and I think going along with it, whoever knows what gets decided and traded off at the back door of politics,” told RT Eric Sirotkin, co-founder of the National Campaign to End the Korean War.

A day after the UNSC resolution was adopted Beijing indicated that sanctions are not the key to easing the tension in the Korean Peninsula.

“We always believe that sanctions are not the end of Security Council actions, nor are sanctions the fundamental way to resolve the relevant issues,” China’s Foreign Minister Yang Jiechi said Saturday at a media conference.

He added, “The only right way to resolve the issue is to take a holistic approach and resolve the concerns of all parties involved in a comprehensive and balanced manner through dialogue and consultations.”

China is far from welcoming a nuclear North Korea at its borders, but it has limited leverage on Pyongyang and cannot make it disarm through diplomatic means. However, cutting trade links and aid may result in the collapse of the regime, which would prove greater problems for China. 

Those may range from thousands of economic refugees rushing into China and stockpiles of arms looted from the North’s military depots spreading across the region all the way up to a new war. Many experts say such considerations will make Beijing reluctant in mounting pressure on its troublemaker neighbor.

The sanctions come amid heightened tension between North Korea and its opponents. The US and South Korea are conducting massive annual military games not far from North’s border, much to Pyongyang’s annoyance. The DPRK’s military command said it suspects the drills to be a cover for preparation of a real attack and threatened to response in full force, warning that North Korea will not share the fate of Balkans, Iraq or Libya.

North Korea also announced Friday that it is withdrawing from the armistice agreement which ended the war in 1953. It is the sixth time since 1994 that Pyongyang has done so, each of the episodes linked to some violent conflict or escalation of tensions between the two Koreas. Seoul never signed the document.

Friday’ pull-out from the non-aggression pact is accompanied with the severing of a hotline between Pyongyang and Seoul. This may have dangerous and absolutely unintended ramifications.

“Even though none of the countries, none of the parties want a full-scale war, any small incident in the Korean Peninsula could lead to both sides stepping on the escalation ladder. That’s how wars start, even when there’s no intention for war,” anti-war activist Brian Becker told RT.

“The need now is to reduce tensions, and the onus for that is not on North Korea, which is not threatening the US. It’s the US that should stop carrying out war games simulating the invasion and bombing of North Korea and lift sanctions,” he said.

Suicide blast near Afghan Defense Ministry amid Hagel visit, 9 civilians dead

0

Published time: March 09, 2013 04:54

Large blast was heard near the Defense Ministry in Afghanistan’s capital Kabul during a visit by US Defense Secretary Chuck Hagel.

Witnesses report hearing sirens and gunshots after the explosion.

Hagel was not near the blast, Reuters quotes ISAF spokesman as saying.

It is not yet known if there are casualties. 

DETAILS COMING UP

Gunman kills TV program host in US

0

A 41-year-old man has shot and killed the host of the Sportsman Channel’s show “A Rifleman’s Journal” in the northwestern US state of Montana.

KA/HGL

Chomsky: The Corporate Assault on Public Education

0

Our kids are being prepared for passive obedience, not creative, independent lives.

March 8, 2013  |  

Like this article?

Join our email list:

Stay up to date with the latest headlines via email.

The following is Part II of the transcript of a speech Noam Chomsky delivered in February on “The Common Good.” Click here to read Part I.

Let’s turn to the assault on education, one element of the general elite reaction to the civilizing effect of the ‘60s. On the right side of the political spectrum, one striking illustration is an influential memorandum written by Lewis Powell, a corporate lawyer working for the tobacco industry, later appointed to the Supreme Court by Richard Nixon. At the other end of the narrow spectrum, there was an important study by the Trilateral Commission, liberal internationalists from the three major state capitalist industrial systems: the US, Europe and Japan. Both provide good insight into why the assault targets the educational system.

Let’s start with the Powell memorandum. Its title is, “The Attack on the American Free-Enterprise System.” It is interesting not only for the content, but also for the paranoid tone. For those who take for granted the right to rule, anything that gets out of control means that the world is coming to an end, like a spoiled three-year-old. So the rhetoric tends to be inflated and paranoid.

Powell identifies the leading criminals who are destroying the American free-enterprise system: one was Ralph Nader, with his consumer safety campaigns. The other was Herbert Marcuse, preaching Marxism to the young New Leftists who were on the rampage all over, while their “naive victims” dominated the universities and schools, controlled TV and other media, the educated community and virtually the entire government. If you think I am exaggerating, I urge you to read it yourself (pdf). Their takeover of the country, he said, is a dire threat to freedom.That’s what it looks like from the standpoint of the Masters, as the nefarious campaigns of Nader and the ‘60s popular movements chipped away very slightly at total domination. 

Powell drew the obvious conclusion: “The campuses from which much of this criticism emanates are supported by tax funds generated largely from American business, contributions from capital funds controlled or generated by American business. The boards of trustees at universities are overwhelmingly composed of men and women who are leaders in the business system and most of the media, including the national TV systems are owned and theoretically controlled by corporations which depend on profits and the enterprise system on which they survive.”

Therefore, the oppressed business people who have lost all influence should organize and defend themselves instead of idly sitting by while fundamental freedoms are destroyed by the Marxist onslaught from the media, universities and the government. Those are the expression of the concerns elicited by ’60s activism at the right end of the mainstream spectrum.

More revealing is the reaction from the opposite extreme, the liberal internationalists, those who staffed the Carter administration, in their study called “The Crisis of Democracy.” The crisis that they perceived was that there was too much democracy. The system used to work fine when most of the population was silent, passive, apathetic and obedient. The American rapporteur, Professor Samuel Huntington of Harvard, looked back with nostalgia to the good old days when “Truman had been able to govern the country with the cooperation of a relatively small number of Wall Street lawyers and bankers,” so that democracy flourished, with no crisis.

But in the ‘60s, something dangerous happened. Special interest groups began to try to enter the political arena and press for their demands. The special interests were women, minorities, young people, old people, farmers, workers. In other words: The population, who are supposed to sit obediently while the intelligent minority runs things in the interest of everyone, according to liberal democratic theory — and this is no exaggeration either. There’s one group omitted in the lament of the liberal internationalists: The corporate sector. That’s because they don’t comprise a special interest; they represent the national Interest. Therefore their dominant influence in what we call democracy is right and proper, and merits no mention or concern.

Fukushima nuclear plant flooded daily by 400 tons of groundwater

0

Published time: March 08, 2013 19:44

This photo taken on March 6, 2013 shows members of the media wearing protective suits and masks being escorted by Tokyo Electric Power Co (TEPCO) employees as they visit near the No.4 reactor (C) and the construction of a foundation (R) for storage of melted fuel rods at TEPCO's tsunami-crippled Fukushima Dai-ichi nuclear power plant in the town of Okuma, Fukushima prefecture, ahead of the second anniversary of the March 11, 2011 tsunami and earthquake. (AFP Photo/Issei Kato)

Groundwater flooding has become a major problem for Tokyo Electric Power Co (Tepco), with hundreds of tons of water seeping daily into the damaged reactor buildings. Experts predict overall clean-up works at the site could take up to 40 years.

Stopping the groundwater is crucial, says Tepco’s general manager for research and development of Fukushima Daiichi decommissioning, Shunichi Suzuki, adding that “Every day we have approximately 400 metric tons of groundwater.”

Tepco is now building a bypass system to try to stop the water, flowing from high ground into the buildings, mixing with the water already being poured onto the leaking reactors through a jerry-rigged cooling system.

“One approach we are considering is putting grout like cement. In other words, filling it in. That would block all the holes,” Suzuki said as cited by Reuters, adding that removing the groundwater may take from two to four more years.

One of the most challenging tasks for the operator remains the disposal of water contaminated after it is poured onto the reactors. Radioactive material must be filtered out and stored.

Work to treat and store the contaminated water is behind schedule, partly because of the groundwater flooding in. On Thursday, the company announced another delay in an operation to remove radioactive material from the water.

The Japanese government has told the facility to revise by June its roadmap for cleaning up the site, which is expected to take well over a quarter of a century.

“What we need to do is isolate, remove and store the damaged and broken nuclear fuel safely. This work will take 30 to 40 years to complete,” plant manager Takeshi Takahashi told the media.

Experts say it could cost at least $12 billion to close the reactors down.

Monday it will be two years since the worst atomic disaster since Chernobyl in 1986. On March 11, 2011, an earthquake and a subsequent tsunami knocked out cooling equipment at the company’s Fukushima Daiichi plant north of Tokyo, leading to the meltdown of three reactor cores. More than 160,000 people were forced from their homes.

Another earthquake or tsunami could be fatal for the crippled Fukushima nuclear plant, according to a nuclear engineer, as two years after the disaster it’s still vulnerable to natural disasters.

“What remained intact after the disaster is completely fragile and when the next one comes it’s going to collapse,” he told The Weekend Australian newspaper.

Local residents are still unaware if it’s safe to return to their homes in the disaster area of Fukushima prefecture. The displacement caused huge psychological distress, becoming one of the biggest health issues which emerged from the disaster, according to experts, while attention is also focused on the potential cancer risks years after the tragedy.

A health questionnaire sent to Fukushima residents by the Fukushima Medical University found that around 15 percent of the 67,500 respondents indicated high levels of stress – much higher than the 3 percent among the general population of the country.

Egypt’s riot police chief sacked amid nationwide security force protests

0

Published time: March 08, 2013 19:43

Egyptian riot police (Reuters/Mohamed Abd El Ghany)

Egypt’s interior minister has sacked the country’s riot police chief following five days of nationwide police strikes, state media reported. Officers are accusing the government of politicization amidst a backdrop of recent violence in Port Said.

Egyptian Interior Minister Mohamed Ibrahim has appointed a new commander for the Central Security Forces, according to MENA news agency.

The sacking took place after “widespread protests in several CSF departments over the past 48 hours demanding that policemen be removed from political conflicts,” MENA reported.

More than 30 police stations across the country reportedly shut their doors on Friday in the fifth day of strikes against the interior ministry, Ahram Online reported. A mid-ranking Cairo police officer said that he expected all police stations to join Saturday’s strike if their demands were not met by the end of the day, Friday.

On Thursday, dozens of Cairo policemen blocked the entrance to one of the city’s main police stations and spoke out against President Morsi’s policies. Others arranged a sit-in outside Morsi’s house in his hometown of Zagazig.

Meanwhile, a police strike in Egypt’s Assuit province has prompted former Islamic militant group Gamaa Islamiya to send its members out to patrol the streets. It said it was assembling volunteer members to act as police.

Assiut security chief Gen. Aboul-Kassem Deif has acknowledged the group’s move is illegal, but feels the province has no other option. “I don’t know what to do,” he told AP.

Those demands include ending what they call the politicization of the police force in favor of President Mohamed Morsi’s Muslim Brotherhood party and dismissal of Interior Minister Mohamed Ibrahim, who was appointed by Morsi in January. Officers are also demanding they be armed to protect themselves against protesters who they describe as “armed thugs.”

Policemen are angry that they can be tried in military courts and complain that current laws do not protect them when they carry out their duties. They’re speaking out against being forced to confront anti-Brotherhood protesters.

However, the police force has been accused by rights activists of employing brutal tactics during the uprising. More than 100 policemen have been put on trial for the killings of protesters, and all but two were acquitted.

There has been widespread tension between police and demonstrators since the mass protests which brought down former President Hosni Mubarak in February 2011.

Accusations of torture from police officers continue to emerge, and more than 70 people have been killed in nationwide protests since January. Rights groups allege that police are still operating with impunity.

The latest violence in the city of Port Said has led to the removal of officers from its streets. It comes after thousands of demonstrators called for the departure of police forces on Friday. The Egyptian military has taken over security duties in the city.

According to the interior ministry, police were withdrawn from the streets to “calm the tension.” The news was met with celebrations from demonstrators — many of whom stood on tanks and chanted in support of the military.

Clashes between police and protesters in Port Said have entered their sixth continuous day. At least eight people have been killed in the violence, including three policemen.

The sacking of the police chief comes just one day before a court is due to announce the verdicts of 52 defendants – including nine police officers — who were involved in deadly football riots in Port Said last year.

Twenty-one football fans were sentenced to death in January over the riots, which left 74 people dead. The verdict led to further riots, resulting in the loss of an additional 40 civilians. Most were killed during an alleged attempt to storm a prison. The riots prompted a crackdown by security forces, leading many to accuse officers of police brutality.

Mark Levin: Government Is “Simulating the Collapse of Our Financial System, the Collapse of Our Society and the Potential for Widespread Violence”

0
Mac Slavo
March 8th, 2013
SHTFplan.com

Read by 44,464 people

Along with Rush Limbaugh and Sean Hannity, leading conservative radio host Mark Levin reaches tens of millions of listeners weekly, and what he talked about recently on his nationally syndicated show has sent shivers down the spines of many of them.

A few years ago this was fringe theory, restricted only to the sphere of alternative (conspiracy) news.

Warnings of a massive economic collapse, government stockpiling of weaponry, and the idea that Americans could be broadly classified as terrorists and then detained indefinitely or killed often fell upon deaf ears.

Today, as more information ‘leaks’ into the mainstream, it is no longer just conspiracy theory. We now have some of the most influential journalists and commentators in the country alerting Americans to the possibility that everything the government has been preparing for the last several years may soon be realized.

I’m going to tell you what I think is going on.

I don’t think domestic insurrection. Law enforcement and national security agencies, they play out multiple scenarios. They simulate multiple scenarios.

I’ll tell you what I think they’re simulating.

The collapse of our financial system, the collapse of our society and the potential for widespread violence, looting, killing in the streets, because that’s what happens when an economy collapses.

I’m not talking about a recession. I’m talking about a collapse, when people are desperate, when they can’t get food or clothing, when they have no way of going from place to place, when they can’t protect themselves.

There aren’t enough police officers on the face of the earth to adequately handle a situation like that.

I suspect, that just in case our fiscal situation collapses, our monetary situation collapses, and following it the civil society collapses — that is the rule of law — that they want to be prepared.

There is no other explanation for this.

Sourced via Red Flag News

The Pentagon and military have been war-gaming large-scale economic collapse and civil unrest for nearly four years. Those within our government who understand the ramifications a massive breakdown in our systems of commerce, transportation and justice are preparing by stockpiling weapons and ammo, tens of millions of food rations, and even emergency shelters. They are spending hundreds of billions of dollars on continuity of government programs and exercises, preparing for what they know is coming.

Now why would the government be doing this if there wasn’t a reasonable chance that such events could come to pass?

We’ve urged our readers to prepare a well thought out contingency plan for the very scenarios our government is spending your hard earned tax dollars on.

The government may be stockpiling and preparing, but understand that none of these emergency supplies are reserved for you and your family. Only essential personnel involved directly with government operations will have access to these critical survival supplies.

So you’d better have your own reserves. For those who fail to prepare, it will be horrific.

Hat tip Posse

Author: Mac Slavo
Views: Read by 44,464 people
Date: March 8th, 2013
Website: www.SHTFplan.com

Copyright Information: Copyright SHTFplan and Mac Slavo. This content may be freely reproduced in full or in part in digital form with full attribution to the author and a link to www.shtfplan.com. Please contact us for permission to reproduce this content in other media formats.

UK, Turkish FMs discuss Syria crisis

0

Turkish Foreign Minister Ahmet Davutoglu(L), British Foreign Secretary William Hague (R)

British Foreign Secretary William Hague has met with his Turkish counterpart Ahmet Davutoglu in London, discussing ways to increase support for foreign-backed opposition forces in Syria.

Hague welcomed Davutoglu to his country during a meeting following the so-called Friends of Yemen conference on March 7.

“The UK and Turkey continue to enjoy a deepening bilateral relationship, enhancing cooperation on a number of issues, including foreign policy, trade and EU accession,” Britain’s Foreign and Commonwealth Office (FCO) reported.

“The Foreign Secretary and Foreign Minister Davutoglu discussed increasing support for the Syrian coalition, closer work on security sector reform in Somalia, the search for peace in the Middle East, and renewing efforts for a Cyprus settlement,” the FCO added.

This comes as Britain and its allies have been repeatedly accused of arming and training Syrian terrorists and even exporting mercenaries to the Arab country in an attempt to topple Syrian President Bashar Al-Assad’s government.

In an earlier statement to the House of Commons, Hague announced plans to spend some £13 million in assistance to insurgents in the Arab country, providing them with armoured vehicles, body armour, and other military equipment.

Many British MPs, however, raised concerns over Hague’s plans, saying that they fear being dragged into another Iraq-style military intervention in Syria.

MOS/JR/HE

Fitch cuts Italy’s credit rating

0

Fitch credit rating agency cuts Italy’s credit rating to BBB+ with negative outlook. (file photo)

Fitch credit rating agency has downgraded Italy’s credit rating to BBB+ citing mushrooming debt and recession as the main reasons for the downgrade.

The international agency announced on Friday that it has cut Italy’s credit rating to BBB+ from A-, adding that “The increased political uncertainty and non-conducive backdrop for further structural reform measures constitute a further adverse shock to the real economy.”

“The inconclusive results of the Italian parliamentary elections on February 24-25 make it unlikely that a stable new government can be formed in the next few weeks,” Fitch said.

The European Commission said earlier this month that Italy would continue in its economic hardship including a rise in unemployment to hit 12 percent in 2014.

On October 31, 2012 Istat published figures showing unemployment rate in Italy at a new record high of 10.8 percent in September, the highest in almost eight years.

Italy started to experience recession after its economy contracted by 0.2 percent in the third quarter of 2011 and by 0.7 percent in the fourth quarter of 2011. Over the past decade, Italy has been the slowest growing economy in the eurozone.

Europe plunged into financial crisis in early 2008. The worsening debt crisis has forced the EU governments to adopt harsh austerity measures, triggering protests against spending cuts in many European countries.

MAM/JR

‘No changes made to IP project contract’

0

File photo shows a construction site of Iran-Pakistan gas pipeline.

Iran Oil Minister Rostam Qasemi has dismissed claims that Islamabad will not have to indemnify Iran for delays in the construction of the multi-billion-dollar Iran-Pakistan (IP) gas pipelines on the Pakistani side.

Speaking on the sidelines of the third ministerial meeting of the Economic Cooperation Organization (ECO) in Tehran on Thursday, Qasemi rejected recent remarks by Asim Hussain, advisor to the Pakistani premier on petroleum and natural resources.

Hussain had said Pakistan would not have to honor the indemnity clause of the IP project contract for the slow construction of the pipeline on the Pakistani side.

Qasemi stated that the terms of the gas contract between Iran and Pakistan have already been finalized, and “no changes have been made to the contract.”

He added that the agreement on Iran’s natural gas exports to Pakistan has entered its operational phase, and the IP gas pipeline project will be completed on schedule.

On Thursday, Pakistan’s Foreign Ministry Spokesman Moazzam Ahmad Khan announced that President Asif Ali Zardari would be visiting Iran on March 11 for the groundbreaking of the project.

Tehran-based Tadbir Energy Development Group will reportedly undertake all engineering procurement and construction work for the first segment of the project, which starts from the Iran-Pakistan border and costs around USD250 million.

The Iranian firm will also carry out the second segment of the project, and extend the financing later to USD500 million.

The remaining amount is expected to be generated through Pakistan’s Gas Infrastructure Development Cess (GIDC).

MP/HGH/SS

Tunisian PM announces newly formed coalition government

0

Published time: March 08, 2013 18:44

Tunisian premier-designate Ali Larayedh announces a proposed new coalition government during a press conference following his meeting with Tunisian President Moncef Marzouki on March 8, 2013 in Tunis. (AFP Photo/Fethi Belaid)

Tunisia’s caretaker Prime Minister has declared a new Islamist-led coalition government after a deal was reached in last-minute talks aimed at ending the country’s political crisis. The cabinet will serve until fresh elections at some point in 2013.

The newly formed government, led by the Islamist Ennahda party, also includes two secular parties – center-left Ettakatol party and the secular Congress for the Republic, led by President Moncef Marzouki. The legislative body will also hold some independents within its ranks. Despite the new appointments the coalition consists of the same parties, just with a different share of seats.

Ennahda has ceded control of key ministries, including foreign affairs, defense and the interior.

In its statement on Facebook, Ennahda said its members only took 28 per cent of seats in Larayedh’s government, which is down from 40% in the previous coalition. At the same time independents formed 48 per cent of the new cabinet.

Prime Minister Ali Larayedh said that parties reached an agreement during “”marathon negotiations” about a political program for the new government.

“Our country needs national unity,” Larayedh told a news conference, stressing that his government would not last beyond this year, Reuters report. “You must be patient. The road to democracy is long.”

In the new government presented to President Moncef Marzouki, career diplomat Othman Jarandi has been appointed Foreign minister, Lotfi Ben Jedou will now head the Interior Ministery and Rachid Sabbagh — The Ministry of Defence. The full list of appointees is available on Ennahda’s Facebook page.

Prime Minister Ali Larayedh, who replaced resigned Hamadi Jebali after the assassination of a prominent opposition leader Chokri Belaid in February, was ordered to form a new government on 22 February. He had until midnight on Friday to meet a constitutional deadline for doing so.

The murder of Belaid provoked the worst unrest in Tunisia since the uprising that overthrew President Zine al-Abidine Ben Ali, two years ago. It also led to resignations from Tunisia’s coalition government. Four people have been arrested on suspicion of involvement in the killing.

Iran wins three medals in Asia cycling

0

Iranian cyclists have bagged three bronze medals in their efforts to mark impressive performance at the 33rd Senior and 20th Junior Asian Cycling Championships in India.

The 27-year-old Mohammad Rajablou gave Iran its first medal at the Asian tournaments on Friday, when he finished third in the points race, marginally behind his opponents from South Korea and Hong Kong who came in first and second respectively.

Later in the day, Alireza Haqqi collected Iran’s second bronze medal in the 4 km-individual pursuit.

Also on Friday, the Iranian team – comprised of Alireza Haqqi and Mohammad Rajablou -finished third in the men’s team pursuit, and won a bronze.

The 33rd Senior and 20th Junior Asian Cycling Championships began in the Indian capital New Delhi on Thursday, and will roll out in two venues till March 17.

The track events will be held at the Indira Gandhi Indoor Stadium’s Velodrome followed by the road races at the Buddh International Circuit.

Some 800 cyclists from 29 countries will be pitted against each other in the Asian cycling events.

The 36-member-strong Iranian team, rated among the best at the continental level, boasts of some renowned cyclists, including Mehdi Sohrabi, who was the winner of the Asia Tour in 2010 and 2011.

MP/HGH

Egypt sacks riot police chief: MENA

0

An Egyptian military police officer argues with protesters during a demonstration outside the Supreme Constitutional Court in Cairo. (File photo)

The Egyptian state media says the country’s riot police chief has been sacked amid protests by officers demanding an end to politicizing the force in favor of the ruling party.

Egyptian Interior Minister Mohamed Ibrahim on Friday fired the chief of the Central Security Forces Major General Maged Noah, and replaced him with Major General Ashraf Abdullah, official MENA news agency reported.

Earlier in the day, police personnel left their headquarters o the restive canal city as the military took over security after nearly a week of deadly clashes.

Egyptian President Mohamed Morsi deployed the military to Port Said after violent protests erupted in the city in late January.

The violence followed a court’s decision to sentence 21 defendants to death over involvement in a 2012 stadium riot that killed 74 people, mostly fans of visiting Al-Ahly football team.

The court plans to sit again, this time in the capital for security reasons, to judge the remaining 52 defendants, among the nine policemen and three officials of the Port Said football club, Al-Masry.

The hearing will coincide with unprecedented nationwide police protests, including in the city of Ismailiya, where riot police announced refusal to obey orders to deploy in neighboring Port Said.

The striking policemen say they are not equipped to deal with violent protesters, and complain they are being used as political tool and forced to suffer the consequences of government’s mistakes.

MRS/JR

Uranium threat to 15,000yo Australian rock art

0

Published time: March 08, 2013 15:40

Rare Aboriginal rock art thought to be about 4,000-years-old is shown in this photo taken at a cave located in the Wollemi National Park, located 100 km (62 miles) northeast of Sydney. (Reuters)

Mining companies are queuing up to assault Australia’s cultural heritage. The discovery of a large uranium deposit has prompted mining companies to consider excavations on land which is home to some of Australia’s most ancient rock art.

The Wellington Range in the northeastern state of Queensland has been under surveillance from uranium mining companies for many years. Cameco, a Canadian mining company, recently reported the discovery of a large uranium deposit in this range, according to a Global Mail report.

However, this region is also home to an area dubbed one of the great rock-art precincts of the globe by United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO), and regular guided tours are organized to the areas.

The secret wall paintings display ancient aboriginal scenes and symbols, such as “bullymen” — police-type troopers, the paintings of which were thought to be able to vanquish enemies through sorcery. Other pictures are more nature-related.

The aboriginal paintings are thought to be thousands of years old, with the earliest discovered dating more than 10,000 years back.

Despite the fact that much of the rock art is contained in ‘Designated Landscape Areas’, which means the site of aboriginal heritage is entry is limited to some, state permission for mineral exploration has still been granted.

On Friday, the Global Mail published a report drawing on six-month-long research by Noelene Cole, an assistant research fellow in archaeology with James Cook University, and associate archaeologist Alice Buhrich. Their research discovered that applications for coal and mineral exploration cover what is basically an entire art-covered ‘precinct’ on the Cape York Peninsula.

“It is astounding, internationally speaking, that a region like this would be considered for mining,” said Cole.

Cameco located the deposit in remote northern hills that contained so much of the art, that one mere complex contained a massive 3,000 images. The oldest piece of art here was dated as being approximately 15,000 years old.

“It would be like the French mining the Lascaux Caves and the Dordogne, which is World Heritage listed,” Tony Burke, Australia’s environment minister said.

The ancient Aboriginal rock carving known as 'Climbing Man', believed to be thousands of years old is shown in this photo taken on the Burrup Peninsula in the north of Western Australia. (AFP Photo / Greg Wood)

His office went on to point out that although Cameco has not yet submitted a proposal for a uranium project in the Wellington region, because it is such a sizeable discovery, it is likely the company will pursue it further.

Cameco Australia’s managing director, Brian Reilly, has said that his company would work alongside stakeholders to ensure the protection of the area’s environment, culture and heritage, strongly suggesting that further exploration is on the cards. 

Australian mining magnate and billionaire Gina Rinehart, the world’s second-richest woman, began to create a stir in the last week, when it emerged that she had also sought permission to look for minerals over some of the countries older art on Cape York.

At the time, traditional aboriginal owners asked Australia’s Federal Environment Minister, Tony Burke, to place the area on the World Heritage List to protect the site of their ancestors’ art. One of Rinehart’s companies later announced that it would withdraw two applications to excavate for minerals.

Cole and Buhrich found that the Queensland Government has already granted some mineral and coal exploration permits in areas meant to be protected as special Aboriginal places, according to the Global Mail. 

Australia is home to around a third of the planet’s uranium resources and exports roughly 7,000 tonnes per annum.

Ancient Aboriginal rock carvings are shown in this photo taken on the Burrup Peninsula in the north of Western Australia. (AFP Photo / Greg Wood)

It’s A Trap! Labour Hope To Split Coalition With Mansion Tax Vote

0

The Labour Party has set a trap for the Lib Dems, they know it and may be willing to fall in.

Next week the House of Commons will vote on whether there should be a ‘Mansion Tax’ – a levy placed on homes worth over £2m designed to bring “fairness” to the tax system. It is a signature Lib Dem policy that the deputy prime minister has thus far been unable to convince George Osborne to include in his Budgets.

Always keen to cause mischief by exposing splits in the coalition, Ed Miliband and Ed Balls decided to borrow the policy and then use an Opposition Day debate in the Commons to put it to a, purely symbolic, vote on Tuesday. The scamps.

LIKE HUFFPOST UK POLITICS ON FACEBOOK | FOLLOW US ON TWITTER

Chris Leslie MP, Labour’s shadow financial secretary to the Treasury, said the vote was “a chance for the Liberal Democrats to finally vote for something that was in their manifesto”.

The full text of the motion is:

“That this House believes that a mansion tax on properties worth over £2million, to fund a tax cut for millions of people on middle and low incomes, should be part of a fair tax system and calls on the Government to bring forward proposals at the earliest opportunity”.

The vote is win-win for Labour. Should the Lib Dems decide to make a stand and support the motion, which after all was their policy in the first place, Miliband can claim to have split the coalition on a hugely symbolic issue.

But if the junior coalition partner decides to stick with the Tories and vote down the motion, it allows Labour to attack them for abandoning their principles.

It is not a problem lost on the Lib Dem leadership. Tim Farron, the party president, said in an interview with The House magazine on Thursday he had yet to make up his mind. “They’ve [Labour] been opportunistic, they’ve been mischievous. That doesn’t mean we shouldn’t consider it as an opportunity,” he said.

Business secretary Vince Cable, who has vocally advocated for a Mansion Tax both inside cabinet and in public, has said he would not rule out voting with Labour.

And ahead of the Eastleigh by-election, Nick Clegg said David Cameron was “stuck in the past” in his opposition to a Mansion Tax.

In preparation for the Tuesday’s Commons debate Balls will no doubt have a stack of Lib Dem quotes backing the tax piled high on his desk.

Of couse there is another problem for the Lib Dems. If they vote in favour of a symbolic motion calling for a Mansion Tax but fail to secure its actual introduction in the Budget – which Cameron has ruled out – Labour can easily ask what the point is of the Lib Dems being in government.

Also on HuffPost:

The Week In (Silly) Pictures

0
  • Two policemen guard the King Edward VII hospital as the Queen Elizabeth recovers. And that’s the long and short of it.

  • You thought Justin Bieber’s lateness was embarrassing? Imagine being caught short while performing.

  • Nick Clegg: you wouldn’t like him when he’s angry.

  • “And what do YOU do?” the man asked Prince Charles.

  • One of these men is a cycling champion, the other champions… no, wait. The other’s a buffoon.

  • Kevin Pietersen: not necessarily the skilled sportsman he’d have us believe.

  • Fat Boy Slim was hoping to meet a funk soul brother at the House of Commons. Instead, he got Lembit Opik.

  • We don’t think relations between Poland and Germany have been this good since… Nope, can’t think when.

  • Ever wondered how they keep tiny birds still to weigh them? Well, wonder no more.

  • The new US Energy Secretary is unveiled. And it’s Tommy Lee Jones in ‘Lincoln’.

  • You know when they talk about having a devil on your shoulder..?

  • Uh-oh – looks like Antony Worrall Thompson’s been caught shoplifting again!

  • People of Britain, note: This pose is as casual as David Cameron gets.

  • Still, at least his wife knows how to let her hair down.

  • Gareth Bale finally invests in an invisible mattress to dive on to.

  • Meanwhile, back at the O2 gig, fans worry that Justin Bieber’s getting just a bit <em>too</em> messianic.

  • Two dogs attempt to reenact the “two fish in a tank” joke.

  • “Oh, don’t worry – I’ve had plenty of experience sitting next to a dummy.”

  • Sorry, Boots, but <a href=”http://redirect.viglink.com?key=11fe087258b6fc0532a5ccfc924805c0&u=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.huffingtonpost.co.uk%2F2013%2F03%2F05%2Fworst-mothers-day-gifts-boots-pictures_n_2810759.html%3Futm_hp_ref%3Duk-comedy”>this is not what our mums want</a> for Mother’s Day.

  • Meanwhile, at the Vatican, God gives a sign about his unhappiness at having to choose a new Pope.

  • Francoise Hollande: not putting out for Israel.

  • Cheryl Cole shows Francois Hollande how it’s done.

  • A rabbit <a href=”http://redirect.viglink.com?key=11fe087258b6fc0532a5ccfc924805c0&u=http%3A%2F%2Fwww.huffingtonpost.co.uk%2F2013%2F03%2F05%2Fstuff-on-my-rabbit-tumblr-vinnie_n_2809634.html%3Futm_hp_ref%3Duk-comedy”>with stuff on its head</a>. Trust us: this toilet roll is just the tip of the iceberg (lettuce).

  • Finally, Boris starts to smell success.

  • Cara Delevingne – pulling ugly faces in the way that only the truly beautiful can.

  • Angela Merkel: not happy at all with her Mother’s Day present this year.

  • It’s the fancy dress outfit we’ve all been waiting for!

  • Ben Stiller plays tennis, despite having forgotten his kit. AWKWARD!

  • Wait – is it those two policemen again?

  • David Cameron Reprimanded For Making Misleading Economy Claim, Again

    0

    David Cameron has been rebuked for giving a misleading account of his government’s economic record, after he claimed the Office for Budget Responsibility (OBR) has said austerity measures were not to blame for the lack of growth.

    Yesterday the prime minister delivered a pre-Budget speech in which he insisted the government would not abandon its current economic plan. He lay the blame for the country’s economic woes on global factors rather than the policies of the Treasury since 2010.

    “As the independent Office for Budget Responsibility has made clear growth has been depressed by the financial crisis, the problems in the Eurozone and a 60 per cent rise in oil prices between August 2010 and April 2011,” he said.

    “They are absolutely clear that the deficit reduction plan is not responsible. In fact, quite the opposite.”

    However on Friday Robert Chote, the chairman of the OBR, has wrote to Cameron to complain this was misleading.

    “For the avoidance of doubt, I think it is important to point out that every forecast published by the OBR since the June 2010 Budget has incorporated the widely held assumption that tax increases and spending cuts reduce economic growth in the short term, ” he said.

    LIKE HUFFPOST UK POLITICS ON FACEBOOK | FOLLOW US ON TWITTER

    Chote said economic growth “has been much weaker since the end of 2010 than we and most other forecasters expected in June 2010” and that it was “clearly possible” that it was in part due to the government’s austerity measures.

    The OBR was set up by George Osborne in 2010 to provide independent economic growth forecasts to avoid the Treasury being accused of fixing the figures as had happened in the past.

    It is not the first time the prime minister has been accused of making misleading claims about the government’s economic record.

    In January the UK Statistics Authority told him off for using a party political broadcast to claim that the government was “paying down Britain’s debts” as the country’s level of debt was actually rising.

    A Downing Street spokesman said: “The OBR has today again highlighted external inflation shocks, the eurozone and financial sector difficulties as the reasons why their forecasts have come in lower than expected. That is precisely the point the prime minister was underlining.”

    Shadow chancellor Ed Balls said Cameron had “an obligation to be straight with people and not play fast and loose with the facts”.

    “This is another embarrassing rebuke for the Prime Minister, just 24 hours after his panicky and defensive speech on the economy. Deep spending cuts and tax rises have reduced economic growth, as the OBR says, and so it was deeply misleading for David Cameron to claim otherwise.”

    Related on HuffPost:

    Spotting ‘fashion fingerprints’: Google Glass app helps locate friends

    0

    Published time: March 08, 2013 12:47

    A Google employee wears Glass at Google's Developers Conference. (AFP Photo / Mathew Sumner)

    New Google Glass app InSight takes the experience of spotting your friends to the next level, as it recognizes your peers by their clothes and accessories — matching specific color patterns and textures to the user.

    This new human recognition software makes it impossible to lose your friends in a packed place, such as an airport, concert hall or shopping center.

    The app creates a ‘fashion fingerprint’ for every friend based on the outfit they are wearing including clothes, jewelry, glasses, etc.

    ‘Fashion fingerprint’ is generated by snapping pictures of the user and creating a file of that image called a ‘spatiogram’, which calculates patterns and spatial distribution of colors on the user and analyzes the information to identify that particular person later on in the distance or from a different angle. 

    The new system is being partly funded by Google and was presented at the HotMobile technology conference last week, while currently still being developed by the Duke University in North Carolina.

    So far the app has been tested by 15 volunteers and managed to identify people correctly 93 per cent of the time.

    The software does not use facial recognition systems to locate individuals since it is unlikely that the users will be looking straight into the Google Glass’ camera, InSight developer Srihari Nelakuditi told New Scientist.

    He also noted that the ‘fashion fingerprint’ lasts only as long as the user does not change clothes. Afterwards, a new snapshot must be made and a new ‘fingerprint’ created. Thus, for privacy protection, all the user has to do is change outfits, argues Nelakuditi.

    Google Glass is a new wearable computer with a head-mounted display. It displays information in a smartphone-like format hands-free and can interact with the internet via natural language voice commands.

    The new product does raise new privacy issues, especially considering that users will be able to video record everything through Google Glass without being noticed by others.

    Australian Senator Cory Bernardi believes that Google Glass will be “the end of privacy as we know it” because the device can be used for massive surveillance, The Register quoted him as saying.

    “A single Google Glass wearer in your favorite restaurant could capture your image and your conversation without you ever knowing,” argues Bernardi. “The footage would be stored on the Google servers, your voice could be translated into text and with the use of facial recognition, could be actually matched to your Google profile.”

    Google also has been facing a row of privacy battles in EU and US for its current products.

    Just last month European data protection agencies said they intend to crack down on the US internet giant Google before summer after it allegedly failed to follow their orders to comply with EU privacy laws.

    Previously, the data protection agencies warned Google that its new confidentiality policy was not in line with EU laws. The regulators included a list of 12 “practical recommendations” which would bring Google’s privacy policy and data collection up to standard. The advisory centers on the firm’s automatic collection of personal data, ranging from browsing histories, to real-time location, to credit card details.

    Since January, Google has also been embroiled in its biggest privacy battle yet in the UK over reportedly tracking users’ online habits. At least 10 UK citizens began legal action with dozens more lining up. According to media estimates up to 10 million Britons could join in.

    Google is accused of evading security settings on Apple’s devices and Safari’s web browser in order to keep tabs on people’s online preferences.

    Over a barrel: Beer duty could kill off UK pubs, campaigners warn

    0

    Published time: March 08, 2013 12:40

    Download video (94.68 MB)

    People in the UK are concerned over the UK government’s plans to impose another 5 per cent rise in tax on beer. They fear the proposed measure could kill pubs, many of them several hundred years old, with the British pint becoming a luxury.

    With prices going through the roof, many people have been forced to drink at home. Chancellor George Osborne has been recently urged to abandon the so-called ‘beer escalator’.

    A pint has already become unaffordable to a number of working people. While the average pint of beer in Britain costs £3.22, in Spain, for instance, it comes in at £1.70.

    “British drinkers are paying around 10 times as much as drinkers in Germany, so we think it would just be right to hold down the burden, not increase the tax yet again and keep down the cost for ordinary consumers,” Matthew Sinclair, chief executive of the Taxpayers Alliance, told RT.

    According to a report by the British Beer and Pub Association, freezing beer duty could save up to 10,000 jobs by 2014-15. On top of this, campaigners promise the measure could help increase the overall tax take by 5million pounds a year.

    Campaigners claim that taxing alcohol further will neither cut binge, nor underage drinking, but could have real benefits instead.

    “A duty freeze would raise revenues, protect thousands of jobs, allow us to create yet more jobs and help one of our greatest national assets – our network of much-loved British pubs,” the British Beer and Pub Association’s Brigid Simmonds has been quoted as saying.

    AFP Photo / Mustafa Ozer

    The pub was once the hub of the British community. These days more and more pubs go out of business, with rises in beer duty and the smoking ban among the main reasons behind it.

    In fact, many say, ‘drinking’ is the new ‘smoking’, and the government is simply looking for ways to compensate tax revenue lost from smokers.

    “Every time the price goes up because of duty or for whatever other reason, it makes it that bit harder really,” Julian Ross, chairman of Old Crown Co-operative said.

    “You can see for yourself what this is like – it’s a community, it brings people together. It’s like the difference between social networking and meeting someone face to face there is no substitute for this kind of conviviality,” he told RT.

    For more on the shifting shape of British politics, watch Sara Firth’s report.

    Justin Bieber, Hugo Chavez And More: The Week In Funny Tweets

    0

    (Obviously the three people in the headline above being listed in order of importance.)

    Yes, this was the week of the late Justin Bieber – and the late Hugo Chavez. The week that the Queen spent an awful lot of time on the throne, the week Manchester United crashed out of the Champions League, and the week both Vicky Pryce and NatWest went down.

    Meanwhile, the search for the Pope’s successor continued, Bonnie Tyler was revealed as the singer of this year’s UK entry into the Eurovision Song Contest, and bacon was deemed – incredibly – to possibly not be all that good for you. If you eat a lot of it. Although we’re assuming it’s better for you than faeces in IKEA cakes or horsemeat in Taco Bell products.

    It was also, of course, the week we celebrated World Book Day and, not to be outdone by books, women celebrated International Women’s Day. Go women! And books!

    So here, in all its Friday slideshow glory, is our round-up of some of tweets about these news events – and many more – that made us giggle this week…

    Loading Slideshow...

    Caught On Tape: Police Officers Violating Fourth Amendment

    0

    RINF Alternative News

    Police officers in Garland Texas have been caught on video camera violating a homeowners fourth amendment rights.

    Jon Locke’s home surveillance cameras recorded officers rummaging through duffle bags, searching a car in his driveway and turning a surveillance camera the other way.

    The officers, who did not have permission to conduct searches on the property, were looking for Jon Locke’s brother, Christopher, a convicted felon with an arrest warrant accusing him of fraud.

    George Dix, a University of Texas at Austin law professor and authority on criminal procedure, said he believes the unlawful search violated Mr Locke’s Fourth Amendment rights:

    “I continue to think the officers unreasonably searched the vehicle[s] and duffle bags. The manipulation of and damage to the camera was, in my view, an unreasonable seizure.

    “Whatever Garland ‘policy’ may be, I think the Fourth Amendment was violated.

    “The basis of Fourth Amendment law is that officers are not entitled invade citizens interests and rights on the basis of purely fishing expeditions.”

     

    Watch what the surveillance cameras recorded:

    The Unnecessary Deaths Of Children Nationwide

    0

    Brian Gerrish speaks to Tim Rogers about the psychological attack on our children, and the effect it is having on their minds up to and including suicide.

    Obama Authorizes Killing Americans Domestically

    0

    Stephen Lendman
    RINF Alternative News

    obama-angry

    Rogue leaders overstep. They never quit. Tyranny in America is hardwired. Bush authorized it for eight years. Obama exceeds his worst policies. He masquerades as people friendly.

    He does so fraudulently. American freedom is vanishing. It’s doing so in plain sight. Obama usurped diktat power. His word alone is policy. It replaced rule of law principles. Tyrants operate that way.

    Obama authorized indefinite detentions. Americans and others are vulnerable. They may be held without charge or trial. Baseless allegations or none justify doing so.

    US military personnel may arrest them. They’ll be held in military prisons. Constitutional law no longer applies. Abuse of power replaced it. No one anywhere is safe.

    Murder, Inc. is official policy. Obama decides who lives or dies. He’s judge, jury and executioner. Anyone can be targeted anywhere.

    US soil no longer is safe. Obama made it a battlefield. Attorney General Eric Holder’s letter confirmed it. He wrote Senator Rand Paul, saying:

    “It is possible….to imagine an extraordinary circumstance in which it would be necessary and appropriate under the Constitution and applicable laws of the United States for the President to authorize the military to use lethal force within the territory of the United States.”

    “For example, the President could conceivably have no choice but to authorize the military to use such force if necessary to protect the homeland in the circumstances of a catastrophic attack like the ones suffered on December 7, 1941 and September 11, 2001.”

    “Were such an emergency to arise, I would examine the particular facts and circumstances before advising the President on the scope of his authority.”

    In testimony before the Senate Judiciary Committee, Holder explained more. He fraudulently claimed America can spurn fundamental law. It can do so with impunity.

    Bipartisan complicity supports him. Senator Diane Feinstein called Obama’s assassination policy “very thoughtful, very impressive.”

    She suggested internal military force was OK. Other committee members agreed. War on terror parameters have no boundaries. Everyone’s fair game.

    “Unlawful enemy combatants” became “unprivileged enemy belligerents.” Obama can order them assassinated anywhere. No miranda rights. No due process. No judicial fairness. Just a bullet, bomb or slit throat.

    Murder is illegal. International and US statute laws prohibit it. They do so at all times, under all circumstances with no exceptions.

    Principles of International Law Recognized in the Nuremberg Tribunal’s Charter and Judgment of the Tribunal state:

    Punishable crimes include:

    (1) crimes against peace;

    (2) planning, preparing, initiating or waging aggressive war;

    (3) war crimes;

    (4) crimes against humanity; or

    (5) conspiratorial involvement in the above crimes.

    They include murder, extermination and other ways to end life extrajudicially.

    International and US laws affirm the right to life. No arbitrary authority may deprive it.

    The Constitution’s Fifth Amendment states:

    “No person (shall) be deprived of life, liberty, or property, without due process of law.”

    US statute law (18 USC 1111 – Murder) states:

    “Murder is the unlawful killing of a human being with malice aforethought.”

    Holder believes otherwise. Last March, he said:

    “The president may use force abroad against a senior operational leader of a foreign terrorist organization with which the United States is at war – even if that individual happens to be a US citizen.”

    Washington’s “authority is not limited to the battlefields in Afghanistan” or anywhere else.

    “Given the nature of how terrorists act and where they tend to hide, it may not always be feasible to capture a United States citizen terrorist who presents an imminent threat of violent attack.”

    “In that case, our government has the clear authority to defend the United States with lethal force.”

    “Some have argued that the president is required to get permission from a federal court before taking action against a United States citizen who is a senior operational leader of Al Qaeda or associated forces.”

    “This is simply not accurate. ‘Due process’ and ‘judicial process’ are not one and the same, particularly when it comes to national security. The Constitution guarantees due process, not judicial process.”

    In other words, the UN Charter, Geneva Conventions, other international laws, constitutional ones, and US statute laws don’t apply.

    Obama can order US killed anywhere, Holder believes. He can do so for any reason or none. His word alone is policy.

    Examples Holder used were nonsensical. Equating war with targeted killing is absurd on its face. So is exploiting false flag attacks to justify them.

    Roosevelt wanted war with Japan. He manipulated its leaders to attack Pearl Harbor. Doing so gave him the excuse he wanted. He had to convince a pacifist public to go along. Congress was reluctant to do so.

    Japan’s fleet was tracked across the Pacific. Pearl Harbor commander Admiral HE Kimmel wasn’t warned. Known intelligence was withheld. Mass casualties were needed. Roosevelt got what he wanted.

    September 11, 2001 was the mother of all false flags. It’s the Big Lie of our time. David Ray Griffith and others exposed it. They did so heroically.

    Clear evidence proves an inside job. “Crazed Arabs” had nothing to do with it. Claiming otherwise is a national myth.

    It fails the smell test. It defies reality. It gets repeated like gospel. Out-of-touch people believe it. Their numbers dwindle over time.

    Holder chose bad examples. He’s out of touch with reality. He ignored fundamental laws. He did so egregiously. Usurping extrajudicial authority is lawless. Nothing he says changes things.

    He shames the office he holds. He’s got no right to be America’s chief law enforcement officer. Removing him is essential.

    So is charging him with complicity to commit murder. Doing it multiple times makes him a serial offender. If convicted, he could spend life in prison.

    In January 2012, Law Professor Jonathan Turley called America “no longer the land of the free.”

    “An authoritarian nation is defined not just by the use of authoritarian powers, but by the ability to use them,” he said.

    “If a president can take away your freedom or your life on his own authority, all rights become little more than a discretionary grant subject to executive will.”

    Extrajudicial killing raises grave concerns. Doing so inside America leaves no one safe. There’s no place to hide.

    Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago. He can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

    His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

    http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

    Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com.

    Chavez: A Personal Tribute – Stephen Lendman

    1

    Stephen Lendman
    RINF Alternative News

    CUBA-VENEZUELA-CHAVEZ-FILE

    He’s gone. His two-year cancer struggle ended. It claimed him. He’s sorely missed.

    He was one of Latin America’s most notable leaders. His charisma was special. It was real. His spirit lives.

    An era ended with his passing. He was the world’s leading anti-imperialist hero. He spoke truth to power. He did so courageously. He risked his life doing it.

    Obama may have ordered him killed. Very likely he did. Believe it. Chavez did. He had good reason to do so. He said it openly. Castro warned him. He explained how imperial Washington works.

    Its rap sheet makes serial killers look saintly by comparison. State-sponsored murder is official policy. So is ravaging humanity ruthlessly.

    Washington does it for wealth, power and dominance. It spurns rule of law principles, democratic values and popular needs.

    Chavez was polar opposite. He championed democracy. He established the real thing. He defended civil and human rights.

    He operated no secret prisons. He didn’t invade his neighbors. He engaged them cooperatively. He valued unity and world solidarity. He abhorred torture. He advocated peace, not war.

    He abolished neoliberal harshness. He championed populism. Venezuelans loved him for doing so. They elected him overwhelmingly four times.

    They rallied supportively for him publicly. They did so often. At times, millions turned out.

    He established free, open and fair elections. Jimmy Carter calls them the world’s best. He said so for good reason. They shame America’s sham process.

    He valued Venezuela’s independence. He fought hard to keep it. He refused to surrender to Washington.

    His used Venezuela’s oil wealth responsibly. He lifted millions from poverty. He created economic growth and jobs. He provided essential social services. Major ones are institutionalized.

    He’s loved and admired worldwide. He’s hated for his virtues. He made promises and kept them.

    He cared about ordinary people. He showed it. His legacy won’t be forgotten.

    Chavismo lives! Bolivarianism is real. It’s part of Venezuela’s culture. It represents democratic equity and justice.

    Venezuelans have the real thing. It reflects Simon Bolivar’s vision. He defeated the Spanish. He liberated half of South America. He advocated using national wealth responsibly, fairly and equitably.

    He strove to overcome the imperial curse. It “plague(d) Latin America with misery in the name of liberty,” he said.

    Chavez was his modern-day incarnation. Chavismo reflects Bolivarian principles. He established them. They’re hardwired. They won’t change. Venezuelans deplore their ugly past. They won’t go back.

    Chavez was the rarest of political leaders. He was the exception proving the rule. He cared more about people than power. He had much more to do.

    New leadership will advance his progressive agenda. Maduro’s up to the challenge. He’ll surprise people. So did Chavez.

    Doing the right thing takes time. Great struggles aren’t won easily or quickly. Transforming generations of oligarch rule is a longterm project. United Socialist Party of Venezuela (PSUV) leaders prioritize it.

    Dark forces oppose them. Profiteers want things their way. Washington’s openly hostile. People power challenges its menace. Chavez did so courageously.

    James Petras said “(n)o President in the history of Venezuela (or the Americas did) more to create a sense of national identity.”

    “He has defended the country with valor and integrity. He has preserved and advanced democratic institutions against US and client attempts to destabilize and destroy the constitutional order.”

    He “created an extensive social welfare net which has raised millions from poverty, eliminated illiteracy and provided a universal free public health system.”

    He “successfully engaged in consequential international economic aid programs, providing oil at reduced cost to poor countries in Central America and the Caribbean.”

    New challenging struggles remain. Dark forces never rest. They plot new anti-populist schemes. Transitioning to equitable governance is treacherous. Doing so faces formidable obstacles.

    Chavez tread carefully doing it. He accomplished wonders in 14 years. Petras urged him to do more. Control the commanding heights, he said. Above all he stressed banking and finance. Money power matters most.

    Chavez did much already. Under Article 156(11) of Venezuela’s Bolivarian Constitution, National Money Power controls:

    “Regulation of central banking, the monetary system, foreign currency, the financial and capital market system and the issuance and mintage of currency.”

    Under Section Three: National Monetary System, Article 318:

    “The monetary competence of National Authority shall necessarily be exercised exclusively by the Venezuelan Central Bank (BCV).”

    Its “fundamental objective….is to achieve price stability and preserve the internal and foreign exchange value of the monetary unit.”

    “The Venezuelan Central Bank is a public-law juridical person with autonomy to formulate and implement policies within its sphere of competence.”

    Article 319 says it “shall be governed by the principle of public responsibility.”

    “Failure to do so “shall result in removal of the Board of Directors.”

    It “shall be subject to oversight by the Office of the General Comptroller of the Republic…”

    Under Venezuela’s 2010 Organic Law on the Domestic Financial System, banks, insurance companies, brokerage firms, and other financial institutions “have the obligation of collaborating with sectors of the productive, popular communal economy through healthy financial intermediation, inspired by the spirit of productive transformation.”

    In other words, their mandate includes funding traditional economic sectors. They’re also responsible for social and communal production entities and related organizations.

    Advancing collective savings is required. So is promoting alternative communal investments.

    Venezuelan law mandates its central bank to adapt its “legal, administrative and functional structure to the goals of the production model, and the Central Bank may not be detached from the actual needs of the economy.”

    Its operations must “meet the objectives of a socialist state.” It’s the law of the land in a mostly private economy.

    Millions of Venezuelans mourn Chavez’s passing. His body lies in state. It’s in Caracas’ Military School. It’s in a half-open casket.

    A Friday state funeral is planned. Heads of state will attend. So will numerous other dignitaries. Expect many there. Venezuelans chant “Chavez lives. The struggle goes on.”

    Venezuela declared seven days of mourning. Other countries declared three. They include Cuba, Brazil, Argentina, Ecuador, Bolivia, Nicaragua, Uruguay, the Dominican Republic, Chile, Iran and Belarus. Perhaps others will join them.

    At the request of Cuba’s UN ambassador, the Human Rights Council declared one minute of silence. It did so on March 6.

    A Community of Latin American and Caribbean States (CELAC) declaration expressed “profound solidarity with the people and government of the sister Bolivarian Republic of Venezuela, and particularly with the family and friends of comandante Chavez.”

    “It’s difficult to accept this painful event. His passing moves all of us. An exceptional, extraordinary, respected, and admired man at a world level has stopped physically existing.”

    In March 2006, I wrote Chavez an open letter. It was long and detailed. It expressed support. I explained who I am. I told him why I care.

    I said what he already knew. Dark forces targeted him for removal. I told him to take precautions. He didn’t need me to explain.

    “I champion all you’ve done and tell people who’ll listen if you ever tire of ruling Venezuela,” we need you in America.

    “Your spirit and glorious revolution” inspire me. Keep it flourishing, growing and spreading, I urged.

    I support you openly, I said. I hope you’ll “survive and succeed unimpeded.” God bless. Most sincerely. Steve Lendman.

    Notable Chavez Quotes

    “When imperialism feels weak,” he said, “it resorts to brute force.”

    “The attacks on Venezuela are a sign of weakness, ideological weakness.”

    “Nowadays almost nobody defends neoliberalism.”

    At the January 2005 World Social Forum, he said:

    “It is impossible within the framework of the capitalist system to solve the grave problems of poverty of the majority of the world’s population.”

    “We must transcend capitalism. But we cannot resort to state capitalism, which would be the same perversion as the Soviet Union.”

    “We must reclaim socialism as a thesis, a project, and a path…a new type of socialism, a humanist one, that puts humans and not machines or the state ahead of everything.”

    “Just look at the internal repression inside the United States, the Patriot Act, which is a repressive law against U.S. citizens.”

    “They have put in jail a group of journalists for not revealing their sources. They won’t allow them to take pictures of the bodies of the dead soldiers, many of them Latinos, coming from Iraq. Those are signs of Goliath’s weaknesses.”

    “The south also exists.”

    “The future of the north depends on the south.”

    “If we don’t make that better world possible, if we fail, and through the rifles of the US marines, and through Mr. Bush’s murderous bombs, if there is no coincidence and organization necessary in the south to resist the offensive of neo-imperialism, and the Bush doctrine is imposed upon the world, the world will be destroyed.”

    “Everyday I become more convinced, there is no doubt in my mind, as many intellectuals have said, that it is necessary to transcend capitalism.”

    “But capitalism can not be transcended through capitalism itself.”

    “It must be done through socialism, true socialism, with equality and justice.”

    “I’m also convinced that it is possible to do it under democracy, but not in the type of democracy being imposed by Washington.

    “We have to re-invent socialism. It can’t be the kind of socialism that we saw in the Soviet Union, but it will emerge as we develop new systems that are built on cooperation, not competition.”

    “Privatization is a neoliberal and imperialist plan. Health can’t be privatized because it is a fundamental human right, nor can education, water, electricity and other public services.”

    “They can’t be surrendered to private capital that denies the people from their rights.”

    “The grand destroyer of the world, and the greatest threat….is represented by US imperialism.”

    “Let the dogs of the empire bark. That’s their job. Ours is to battle to achieve the true liberation of our people.”

    He called George Bush a “donkey.” “Mr. Danger.” “Coward.” “Assassin.” “Genocid(ist).”

    He called him a “drunk,” a “sick man, a psychologically ill man.”

    At the UN in 2006, he called Bush the “Devil. The Devil is right here at home. The Devil, the Devil himself, is right in the house.”

    “And the Devil came here yesterday….Right here. And it smells of sulphur still today.”

    He “came here talking as if he owned the world. Truly. As the owner of the world.”

    In 2010, he told Hillary Clinton to resign. “It’s the least you can do. Resign, along with those other spies and delinquents working in the State Department.”

    In 2011, he said Gaddafi “will be remembered as a great fighter, a revolutionary and martyr. They assassinated him. It is another outrage.”

    After his October 2012 reelection, he said he’d deepen socialism. He’d do so in the next six years. Many problems need addressing, he stressed. He promised to keep working to alleviate them.

    Two weeks before his death, he returned home from Cuba. He told supporters “We have arrived again in Venezuela. Thank God. Thanks to my beloved country.”

    On March 5, he passed. Chavismo lives!

    Viva Chavez! Viva Chavismo! Viva Bolivarianism! Viva Venezuela! Valor y fuerza (Courage and strength)! Hasta la victoria siempre (Onward to victory)!

    Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago. He can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

    His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

    http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

    Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com.

    Chavez to be embalmed ‘like Lenin’ and put on public display

    0

    Published time: March 08, 2013 09:34

    A woman reacting as she pays last tribute to the late Venezuelan President Hugo Chavez, at the Military Academy chapel on March 7, 2013 in Caracas. (AFP Photo / Efrain Gonzalez)

    Download video (143.51 MB)

    Chavez’ political heir has revealed that the Venezuelan leader is to be embalmed and preserved just like Lenin, and laid out in the ‘Mountain Barracks’ where he devised a failed coup. The venue will be turned into a Museum of the Revolution.

    “We have decided to prepare the body of our Comandante President, to embalm it so that it remains open for all time for the people. Just like Ho Chi Minh. Just like Lenin. Just like Mao Zedong,” said Nicolas Maduro, the provisional president, on state TV. He is Chavez’s designated successor.

    Chavez is to be kept in a glass casket in the museum so that he can be seen for “eternity” and his people “will always have him.”

    Maduro also said that the former President will lie in state for seven more days, at a military museum, so that people can continue to pay their respects to the leader. The farewell to Chavez was extended as mourners flocked to bid farewells at the military academy since Wednesday, where his glass-topped casket is currently on display.

    Venezuelan soldiers push the protective fences as supporters wait in line to pay last respects to the late Venezuelan President Hugo Chavez. (AFP Photo / Leo Ramirez)

    Inside the casket, the former leader was wearing olive green military dress, a black tie and his signature red beret. He had a red sash across his torso, with the word ‘militia’ on it — the name of the 120,000-strong force which he created.

    The government estimated the turnout figure to be around the 2 million mark in a country with a population of 29 million. Many kept a nighttime vigil.

    Chavez’s body was transported seven hour procession on Wednesday from the hospital where he died to its current resting place. The official funeral is to take place on Friday, but the announcement that he is to be embalmed came as a surprise, only hours before it was planned to occur. Maduro said that the demand to see the deceased leader was far too great to ignore.

    Guards keep supporters behind a fence as they wait to pay respects to late Venezuelan President Hugo Chavez. (AFP Photo / Ronaldo Schemidt)

    A reported 55 heads of state or government are due to attend, which will include Iranian President Mahmoud Ahmadinejad. The service is still expected to go ahead in Caracas, the capital, to mark the transfer of Chavez’s body, prior to the embalming.

    The ‘Mountain Barracks’ are where Chavez arranged a failed coup against then-President Carlos Andres Perez on February 4, 1994. The slum was an area of concentrated Chavez support, and his arrest as a result of the planned coup turned him into a hero, resulting in election victory in 1998.

    Maduro implied that his move there may not be permanent. There is widespread support for Chavez to be taken to the national pantheon to lie alongside Simon Bolivar, the Latin American independence hero, in whose honor Chavez constructed the mausoleum.

    Chavez often called himself a Bolivarian patriot, and ‘Revolutionary Bolivarian Movement-200’ was the name of the grouping which first attempted the coup. His socialist rule lasted for 14 years, and he played a pivotal role in re-nationalizing the oil industry.

    After a two-year battle with cancer, he died from a heart attack at the age of 58.

    Cuban president Raul Castro during the funeral of President Hugo Chavez, in Caracas, on March 7, 2013. (AFP Photo / Presidencia)

    “Chavez was a brave and very thorough man who was able to showcase strong character to go through with his plans. He genuinely wanted to rid the country’s poor citizens of their plight and improve their lives. Chavez became the symbol of independence throughout Latin America while he was still alive. He’s joined the legendary ranks of Simon Bolivar, Fidel Castro, and Che Guevara,” said Russian President Vladimir Putin.

    Fellow Latin American presidents also lauded the late president.

    “This liberation process, not only of the Venezuelan people, but also of all the Latin American peoples must continue,” said Bolivian President Evo Morales.

    “Chavez allowed us to restore faith in Latin America regions, so that a profound transformation in the region can be carried out,” said President Rafael Correa of Ecuador.

    Maduro will be sworn in as acting president on Friday, and will later call elections. The national electoral council will set the date for elections, which must take place within 30 days of the president’s death, according to the constitution.

    He will go head to head with opposition leader Henrique Capriles Radonski. However, Capriles lost to Chavez in October’s presidential polls. A further recent opinion poll has suggested that Chavez’s anointed successor, Maduro, is likely to with the election.

    US Drone Strikes Putting ‘Global Order At Risk’, Warn European Politicians

    0

    The United States is putting “global stability and international order at risk” by pursuing a policy of targeted extrajudicial drone strikes against suspected terrorists, European politicians have warned.

    At least to 3,000 people, including a large number of civilians, are said to have been killed by controversial CIA drone strikes in Pakistan, Somalia and Yemen since 2004.

    This week members of the European Parliament said they were “deeply concerned about the legal basis, as well as the moral, ethical and human rights implications” of the drone attacks and urged European Union member states to “contest the US attempt to pervert international law”.

    In a statement the MEPs said: “We cannot remain silent. The European Union and its Member States must speak up against a practice that will set a dangerous and unwelcome precedent for International Law.”

    British MEP Baroness Sarah Ludford, the Liberal Democrat European justice and human rights spokeswoman, said on Friday: “US drone killings operate in disregard of the long-established international legal framework about when it is lawful to kill people. This sets an extremely dangerous precedent and risks a destabilising effect on international relations. It could even furnish Al-Qaida with a licence to kill in return.”

    “European complicity in the ‘War on Terror’ after 9/11, in defiance of legal norms whereby terrorist criminals must be brought to justice through due process, still haunts Europe as well as the US. It is incredible that the US is making renewed and reckless attempts to rewrite the international legal code, and we could get hurt again too.”
     
    “Without agreed law the international community cannot hope to justify military action and prevent human rights abuses. As leaders of that community along with the US, the EU and its Member States must boldly state their opposition to this programme, which disregards our common international legal heritage. Silence will be taken as European acquiescence, with potentially disastrous results.”

    LIKE HUFFPOST UK POLITICS ON FACEBOOK | FOLLOW US ON TWITTER

    The condemnation came after a briefing in Brussels from United Nations Special Rapporteur for Counter Terrorism and Human Rights, Ben Emmerson QC, who is conducting a UN investigation into the UK and US policy of targeted killings.

    Senior British parliamentarians have also raised concerns in Westminster over president Obama‘s use of drones in Pakistan. Former British Foreign Office minister Baroness Kinnock of Holyhead has warned “action must be taken to ensure that there is accountability and reparations when a drone attack goes wrong”.

    And Lord West of Spithead, the former head of the Royal Navy and a security minister in the last Labour government, told the House of Lords last month: “War is horrible. Death is horrible. Being involved in the risk is horrible. When one does this remotely from a leafy suburb in your own country and killing people that does make it remote and that does have huge implications and is very worrying and needs a lot of control.”

    The House of Commons defence committee announced it would conduct an investigation into the British military’s use of drones after the RAF decided to expand its use and number of Unmanned Ariel Vehicles.

    Pressed by MPs and peers, the UK government has insisted it has only used its own drones inside Afghanistan as the British military’s presence there is at the request of the Afghan government. However British intelligence agencies have been accused of passing information to the CIA to help the Americans carry out strikes in Pakistan.

    And last month it was reported the UK had a policy of stripping British citizens of their passports on national security grounds – two of who were then killed by US drones.

    President Obama’s use of drones has recently climbed up the American news agenda following the controversial confirmation of John Brennan as head of the Central Intelligence Agency and Republican senator Rand Paul’s thirteen hour senate filibuster against extrajudicial drone killings.

    Brennan has previously claimed that no civilians have been killed by drones, based on the Obama administration’s decision to designate every military-age male in the target area as a combatant.

    On Thursday the White House tried to shut down the debate over whether, as had been initially suggested, Obama had the power to order a drone strike on US soil.

    A series of HuffPost/YouGov surveys showed that while a majority of Americans support their use to kill people suspected of being “high-level members of al Qaeda”, this is reversed if they are told civilians are at risk of being killed.

    Related on HuffPost:

    Port Said violence escalates ahead of contentious Saturday verdict

    0

    Published time: March 08, 2013 05:24

    An Egyptian protester throws a tear gas bomb back at riot police during clashes in the Suez Canal city of Port Said on March 7, 2013 (AFP Photo / Jonathan Rashad)

    Download video (66.15 MB)

    Another life has been claimed in a fifth day of clashes between police and protesters in the Egyptian city of Post Said, amid ongoing political turmoil. The crowd is demanding the release of prisoners charged over last year’s soccer stadium massacre.

    Port Said, at the northern end of the Suez Canal, has been a hotspot since January, plagued by violent protests over detentions and death sentences following a soccer stadium riot that took the lives of 74 people last year.

    The match itself was plagued by security irregularities and many commented on police inaction, while the list of accused only involved members of the Port Said team’s supporters and not the opposition. Add to that a delay in the trial of police officers involved.

    Egyptian-American journalist from ‘Democracy Now’, Sharif Kouddous, told RT how difficult it would be to avoid confrontation with both sides in the event of either verdict.

    “If the security officials are seen as innocent or getting off with a light sentence, then both sides will be very angry and this lingering sense of injustice that has been hanging over Egypt for the past two years will really ignite on the streets of Port Said or Cairo.,” he said.

    The imprisoned youths were being moved on Thursday from one prison to another unknown location. Their families have been experiencing a sense of injustice from the government and worried that their loved ones would not be guaranteed adequate protection. That is how the clashes began.

    The precursor to Thursday’s violence began Wednesday, when masked youths had gathered at various government buildings in the coastal city, throwing stones and chanting “dirty government!” as the police responded with smoke bombs. When on Thursday they started using teargas to disperse the demonstrators, the crowd erupted.

    Since the start of this latest spate of violence on March 3, at least seven people have been killed and hundreds wounded. The Thursday victim is Karim Atout, 33, who, according to a Health Ministry official’s statement to Reuters, “died from a gunshot to the head after doctors’ efforts failed to revive him.” RT’s Bel Trew, who was present during the Thursday clashes, said there were reports of live ammunition used by the security forces.

    It is widely believed that the 21 of 39 prisoners will probably get their death sentences approved by the Mufti at a court hearing in Port Said on Saturday. When they were charged in January, the ensuing violence between law enforcement and civilians had claimed at least 40 lives. The government says they will increase security around the prison and courthouse on the day of the ruling.

    Speaking to RT, political blogger Iskander Wael stressed that disproportionate justice was being delivered: “[This is] certainly not a fair trial. A lot of the judiciary here is highly politicized. You can’t expect any justice to come out of [it]…but one of the more important things to look into is that the sentences on the policemen were postponed till March 9. It seems that the whole verdict is just a way to manage the country’s political crisis, rather than to bring about justice.”

    Ever since President Hosni Mubarak was deposed in the Egyptian popular uprising of two years ago, security in Port Said has been steadily deteriorating. There is a widespread feeling that the city has become neglected by the central government in Cairo, that its demonstrators are treated differently, and that the security forces are a part of the government’s brutal hand. There is also talk of current President Mohamed Morsi substituting the police force in Port Said for the military.

    However, the police have been carrying out their own strikes across Egypt. Officers have made it clear that their actions are intended to show the force’s neutrality in the unrest, and that they refuse to have their actions politicized on any level. That is what they told Egypt’s news agency MENA. When dozens protested peacefully in Egypt’s second city, Alexandria, they chanted the words, “the police are not against the people.”

    Egypt has been in a state of chaos since the start of Morsi’s presidency. The country believes he is not carrying out the goals set during the revolution of 2011, and many want him to relinquish power.

    Free to go…not! Syrian rebels backpedal over UN hostages

    0

    Published time: March 08, 2013 04:15

    screenshot from youtube video by user syriahro

    The Syrian rebels who captured a group of Philippine UN peacekeepers are now willing to release them and want the Red Cross to escort them out of the area, the Philippine military said on Friday.

    It comes after the Syrian Observatory for Human Rights released a video showing some of the 21 peacekeepers, with one man – who identified himself as a captain in the UN Philippine battalion – saying that he and his men are in “a safe place.”

    The UN observers were seized by Syrian rebels in Golan Heights. Initially the rebels said the peacekeepers would not be released until Syrian government forces withdrew from the village of Jamlah, but then seemed to have played down their demands, calling the hostages “guests” and stressing that they would not harm them.

    “They want the ICRC to pick them up and escort them,” Philippine military spokesman Col. Arnulfo Marcelo Burgos said. “Hopefully they will really be released and we are also waiting for that.”

    The UN and the Philippine government had condemned the capture of the peacekeepers and urged the insurgents to immediately release them. Russia’s UN envoy Vitaly Churkin said the seizure of the UN observers showed “gross disrespect for the United Nations.”

    Six kidnapped in armed assault on private Libyan TV station

    0

    Published time: March 08, 2013 01:17

    A Libyan man checks the site of a break-in at Alassema television station in Tripoli on March 7, 2013 (AFP Photo / Mahmud Turkia)

    Dozens of armed assailants stormed a private TV station in Tripoli on Thursday, abducting its owner and five staff, releasing most captives soon after. The parliament’s human rights commission has urged the interior ministry to take immediate action.

    An editor at the state-owned Lana network said the attackers locked the other workers inside one office, torched the surroundings and fled with the six hostages in a jeep to an undisclosed location. They later released five people, but kept Joumaa al-Usta, the wealthy owner, captive

    One of the anchors at the Alassema station where the attack took place, Mohammed al-Sharkassi, told another news network that he had also been accosted outside his workplace by “individuals who identified themselves as former rebels.” He told Libya al-Ahrar television that he would be freed if he left Tripoli immediately. He added that the rebels were angered by the channel’s editorial policies, giving no further details.

    Libya al-Ahrar says the attack occurred in the afternoon. The assailants stormed the channel, entering through the windows. The Lana network added that the gunmen smashed equipment. Security forces arrived at the scene promptly after the attack.

    Libyan security forces stand guard outside Alassema television station in Tripoli on March 7, 2013 (AFP Photo / Mahmud Turkia)

    The precise origin of the perpetrators is unknown, although a Lana editor views the attack as a response to Alassema’s persistent criticism of the rebels’ and as revenge for the channel’s coverage of the attack on the National General Congress earlier in the week, when a siege lasted for hours. The lawmakers were at work on a bill to prevent officials from the Gaddafi era from holding political posts in future.

    The Alassema station has ties to Libya’s National Forces Coalition, who bested the Muslim Brotherhood in the legislative elections in July of last year. The liberal coalition’s head, Mahmoud Jibril — the country’s western-inclined ex-prime minister, masterminded the 2011 coup that ousted Muammar Gaddafi.

    Since Gaddafi’s overthrow, media has flourished. But during the bloody revolution that lasted from February to October, pitting Gaddafi loyalists against rebels and NATO forces, tens of thousands lost their lives and the economy of the oil-rich country was dealt a huge blow.

    A Libyan man checks the site of a break-in at Alassema television station in Tripoli on March 7, 2013 (AFP Photo / Mahmud Turkia)

    Mehdi’s Morning Memo: Did Clegg And Cable Know?

    0

    The ten things you need to know on Friday 8 March 2013…

    1) DID CLEGG AND CABLE KNOW?

    They may like to think they occupy the moral high ground but those Lib Dems know how to do a scandal, don’t they? Former cabinet minister Chris Huhne has already pleaded guilty to perverting the course of justice over his speeding points and, yesterday, Chris Huhne’s ex-wife Vicky Pryce was found guilty too. (“The Price of Vengeance,” splashes the Mail; “The Pryce of Revenge,” splashes the Telegraph).

    But here’s the key bit: as the Daily Mail reports, “senior Liberal Democrats were dragged into the Chris Huhne scandal last night amid sensational claims that… Pryce confided in them two years ago”.

    ‘Did Clegg and Cable know?’ is the headline in the Daily Express, which reports:

    “Detectives uncovered explosive evidence suggesting that senior Lib Dems including Mr Clegg’s wife Miriam and Business Secretary Vince Cable could have been in on the secret.

    “They found emails from Huhne’s ex-wife Vicky Pryce, saying she admitted the deception to Mr Cable, Mrs Clegg and others.

    “… One, written in April 2011, claims she confided in Mr Cable and his wife saying she had ‘told Vince and Rachel about points’.

    “… Referring to the Deputy Prime Minister, his wife, the Business Secretary and Lib Dem elder statesman Lord Oakeshott, she says: ‘Yes, I have told VC, Miriam C, MOak and a few other Lords and others working close to NC.'”

    Both the Cleggs and the Cables have released statements denying they had any prior knowledge of the speeding-points story.

    Nonetheless, the term “explosive” is also used by the Mirror in its lead editorial: “The guilty verdict on Vicky Pryce is a family tragedy and, for the Lib Dems, a second potentially explosive scandal over who knew what.”

    And the Sun declares: “The Lib Dems just cannot rid themselves of the stink of scandal.”

    First Rennard, now Pryce. Victory in Eastleigh suddenly seems so long ago. In fact, in comments made ahead of the Eastleigh by-election but published in House magazine last night, the party president Tim Farron referred (in a positive way!) to Lib Dems as “nutters” and “cockroaches” but warned his colleagues that “the party is in a critical state… We shouldn’t assume our survival is guaranteed”.

    By the way, did I mention that Liberal Democrats are gathering in Brighton today for their spring conference? You can’t beat that for (bad) timing, eh?

    2) GET RID OF DAVE? NAH, TOO CHAOTIC…

    Good news for the leader of the Conservative Party – from the Telegraph:

    “Conservative Cabinet ministers will not dare to move against David Cameron because they know they would plunge the party back into the turmoil of the 1990s, the Prime Minister’s allies have said.

    “… Allies of the Prime Minister said they believed that ministers such as Mrs May would run if a vacancy ever arose.

    “But they insisted that neither she nor any other senior Cabinet minister would actively try to bring down the Prime Minister, fearing that to do so would repeat the Tory infighting that scarred Sir John Major’s government.

    “A minister close to Mr Cameron said: ‘No one from that generation would move against him, because they know exactly what would happen to the party if they did. They remember the 1990s and all the damage we did to ourselves then.’

    “Instead, the minister said, any attempt to oust Mr Cameron would come from younger Tories, including those first elected in 2010.”

    Bring on Adam Afriyie, eh?

    3) WHEN RUPERT MET NIGEL…

    Ukip leader Nigel Farage has a new admirer – from the Huffington Post UK:

    “Nigel Farage told Rupert Murdoch at a private London dinner he would form an electoral pact with the Conservative Party if David Cameron quit as prime minister, it has been reported.

    “According to the Daily Telegraph, the Ukip leader met the News International chairman for a ‘secret’ meal on Tuesday, the pair’s first meeting, in the wake of the Eastleigh by-election which saw Farage’s eurosceptic party push the Tories into third place.

    “The newspaper reports that Farage told Murdoch he would work with the Tories to defeat Labour in 2015, as long as the prime minister was no longer the party’s leader.”

    LIKE HUFFPOST UK POLITICS ON FACEBOOK | FOLLOW US ON TWITTER

    4) LABOUR’S IMMIGRATION DOG WHISTLES

    Hey Ed Miliband, how’s that new ‘progressive’ approach to immigration working out for you? And have you mentioned it to your shadow home secretary?

    “We won’t pay dole to EU migrants for three months, vows Labour,” was the headline in last night’s Evening Standard; the paper was reporting on Yvette Cooper’s dog-whistling speech on immigration yesterday. ‘Benefit tourism’ is a myth: official figures show that those born abroad are significantly less likely to claim benefits than UK nationals – but Cooper is intent on sounding ‘tough’.

    As the Guardian’s veteran home affairs editor Alan Travis observes:

    “Yvette Cooper may well have promised not to ‘enter into an arms race of rhetoric’ with the Tories over immigration but Labour’s new approach appears designed to ensure that nobody can put a cigarette paper between them.”

    He adds:

    “Cooper also seems to have taken the lesson from Tony Blair’s law and order strategy of matching every ‘tough’ initiative put forward by the Conservatives and, if possible, out-flanking them by proposing a few more practical solutions of your own.”

    How depressing. Is there no one in public life willing to make the case for immigration?

    5) ‘COASTING CAN KILL’

    According to the Times, in a speech today the health secretary Jeremy Hunt will tell “hospital bosses that too many of them are complacent about being ‘not bad’ and warns them that ‘coasting can kill’… Mr Hunt compares NHS hospitals to the failing British Olympic team of years past, when they did not aim to win but were content not to come last.”

    The paper also reports on how “Harry Cayton, head of the Professional Standards Authority for Health and Social Care, believes that a return of old-fashioned moral concepts is needed in order to guide the NHS out of a malaise and rebuild public confidence after the Mid Staffs scandal.”

    BECAUSE YOU’VE READ THIS FAR…

    Watch this 3-minute video of an adorable baby elephant playing in the ocean. Go on. You know you want to.

    6) HELL HATH NO FURY LIKE A TORY DONOR SCORNED

    Bizarre. From the Daily Mail:

    “The Tories’ biggest donor of the last decade has held an extraordinary private meeting with Labour to discuss its election strategy.

    “Lord Ashcroft, a hate figure for most Labour MPs, held talks with Shadow Foreign Secretary Douglas Alexander, one of the architects of the party’s 2015 campaign.

    “It emerged last month that the peer, a former deputy chairman of the Conservatives who gave the party £10million in funding but stopped donating several years ago, had decided not to give any more after becoming disillusioned with David Cameron’s leadership.”

    7) AUSTERITY WATCH, PART 121

    From the Independent:

    “The Government’s programme of public spending cuts has been marred by short-term thinking, turf wars between departments and perverse decision-making, a committee of MPs said today.

    “The Public Accounts Committee said some of the £200bn of cuts made by George Osborne undermined his attempts to boost growth. It lambasts ‘silo thinking’ by departments who gave no heed to how spending decisions that they made might affect other parts of the Government.”

    Meanwhile, the Sun reports on the prime minister’s ‘major speech’ on the economy in Keighley yesterday – and the latter’s response to his freelancing business secretary:

    “Angry David Cameron has slapped down Vince Cable over his ‘Plan B’ suggestion for more borrowing in a bid to boost puny growth… in a withering put-down for Labour’s alternative strategy too, Mr Cameron said: ‘There are some people who think we don’t have to take all these tough decisions to deal with our debts.

    “‘And what we need to do is to spend more and borrow more. It’s as if they think there’s some magic money tree. Well let me tell you a plain truth: there isn’t.

    “‘Changing course would plunge the UK ‘back into the abyss’, the PM also warned.”

    Given the coalition is borrowing £212bn more than it had planned to, Dave may have his own ‘magic money tree’ hidden away somewhere…

    8) HIDING BEHIND ISLAMOPHOBES

    Tory ministers have been to invoke the German government’s support for a tougher approach to migrants from Bulgaria and Romania – but my colleague Felicity Morse draws our attention to some of the more unsavoury views expressed by that country’s interior minister:

    “The British government has been accused of ‘hiding’ behind Germany and a minister with a ‘dubious and suspicious record’ in a bid to bolster support for blocks on Eastern European immigration.”

    Hans Peter Friedrich, writes Felicity, “has a controversial history with minorities in Germany, causing outrage a year ago after telling journalists in: ‘Islam in Germany is not something supported by history at any point.'”

    A spokesperson for Hope Not Hate told her: “Hans Peter Frederich allegedly has a dubious and suspicious record and Britain is hiding behind that. Government scaremongering on Romanians and Bulgarians is deflecting attention from what’s going on at home with welfare and the NHS and the economy.”

    9) YOU WANNA PIECE OF US?

    Uh-oh. From the BBC:

    “North Korea says it is scrapping all non-aggression pacts with South Korea, closing its hotline with Seoul and shutting their shared border point.

    “The announcement follows a fresh round of UN sanctions punishing Pyongyang for its nuclear test last month.

    “Earlier, Pyongyang said it reserved the right to a pre-emptive nuclear strike against its ‘aggressors’.”

    Hopefully it’s the usual bit of bluster from the crazies in charge of the North Korean dictatorship and not something more serious or significant…

    10) WE LOVE YOU MAGGIE. WELL, SOME PEOPLE DO.

    Tories rejoice! The Telegraph reports:

    “The birthplace of Baroness Thatcher is finally to have a permanent statue erected in her honour, housed in a museum dedicated to the former prime minister…

    “After years of wrangling over the issue, a £200,000 fund-raising project is to begin, half of which will pay for the statue and half for the renovation of the Grantham Museum in Lincolnshire.

    “… By taking the decision out of the hands of local politicians, who have spent decades arguing over whether to have a statue, the museum staff hope to unite the town’s residents behind the project.”

    SHAMELESS PLUG ALERT

    Tonight I’m interviewing leading climate change sceptic, Professor Richard Lindzen of MIT, at the Oxford Union for a pre-recorded Al Jazeera show. It kicks off at 7.30pm and other contributors include Oxford professor Myles Allen, author and activist Mark Lynas and the Mail on Sunday’s David Rose. If you’d like to come along and ask a question from the audience, please email debates@aljazeera.net.

    PUBLIC OPINION WATCH

    From today’s Sun/YouGov poll:

    Labour 41
    Conservatives 32
    Lib Dems 11
    Ukip 11

    That would give Labour a majority of 96.

    140 CHARACTERS OR LESS

    @DavidWooding That post Eastleigh smirk of satisfaction seems to have vanished from many Lib Dem faces this morning.

    @DavidLammy Feel like I’ve waited all my life for football like this from Spurs.”Please Gareth Bale don’t stand against me at the next election!” #COYS

    @davidwearing Shall we pre-empt the “men’s rights” self-pity by pointing out that *every day* is International Men’s Day? #IWD

    900 WORDS OR MORE

    Philip Collins, writing in the Times, says: “It’s a myth that lazy foreigners are sponging off our welfare state. Our leaders ought to be straight with us.”

    Simon Jenkins, writing in the Guardian, says: “More spending? The coalition may as well build a bridge to the moon.”

    Jonathan Aitken, writing in the Daily Mail, says: “The mad hubris of us politicians: I know because it brought me down too.”

    Got something you want to share? Please send any stories/tips/quotes/pix/plugs/gossip to Mehdi Hasan (mehdi.hasan@huffingtonpost.com) or Ned Simons (ned.simons@huffingtonpost.com). You can also follow us on Twitter: @mehdirhasan, @nedsimons and @huffpostukpol

    North Korea ends non-aggression pacts with South, cuts hotline

    0

    Published time: March 08, 2013 00:47

    Pyongyang announced Friday that it is nullifying non-aggression pacts with South Korea and cutting the hotline with its neighbor. It comes after the UN Security Council adopted a resolution expanding sanctions against North Korea.

    North Korea “abrogates all agreements on non-aggression reached between the North and the South,” the state-run Committee for the Peaceful Reunification of Korea said in a statement.

    “It notifies the South side that it will immediately cut off the North-South hotline,” said the statement, which was carried by the official Korean Central News Agency.

    National Disgrace: The Lack of Opposition to Obama’s Kill List Policy

    0

    Democrats Shamefully Silent on Obama Administration’s Assertion of Right to Assassinate Americans on U.S. Soil

    Rand Paul carried out a historic 13-hour filibuster of dronemaster-in-chief John Brennan’s nomination for CIA chief.

    Huffington Post slammed Democrats for being missing in action and progressive news host Cenk Uygur called Senator Paul a “constitutional hero”.

    One of the top constitutional law experts in the country — Jonathan Turley, a progressive liberal — writes:

    What was most striking about this principled stand is the virtual total absence of Democrats in speaking out against Obama. Just this week, Attorney General Eric Holder admitted that this policy could include killing citizens on U.S. soil with drones. Yet, the Democrats worked to stop not the kill list policy but Paul’s filibuster. Obama apologists have attacked Rand for some of his other positions to avoid dealing with the fact that Obama is claiming the powers of an Imperial President. I do not agree with Paul on many things, but I commend him for this stand and condemn those who remained silent, again, in the face of this authoritarian policy of Obama.

    ***

    The lack of opposition to Obama’s kill list policy is a national disgrace. It shows the triumph of a cult of personality within the Democratic ranks where both members and voters have chosen Obama over long-standing values of civil liberties that once defined their party.

    Senator Paul’s office sent us a series of unofficial transcripts of Paul’s filibuster speech. Below are our favorite excerpts (constitutional experts like Turley have confirmed that Paul’s statements are accurate).

    No American should be killed by a drone on American soil without first being charged with a crime, without first being found to be guilty by a court. That Americans could be killed in a cafe in San Francisco or in a restaurant in Houston or at their home in bowling green, Kentucky, is an abomination. It is something that should not and cannot be tolerated in our country.

    ***

    The principle is one that as Americans we have fought long and hard for and to give up on that principle, to give up on the bill of rights, to give up on the Fifth Amendment protection that says that no person shall be held without due process, that no person shall be held for a capital offense without being indicted. This is a precious American tradition and something we should not give up on easily.

    ***

    When I asked the President, can you kill an American on American soil, it should have been an easy answer. It’s an easy question. It should have been a resounding and unequivocal, “no.” The President’s response? He hasn’t killed anyone yet. We’re supposed to be comforted by that.

    The President says, I haven’t killed anyone yet. He goes on to say, and I have no intention of killing Americans. But I might. Is that enough? Are we satisfied by that? Are we so complacent with our rights that we would allow a President to say he might kill Americans? But he will judge the circumstances, he will be the sole arbiter, he will be the sole decider, he will be the executioner in chief if he sees fit. Now, some would say he would never do this. Many people give the President the — you know, they give him consideration, they say he’s a good man. I’m not arguing he’s not. What I’m arguing is that the law is there and set in place for the day when angels don’t rule government. Madison said that the restraint on government was because government will not always be run by angels. This has nothing, absolutely nothing to do with whether the President is a Democrat or a Republican. Were this a Republican President, I’d be here saying exactly the same thing. No one person, no one politician should be allowed to judge the guilt, to charge an individual, to judge the guilt of an individual and to execute an individual. It goes against everything that we fundamentally believe in our country.

    This isn’t even new to our country. There’s 800 years of English law that we found our tradition upon. We founded it upon the Magna Carta from 1215. We founded it upon Morgan from Glamorgan and 725 A.D. We founded upon the Greeks and Romans who had juries. It is not enough to charge someone to say that they are guilty.

    ***

    If there’s a gentleman or a woman with a grenade launcher attacking our buildings or our Capitol, we use lethal force. You don’t get due process if you’re involved with actively attacking us, our soldiers or our government. You don’t get due process if you’re overseas in a battle shooting at our soldiers. But that’s not what we’re talking about. The Wall Street Journal reported and said that the bulk of the drone attacks are signature attacks. They don’t even know the name of the person. A line or a caravan is going from a place where we think there are bad people to a place where we think they might commit harm and we kill the caravan, not the person. Is that the standard that we will now use in America? Will we use a standard for killing Americans to be that we thought — killing Americans to be that we thought you were bad, we thought you were coming from a meeting of bad people and you were in a line of traffic and so, therefore, you were fine for the killing? That is the standard we’re using overseas. Is that the standard we’re going to use here?

    I will speak today until the President responds and says no, we won’t kill Americans in cafes; no, we won’t kill you at home in your bed at night; no, we won’t drop bombs on restaurants. Is that so hard? It’s amazing that the President will not respond. I’ve been asking this question for a month. It’s like pulling teeth to get the President to respond to anything. And I get no answer.

    The President says he hasn’t done it yet and I’m to be comforted, you are to be comforted in your home, you are to be comforted in your restaurant, you are to be comforted on-line communicating in your e-mail that the President hasn’t killed an American yet on the homeland. He says he hasn’t done it yet. He says he has no intention to do so. Hayek said that nothing distinguishes arbitrary government from a government that is run by the whims of the people than the rule of law. The law’s an amazingly important thing, an amazingly important protection. And for us to give up on it so easily really doesn’t speak well of what our founding fathers fought for, what generation after generation of American soldiers have fought for, what soldiers are fighting for today when they go overseas to fight wars for us. It doesn’t speak well of what we’re doing here to protect the freedom at home when our soldiers are abroad fighting for us, that we say that our freedom’s not precious enough for one person to come down and say, enough’s enough, Mr. President. Come clean, come forward and say you will not kill Americans on American soil. The oath of office of the President says that he will, to the best of his ability, preserve, protect, and defend the Constitution. He raises his hand, his right hand, puts his left hand on the bible, and he says, “i will.” The President doesn’t say, “I intend to if it’s convenient.” “I intend to, unless circumstances dictate otherwise.”

    ***

    If you are sitting in a cafeteria in Dearborn, Mich., if you happen to be an Arab-American who has a relative in the Middle East and you communicate with them by e-mail and somebody says, oh, your relative is someone we suspect of being associated with terrorism, is that enough to kill you? For goodness sakes, wouldn’t we try to arrest and come to the truth by having a jury and a presentation of the facts on both sides of the issue? See, the real problem here, one of the things we did a long time ago is we separated the police power from the judicial power. This was an incredibly important first step. We also prevented the military from acting in our country because we didn’t want to have a police state.

    ***

    I’m not casting any aspersions on the President. I’m not saying he is a bad person at all, but he is not a judge. He’s a politician. He was elected by a majority, but the majority doesn’t get to decide who we execute. We have a process for deciding this. We have courts for deciding this, to allow one man to accuse you in secret, you never get notified you have been accused. Your notification is the buzz of the propellers on the drone as it flies overhead in the seconds before you’re killed. Is that what we really want from our government? Are we so afraid of terrorism, are we so afraid of terrorists that we’re willing to just throw out our rights and our freedoms, things that have been fought for and that we have gotten over the centuries.

    ***

    Madison wrote in the federalist papers, he said that the Constitution states what history demonstrates, that the executive branch is the branch most prone to war, most likely to go to war, and therefore we — we took that power to declare war and we vested it in the legislature. We broke up the powers. Montesquieu wrote about the checks and balances and the separation of powers. He was somebody who Jefferson looked towards. They separated the powers because there was a chance for abuse of power when power resides in one person. Montesquieu said there can be no liberty when you combine the executive and the legislative. I would say something similar. There can be no liberty when you combine the executive and the judiciary. That’s what we’re doing here. We’re allowing the President to be the accuser in secret and we’re allowing him to be the judge and we’re allowing him to be the jury. No man should have that power. We should fear that power. Not because we have to say oh, we fear the current President. It has nothing to do with who the President is. It has nothing to do with whether you’re a Republican or Democrat. It has to do with whether or not you fear the consolidation of power, were you — whether you fear power being given to one person, whether they are a Republican or a Democrat. This is not necessarily a right-left issue.

    ***

    What’s important here is that we’re talking about a war without geographic limitations, but we’re also talking about a war without temporal limitations. There is no limit, no limit in time to this war. When will this war end? It’s a war that has, I think, an infinite timeline. So if you’re going to suspend your rights, if there is going to be no geographic limits to killing, which really means we’re not at war in Afghanistan, we’re at war everywhere and everybody that pops up is called al-Qaida now, whether they have ever heard of al-Qaida or not, whether they have any communication with some kind of network of al-Qaida, everybody is al-Qaida, but there is a new war or an ongoing war everywhere in the world, there is no limitations.

    Glenn Greenwald … says there is a theoretical framework being built that posits that the U.S. Government has unlimited power.

    ***

    To think that we were opposed to them listening to your conversations without a warrant but no one’s going to stand up and say they can kill you without a warrant, a judge’s review or a jury, no one’s going to object to that, where is the cacophony that stood up and said how can you tap my phone without going to a judge first? I ask how can you kill someone without going to a judge or a jury?

    ***

    Civil libertarians once expected more from the President. In fact, it was one of the things that I liked about the President. I’m a Republican. I didn’t vote or support the President either time, but I admired him, particularly in 2007 when he ran. I admired his ability to stand up and say we won’t torture people, that’s not what America does. How does the President’s mind work, though? The President that seemed so honorable, seemed so concerned with our rights, seemed so concerned with the right not to have your phone be tapped now says he’s not concerned with whether you can be killed without a trial. The leap of logic is so fantastic as to boggle the mind. Where is the Barack Obama of 2007? Has the presidency so transformed him that he has forgotten his moorings, forgotten what he stood for? Civilian libertarians once expected more from the President. Ask any civil libertarian whether or not the President should have the right to arbitrarily kill Americans on American soil and the answer is easy. Of course, no President should have the right or that power under the Constitution.

    ***

    The President a year ago lined up — signed a law that says that you can be detained indefinitely, that you can be sent from America to Guantanamo Bay without a trial, and he wants us to be comforted, he wants us to remember and think good of him because he says I don’t intend to do so. It’s not enough. I mean, would you tolerate a Republican who stood up and said well, I like the First Amendment, I’m quite fond of the First Amendment, and I don’t intend to break the First Amendment but I might.

    ***

    So my question is if you’re not a civilian, if you’re in proximity to bad people, is that the standard we’re going to use in the United States? So if we’re going to kill Americans on American soil and the standard is going to be signature strikes that you’re close to bad people or that you’re in the same proximity as bad people, would that be enough? Are we happy with that standard? Are we happy that we have no jury, no trial, no charges, nothing done publicly?

    ***

    Many of the drone strikes overseas are done when you’re walking — I don’t know where you are a walking … To church, you’re walking along the road — they’re done when you’re in a car driving, they’re done when you’re in a house eating. They’re done when you’re at a restaurant eating. They’re done when you’re in a house sleeping. I am saying that they’re not actively involved in something that’s an imminent threat and if they were in America, they would be arrested.

    ***

    The Bureau of Justice put out a bulletin within the last year describing people who you need to be worried about. These are [terrorists]. Who are these terrorists that live among you?

    People who might be missing fingers on one hand, people who might have stains on their clothing, people who might have changed the color of their hair, people who like to pay in cash, people who own more than one gun, people who own weatherized ammunition, people who have seven days of food in their house. These are people that you should be afraid of and that you should report to your government. So says your government. Are they going to be on the drone strike list? I think we need to get an answer from the President.

    If you’re going to kill people in America, we need rules, and we need to know what your rules are. Because I certainly don’t want to have seven days of food in my house if that’s on the list to terrorism. Interestingly, on government websites there are some government websites that advise you to have it in your house. If you live in a hurricane-prone area you’re supposed to keep some area food around. Who is going to decide when it’s okay to have food in your house and when it’s not?

    ***

    The people on the list from the fusion center in Missouri that you need to be worried about, that policemen should stop, are people that have bumper stick theirs might be pro-life, who have bumper stickers that might be for more border security, people who support third-party candidates ….

    You believe in the Constitution so much, you might be a terrorist — you believe in the Constitution so much, you might be a terrorist. We need to be concerned about this. Things are not so black and white. If someone is shooting at us, a canon, a missile, a rocket, a plane, it is pretty easy to know what lethal attacks are. We’re talking about people in their homes, at a restaurant, or a cafe that someone is making an accusation. If the accusation is based on how many fingers you have on your hand, I have got a problem with that standard. If the standard to be used for killing Americans is whether you pay in cash, I’ve got a problem with that. If the standard to be used in America is being close to someone who is bad or the government thinks is bad is enough for you to be killed and not even account you as an accidental kill, to count you as combatant because you were near them [I”ve got a problem with that].

    ***

    But here’s the real problem: When the President’s spokesman was asked about al-Awlaki’s son, you know what his response was? This I find particularly callous and particularly troubling. The President’s response to the killing of al-Awlaki’s son, he said he should have chosen more a responsible father.

    ***

    I cannot sit at my desk quietly and let the President say he will kill Americans on American soil who are not actively attacking the country.

    ***

    Should we live in a country where you have to be worried about what you say? Should we live in a country where you have to worry about what you write? What kind of country would that be?

    ***

    Officials said the kill list in Pakistan has slipped to fewer than ten al-Qaida targets, down from as many as two dozen, and yet we’re killing hundreds of people in Pakistan.

    ***

    What if you just happen to live in the neighborhood of somebody who is a suspected terrorist. Is it okay because you were close to them? What if you happened to go to dinner with a guy you didn’t know or a woman you didn’t know and the government says they’re a terrorist? Just because you’re having dinner with them and you are a male between the ages of 16 and 50, does that make you a combatant? We also asked the question do you condone the CIA’s practice of counting civilians killed by U.S. drone strikes as militants simply because they were of the same age? Like every other question, no answer. We asked him whether al-Awlaki’s son was a target. No answer. We asked how many people have been targeted. No answer.

    ***

    As this war has dragged on, they take that authorization of use of force to mean pretty much anything. And so they have now said that the war has no geographic limitations, so it’s really not a war in Afghanistan, it’s a war in Yemen, Somalia, Mali. It’s a war in unlimited places.

    ***

    About a year ago, I tried to end the Iraq war. You may say, well, I thought the Iraq war was already over. It is, but we still have an authorization of use of force that says we can go to war in Iraq any time.

    And since they think the use of force in Afghanistan means limitless war anywhere, any time in the whole world, for goodness sakes, wouldn’t we try to take back a declaration of war, an authorization of force if the war is over? But here’s the sad part. I actually got a vote on it and I think I got less than 20 votes. You can’t end a war after it’s over up here. And it has repercussions, because these authorizations to use force are used for many other things. So the authorization of force says you can go after al-Qaida or associated terrorists. The problem is, is that when you allow the Executive Branch to sort of determine what is al-Qaida, you’ve got no idea.

    ***

    Alarm bells should go off when people tell you that the battlefield’s in America. Why? Because when the battlefield’s in America, we don’t have due process.

    ***

    One of them, in fact, said if you — if you — if they ask for a lawyer, you tell them to shut up. Well, if that’s the standard we’re going to have in America, I’m — I’m quite concerned that the battlefield would be here and that the Constitution wouldn’t apply. Because, to tell you the truth, if you are shooting at us in Afghanistan, the Constitution doesn’t apply over there. But I certainly want it to apply here. If you’re engaged in combat overseas, you don’t get due process. But when people say, oh, the battlefield’s come to America and the battlefield’s everywhere, the war is limitless in time and scope, be worried, because your rights will not exist if you call America a battlefield for all time. We’ve asked him whether the strikes are exclusively focused on al-Qaida and what is the definition of being part of al-Qaida.

    ***

    Now, the President has said, don’t worry because he’s not going to kill you with a drone unless it’s infeasible to catch you.

    ***

    Maybe he’s not got enough people to go arrest you …. So maybe he’s going to … kill you.

    ***

    It is not because we think our military are bad people. I’m proud of our soldiers, I’m proud of our army, I’m proud of what they do for our country. But they operate under different rules. And it’s a much more dangerous environment they operate under. And it’s different. It’s still dangerous in America, but policemen have a different rules of engagement than your soldiers have. And there’s — there’s more restrictions and restraint on what we do in our country. So that’s why we say the military can’t operate here. So when we asked the President, can you kill Americans on American soil with your drone strikes, which is part of the military, it should be an easy answer.

    ***

    John Yoo was one of the architects of this, basically just saying hey, if I’m going to protect you, I can do whatever the hell I want. Many on the left objected to that. Some of us on the right also objected to this — this usurpation of power by the Republican President. But the thing is, is it — now the shoe’s on the other foot and we’re not seeing any of that.

    ***

    When we separate out police power from judicial power, it’s an important separation. You know, the police can arrest you, they’re allowed to do certain things, but the policeman that comes to your door and puts handcuffs on you doesn’t decide your guilt.

    ***

    I’m not really disputing his motives or not saying he isn’t a good person. But I’m disputing someone who’s naive enough to think that that’s good enough for our republic, that his good intentions are good enough for our republic. It never would have been accepted, it would have been laughed out of the Constitutional Convention. The Founding Fathers would have objected so strenuously that that person probably would never have been elected to office in our country. Someone who doesn’t believe that the rules have to be in place and that we can’t have our rights guaranteed by the intentions of our politicians. Think about it. Congress has about a 10 percent approval rating. Do you think the American people want to base whether they’re going to be killed by a drone on a politician? I certainly don’t. Doesn’t have anything to do with whether he’s a Republican or a Democrat. I would be here today if this were a Republican President.

    Because you can’t give that much power to one person.

    ***

    No one is questioning whether the U.S. can repel an attack. No one is questioning whether your local police can repel an attack. Anybody involved in lethal force, the legal doctrine in our country and has been historically, has always been that the government can repel lethal attacks. The problem is, is that the drone strike program is often not about combatants. It is about people who may or may not be conspiring but they’re not in combat.

    ***

    Is objecting to your government or the policies of your government — the policy of your government sympathizing with the enemy?

    ***

    There is, though, a difference between sympathizing and taking up arms. Most people around here who want to justify no rules, America is a battlefield, no limits to war, they really want to blur it all together. Because it’s easier to say, oh, you don’t want to stop anybody who is shooting at Americans.

    ***

    Certain things rise above partisanship. And I think your right to be secure in your person, the right to be secure in your liberty, the right to be tried by a jury of your peers — these are things that are so important and rise to such a level that we shouldn’t give up on them easily.

    ***

    And really, the great irony of this is that President Obama’s position on this is an extension of George Bush’s opinion. It basically is a continuation and an expansion of George Bush’s opinion. George Bush was a President who believed in a very expansive power. Virtually, some would say, unlimited. He was accused of running an imperial Presidency. The irony is that this President that we have currently was elected in opposition to that. This President was one elected who when he was in this body was often very vocal at saying that the President’s powers were limited.

    ***

    One of the President’s [i.e. Obama’s] writings I found very instructive and I was quite proud of him for having said it, the President said that no President shall unilaterally go to war without the authority of Congress unless there is an imminent threat to the country. I guess we should be a little wary of his unless now since we know imminent doesn’t have to be immediate and imminent no longer means what humans once thought imminent meant. But he did say that the President doesn’t go to war by himself. I think it would be fair to say that candidate Obama also felt that the President didn’t have the authority to imprison you indefinitely without a trial. I think it’s also safe to say that Barack Obama of 2007 would be right down here with me arguing against this drone strike program if he were in the Senate.

    ***

    Presidents have been getting more and more powerful for over a hundred years, Republican and Democrat. There was at one point in time in our history a pride among the Senate and a pride among the Congress that said these are our powers and we’re not giving them up. There were people on both sides of the aisle who would stand firm and say this is not a power I’m willing to relinquish. This is not something that is good for the country. And by relinquishing the power of Congress, we relinquish something very fundamental to our Republic, which is the checks and balances that we should have checks and balances to help and try to prevent one body or one part of the three parts of government from obtaining too much power.

    ***

    Guilt or innocence isn’t always apparent, and sometimes an accusation is a false accusation. Sometimes accusations are made because people politically don’t like your point of view. So the question becomes should we have a process where we try to determine innocence or guilt?

    ***

    If inconveniencecy is our standard for going to war without Congress, inconveniency is our standard for killing Americans on American soil with drones — I mean, I think we’ve sunk to a new low. I just can’t imagine as a country that that’s the standard that you want to have.

    NATO’s War on Libya and Africa

    0

    timthumb

    NATO’s war in Libya was proclaimed as a humanitarian intervention – bombing in the name of “saving lives.” Attempts at diplomacy were stifled. Peace talks were subverted. Libya was barred from representing itself at the UN, where shadowy NGOs and “human rights” groups held full sway in propagating exaggerations, outright falsehoods, and racial fear mongering that served to sanction atrocities and ethnic cleansing in the name of democracy. The rush to war was far speedier than Bush’s invasion of Iraq.

    Max Forte has scrutinized the documentary history from before, during, and after the war. He argues that the war on Libya was not about human rights, nor entirely about oil, but about a larger process of militarizing U.S. relations with Africa. The development of the Pentagon’s Africa Command, or AFRICOM, was in fierce competition with Pan-Africanist initiatives such as those spearheaded by Muammar Gaddafi.

    Far from the success NATO boasts about or the “high watermark” proclaimed by proponents of the “Responsibility to Protect,” this war has left the once prosperous, independent and defiant Libya in ruin, dependency and prolonged civil strife.

    Slouching Towards Sirte:
    NATO’s War on Libya and Africa

    by Maximilian Forte

    AVAILABLE TO ORDER FROM GLOBAL RESEARCH!

    ISBN: 978-1-926824-52-9Year: 2012
    Pages: 352 with 27 BW photos, 3 maps
    Publisher: Baraka Books

    Price: $24.95

    CLICK TO ORDER FROM GLOBAL RESEARCH

    This title is also available in E-Book format. Click here for more information.

    About humanitarian imperialism, Max Forte writes:

    “Desperate to finally be seen as the liberators of Arabs, rescuing poor victims with the finest of American exports (human rights), some would understandably feel compelled to exploit the suffering of others (residents fleeing Sirte) and turn that into something worthy of celebration. This is an example of the abduction process at the centre of Western, liberal humanitarianism: it can only function by first directly or indirectly creating the suffering of others, and by then seeing every hand as an outstretched hand, pleading or welcoming. We see (or imagine) helpless others, gobbling morsels of food that we hand them, brown mouths chugging down water from our plastic bottles, and we feel accomplished. Our moral might is reaffirmed by the physical plight of others. Clearly, the humanitarian relation is not a relation between equals. We are not our “brothers’ keepers” then, but rather we are more like animal keepers. Bombing for us is really just an animal management technology, and our relationship to the world remains a zoological one.” (Slouching Towards Sirte, p. 97.)

    A War for Human Rights
    (by Max Forte — in The Political Bouillon)

    The war in Libya never happened. At least that is what one might think, considering the dearth of serious analysis and critical reflection in Canada since our participation in NATO’s bombardment campaign ended a year ago. Yet in Libya, in many ways the war is still happening…Read more..

    Brendan Stone interviews Max Forte as he discusses his book SLOUCHING TOWARDS SIRTE

    Praise, Reviews

    “Slouching Towards Sirte is a penetrating critique, not only of the NATO intervention in Libya, but of the concept of humanitarian intervention and imperialism in our time. It is the definitive treatment of NATO’s war on Libya. It is difficult to imagine it will be surpassed.”
    -Stephen Gowans, What’s Left, Read More

    “Forte’s allegations that NATO’s war was manufactured by liberal interventionists and “iPad imperialists” whose agenda to disrupt African independence and execute regime change under the “fig leaf” of saving lives are chilling–and persuasive. So too is the timeline of events between the start of the protests and the propagandist hysteria promulgated online. Even though Forte couches descriptions of Gaddafi in amorphous, guarded language, he isn’t an apologist. In this provocative and unabashedly direct book, Forte speaks truth to power.”
    –ForeWord Reviews, January 4, 2013, read full review…

    The Public Archive identified Slouching Towards Sirte as one of 10 Books for 2012 on its Black Radical Reading List.

    Maximilian C. Forte is a professor of anthropology in Montreal, Canada. He teaches courses in the field of political anthropology dealing with “the new imperialism,” Indigenous resistance movements and philosophies, theories and histories of colonialism, and critiques of the mass media. Max is a founding member of Anthropologists for Justice and Peace.

    Slouching Towards Sirte:
    NATO’s War on Libya and Africa

    by Maximilian Forte

    ISBN: 978-1-926824-52-9
    Year: 2012
    Pages: 352 with 27 BW photos, 3 maps
    Publisher: Baraka Books

    Price: $24.95

    CLICK TO ORDER FROM GLOBAL RESEARCH

    Rupert Murdoch And Nigel Farage Dine In ‘Secret’

    0

    Nigel Farage told Rupert Murdoch at a private London dinner he would form an electoral pact with the Conservative Party if David Cameron quit as prime minister, it has been reported.

    According to the Daily Telegraph, the Ukip leader met the News International chairman for a “secret” meal on Tuesday, the pair’s first meeting, in the wake of the Eastleigh by-election which saw Farage’s eurosceptic party push the Tories into third place.

    The newspaper reports that Farage told Murdoch he would work with the Tories to defeat Labour in 2015, as long as the prime minister was no longer the party’s leader.

    LIKE HUFFPOST UK POLITICS ON FACEBOOK | FOLLOW US ON TWITTER

    News of the meeting comes amid Westminster chatter about who will succeed Cameron, with home secretary Theresa May‘s name currently top of the list.

    Conservative MPs are deeply concerned that the Ukip vote in marginal seats is now enough to cost the party the next election by splitting the right-wing vote and allowing Labour or Lib Dem candidates through the middle.

    On Thursday Murdoch Tweeted praise for Farage as well as criticism of the European Union and the single currency.

    His messages also included praise for two other leading contenders to take over from Cameron – London mayor Boris Johnson and education secretary Michael Gove. Boris and Gove are both also reported to have recently sat down for private dinners with Murdoch.


    Rupert Murdoch

    Boris Johnson, Michael Gove, few excellent, frustrated ministers. Farage reflecting opinion. Florence mayor Renzi brilliant young Italian.


    Rupert Murdoch

    Stagnant Europe wracked by discontent and resentment of EU. Glad we contributed to UK resisting the Euro over many years.

    Related on HuffPost:

    UN peacekeeper hostages in Syria are ‘in a safe place’ according to video

    0

    Published time: March 07, 2013 21:48

    screenshot from youtube video by user syriahro

    Six UN peacekeepers detained by Syrian fighters on Wednesday are safe, according to footage released by the activists. The video — which shows six men lined up in their uniforms — did not include information on the remaining 15 hostages.

    The 21 Filipino UN peacekeepers were captured by Syrian rebels in Golan Heights. However, one of the men in the footage — who identified himself as a captain in the UN Filipino battalion – said that he and his men are in “a safe place.”

    He said that the group had been rescued by “civilian people” during bombing and artillery fire near a United Nations observation post close to the village of Jamla.

    “Civilian people helped us for our safety and distributed us in different places to keep us safe. They gave us good accommodation and gave us food to eat and water to drink,” he said.

    The video was released by the Syrian Observatory for Human Rights, which says it has been speaking “directly” to a spokesperson for the Yarmouk Brigades — the group of rebels which captured the peacekeepers.

    A spokesman for the observatory said on Thursday that the captors “assured us they are not going to harm the hostages in any way and they’re treating them as guests.” The activist group says the insurgents are pushing for government forces to pull back heavy weaponry and allow villagers to return to villages they have fled because of recent fighting.

    Earlier Thursday, the Philippines’ foreign ministry issued a statement on the kidnapping, saying that the detention of the Filipino peacekeepers violates international law.

    “The Philippines is working very closely with the UN, the US, the UK, France, and Germany for the early and safe release of the peacekeepers,” Philippines Foreign Affairs Spokesperson Raul Hernandez said in a statement.

    Twenty-one Filipino UN peacekeepers were detained in Golan Heights on Wednesday. The UN and Arab League officials are reportedly negotiating with the Syrian rebels.

    Who is to blame?

    As the hostage crisis continues to unfold, political analyst Ibrahim Alloush says those who support the rebels are responsible for the crime — not the rebels themselves.

    “If you look at the whole picture, you will easily find that the problem is not with those rebels, but with those who are supporting them — the ones who are arming them, financing them, and providing them with political support,” he told RT.

    But Alloush’s opinions are a far cry from those of the Arab and western states — which continue to support the Syrian opposition.

    On Wednesday, the Arab League issued a statement saying Arab states are free to offer military support to the Syrian rebels and has offered them a seat. It was a ground-breaking move for the organization, which previously said the Syrian opposition should only be supported by humanitarian and diplomatic means.

    On the same day, UK Foreign Secretary William Hague announced the UK would increase its aid to rebel forces in Syria.

    The aid amounts to 13 million pounds (US$19.5 million) and was made possible by changes to the terms of the EU arms embargo on Syria, which were agreed last week. The aid includes armored vehicles, body armor, search and rescue, communications, and disease prevention equipment.

    Meanwhile, Germany has praised the European Union’s decision not to arm anti-government fighters in Syria, as doing so would risk regional “conflagration.”

    “The decision of the EU not to lift in total the embargo was wise and was right,” German Foreign Minister Guido Westerwelle said in a statement.

    The EU embargo prevents weapons from being supplied to Syrian rebels, but sanctions have been recently amended to allow more non-lethal equipment, such as body armor. The embargo rolls over every three months, and Syrian opposition officials have repeatedly called for it to be lifted.

    “It is necessary to show more flexibility and to understand that we have of course to support the…opposition in a responsible way,” Westerwelle said.

    According to UN estimates, more than 70,000 people have been killed since the uprising against Syrian President Bashar Assad began two years ago. More than one million refugees have fled the country.

    The Assassination of Yasser Arafat had been Ordered by the Israeli Cabinet

    0

    The Assassination of Yasser Arafat had been Ordered by the Israeli Cabinet

    In the light of recent developments concerning the death on Hugo Chavez, it is important to emphasize that the US has an explicit policy pertaining to the extrajudicial assassination of foreign leaders.

    Since 2001, the order to assassinate foreign leaders emanates from the White House, following the revocation of Executive Order 12333 (!976) which prevented the CIA from ordering the assassination of foreign leaders.

    According to Seymour Hersh, there was a second area of extra-legal operations, the Joint Special Operations Command.

    “It is a special wing of our special operations community that is set up independently… They do not report to anybody, except in the Bush-Cheney days, they reported directly to the Cheney office. … Congress has no oversight of it.”

    “It’s an executive assassination ring essentially, and it’s been going on and on and on,… Under President Bush’s authority, they’ve been going into countries, not talking to the ambassador or the CIA station chief, and finding people on a list and executing them and leaving. That’s been going on, in the name of all of us.”

    In recent developments, following the endorsement of the US Congress, the US president can order the “lawful” assassination of a US citizen or a foreigner, in the US and abroad, theoretically as part of the “Global War on Terrorism”.

    The covert assassination of foreign leaders is an integral part of what is euphemistically called “US foreign policy”.

    Yasser Arafat was assassinated on the orders of the Israeli Cabinet. In 2003, Israel’s cabinet for political security affairs declared it “a decision to remove Arafat as an obstacle to peace.” When the decision did not mention when the assassination of Arafat would be carried out: “we will choose the right way and the right time to kill Arafat.”

    The Israeli Cabinet decision was the object of a debate at the UN Security Council and a motion condemning Israel’s decision to asassinate Arafat. That decision was officially endorsed by the US, which vetoed the UN Security Council Resolution.

    Michel Chossudovsky, Global Research, March 7, 2013


    The 2004 assassination of Yasser Arafat was part of a broader military and intelligence agenda to destroy the Palestinian Authority.  

    What recent news reports fail to mention is that the extra-judicial assassination had been ordered by the Israeli cabinet in 2003. It was subsequently approved by the US which vetoed a United Nations Security Resolution condemning the 2003 Israeli Cabinet decision to “get rid of Arafat”.  ”We will choose the right way and the right time to kill Arafat.”

    (See Michel Chossudovsky, The Invasion of Gaza: “Operation Cast Lead”, Part of a Broader Israeli Military-Intelligence Agenda, Global Research, November 2009)

    The assassination of Yasser Arafat had been on the drawing board since 1996 under “Operation Fields of Thorns”. According to an October 2000 document “prepared by the security services, at the request of then Prime Minister Ehud Barak, stated that ‘Arafat, the person, is a severe threat to the security of the state [of Israel] and the damage which will result from his disappearance is less than the damage caused by his existence’”. (Tanya Reinhart, Evil Unleashed, Israel’s move to destroy the Palestinian Authority is a calculated plan, long in the making, Global Research, December 2001. Details of the document were published in Ma’ariv, July 6, 2001.).

    Arafat’s assassination was ordered in 2003 by the Israeli cabinet. It was approved by the US which vetoed a United Nations Security Resolution condemning the 2003 Israeli Cabinet decision. Reacting to increased Palestinian attacks, in August 2003, Israeli Defense Minister Shaul Mofaz declared “all out war” on the militants whom he vowed “marked for death.”

    “In mid September, Israel’s government passed a law to get rid of Arafat. Israel’s cabinet for political security affairs declared it “a decision to remove Arafat as an obstacle to peace.” Mofaz threatened; “we will choose the right way and the right time to kill Arafat.” Palestinian Minister Saeb Erekat told CNN he thought Arafat was the next target. CNN asked Sharon spokesman Ra’anan Gissan if the vote meant expulsion of Arafat. Gissan clarified; “It doesn’t mean that. The Cabinet has today resolved to remove this obstacle. The time, the method, the ways by which this will take place will be decided separately, and the security services will monitor the situation and make the recommendation about proper action.” (See Trish Shuh, Road Map for a Decease Plan, www.mehrnews.com November 9 2005)

    The assassination of Arafat was part of the 2001 Dagan Plan. In all likelihood, it was carried out by Israeli Intelligence. It was intended to destroy the Palestinian Authority, foment divisions within Fatah as well as between Fatah and Hamas. Mahmoud Abbas is a Palestinian quisling. He was installed as leader of Fatah, with the approval of Israel and the US, which finance the Palestinian Authority’s paramilitary and security forces.

    To Read complete Article:

    The Invasion of Gaza: “Operation Cast Lead”, Part of a Broader Israeli Military-Intelligence Agenda
    – by Michel Chossudovsky — 2009-01-04

    Egypt’s election committee cancels April parliamentary vote

    0

    Published time: March 07, 2013 20:00

    Egypt’s Parliamentary vote canceled as court rules against election law

    Egypt’s election committee has canceled dates for a parliamentary election slated for next month after a court ruled against the country’s election law, Reuters reported, citing state TV.

    DETAILS TO FOLLOW

    Flying high: Next ISS crew set to reach station in record time

    0

    Published time: March 07, 2013 19:27

    Download video (143.16 MB)

    The next crew to set off for the International Space Station may reach it in a record six hours, far outstripping the current time of two days. The quicker trip is now possible thanks to a launch trajectory, which is currently undergoing tests.

    The 35th space mission to the ISS consists of a Russian-US crew and includes cosmonauts Pavel Vinogradov and Alexander Misurkin together with NASA astronaut Chris Cassidy. The launch is scheduled on March 28 at 2043 GMT from the Baikonur Cosmodrome in Kazakhstan aboard a Russian Soyuz spacecraft.

    The new fast-track trajectory has the rocket launching shortly after the ISS passes overhead.

    Normally it takes Soyuz capsules two days to reach the orbiting laboratory after launch. Vinogradov, Misurkin and Chris Cassidy are set to make the trip faster than any other astronauts before them – in just six hours. Docking is set for 0231 GMT on March 29. The planned duration of the expedition is 168 days. The crew will undertake a scientific program involving dozens of experiments, unload four Russian “Progress” cargo spaceships and also conduct a series of spacewalks.

    One of the reasons given in the past for having the two-day or even three-day flight in the Soyuz was to allow the crew members time to acclimatize to being in zero-gravity.

    L-R: cosmonauts Alexander Misurkin, Pavel Vinogradov and Chris Cassidy at a training session of the ISS 35/35 prime crew in a Soyuz TMA_M simulator at the Gagarin Cosmonaut Training Center (RIA Novosti / Grigory Syisoev)

    The actions of the cosmonauts will be the same as what they do on a two-day profile, according to the participant of 35th space expedition to ISS, Chris Cassidy. Normally they go to bed and have a period of time on the next day when cosmonauts just monitor the vehicle.

    “On our mission it all will happen in a tight sequence of six hours. We have periods of about 45 minutes or so in between these maneuvers — it’s a bit of downtime, but technically that’s how it’s possible. There’s tighter constraints on where the space station can be on launch time than on a typical profile the space station has a little more leeway on where can it be at the time of launch,” added Cassidy.

    The fast-track trajectory is not a completely new practice, with the method already being tested on cargo vehicles. But now they will ‘try to do it on the manned vehicles,’ head of the Gagarin Cosmonaut Training Center, Sergey Krikalev told NASA TV.

    “Now we have onboard new machinery and new software, so the vehicle is more autonomous, so it’s possible to do a lot onboard the vehicle and to calculate the burns so they don’t consume a lot of fuel,” added the former cosmonaut.

    Additional firings of the vehicle’s thrusters early after launch are said to help shorten the time it takes to reach the station.

    The new fast-track trajectory could become a permanent feature of ISS missions, either by the end of this year or starting from 2014.

    Israel Persecuting Palestinian Knesset Member Hanin Zoabi

    0

    haneen zoabi

    Israel’s Supreme Court ruled twice on her. Most recently it did so in mid-February. It went both ways. More on that below.

    In July 2010, Knesset members stripped her of key parliamentary rights and privileges. They did so lawlessly and maliciously. They targeted her for doing the right thing.

    She participated in the May 2010 Freedom Flotilla. She was aboard the Mavi Marmara. It was bringing vital aid to Gaza. Israeli commandos attacked it. They murdered nine activists on board in cold blood.

    Zoabi was lucky. She escape unharmed. She called Israel’s attack a “pirate military operation.” She did so in Israel’s Knesset.

    “It was clear from the size of the force that boarded the ship that the purpose was not only to stop this sail(ing), but to cause the largest possible number of fatalities in order to stop such initiatives in the future.”

    Other members repeatedly interrupted her. Some shouted “Go to Gaza, traitor!” She received death threats. Two security guards were assigned to protect her.

    Zoabi’s a Balad party member (National Democratic Alliance). She’s been a MK since February 2009. She’s Israel’s first Palestinian one from an Arab party.

    From 1999 — 2003, Arab Israeli Hussniya Jabara served as a Meretz MK. From 2006 — 2009, Nadia Hilou did so for Labor.

    Zoabi joined Balad in 2001. In 2000, she co-founded I’lam: Media Center for Arab Palestinians in Israel. She served as general director. In 2009, she resigned. She did so to run for Knesset membership.

    I’Iam “seeks to strengthen the media cadre, raise awareness and educate Palestinian society in Israel in media practices.”

    “It also seeks to democratize media policies and practices within the local Arab and Hebrew language medias, towards the realization of media rights in Palestinian society.”

    It’s “deeply committed to the democratization of media policies, media practices, and the media landscape in Israel.”

    Zoabi rejects the notion of Israel as a Jewish state. She calls accepting it “inherently racist.”

    She deplores requiring Arab Israelis to pledge loyalty to “the State of Israel as a Jewish and democratic state.” Mandating it has no legitimacy.

    “The Jewish state is not democratic and cannot represent me,” she said. She wants her Arab heritage respected.

    She’s been vilified, harassed and threatened. Hardliners call her a traitor. Israel’s Interior Minister Eli Yishai wanted her parliamentary immunity revoked and citizenship stripped.

    He urged Attorney General Yehuda Weinstein to criminalize her. He wanted her charged with a “premeditated act of treason.”

    Arab MKs endure repeated abuse. Israel scorns non-Jews. Arabs are treated like vermin. Rogue states operate that way. Israel’s one of the worst.

    On December 18, its Central Election Committee (CEC) members disqualified Zoabi from seeking reelection.

    Knesset hardliners charged her with violating Israeli Basic Law. Doing so was unprincipled and lawless. It had no legitimacy whatever.

    They claimed anyone not swearing fealty to Israel as a Jewish state can’t serve in parliament. Nor can others supporting “terrorism” and armed struggle.

    Zoabi serves honorably and legitimately. Charges made were baseless. She called them “political vengeance and a pathetic attempt to harm the representation of the Arab public.”

    She added that “the struggle for full equality is the only way possible toward democracy.”

    CEC members “blatantly ignored the unequivocal advice of the Attorney General, which said there is no legal basis for the disqualification.”

    “It is now clear that the elections committee is a political body meant to harm the representatives of the Arab public, and has nothing to do with democracy.”

    “Instead of holding a public debate, they wish to silence me and with me a whole demographic, and we will not cooperate with such silencing.”

    Israeli Basic Law gives Supreme Court justices final say. It’s their call on whether political candidates may or may not be disqualified.

    On December 30 they ruled. Disqualifying her is lawless. Justices ruled unanimously. She’s free to seek reelection, they said.

    Many Supreme Court decisions violate fundamental international rule of law principles. This time justices ruled responsibly. Doing otherwise was more than even conservative ones could tolerate. It was a no-brainer.

    Ahead of their ruling, Israeli Attorney General Yehuda Weinstein opposed petitioning against Zuabi’s right to serve.

    He claimed “no sufficient, exceptional critical mass of evidence” justified disqualifying her. He stopped short of calling efforts to do so lawless and racist.

    Zoabi’s an Israeli citizen. She’s qualified to run. She’s entitled to represent her people. Arabs constitute 20% of Israel’s population.

    They’re harassed, marginalized, and persecuted. They’re denied most rights. They’re treated like fifth column threats. Knesset members maliciously targeted Zoabi. They went all out to remove her. They failed.

    On February 13, Israel’s High Court addressed Zoabi’s petition. Adalah and the Association for Civil Rights in Israel(ACRI) represented her.

    She wants her full parliamentary rights and privileges restored. Justices decided otherwise. They denied her, saying:

    “Since the 18th Knesset’s mandate has ended, so has its decision….to withdraw certain rights from MK Zoabi.”

    There’s no cause for “the court to allocate its limited resources to consideration of a theoretical issue.”

    At issue are three parliamentary rights and privileges:

    (1) overseas travel all MKs enjoy;

    (2) restoring her diplomatic passport; and

    (3) defraying her legal expenses if parliamentary immunity is revoked for criminal prosecution.

    Adalah and ACRI responded. Justices “finished hearings on this petition months before elections,” they said.

    “Had (they) issued a timely decision, (they) could have prevented the Knesset’s illegal and undemocratic action, which is nothing but a reflection of the tyranny of the majority over the minority.”

    Adalah attorney Hassan Jabareen and ACRI’s Dan Yakir said stripping Zoabi’s rights and privileges sets a dangerous precedent.

    It lets MKs punish other members for legitimate political activity. Doing so contradicts “the basic purpose of parliamentary immunity.”

    It’s there for a purpose. It protects important rights. Revoking them limits freedom. It reflects tyranny.

    Justices ruled irresponsibly. They supported wrong over right. They violated rule of law principles. They mocked democratic values. They do it often.

    Israeli authorities take full advantage. Palestinians and Israeli Arabs pay hugely. Racist persecution victimizes them.

    Courts provide no redress. Equal justice under law is just a figure of speech. Israel’s Supremes support what demands rejection. Palestine’s liberating struggle continues.

    Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago. He can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net. 

    His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

    http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

    Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com. 

    Listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network

    It airs Fridays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

    http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

    http://www.dailycensored.com/persecuting-hanin-zoabi/

    Court Delving Into Latin American Terrorism Effort

    0

    Court Delving Into Latin American Terrorism Effort

    Email this item Email   Print this item Print   Share this item... Share
    Posted on Mar 7, 2013
    Democracy Now!

    A trial under way in Argentina is expected to reveal new details about how Latin American countries coordinated with one another in the 1970s and ’80s to kill political dissidents in a campaign known as “Operation Condor.”

    Military dictatorships in Argentina, Bolivia, Brazil, Chile, Paraguay, Peru and Uruguay worked together to track down, kidnap and kill people they labeled as terrorists: left-wing activists, labor organizers, students, priests, journalists, guerrilla fighters and their families. “The campaign was launched by the Chilean dictator Augusto Pinochet, and evidence shows the CIA and former U.S. Secretary of State Henry Kissinger were complicit from its outset,” “Democracy Now!” reports.

    John Dinges, author of “The Condor Years: How Pinochet and His Allies Brought Terrorism to Three Continents,” discusses the right-wing crusade:

    “In the 1970s, Pinochet convinced the other countries–Brazil, Uruguay, Argentina, Bolivia and Paraguay–to go along with him, with the argument that there are these guerrilla operations that are a threat to all of them,” he explains. “And there was indeed a guerrilla operation, called the Revolutionary Coordinating Junta, of people who were taking up arms against these governments. And the idea was that they would cooperate in tracking these people down. And they did.”

    –Posted by Alexander Reed Kelly.

    Democracy Now:


    New and Improved Comments

    If you have trouble leaving a comment, review this help page. Still having problems? Let us know. If you find yourself moderated, take a moment to review our comment policy.

    Please enable JavaScript to view the comments powered by Disqus.

    Sochi Paralympics countdown launched on Red Square

    0

    Published time: March 07, 2013 18:45

    RIA Novosti / Alexander Astafev

    The Sochi Paralympics’ countdown has begun, with exactly 365 days remaining before the event’s opening ceremony. Organizers, speaking at an event next to the Kremlin, said the Paralympics will get its best ever media coverage.

    Around 1300 disabled competitors from 45 countries will be battling for 70 sets of medals at the Sochi Paralympics, scheduled to take place between March 7 and 16, 2014.  

    Russia’s Prime Minister, Dmitry Medvedev, and the International Paralympic Committee president, Sir Philip Craven, were present at the ceremony of the Paralympic clock launch on Thursday.

    “The XI Winter Paralympic Games will be the first ever to take place in our country, and we are proud of it. For us it’s a very important event,” Medvedev said from the stage.

    The Prime Minister admitted that in Sochi he’s going to shout for the Russian team, who were second in the medals count (12 goals, 16 silver and 10 bronze medals) at the previous Paralympics in Vancouver 2010.

    “Today we have a very strong Paralympics team, which achieves excellent results,” Medvedev stressed. “We always look at the Paralympics athletes with admiration because it’s always a power of will concentrated in each person, each specific scene at any given moment. And when our Paralympians win it’s always a double pleasure for us. But, I think, any victory a Paralympian makes goes to the collection of mankind’s sporting achievements.”

    The Sochi event is expected to get the widest coverage in the history of the Paralympic movement, with Craven stressing that the media “can change the overall impression of the audience, make them reconsider their attitude towards disabled people, as well as inspire a whole generation.”
     
    The route of the Paralympic torch was also revealed on Thursday. According to the plan, the flame will visit 43 Russian cities between February 26 and March 7 next year, with 1.500 torchbearers participating.

    “Thanks to the barrier free infrastructure Sochi is ready to host the Paralympics right now,”
    Dmitry Chernyshenko, the head of the Sochi 2014 Organizing Committee, said. “But what’s more important is that the Games in Sochi are breaking the stereotypes that exist in our country towards people with disabilities, changing the life of 13 million Russians for the better.”

    The XI Paralympics will see disabled athletes competing in five disciplines, which are alpine skiing, biathlon, cross-country skiing, wheelchair curling, ice sledge hockey and lastly snowboarding, which will make its debut at Sochi.

    The Paralympic Games will follow the XXII Olympic Winter Games, which Sochi stages between February 7 and 23, 2014.

    RIA Novosti / Alexander Astafev

    Tuition at Public Colleges Rises to Record Level

    0

    Tuition at Public Colleges Rises to Record Level

    Email this item Email   Print this item Print   Share this item... Share
    Posted on Mar 7, 2013
    Flickr/University of Portsmouth Students’ Union

    College costs climbed to an all-time high in 2012 while state and local funding for items such as operating expenses and student aid fell, a new report shows. According to the latest State Higher Education Officers Association report, tuition for public colleges and universities rose 8.3 percent for the 2011-2012 school year, pushing the average cost up to $5,189. At the same time, however, funding to the schools dropped 9 percent to a 25-year-low of $5,896.

    Think Progress:

    The upward trend is likely to continue in 2013, since state governments plan to spend 10.8 percent less on higher education this year than they did in the year prior to the Great Recession. Only 12 states now spend more on higher education than they did before the recession. The decrease in funding has contributed to the six-fold increase in college tuition over the last 30 years.

    Still, Americans are graduating from college at record rates, but they are doing so while accruing more debt. The number of Americans carrying student loan debt is at record levels, and that has had consequences throughout the economy, especially since earnings for college graduates are declining.

    Read more

    –Posted by Tracy Bloom.

    More Below the Ad

    Get truth delivered to
    your inbox every week.

    Previous item: Holder Argues for Homeland Drone Killings



    New and Improved Comments

    If you have trouble leaving a comment, review this help page. Still having problems? Let us know. If you find yourself moderated, take a moment to review our comment policy.

    Please enable JavaScript to view the comments powered by Disqus.

    Are Attorney General Holder’s Statements on Banks and Drones Connected? How Far Will the Government Go to Defend the Too Big to Fail Banks?

    0

    State-sponsored assassination: Attorney General Eric Holder Justifies Killing Americans On Foreign Soil

    The Attorney General of the United States made the following 2 statements within 48 hours:

    These statements may — at first glance — seem unconnected. And the mainstream media is treating them as separate.

    True, the government is hell-bent on keeping the giant banks afloat, even though virtually all independent economists, financial experts and bankers are calling for them to be broken up, and Americans overwhelmingly want the government to get tougher on prosecuting Wall Street fraud.

    But there might be more to it then than that … and Holder’s statements may be intimately connected.

    For example, the Department of Homeland Security, FBI, and other government agencies worked hand-in-hand with the big banks to violently crack down on the Occupy protests.

    And what was Occupy protesting? One of the core complaints of the Occupy protesters was that there are two systems of justice: the little guy gets thrown in jail for the smallest infraction, while banksters escape prosecution for their criminal fraud. (Occupy also protested the fact that that the big banks got bailed out, while the rest of us got sold out. And see this.)

    In other words, it is exactly the Department of Justice’s policy of not prosecuting big bank crimes which was one of Occupy’s core complaints … and — in response — the federal government sent in the goons to crack heads and trash the free speech rights of the protesters.

    This is not an isolated incident.

    The big banks literally own the politicians.

    For many years, the government has used anti-terror laws mainly to crush political dissent and to help the too big to fail businesses.

    Asking questions about Wall Street shenanigans, speaking out against government policies, and protesting anything are all considered grounds for being labeled a “potential terrorist” by the government. Whistleblowers are also being treated as terrorists.

    Indeed, the government agency with the power to determine who gets assassinated is the same agency that is at the center of the “ubiquitous, unaccountable surveillance state aimed at American citizens.”

    If this sounds like breathless fearmongering, please remember that the U.S. military now considers the American homeland to be a “battle zone” (and see this).

    And the banking system is considered “critical infrastructure” by the Department of Homeland security.

    Another Connection Between Big Banks and Drones

    There is another connection between big banks and drones.

    The big banks have a direct role in encouraging and financing war. And see this.

    And Ron Paul noted in 2007:

    Congress and the Federal Reserve Bank have a cozy, unspoken arrangement that makes war easier to finance. Congress has an insatiable appetite for new spending, but raising taxes is politically unpopular. The Federal Reserve, however, is happy to accommodate deficit spending by creating new money through the Treasury Department. In exchange, Congress leaves the Fed alone to operate free of pesky oversight and free of political scrutiny.

    The big banks own the Federal Reserve.

    Indeed, some say that all wars are really bankster wars.

    One Economy, Two Americas

    0

    Cleveland is one of the cities hit hardest by the foreclosure crisis. (AP Photo/Jamie-Andrea Yanak)Before you gulp down your favorite champagne to celebrate Wall Street’s new stock market highs, remember that we are two Americas: The nation’s economic divide is costing us all dearly in terms of lost jobs and growth and is fueling the angry, gridlocked politics in Washington.

    As The New York Times reported Monday, corporate profits have been skyrocketing ever since 2008 -— rising an average of 20.1 percent a year for four years in a row. But out on Main Street, average household incomes have risen only 1.4 percent a year. CEOs and big investors have been hogging the profits.

    And while the stock market is roaring upward thanks largely to corporate profits earned overseas, 24 million Americans are still out there hunting for full-time jobs, month after month. But our economy is not generating many new jobs. In fact, Congress has just added to unemployment. With the sequester in force, we are going to lose a net of 750,000 jobs this year, according to the Congressional Budget Office.

    This disconnect between Wall Street and Main Street, between profits and wages, between the winnings of the 1% and the stagnation of the 99% – what I call “wedge economics” – has been the prevailing pattern in the American economy for the past three decades. And it has been financially killing the American middle class and stealing the American Dream from average people.

    Right now, “wedge economics” is mangling America’s economic recovery. Anyone who has taken Economics 101 knows that what drives growth is not high stock gains for the 1% (who capture more than half of the capital gains from the market) but the power of mass consumer demand.

    Economists call that the “virtuous circle of growth.” What they mean is that when CEOs share more of corporate profits with their workers and pay higher wages instead of imposing wage freezes, tens of millions of Americans head for Costco or Home Depot or the local car dealer to buy. Their purchases, multiplied by the millions, is what creates the incentives for business to expand, to build new plants, buy new equipment and hire more workers.

    Consumer demand is the essential job creator in the American free enterprise system. Without strong demand, built on an ample supply of good jobs and good pay, businesses simply sit on their money, as they have done for most of the past four years, hoarding $2 trillion in accumulated cash.

    Old-time CEOs like Charlie Wilson, the former head of General Motors, Reginald Jones, the former chief of General Electric, or Frank Abrams, the former boss of Standard Oil of New Jersey, understood that they could drive economic growth by sharing more of the wealth. They considered it their job to take care of all the stakeholders in the corporation, not just shareholders but all the groups with a stake in the company’s success.

    It was the sacred trust of corporate management, as Abrams put it, “to maintain an equitable and working balance among the claims of the various directly affected interest groups…stockholders, employees, customers, and the public at large.” In others words, some profits go to shareholders but another big chunk goes to employees.

    But U.S. business leaders moved away from that idea starting in the 1980s and turned to cutting jobs, holding down wages, and focusing on high profits and even higher CEO pay. In 2011, the top 1% got all the gains from U.S. economic growth and the bottom 99% literally went backwards — they saw their collective incomes fall.

    More broadly, “wedge economics” have brought us very slow economic growth, much slower than under the old business philosophy. We’ve seen ever-deeper recessions, ever-longer jobless recoveries. With lopsided winnings to the top 1%, dominated by CEOs, the drive has gone out of economic growth.

    In fact, economists like Nobel laureate Joseph Stiglitz of Columbia University tell us bluntly that America’s current gaping inequalities of income are bad for economic growth. ”Inequality stifles, restrains and holds back our growth,” Stiglitz asserts. Others agree. The International Monetary Fund has documented that high levels of income equality can be “destructive” to sustained growth and that the best condition for long-term growth is “more equality in the income distribution.”

    In short, what Wall Street is celebrating today may cause joy among the 1%, but unless business shares more of its gains, a booming market spells bad news for average Americans.

    © 2013 BillMoyers.com

    The Sequester’s Hidden Danger

    0

    The sequester is dangerous, but not for the reasons we think. Contrary to what some alarmists predicted, there is little evidence that the automatic, across-the-board cuts to the US budget that went into effect on Friday are causing cataclysmic harm. The stock market has risen slightly to near record heights, and most economists agree that the $85 billion down payment this year on about $1 trillion in cuts over the next ten will not trip the economy into recession. Recent polls, meanwhile, indicate that a large part of the electorate has no opinion on the sequester, which is still poorly understood–making it perhaps less of a political liability for either party than some anticipated.Felix Vallotton

    But what makes the sequester threatening is not that it will plunder the economy in 2013. Rather, it is that these arbitrary cuts are exactly the opposite of what the economy needs both in the short run, and–if the promised $1 trillion in further cuts over ten years is made–in the long term. In the coming months, it will make it difficult for the president to cut the unemployment rate from current levels around 8 percent, a fact that Republicans must enjoy since it reduces their chances of losing the House in 2014, and raises their chances of winning the presidency in 2016 if they can continue to cut spending.

    And the sequester will be painful. Educational and housing subsidies will be cut, as will unemployment insurance and research spending. More than $40 billion will be cut from the defense budget, music to my ears, but not to those who will lose jobs at defense contractors. Above all, claims that economic growth down the road will be spurred by reducing the federal deficit through spending cuts are not credible.

    Indeed, the real danger of the sequester lies in the misguided deficit-cutting mania that created it in the first place. Put in place by Congress with the president’s approval and encouragement in 2011, the idea of automatic sequestration came out of the same obsession with austerity measures that has put much of Europe into recession and prevented the US economic recovery from fulfilling its potential. Deficit reduction has wide support in Washington and its most active promoters are financed by some of the nation’s wealthiest citizens, who argue that it is a far better alternative than asking them to contribute more in taxes. We must cut deficits now, even before we have a full economic recovery, the thinking goes, to deal with rapidly rising healthcare costs that will drive up the government’s Medicare and Medicaid expenses beginning twenty-five years from now.

    This approach to economic policy has no sound basis in either historical experience or current economic analysis. Washington’s austerity economics–the notion that you can induce economic recovery in a weak economy simply by cutting government expenditures–willfully ignores, denies, or declares nonsense the true lessons of the Great Depression, which demonstrated precisely the opposite. More or less since Adam Smith, economists had argued you must increase savings to increase investment, which in turn drove economic growth and produced rising incomes. One way to do this is to get federal deficits down as a percent of GDP. But in the 1930s, it was clear that government efforts to save money had not prevented the global economy from tumbling into severe depression. To the contrary, they helped create the depression of the early 1930s and then a second major downtown in 1937. This is around the time that John Maynard Keynes had the dramatic insight that it wasn’t savings that led to investment but the other way around: more government spending raises incomes and therefore savings, from which more investment is made.

    It is true that Keynesian stimulus was derided by economists beginning in the 1970s. Only monetary stimulus–that is, cutting interest rates–was thought to matter. But now rates have been brought so low that they do far less than hoped. And in truth there has been a growing recognition that monetary policy is not by itself adequate to assure a strong economy. Meantime, a “new” Keynesianism developed among some but by no means all mainstream economists, who support the view that modest government stimulus is sensible. But this general approach is a pallid version of the original and still holds, I think too strongly, that reducing deficits is necessary to assure adequate savings.

    We need not go back to the Great Depression to understand the dangers of austerity and deficit mania. In our own time, the abysmal performance of austerity-bound European economies have demonstrated the same problem. Take the case of Britain. After the recent global economic crisis, David Cameron, Britain’s Conservative Prime Minister, and George Osborne, his absurdly overconfident chancellor of the Exchequer, repudiated Keynes’ central insight. Two years ago, with the British economy just coming out of recession, these men raised taxes and cut social spending in order to reduce the British deficit and, they claimed, enable newly confident businesses to use all that savings to invest and re-charge the economy. It was pure anti-Keynesianism. The chancellor promised that the budget deficit would fall nicely as a percent of gross domestic product. Thus, a path would be cleared for more capital investment by otherwise “crowded out” private companies.

    None of that has come close to happening. Britain is now probably entering its third recession since 2009. With such slow growth, tax revenue is dismal, and the country’s deficit, excluding interest payments, remains the highest, by percentage of GDP, of any European nation. And what of all that promised investment that was predicted? Not only did a chunk of new savings fail to materialize, capital injections in the economy have been weak. They contributed only 0.4 percent to economic growth in 2012, half of the government’s forecast. As for exports, which the government also insisted would rise as the value of the pound fell, the nation’s current account deficit, the excess of its imports (plus investment income) over exports, is now no better than in 2009.

    Despite these dismal results, the British citizenry apparently still think the policies are sensible. They have not thrown Cameron and Osborne out. But what is driving Britain’s growth is consumer spending and government spending, not business investment and exports as the austerity advocates forecast. And consumer spending alone is just not strong enough to produce adequate growth. It is Keynes who was right, not Osborne. Meanwhile, economies in Europe’s southern tier, including Spain, Portugal, Italy, and Greece, are mired in recession.

    These policies are an appalling intellectual failure. Yet our current leaders in Washington seem unable to learn this lesson, even in the face of such stark examples of Britain and other European countries. Though he backed the stimulus in early 2009, Barack Obama had already displayed a sympathy for deficit reduction policies before he took office, and he subsequently appointed the Bowles-Simpson commission to suggest ways to balance the budget as soon as possible. He did not accept their proposals, but the austerity advocates quickly gained the upper hand.

    Many may wonder why it is so easy to renounce the remarkable Keynes. In part, it is because he so deeply challenged Smith’s Invisible Hand itself, that almost religiously held principle that markets themselves are self-adjusting as prices change to make demand and supply equal.

    We all know that austerity economics rules in Europe, but it also rules in the US where the damage done will be considerable if less obvious. Even policymakers who are sympathetic to Keynesianism for the most part propose only moderate stimulus. As a result of Washington’s refusal to raise taxes to cut deficits, the government will not invest adequately in infrastructure, green technologies, public research, pre-k education, and in many other areas of critical need–all in order to meet spurious deficit cutting goals. It also finds expression in a greater willingness to cut needed programs, mostly for the poor, who will suffer as a result. At some point, such mean-spiritedness must take a toll on a nation’s moral confidence. And the budget battles may only just be beginning.

    The economy would have been significantly stronger already had there been not been $1.5 trillion in earlier budget cuts. And it may yet improve once we digest the latest round of cuts. But let’s not mistakenly attribute future improvement in the economy to austerity policies. It will be in spite of them.

    © 2013 NYR Blog

    Mission Unaccomplished: Why the Invasion of Iraq Was the Single Worst Foreign Policy Decision in American History

    0

    I was there. And “there” was nowhere. And nowhere was the place to be if you wanted to see the signs of end times for the American Empire up close. It was the place to be if you wanted to see the madness — and oh yes, it was madness — not filtered through a complacent and sleepy media that made Washington’s war policy seem, if not sensible, at least sane and serious enough. I stood at Ground Zero of what was intended to be the new centerpiece for a Pax Americana in the Greater Middle East.

    Not to put too fine a point on it, but the invasion of Iraq turned out to be a joke. Not for the Iraqis, of course, and not for American soldiers, and not the ha-ha sort of joke either. And here’s the saddest truth of all: on March 20th as we mark the 10th anniversary of the invasion from hell, we still don’t get it. In case you want to jump to the punch line, though, it’s this: by invading Iraq, the U.S. did more to destabilize the Middle East than we could possibly have imagined at the time. And we — and so many others — will pay the price for it for a long, long time.

    The Madness of King George

    It’s easy to forget just how normal the madness looked back then. By 2009, when I arrived in Iraq, we were already at the last-gasp moment when it came to salvaging something from what may yet be seen as the single worst foreign policy decision in American history. It was then that, as a State Department officer assigned to lead two provincial reconstruction teams in eastern Iraq, I first walked into the chicken processing plant in the middle of nowhere.

    “By invading Iraq, the U.S. did more to destabilize the Middle East than we could possibly have imagined at the time. And we — and so many others — will pay the price for it for a long, long time.”

    By then, the U.S. “reconstruction” plan for that country was drowning in rivers of money foolishly spent. As the centerpiece for those American efforts — at least after Plan A, that our invading troops would be greeted with flowers and sweets as liberators, crashed and burned — we had managed to reconstruct nothing of significance. First conceived as a Marshall Plan for the New American Century, six long years later it had devolved into farce.

    In my act of the play, the U.S. spent some $2.2 million dollars to build a huge facility in the boondocks. Ignoring the stark reality that Iraqis had raised and sold chickens locally for some 2,000 years, the U.S. decided to finance the construction of a central processing facility, have the Iraqis running the plant purchase local chickens, pluck them and slice them up with complex machinery brought in from Chicago, package the breasts and wings in plastic wrap, and then truck it all to local grocery stores. Perhaps it was the desert heat, but this made sense at the time, and the plan was supported by the Army, the State Department, and the White House.

    Elegant in conception, at least to us, it failed to account for a few simple things, like a lack of regular electricity, or logistics systems to bring the chickens to and from the plant, or working capital, or… um… grocery stores. As a result, the gleaming $2.2 million plant processed no chickens. To use a few of the catchwords of that moment, it transformed nothing, empowered no one, stabilized and economically uplifted not a single Iraqi. It just sat there empty, dark, and unused in the middle of the desert. Like the chickens, we were plucked.

    In keeping with the madness of the times, however, the simple fact that the plant failed to meet any of its real-world goals did not mean the project wasn’t a success. In fact, the factory was a hit with the U.S. media. After all, for every propaganda-driven visit to the plant, my group stocked the place with hastily purchased chickens, geared up the machinery, and put on a dog-and-pony, er, chicken-and-rooster, show.

    In the dark humor of that moment, we christened the place the Potemkin Chicken Factory. In between media and VIP visits, it sat in the dark, only to rise with the rooster’s cry each morning some camera crew came out for a visit. Our factory was thus considered a great success. Robert Ford, then at the Baghdad Embassy and now America’s rugged shadow ambassador to Syria, said his visit was the best day out he enjoyed in Iraq. General Ray Odierno, then commanding all U.S. forces in Iraq, sent bloggers and camp followers to view the victory project. Some of the propaganda, which proclaimed that “teaching Iraqis methods to flourish on their own gives them the ability to provide their own stability without needing to rely on Americans,” is still online (including this charming image of American-Iraqi mentorship, a particular favorite of mine).

    We weren’t stupid, mind you. In fact, we all felt smart and clever enough to learn to look the other way. The chicken plant was a funny story at first, a kind of insider’s joke you all think you know the punch line to. Hey, we wasted some money, but $2.2 million was a small amount in a war whose costs will someday be toted up in the trillions. Really, at the end of the day, what was the harm?

    The harm was this: we wanted to leave Iraq (and Afghanistan) stable to advance American goals. We did so by spending our time and money on obviously pointless things, while most Iraqis lacked access to clean water, regular electricity, and medical or hospital care. Another State Department official in Iraq wrote in his weekly summary to me, “At our project ribbon-cuttings we are typically greeted now with a cursory ‘thank you,’ followed by a long list of crushing needs for essential services such as water and power.” How could we help stabilize Iraq when we acted like buffoons? As one Iraqi told me, “It is like I am standing naked in a room with a big hat on my head. Everyone comes in and helps put flowers and ribbons on my hat, but no one seems to notice that I am naked.”

    By 2009, of course, it should all have been so obvious. We were no longer inside the neocon dream of unrivaled global superpowerdom, just mired in what happened to it. We were a chicken factory in the desert that no one wanted.

    Time Travel to 2003

    Anniversaries are times for reflection, in part because it’s often only with hindsight that we recognize the most significant moments in our lives. On the other hand, on anniversaries it’s often hard to remember what it was really like back when it all began. Amid the chaos of the Middle East today, it’s easy, for instance, to forget what things looked like as 2003 began. Afghanistan, it appeared, had been invaded and occupied quickly and cleanly, in a way the Soviets (the British, the ancient Greeks…) could never have dreamed of. Iran was frightened, seeing the mighty American military on its eastern border and soon to be on the western one as well, and was ready to deal. Syria was controlled by the stable thuggery of Bashar al-Assad and relations were so good that the U.S. was rendering terror suspects to his secret prisons for torture.

    For decades to come, the U.S. will have a big enough military to ensure that our decline is slow, bloody, ugly, and reluctant, if inevitable. One day, however, even the drones will have to land.

    Most of the rest of the Middle East was tucked in for a long sleep with dictators reliable enough to maintain stability. Libya was an exception, though predictions were that before too long Muammar Qaddafi would make some sort of deal. (He did.) All that was needed was a quick slash into Iraq to establish a permanent American military presence in the heart of Mesopotamia. Our future garrisons there could obviously oversee things, providing the necessary muscle to swat down any future destabilizing elements. It all made so much sense to the neocon visionaries of the early Bush years. The only thing that Washington couldn’t imagine was this: that the primary destabilizing element would be us.

    Indeed, its mighty plan was disintegrating even as it was being dreamed up. In their lust for everything on no terms but their own, the Bush team missed a diplomatic opportunity with Iran that might have rendered today’s saber rattling unnecessary, even as Afghanistan fell apart and Iraq imploded. As part of the breakdown, desperate men, blindsided by history, turned up the volume on desperate measures: torture, secret gulags, rendition, drone killings, extra-constitutional actions at home. The sleaziest of deals were cut to try to salvage something, including ignoring the A.Q. Khan network of Pakistani nuclear proliferation in return for a cheesy Condi Rice-Qaddafi photo-op rapprochement in Libya.

    Inside Iraq, the forces of Sunni-Shia sectarian conflict had been unleashed by the U.S. invasion. That, in turn, was creating the conditions for a proxy war between the U.S. and Iran, similar to the growing proxy war between Israel and Iran inside Lebanon (where another destabilizing event, the U.S.-sanctioned Israeli invasion of 2006, followed in hand). None of this has ever ended. Today, in fact, that proxy war has simply found a fresh host, Syria, with multiple powers using “humanitarian aid” to push and shove their Sunni and Shia avatars around.

    Staggering neocon expectations, Iran emerged from the U.S. decade in Iraq economically more powerful, with sanctions-busting trade between the two neighbors now valued at some $5 billion a year and still growing. In that decade, the U.S. also managed to remove one of Iran’s strategic counterbalances, Saddam Hussein, replacing him with a government run by Nouri al-Malaki, who had once found asylum in Tehran.

    Meanwhile, Turkey is now engaged in an open war with the Kurds of northern Iraq. Turkey is, of course, part of NATO, so imagine the U.S. government sitting by silently while Germany bombed Poland. To complete the circle, Iraq’s prime minister recently warned that a victory for Syria’s rebels will spark sectarian wars in his own country and will create a new haven for al-Qaeda which would further destabilize the region.

    Meanwhile, militarily burnt out, economically reeling from the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan, and lacking any moral standing in the Middle East post-Guantanamo and Abu Ghraib, the U.S. sat on its hands as the regional spark that came to be called the Arab Spring flickered out, to be replaced by yet more destabilization across the region. And even that hasn’t stopped Washington from pursuing the latest version of the (now-nameless) global war on terror into ever-newer regions in need of destabilization.

    Having noted the ease with which a numbed American public patriotically looked the other way while our wars followed their particular paths to hell, our leaders no longer blink at the thought of sending American drones and special operations forces ever farther afield, most notably ever deeper into Africa, creating from the ashes of Iraq a frontier version of the state of perpetual war George Orwell once imagined for his dystopian novel 1984. And don’t doubt for a second that there is a direct path from the invasion of 2003 and that chicken plant to the dangerous and chaotic place that today passes for our American world.

    Happy Anniversary

    On this 10th anniversary of the Iraq War, Iraq itself remains, by any measure, a dangerous and unstable place. Even the usually sunny Department of State advises American travelers to Iraq that U.S. citizens “remain at risk for kidnapping… [as] numerous insurgent groups, including Al Qaida, remain active…” and notes that “State Department guidance to U.S. businesses in Iraq advises the use of Protective Security Details.”

    In the bigger picture, the world is also a far more dangerous place than it was in 2003. Indeed, for the State Department, which sent me to Iraq to witness the follies of empire, the world has become ever more daunting. In 2003, at that infamous “mission accomplished” moment, only Afghanistan was on the list of overseas embassies that were considered “extreme danger posts.” Soon enough, however, Iraq and Pakistan were added. Today, Yemen and Libya, once boring but secure outposts for State’s officials, now fall into the same category.

    Other places once considered safe for diplomats and their families such as Syria and Mali have been evacuated and have no American diplomatic presence at all. Even sleepy Tunisia, once calm enough that the State Department had its Arabic language school there, is now on reduced staff with no diplomatic family members resident. Egypt teeters.

    The Iranian leadership watched carefully as the American imperial version of Iraq collapsed, concluded that Washington was a paper tiger, backed away from initial offers to talk over contested issues, and instead (at least for a while) doubled-down on achieving nuclear breakout capacity, aided by the past work of that same A.Q. Khan network. North Korea, another A.Q. Khan beneficiary, followed the same pivot ever farther from Washington, while it became a genuine nuclear power. Its neighbor China pursued its own path of economic dominance, while helping to “pay” for the Iraq War by becoming the number-one holder of U.S. debt among foreign governments. It now owns more than 21% of the U.S. debt held overseas.

    And don’t put away the joke book just yet. Subbing as apologist-in-chief for an absent George W. Bush and the top officials of his administration on this 10th anniversary, former British Prime Minister Tony Blair recently reminded us that there is more on the horizon. Conceding that he had “long since given up trying to persuade people Iraq was the right decision,” Blair added that new crises are looming. “You’ve got one in Syria right now, you’ve got one in Iran to come,” he said. “We are in the middle of this struggle, it is going to take a generation, it is going to be very arduous and difficult. But I think we are making a mistake, a profound error, if we think we can stay out of that struggle.”

    Think of his comment as a warning. Having somehow turned much of Islam into a foe, Washington has essentially assured itself of never-ending crises that it stands no chance whatsoever of winning. In this sense, Iraq was not an aberration, but the historic zenith and nadir for a way of thinking that is only now slowing waning. For decades to come, the U.S. will have a big enough military to ensure that our decline is slow, bloody, ugly, and reluctant, if inevitable. One day, however, even the drones will have to land.

    And so, happy 10th anniversary, Iraq War! A decade after the invasion, a chaotic and unstable Middle East is the unfinished legacy of our invasion. I guess the joke is on us after all, though no one is laughing.

    © 2013 Peter Van Buren

    Obama Administration Claims Right to “Lawfully” Assassinate Citizens within the US

    0

    justice

    According to the Obama administration, the president has the right to assassinate American citizens within the United States, without charges or any legal process. This claim, contained in a letter from Attorney General Eric Holder, constitutes the most far-reaching abrogation of constitutional rights and is aimed at establishing the pseudo-legal framework for military rule.

    Holder’s letter, the first explicit assertion of a power to extrajudicially kill Americans in their homes, was in response to a question delivered to the Obama administration from Republican Senator Rand Paul. In testimony before the Senate Judiciary Committee on Wednesday, Holder reiterated and expanded on this position, declaring that the authorization to use military force in the “war on terror” extends to the United States.

    In the letter to Paul, Holder responds to a question as to whether “the President has the power to authorize lethal force, such as a drone strike, against a US citizen on US soil, and without trial.”

    Holder’s answers are a series of evasions and absurd rationalizations. He repeats the statement made repeatedly by the administration before, that the “US government has not carried out drone strikes in the United States and has no intention to do so.” He adds that “as a matter of policy”–that is, not as a matter of legality–“we reject the use of military force where well-established law enforcement authorities in this country provide the best means for incapacitating a terrorist threat.”

    In other words, under circumstances where the executive branch and military decide that police action is not the “best means” of responding to an undefined threat, the military will be deployed to kill people at will.

    Holder then declares that under undefined “extraordinary circumstances,” the president could “authorize the military to use lethal force within the territory of the United States.”

    As two “examples” of such circumstances, Holder cites the attack on Pearl Harbor in 1941 and the attacks of September 11, 2001.

    The comparisons are absurd. Pearl Harbor involved a full-scale attack by the Japanese military on Hawaii. At issue, however, is not a response to a military invasion, but the claim that the administration has the right to assassinate American citizens in the United States who are not engaged in any hostile actions. The administration has already killed at least three US citizens abroad, including Anwar al-Awlaki and his 16-year-old son.

    As for September 11, the circumstances behind these attacks have yet to be explained, but involved a number of individuals who were being followed by US intelligence agencies.

    Holder’s letter is a sweeping declaration of the ability to deploy the military in the United States in response to an “emergency” connected to some past or allegedly future attack. Under such conditions, the military would be given unrestricted powers and the Bill of Rights rendered a dead letter.

    Holder expanded his remarks in the course of testimony before the Senate Judiciary Committee on Wednesday, in which the bipartisan support for the assault on democratic rights was on display.

    In the course of the testimony, senators from both parties largely avoided the issue or praised Holder and the administration. Democratic Senator Dianne Feinstein, who is also the chair of the Senate Intelligence Committee, declared that the legal opinions prepared by the administration on assassinating US citizens were “very thoughtful, very impressive” and urged that all of them be made available to the judiciary committee. She added that deploying military force within the United States against US citizens was “something we have to grapple with.”

    The greatest praise for Holder came from Senator Lindsey Graham, Republican from South Carolina, who is close to the military and intelligence apparatus. Graham lauded the administration’s efforts to “defend the homeland,” singling out the drone assassination program in particular. Then the following exchange took place:

    Graham: It is a longstanding proposition in American law that an American citizen who joins forces with our enemies can be considered an enemy combatant, do you agree with that?

    Holder: Yes.

    Graham: Hypothetically, if there are Patriot missile batteries around this capitol and other key government infrastructure, to protect the capitol from an attack, it would be lawful for those batteries to launch, is that correct?

    Holder: Yes…

    Graham: When we say that Congress gave every administration the authorization to use military force against Al Qaeda, we didn’t exempt the homeland, did we?

    Holder: No, I don’t think we did…

    The conclusion: Anyone declared by the president to be an “enemy combatant,” including American citizens in the United States, can be summarily executed without any judicial review.

    In referring to American citizens who have “joined forces” with the enemy, Graham cited individuals who supported Germany in the Second World War, with which Holder readily agreed. Again, the historical comparison is absurd. Even so, the traditional response of the state under such conditions is to try individuals for treason, in which their alleged crimes must be proven. Now the government asserts the right to act as judge, jury and executioner.

    Graham’s introduction of the hypothetical deployment of Patriot missiles by the military around the capitol and other critical institutions makes clear that what is being contemplated is the full militarization of American society.

    There were a number of other significant exchanges. Texas Senator Ted Cruz, who like Paul is a right-wing libertarian and Tea Party-backed Republican, asked Holder whether the president had the constitutional authority to assassinate an American citizen in the United States with a drone while that person was “sitting quietly in a cafe.”

    On four occasions, Holder said such action would not be “appropriate,” deliberately avoiding a statement that it would not be legal. In response to repeated questioning from Cruz, Holder finally indicated that his reference to such action not being appropriate should be translated as a “no”–apparently suggesting that it would not be constitutional.

    This statement, however, was conditioned on the premise that the person involved did not pose an “imminent” threat. The requirement of “imminence” is also included in the administration’s white paper on assassinating US citizens abroad; however, this is essentially meaningless. The document states that imminence “does not require the United States to have clear evidence that a specific attack on US persons and interests will take place in the immediate future.”

    Senator Chuck Grassley, a Republican from Iowa, asked Holder, “Do you believe Congress has the constitutional authority to pass a law prohibiting the president from using US drones against US citizens?”

    Holder replied that in his view such a law “would not be constitutional” as it would “run contrary to the Article II powers” of the executive branch–that is to say, the section relating to the president’s authority as commander-in-chief of the military.

    Politicians of both parties are participating in a conspiracy against the most basic democratic rights. Earlier this week, the Senate Intelligence Committee voted 12 to 3 in favor of the nomination of John Brennan–the individual most closely associated with the assassination program–to head the CIA. All Democrats voted in favor.

    Holder’s comments aroused almost no comment from the American media. On the evening news Wednesday, the story was almost entirely buried, with only brief reference to a filibuster stunt carried out by Paul, a right-wing libertarian Republican, against the nomination of Brennan. The abrogation of the Bill of Rights provokes little more than a few raised eyebrows.

    The essential target of these measures is the emergence of domestic opposition within the United States to the policies of the financial aristocracy that controls both big-business parties. Under conditions of deepening polarization, and as the ruling class is implementing measures that are overwhelmingly opposed by the vast majority of the population, the government is actively preparing dictatorial forms of rule.

    Quantitative Easing (QE) for the People: Comedian Grillo’s Populist Plan for Italy

    0

    Beppe-Grillo-e1361568756286

    Default on the public debt, nationalization of the banks, and a citizen dividend could actually save the Italian economy.

    Comedian Beppe Grillo was surprised himself when his Five Star Movement got 8.7 million votes in the Italian general election of February 24-25th.  His movement is now the biggest single party in the chamber of deputies, says The Guardian, which makes him “a kingmaker in a hung parliament.”

    Grillo’s is the party of “no.” In a candidacy based on satire, he organized an annual “V‑Day Celebration,” the “V” standing for vaffanculo (“f–k off”). He rejects the status quo–all the existing parties and their monopoly control of politics, jobs, and financing–and seeks a referendum on all international treaties, including NATO membership, free trade agreements and the Euro.

    “If we get into parliament,” says Grillo, “we would bring the old system down, not because we would enjoy doing so but because the system is rotten.” Critics fear, and supporters hope, that if his party succeeds, it could break the Euro system.

    But being against everything, says Mike Whitney in Counterpunch, is not a platform:

    To govern, one needs ideas and a strategy for implementing those ideas. Grillo’s team has neither. They are defined more in terms of the things they are against than things they are for. It’s fine to want to “throw the bums out”, but that won’t put people back to work or boost growth or end the slump. Without a coherent plan to govern, M5S could end up in the political trash heap, along with their right-wing predecessors, the Tea Party.

    Steve Colatrella, who lives in Italy and also has an article in Counterpunch on the Grillo phenomenon, has a different take on the surprise win. He says Grillo does have a platform of positive proposals. Besides rejecting all the existing parties and treaties, Grillo’s program includes the following:

    • unilateral default on the public debt;
    • nationalization of the banks; and
    • a guaranteed “citizenship” income of 1000 euros a month.

    It is a platform that could actually work. Austerity has been tested for a decade in the Eurozone and has failed, while the proposals in Grillo’s plan have been tested in other countries and have succeeded.

    Default: Lessons from Iceland and South America

    Default on the public debt has been pulled off quite successfully in Iceland, Argentina, Ecuador, and Russia, among other countries. Whitney cites a clip from Grillo’s blog suggesting that this is also the way out for Italy:

    The public debt has not been growing in recent years because of too much expenditure . . . Between 1980 and 2011, spending was lower than the tax revenue by 484 billion (thus we have been really virtuous) but the interest payments (on the debt of 2,141 billion) that we had to pay in that period have made us poor. In the last 20 years, GDP has been growing slowly, while the debt has exploded.

    . . . [S]peculators . . . are contributing to price falls so as to bring about higher interest rates. It’s the usurer’s technique. Thus the debt becomes an opportunity to maximize earnings in the market at the expense of the nation. . . . If financial powerbrokers use speculation to increase their earnings and force governments to pay the highest possible interest rates, the result is recession for the State that’s in debt as well as their loss of sovereignty.

    . . . There are alternatives. These are being put into effect by some countries in South America and by Iceland. . . . The risk is that we are going to reach default in any case with the devaluation of the debt, and the Nation impoverished and on its knees. [Beppe Grillo blog]

    Bank Nationalization: China Shows What Can Be Done

    Grillo’s second proposal, nationalizing the banks, has also been tested and proven elsewhere, most notably in China. In an April 2012 article in The American Conservative titled “China’s Rise, America’s Fall,” Ron Unz observes:

    During the three decades to 2010, China achieved perhaps the most rapid sustained rate of economic development in the history of the human species, with its real economy growing almost 40-fold between 1978 and 2010. In 1978, America’s economy was 15 times larger, but according to most international estimates, China is now set to surpass America’s total economic output within just another few years.

    According to Eamonn Fingleton in In The Jaws of the Dragon (2009), the fountain that feeds this tide is a strong public banking sector:

    Capitalism’s triumph in China has been proclaimed in countless books in recent years. . . . But . . . the higher reaches of its economy remain comprehensively controlled in a way that is the antithesis of everything we associate with Western capitalism.  The key to this control is the Chinese banking system . . . [which is] not only state-owned but, as in other East Asian miracle economies, functions overtly as a major tool of the central government’s industrial policy.

    Guaranteed Basic Income–Not Just Welfare

    Grillo’s third proposal, a guaranteed basic income, is not just an off-the-wall, utopian idea either. A national dividend has been urged by the “Social Credit” school of monetary reform for nearly a century, and the U.S. Basic Income Guarantee Network has held a dozen annual conferences. They feel that a guaranteed basic income is the key to keeping modern, highly productive economies humming.

    In Europe, the proposal is being pursued not just by Grillo’s southern European party but by the sober Swiss of the north.  An initiative to establish a new federal law for an unconditional basic income was formally introduced in Switzerland in April 2012. The idea consists of giving to all citizens a monthly income that is neither means-tested nor work-related. Under the Swiss referendum system of direct democracy, if the initiative gathers more than 100,000 signatures before October 2013, the Federal Assembly is required to look into it.

    Colatrella does not say where Grillo plans to get the money for Italy’s guaranteed basic income, but in Social Credit theory, it would simply be issued outright by the government; and Grillo, who has an accounting background, evidently agrees with that approach to funding. He said in a presentation available on YouTube:

    The Bank of Italy a private join-stock company, ownership comprises 10 insurance companies, 10 foundations, and 10 banks, that are all joint-stock companies . . .  They issue the money out of thin air and lend it to us. It’s the State who is supposed to issue it. We need money to work. The State should say: “There’s scarcity of money? I’ll issue some and put it into circulation. Money is plentiful? I’ll withdraw and burn some of it.” . . . Money is needed to keep prices stable and to let us work.

    The Key to a Thriving Economy

    Major C.H. Douglas, the thought leader of the Social Credit movement, argued that the economy routinely produces more goods and services than consumers have the money to purchase, because workers collectively do not get paid enough to cover the cost of the things they make. This is true because of external costs such as interest paid to banks, and because some portion of the national income is stashed in savings accounts, investment accounts, and under mattresses rather than spent on the GDP.

    To fill what Social Crediters call “the gap,” so that “demand” rises to meet “supply,” additional money needs to be gotten into the circulating money supply. Douglas recommended doing it with a national dividend for everyone, an entitlement by “grace” rather than “works,” something that was necessary just to raise purchasing power enough to cover the products on the market.

    In the 1930s and 1940s, critics of Social Credit called it “funny money” and said it would merely inflate the money supply. The critics prevailed, and the Social Credit solution has not had much chance to be tested. But the possibilities were demonstrated in New Zealand during the Great Depression, when a state housing project was funded with credit issued by the Reserve Bank of New Zealand, the nationalized central bank. According to New Zealand commentator Kerry Bolton, this one measure was sufficient to resolve 75% of unemployment in the midst of the Great Depression.

    Bolton notes that this was achieved without causing inflation.  When new money is used to create new goods and services, supply rises along with demand and prices remain stable; but the “demand” has to come first. No business owner will invest in more capacity or production without first seeing a demand. No demand, no new jobs and no economic expansion.

    The Need to Restore Economic Sovereignty

    The money for a guaranteed basic income could be created by a nationalized central bank in the same way that the Reserve Bank of New Zealand did it, and that central bank “quantitative easing” (QE) is created out of nothing on a computer screen today.  The problem with today’s QE is that it has not gotten money into the pockets of consumers. The money has gotten–and can get–no further than the reserve accounts of banks, as explained here and here. A dividend paid directly to consumers would be “quantitative easing” for the people.

    A basic income guarantee paid for with central bank credit would not be “welfare” but would eliminate the need for welfare. It would be social security for all, replacing social security payments, unemployment insurance, and welfare taxes. It could also replace much of the consumer debt that is choking the private economy, growing exponentially at usurious compound interest rates.

    As Grillo points out, it is not the cost of government but the cost of money itself that has bankrupted Italy. If the country wishes to free itself from the shackles of debt and restore the prosperity it once had, it will need to take back its monetary sovereignty and issue its own money, either directly or through its own nationalized central bank. If Grillo’s party comes to power and follows through with his platform, those shackles on the Italian economy might actually be released.

    Ellen Brown is an attorney and the author of eleven books, including Web of Debt: The Shocking Truth About Our Money System and How We Can Break Free. Her websites are webofdebt.com and ellenbrown.com. She is also chairman of the Public Banking Institute. Details of the June 2013 Public Banking Institute conference are here.

    Hidden Video: Cops Nationwide Say: “You’re On Your Own”

    0
    Mac Slavo
    March 7th, 2013
    SHTFplan.com

    Read by 26,944 people

    The investigative journalists at Project Veritas are at it again, and this time they visited local police departments across the nation and asked law enforcement officials what residents should do if they are threatened by a break-in, armed robbery or other violent crime.

    Most of the localities visited, like New York and New Jersey, have restrictive gun laws, so you can imagine that the answers were… quite creative (and not very encouraging).

    What happens between the time I call 9-1-1 and the time you get there?

    Law Enforcement Officer — Bronxville, NY: “It takes a couple minutes to get there.”

    Project Veritas: “OK, in the two minutes, though, what do i do?”

    LEO: “In the two minutes what do you do?”

    PV: “Yeah:

    (awkward pause)

    LEO: “That’s a good question.”

    PV: “Basically, in just that two minutes I’m on my own?”

    LEO: “Yeah.”

    LEO: “Look on the internet about how to get a gun permit.”

    PV: “How long does that take to get?”

    LEO: “In New York? About a year.”

    Via Lew Rockwell:


    (Watch at Youtube)

    Here are some other suggested self defense techniques you can apply in the event your life is threatened and police are minutes away:

    “It’s 2013. It’s the United Stated of America. You lock your doors and hope nothing happens.”

    “That’s why we have call boxes. That’s why we have safe zones. That’s why we have the whistles.”

    “Lock yourself in a room and call us.”

    “Just make noise. I would just make noise. It generally scares people off.”

    “I would scream. Let somebody know I was there.”

    “Lock yourself in a bedroom. Start yelling and screaming, so maybe the guy breaking hears that somebody’s home and runs out the door.”

    “If you pick up a bat and start hitting somebody if he comes in your home. You’re allowed to do that.”

    “If you just take your cell phone out, put it up to your ear, and call 9-1-1, a lot of times that makes people think twice before they do something.”

    “You could leave the home if you can get to an exit. You know, you could leave the home.”

    “Put some kind of two-by-four stick or something in the window so you can jam it up.”

    “In case of emergency, I’m gonna do what I have to do. Go get some bleach. Go get some ammonia.”

    … “[you’re on your own] unless you have a dog”

    “If a man enters your home, all bets are off.”

    “You’re just asking questions that I can’t answer for you.”

    According to a recent city-by-city response time report at American Police Beat, it takes police in major metropolitan areas about 10 minutes to respond to an emergency 9-1-1 call. And in some areas, police response times are so slow that neighbors have been forced to organize themselves into patrols.

    If you live in a state where it’s still legal to carry a personal self defense firearm, you can feel comfortable being “on your own.”

    If not, you may want to head down to your local hardware store and pick up a two-by-four, some bleach, and a whistle.

    Author: Mac Slavo
    Views: Read by 26,944 people
    Date: March 7th, 2013
    Website: www.SHTFplan.com

    Copyright Information: Copyright SHTFplan and Mac Slavo. This content may be freely reproduced in full or in part in digital form with full attribution to the author and a link to www.shtfplan.com. Please contact us for permission to reproduce this content in other media formats.

    Money for the People: Comedian Grillo’s Populist Plan for Italy

    0

    Money for the People: Comedian Grillo’s Populist Plan for Italy

    Email this item Email   Print this item Print   Share this item... Share
    Posted on Mar 7, 2013
    ell brown (CC BY 2.0)

    By Ellen Brown, Web of Debt

    This piece first appeared at Web of Debt.

    Comedian Beppe Grillo was surprised himself when his Five Star Movement got 8.7 million votes in the Italian general election of February 24-25th. His movement is now the biggest single party in the chamber of deputies, says The Guardian, which makes him “a kingmaker in a hung parliament.” 

    Grillo’s is the party of “no.” In a candidacy based on satire, he organized an annual “V Day Celebration,” the “V” standing for vaffanculo (“f–k off”). He rejects the status quo–all the existing parties and their monopoly control of politics, jobs, and financing–and seeks a referendum on all international treaties, including NATO membership, free trade agreements and the Euro.

    “If we get into parliament,” says Grillo, “we would bring the old system down, not because we would enjoy doing so but because the system is rotten.” Critics fear, and supporters hope, that if his party succeeds, it could break the Euro system.

    But being against everything, says Mike Whitney in Counterpunch, is not a platform:

    To govern, one needs ideas and a strategy for implementing those ideas. Grillo’s team has neither. They are defined more in terms of the things they are against than things they are for. It’s fine to want to “throw the bums out”, but that won’t put people back to work or boost growth or end the slump. Without a coherent plan to govern, M5S could end up in the political trash heap, along with their right-wing predecessors, the Tea Party.

    Steve Colatrella, who lives in Italy and also has an article in Counterpunch on the Grillo phenomenon, has a different take on the surprise win. He says Grillo does have a platform of positive proposals. Besides rejecting all the existing parties and treaties, Grillo’s program includes the following:

    – unilateral default on the public debt;
    – nationalization of the banks; and
    – a guaranteed “citizenship” income of 1000 euros a month.

    It is a platform that could actually work. Austerity has been tested for a decade in the Eurozone and has failed, while the proposals in Grillo’s plan have been tested in other countries and have succeeded.

    Default: Lessons from Iceland and South America

    Default on the public debt has been pulled off quite successfully in Iceland, Argentina, Ecuador, and Russia, among other countries. Whitney cites a clip from Grillo’s blog suggesting that this is also the way out for Italy:

    The public debt has not been growing in recent years because of too much expenditure . . . Between 1980 and 2011, spending was lower than the tax revenue by 484 billion (thus we have been really virtuous) but the interest payments (on the debt of 2,141 billion) that we had to pay in that period have made us poor. In the last 20 years, GDP has been growing slowly, while the debt has exploded.

    . . . [S]peculators . . . are contributing to price falls so as to bring about higher interest rates. It’s the usurer’s technique. Thus the debt becomes an opportunity to maximize earnings in the market at the expense of the nation. . . . If financial powerbrokers use speculation to increase their earnings and force governments to pay the highest possible interest rates, the result is recession for the State that’s in debt as well as their loss of sovereignty.

    . . . There are alternatives. These are being put into effect by some countries in South America and by Iceland. . . . The risk is that we are going to reach default in any case with the devaluation of the debt, and the Nation impoverished and on its knees. [Beppe Grillo blog]

    1 2 3 NEXT PAGE >>>

    Get truth delivered to
    your inbox every week.

    Previous item: Venezuela and the Middle East After Chavez



    New and Improved Comments

    If you have trouble leaving a comment, review this help page. Still having problems? Let us know. If you find yourself moderated, take a moment to review our comment policy.

    Please enable JavaScript to view the comments powered by Disqus.

    Bradley Manning: The Conscience of America

    0

    Pfc. Bradley Manning last week explained how and more importantly, why, he leaked military and government documents. As Ratner frames it: ‘He saw wrongdoing and he acted.’ (Credit: Reuters)

    “I believed that if the general public, especially the American public, had access to the information… this could spark a domestic debate on the role of the military and our foreign policy in general…” –Pfc. Bradley Manning in his plea statement, February 28th, 2013

    This past Thursday, I was among a handful of individuals seated in the small windowless room at the military court facility in Fort Meade, Maryland, where Private First Class Bradley Manning would confess as the source of the largest leak of classified information in history. 

    Sitting in his dark blue full military uniform, Private Manning responded thoughtfully each time the judge addressed him, as he prepared to read aloud a 35-page statement that precisely detailed his actions and motivations for each of 10 charges. But as I witnessed this momentous occurrence, I was struck by a glaring inconsistency: the young soldier I saw in front of me — poised, resolute — bore absolutely no resemblance to his common depictions in the media from the last three years.  
     
    For over 1000 days, Private Manning has been held in military detention, in Iraq, Kuwait, Quantico, Virginia and Leavenworth, Kansas. Reports from these facilities and the media depicted Manning as unstable, depressed, weak, and worse. While imprisoned, he has endured some of the worst treatment imaginable at the hands of his own government, notably characterized by the UN special rapporteur for torture as “cruel, inhuman, and degrading,” possibly amounting to torture. Worse yet, this abuse comes in response to actions which Manning believed, and continues to believe, were in the service of both his country and international human rights law. Given all that he has endured, if the characterizations about his mental state were accurate, it would hardly come as a surprise. 

    Yet, facing life in prison, possibly execution (which the government says it will not request), and all but sealing his fate for at least a lengthy prison term by his guilty admission to 10 of 22 charges against him, Bradley Manning exhibited calm, collection, great intelligence and, yet again, incredible bravery. In fact, if there was any room for doubt about Manning acting from a powerful moral compass, and representing the best and bravest of our military, the plea into which Manning entered must remove it. 

    The last 10 years have brought to light egregious acts committed by U.S. soldiers who, when exposed, cower under the defense of “just following orders,” or claim to have been influenced by institutional culture. Yet, remarkably, at just 22 years of age, a heroic young man began exposing the worst of this culture not to harm the country, but to better it. He saw wrongdoing and he acted.

    Over the course of nearly two hours, Private Manning detailed with startling clarity his precise motivations for each leak. On the Iraq War Logs and Afghan War Logs, he expressed his shock and dismay at the rampant use of targeted killings as a conflict-resolution tactic. On the Reykjavik 13 cable: the world should know of the U.S. and U.K.’s bullying tactics against Iceland to accept austerity measures in the wake of the global financial meltdown. On the Iraqi police’s arrests and disappearances of anti-corruption leafleters: that U.S. should not support those stifling democratic processes in Iraq. On the Guantanamo detainee files: the Obama administration’s stance is two-faced, claiming on the one hand to want to close the prison, yet on the other, knowingly holding innocent and low-level prisoners. On the State Department cable leak: the so-called “leader of the free world” engaged in “seemingly criminal activity” via backdoor deals is wrong and hypocritical. And on the most famous of his leaks, the “Collateral Murder” video: the soldiers’ “bloodlust” as they wantonly shot Reuters journalists whom they had mistaken for insurgents from an apache helicopter, along with the ensuing cover-up must be open to public review.

    And though the words imply powerful moral and ethical motivations for the actions, Manning did not allow for any ambiguity regarding his ownership of the leaks. Toward the end of his statement, Manning added, “the decisions that I made to send documents and information to [Wikileaks] were my own decisions, and I take full responsibility…”

    One might question why Private Manning would make such a naked admission of guilt. To this, it should be stated clearly that the plea into which he entered does not function in the same way as those in civilian court: as a deal with a prosecutor to confess to lesser charges for leniency in sentencing. On the contrary, Manning’s plea, actually designated a “naked plea” in colloquial terms, not only leaves the door open for the U.S. government to pursue the remaining 12 charges against him — charges which, ridiculously, include “aiding the enemy” — but provide them with ammunition in the form of his confession statement, should they decide to do so. The implications of such an action are unsurprising given Private Manning’s record: simply that his commitment to placing the truth into the public record is a priority that exceeds concern for his personal well-being.

    Unfortunately for Private Manning, he faces an administration that seems intent on criminalizing every conceivable act of whistleblowing, in effect deleting its vital function from our democratic system. Not only has the Obama Administration pursued a greater number of whistleblowers under the Espionage Act than all previous administrations combined, but it has recently announced that Private Manning’s plea will have no bearing on its pursuit of the remaining charges.

    The sad irony in Private Manning’s case is that while the Obama Administration throws the book at him, even accuses him of aiding the enemy by exposing great wrongs in U.S. foreign policy, he actually serves as one of the most redeeming examples of service our country could ask for. The last 10 years have brought to light egregious acts committed by U.S. soldiers who, when exposed, cower under the defense of “just following orders,” or claim to have been influenced by institutional culture. Yet, remarkably, at just 22 years of age, a heroic young man began exposing the worst of this culture not to harm the country, but to better it. He saw wrongdoing and he acted.

    In processing these actions another quote comes to mind:

    “I felt that as an American citizen, as a responsible citizen, I could no longer cooperate in concealing this information from the American public. I did this clearly at my own jeopardy and I am prepared to answer to all the consequences of this decision.”

    No, these are not the words of Private Manning; they were spoken by Daniel Ellsberg on June 28, 1971 upon his admission to leaking the Pentagon Papers to the press.

    The fact that these words ring as true now, in Private Manning’s current circumstance, as when they were spoken, is no coincidence. Daniel Ellsberg too was maligned by many at the time of his confession. Now history regards his action as a profound contribution to the public good. There is little doubt that Bradley Manning’s contributions will be regarded with the same heroism in due time. 

    Bradley Manning is being punished for failing to follow authority. Yet, from a very young age, he realized an unshakable moral and ethical imperative to answer to a higher authority than his superiors: the Constitution, and the rule of law.

    Hopefully, Bradley Manning’s statement will someday be read in classrooms all across the country as example of the duty each of us has to act in the face of criminality and evil. Hopefully, he will be free to add to the discussion, remark on his terrible ordeal and be recognized as the hero he is. But no matter how long he is imprisoned, we all must recognize that to lock him up for even a day is to lock up the conscience of our nation.

    Jon Stewart Praises Rand Paul’s Filibuster of Brennan Nomination

    0

    Jon Stewart Praises Rand Paul’s Filibuster of Brennan Nomination

    Email this item Email   Print this item Print   Share this item... Share
    Posted on Mar 7, 2013

    On “The Daily Show” on Wednesday night, host Jon Stewart applauded the efforts of Sen. Rand Paul’s epic “old-school” style filibuster of the nomination of John Brennan to head the Central Intelligence Agency. The Kentucky Republican, who ended his talking filibuster after nearly 13 hours on the Senate floor, made his stand Wednesday after the Obama administration suggested it could use drone strikes to kill American citizens on U.S. soil in “extraordinary circumstances.”

    “So Senator Rand Paul, to draw a little attention to the issue of the execution of executive executions, executed the old-school filibuster,” Stewart said. “I mean, he is out there talking. This isn’t one of these, ‘eh, I’m not going to do anything.’ He is using the filibuster the way it is meant to be used.”

    He added, “I can’t say I agree with Rand Paul about everything, but as issues go, drone oversight is one certainly worth kicking up a fuss for.”

    Perhaps on his show Thursday night, Stewart could explain why only one liberal–Sen. Ron Wyden of Oregon–joined Paul’s filibuster.

    –Posted by Tracy Bloom.

    Get truth delivered to
    your inbox every week.

    Previous item: Rand Paul Filibusters John Brennan’s CIA Nomination



    New and Improved Comments

    If you have trouble leaving a comment, review this help page. Still having problems? Let us know. If you find yourself moderated, take a moment to review our comment policy.

    Please enable JavaScript to view the comments powered by Disqus.

    Quantitative Easing for the People: Default on the Public Debt, Nationalize the Banks, and a Dividend for Citizens

    0

    Comedian Beppe Grillo was surprised himself when his Five Star Movement got 8.7 million votes in the Italian general election of February 24-25th. His movement is now the biggest single party in the chamber of deputies, says The Guardian, which makes him “a kingmaker in a hung parliament.”

    Grillo’s is the party of “no.” In a candidacy based on satire, he organized an annual “V Day Celebration,” the “V” standing for vaffanculo (“f–k off”). He rejects the status quo–all the existing parties and their monopoly control of politics, jobs, and financing–and seeks a referendum on all international treaties, including NATO membership, free trade agreements and the Euro.

    “If we get into parliament,” says Grillo, “we would bring the old system down, not because we would enjoy doing so but because the system is rotten.” Critics fear, and supporters hope, that if his party succeeds, it could break the Euro system.

    But being against everything, says Mike Whitney in Counterpunch, is not a platform:

    To govern, one needs ideas and a strategy for implementing those ideas. Grillo’s team has neither. They are defined more in terms of the things they are against than things they are for. It’s fine to want to “throw the bums out”, but that won’t put people back to work or boost growth or end the slump. Without a coherent plan to govern, M5S could end up in the political trash heap, along with their right-wing predecessors, the Tea Party.

    Steve Colatrella, who lives in Italy and also has an article in Counterpunch on the Grillo phenomenon, has a different take on the surprise win. He says Grillo does have a platform of positive proposals. Besides rejecting all the existing parties and treaties, Grillo’s program includes the following:

    – unilateral default on the public debt;
    – nationalization of the banks; and
    – a guaranteed “citizenship” income of 1000 euros a month.

    It is a platform that could actually work. Austerity has been tested for a decade in the Eurozone and has failed, while the proposals in Grillo’s plan have been tested in other countries and have succeeded.

    Default: Lessons from Iceland and South America

    Default on the public debt has been pulled off quite successfully in Iceland, Argentina, Ecuador, and Russia, among other countries. Whitney cites a clip from Grillo’s blog suggesting that this is also the way out for Italy:

    The public debt has not been growing in recent years because of too much expenditure . . . Between 1980 and 2011, spending was lower than the tax revenue by 484 billion (thus we have been really virtuous) but the interest payments (on the debt of 2,141 billion) that we had to pay in that period have made us poor. In the last 20 years, GDP has been growing slowly, while the debt has exploded.

    . . . [S]peculators . . . are contributing to price falls so as to bring about higher interest rates. It’s the usurer’s technique. Thus the debt becomes an opportunity to maximize earnings in the market at the expense of the nation. . . . If financial powerbrokers use speculation to increase their earnings and force governments to pay the highest possible interest rates, the result is recession for the State that’s in debt as well as their loss of sovereignty.

    . . . There are alternatives. These are being put into effect by some countries in South America and by Iceland. . . . The risk is that we are going to reach default in any case with the devaluation of the debt, and the Nation impoverished and on its knees. [Beppe Grillo blog]

    Bank Nationalization: China Shows What Can Be Done

    Grillo’s second proposal, nationalizing the banks, has also been tested and proven elsewhere, most notably in China. In an April 2012 article in The American Conservative titled “China’s Rise, America’s Fall,” Ron Unz observes:

    During the three decades to 2010, China achieved perhaps the most rapid sustained rate of economic development in the history of the human species, with its real economy growing almost 40-fold between 1978 and 2010. In 1978, America’s economy was 15 times larger, but according to most international estimates, China is now set to surpass America’s total economic output within just another few years.

    According to Eamonn Fingleton in In The Jaws of the Dragon (2009), the fountain that feeds this tide is a strong public banking sector:

    Capitalism’s triumph in China has been proclaimed in countless books in recent years. . . . But . . . the higher reaches of its economy remain comprehensively controlled in a way that is the antithesis of everything we associate with Western capitalism. The key to this control is the Chinese banking system . . . [which is] not only state-owned but, as in other East Asian miracle economies, functions overtly as a major tool of the central government’s industrial policy.

    Guaranteed Basic Income–Not Just Welfare

    Grillo’s third proposal, a guaranteed basic income, is not just an off-the-wall, utopian idea either. A national dividend has been urged by the “Social Credit” school of monetary reform for nearly a century, and the U.S. Basic Income Guarantee Network has held a dozen annual conferences. They feel that a guaranteed basic income is the key to keeping modern, highly productive economies humming.

    A basic income guarantee paid for with central bank credit would not be “welfare” but would eliminate the need for welfare. It would be social security for all, replacing social security payments, unemployment insurance, and welfare taxes.

    In Europe, the proposal is being pursued not just by Grillo’s southern European party but by the sober Swiss of the north. An initiative to establish a new federal law for an unconditional basic income was formally introduced in Switzerland in April 2012. The idea consists of giving to all citizens a monthly income that is neither means-tested nor work-related. Under the Swiss referendum system of direct democracy, if the initiative gathers more than 100,000 signatures before October 2013, the Federal Assembly is required to look into it.

    Colatrella does not say where Grillo plans to get the money for Italy’s guaranteed basic income, but in Social Credit theory, it would simply be issued outright by the government; and Grillo, who has an accounting background, evidently agrees with that approach to funding. He said in a presentation available on YouTube:

    The Bank of Italy a private join-stock company, ownership comprises 10 insurance companies, 10 foundations, and 10 banks, that are all joint-stock companies . . . They issue the money out of thin air and lend it to us. It’s the State who is supposed to issue it. We need money to work. The State should say: “There’s scarcity of money? I’ll issue some and put it into circulation. Money is plentiful? I’ll withdraw and burn some of it.” . . . Money is needed to keep prices stable and to let us work.

    The Key to a Thriving Economy

    Major C.H. Douglas, the thought leader of the Social Credit movement, argued that the economy routinely produces more goods and services than consumers have the money to purchase, because workers collectively do not get paid enough to cover the cost of the things they make. This is true because of external costs such as interest paid to banks, and because some portion of the national income is stashed in savings accounts, investment accounts, and under mattresses rather than spent on the GDP.

    To fill what Social Crediters call “the gap,” so that “demand” rises to meet “supply,” additional money needs to be gotten into the circulating money supply. Douglas recommended doing it with a national dividend for everyone, an entitlement by “grace” rather than “works,” something that was necessary just to raise purchasing power enough to cover the products on the market.

    In the 1930s and 1940s, critics of Social Credit called it “funny money” and said it would merely inflate the money supply. The critics prevailed, and the Social Credit solution has not had much chance to be tested. But the possibilities were demonstrated in New Zealand during the Great Depression, when a state housing project was funded with credit issued by the Reserve Bank of New Zealand, the nationalized central bank. According to New Zealand commentator Kerry Bolton, this one measure was sufficient to resolve 75% of unemployment in the midst of the Great Depression.

    Bolton notes that this was achieved without causing inflation. When new money is used to create new goods and services, supply rises along with demand and prices remain stable; but the “demand” has to come first. No business owner will invest in more capacity or production without first seeing a demand. No demand, no new jobs and no economic expansion.

    The Need to Restore Economic Sovereignty

    The money for a guaranteed basic income could be created by a nationalized central bank in the same way that the Reserve Bank of New Zealand did it, and that central bank “quantitative easing” (QE) is created out of nothing on a computer screen today. The problem with today’s QE is that it has not gotten money into the pockets of consumers. The money has gotten–and can get–no further than the reserve accounts of banks, as explained here and here. A dividend paid directly to consumers would be “quantitative easing” for the people.

    A basic income guarantee paid for with central bank credit would not be “welfare” but would eliminate the need for welfare. It would be social security for all, replacing social security payments, unemployment insurance, and welfare taxes. It could also replace much of the consumer debt that is choking the private economy, growing exponentially at usurious compound interest rates.

    As Grillo points out, it is not the cost of government but the cost of money itself that has bankrupted Italy. If the country wishes to free itself from the shackles of debt and restore the prosperity it once had, it will need to take back its monetary sovereignty and issue its own money, either directly or through its own nationalized central bank. If Grillo’s party comes to power and follows through with his platform, those shackles on the Italian economy might actually be released.

    What Rightwingers Rand Paul and Ted Cruz Exposed About the Drone Strikes

    0

    If you’re concerned about the lack of transparency and accountability of the policy of drone strikes in Pakistan, Yemen, and Somalia, you have to concede that Senators Rand Paul and Ted Cruz have done us a great service: Cruz with his questioning of Attorney General Holder in the Senate Judiciary Committee hearing, Paul with his widely-reported filibuster on the Senate floor.

    Unfortunately, some Democrats don’t want to acknowledge this contribution. That’s a shame.

    It’s a fact of life in Washington that people who are good on some issues that you care about are bad on other ones. You can see this all the time without leaving your own party. Just this past week, Ron Wyden, key champion on transparency and accountability of the drone strike policy, badly hurt opponents of war with Iran by becoming an original co-sponsor of the AIPAC/Lindsey Graham “backdoor to war” resolution that tries to “pre-approve” participation in an Israeli attack on Iran, saying that if Israel attacks Iran, the U.S. should support Israel militarily and diplomatically.

    When a political figure is in the opposing party, that almost certainly means that they’re bad on a lot of issues that you care about. But if you dismiss them when they’re good on something else, then you’re dismissing all the people who care about that issue, including the people in your own party who care about that issue.

    Rand Paul and Ted Cruz showed how challenging the Administration’s lack of transparency on targeting Americans with drone strikes inexorably leads to challenging the Administration’s lack of transparency on targeting non-Americans with drone strikes.

    In the Judiciary Committee’s hearing with Attorney General Eric Holder, Cruz pressed Holder on the question of whether the Administration would consider it Constitutional to target Americans with drone strikes on U.S. soil. Holder responded by saying, yes, it would be Constitutional, in an extreme circumstance like Pearl Harbor or the September 11 attack.

    Cruz pressed: nobody disputes that we would respond to a military attack on U.S. soil, or any physical attack, regardless of whether Americans were involved. The question is: suppose someone you consider to be a terrorist were sitting in a café in the U.S., not an imminent threat. Could you drop a bomb on them, like you do in other countries? And that was the question to which Holder finally gave a clear no.

    In other words, Holder said: if you are a citizen of the United States, so long as you keep your feet planted on U.S. soil, even if the U.S. government suspects that you are part of Al Qaeda or an “associated force,” the U.S. government cannot drop a bomb on you so long as you are not currently engaged in combat, or are not on your way to combat. So long as you are in the United States, the word “imminent” in the phrase “imminent threat” means what everyone thinks it means, what law enforcement thinks it means, what international law thinks it means: right now, or in the immediate future, you are threatening violence, so we can take you out.

    But, according to the Administration, the moment you step outside the United States, then if the U.S. government thinks that you are part of Al Qaeda or an “associated force,” the U.S. government can drop a bomb on you, even if you’re sitting in a coffee shop, reading a book, with no apparent plans to do anything else. And the reason for that is that the moment you step outside of the United States, the Administration’s definition of “imminent” changes from the normal definition: now you are an “imminent” threat because, as a suspected member of Al Qaeda or an “associated force,” it’s presumed that you will try to do something to the U.S. at some point in the future, not necessarily the immediate future.

    And this is a pretty striking revelation, because ordinarily, as Americans, we think that our rights relative to the U.S. government are attached to us, not forfeit when we travel.

    During Paul’s filibuster, Paul and Illinois Senator Dick Durbin had an exchange that exposed the same point:

    As the filibuster crept toward its 13th hour, Senate Majority Whip Dick Durbin (D-Ill.) joined to ask Paul whether the U.S. government had the authority to take out the fourth plane on 9/11 before it crashed into the Capitol. “I don’t think this is such a clear and easy situation,” Durbin said.

    Paul called it a “red herring.” “We all agree that you can repel an imminent attack,” Paul said. “None of us disagree with that. We are talking about a targeted drone program” against citizens who are “not actively engaged in combat. … I don’t think that standard can be used in the United States.” [my emphasis]

    Durbin said he respected Paul’s response. “I stand with the senator,” Durbin said. “I think it is a legitimate question.” [my emphasis]

    You can see why the Administration might have been reluctant to state this clearly: critics who say the drone strike policy violates international law also read American newspapers. When the UN report comes out, it will likely make note of the fact that the Administration has acknowledged that its re-definition of the word “imminent” to claim that the drone strike policy doesn’t violate international law – that is, isn’t a policy of extrajudicial killing – not only differs from the customary international law definition, but from the Administration’s own definition of “imminent” that it applies in the United States.

    During the hearing, Holder effectively conceded the point that the Judiciary Committee needs the Justice Department’s memos justifying the drone strikes to do oversight. Holder was asked about the recently released “white paper” justifying the policy. Holder said: you have to read the white paper in conjunction with the underlying Justice Department memos. Thus, Holder himself is saying that the committee needs to have access to the memos to understand the policy.

    Sen. LEE: In fact, on page seven of the white paper — the white paper goes so far as to suggest that imminence doesn’t really need to involve anything imminent. Specifically, it says that this condition, that of imminence that — that an operational leader present an imminent threat of violent attack against the United States does not require the United States to have clear evidence that a specific attack on U.S. persons and interests will take place in the immediate future. So I — I have to ask, Mr. Attorney General, sir, what — what does imminence mean if — if it doesn’t have to involve something immediate?

    HOLDER: Yeah, I mean I –I think part of the problem is what we talked about in the previous question, but I think that white paper becomes more clear if it can be read in conjunction with the underlying OLC advice.

    The events of the last few days proved again what should have been obvious: Congressional pressure works to force the Administration to disclose information that it should disclose, and absence of Congressional pressure doesn’t work. The Senate Intelligence Committee, after waiting more than a year, is finally getting the memos because it threatened to hold up the confirmation of John Brennan to head the CIA unless it got the memos and then showed that it was willing to carry out the threat. The Senate Judiciary Committee doesn’t have the memos because it has not yet exerted enough pressure. Senator Leahy, chair of the committee, has threatened to issue a subpoena. But Leahy hasn’t shown yet that he is prepared to carry out the threat.

    NY Assembly Passes Two Year Fracking Moratorium, Senate Hoped to Follow

    0

    In a roll call vote of 95-40, the New York State Assembly has passed a two-year moratorium on hydraulic fracturing (“fracking”), the toxic horizontal drilling process through which oil and gas is procured that’s found within shale rock basins across the country and the world.

    The bill, if passed by the Senate and signed off by Democratic Gov. Andrew Cuomo, would close the state’s doors to the oil and gas industry’s desire to begin operating in New York’s portion of the Marcellus Shale basin until May 2015. New York has had a moratorium on the books since 2008. 

    This is the third time the Assembly has passed such a bill, with similar moratorium bills passing in 2010 and 2011, but then dying a slow death in the Senate and never reaching the Governor’s desk, meaning the de facto moratorium has remained in place. 

    Could the third time be a charm in 2013 in the Empire State?

    Signs point to “quite possibly,” because the bipartisan Independent Democratic Conference (IDC) bloc of the Senate – which shares control of the Senate with the Republicans – has come out in support of the bill’s passage, according to the Associates Press (AP).

    “We have to put science first. We have to put the health of New Yorkers first,” Sen. David Carlucci (D-38) and an IDC member told the AP.

    Activists see it as a temporary reprieve and a victory for now. Alex Beauchamp of Food and Water Watch told the Albany Times-Union:

    Hundreds of New York health professionals agree with the State Assembly that we should not move forward without a full, comprehensive examination of the health impacts of fracking…Moving forward would simply enrich oil and gas companies that want to ship their gas overseas and their profits to Texas at the expense of New York’s public health and environment.

    The oil and gas industry, unsurprisingly, is up in arms. New York Petroleum Council Executive Director Karen Moreau told the Times-Union: 

    Today’s vote by the State Assembly to further delay natural gas development is tantamount to telling the people of the Southern Tier to ‘Drop Dead.’ Once again, Albany politicians are putting politics before science, and the special interests before the people. The people of New York deserve better, to say the least

    Given New York’s ability to fend off the industry’s desires to enter the state for going on five years, all eyes in the fracking stratosphere will be on the Senate and Cuomo – a potential 2016 Democratic Party presidential candidate – in the coming days and weeks.

    © 2013 DeSmog Blog

    ‘They Profit, You Pay’: Activists Slam Nuclear Industry as Fukushima Remains Too Hot to Enter

    0

    Greenpeace activists protest with English, Japanese and German banners in front of the European Hitachi headquarters in Duisburg,The six reactors of the Fukushima nuclear plant are built by Hitachi, GE and Toshiba (Bernd Arnold / Greenpeace)With the two year anniversary of the Fukushima nuclear disaster quickly approaching, environmental activists from Greenpeace launched a worldwide campaign Thursday calling for the international community to hold the nuclear industry accountable for past and present nuclear catastrophes.

    Meanwhile, from the Fukushima Nuclear Plant today, Julian Ryall of the Telegraph reports that radiation levels within half of the reactor units are still far too high for people to enter, let alone efficiently “decommission” them, two years after the disaster began.

    According to Ryall, scientists still do not have a grasp on the conditions of the reactor cores in three of the six units at the Fukushima Daiichi plant. They cannot enter the structures to investigate and are confined to using remote-controlled vehicles to get inside the “tangle of wires, pipes and rubble that has lain untouched since the tsunami tore through the facility.”

    Takeshi Takahashi, the head of the crippled plant, recently conceded that it will take at least 30 years before the plant could be fully decommissioned.

    “Radiation levels at units one, two and three are very high and the cause of that is the fuel that has melted inside the reactors,” he said.

    In protest of the subsequent ongoing and adverse effects on public health and the environment–in the past, present, and likely future of nuclear catastrophes–Greenpeace activists across the world called on the nuclear industry to take responsibility for their ongoing crimes.

    From demonstrations outside of the Japanese parliament, to direct action outside of GE’s European headquarters in Brussels, to the unfurling of a protest banner at Hitachi Power’s European HQ, activists coordinated actions across three continents to “highlight that the lack of accountability of the nuclear industry is not only a problem limited to Japan.”

    Greenpeace reports:

    Using giant stickers, photos, projected images and nuclear scream masks, activists have already brought messages such as ‘They profit, you pay’ or ‘Your Business, Our Risks’ to the industry and the public. Activists are also demanding that GE, Hitachi and Toshiba should not be allowed to walk away from Fukushima.

    Additionally, Greenpeace stated, a giant blimp with an anti-nuclear message will be seen flying across an undisclosed North American city later Thursday. More actions will be taking place in France, Germany, Belgium, Japan and North America throughout the day, following similar actions in Jordan and Switzerland that took place earlier this week.

    Dr. Rianne Teule of Greenpeace International stated:

    In the case of Japan, two years after the Fukushima disaster, the unfair system means hundreds of thousands of victims are still waiting for reasonable compensation for their pain, suffering and losses. They aren’t getting the help they need to rebuild their lives.

    It is shocking that big companies like GE, Hitachi and Toshiba, don’t feel they have a moral responsibility to help people who have suffered from the radioactive contamination caused by their products. They should be made accountable for the risks they create.

    Fukushima Anniversary Protest in Tokyo: Greenpeace activists wearing “nuclear scream” masks demonstrate in front of the Japanese parliament (Noriko Hayashi / Greenpeace)

    _______________________

    This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 License

    Canadian Gov’t Targets US Journalists in Keystone XL Approval Scheme

    0

    Canada’s Harper government is systematically targeting American journalists in an “elaborate” scheme to promote approval of the controversial Keystone XL tar sands pipeline, newly released diplomatic cables reveal.

    Climate activists draw attention to the devastating impact that opening up Canadian tar sands will have on the planet. (Photo: Steve Rhodes via Flickr) Nearly 1,000 pages of heavily-redacted emails released to Toronto-based Environmental Defence group, reveal an “elaborate strategy” that includes weekly “war-room” meetings, heavy monitoring of media coverage and protest groups, and an “outreach program” specifically focused on winning allies among American reporters.

     Postmedia News reports:

    The records revealed several attempts, over a two-week period in August 2011, to reach out to various journalists from major publications such as the New York Times, the Los Angeles Times and an influential trade publication, E & E Daily, as part of a government program to “develop Canada’s network of reporters covering energy issues” and to “support energy objectives in the U.S., specifically as they relate to advocacy on the Keystone (XL) pipeline expansion.”

    After a $123 lunch with one of the journalists, a media relations officer from Canada’s Washington embassy filed a report saying the meeting was designed to develop a “better relationship” with the journalist and had strengthened the network of reporters covering Keystone XL.

    The records also showed a flurry of emails, generated in response to a negative editorial from the New York Times that criticized the pipeline project, going all the way up to the office of Foreign Affairs Minister John Baird, prior to approval of a letter to the editor that was signed by Canadian Ambassador Gary Doer.

    This “flurry of activity among Canadian diplomats in the United States,” dates back to the summer of 2011–right at the time that protests against Transcanada’s Keystone XL successfully delayed the State Department’s approval of the project.

    Media influence has become paramount as the US State Department again weighs approval of the pipeline, which will carry tar sands oil from Alberta, Canada to the Gulf Coast of Texas opening the flood gates to 7 gigatons of carbon dioxide reserves and spelling–as leading environmental scientist James Hansen articulated–”game over” for the climate and planet.

    “The facts speak for themselves,” said Hannah McKinnon, program manager at Environmental Defence. “There are no rules to control the soaring pollution from the tar sands. Until that changes, it’s all just a glossy PR strategy.”

    Both US and Canadian governments, with the help of oil and gas industry stakeholders, have long-defended the tar sands industry and have gone great lengths to draw attention away from the devastating impact that extraction of Canadian tar sands oil will have on the climate and planet.

    Environmental watchdog groups blasted the “deeply flawed” draft supplemental environmental impact statement (SEIS) on the Keystone XL pipeline released Friday, charging that the supposedly unbiased report was written by a contractor for the pipeline’s parent company, TransCanada, not by State Department officials.

    Also, according to the reporting, Postmedia News obtained another series of internal records earlier this year which indicated that the Harper government “deliberately tried to downplay scientific evidence about the industry’s environmental footprint on air, water and wildlife” while proactively “discouraging federal scientists from speaking publicly about their oil sands research.”

    _____________________

    This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 License

    IDF teargas int’l journalists covering peaceful protest in West Bank, incl RT crew

    0

    Published time: March 07, 2013 16:09

    Image from twitter.com @yafastaiti_rt

    Download video (196.81 MB)

    Several international journalists, including an RT cameraman, have suffered from teargas as IDF have launched teargas bombs at the media crews outside Ofer Prison, West Bank. In recent weeks protests outside the facility have left scores of injured.

    The RT crew, together with other international teams were documenting nonviolent protests near Ofer prison, which has been the site of numerous clashes with Israeli authorities in recent months, leading to hundreds of injuries. A recent Palestinian prisoner’s death has instigated an escalation in already-bitter relations.

    On Thursday the activists had been peacefully demonstrating against the death of a young Palestinian man, who sustained injuries during clashes in the village of Abud, north of Jerusalem, and had unfurled banners and were waving flags.

    “The rally was not numerous. No one [from the] activists was going to throw stones [at IDF soldiers] or initiate clashes,” RT’s correspondent Yafa Staiti said.

    Image from twitter.com @yafastaiti_rt

    IDF forces asked both the journalists and protesters to retreat 60 meters, and as the journalists began to stand back, Israeli elements started to fire the teargas at both them and the protesters.

    The RT crew says that after their withdrawal, the forces proceeded to fire teargas at the car carrying them off.

    “There was no necessity to use teargas. As a result our cameraman and dozens of other people, among those there have been correspondents of Maan and Sky News, as well as others sitting in TV crews’ cars, suffered from suffocation after [a] teargas grenade exploded,” Staiti added.

    RT cameraman following the attack (Image from twitter.com @yafastaiti_rt)

    On Wednesday, 15 civilians were also wounded when police attempted crowd dispersal with rubber bullets. Local press also reported the use of teargas. Among those injured included the head of Palestinian Prisoners Society, Qaddura Fares.

    RT’s correspondent said they suppose “A day of Palestinian rage” may take place Friday “as well as [a] mass march during [the] funeral of that young man after Friday’s prayer.”

    “It can end, as it often happens, with clashes between demonstrators and IDF.”

    Over 2,000 Palestinians are currently being detained in Israeli jails and several are on a long-term hunger strike and becoming increasingly weak.

    Many Palestinian prisoners in Israeli jails are in ‘administrative detention,’ which is a practice whereby a suspect can be held indefinitely without charge or the chance to face trial.

    Image from twitter.com @yafastaiti_rt

    Venezuela and the Middle East After Chavez

    0

    Venezuela and the Middle East After Chavez

    Email this item Email   Print this item Print   Share this item... Share
    Posted on Mar 7, 2013
    ABr / José Cruz via WikiMedia Commons (rights reserved)

    By Juan Cole

    This post first appeared on Juan Cole’s website, Informed Comment.

    The foreign policy of late Venezuelan leader Hugo Chavez imagined that socialism and anti-imperialism are the same thing, and that he could lead a new sort of socialist international. (He also seems not to have distinguished between anti-Americanism and anti-imperialism.) These considerations shaped his Middle East policy in ways that were contradictory and hypocritical. Chavez, supposedly a man of the people, stood against Iran’s 2009 Green Movement, against the Libyan Revolution to overthrow the erratic Muammar Qaddafi, against the Syrian Revolution.

    Iran, while it is a profound critic of the United States, is not a socialist country. Its gini coefficient or measurement of social inequality now is probably worse than in the days of Mohammad Reza Pahlavi, the monarch overthrown in 1979. As with all oil states, its public sector is large, but it also has a lively private sector, which is dominated by wealthy oligarchs, including some of the ayatollahs and institutions like the Revolutionary Guards. Iran is a right wing theocracy, not a left wing socialist state. If Chavez could embrace a repressive theocracy run for the benefit of wealthy oligarchs, merely because it is anti-American, then of what logical acrobatics was he incapable?

    Likewise, Chavez’s support for the Ghaddafis in Libya was based on an extremely superficial reading of Libyan political, economic and social system. The Ghaddafi family looted the country of its wealth, wasting it on ruinous African adventures or squirreling it away in Western banks and real estate. Libya was not a socialist country but a post-Soviet, Russian-style oligarchy. Ordinary Libyans, especially in the east of the country, were increasingly cut out of any share in the country’s oil bonanza. I was shocked last year on my visit there how dowdy and relatively undeveloped Benghazi is; Ghaddafi had clearly punished the country’s second largest city by declining to spend much money on it. Nor was Ghaddafi of 2010 even particularly anti-imperialist. He had welcomed European investment in his oil and gas industries and had much improved relations with the Bush administration. Far from being anti-American, Ghaddafi had a thing for Condi Rice and called Barack Obama his African son. Chavez’s own ally, Iran, largely supported the struggle of the Libyan people against what one ayatollah called “this shell-shocked individual,” though of course Iran condemned the NATO air intervention.

    Syria is also no longer a socialist country. The relatives and hangers-on of the ruling al-Assad family transformed themselves into billionaires, using their government contacts to gain lucrative contracts and establishing monopolies. Working Syrians were facing declining real wages in the past decade and very high youth unemployment. Poverty was increasing. Nor was Syria particularly anti-imperialist. In the 1970s and 1980s in Lebanon, Baathist Syria had gladly helped defeat the Palestine Liberation Organization and its Druze and Muslim allies on behalf of the pro-American, right wing Phalangist Party supported by some Christians. After 9/11, the Syrian government tortured al-Qaeda suspects for the Bush administration. It was the US congress that cut Syria off in 2003, not the other way around. And when Obama reopened the US embassy and sought better ties in 2009, al-Assad was perfectly happy to accept.

    Whatever one thought of Chavez, he did genuinely improve the lot of the Venezuelan working classes. He won elections and was genuinely popular for this reason. He appears not to have been able to imagine that Khamenei, Ghaddafi and al-Assad are rather less interested in an ideal like the public welfare.

    Unable to perform a basic political-economy analysis that would demonstrate that Iran, Libya and Syria had abandoned whatever socialist commitments they once had (Iran of the ayatollahs had never been progressive), Chavez in his own mind appears to have thought that they were analogous to the Bolivia of Eva Morales or the Ecuador of Rafael Correa. Emphatically not so.

    He also imagined these countries as anti-American (only Iran really is), and appears to have believed that such a stance covers a multitude of sins on the part of their elites— looting the country, feathering their own nests, and authoritarian dictatorship and police states that deploy arbitrary arrest and torture. In the case of Libya and Syria, the regimes showed a willingness to massacre thousands of their own citizens with bombings from the air and heavy artillery and tank barrages fired into civilian neighborhoods. US imperialism has been guilty of great crimes in Central America and often backed right wing dictators in Latin America generally. You understand how it made a bad impression on Chavez. But the US supported Algeria and many other decolonizing countries in the 1960s and “imperialism” is a thin reed as an all-encompassing analytical tool. There is a sense in which capitalist Russia is seeking a superpower supremacy in parts of the Middle East. Chavez was happy to align with that development.

    Venezuela’s stances on the Middle East under Chavez were not usually important in any practical sense. Despite a lot of verbiage, its economic cooperation with Iran has been minor for both countries, and Chavez did no more than make angry speeches about Libya and Syria. Good Iranian-Venezuelan relations provoked a great deal of hysteria in the US, but they don’t actually appear to have been consequential, either in the sphere of economics or in that of security. Despite dark predictions by US hawks, it is probably not very important whether Venezuela keeps its current foreign policy or alters it.

    But Chavez did sully his legacy as a progressive with his superficial reading of what ‘anti-imperialism’ entails and his inability to see the neo-liberal police states of the Middle East for what they had become.


    New and Improved Comments

    If you have trouble leaving a comment, review this help page. Still having problems? Let us know. If you find yourself moderated, take a moment to review our comment policy.

    Please enable JavaScript to view the comments powered by Disqus.

    Vince Cable calls for more borrowing

    0

    British Business Secretary Vince Cable has urged Chancellor George Osborne to change his economic course by borrowing more in order to stimulate growth in the economy.

    Writing in the New Statesman, Cable criticized Osborne for sticking to his plans at current time of economic crisis and sluggish growth.

    The Liberal Democrat called for extra borrowing and warned that the coalition’s resistance on the issue may no longer be the right approach.

    He also said that the Chancellor’s deep cuts to capital spending have had adverse “economic consequences”.

    “The IMF argued last May that the risk of losing market confidence as a result of a more relaxed approach to fiscal policy, particularly the financing of more capital investment by borrowing, may have diminished relative to the risk of public finances deteriorating as a consequence of continued lack of growth,” he wrote.

    The Chancellor, however, has so far rejected calls for a change in fiscal policy, arguing that abandoning the discipline of spending cuts and borrowing for growth “would not undermine the central objective of reducing the structural deficit.”

    British Prime Minister David Cameron also dismissed Cable’s suggestions, saying that increasing government expenditure or cutting taxes would not help Britain’s struggling economy.

    Earlier in February, credit ratings agency Moody’s downgraded the British government’s bond rating from the top AAA to AA1 due to Britain’s rising debt and slowing growth.

    MOS/HE

    Ahmadinejad heads to Chavez funeral

    0

    File photo shows Iranian President Mahmoud Ahmadinejad (R) and his late Venezuelan counterpart, Hugo Chavez.

    Iranian President Mahmoud Ahmadinejad has set off for Venezuela to pay tribute to his late Venezuelan counterpart, Hugo Chavez, who died earlier this week after a two-year battle with cancer.

    Ahmadinejad left Tehran for Caracas on Thursday to attend Chavez funeral the following day.

    The Iranian president is accompanied by his top adviser Esfandiar Rahim Mashaei, Iranian Foreign Minister Ali Akbar Salehi, Vice President for Executive Affairs Seyyed Hassan Mousavi, Vice President for Parliamentary Affairs Mohammad-Reza Mir-Tajeddini and acting Minister of Cooperatives, Labor and Social Welfare Asadollah Abbasi.

    Iran and Venezuela have forged strong economic and political relations in the recent years.

    Friday’s funeral of Chavez will be also attended by several heads of state from Latin America, and other parts of the world.

    The body of late Venezuelan President Hugo Chavez has been put in a half-open casket for farewell.

    Chavez coffin was placed half-open in the hall of Military School of Venezuela in Caracas after it was accompanied by his supporters from hospital on Wednesday.

    His children surrounded the coffin as people chanted, “Chavez lives, the struggle goes on.”

    MP/SS

    The Legacy of Hugo Chavez: The Revolution Within the Revolution Will Continue

    0

    chavez3

     The death of Hugo Chávez is a great loss to the people of Venezuela who have been lifted out of poverty and have created a deep participatory democracy. Chavez was a leader who, in unity with the people, was able to free Venezuela from the grips of US Empire, bring dignity to the poor and working class, and was central to a Latin American revolt against US domination.

    Chávez grew up a campesino, a peasant, raised in poverty. His parents were teachers, his grandmother an Indian whom he credits with teaching him solidarity with the people. During his military service, he learned about Simon Bolivar, who freed Latin America from Spanish Empire. This gradually led to the modern Bolivarian Revolution he led with the people. The Chávez transformation was built on many years of a mass political movement that continued after his election, indeed saved him when a 2002 coup briefly removed him from office. The reality is Venezuela’s 21st Century democracy is bigger than Chávez. This will become more evident now that he is gone.

    The Lies They Tell Us

    If Americans knew the truth about the growth of real democracy in Venezuela and other Latin American countries, they would demand economic democracy and participatory government, which together would threaten the power of concentrated wealth. Real democracy creates a huge challenge to the oligarchs and their neoliberal agenda because it is driven by human needs, not corporate greed. That is why major media in the US, which are owned by six corporations, aggressively misinform the public about Chávez and the Bolivarian Revolution.

    Mark Weisbrot of the Center for Economic and Policy Research writes:

    The Western media reporting has been effective. It has convinced most people outside of Venezuela that the country is run by some kind of dictatorship that has ruined it.

    In fact, just the opposite is true. Venezuela, since the election of Chávez, has become one of the most democratic nations on Earth. Its wealth is increasing and being widely shared. But Venezuela has been made so toxic that even the more liberal media outlets propagate distortions to avoid being criticized as too leftist.

    We spoke with Mike Fox, who went to Venezuela in 2006 to see for himself what was happening. Fox spent years documenting the rise of participatory democracy in Venezuela and Brazil. He found a grassroots movement creating the economy and government they wanted, often pushing Chávez further than he wanted to go.

    They call it the “revolution within the revolution.” Venezuelan democracy and economic transformation are bigger than Chávez. Chávez opened a door to achieve the people’s goals: literacy programs in the barrios, more people attending college, universal access to health care, as well as worker-owned businesses and community councils where people make decisions for themselves. Change came through decades of struggle leading to the election of Chávez in 1998, a new constitution and ongoing work to make that constitution a reality.

    Challenging American Empire

    The subject of Venezuela is taboo because it has been the most successful country to repel the neoliberal assault waged by the US on Latin America. This assault included Operation Condor, launched in 1976, in which the US provided resources and assistance to bring friendly dictators who supported neoliberal policies to power throughout Latin America. These policies involved privatizing national resources and selling them to foreign corporations, de-funding and privatizing public programs such as education and health care, deregulating and reducing trade barriers.

    In addition to intense political repression under these dictators between the 1960s and 1980s, which resulted in imprisonment, murder and disappearances of tens of thousands throughout Latin America, neoliberal policies led to increased wealth inequality, greater hardship for the poor and working class, as well as a decline in economic growth.

    Neoliberalism in Venezuela arrived through a different path, not through a dictator. Although most of its 20th century was spent under authoritarian rule, Venezuela has had a long history of pro-democracy activism. The last dictator, Marcos Jimenez Perez, was ousted from power in 1958. After that, Venezuelans gained the right to elect their government, but they existed in a state of pseudo-democracy, much like the US currently, in which the wealthy ruled through a managed democracy that ensured the wealthy benefited most from the economy.

    As it did in other parts of the world, the US pushed its neoliberal agenda on Venezuela through the International Monetary Fund (IMF) and World Bank. These institutions required Structural Adjustment Programs (SAP) as terms for development loans. As John Perkins wrote in Confessions of an Economic Hit Man, great pressure was placed on governments to take out loans for development projects. The money was loaned by the US, but went directly to US corporations who were responsible for the projects, many of which failed, leaving nations in debt and not better off. Then the debt was used as leverage to control the government’s policies so they further favored US interests. Anun Shah explains the role of the IMF and World Bank in more detail in Structural Adjustment — a Major Cause of Poverty.

    Neoliberalism Leads to the Rise of Chávez

    A turning point in the Venezuelan struggle for real democracy occurred in 1989. President Carlos Andres Perez ran on a platform opposing neoliberalism and promised to reform the market during his second term. But following his re-election in 1988, he reversed himself and continued to implement the “Washington Consensus” of neoliberal policies — privatization and cuts to social services. The last straw came when he ended subsidies for oil. The price of gasoline doubled and public transportation prices rose steeply.

    Protests erupted in the towns surrounding the capitol, Caracas, and quickly spread into the city itself. President Perez responded by revoking multiple constitutional rights to protest and sending in security forces who killed an estimated 3,000 people, most of them in the barrios. This became known as the “Caracazo” (“the Caracas smash”) and demonstrated that the president stood with the oligarchs, not with the people.

    Under President Perez, conditions continued to deteriorate for all but the wealthy in Venezuela. So people organized in their communities and with Lieutenant Colonel Hugo Chávez attempted a civilian-led coup in 1992. Chávez was jailed, and so the people organized for his release. Perez was impeached for embezzlement of 250 million bolivars and the next president, Rafael Caldera, promised to release Chávez when he was elected. Chávez was freed in 1994. He then traveled throughout the country to meet with people in their communities and organizers turned their attention to building a political movement.

    Chávez ran for president in 1998 on a platform that promised to hold a constituent assembly to rewrite the constitution saying:

    I swear before my people that upon this moribund constitution I will drive forth the necessary democratic transformations so that the new republic will have a Magna Carta befitting these new times.

    Against the odds, Chávez won the election and became president in 1999.

    While his first term was cautious and center-left, including a visit by Chávez to the NY Stock Exchange to show support for capitalism and encourage foreign investment, he kept his promise. Many groups participated in the formation of the new constitution, which was gender-neutral and included new rights for women and for the indigenous, and created a government with five branches adding a people’s and electoral branches. The new constitution was voted into place by a 70 percent majority within the year. Chávez also began to increase funding for the poor and expanded and transformed education.

    Since then, Chávez has been re-elected twice. He was removed from power briefly in 2002, jailed and replaced by Pedro Carmona, the head of what is equivalent to the Chamber of Commerce. Fox commented that the media was complicit in the coup by blacking it out and putting out false information. Carmona quickly moved to revoke the constitution and disband the legislature. When the people became aware of what was happening, they rapidly mobilized and surrounded the capitol in Caracas. Chávez was reinstated in less than 48 hours.

    One reason the Chávez election is called a Bolivarian Revolution is because Simon Bolivar was a military political leader who freed much of Latin America from the Spanish Empire in the early 1800s. The election of Chávez, the new constitution and the people overcoming the coup set Venezuela on the path to free itself from the US empire. These changes emboldened the transformation to sovereignty, economic democracy and participatory government.

    In fact, Venezuela paid its debts to the IMF in full five years ahead of schedule and in 2007 separated from the IMF and World Bank, thus severing the tethers of the Washington Consensus. Instead, Venezuela led the way to create the Bank of the South to provide funds for projects throughout Latin America and allow other countries to free themselves from the chains of the IMF and World Bank too.

    The Rise of Real Democracy

    The struggle for democracy brought an understanding by the people that change only comes if they create it. The pre- Chávez era is seen as a pseudo Democracy, managed for the benefit of the oligarchs. The people viewed Chávez as a door that was opened for them to create transformational change. He was able to pass laws that aided them in their work for real democracy and better conditions. And Chávez knew that if the people did not stand with him, the oligarchs could remove him from power as they did for two days in 2002.

    With this new understanding and the constitution as a tool, Chávez and the people have continued to progress in the work to rebuild Venezuela based on participatory democracy and freedom from US interference. Chávez refers to the new system as “21st century socialism.” It is very much an incomplete work in progress, but already there is a measurable difference.

    Mark Weisbrot of CEPR points out that real GDP per capita in Venezuela expanded by 24 percent since 2004. In the 20 years prior to Chávez, real GDP per person actually fell. Venezuela has low foreign public debt, about 28 percent of GDP, and the interest on it is only 2 percent of GDP. Weisbrot writes:

    From 2004-2011, extreme poverty was reduced by about two-thirds. Poverty was reduced by about one-half, and this measures only cash income. It does not count the access to health care that millions now have, or the doubling of college enrollment — with free tuition for many. Access to public pensions tripled. Unemployment is half of what it was when Chávez took office.

    Venezuela has reduced unemployment from 20 percent to 7 percent.

    As George Galloway wrote upon Chávez’s death:

    Under Chávez’ revolution the oil wealth was distributed in ever rising wages and above all in ambitious social engineering. He built the fifth largest student body in the world, creating scores of new universities. More than 90% of Venezuelans ate three meals a day for the first time in the country’s history. Quality social housing for the masses became the norm with the pledge that by the end of the presidential term, now cut short, all Venezuelans would live in a dignified house.

    Venezuela is making rapid progress on other measures too. It has a high human development index and a low and shrinking index of inequality. Wealth inequality in Venezuela is half of what it is in the United States. It is rated “the fifth-happiest nation in the world” by Gallup. And Pepe Escobar writes that:

    No less than 22 public universities were built in the past 10 years. The number of teachers went from 65,000 to 350,000. Illiteracy has been eradicated. There is an ongoing agrarian reform.

    Venezuela has undertaken significant steps to build food security through land reform and government assistance. New homes are being built, health clinics are opening in under-served areas and cooperatives for agriculture and business are growing.

    Venezuelans are very happy with their democracy. On average, they gave their own democracy a score of seven out of ten while the Latin American average was 5.8. Meanwhile, 57 percent of Venezuelans reported being happy with their democracy compared to an average for Latin American countries of 38 percent, according to a poll conducted by Latinobarometro. While 81 percent voted in the last Venezuelan election, only 57.5 percent voted in the recent US election.

    Chávez won that election handily as he has all of the elections he has run in since 1999. As Galloway describes him, Chávez was “the most elected leader in the modern era.” He won his last election with 55 percent of the vote but was never inaugurated due to his illness.

    Beyond Voting: The Deepening of Democracy in Venezuela

    This is not to say that the process has been easy or smooth. The new constitution and laws passed by Chávez have provided tools, but the government and media still contain those who are allied with the oligarchy and who resist change. People have had to struggle to see that what is written on paper is made into a reality. For example, Venezuelans now have the right to reclaim urban land that is fallow and use it for food and living. Many attempts have been made to occupy unused land and some have been met by hostility from the community or actual repression from the police. In other cases, attempts to build new universities have been held back by the bureaucratic process.

    It takes time to build a new democratic structure from the bottom up. And it takes time to transition from a capitalist culture to one based on solidarity and participation. In “Venezuela Speaks,” one activist, Iraida Morocoima, says “Capitalism left us with so many vices that I think our greatest struggle is against these bad habits that have oppressed us.” She goes on to describe a necessary culture shift as, “We must understand that we are equal, while at the same time we are different, but with the same rights.”

    Chávez passed a law in 2006 that united various committees in poor barrios into community councils that qualify for state funds for local projects. In the city, community councils are composed of 200 to 400 families. The councils elect spokespeople and other positions such as executive, financial and “social control” committees. The council members vote on proposals in a general assembly and work with facilitators in the government to carry through on decisions. In this way, priorities are set by the community and funds go directly to those who can carry out the project such as building a road or school. There are currently more than 20,000 community councils in Venezuela creating a grassroots base for participatory government.

    A long-term goal is to form regional councils from the community councils and ultimately create a national council. Some community councils already have joined as communes, a group of several councils, which then have the capacity for greater research and to receive greater funds for large projects.

    The movement to place greater decision-making capacity and control of local funds in the hands of communities is happening throughout Latin America and the world. It is called participatory budgeting and it began in Porto Alegre, Brazil in 1989 and has grown so that as many as 50,000 people now participate each year to decide as much as 20 percent of the city budget. There are more than 1,500 participatory budgets around the world in Latin America, North America, Asia, Africa, and Europe. Fox produced a documentary, Beyond Elections: Redefining Democracy in the Americas, which explains participatory budgeting in greater detail.

    The Unfinished Work of Hugo Chávez Continues

    The movements that brought him to power and kept him in power have been strengthened by Hugo Chávez. Now the “revolution within the revolution” will be tested. In 30 days there will be an election and former vice president, now interim president, Nicolas Maduro will likely challenge the conservative candidate Chávez defeated.

    If the United States and the oligarchs think the death of Chávez means the end of the Bolivarian Revolution he led, they are in for a disappointment. This revolution, which is not limited to Venezuela, is likely to show to itself and the world that it is deep and strong. The people-powered transformation with which Chávez was in solidarity will continue.

    Shadow Lives: How the War on Terror in England Became a War on Women and Children

    0

    Once, as a reporter, I covered wars, conflicts, civil wars, and even a genocide in places like Vietnam, Angola, Eritrea, Rwanda, and the Democratic Republic of Congo, keeping away from official briefings and listening to the people who were living the war. In the years since the Bush administration launched its Global War on Terror, I’ve done the same thing without ever leaving home.

    In the last decade, I didn’t travel to distant refugee camps in Pakistan or destroyed villages in Afghanistan, nor did I spend time in besieged cities like Iraq’s Fallujah or Libya’s Misrata. I stayed in Great Britain. There, my government, in close conjunction with Washington, was pursuing its own version of what, whether anyone cared to say it or not, was essentially a war against Islam. Somehow, by a series of chance events, I found myself inside it, spending time with families transformed into enemies.

    I hadn’t planned to write about the war on terror, but driven by curiosity about lives most of us never see and a few lucky coincidences, I stumbled into a world of Muslim women in London, Manchester, and Birmingham. Some of them were British, others from Arab and African countries, but their husbands or sons had been swept up in Washington’s war. Some were in Guantanamo, some were among the dozen Muslim foreigners who did not know each other, and who were surprised to find themselves imprisoned together in Britain on suspicion of links to al-Qaeda. Later, some of these families would find themselves under house arrest.

    In the process, I came to know women and children who were living in almost complete isolation and with the stigma of a supposed link to terrorism. They had few friends, and were cut off from the wider world. Those with a husband under house arrest were allowed no visitors who had not been vetted for “security,” nor could they have computers, even for their children to do their homework. Other lonely women had husbands or sons who had sometimes spent a decade or more in prison without charges in the United Kingdom, and were fighting deportation or extradition.

    Gradually, they came to accept me into their isolated lives and talked to me about their children, their mothers, their childhoods – but seldom, at first, about the grim situations of their husbands, which seemed too intimate, too raw, too frightening, too unknowable to be put into words.

    In the early years, it was a steep learning curve for me, spending time in homes where faith was the primary reality, Allah was constantly invoked, English was a second language, and privacy and reticence were givens. Facebook culture had not come to most of these families. The reticence faded over the years, especially when the children were not there, or in the face of the kind of desolation that came from a failed court appeal to lift the restrictions on their lives, an unexpected police raid on the house, a husband’s suicide attempt, or the coming of a new torture report from Washington’s then-expanding global gulag of black sites and, of course, Guantanamo.

    In these years, I met some of their husbands and sons as well. The first was a British man from Birmingham, Moazzam Begg. He had been held for three years in Washington’s notorious offshore prison at Guantanamo Bay, Cuba, only to be released without charges.  When he came home, through his lawyer, he asked me to help write his memoir, the first to come out of Guantanamo. We worked long months on Enemy Combatant. It was hard for him to relive his nightmare days and nights in American custody in Kandahar and in the U.S. prison at Bagram Air Base in Afghanistan and then those limbo years in Cuba. It was even harder for him to visit the women whose absent husbands he had known in prison and who, unlike him, were still there.

    Was My Husband Tortured?

    In these homes he visited, there was always one great unspoken question: Was my husband or son tortured? It was the single question no one could bear to ask a survivor of that nightmare, even for reassurance. When working on his book, I deliberately left the chapter on his experiences in American hands in Bagram prison for last, as I sensed how difficult it would be for both of us to speak about the worst of the torture I knew he had experienced.

    Through Moazzam, I met other men who had been swept up in the post-9/11 dragnet for Muslims in Great Britain, refugees who sought him out as an Arabic speaker and a British citizen to help them negotiate Britain’s newly hostile atmosphere in the post-9/11 years.  Soon, I began to visit some of their wives, too.

    In time, I found myself deep inside a world of civilian women who were being warred upon (after a fashion) in my own country, which was how I came upon a locked-down hospital ward with a man determined to starve himself to death unless he was given refugee documents to leave Britain, children who cried in terror in response to a knock on the door, wives faced with a husband changed beyond words by prison.

    I was halfway through working on Moazzam’s book when London was struck by our 9/11, which we call 7/7. The July 7, 2005, suicide bombings, in three parts of the London underground and a bus, killed 52 civilians and injured more than 700. The four bombers were all young British men between 18 and 30, two of them married with children, and one of them a mentor at a primary school. In video statements left behind they described themselves as “soldiers” whose aim was to force the British government to pull its troops out of Iraq and Afghanistan. Just three weeks later, there were four more coordinated bomb attacks on the London subway system. (All failed to detonate.) The four men responsible, longterm British residents originally from the Horn of Africa, were captured, tried, and sentenced to life imprisonment. In this way, the whole country was traumatised in 2005, and that particularly includes the various strands of the Muslim community in Great Britain.

    The British security services quickly returned to a post-9/11 stance on overdrive. The same MI5 intelligence agents who had interrogated Moazzam while he was in U.S. custody asked to meet him again to get his thoughts on who might be behind the attacks. However, three years in U.S. custody and five months at home occupied with his family and his book had not made him a likely source of information on current strains of thought in the British Muslim community.

    At the same time, the dozen foreign Muslim refugees detained in the aftermath of 9/11 and held without trial for two years before being released on the orders of the House of Lords were rearrested. In the summer of 2005, the government prepared to deport them to countries they had originally fled as refugees.

    All of them had been made anonymous by court order and in legal documents were referred to as Mr. G, Mr. U, and so on. This was no doubt intended to safeguard their privacy, but in a sense it also condemned them. It made them faceless, inhuman, and their families experienced it just that way. “They even took my husband’s name away, why?” one wife asked me.

    The women I was meeting in these years were mostly from this small group, as well as the relatives of a handful of British residents – Arabs – who were not initially returned from Guantanamo with the nine British citizens that the Americans finally released without charges in 2004 and 2005.

    Perhaps no one in the country was, in the end, more terrorised than them, thanks to the various terror plots by British nationals that followed. And they were right to be fearful. The pressure on them was overwhelming. Some of them simply gave up and went home voluntarily because they could not bear house arrest, though they risked being sent to prison in their native lands; others went through years of house arrest and court appeals against deportation, all of which continues to this day.

    Among the plots that unnerved them were one in 2006 against transatlantic aircraft, for which a total of 12 Britons were jailed for life in 2009, and the 2007 attempt to blow up a London nightclub and Glasgow International Airport, in which one bomber died and the second was jailed for 32 years. In the post-9/11 decade, 237 people were convicted of terror-related offences in Britain.

    Though all of this was going on, much of it remained remote from the world of the refugee women I came to know who, in the larger world, were mainly preoccupied with the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan that, with Palestinian developments, filled their TV screens tuned only to Arabic stations.

    These women did not tend to dwell on their own private nightmares, but for anyone in their company there was no mistaking them: a wife prevented from taking her baby into the hospital to visit her hunger-striking husband and get him to eat before he starved to death; another, with several small children, turned back from a prison visit, despite a long journey, because her husband was being punished that day; children whose toys were taken in a police raid and never given back; midnight visits from a private security company to check on a man already electronically tagged.

    Here was the texture of a hidden war of continual harassment against a largely helpless population. This was how some of the most vulnerable people in British society – often already traumatised refugees and torture survivors – were made permanent scapegoats for our post-9/11, and then post-7/7 fears.

    So powerful is the stigma of “terrorism” today that, in the name of “our security,” whether in Great Britain or the United States, just about anything now goes, and ever fewer people ask questions about what that “anything” might actually be. Here in London, repeated attempts to get influential religious or political figures simply to visit one of these officially locked-down families and see these lives for themselves have failed. In the present political climate, such a personal, fact-finding visit proved to be anything but a priority for such people.

    A Legal System of Secret Evidence, House Arrest, and Financial Sanctions

    Against this captive population, in such an anything-goes atmosphere, all sorts of experimental perversions of the legal system were tried out. As a result, the British system of post-9/11 justice contains many features which should frighten us all but are completely unfamiliar to the vast majority of people in the United Kingdom.

    Key aspects for the families I have been concerned with include the use of secret evidence in cases involving deportation, bail conditions, and imprisonment without trial. In addition, most of their cases have been heard in a special court known as the Special Immigration Appeals Commission or SIAC, which is housed in an anonymous basement set of rooms in central London.

    One of SIAC’s innovative features is the use of “special advocates,” senior barristers who have security clearance to see secret evidence on behalf of their clients, but without being allowed to disclose it or discuss it, even with the client or his or her own lawyer. The resignation on principle of a highly respected barrister, Ian Macdonald, as a special advocate in November 2004 exposed this process to the public for the first time – but almost no one took any interest.

    And a sense of the injustice in this arcane system was never sufficiently sparked by such voices, which found little echo in the media. Nor was there a wide audience for reports from a team of top psychiatrists about the devastating psychological impact on the men and their families of indefinite detention without trial, and of a house-arrest system framed by “control orders” that allow the government to place restrictions of almost any sort on the lives of those it designates.

    An even less noted aspect of the anti-terror legal system brought into existence after 9/11 was the financial sanctions that could freeze the assets of designated individuals. First ordered by the United Nations, the financial-sanctions regime was consolidated here through a European Union list of designated people. The few lawyers who specialized in this area were scathing about the draconian measures involved and the utter lack of transparency when it came to which governments had put which names on which list.

    The effect on the listed families was draconian. Marriages collapsed under the strain. The listed men were barred from working and only allowed £10 a week for personal expenses. Their wives – often from conservative cultures where all dealings with the outside world had been left to husbands – suddenly were the families’ faces to the world, responsible for everything from shopping to accounting monthly to the government’s Home Office for every item the family purchased, right down to a bottle of milk or a pencil for a child. It was humiliating for the men, who lost their family role overnight, and exhausting and frustrating for the women, while in some cases the rest of their families shunned them because of the taint of alleged terrorism. Almost no one except specialist lawyers even knew that such financial sanctions existed in Britain.

    In the country’s High Court, the first judicial challenge to the financial-sanctions regime was brought in 2008 by five British Muslim men known only as G, K, A, M, and Q. In response, Justice Andrew Collins said he found it “totally unacceptable” that, to take an especially absurd example, a man should have to get a license for legal advice about the sanctions from the very body that was imposing them. The man in question had waited three months for a “basic expense” license permitting funds for food and rent, and six months for a license to obtain legal advice about the situation he found himself in.

    In a related case before the judicial committee of the House of Lords, Justice Leonard Hoffman expressed incredulity at the “meanness and squalor” of a regime that “monitored who had what for lunch.” More recently, the United Kingdom’s Supreme Court endorsed the comments of Lord Justice Stephen Sedley who described those subject to the regime as being akin to “prisoners of the state.”

    Among senior lawyers concerned about this hidden world of punishment was Ben Emmerson, the U.N. Special Rapporteur on the Promotion and Protection of Human Rights and Fundamental Freedoms While Countering Terrorism. He devoted one of his official U.N. reports to the financial sanctions issue. His recommendations included significantly more transparency from governments who put people on such a list, the explicit exclusion of evidence obtained by torture, and the obligation of governments to give reasons when they refuse to remove individuals from the list. Of course, no one who mattered was paying the slightest attention.

    Against ideological governments obsessed by terrorism on both sides of the Atlantic and a culture numbed by violent anti-terrorist tales like “24” and Zero Dark Thirty, such complicated and technical initiatives on behalf of individuals who have been given the tag, implicitly if not explicitly, of “terrorist” stand little chance of getting attention.

    “Each Time It’s Worse”

    Nearly a decade ago, at the New York opening night of Guantanamo: Honour Bound to Defend Freedom, the play Gillian Slovo and I wrote using only the words of the relatives of prisoners in that jail, their lawyers, and Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld, an elderly man approached Moazzam Begg’s father and me. He introduced himself as a former foreign policy adviser to President John Kennedy. “It could never have happened in our time,” he said.

    When the Global War on Terror was still relatively new, it was common for audiences to react similarly and with shock to a play in which fathers and brothers describe their bewilderment over the way their relation had disappeared into the legal black hole of Guantanamo Bay. In the years since, we have become numb to the destruction of lives, livelihoods, futures, childhoods, legal systems, and trust by Washington’s and London’s never-ending war on terror.

    In that time, I have seen children grow from toddlers to teenagers locked inside this particular war machine. What they say today should startle us out of such numbness. Here, for instance, are the words of two teenagers, a girl and a boy whose fathers had been imprisoned or under house arrest in Britain for 10 years and whose lives in those same years were filled with indignities and humiliations:

    “People seem to think that we get used to things being how they are for us, so we don’t feel the injustices so much now. They are quite wrong: it was painful the first time, more painful the second, even more so the third. In fact, each time it’s worse, if you can believe that. There isn’t a limit on how much pain you can feel.”

    The boy added this:

    “There is never one day when I feel safe. It can be the authorities, it can be ordinary people, they can do something bad for us. Only like now when we are all in the house together can I stop worrying about my mum and my sisters, and even me, what might happen to us. On the tube [subway], in class at university, people look at my beard.  I see them looking and I know they are thinking bad things about me. I would like to be a normal guy who no one looks at. You know, other boys, some of my friends, they cut corners, things like driving without a current license, everyone does it. But I can’t, I can’t ever, ever, take even a small risk. I have to always be cautious, be responsible… for my family.”

    These children have been brought up by women who, against all odds, have often preserved their dignity and kept at least a modicum of joy in their families’ lives, and so, however despised, however unnoticed, however locked away, made themselves an inspiration to others. They are not victims to be pitied, but women our societies should embrace.

    South African Archbishop Desmond Tutu’s response to recent proposals that Washington establish a secret court to oversee the targeting of terrorist suspects for death-by-drone and President Obama’s expanding executive power to kill, speak for the world beyond the West. They offer a different perspective on the war on terror that Washington and Great Britain continue to pursue with no end in sight:

    “Do the United States and its people really want to tell those of us who live in the rest of the world that our lives are not of the same value as yours? That President Obama can sign off on a decision to kill us with less worry about judicial scrutiny than if the target is an American? Would your Supreme Court really want to tell humankind that we, like the slave Dred Scott in the nineteenth century, are not as human as you are? I cannot believe it. I used to say of apartheid that it dehumanized its perpetrators as much as, if not more than, its victims. Your response as a society to Osama bin Laden and his followers threatens to undermine your moral standards and your humanity.”

    Victoria Brittain, journalist and former editor at the Guardian, has authored or co-authored two plays and four books, including Enemy Combatant with Moazzam Begg. Her latest book, Shadow Lives: The Forgotten Women of the War on Terror (Palgrave/Macmillan, 2013) has just been published.

    Latin America pays tribute to Chavez

    0

    Venezuelans in the capital, Caracas, surround the coffin of President Hugo Chavez, March 6, 2013.

    Latin American leaders have paid tribute to late Venezuelan President Hugo Chavez, honoring him for his efforts to promote independence and integration in the region.

    Latin American leaders including Argentinean President Cristina Fernandez de Kirchner, President Dilma Rousseff of Brazil, President Daniel Ortega of Nicaragua, Uruguayan President Jose Mujica, President Enrique Pena Nieto of Mexico, and Colombian President Juan Manuel Santos, have already announced that they would attend the funeral of Chavez in the Venezuelan capital, Caracas, on Friday.

    Hugo Chavez died at hospital in Caracas on March 5, after a two-year battle with cancer.

    Venezuelans began seven days of national mourning on Wednesday.

    Chavez founded the movement of Bolivarian Revolution to establish popular democracy and economic independence and equitably distribute wealth in Latin America.

    The Bolivarian Alliance for the Americas (ALBA) said in a statement on Thursday, “Never before in the history of our America has a president [done] so much in such a short lifetime for the integration and unity of our continent.” Chavez “will remain forever in the poor’s hearts.”

    Meanwhile, Mercosur, which is a major Latin American regional economic bloc, said, “The best tribute we can pay to him is to preserve his legacy to advance integration.”

    Venezuela’s Foreign Minister Elias Jaua has announced that Vice President Nicolas Maduro would take charge as interim president. A presidential election is expected to be called within 30 days.

    CAH/HSN/SS

    ‘Washington squandered $8bn in Iraq’

    0

    US soldiers go over last minute details before going out on the US military’s combat patrol in Iraq at Camp Adder near Nasiriyah on December 16, 2011.

    A recent report by the Office of the Special Inspector General for Iraq Construction (SIGIR) has revealed that Washington has wasted at least USD8 billion in rebuilding Iraq.

    According to the report, which provides an overall assessment of SIGIR’s mission in Iraq’s reconstruction, the United States has achieved little in its efforts to rebuild the war-torn country.

    The United States’ eight-year war in Iraq led to the death of at least 5,000 American soldiers and cost Washington some USD800 billion, the report said.

    The SIGIR report, which is based on hundreds of inspections across Iraq and several interviews with US politicians and officials, also stated that Washington should learn lessons from its failure in Iraq for its reconstruction plans in other places.

    This comes as Iraq’s Prime Minister Nouri al-Maliki has told the publishers of the report that the United States has misspent some of its money in Iraq.

    Iraq’s Top Sunni Muslim official and Speaker of the Iraqi Parliament Osama al-Nujaifi has also made objection to the US reconstruction plans in the country saying, Washington’s rebuilding projects “had unfavorable outcomes in general.”

    Top member of the US Senate’s Committee on Foreign Relations, Bob Corker, has also found the findings of the report “appalling” saying the United States must learn lessons from this failure.

    In 2003, the US and Britain invaded Iraq in blatant violation of international law and under the pretext of finding weapons of mass destruction (WMD) allegedly stockpiled by the former Iraqi dictator, Saddam Hussein. However, no WMDs were ever discovered in Iraq.

    More than one million Iraqis were killed as a result of the invasion and the subsequent occupation of the country, according to the California-based investigative organization Project Censored.

    TNP/SS/SL

    UN Security Council adopts resolution expanding sanctions on North Korea

    0

    Published time: March 07, 2013 15:16

    The UN Security Council has adopted a resolution expanding sanctions against North Korea. The new resolution, which was drafted by the US and China, was in response to Pyongyang’s third nuclear test.

    The resolution condemns North Korea’s latest nuclear test “in the strongest terms” for violating council resolutions, bans further ballistic missile launches, nuclear tests “or any other provocation,” and demands that North Korea return to the Nuclear Nonproliferation Treaty.

    The resolution also condemns North Korea’s ongoing nuclear activities, including its uranium enrichment. It also stresses the UN Security Council’s commitment  “to a peaceful, diplomatic and political solution,” and urges that six-party nuclear talks be resumed.

    It calls on states to deny aircraft permission to take off, land or fly over their territory if illicit cargo is suspected to be on board.

    In anticipation of the resolution’s adoption, North Korea previously threatened to cancel the 1953 ceasefire that ended the Korean War.

    Pyongyang’s third nuclear test, which took place on February 12, was in defiance of three council resolutions which ban North Korea from testing or using nuclear or ballistic missile technology.

    The US and its allies fear the nuclear test pushes North Korea closer to gaining nuclear-armed missiles. However, Pyongyang has repeatedly maintained that its nuclear program is for purely peaceful purposes.

    MORE DETAILS TO FOLLOW.

    US to ask Israel to pull out of West Bank

    0

    US President Barack Obama (R) next to Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu (file photo)

    US President Barack Obama is going to demand a timetable for an Israeli withdrawal from the occupied West Bank during his visit to Israel later this month, a report says.

    The World Tribune quoted on Monday an unnamed Israeli official as saying that “Obama has made it clear to [Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin] Netanyahu that his visit is not about photo-ops, but the business of Iran and a Palestinian state”.

    “The implication is that if Israel won’t give him something he can work with, then he’ll act on his own,” the report quoted the source as saying.

    According to the report, an Israeli pullout plan could be part of an imminent US push to form a Palestinian state in the West Bank in 2014.

    The World Tribune report also notes that Obama is making his request for a detailed Israeli withdrawal plan a litmus test of Netanyahu’s leadership and credibility.

    Israeli sources said Obama’s demand has sparked concern in the office of the Israeli prime minister.

    On March 5, the Hebrew-language daily Maariv reported that Netanyahu is planning goodwill gestures toward the Palestinian Authority (PA) ahead of US president’s visit.

    Netanyahu may transfer areas of Area C in the West Bank to the control of the PA, release long-term prisoners and drop a ban on certain weaponry for PA forces.

    The Israeli prime minister has been unable to form a coalition over the past four weeks, and received a two-week extension from President Shimon Peres. According to Israeli media, Netanyahu has not even started the feasibility studies about a timetable for an Israeli withdrawal from the occupied West Bank.

    More than half a million Israelis live in more than 120 settlements built since the 1967 Israeli occupation of the West Bank and East al-Quds (Jerusalem).

    Meanwhile, violent acts are carried out on a weekly basis in the Palestinian territories by Israeli settlers.

    The Israeli settlements are considered illegal by the UN and most countries because those territories were captured by Israel in the 1967 war, and are thus seen as being subject to the Geneva Conventions, which forbid construction on occupied lands.

    The Israeli regime increased its settlement activities after an upgrade in the Palestinian status at the United Nations General Assembly on November 29, 2012. The 193-member General Assembly voted 138-9 with 41 abstentions to upgrade Palestine’s status to non-member observer state.

    PG/MP/MA

    Italy’s Berlusconi gets one-year jail

    0

    Former Italian Prime Minister Silvio Berlusconi has been sentenced to one year in prison over the publication of leaked transcripts from a police wiretap in 2005.

    The 76-year-old billionaire was accused of violating secrecy laws in 2005, when the daily Il Giornale, which is run by his brother, published the transcripts in an apparent attempt to discredit a member of the Democratic Party ahead of elections in 2006.

    A court in Milan issued the one-year jail sentence on Thursday. Berlusconi can appeal the conviction and a higher court may still be able to overturn the ruling.

    Under the Italian law, people aged over 75 and with sentences of less than two years do not have to actually go to prison.

    The leaked transcripts pertained to an attempt to take over Italy’s BNL bank by Unipol insurance company. Berlusconi has denied any wrongdoing in the case.

    Meanwhile, Piero Longo, Berlusconi’s lawyer, said after the hearing, “I am disappointed and concerned because I am convinced that the proof was insufficient, contradictory or missing.”

    Berlusconi’s brother was also sentenced to two years and three months on Thursday.

    Berlusconi is currently facing rulings in two other trials, including an appeal against a conviction for tax fraud as well as a judgment on accusations of paying for sex with a 17-year-old girl when he was prime minister.

    GMA/HSN

    Latvian culture minister urges citizens ‘don’t speak Russian’

    0

    Published time: March 07, 2013 13:06

    Pupils from Russian schools in Latvian capital protest education reform in Riga (AFP Photo / Ilmar Znotis)

    Latvia’s Minister of Culture has called on his countrymen “not to give in” to speaking Russian in schools, kindergartens and with the Russian-language media, in the country where over 37 per cent of the population are native Russian-speakers.

    “We have to be very solid, consistent in our daily lives – we need to speak Latvian. This is our country, we are proud of it. There should be one type of schools, and kindergartens, we should be speaking Latvian to the media. And not give in and swindle. We should firmly protect our language, culture, and country,” Minister Janeta Jaunzeme-Grende told reporters on Thursday.

    In Latvia, the state funds kindergartens and schools teaching in both Latvian and Russian. But Jaunzeme-Grende is part of a conservative National Union government that supports creating a monolingual Latvia.

    According to the Minister, the best way to achieve integration in Latvia is by strengthening the values of the government and society.

    “There is no better way to integrate a society than to strengthen the state. If we are strong, then everyone will want to speak Latvian to prove that they belong to this beautiful country.”

    Latvia has a population of 2 million, over 37 per cent of which are native Russian-speakers. The country has only one official language, Latvian, while Russian has the status of a foreign language.

    Back in February 2012 a majority of Latvian voters rejected a proposal that would have made Russian a second official language. The result was expected, as the country’s top politicians had spoken out against the idea. The referendum took place after 183,000 Latvians petitioned for it.

    The status of the Russian-speaking minority — who are not only Russians ethnically, but also Belarusians and Ukrainians — is painful in modern Latvia. The hundreds of thousands who now carry ‘alien passports’ moved to live in the then-Soviet republic after 1945, or their descendants. When Latvia became independent in the 1990s, the new leaders were determined to make it a mono-national country.

    Two decades have hardly been enough to integrate the Latvian Russians into the new society. Those who fail rigid language tests are still denied citizenship and all the privileges it brings. The use of Russian is discouraged. In schools at least 60 per cent of all classes from grade 10 through 12 must be taught in Latvian, even if all the pupils are from Russian families and have problems speaking the state language.

    On top of that in November the Latvian authorities have banned a referendum on automatic citizenship to the country’s more than 300,000 non-citizens citing the country’s principles, international law and security reasons.

    The majority of non-citizens who make up about 15 per cent of Latvia’s population are Russian speakers.

    An alien passport-holder is allowed to reside in Latvian territory, but has no political rights, such as voting or holding official posts.

    The Growing Taser Problem

    RINF Alternative News

    jc240309taser4

    A British police force has allowed non-firearms officers to carry and use Taser guns, it emerged today.

    Previously, the Sussex Police force restricted the use of Tasers to authorised firearms officers only, however there’s been a steady increase in the number of forces around the UK that now allow non-firearms officers to use the weapons.

    160 officers in Sussex will receive the guns and are only allowed to use them in situations where there is “a real threat of violence” –  but looking at the police track record of Taser gun use, it’s apparent that some officers do not follow the rules.

    In 2008, the UK legalised the use of Tasers on children, even if they are unarmed. According to the Home Office statistics, officers threatened children with Tasers on 144 occasions in 2010, firing the gun at a child in approximately 1 in 5 times.

    When fired, Taser guns give victims an electric shock of up to 50,000 volts, potentially triggering heart conditions.

    Amnesty International has previously called for the use of the guns to be restricted:

    “Amnesty International recommends that the use of Tasers on children and vulnerable people should be avoided in all circumstances unless officers are faced with an immediate threat to life or serious injury which cannot be contained by less extreme options.”

    The guns were introduced as non-lethal weapons, but there is a mountain of evidence to support claims that Tasers can kill.

    Last year, a 27 year old man and father of two, Dale Burns, was Tasered four times in less than a minute – and died two hours later as a result.

    Kevin Piskura, a college student died five days after a police officer Tasered him with an 11-second jolt to his chest.

    In 2007 the UN called the use of the weapons as a form of torture:

    “The use of these weapons causes acute pain, constituting a form of torture.

    “In certain cases, they can even cause death, as has been shown by reliable studies and recent real-life events.”

    In the U.S. around 80% of people who are Tasered between 2001 and early 2012 were unarmed. So far, Taser guns have claimed the lives of 500 people.

    Fee to enter? Britain’s immigration crackdown continues

    0

    Published time: March 07, 2013 16:11

    A Bulgarian shows his UK visa in front of the British embassy in Sofia (AFP Photo / Valentina Petrova)

    Immigrants entering Britain may be forced to pay a fee, which would only be reimbursed when they leave UK soil, and if they haven’t used health services. The UK is taking an increasingly hardline stance, despite a recent sharp decline in immigration.

    The UK is seeking to impose financial bonds “as a further deterrent to reduce non-compliance by high-risk nationalities,” a source close to Theresa May, the Home Secretary, told the Daily Mail. Additionally, migrant family members already residing in the country would be made to pay a sum of thousands of pounds. It would be returned upon leaving the country.

    If the reform goes through, immigrants entering the country for living and work purposes would have to put down the money to guarantee they wouldn’t ‘drain’ the country’s financial resources. Such resources would include things like non-emergency care from the health service. However, if British welfare was used by migrants entering the country, they would risk losing their money.

    The entry fee would additionally be used to make sure immigrants didn’t outstay their visa (and fining them if they do), consolidating an existing act. The Immigration and Asylum Act (1999), already gives the government the right to make immigrants front some money upon entering the country, which can be retained by the government should they remain in the UK after the expiration of their visa.

    Individuals from two or three countries were tagged as “high risk”, and it is at them that the scheme is targeted. The UK will not be allowed to impose the charge on immigrants from EU countries who comprise the EU’s Schengen passport-free zone.

    Bulgaria and Romania had hoped to gain the same freedom to enter the UK as other EU nations, and were expected to apply to join the zone in a meeting on Thursday. However, their entrance needed to be granted through a unanimous vote, and Germany announced their plan to veto the move on Monday.

    “There will be no vote, and no decision,” a source in the EU’s current Irish presidency told AFP on Wednesday. “Several nations have reserves or concerns.” As a result, residents of the two countries could be among those impacted.

    Net migration into Britain has fallen by a third, from 247,000 thousand migrants in June 2011 to 163,000 in 2012, according the Office for National Statistics (ONS).

    Conservatives said they would clamp down on migrants, saying they were taking advantage of Britain’s “soft touch,” which he was determined to quash.

    On Wednesday, the Labour party leader Ed Miliband promised to take a heavy hand with immigration. He stated that the party had got it wrong in the past, saying “millions of people are concerned.”

    “Low-skill migration has been too high and we need to bring it down,” he said.

    The Shadow Home Secretary Yvette Cooper called for the closure of student visa loopholes on Thursday, saying that many overstay or abuse (e.g. working instead of studying), despite the party denying accusations that they are moving to the right on migration.  

    The British Conservative party was shunted into third place in the Eastleigh by-election in February. The UKIP candidate, who beat the Conservatives, is a member of a party described by the Tory government as packed with “loonies and closet racists.”  

    It has been suggested that parties are adopting a stronger stance because of UKIP’s reputation for being heavy-handed on immigration.

    Labour MP Diane Abbot, issued a recent warning to her party not to “spiral downwards” by veering to the right on immigration as a result of the by-election results.

    Russian scientists discover unidentified bacteria in sub-glacial Lake Vostok

    0

    Published time: March 07, 2013 15:42

    Vostock research camp in Antarctica (Reuters / Alexey Ekaikin)

    Russian researchers have found previously-unknown bacteria in waters of the unique sub-glacial Lake Vostok, isolated by 4km-thick layer of ice for around the past 20 million years. Now it could offer an incredible insight into our planet’s past.

    The finding from the water sample taken in May 2012 showed that the bacteria do not belong to any of the existing classes of bacteria. Before the latest discovery, science knew only one species of bacteria that can live under these conditions.

    “The last analysis was completed a week ago – there will be another, but the results are unlikely to change anything. After exclusion of all known contaminants – extraneous organisms – bacterial DNA was detected, which does not coincide with any of the known species in the world,” RIA Novosti quotes Sergey Bulat of the St. Petersburg Nuclear Physics Institute in Russia.

    All water samples will be brought to St. Petersburg in May on board the research ship Academic Fyodorov, which is currently working in the Antarctic.

    DETAILS TO FOLLOW.

    Vostock research camp in Antarctica (Reuters / Alexey Ekaikin)

    Berlusconi sentenced to 1 year behind bars in wiretap trial

    0

    Published time: March 07, 2013 11:18

    Italy's former Prime Minister Silvio Berlusconi (AFP Photo)

    Italy’s former Prime Minister Silvio Berlusconi has been sentenced to one year in jail after a wiretap trial linked to a 2005 banking scandal.

    The ex-premier allegedly made public the taped contents of a confidential phone call.

    Berlusconi denied any wrongdoing and may seek an appeal trial, until the end of which he won’t be put into custody.

    DETAILS TO FOLLOW

    How Deregulation Resurrected American Economic Insecurity

    0

    Paul Craig Roberts
    RINF Alternative News

    burn

    The US might not be in a Great Depression, but economic insecurity has nevertheless returned to America.

    John N. Gray, a distinguished intellect and retired professor of intellectual history at the London School of Economics, disagrees with the view that “the end of history” has placed humanity on a course of ethical and economic progress. History, Gray believes, is not progressing to a higher stage. Instead, humanity is repeating the same follies and is destined to endure the same disasters. It is the Enclosures, the Repeal of the Corn Laws, and the Poor Law Act of 1834 all over again.

    The problem is humans themselves. They are not questioning beings. “Human beings use the power of scientific knowledge to assert and defend the values and goals they already have.” Instead of ethics and politics having advanced with the growth of knowledge, we are experiencing today state terror and murder on unprecedented scale as Washington kills people with drones and invasions in seven countries and threatens others. The US claims to be the democratic “light unto the world,” the “indispensable nation,” but it has resurrected in violation of its own law and international law the torture dungeons of the unaccountable governments of medieval Europe.

    Few people see the disconnect between the propaganda about the goodness of America and the evil that its government practices. Torture was banned. Its practice was made the act of a war criminal government. But the Bush and Obama regimes have resurrected torture as a defense of the state against citizens who reveal its crimes and against those who resist its aggression.

    The CIA official who revealed that the US government was torturing detainees in violation of US and international law, John Kiriakou, was subjected to wrongful prosecution and sentenced to prison. The elected officials who approved the torture and those who conducted the torture remain free of all charges to torture again.

    Bradley Manning, the US soldier who did his duty under the military code and revealed US war crimes that were ignored by his superiors had all of his constitutional rights violated and is now being tried on trumped-up and false charges. The US government claims that by telling the truth Manning aided the “enemies of the United States.”

    The US government is so corrupt that it doesn’t realize the self-damnation of declaring the truth to be against it. Some “light unto the world” Washington is.

    The myths to which Americans subscribe are resulting in their social, political, and economic destruction. In False Dawn: The Delusions Of Global Capitalism, John Gray lays out the destructive consequences of the free market ideology.

    Gray demonstrates that the libertarian belief that free markets are something that the government suppresses and takes away from us is contradicted by the historical fact that “free markets are creatures of state power, and persist only so long as the state is able to prevent human needs for security and the control of economic risk from finding political expression.”

    Free unregulated markets have existed only during short periods of history when state power and economic conditions were conducive to the imposition of unregulated markets. Unregulated markets existed for awhile in Victorian England, and Clinton, Bush, Obama, Thatcher and politicians in Australia, and New Zealand have removed regulation from various economic activities from the 1980s through the present.

    The evidence is in and piles up daily. Instability is on the rise, and with it has come economic insecurity. Homelessness is increasing. In the last decade, New York City has experienced a 73 percent increase in homelessness, while the net worth of the city’s mayor has risen to $27 billion.http://www.salon.com/2013/03/05/new_york_homelessness_sees_unprecedented_rise/singleton/Deregulation of the financial system produced such massive instability that the Federal Reserve had to lend the banks $16 trillion (a sum equal to US national debt). The Federal Reserve is in the fourth year of monetizing $1 trillion annually of US debt, raising the specter of dollar devaluation and inflation. Once great manufacturing cities, such as Detroit, are in steep decline. Real interest rates are negative, depriving retirees of interest income. The high unemployment rate of recent university graduates, despite an alleged economic recovery, proves that education is no longer the answer. Millions of jobs have disappeared. Unemployment is high. Poverty has increased as has the number of Americans on food stamps. The once vibrant American middle class is disappearing. The blue-collar working class is being proletarianized. Labor arbitrage across national borders has destroyed millions of US manufacturing and professional service jobs such as software engineering. What was formerly the incomes of millions of Americans was turned into incomes for Chinese, Indians, and into capital gains for shareholders and mega-million dollar bonuses for the corporate CEOs who offshored the Americans’ jobs and banked the lower labor costs as profits. One result has been a massive increase in US income and wealth inequality. The US now has the worst economic inequality of all developed countries and one of the worst in the entire world. This 6 minute video will give you a visual picture: http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QPKKQnijnsM&feature=youtu.be Another result has been the shrinking of the American consumer market and the reliance on debt instead of income gains to keep the economy going, an expedient now exhausted by the high debt levels of American households.

    The lost tax revenues from offshoring now threaten social institutions put in place decades ago in order to reduce economic insecurity and improve social cohesion. Social Security and Medicare are under attack, but not the wars that are the vehicle for spreading US hegemony and “democratic capitalism.” Even the concept of a career is vanishing as the pace of economic instability forces people into ever different jobs if they can find replacements for the ones they lose. Free unregulated markets disconnect economic activity from human well-being. As Gray says, markets are supposed to serve man, not man the market.

    The neoconservative belief that America possesses the only true way—”democratic capitalism”—is a delusion. Gray shows that “democracy and the free market are rivals, not allies.” Free markets are not sustainable in a democracy, because free markets erode stability, security, and social cohesion. Free markets existed for a short time in Victorian England, because “the franchise was small and the overwhelming majority of the population was excluded from political participation.” Gray concludes that the American project of constructing a worldwide free market in an age of democratic government requires the instabilities and insecurities that free markets create to be protected from democratic politics and insulated from correction and reform.

    We see everywhere in the West the effort to insulate the political process from the people it governs. In the US, the two political parties represent the few powerful private interests that supply their campaign funds. In the EU, Brussels is using the sovereign debt crisis to compromise the sovereignty of the member countries and remove their accountability to the people. In the US, Homeland Security has purchased a billion rounds of ammunition and 3,000 tanks. These purchases are not directed at the rare or nonexistent terrorist, but at the US population. They are Washington’s response to the social and political instability for which deregulation has set the stage.

    Gray concludes that a global free market is a project destined to fail, and its casualty list will be long. Insecurities will rise everywhere as globalism sets countries against one another in geo-political struggles to control dwindling natural resources that no country or institution has any responsibility to conserve. History is returning, and the neoconservatives will be remembered, if at all, as another utopian movement, a collection of bloody fools.

    Gray’s conclusion is consistent with the trends that Gerald Celente forecasts: currency wars, trade wars, political upheavals, and hot wars.

    Libertarians will be the last to comprehend that the return of crony capitalism, robber barons, and economic insecurity is the direct consequence of a quarter century of deregulation. As I show in my new book, The Failure of Laissez Faire Capitalism And Economic Erosion Of The West, it is the failure of the latest laissez faire experiment that has saddled us with crony capitalism. Monopoly concentration and rule by the few, not Libertarian nirvana, is what deregulation and unbridled greed produce.

    Pentagon Implicated In Iraq Torture Units

    0

    Mick Meaney
    RINF Alternative News

    tirture

    A new investigation has revealed that the Pentagon sent high ranking officials to manage secret detention and torture units in Iraq.

    A US veteran of the “dirty wars” in Central America,  Colonel James Steele, a retired special forces veteran nominated by Donald Rumsfeld, was sent to oversee sectarian police commando units in Iraq, alongside General David Petraeus, who was forced to resign as director of the CIA last November after a sex scandal.

    It is believed that these units accelerated the country’s descent into full-scale civil war and conducted some of the worst acts of torture during the US occupation.

    The investigation conducted by The Guardian and BBC Arabic, was sparked by the release of classified US military logs on WikiLeaks that detailed hundreds of incidents where US soldiers came across tortured detainees in a network of detention centres.

    General Muntadher al-Samari, who worked with Steele, has spoken about the US involvement in the torture units for the first time:

    “They knew everything that was going on there … the torture, the most horrible kinds of torture.

    “Every single detention centre would have its own interrogation committee.

    “Each one was made up of an intelligence officer and eight interrogators. This committee will use all means of torture to make the detainee confess like using electricity or hanging him upside down, pulling out their nails, and beating them on sensitive parts.

    “I remember a 14-year-old who was tied to one of the library’s columns. And he was tied up, with his legs above his head. Tied up. His whole body was blue because of the impact of the cables with which he had been beaten.”

    Also, a press photographer, Gilles Peress, who visited one of the commando centres in the same library, said:

    “We were in a room in the library interviewing Steele and I’m looking around I see blood everywhere.

    “And while this interview was going on with a Saudi jihadi with Jim Steele also in the room, there were these terrible screams, somebody shouting ‘Allah, Allah, Allah!’. But it wasn’t kind of religious ecstasy or something like that, these were screams of pain and terror.”

    The full length documentary is online here.

    Coal Triggers Carbon Level Rise

    0

    Coal Triggers Carbon Level Rise

    Email this item Email   Print this item Print   Share this item... Share
    Posted on Mar 7, 2013
    Jeffrey Beall (CC BY-SA 2.0)

    By Alex Kirby, Climate News Network

    This piece first appeared at Climate News Network.

    LONDON–The level of the greenhouse gas carbon dioxide (CO2) in the atmosphere increased significantly in 2012, US scientists have found.

    Measurements taken at Mauna Loa in Hawaii show that it rose by 2.67 parts per million (ppm) to reach just under 395 ppm, the second-largest rise since record-keeping began in 1959.

    The increase is thought by scientists to reflect the beginnings of a recovery in the global economy and the burning of more fossil fuels as a result, especially in China.

    It is likely to mean that the prospect of holding the rise in global average temperature to below 2°C, the goal of international climate negotiations, has receded still further.

    The only year so far with a bigger annual increase in CO2 was 1998, when the level rose by 2.93 ppm. From 2000 to 2010 the average yearly rise was just under 2 ppm. But as recently as the 1960s levels were rising by less than 1 ppm a year.

    Pieter Tans, who leads the greenhouse gas measurement team for the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, told the Associated Press the major factor was rising fossil fuel burning.

    “It’s just a testament to human influence being dominant”, he said. “The prospects of keeping climate change below that [two-degree goal] are fading away,”

    Rising coal consumption, especially in the developing world and usually for electricity generation, is one key reason why emissions keep rising.

    Coal set for big boost

    The trend has been gathering pace in the last few years. In 2008 China’s coal consumption was 2,966 million short tons (a short ton weighs 2,000 pounds, or a little more than 907 kilograms).

    By 2011 it was burning 4,053 million short tons and accounting for just over half of world coal consumption — four times more than the US, the world’s second-largest consumer, and five times more than the third, India.

    The US Energy Information Administration predicted in 2008 that world energy consumption would rise by 50% by 2030, with coal consumption rising between 2005 and 2030 by an average of 2% annually.

    But other factors are also involved. Plants and oceans which usually absorb some CO2 accounted for less in 2012 than in an average year, according to John Reilly, co-director of the MIT Joint Program on the Science and Policy of Global Change. Plant and oceanic carbon absorption varies naturally from one year to another.

    Michael Mann, a climate scientist at Pennsylvania State University, says both industrial emissions of carbon dioxide and atmospheric levels are rising faster than the worst-case scenarios used in the most recent international projections.

    He told AP that means the harmful effects of climate change will happen sooner.


    New and Improved Comments

    If you have trouble leaving a comment, review this help page. Still having problems? Let us know. If you find yourself moderated, take a moment to review our comment policy.

    Please enable JavaScript to view the comments powered by Disqus.

    Media Scoundrels Pillory Chavez Before He’s Buried

    0

    Stephen Lendman
    RINF Alternative News

    hugo_chavez2

    His passing made no difference. Media scoundrels don’t quit. They spent 14 years vilifying him. They did it unfairly. They haven’t stopped.

    They’re called scoundrels for good reason. They violate fundamental journalistic ethics. They lie for power. They turn truth on its head.

    They substitute managed news misinformation. They support wealth, power, privilege and dominance. They’re in bed with wrong over right.

    They spurn rule of law principles and democratic values. They’re well paid to do so. They betray readers and viewers. They do so unconscionably. They don’t give a damn, and it shows.

    Why anyone follows them they’ll have to explain. Tune them out. Ignore their publications. Choose reliable alternative sources.

    Get informed. Stay that way. Why settle for manipulated rubbish. Real news, information and analysis is readily available. Use it daily. Know what matters most.

    On March 5, Chavez passed. An era went with him. Venezuelans owe him much. They won’t forget.

    He transformed an oligarch-run nation into a model participatory democracy. America’s sham one pales by comparison. Venezuelans get the real thing and much more.

    They deplore what used to be. They won’t tolerate going back. Chavismo lives! Bolivarianism is policy. Venezuelans won’t let it die. It’s too important to preserve. Not according to media scoundrels.

    On March 5, The New York Times claimed Venezuela today is “bitterly divided.” It’s “in the grip of a political crisis.” It grew “more acute” in recent weeks.

    Times writer William Neuman lied. He’s paid to do so. Venezuelans overwhelmingly support Chavismo. His death changes nothing.

    Dallas Morning News editor Sharon Grigs headlined “Chavez’s death: Now Venezuela can reclaim its lost democracy.” She wouldn’t recognize the real thing if it bit her on the rump.

    The Washington Post did no better. It called Chavez “polarizing.” An “institutional crisis” exists.

    Other media scoundrels piled on. They pillory what deserves praise. Chavez institutionalized what won’t change. Venezuelans won’t tolerate their ugly past. They’ll challenge dark forces to prevent it.

    The Washington Times said “Chavistas’ mourn dictator.” White House/Capitol Hill reaction ranged from “cautious optimism” to “good riddance.”

    Obama vilified Chavez often. He scorned him unconscionably. He lied repeatedly. He’s a serial liar.

    He now says America “reaffirms its support for the Venezuelan people and its interests in developing a constructive relationship with the Venezuelan government.”

    He doesn’t give a damn about ordinary Venezuelans. He never did and doesn’t now.

    Washington tolerates no independent leaders. Chavez was marked for removal. CIA rogues likely killed him. Perhaps he was poisoned or exposed to cancer causing elements.

    Israel used polonium to murder Arafat. Perhaps something similar caused Chavez’s death. It wouldn’t be the first time America assassinated a foreign leader. It won’t be the last. Its rap sheet includes many.

    BBC said “Iconic Venezuelan president Hugo Chavez dies.” He leaves behind an “economic muddle.”

    He achieved impressive economic growth and prosperity. Britain’s government pales by comparison. It’s lawless, corrupt, dysfunctional, and hugely unequal. BBC’s its propaganda mouthpiece. Don’t expect it to explain.

    Media scoundrels attacked Chavez. They did so before he’s buried. His state funeral is Friday. Have they no shame? They don’t now and never did.

    Murdoch’s the worst of a bad bunch. His world reflects demagoguery, propaganda, predatory capitalism, warmongering and sleaze.

    Journalist Mike Royko’s (1932 – 1997) assessment bears repeating. “(N)o self-respecting fish would (want to) be wrapped in a Murdoch paper.”

    “His goal (isn’t) journalism.” It’s bottom line priorities. It’s “vast power, political power.” He wields it unscrupulously. He’s a world class predator.

    He uses deception, intimidation, and bullying. He does so to get his way. He hires likeminded scoundrels. Do it his way or work elsewhere.

    No middle ground is permissible. No independent journalists get hired. Truth tellers need not apply. No honest brokers wanted. No telling it like it is.

    On March 5, Murdoch’s Wall Street Journal headlined “Hugo Chavez: The lesson is to beware the rule of charismatic demagogues.”

    In December 1998, Venezuelans elected him. A dark era ended. Chavez made things “worse,” said the Journal. It lied saying so.

    “By 1998, the the Soviet Union was a memory, Latin American countries from Mexico to Chile were successfully adopting free-market policies, and Chavez’s friend and role model – Cuba’s Fidel Castro – was a discredited dinosaur.”

    Castro’s a model leader. He transformed Cuba responsibly. He did so from police state harshness/casino/brothel corruption into an equitable socialist state.

    He was Chavez’s mentor and friend. Chavez called him his father and role model. They bonded. They stayed close until until his death.

    Not according to WSJThink. “Chavez showed that it’s possible to run against the tides of history, at least for a while, and at least if you happen to get lucky with an oil revenue bonanza.”

    Chavez used Venezuela’s oil wealth “to purchase political support of Venezuela’s poor, the army and a loyal nouveau riche.”

    “It also allowed him to become a classic petro-dictator.”

    “In 1999 he revised the Venezuelan constitution to give him expanded powers.”

    “He used a constitutional assembly under his control to appoint a chavista Supreme Court.”

    “He stripped independent TV and radio stations of their licenses and intimidated reporters with draconian libel laws.”

    Fact check

    Murdoch lies need challenging. They’re over-the-top and unconscionable.

    Chavez used Venezuela’s oil wealth responsibly. Everyone benefitted. Populism replaced neoliberal harshness.

    Bolivarianism prioritizes vital needs. Living standards improved remarkably. Disadvantaged Venezuelans benefitted most.

    Child mortality fell from 20 per 1,000 to 13. Unemployment dropped from 14.5% to 6.4%.

    Income inequality is Latin America’s lowest. Poverty was cut in half. Extreme poverty fell over 70%. Economic growth in 2011 was 4.8%. In 2012, it was 5.6%. Forecasts estimate 6% in 2013.

    Hundreds of thousands of new homes were built. Commerce grew 9.2%. Communications advanced 7.2%. Manufacturing increased 2.1%. Oil sector production increased.

    Growth created jobs. Millions got free healthcare and education. They did so for the first time. Pension eligibility tripled.

    Pre-Chavez years were disastrous.” From 1980 – 1998, per capita income fell. Chavez turned disaster into success. Venezuela’s future looks promising. Give Chavez the credit he deserves.

    Corporate owners dominate Venezuela’s media. Censorship doesn’t exist. Short of advocating sedition or treason, they’re free to publish or air what they wish. They take full advantage. They vilify populist reform. They pilloried Chavez for institutionalizing it.

    “Though elections were held on schedule, (Chavez) made sure to tilt the playing field….Public workers risked being fired if they voted against him. It was the sort of election only Jimmy Carter could bless.”

    Fact check

    Carter Center representatives monitor Venezuelan elections. Jimmy Carter calls its process “the best in the world.” He does for good reason. It’s open, free and fair.

    It shames America’s sham process. Duopoly power runs things. Republicans and Democrats replicate each other. They’re two sides of the same coin.

    They’re beholden to monied interests. They sold their souls for power.

    People have no say. Voters get the best democracy money can buy. Neoliberal harshness, permanent wars, and police state repression follow.

    Venezuelan democracy is genuine. Voters need no persuasion. Chavez instituted the real thing. Venezuelans want it no other way.

    Expect what he began to continue. It’s hardwired to stay. It’s part of Venezuelan culture. It won’t fade and die.

    The Journal claims life for Venezuela’s “bec(ame) worse.” It lied saying so. It’s never been better in generations.

    “Chavez made his mark on the world stage by forging alliances with Bashar Assad in Syria and Mahmoud Ahmadinejad in Iran, giving sanctuary to Colombia’s narco-terrorist FARC movement, providing the Castro regime with free oil, and inveighing loudly against the United States.”

    “He succeeded in spawning political imitators in Ecuador and Bolivia.”

    Chavez governed responsibly. He allied with other independent leaders. He prioritized right over wrong. Journal editors can’t tolerate his success. He represented the threat of a good example.

    Venezuelans “have to fight to reclaim the democracy they once enjoyed….Let’s hope Venezuelans seize the chance to bury the tragic legacy of Chavismo alongside its author’s corpse.”

    Chavismo lives. Bolivarianism delivered democracy. Venezuelans got what they never had. They mourn their great loss.

    They want Chavez buried alongside Bolivar. He’s in Venezuela’s Panteon Nacional (Temple of all the Gods). It lies on Caracas’ northern edge.

    Its central nave is dedicated to Bolivar. It’s adorned with his bronze sarcophagus and paintings reflecting his life. In 1883, an impressive crystal chandelier was installed. It was done on the centennial of his birth.

    Expect Chavez be interned there. He belongs nowhere else. Both leaders stood tall. They supported what’s right. Venezuelans won’t ever forget.

    America never had anyone like them. Its deplorable government reflects it. Today it’s worse than ever.

    It’s corporatist, soulless, lawless, belligerent, and repressive. It’s a hair’s breath from tyranny. Don’t explain media scoundrels to explain.

    Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago. He can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

    His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

    http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

    Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com.

    English-speaking Islamic extremist increase worries US, EU

    0

    Published time: March 07, 2013 09:53

    AFP Photo / Khalil Al-Murshidi

    Western officials are disturbed by the growing use of English-language recruitment of Islamic extremists online, especially from the UK to Syria. They fear the return of new English-speaking recruits to the EU to plot attacks at home or in the US.

    European intelligence sources revealed that up to 60-70 people have left Britain to join in military factions to fight against the Syrian government, Reuters reported.

    They have also noted an increase in the number of Internet messages directed at potential English-speaking militants in the UK to join in the fight against Syria’s government.

    Both the US and EU security officials confirm that there has been a growing number of English-language recruitment videos and online content, which is proving successful in luring dozens of English-speaking Muslims from their homes in Europe to travel to the Middle East and fight in places such as Syria.

    Even though the US and EU policy supports anti-Assad forces, the problem arises when English-speaking recruits join the extreme, anti-Western Syrian rebel factions, become terrorists and then return home, stated officials.

    The majority of those who already left UK to fight in Syria have joined the militant anti-Assad faction, known as Al-Nusra, which the US has named a terrorist group connected with Al-Qaeda in Iraq, Reuters reported.

    AFP Photo / Carl Court

    An increase in English-content videos and online messages has been reported by security officials in the US and the EU.

    Last week a jihadist website controlled by an Islamic militant group based in Somalia, al Shabaab, posted a new video of a man speaking English and calling himself Abu Ahmed al-Amriki (Arabic for ‘the American’), counterterrorism blog the Long War Journal reported.

    In the video Abu Ahmed calls upon all Muslims living in the West to give up their lives there and join the Islamic holy war in Somalia, Mali and Afghanistan. The identity of the man in the video remains unknown.

    In February another man posted a second of two video messages calling himself an “American mujahid [holy warrior]” and praising his involvement with rebels fighting against the Syrian government, stated a group that monitors militant websites, the Flashpoint Global Partners.

    “Bashar Assad, your days are numbered,” the man speaking in English with an American accent is quoted as saying, referring to Syria’s president. “You should just quit now, while you can, and leave. You are going to die, no matter what. Where you go we will find you and kill you.”

    US officials also noted an increase in English-language online literature, which calls on wannabe militants to turn to violence and provides instructions on how to use household items to cause damage and death.

    “We’ve been monitoring [these developments] and yes, it’s concerning,” Deputy Commissioner and spokesman of the New York Police Department Paul Browne told Reuters.

    This past week, Al-Qaeda in the Arabian Peninsula (AQAP) released two English-language publications in its ‘Inspire’ magazine targeting aspiring holy warriors.

    Image from al-malahem.com

    The first piece is a death list, which names selected Westerners and includes prominent figures, such as the anti-Islamic Dutch politician Geert Wilders, and the Koran-burning Florida preacher Terry Jones.

    The other publication is a rulebook, ‘The Lone Mujahid Pocketbook’, which explains how to cause traffic accidents, deadly ambushes, gas leaks, destroy buildings and start forest fires in your own country.

    The publication asks the reader: “Have u been lookin’ 4 a way to join the Mujahideen in frontlines? Well, there’s no need to travel abroad, coz the frontline has come to you… Just read ‘n’ apply the contents of this guide.”

    Recruitment tactics have also made headway in social media.

    The Al-Qaeda-linked Shabaab militia from South Somalia began tweeting in English and gained more than 20,000 subscribers by the time Twitter closed its account in January. As the group set-up a new account, it gained 2,000 followers in a week in February.

    Dotcom can sue NZ’s intelligence agency, court rules

    0

    Published time: March 07, 2013 13:52

    Megaupload founder Kim Dotcom (AFP Photo / Michael Bradley)

    A New Zealand court has sided with IT tycoon Kim Dotcom, confirming his right to sue the national spy agency for damages over illegally gathering intelligence on him.

    The Court of Appeal upheld last year’s ruling of the High Court, which the country’s attorney general was seeking to overturn.

    The Government Communications Security Bureau (GCSB) was spying on Dotcom prior to the police raid on his home in 2012. The agency did so illegally, believing that the German national had no residency in New Zealand.

    The blunder led to Prime Minister John Key apologizing to Dotcom, saying New Zealand “failed to provide that appropriate protection for him.” Dotcom wants to include GCSB in a suit he plans against the police alleging wrongful arrest.

    The ruling also means GCSB will have to disclose to Dotcom’s attorneys detail of information sharing arrangements it had with foreign agencies, particularly US authorities. American law enforcers seek extradition of Dotcom to the US for trial over alleged internet piracy and wire fraud. The charges carry a maximum sentence of 20 years, if proven. Extradition hearings are scheduled to begin later in March.

    A view at the "Dotcom Mansion" (AFP Photo / Michael Bradley)

    Dotcom’s defense team questions the legality of evidence seized in the raid after the warrants for it were declared invalid.

    Earlier the Appeals Court ruled that the US authorities are not obliged to present their entire corps of evidence against Dotcom to his attorneys. A summary of the case is sufficient, the judges decided.

    Dotcom’s file storage service Megaupload was taken down in January 2012 by authorities over its use to store pirated movies, music, software and other content. US officials say he and six associates caused damages amounting $500 million to copyright holders and encouraged users to engage in piracy, allegations Dotcom denies.

    French unemployment hits 14-year high

    0

    Official data show that the French unemployment rate rose to 10.6 percent for the final quarter of 2012, hitting a 14-year high.

    The national statistics institute (INSEE) released the data on Thursday, which showed an increase of 0.3 percent from the third quarter’s rate of 10.3 percent.

    The rate is based on the measurement criteria of the International Labor Organization (ILO) and includes unemployment in mainland France and overseas territories.

    In addition, the INSEE revealed that a quarter of the country’s 15- to 24-year-olds were unemployed, making them the worst-hit group.

    French President Francois Hollande acknowledged last month that the government would not be able to meet the promised unemployment target for this year after having already backtracked on the growth and deficit targets for 2013.

    The country’s unemployment rate has increased since Hollande took office in May 2012, despite his promises to create 100,000 new jobs per year.

    Europe plunged into a financial crisis in early 2008. The worsening debt crisis has forced the EU governments to adopt harsh austerity measures and tough economic reforms.

    CAH/HMV

    Germany warns on arming Syria rebels

    0

    Germany’s foreign minister Guido Westerwelle has warned against sending arms to the militants in Syria, saying such a measure would broaden the conflict in the Arab country into the whole region.

    MA/MA

    N. Korea threatens ‘pre-emptive’ nuclear strike

    0

    Published time: March 07, 2013 09:32

    AFP Photo / Pedro Ugarte

    A spokesman for North Korea’s Foreign Ministry says his country may deliver a pre-emptive nuclear strike against its enemies in case an attack on Pyongyang is launched.

    “Since the United States is about to ignite a nuclear war, we will be exercising our right to a preemptive nuclear attack against the headquarters of the aggressor in order to protect our supreme interest,” said the statement carried by the official KCNA news agency.

    The reclusive state has ramped up its military rhetoric after conducting its third nuclear test last month, threatening to use every means, including the nuclear arsenal, against any aggression.

    Lately Pyongyang accused Washington and Seoul of preparing an attack on North Korea under the guise of a joint military exercise.

    Military experts say North Korea is years away from developing a long-range missile and a nuclear warhead to attack mainland US.

    The war of words continues as the UN Security Council mulls over a new round of sanctions against Pyongyang, which are meant to be a response to the February nuclear test.

    Militants in Syria call for more arms

    0

    The so-called Free Syrian Army’s chief of staff Salim Idris has issued a request for more arms and ammunition from the Western countries to further assist the militants in their war against President Bashar al-Assad.

    During a visit to Brussels, Idris said on Wednesday that the militants could topple the Syrian government “within a month” if they received more weaponry from Western powers.

    He further called on the European Union (EU) to lift an arms embargo on Syria for the facilitation of the provision of weapons to the militants in Syria.

    This is the second formal request for arms by Idris this month.

    On Sunday, Assad criticized Britain for its recent efforts to exempt militants from the EU arms embargo.

    British Foreign Secretary William Hague said in an interview on Sunday that his country is considering supplying arms to the militants to fight against government forces.

    Syria has been experiencing unrest since March 2011. Many people, including large numbers of security forces, have been killed in the turmoil.

    The Syrian government says that the chaos is being orchestrated from outside the country, and there are reports that a very large number of the militants are foreign nationals.

    Several international human rights organizations have accused foreign-sponsored militants of committing war crimes.

    SZH/HMV

    US urged to bomb to deter cyber attacks

    0

    A US military advisory panel has urged the development of a special force with own bombers, cruise missiles and cyber weapons to respond to a ‘devastating’ cyber attack on the Pentagon’s computer system.

    A new report by the Defense Science Board (DSB), which advises top officials of the US Defense Department on technological threats and challenges, states that the military must adopt measures to “ensure the President has options beyond a nuclear-only response to catastrophic cyber-attack,” the US-based Foreign Policy magazine reports in a Wednesday article.

    Written by DSB’s Task Force on Resilient Military Systems, the report suggests that the US “might have to rely on nuclear weapons to retaliate after a large-scale cyber attack,” the article adds, while noting that American defense officials have acknowledged efforts to build “offensive cyber capabilities to deter destructive cyber attacks.”

    To avert a nuclear response, the report further calls for development of an elite team of cyber and conventional forces that are “heavily protected against cyber attack and dedicated to retaliating after such a strike.”

    “Forces supporting this capability are isolated and segmented from general-purpose forces to maintain the highest level of cyber resiliency at an affordable cost. Nuclear weapons would remain the ultimate response and anchor the deterrence ladder,” the DSB report states, as quoted in the article.

    The document further recommends a number of weapons systems for this special conventional deterrent force: “Global selective strike systems e.g. penetrating bomber, submarines with long range cruise missiles, Conventional Prompt Global Strike (CPGS), survivable national and combatant command.”

    To put the plan together, the report urges US military leaders to develop “an updated Strategic Deterrence Strategy, including the development of cyber escalation scenarios and red lines,” according to the influential journal, which mainly covers issues related to US national security and foreign policy.

    American officials have recently expressed major concerns about foreign-based cyber attacks on computer networks of principal US government agencies and industries.

    MFB/MFB

    Iran proposes energy charter for ECO

    0

    Iran’s Oil Minister Rostam Qasemi has proposed drafting an “energy charter” for the Economic Cooperation Organization (ECO) aimed at expanding energy cooperation among the member states, Press TV reports.

    “Regional energy cooperation should be a top priority for ECO member countries. Governments could facilitate such cooperation through private entities. This way they can guarantee regional energy security and free trade, but for this we have to come up with an energy charter first.”

    Qasemi made the remarks in an address to the third ministerial meeting of ECO in Tehran on Wednesday.

    He said the charter could cover all aspects of ECO’s commercial energy activities including trade, transit, investments and energy efficiency.

    The Iranian oil minister also said that despite holding around one fourth of the world’s total natural gas reserves and one eighth of crude oil reserves, ECO countries have had limited energy cooperation or free trade.

    Meanwhile, several European officials who attended the meeting voiced their countries’ support for more cooperation with ECO in this regard.

    “We have a particular interest and are trying to offer cooperation to the regional states particularly in the energy sector,” said Jens-Petter Kjemprud, the Norwegian ambassador to Tehran.

    Swedish Ambassador to Tehran Peter Tejler also expressed his country’s “support” for every step taken by ECO in this regard.

    Also Alessandro Amadio, an official at the UN Industrial Development Organization, pointed to the ongoing Iranian projects in the industrial sector saying, “We are helping the Iranian government to have access” to the needed funds in this regard.

    Speaking on the sidelines of the meeting, Qasemi said ECO member countries will form consortiums to expand their cooperation in the energy sector.

    “The state and the private sectors of ECO member countries are to form joint consortiums aimed at expanding cooperation in the energy sector,” said Qasemi.

    Considering that the ECO region holds a huge portion of the word’s energy reserves, it was decided that ECO members cooperate in the various fields of training, research, distribution, production and exploration.

    ECO is an intergovernmental regional organization established in 1985 by Iran, Pakistan and Turkey for the purpose of promoting economic, technical and cultural cooperation among member states.

    The organization was expanded in 1992 to include seven new members, namely Afghanistan, Azerbaijan, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Tajikistan, Turkmenistan and Uzbekistan.

    ECO provides its members with a platform to discuss ways of improving economic development, and promoting trade and investment opportunities.

    YH/HJL/MA

    US, China to tighten UN bans on N Korea

    0

    North Korean leader Kim Jong-Un (C) inspects an artillery firing drill of the Korean People’s Army units. (File photo)

    Washington and Beijing plan to tighten the United Nations’ sanctions on North Korea, in response to the East Asian country’s latest nuclear test.

    The UN Security Council is set to vote on a resolution proposed by the US and China at 1500 GMT on Thursday.

    The resolution that comes after weeks of negotiations behind closed doors would have the council “expressing the gravest concern at the nuclear test” staged by Pyongyang.

    On February 12, North Korea announced that it had successfully carried out its third underground nuclear test, which involved a “miniaturized” device and was conducted in a “perfect manner.”

    The nuclear test drew immediate condemnation from the UN and several countries including the United States, South Korea, Russia and Japan.

    The nuclear test came after North Korea’s December rocket launch. On December 12, 2012, Pyongyang announced that it had launched a long-range rocket from the Sohae Satellite Launching Station, located in Cholsan County of North Pyongan Province, and successfully placed a satellite into orbit.

    The resolution targets North Korean diplomats and adds the names of three individuals as well as the government’s Second Academy of Natural Sciences and Korea Complex Equipment Import Corporation to the UN blacklist for a travel ban and assets freeze.

    Furthermore, under the new resolution inspections of suspicious land, sea or air cargos will become mandatory.

    The resolution also asks the UN’s member states to block any financial services or monetary transfers that “could contribute to the DPRK’s nuclear or ballistic missile programs.”

    US ambassador to the United Nations Susan Rice has said that the resolution “builds up, strengthens and significantly expands the scope of the strong UN sanctions already in place” on North Korea.

    China’s UN ambassador, Li Baodong, has also noted, “A strong signal must be sent out that the nuclear test is against the will of the international community.”

    Pyongyang had previously carried out two nuclear tests on October 9, 2006 and May 25, 2009.

    MR/HMV

    Hungry Children Will Be Among First to Suffer From Sequestration

    0

    Hungry Children Will Be Among First to Suffer From Sequestration

    Email this item Email   Print this item Print   Share this item... Share
    Posted on Mar 6, 2013

    By Joe Conason

    The difference between a natural disaster and a disaster caused by politicians is that the latter will almost always hit the poor and the obscure most heavily, while a hurricane or a flood will at least sometimes spread the suffering more evenly.

    As the “sequester” unfolds in Washington, we see this same old pattern holding firm: Republican leaders, now hustling to shirk responsibility for the catastrophe they predicted, insist those automated budget axes won’t do any damage at all.

    Has anyone felt any pain yet?

    Not during the first few days, of course, but when the cuts begin to bite a month or so from now, the first to feel it will be the unemployed and the destitute for whom a few dollars of government support mean so much in their daily survival calculation. A decent policy would seek to spare them the brunt of political mistakes made by other, far more comfortable people, but this process permits no such choices–and the most vulnerable will by definition be hurt most.

    According to the Center on Budget and Policy Priorities, which began to warn of sequestration’s very real impact weeks ago, the government will have to turn away as many as 775,000 women and children who qualify for WIC, the “highly effective” national nutrition program. Back when there was bipartisan opposition to letting people starve, legislators of both parties worked to ensure that WIC funding was sufficient to enroll every qualified family. Everyone seemed to agree that the program’s cost was trivial compared with the social, moral, and yes, economic benefits of properly feeding all hungry infants and children.

    Not under the sequester, when common sense and compassion become impermissible. Not under the sequester, which not only enforces the cruel cuts but allows their perpetrators to deny ownership of the specific consequences.

    What makes the automatic cutback in WIC funding even worse is that the amount involved is small in modern terms. The WIC budget will have to be reduced by about $699 million compared with 2012, or the same amount as the projected price of one “Littoral Combat Ship,” the Navy’s latest vessel project.

    Evidently a principle is at stake that can be vindicated only by taking food from the mouths of pregnant women, breastfeeding women, and infants, however. Enforcing this decision – and it is a decision – are men and women who will assure voters of their fervent religious piety as well as their absolute devotion to America’s beleaguered families.

    Or some of America’s families.

    © 2013 CREATORS.COM

    Get truth delivered to
    your inbox every week.

    Previous item: Budget Wars: A Case for Hope



    New and Improved Comments

    If you have trouble leaving a comment, review this help page. Still having problems? Let us know. If you find yourself moderated, take a moment to review our comment policy.

    Please enable JavaScript to view the comments powered by Disqus.

    Suspect in Bolshoi Ballet chief acid attack pleads not guilty to severity of assault

    0

    Published time: March 07, 2013 11:35

    Bolshoi Theater's principal dancer Pavel Dmitrichenko (RIA Novosti)

    The suspect in the acid attack on the Bolshoi Ballet chief, dancer Pavel Dmitrichenko, denied he ordered to inflict harm upon Sergey Filin after his arrest in Moscow.

    The suspect’s lawyer indicated that his client acknowledges “the factual guilt in committing the crime,” but is outraged by the media claims that he ordered to attack the Bolshoi Ballet chief with acid. 

    Pavel Dmitrichenko assured investigators that he had only ordered a beating for Filin, and the acid attack wasn’t his idea.

    “I would like to say that I didn’t order to inflict harm upon [Filin],” he told investigators. “Yes, I masterminded the crime, but not to the extent to which it happened,” the dancer indicated.

    Two days ago, however, Dmitrichenko, one of the leading Bolshoi Theater dancers, confessed to police that he masterminded the acid attack on Sergey Filin, the Bolshoi Ballet’s artistic director.

    Two other alleged participants of the assault  were also detained, and admitted to their participation in the crime.

    On January 17, Sergey Filin, was attacked by a masked assailant who splashed acid in his face. The director, who suffered third-degree burns to his face, had to undergo several plastic and eye surgeries and is presently undergoing continued treatment in Germany.

    Bolshoi Theater's principal dancer Pavel Dmitrichenko (R) (RIA Novosti)

    Bolshoi Theater's principal dancer Pavel Dmitrichenko (RIA Novosti)

    Bolshoi Theater's principal dancer Pavel Dmitrichenko

    Bolshoi Theater's principal dancer Pavel Dmitrichenko

    Chavez death ‘no coincidence’: Communist leader suggests US plot

    0

    Published time: March 07, 2013 11:07

    Hugo Chavez (AFP Photo / Juan Baretto)

    The leader of Russia’s Communist Party has said that the death of Venezuelan leader Hugo Chavez may be part of a broader US plan to kill off its left-leaning Latin American opponents.

    “How did it happen that six leaders of Latin American countries which had criticized US policies and tried to create an influential alliance in order to be independent and sovereign states, fell ill simultaneously with the same disease?” Zyuganov said in comments reported by Russian state television.

    Chavez’s death from cancer “was far from a coincidence,” the leader of Russia’s second-largest political party speculated. Zyuganov called for an investigation under “international control” into the Venezuelan leader’s death.

    Among other left-wing Latin America leaders diagnosed with cancer are Brazilian President Dilma Rousseff, Paraguay’s former President Fernando Lugo, and Luiz Inácio Lula da Silva, the former leader of Brazil.

    Zyuganov’s comments echoed allegations by Venezuelan Vice-President Nicolas Maduro, who declared last week that Chavez had acquired terminal cancer, which was first diagnosed in June 2011, by the “historical enemies of our homeland.”

    Chavez died on March 5 at the age of 58.

    The United States denies that it played any part in Chavez’s death.

    “We completely reject the Venezuelan government’s claim that the United States is involved in any type of conspiracy to destabilize Venezuela government,” Defense Department spokesman Lt. Col. Todd Breasseale said in response to Caracas’ assertion.

    Chavez himself – who never missed an opportunity to berate the United States, even calling former US President George W. Bush “the devil” – speculated that the US may have acquired the ability to infect ‘undesirables’ with a fatal illness.

    “Would it be so strange that they’ve invented the technology to spread cancer and we won’t know about it for 50 years,” he asked a press conference in December 2011 after it was announced that Argentinian President Cristina Fernandez de Kirchner had thyroid cancer.

    Emphasizing that he was wary of making “rash accusations,” Chavez nevertheless said the incidences of cancer among Latin American leaders were “difficult to explain using the law of probabilities.”

    The former Venezuelan leader admitted after being diagnosed with his illness that retired Cuban leader Fidel Castro had warned of such a possibility: “Chávez take care. These people have developed technology. You are very careless. Take care what you eat, what they give you to eat … a little needle and they inject you with I don’t know what.”

    Castro himself was the target of several US assassination plots, according to declassified documents released by the CIA in 2007.

    ‘Farewell, Comandante:’ Venezuelans throng to view Chavez’s body in state (PHOTOS)

    0

    Published time: March 07, 2013 08:34

    Venezuelan Vice-President Nicolas Maduro (L) and Diosdado Cabello, Venezuelan president of the National Assembly stand next to teh coffin of late Venezuelan President Hugo Chavez at the Military Academy on March 6, 2013 in Caracas (AFP Photo / Presidencia)

    Following a seven-hour procession through the streets of Caracas, the coffin holding the body of late Venezuelan leader Hugo Chavez has been placed in a chapel in the Military Academy of Venezuela, where it will stay until the Friday funeral.

    Thousands of weeping supporters followed the hearse as it crawled from the military hospital where Chavez passed away to the Military Academy of Venezuela. Huge crowds lined up to bid a final farewell as his body was placed in half-open casket draped with the Venezuelan flag.

    Hugo Chavez died on March 5, following a long battle with cancer. The head of Venezuela’s presidential guard said Chavez died of a massive heart attack after a long period of suffering. The general was with the Venezuelan leader at the time of his death, he told AP.

    General Jose Ornella indicated that Chavez’s last words were the mouthed: “I don’t want to die. Please don’t let me die.”

    Chavez’s hand-picked successor Nicolas Maduro walked with a sober face alongside the car. He was accompanied by the late president’s staunch ally, Bolivian leader Evo Morales.

    Other close Latin American allies, including Argentine President Cristina Kirchner and Uruguay’s Jose Mejica, had already arrived in Caracas ahead of the state funeral, which is to take place on Friday.

    The coffin of the late Venezuelan President Hugo Chavez is carried to the Military Academy for his funeral on March 6, 2013 in Caracas (AFP Photo / Presidencia)

    Grieving family members, top officials and the foreign leaders attended a funeral Mass before Chavez’s open coffin.

    Balloons representing the colors of the Venezuelan flag were released outside the military academy as people chanted: “Chavez lives, the struggle goes on.”

    Flamboyant socialist leader Hugo Chavez, who led the so-called Bolivarian Revolution, passed away at the age of 58 on Tuesday following a two-year fight against cancer and a severe respiratory infection.

    His Vice President Nicolas Maduro has temporarily taken over and, with elections due to be called within 30 days. Defeating opposition leader Henrique Capriles, Chavez had been reelected last October for his fourth term but was almost absent from political life due to his battle with cancer.

    Now the country braces for new heated election, the outcome of which will determine whether a change in leadership will challenge the order established by Chavez’s revolution.

    Hugo Chavez's close relatives stand next to the coffin of the late Venezuelan President Hugo Chavez at the Military Academy on March 6, 2013 in Caracas (AFP Photo / Presidencia

    Now the country is braced for new hotly-contested election, the outcome of which will determine whether a change in leadership will challenge the order established by Chavez’s New Bolivarian Revolution.

    “We are going to see a very heated election and any intervention on the part of the US would be taken as hostility towards Venezuela and would play into the elections,” Latin America expert Miguel Tinker Salas told RT.

    “After the election of the new president, I think there are good conditions for an effort to re-establish relationships. But I think we need to understand that it’s not just Venezuela that had difficulty with Washington… WikiLeaks reports really indicate how the US attempted to maneuver and play country against country in Latin America, and provided a revealing look into how little US policy has changed, either from Bush or Obama.”

    Gregory Wilpert, co-founder of Venezuelanalaysis.com, is convinced that Nicolas Maduro is set to win the election as polls show that 55 against 36 per cent of the population back him. 

    He argues that throughout most of Chavez’s rule the country witnessed continuous economic growth.

    “Certainly there’s a problem in inefficiency in public administration, but that’s a chronic problem that’s been around since before Chavez. And claims that Chavez has somehow made this worse I don’t find believable… a lot of things have been repaired and a lot are in better shape than before,” he told RT.

    The coffin of the late Venezuelan President Hugo Chavez is carried to the Military Academy for his funeral on March 6, 2013 in Caracas (AFP Photo / Presidencia))

    Argentinian President Cristina Fernandez (L), Uruguayan President Jose Mujica (C) and Bolivian President Evo Morales (R) stand next to the coffin of the late Venezuelan President Hugo Chavez at the Military Academy on March 6, 2013 in Caracas (AFP Photo / Presidencia))

    The coffin of late Venezuelan leader Hugo Chavez covered with clothes that people have thrown at it, is driven through the streets of Caracas, after leaving the military hospital where he died of cancer, March 6, 2013 (Reuters / Edwin Montilva)

    Supporters of late Venezuelan leader Hugo Chavez watch as his coffin arrives at the Military Academy, where his wake will be held, in Caracas March 6, 2013. The banner reads, "Chavez, we will love you forever." (Reuters / Jorge Silva)

    Caps and posters of late Venezuelan leader Hugo Chavez lie on the hood of the hearse that carried his coffin to the Military Academy, where his wake will be held, in Caracas March 6, 2013 (Reuters / Jorge Silva)

    View of the hearse carrying the coffin of Venezuelan President Hugo Chavez while leaving the Military Hospital to the Military Academy, on March 6, 2013, in Caracas (AFP Photo / Luis Camocho)

    Handout picture released by Miraflores presidential palace press office showing an aerial view of the funeral cortege of late Venezuelan President Hugo Chavez on its way to the Military Academy, on March 6, 2013, in Caracas (AFP Photo)

    Handout picture released by Miraflores presidential palace press office showing an aerial view of the funeral cortege of late Venezuelan President Hugo Chavez on its way to the Military Academy, on March 6, 2013, in Caracas (AFP Photo)

    Obama to skip Knesset, address Israeli students instead

    0

    Published time: March 07, 2013 07:36

    Barack Obama (AFP Photo / Mandel Ngan)

    The White House has reportedly rejected Tel Aviv’s requests to have President Obama address Israel’s parliament during a late March trip to the country. Instead he will speak to students from major Israeli universities at a convention center in Jerusalem.

    Former US presidents Jimmy Carter, Bill Clinton and George W. Bush have all addressed the Knesset while in office.

    “The Israeli people certainly are thirsty to hear the president of the US speak to it directly, and there is no better place for him to do it than the Knesset,” said Binyamin Ben-Eliezer of the right-wing Likud Beitenu party, the acting Knesset speaker who advised Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu to invite Obama to address the plenum, as quoted by The Jerusalem Post.

    Obama is set to arrive in Israel on March 20.

    As he prepares for the trip, his team of advisers has been canvassing both Israelis and Americans on where he should address the Israeli people and what the audience should look like, Haaretz reports.

    In response, Netanyahu’s office and a large group of members of parliament told the White House that the Knesset would be the best place for the speech. However, Obama and his team decided that the speech should be intended to reach the Israeli public directly, instead of through its politicians. With the younger generation in mind, the White House went with university students.

    The US Embassy in Tel Aviv is now charged with coming up with between 1,500 and 2,000 guests to invite to Jerusalem’s International Convention Center for the address. Most will be students, with a couple hundred journalists in attendance.

    “The president is coming to Israel to speak to the people and send a message to the public about the strength of the relationship with the US,” a senior American official told Haaretz. “He will make it clear in his speech that the US has no lack of domestic political disputes, but when it comes to Israel and its security, the support comes from both ends of the political spectrum.”

    Three Things That Doomsday Preppers Should Ask Themselves

    0
    Mac Slavo
    March 6th, 2013
    SHTFplan.com

    Read by 32,020 people

    Daniel Ameduri (www.FutureMoneyTrends.com) has spent the last six years warning Americans about the coming economic collapse, signs to look for, and how to prepare. He is the producer of numerous micro documentaries seen by over five million people via his Vision Victory Youtube Channel and regularly hosts interviews with some of the world’s leading contrarian thinkers including G. Edward Griffin, Peter Schiff, Jim Rogers, John Williams and Doug Casey.

    In his latest message to viewers he discusses the three things preppers should be asking themselves.

    1. What are you going to do with your wealth?
    2. What are you going to do with your life?
    3. Where do you draw the line?

    Many of us expect a continued decline in our economy, depreciation of our currency and a significant shift in the world as we have come to know it. As a result, we’ve taken the time to prepare ourselves for any number of potential ‘events’ that could take down our power grid, leave our system of commerce at a standstill, and cause widespread civil unrest.

    We’re always preparing in one form or fashion.

    But one of our most important assets — our time — is often overlooked. And, rather than enjoying our lives, we may often delve so far down the rabbit hole that it’s hard to get back out.

    Daniel addresses this and other issues that preppers face, including the one question that is likely on the minds of many Americans: Where am I going to draw the line?

    This is the worst thing to possibly talk about. But it has to be said.

    Where are you going to draw the line?

    Start thinking about that now.

    I’m willing to allow the government to take roughly 35% to 40% of my income, because if I don’t allow them to do that I’m not going to be able to spend any more time with my wife and kids…

    I don’t like it. I think it’s wrong. I think they’re thieves. They’re bullies.

    But where is the line going to be drawn. Is it going to be drawn if they come to get my weapons? Think about that. If they come to get just your weapons, and you don’t know this is going on around nationally, likely most of you will give up your weapon.

    However, if it’s on the news that they’re taking everybody’s weapons, that’s a game changer. That might be where everybody says ‘no, no’ this is enough.

    For some of you, you may be looking at me like I’m crazy saying ‘no way, if they knock on my door the only thing I’m going to surrender is the lead.’

    …

    Are you going to draw the line when they tax you too much? Are you going to draw the line when they want to immunize your children without you giving them consent?

    Where are you going to draw the line?

    That’s a rough question.

    It sure is, and it’s one that each of us needs to consider, and we need to do so in a realistic manner.

    Watch: The 3 things that Doomsday Preppers should ask themselves


    (Watch at  VisionVictory on Youtube)

    Author: Mac Slavo
    Views: Read by 32,020 people
    Date: March 6th, 2013
    Website: www.SHTFplan.com

    Copyright Information: Copyright SHTFplan and Mac Slavo. This content may be freely reproduced in full or in part in digital form with full attribution to the author and a link to www.shtfplan.com. Please contact us for permission to reproduce this content in other media formats.

    Budget Wars: A Case for Hope

    0

    Budget Wars: A Case For Hope

    Email this item Email   Print this item Print   Share this item... Share
    Posted on Mar 6, 2013

    By E.J. Dionne, Jr.

    There are, believe it or not, grounds for hoping that the sequester, stupid as it is, might open the way to ending our nation’s budget stalemate.

    Hope is in short supply right now, but the case for seeing a way out of the current mess rests on knowable facts and plausible assumptions.

    It starts with the significant number of Republicans in the Senate–possibly as many 20–who think what’s going on is foolish and counterproductive. The White House is betting that enough GOP senators are prepared to make a deal along lines that President Obama has already put forward.

    Obama’s lieutenants argue that while Republicans are aware that the president is seeking new revenue through tax reform, many did not fully grasp the extent to which he has offered significant long-term spending cuts. These include reductions in Medicare and a willingness (to the consternation of many Democrats) to alter the index that determines Social Security increases. Obama has proposed $930 billion in cuts to get $580 billion in revenues.

    Senior administration officials note that Obama cannot stray too far from his existing offer, which was already a compromise, without losing the Democratic votes a deal would need. But his framework, they believe, could create a basis for negotiation with Republican senators such as Sen. Lindsey Graham, who dislike the deep automatic cuts in defense spending, and others, such as Sens. Susan Collins and Bob Corker, who dislike government-by-showdown.

    Graham was especially bullish, declaring that Obama’s outreach to Republicans–the president invited about a dozen GOP senators to dinner on Wednesday night–was “the most encouraging engagement on a big issue I’ve seen since the early years of his presidency.”

    If the Senate actually passed a bipartisan solution, it would still have to clear the House, requiring Speaker John Boehner to allow yet another bill get through with a large number of Democratic votes. But the sequester almost certainly marked the high point of solidarity among House Republicans. Letting it take hold was an easy concession for Boehner to make to more militant conservatives, and kept them from pushing toward government shutdowns or a politically and economically dangerous confrontation over the debt ceiling.

    Now comes the hard part for Boehner. Already, there is pushback from more moderate conservatives against the depth of the budget cuts that Rep. Paul Ryan will have to propose in in order to balance the budget in 10 years. At least some House Republicans may come to see a bipartisan Senate-passed deal as more attractive than the alternatives.

    In the meantime, the House passed a continuing resolution on Wednesday to keep the government functioning until the fall. It provided the Defense Department with greater flexibility to handle the automatic cuts. The Senate and the House must agree on a bill by March 27, and Sen. Barbara Mikulski, a Democrat who chairs the Appropriations Committee, argues that flexibility on defense should be matched on “compelling human priorities” and in other domestic areas, including science and technology. Yet both sides seem committed to keeping the government open, which would create a kind of cold peace.

    But this will not prevent the automatic cuts from becoming more noticeable, and they are likely to get more unpopular as time goes on. Their effects will be felt by, among others, air travelers, school districts, state governments, universities, and the employees of defense and other government contractors. House Republicans representing districts with large military bases are apt to be especially eager to reverse the cuts.

    From Obama’s point of view, engaging with Senate Republicans now to reach a broad settlement makes both practical sense, because there is a plausible chance for a deal, and political sense, because he will demonstrate how far he has been willing to go in offering cuts that Republicans say they support. In the process, he would underscore that the current impasse has been caused primarily by the refusal of House Republicans to accept new revenues.

    While it’s the GOP that has been using serial, self-created crises to gain political leverage, many in the party are no less worn out by them than the Democrats. “Even we are tired … of lurching from one cliff to another,” Sen. John McCain, R-Ariz., told The Wall Street Journal on Wednesday. “I think that’s lending some pressure towards trying to come up with some kind of a grand bargain.”

    Thus does the strongest reason for hope arise from one of the most basic human responses: exhaustion.

    E.J. Dionne’s e-mail address is ejdionne(at)washpost.com.
     
    © 2013, Washington Post Writers Group

    Get truth delivered to
    your inbox every week.

    Previous item: Rand Paul’s Filibuster of John Brennan



    New and Improved Comments

    If you have trouble leaving a comment, review this help page. Still having problems? Let us know. If you find yourself moderated, take a moment to review our comment policy.

    Please enable JavaScript to view the comments powered by Disqus.

    Rand Paul’s Filibuster of John Brennan

    0

    Rand Paul’s Filibuster of John Brennan

    Email this item Email   Print this item Print   Share this item... Share
    Posted on Mar 6, 2013

    By Amy Goodman

    You could say that a filibuster occurs when a senator drones on and on. The problem with the U.S. Senate was that there were too few senators speaking about drones this week.

    President Barack Obama’s controversial nomination of John Brennan as director of the Central Intelligence Agency was held up Wednesday afternoon by a Senate filibuster. The reason: Brennan’s role in targeted killings by drones, and President Obama’s presumed authority to kill U.S. citizens, without any due process, if they pose an “imminent threat.” The effort was led by tea-party Republican Rand Paul of Kentucky, joined by several of his Republican colleagues. Among the Democrats, at the time of this writing, only Sen. Ron Wyden of Oregon had joined in the genuine, old-fashioned “talking filibuster,” wherein the activities of the Senate floor are held up by a senator’s speech.

    Members of Congress, tasked with oversight of intelligence and military matters, have repeatedly demanded the memoranda from the White House detailing the legal basis for the drone program, only to be repeatedly denied. The nomination of Brennan has opened up the debate, forcing the Obama administration to make nominal gestures of compliance. The answers so far have not satisfied Sen. Paul.

    Nearing hour six of his filibuster, Sen. Paul admitted: “I can’t ultimately stop the nomination, but what I can do is try to draw attention to this and try to get an answer … that would be something if we could get an answer from the president … if he would say explicitly that noncombatants in America won’t be killed by drones. The reason it has to be answered is because our foreign drone strike program does kill noncombatants. They may argue that they are conspiring or they may someday be combatants, but if that is the same standard that we are going to use in the United States, it is a far different country than I know about.”

    The issue of extrajudicial execution of U.S. citizens, whether on U.S. soil or elsewhere, is clearly vital. But also important is the U.S. government’s now-seemingly routine killing of civilians around the world, whether by drone strikes, night raids conducted by special operations forces or other lethal means.

    Rand Paul’s filibuster followed a curious route, including references to Lewis Carroll’s “Alice in Wonderland,” and quotes from noted progressive, constitutional attorney and Guardian columnist Glenn Greenwald and blogger Kevin Gosztala of Firedoglake.

    U.S. Attorney General Eric Holder sent a letter to Sen. Paul March 4, writing, “It is possible, I suppose, to imagine an extraordinary circumstance in which it would be necessary and appropriate under the Constitution and applicable laws of the United States for the President to authorize the military to use lethal force within the territory of the United States.”

    Holder noted that Paul’s question was “entirely hypothetical.” So, on the Senate floor, Paul brought up the case of two actual U.S. citizens killed by drone strikes, Anwar al-Awlaki and his son, Abdulrahman. Anwar al-Awlaki was killed by a U.S. drone strike in Yemen on Sept. 30, 2011. Two weeks later, also in Yemen, his 16-year-old son Abdulrahman, a Denver native, was also killed by a drone strike. Paul asked during his filibuster, “If you happen to be the son of a bad person, is that enough to kill you?”

    As Sen. Paul filibustered, Will Fitzgibbon wrote from the Bureau of Investigative Journalism in London: “Last month, we launched a new drones project: Naming the Dead. The aim of this project is to identify as many of the more than 2,500 victims of US drone strikes in Pakistan as possible. Given we currently do not know the identities of 80 percent of those killed, we believe this is a crucial and missing step to having a more transparent drones debate. … With all the attention being recently paid to American citizens killed by drones and with the drone debate growing, we thought it would be a good time to remind ourselves of the individual human stories of drone victims. Those we know about and those we don’t.”

    Barack Obama and John Brennan direct the drone strikes that are killing thousands of civilians. It doesn’t make us safer. It makes whole populations, from Yemen to Pakistan, hate us. Sen. Paul’s outrage with the president’s claimed right to kill U.S. citizens is entirely appropriate. That there is not more outrage at the thousands killed around the globe is shameful … and dangerous.


    Denis Moynihan contributed research to this column.

    Amy Goodman is the host of “Democracy Now!,” a daily international TV/radio news hour airing on more than 1,000 stations in North America. She is the co-author of “The Silenced Majority,” a New York Times best-seller.

    © 2013 Amy Goodman

    Distributed by King Features Syndicate

    Get truth delivered to
    your inbox every week.

    Previous item: Ambitious Russia Trails U.S. in Arms Sales

    Next item: Budget Wars: A Case For Hope



    New and Improved Comments

    If you have trouble leaving a comment, review this help page. Still having problems? Let us know. If you find yourself moderated, take a moment to review our comment policy.

    Please enable JavaScript to view the comments powered by Disqus.

    Holder on Too Big to Jail, Nation’s Strictest Abortion Ban Enacted, and More

    0

    Holder on Too Big to Jail, Nation’s Strictest Abortion Ban Enacted, and More

    Email this item Email   Print this item Print   Share this item... Share
    Posted on Mar 6, 2013

    Keeping the Lights On: The House on Wednesday voted to avoid a government shutdown, passing a temporary budget measure that would extend spending cuts that were enacted March 1 and keep the government funded through Sept. 30, the end of the fiscal year. The measure, passed by a 267-151 vote, would shift billions in order to ease the across-the-board spending cuts on the military. It now heads to the Senate, where a bipartisan coalition will attempt to expand the package to give the same kind of relief to other departments affected by the sequester. Without an agreement, the government will shut down March 27. (Read more)

    Guess Who’s Coming to Dinner? In an effort to close the increasingly widening political divide, President Obama has invited a group of prominent Republican senators to dine with him Wednesday night. Among the expected guests: Sens. John McCain of Arizona, Tom Coburn of Oklahoma and Kelly Ayotte of New Hampshire. Another Republican senator, Lindsey Graham of South Carolina, compiled the guest list on the president’s behalf. In another attempt to reach across the aisle, Obama also requested to hold separate meetings with all House and Senate Republicans on Capitol Hill next week. (Read more)

    The Big Picture: Comments made by Attorney General Eric Holder on Wednesday may shed more light on why the government doesn’t prosecute the big banks that many believe are responsible for the country’s financial crisis. Testifying in front of the Senate Judiciary Committee on Wednesday, Holder said, “I am concerned that the size of some of these institutions becomes so large that it does become difficult for us to prosecute them when we are hit with indications that if you do prosecute, if you do bring a criminal charge, it will have a negative impact on the national economy, perhaps even the world economy. And I think that is a function of the fact that some of these institutions have become too large.” In other words, the Justice Department has become afraid to prosecute big banks now because it fears the repercussions that legal action could have on the national economy. It’s a shame Massachusetts Sen. Elizabeth Warren doesn’t sit on the Judiciary Committee. (Read more)

    Extreme Measures: The Arkansas state legislature overrode a veto by Democratic Gov. Mike Beebe to enact what is now the strictest abortion law in the U.S. The legislation bans the legal–emphasis on legal–procedure after the 12th week of pregnancy. The legislation, which Beebe claimed “blatantly contradicts the United States Constitution,” will most likely face a legal challenge in court. In vetoing the 12-week–and, previously, a 20-week version–of the prohibition, Beebe said he wanted to avoid legal battles and their cost. (Read more)

    On the (Cushy) Job: Mitt Romney, who once joked during his failed presidential bid that he was unemployed, has a job once more. Or at least he’ll have a part-time one. According to NBC News, Romney has taken the position of chairman of the executive committee at Solamere Capital, his eldest son Tagg’s investment firm. As part of the gig, Romney will be toiling only one week a month. Nice work if you can get it. (Read more)

    Video of the Day: More than two years after a gunshot wound to the head nearly ended her life, Gabrielle Giffords returned to the Tucson, Ariz., supermarket where the shooting happened to speak out in support of background checks on gun purchases. The ex-congresswoman, appearing alongside her husband Mark Kelly, spoke briefly, telling the crowd to “Be bold. Be courageous.” Giffords’ plea comes one day before the Senate Judiciary Committee is expected to take up a bill that would increase penalties for anyone who buys a gun illegally for someone else.

    –Posted by Tracy Bloom.

    More Below the Ad

    Get truth delivered to
    your inbox every week.

    Previous item: Petraeus, Rumsfeld Linked to Iraqi Torture Centers



    New and Improved Comments

    If you have trouble leaving a comment, review this help page. Still having problems? Let us know. If you find yourself moderated, take a moment to review our comment policy.

    Please enable JavaScript to view the comments powered by Disqus.

    Sen. Rand Paul Filibusters John Brennan’s CIA Nomination

    0

    Sen. Rand Paul Filibusters John Brennan’s CIA Nomination

    Email this item Email   Print this item Print   Share this item... Share
    Posted on Mar 6, 2013
    Screenshot

    Telling his colleagues he would “speak until I can no longer speak,” Sen. Rand Paul, R-Ky., took to the Senate floor Wednesday to mount an old-school filibuster of John Brennan, President Obama’s pick to head the Central Intelligence Agency.

    “I rise today to begin to filibuster John Brennan’s nomination for the CIA,” Paul began shortly before noon ET. “I will speak as long as it takes, until the alarm is sounded from coast to coast that our Constitution is important, that your rights to trial by jury are precious, that no American should be killed by a drone on American soil without first being charged with a crime, without first being found to be guilty by a court.”

    Five hours later, he was still going strong. Several other senators joined in Paul’s filibuster, including Democrat Ron Wyden of Oregon and Republicans Ted Cruz of Texas, Marco Rubio of Florida and Mike Lee of Utah.

    The New York Times:

    Mr. Paul, who opposes the nomination of John O. Brennan to lead the Central Intelligence Agency, had previously said he would filibuster President Obama’s nominee after receiving a letter this month from Attorney General Eric H. Holder Jr. that refused to rule out the use of drone strikes within the United States in “extraordinary circumstances” like the Sept. 11 terrorist attacks.

    And on Wednesday, Mr. Paul did exactly as promised, taking to the Senate floor to filibuster Mr. Brennan’s nomination.

    …Mr. Paul is the first senator to use an actual filibuster after the Senate reached a deal earlier this year to take some basic steps to limit the filibuster.

    Read more

    Here are some highlights:

    You can watch live here.

    –Posted by Tracy Bloom.

    Get truth delivered to
    your inbox every week.

    Previous item: Who Was Hugo Chavez?



    New and Improved Comments

    If you have trouble leaving a comment, review this help page. Still having problems? Let us know. If you find yourself moderated, take a moment to review our comment policy.

    Please enable JavaScript to view the comments powered by Disqus.

    20 UN peacekeepers taken hostage by Syrian rebels in Golan Heights

    0

    Published time: March 06, 2013 21:13

    An image grab taken from a video uploaded on YouTube on March 6, 2013 by user@syriahro

    Download video(109.51 MB)

    Syrian rebels have seized twenty UN peacekeepers in the Golan Heights on the border between Syria and Israel. The United Nations Security Council demands the convoy’s immediate release.

    A young fighter saying he was from the “Martyrs of Yarmouk” said the peacekeepers would not be set free until Syrian government forces withdrew from the village of Jamlah, a mile east of the ceasefire link with the Israeli-occupied Golan, Reuters reports.

    “If no withdrawal is made within 24 hours we will treat them as prisoners,” he said, claiming the UN forces had collaborated with Syrian government troops to drive the fighters out of the village.

    After a video appeared on YouTube showing several armed-rebel fighters standing in front of two white armored vehicles bearing the UN inscription with at least five peacekeepers inside, the UN confirmed the incident.

    UN deputy spokesman Eduardo del Buey told reporters that “approximately 30 armed fighters stopped and detained about 20 peacekeepers within the area of limitation.”

    “The UN observers were on a regular supply mission and were stopped near Observation Post 58, which had sustained damage and was evacuated this past weekend following heavy combat in close proximity, at Al Jamlah,” the United Nations said in a statement issued in New York.

    The UN Security Council demanded the peacekeepers immediate release. Russia’s UN envoy Vitaly Churkin said the seizure of the UN observers showed “gross disrespect for the United Nations.”

    “Right now there are negotiations between UN representatives and the captors and we hope that the [UN] personnel will be released immediately as the UNSC demands,” Churkin said.

    Mentioning an attack on Monday which killed 48 Syrian servicemen and nine Iraqi law enforcers, Churkin said the Golan incident showed “some people are trying very hard in order to extend the geography of the Syrian conflict.”

    Human Rights watch said it was investigating the same rebel brigade for its role in a videotaped execution of detained Syrian soldiers posted on the Internet on Tuesday.

    The capture of the UN observers points to how the situation on the ground in Syria is getting out of control and all sides are unable to control armed groups on the ground, Karl Sharpo, a Middle East blogger, told RT. He further warned that that there is no way of knowing whose hands outside aid will end up.

    “The lines on the ground are very fluid, distinctions don’t really apply and you can’t make sure the weapons end up in the intended sites. Again if you look at the fact at what this incident illustrates is the lack of control that any military authority on the ground for the opposition or an outside political authority, doesn’t exercise the control it says it does,”
    Sharpo said.

    An image grab taken from a video uploaded on YouTube on March 6, 2013 by user@syriahro

    The incident follows a statement on Wednesday by the Arab League offering military support to the Syrian rebels. Previously the League had only offered to support the Syrian opposition via humanitarian and diplomatic assistance.

    Arab League Secretary-General Nabil Elarby told a press conference the Syrian Opposition Coalition had been formally invited to send a representative to attend a league meeting to be held in Doha in April.

    The UK Foreign Secretary William Hague also announced on Wednesday that Britain will increase non-lethal aid to anti-government forces in Syria. The $19.5 million dollar package will include armored vehicles, body armor, search and rescue, disease prevention and communication equipment.

    An image grab taken from a video uploaded on YouTube on March 6, 2013 by user@syriahro

    The Russian Foreign Ministry announced last week that any decision to send aid to rebel fighters would intensify the two year Syrian civil war by encouraging “extremists to seize power by force.”

    Shortly after Israel warned the UN Security Council it could not be expected to “stand idle” as the Syrian civil war expands beyond its borders, while Churkin said that armed groups operating out of the Golan were undermining regional security.

    “It’s of course something very dangerous they are doing by staging armed activity from that area. It’s something which can undermine security between Syria and Israel. So whoever is supporting that kind of activity or approving it tacitly is playing a very dangerous game,” Churkin warned back on Monday.

    An image grab taken from a video uploaded on YouTube on March 6, 2013 by user@syriahro

    Israel captured the Golan Heights from Syria during the 1967 war. The country agreed to return the land to Syria in return for a peace agreement that was rejected by the Arab world.

    During the 1973 Yom Kippur War, Syrian forces crossed the ceasefire line into the Golan Heights in an attempt to retake the territory. Syria’s troops were repelled by Israeli forces.

    Israel annexed the Golan in 1981, though they returned about 5 percent of the territory to Syria. The land was merged into a demilitarized zone that is currently patrolled by UN peacekeeping forces.

    Judge Acquits Occupy Activists

    0

    RINF Alternative News

    occupy

    A  Philadelphia judge has acquitted 12 Occupy protesters who were arrested in 2011 for bank sit-in.

    Calling them the “most affable group of defendants I’ve ever come across,” and shaking their hands, Judge Nina N. Wright Padilla showed her support for the group, telling them “I hope you continue your work in a law-abiding way.”

    The 12 activists were initially found guilty of  “defiant trespass” by Municipal Court President Judge Marsha H. Neifield and fined each $500 plus court costs. However under Philadelphia law, those found guilty in Municipal Court have the right to a new trial in Common Pleas Court.

    On Nov. 18, 2011, the group held a sit-in inside a Wells Fargo Bank branch, in an effort to call attention to Wells Fargo’s “racist predatory lending” policies that caused a large number of home foreclosures in African American neighborhoods.

    Wells Fargo is the largest mortgage lender in the US, and last July the activists where vindicated when the company agreed to pay $175 million to settle allegations made by the U.S. Justice Department that independent brokers originating its loans charged higher fees and rates to minority borrowers than they did to white borrowers with similar credit risks.

    Chavismo Lives!

    0

    Stephen Lendman
    RINF Alternative News

    SEGUIDORES DE CHÁVEZ SE CONCENTRAN EN EL CENTRO DE CARACAS

    Venezuelans mourn. Chavismo lives! Bolivarianism is institutionalized.

    Venezuelans expect no less. They want no part of their ugly past. They’ll put their bodies on the line to prevent it. They did before. They’ll do it again.

    Bolivarianism is policy. It’s vital to preserve. It’s polar opposite neoliberal harshness. America and Venezuela are constitutional worlds apart. More on that below.

    On March 5, word came at 4:45PM. Vice President Nicolas Maduro announced it. “We have just received the most tragic and awful information,” he said. Hugo Chavez Frias died. “It’s a moment of deep pain.”

    “Those who die for life can’t be called dead,” he said.

    Supporters massed in Plaza Bolivar. It’s Caracas’ main square. “Chavez vive, la lucha sigue,” they chanted. “Chavez lives, the battle continues.”

    “The people united will never be defeated.” Oligarchs “will never return” to the Miraflores Palace.

    Jimmy Carter praised Chavez. Hell “be remembered for his bold assertion of autonomy and independence for Latin American governments and for his formidable communication skills and personal connection with supporters in his country and abroad to whom he gave hope and empowerment,” he said.

    James Petras said he “was loved not only by Venezuelans but throughout Latin America” and elsewhere. He was special. He’ll be sorely missed.

    In his last letter to Maduro, Fidel Castro said “Chavez’s name is known and respected throughout the world.” He called him the “Olympic champion of new socialist ideas.”

    Chavez called Castro his father, mentor and friend. He’s “always been a Quixote,” he said, “but a victorious and invincible Quixote.”

    Both men bonded years ago. They met in Havana. They did so in 1994. Chavez sought Castro’s advice.

    Cuba’s leader recognized a potentially important new figure. They exchanged ideas for hours. The rest is history.

    Fidel lives at 86. Chavez passed at 58. His 14-year presidency ended. In 30 days, new elections will be held. New leadership will be chosen.

    Odds strongly favor Maduro. Chavez named him his preferred successor. Expect Venezuelans to oblige overwhelmingly. They want no part of opposition oligarch rule.

    On March 5, Granma International headlined “Death of President Hugo Chavez,” saying:

    He “died in the hours of this Tuesday afternoon.” Maduro announced it. He called on Venezuelans “to confront the lamentable death of the President of the Republic ‘with much strength, courage and integrity.’ ”

    “We have to be more united than ever, the greatest discipline, the greatest collaboration, the greatest brotherhood and sisterhood,” he added.

    “We are going to grow. We are going to be the worthy sons and daughters of the giant of a man that he was and how Comandante Hugo Chavez will always be in our memory.”

    “The victory of today is the unity of the people and peace.”

    “Respect and peace have to go hand in hand in the immense pain of this historic tragedy which has today touched our country.”

    Maduro urged fortitude and prayer. “From this moment on,” he said, “it is forbidden to weep.”

    “With Ali’s song and the spirit of Hugo Chavez, let us raise the greatest forces of this homeland to confront the difficulties it befalls us to confront.”

    “Our people can be assured that they have a government of men and women committed to protect them.”

    “Honor and glory to Hugo Chavez. May he live forever.”

    He had four cancer operations in 18 months. Death came 21 months after his first tumor was discovered. A state funeral is planned. It’ll be held Friday. Venezuelans began seven days of mourning.

    Venezuela Solidarity Campaign Secretary Francisco Dominguez said:

    Chavez “led the progressive transformation of Venezuela by lifting millions of its citizens from poverty – standing against social exclusion, marginalization and institutional repression – thereby restoring to them a long-overdue dignity.”

    He improved “the (lives) of ordinary Venezuelans as no other government had ever done in the history of that South American nation.”

    He “played a leading role in the transformation of Latin America into a progressive continent, which in the 21st century is collectively affirming the sovereignty of the nation states that make it up, and where, in different ways and through nationally-specific routes, they have been attempting to build a better world.”

    He’ll “continue to symbolize, for decades to come, the aspirations of dignity, sovereignty, justice and a better life as fully empowered citizens, for people all around the world.”

    “He showed that a better world could be constructed.”

    “Our hearts go to his family, friends, comrades, the people of Venezuela, and the people of Latin America.”

    Hands Off Venezuela headlined “Hugo Chavez has died – long live the Venezuelan revolution.”

    HOF defended it for a decade. Chavez said the best way to do it is “to spread it to our own countries.” Committed people are obligated to do so. Change comes no other way.

    Earlier on March 5, government and military officials met. They took preventative steps. They instituted measures against potential destabilization and sabotage.

    They expelled Washington’s attache and his aide. They were up to no good. They contacted Venezuelan military personnel surreptitiously.

    They did so “with the aim of organizing a conspiracy against the democratically elected government.”

    Washington conspired for years to oust Chavez. He believed America wanted him dead.

    He once said “If they kill me, there will be a really guilty party on this planet whose name is the president of the United States.”

    He had Bush in mind. He knew Obama’s no different.

    “I will not hide,” he said. “I’m going in the streets with you. I entrust myself to God, but I know that I have been condemned to die.”

    Castro also named America earlier. “If Chavez is assassinated,” he said, “the blame will fall on Bush. I say that as someone who has survived hundreds of the empire’s (venal) plans.”

    Obama exceeds the worst of Bush. Perhaps he marked Chavez for death. It wouldn’t surprise.

    He’s a war criminal multiple times over. He’s guilty of high crimes. He’s waging war on humanity. He’s beholden to monied interests. They own him.

    In 2011, Chavez suggested Washington’s responsibility for a “very strange” bout of cancer. It affected Latin American leaders.

    Argentina’s Cristina Fernandez de Kirchner’s thyroid cancer was confirmed.

    Former Brazilian President Lula Da Silva had throat cancer. Current President Dilma Rousseff battled axillar lymphoma.

    Others affected included Colombia’s Juan Manuel Santos (prostate cancer), and Paraguay’s Fernando Lugo (lymphatic cancer).

    Last June, Washington’s dirty hands ousted him. A parliamentary coup replaced him. America targets all independent leaders.

    Since taking office, Chavez knew what he faced. He survived an aborted April 2002 two-day coup, a 2002-03 general strike and oil management lockout, and failed August 2004 recall election.

    Cancer accomplished what other strategies failed. Chavez said earlier:

    “Would it be so strange that they’ve invented the technology to spread cancer and we won’t know about it for 50 years?”

    “Fidel always told me (to) take care. These people have developed technologies,” he said.

    “Take care what you eat, what they give you to eat. They inject you with I don’t know what.”

    On state television, Maduro said a “scientific commission” would examine Chavez’s death. “(H)istorical enemies” wanted him removed.

    He left no doubt who he meant. Washington’s long arm targeted him. It did so from inception. Its rap sheet includes numerous assassinations and coups.

    Perhaps Chavez is America’s latest victim. It’s the oil, stupid. Venezuela has the world’s largest reserves. Washington wants total control.

    CIA assassins never rest. They have other targets in mind.

    Before they’re old enough to understand, US children are taught to “pledge allegiance to the flag of the United States of America and to the Republic for which it stands.”

    They’re weaned on misinformation. What they most need to know, they’re not taught. America’s ugly history is sanitized. Its worst parts are omitted.

    It’s a government largely of men, not laws. They lie, cheat, connive, and abuse rule of law principles.

    They do so ruthlessly. They do it for monied interests they serve. They profit hugely in the process.

    America was never a democracy. It’s not one now. “We the people” include wealth and powerful interests alone. It’s been that way from inception. Believing otherwise is fantasy.

    America’s founders today would be called a Wall Street crowd. They included bankers, lawyers, politicians, merchants, property owners, and likeminded self-servers.

    They crafted what best suited them. Ordinary people were out of sight and mind. Things today are far worse than ever.

    Rogue state government rules. Populism’s a dead letter. Wealth, power, privilege and dominance alone matter.

    Tyranny’s a hair’s breath away. Rule of law protections are null and void. Neoliberal harshness is policy.

    Venezuela is polar opposite. Bolivarianism is policy. Chavez institutionalized it. He deserves full credit. He went where few leaders ever dared.

    He risked his life doing so. He lasted 14 years. He died for what he believed. He instituted benefits Venezuelans won’t surrender.

    He let them choose. He did it by national referenda. They agreed to constitutional change. They did so overwhelmingly. Their lives improved enormously.

    They got participatory social democracy. They have final say. They have free, fair and open elections. Jimmy Carter calls them the world’s best.

    America’s are farcical by comparison. Duopoly power controls things. People have no say.

    All Venezuelans are guaranteed suffrage at birth. It’s constitutionally mandated. They’re automatically registered free of charge.

    They have government of, by and for everyone. They’re beholden to rule of law principles. Police state laws are verboten. Democratic ones rule. No one’s above the law. Democracies operate that way.

    Venezuelans get benefits Americans can’t imagine. Venezuela’s oil wealth provides them.

    They include education to the highest levels, quality healthcare, subsidized food and housing, land reform, respect for indigenous rights, job training, micro credit, affordable electricity and cooking gas, gasoline at 5 cents a liter, and other social, economic, and political benefits.

    Americans get neoliberal harshness, force-fed austerity, growing poverty, high unemployment, unaddressed homelessness and hunger, and a government beholden solely to wealth and powerful interests.

    Chavez institutionalized change. Major ones take time. He planned so much more. Maduro’s entrusted to continue what he began.

    America’s unfit to live in. Wealth, privilege and power are prioritized. Police state laws govern. Bipartisan complicity plans much worse ahead. Venezuelans are governed by officials who care.

    It makes a difference. Maduro’s entrusted to continue Chavez’s mandate. Hopefully he’s up to the challenge. His background suggests so. He’s a former union leader, legislator, National Assembly Speaker and Foreign Minister.

    He’s now interim President. He’s charged with preserving Chavez’s legacy. Hopefully he’ll improve it. Venezuelans expect no less. In the fullness of time we’ll know.

    Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago. He can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

    His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

    http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

    Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com.